: ‘ Hey Mie ee ; i F ae ve, ae : rk: s 289 ei gptuey nee raaytgigy oa Fat bing, ) rar arars | " “uj | : Ch gyn eo ne OH bom bie peice | Yaeipth Mp gd VER eles i Hie Saw by eras my Yateley | begs: es Wg e404» Fs Je piehinias Bivona “ rege sot S, A ty il. i hy wl I Au a : ‘~ Re Paar li “i “ey _ ‘di MN a Inc, git Ms aS Ae i Cs “y } i A ‘3 : ty, i ON, ff ie TS ED see) A Be, vee va Sh, abs | & Shiny os » lil fl mie 2 “ey Ws he Uy AEF; itis nae o vawal ire, Geo ae roe GE ~~ y Ne — =, Ayn itl . <) % Sees Crea eA ask eas SAL OEE. aca eri a a eae ae san MMos Ba, = re: “7 is os e eo feat aol ; = = = sutton is EN cl OME se ss a Fb , CERN , “< Ss EH ms ANNALS a “NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOLUME XVII 1906-1907 Editor: CHARLES LANE POOR New York Published by the Academy 20354% Pasi OF CONTENTS OF VOL, XVII. Organization and Original Charter Amended Charter _ Constitution and By-Laws List of Members . Harper, Roland M. , A Phytogeographical Sketch of the Altamaha Grit Region of the Coastal Plain of Georgia, Osburn, Raymond C. The Origin of Vertebrate Limbs Gregory, William K. The Orders of Teleostomous Fishes Kemp, J. F., and Ross, J. G. A Peridotite Dike in the Coal Measures of Southwestern Pennsylvania . Ogilvie, I. H. A Contribution to the Geology of Southern Maine : Bumpus, HermonC. Record of Meetings, 1905 Special ee tO Bare Aaticle No. 1: Corrections to Part I, Article No. 1. Special Index to Part II, Article No. 3. General Index to Volume PAGE I-v v-Vill Vili-xVl1 X1X-XXXV1 1-414 415-436 437-508 509-518 519-562 563-658 659-679 680 681-683 685-697 [Annats N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vou. XVII. Paczs i-XXXvi.] THE ORGANIZATION OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. THE ORIGINAL CHARTER. AN ACT TO INCORPORATE THE LYCEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY IN THE CITY OF NEW YORK. Passed April 20, 1818. WHEREAS, The members of the Lyceum of Natural History have petitioned for an act of incorporation, and the Legislature, impressed with the importance of the study of Natural History, as connected with the wants, the comforts, and the happiness of mankind, and conceiving it their duty to encourage all laudable attempts to promote the progress of science in this State—there- fore, 1. Be it enacted by the People of the State of New York repre- sented in Senate and Assembly, That Samuel L. Mitchill, Casper W. Eddy, Frederick C. Schaeffer, Nathaniel .Paulding, William Cooper, Benjamin P. Kissam, John Torrey, William Cumber- land, D’Jurco V. Knevels, James Clements, and James Pierce, and such other persons as now are, and may from time to time become members, shall be, and hereby are constituted a body ~ corporate and politic, by the name of Lyczum or NATURAL HisTorRY IN THE City or New York, and that by that name they shall have perpetual succession, and shall be persons capable of suing and being sued, pleading and being impleaded, answering and being answered unto, defending and being de- fended, in all courts and places whatsoever; and may have a common seal, with power to alter the same from time to time; and shall be capable of purchasing, taking, holding, and enjoy- ing to them and their successors, any real estate in fee simple i i NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES or_otherwise, and any goods, chattels, and personal estate, and of selling, leasing, or otherwise disposing of said real or personal estate, or any part thereof, at their will and pleasure: Provided always, that the clear annual value or income of such real or personal estate shall not exceed the sum of five thousand dol- lars: Provided, however, that the funds of the said Corporation shall be used and appropriated to the promotion of the objects stated in the preamble to this act, and those only. — 2. And be it further enacted, That the said Society shall from time to time, forever hereafter, have power to make, constitute, ordain, and establish such by-laws and regulations as they shall judge proper, for the election of their officers; for prescribing their respective functions, and the mode of discharging the same; for the admission of new members; for the government of the officers and members thereof; for collecting annual contribu- tions from the members towards the funds thereof; for regulat- ing the times and places of meeting of the said Society; for suspending or expelling such members as shall neglect or refuse to comply with the by-laws or regulations, and for the manag- ing or directing the affairs and concerns of the said Society: Provided such by-laws and regulations be not repugnant to the Constitution and laws of this State or of the United States. 3. And be tt further enacted, That the officers of the said So- ciety shall consist of a President and two Vice-Presidents, a Corresponding Secretary, a Recording Secretary, a Treasurer, and five Curators, and such other officers as the Society may judge necessary; who shall be annually chosen, and who shall continue in office for one year, or until others be elected in their stead; that if the annual election shall not be held at any of the days for that purpose appointed, it shall be lawful to make such election at any other day; and that five members of the said Society, assembling at the place and time designated for that purpose by any by-law or regulation of the Society, shall constitute a legal meeting thereof. 4. And be it further enacted, That Samuel L. Mitchill shall be the President; Casper W. Eddy the First Vice-President; Frederick C. Schaeffer the Second Vice-President; Nathaniel Paulding, Corresponding Secretary; William Cooper. Record- CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS : iii ing Secretary; Benjamin P. Kissam, Treasurer, and John Torrey, William Cumberland, D’Jurco V. Knevels, James Clements, and James Pierce, Curators; severally to be the first officers of the said Corporation, who shall hold their respective offices until the twenty-third day of February next, and until others shall be chosen in their places. 5. And be it further enacted, That the present Constitution of the said Association shall, after passing of this Act, continue to be the Constitution thereof; and that no alteration shall be made therein, unless by a vote to that effect of three-fourths of the resident members, and upon the request in writing of one- third of such resident members, and submitted at least one month before any vote shall be taken thereupon. State of New York, Secretary’s Office. I ceRTIFY the preceding to be a true copy of an original Act of the Legislature of this State, on file in this Office. ARCH’D CAMPBELL, Dep. Sec’y. ALBANY, April 29, 1818. ORDER OF COURT. ORDER OF THE SUPREME COURT OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK TO CHANGE THE NAME OF ib yYCEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY IN THE, CITY OF NEW YORK “£O THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. WHEREAS, in pursuance of the vote and proceedings of this Corporation to change the corporate name thereof from ‘The | _ Lyceum of Natural History in the City of New York” to “The New York Academy of Sciences,’’ which vote and proceedings appear of record, an application has been made in behalf of said iv NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Corporation to the Supreme Court of the State of New York to legalize and authorize such change, according to the statute in such case provided, by Chittenden & Hubbard, acting as the attorneys of the Corporation, and the said Supreme Court, on the 5th day of January, 1876, made the following order upon such application in the premises, viz: At a special term of the Supreme Court of the State of New York, held at the Chambers thereof, in the County Court House, in the City of New York, the 5th day of January, 1876: Present—Hon. Geo. C. Barrett, Justice. In the matter of the applica- tion of the Lyceum of Nat- ural History in the City of New York to authorize it to assume the corporate name of the New York Academy of Sciences. On reading and filing the petition of the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of New York, duly verified by John S. New- berry, the President and chief officer of said Corporation to authorize it to assume the corporate name of The New York Academy of Sciences, duly setting forth the grounds of said application, and on reading and filing the affidavit of Geo. W. Quackenbush, showing that notice of such application had been duly published for six weeks in the State paper, to wit, The Al- bany Evening Journal, and the affidavit of David S. Owen, show- ‘ing that notice of such application had also been duly published in the proper newspaper of the County of New York, in which county said Corporation had its business office, to wit, in The Daily Register, by which it appears to my satisfaction that such notice has been so published, and on reading and filing the affidavits of Robert H. Browne and J. S. Newberry, thereunto annexed, by which it appears to my satisfaction that the appli- cation is made in pursuance of a resolution of the managers of CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS : Vv said Corporation to that end named, and there appearing to me to be no reasonable objection to said Corporation so changing its name as prayed in said petition: Now on motion of Gros- venor S. Hubbard, of Counsel for Petitioner, it is Ordered, That the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of ‘New York be and is hereby authorized to assume the corporate name of The New York Academy of Sciences. Indorsed: Filed January 5, 1876, A copy. Wm. Watsu, Clerk. Resolution of THE AcADEMY, accepting the order of the Court, passed February 21, 1876. And whereas, The order hath been published as therein re- quired, and all the proceedings necessary to carry out the same have been had, Therefore: Resolved, That the foregoing order be and the same is hereby accepted and adopted by this Corporation, and that in con- formity therewith the corporate name thereof, from and after the adoption of the vote and resolution hereinabove referred to, be and the same is hereby declared to be THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. THE AMENDED CHARTER. MARCH 19, 1902. CHAPTER 181 OF THE LAWS OF 1902. An Act to amend chapter one hundred and ninety-seven of the laws of eighteen hundred and eighteen, entitled “An act to incorporate the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of New York,’ a Corporation now known as The New York Academy of Sciences and to extend the powers of said Corporation. (Became a law March 19, 1902, with the approval of the Governor. Passed, three-fifths being present.) . The People of the State of New York, represented in Senate and -Assembly, do enact as follows: vi NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Section I. The Corporation incorporated by chapter one hundred and ninety-seven of the laws of eighteen hundred and eighteen, entitled ‘‘An act to incorporate the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of New York,’ and formerly known by that name, but now known as The New York Academy of Sciences through change of name pursuant to order made by the supreme court at the city and county of New York, on January fifth, eighteen hundred and seventy-six, is hereby authorized and empowered to raise money for, and to erect and maintain, a building in the city of New York for its use, and in which also at its option other scientific societies may be admitted and have their headquarters upon such terms as said Corporation may make with them, portions of which building may be also rented out by said Corporation for any lawful uses for the pur- pose of obtaining income for the maintenance of such building and for the promotion of the objects_of the Corporation; to establish, own, equip, and administer a public library, and a museum having especial reference to scientific subjects; to pub- lish communications, transactions, scientific works, and peri- odicals; to give scientific instruction by lectures or otherwise; to encourage the advancement of scientific research and dis- covery, by gifts of money, prizes, or other assistance thereto. The building, or rooms, of said Corporation in the city of New York used exclusively for library or scientific purposes shall be subject to the provisions and be entitled to the benefits of sub- division seven of section four of chapter nine hundred and eight of the laws of eighteen hundred and ninety-six, as amended. Section II. The said Corporation shall from time to time forever hereafter have power to make, constitute, ordain, and establish such by-laws and regulations as it shall judge proper for the election of its officers; for prescribing their respective functions, and the mode of discharging the same; for the ad- mission of new members; for the government of officers and members thereof; for collecting dues and contributions towards thé funds thereof; for regulating the times and places of meet- ing of said Corporation; for suspending or expelling such mem- bers as shall neglect or refuse to comply with the by-laws or regulations, and for managing or directing the affairs or con- CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS Dad cerns of the said Corporation: and may from time to time alter or modify its constitution, by-laws, rules, and regulations. SecTION III. The officers of the said Corporation shall con- sist of a president and two or more vice-presidents, a correspond- ing secretary, a recording secretary, a treasurer, and such other officers as the Corporation may judge necessary; who shall be chosen in the manner and for the terms prescribed by the con- stitution of the said Corporation. Section IV. The present constitution of the said Corpora- tion shall, after the passage of this act, continue to be the con- . stitution thereof until amended as herein provided. Such con- stitution as may be adopted by a vote of not less than three- quarters of such resident members and fellows of the said New . York Academy of Sciences as shall be present at a meeting thereof, called by the Recording Secretary for that purpose, within forty days after the passage of this act, by written notice duly mailed, postage prepaid, and addressed to each fellow and resident member at least ten days before such meeting, at his last known place of residence, with street and number when known, which meeting shall be held within three months after the passage of this act, shall be thereafter the constitution of the said New York Academy of Sciences, subject to alteration or amendment in the manner provided by such constitution. SECTION V. The said Corporation shall have power to con- solidate, to unite, to co-operate, or to ally itself with any other society or association in the city of New York organized for the promotion of the knowledge or the study of any science, or of research therein, and for this purpose to receive, hold, and ad- minister real and personal property for the uses of such con- solidation, union, co-operation, or alliance subject to such terms and regulations as may be agreed upon with such associations or societies. _ | SECTION VI. This act shall take effect immediately. STATE OF NEw YorK, OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF STATE. I have compared the preceding with the original law on file in this office, and do hereby certify that the same is a correct Vili NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES transcript therefrom, and the whole of said original law. Given under my hand and the seal of office of the Secretary of State, at the city of Albany, this eighth day of April, in the year one thousand nine hundred and two.. Joun T. McDonouves, Secretary of State. CONSTITUTION. ADOPTED, APRIL 24, 1902, AND AMENDED AT SUBSEQUENT TIMES. ArTICLE I. The name of this Corporation shall be The New York Academy of Sciences. Its objects shall be the advance- ment and diffusion of scientific knowledge, and the center of its activities shall be in the City of New York. Article II. The Academy shall consist of five classes of members, namely: Active Members, Fellows, Associate Mem- bers, Corresponding Members, and Honorary Members. Active Members shall be the members of the Corporation who live in or — near the City of New York, or who, having removed to a distance, desire to retain their connection with the Academy. Fellows shall be chosen from the Active Members in virtue of their scientific attainments. Corresponding and Honorary Members shall be chosen from among the men of science of the world who have attained distinction as investigators. The number of Corresponding Members shall not exceed two hundred, and the number of Honorary Members shall not exceed fifty. ArticLte III. None but Fellows and Active Members who have paid their dues up to and including the last fiscal year shall be entitled to vote or to hold office in the Academy. ArticLteE IV. The officers of the Academy shall be a Presi- dent, as many Vice-Presidents as there are sections of the - Academy, a Corresponding Secretary, a Recording Secretary, a Treasurer, a Librarian, an Editor, six elected Councilors, and one additional Councilor from each allied society or association. The annual election shall be held on the third Monday in De- cember, the officers then chosen to take office at the first meeting in January following. | CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS 1X There shall also be elected at the same time a Finance Com- mittee of three. ArTICcLE V. The officers named in Article IV shall consti- tute a Council, which shall be the executivie body of the Academy ‘with general control over its affairs, including the power to fill ad interim any vacancies that may occur in the offices. Past Presidents of the Academy shall be ex-officio members of the Council. | ARTICLE VI. Societies organized for the study of any branch of science may become allied with the New York Academy of Sciences by consent of the Council. Members of allied societies may become Active Members of the Academy by paying the Academy’s annual fee, but as members of an allied society they shall be Associate Members with the rights and privileges of other Associate Members, except the receipt of its publications. Each _ allied society shall have the right to delegate one of its members, who is also an Active Member of the Academy, to the Council of the Academy, and such delegate shall have all the rights and ‘privileges of other Councilors. | ArticLtE VII. The President and Vice-Presidents shall not be eligible to more than one re-election until three years after retiring from office; the Secretaries and Treasurer shall be eligi- ble to re-election without limitation. The President, Vice-pres- idents, and Secretaries shall be Fellows. The terms of office of elected. Councilors shall be three years, and these officers shall be so grouped that two, at least one of whom shall be a Fellow, shall be elected and two retired each year. Councilors shall not be eligible to re-election until after the expiration of one year. _ ArticLte VIII. The election of officers shall be by ballot, and the candidates having the greatest number of votes shall be declared duly elected. ArticLte IX. Ten members, the majority of whom shall be Fellows, shall form a quorum at any meeting of the Academy at which business is transacted. ARTICLE X. The Academy shall establish by-laws, and may amend them from time to time as therein provided. ARTICLE XJ. This constitution may be amended by a vote of not less than three-fourths of the fellows and three-fourths of xX NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES the active members present and voting at a regular business meeting of the Academy, provided that such amendment shall be publicly submitted in writing at the preceding business meeting, and provided also that the Recording Secretary shall send a notice of the proposed amendment at least ten days be- fore the meeting, at which a vote shall be taken, to each Fellow and Active Member entitled to vote. BY-LAWS. As ADOPTED, OCTOBER 6, 1902, AND AMENDED AT SUBSEQUENT TIMES. CHAPTER I. OFFICERS. 1. President. It shall be the duty of the President to pre- side at the business and special meetings of the Academy; he shall exercise the customary duties of a presiding officer. 2. Vice-Presidents. In the absence of the President, the senior Vice-President, in order of Fellowship, shall act as the presiding officer. ; 3. Corresponding Secretary. The Corresponding Secretary shall keep a corrected list of the Honorary and Corresponding Members, their titles and addresses, and shall conduct all corre- spondence with them. He shall make a report at the Annual Meeting. 4. Recording Secretary. The Recording Secretary shall keep the minutes of the Academy proceedings; he shall have charge of all documents belonging to the Academy, and of its corporate seal, which he shall affix and attest as directed by the Council; he shall keep a corrected list of the Active Members and Fellows, and shall send them announcements of the meet- ings of the Academy; he shall notify all Members and Fellows of their election, and committees of their appointment; he shall give notice to the Treasurer and to the Council of matters requiring their action, and shall bring before the Academy business presented by the Council. He shall make a report at the Annual Meeting. CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS eae 5. ILreasurer. The Treasurer shall have charge, under the direction of the Council, of all moneys belonging to the Academy, and of their investment. He shall receive all fees, dues, and contributions to the Academy, and any income that may accrue from property or investment; he shall report to the Council at its last meeting before the Annual Meeting the names of members in arrears; he shall keep the property of the Academy insured, and shall pay all debts against the Academy the dis- charge of which shall be ordered by the Council. He shall report to the Council from time to time the state of the finances, and at the Annual Meeting shall report to the Academy the receipts and expenditures for the entire year. 6. Librarian. The Librarian shall have charge of the library, under the general direction of the Library Committee of the Council, and shall conduct all correspondence respecting ex- changes of the Academy. He shall make a report on the con- dition of the library at the Annual Meeting. 7. Editor. The Editor shall have charge of the publications of the Academy, under the general direction of the Publication Committee of the Council. He shall make a report on the con- dition of the publications at the Annual Meeting. CHAPTER II. COUNGIE: 1. Meetings. The Council shall meet once a month, or at the call of the President. It shall have general charge of the affairs of the Academy. ‘ 2. Quorum. Five members of the Council shall constitute a quorum. 3. Officers. The President, Vice-Presidents, and Recording Secretary of the Academy shall hold the same offices in the Council. 4. Committees. The Standing Committees of the Council shall be: (1) an Executive Committee consisting of the President, Treasurer, and Recording Secretary; (2) a Committee on Pub- lications; (3) a Committee on the Library, and such other committees as from time to time shall be authorized by the Xil NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Council. The action of these committees shall be subject to revision by the Council. CHsrrer Ti FINANCE COMMITTEE. The Finance Committee of the Academy shall audit the Annual Report of the Treasurer, and shall report on financial questions whenever called upon to do so by the Council. CHapTerR IV. EOLA ONS: 1. Active Members. (a) Active Members shall be nominated in. writing to the Council by at least two Active Members or Fellows. If approved by the Council, they may be elected at the succeeding business meeting. (b) Any Active Member who, having removed to a distance from the city of New York, shall nevertheless express a desire to retain his connection with the Academy, may be placed by vote of the Council on a list of Non-resident Members. Such members shall relinquish the full privileges and obligations of Active Members. (Vide Chapters V and X.) 2. Associate Members. Workers in science may be elected to Associate Membership for a period of two years in the manner prescribed for Active Members. They shall not have the power to vote and shall not be eligible to election as Fellows, but may receive the publications. At any time subsequent to their election they may assume the full privileges of Active Members by paying the dues of such Members. 3. Fellows, Corresponding Members, and Honorary Members. Nominations for Fellows, Corresponding Members, and Honor- ary Members may be made in writing either to the Recording Secretary or to the Council at its meeting prior to the Annual Meeting. If approved by the Council, the nominees shall then be balloted for at the Annual Meeting. 4. Officers. Nominations for Officers, with the exception of Vice-Presidents, may be sent in writing to the Recording Sec- \ SN CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS Xiil retary, with the name of the proposer, at any time not less than thirty days before the Annual Meeting. Each section of the Academy shall nominate a candidate for Vice-Presi- dent, who, on election, shall be Chairman of the section; the names of such nominees shall be sent to the Recording. Secretary properly certified by the sectional secretaries, not less than thirty days before the Annual Meeting. The Council shall then prepare a list which shall be the regular ticket. This list shall be mailed to each Active Member and Fellow at least one week before the Annual Meeting. But any Active Member or Fellow entitled to vote shall be entitled to prepare and vote an- other ticket. CHAPTER JV. DCS: 1. Dues. The annual dues of Active Members and Fellows shall be $10, payable in advance at the time of the Annual Meeting; but new members elected after May 1 shall pay $5 . for the remainder of the fiscal year. The annual dues of elected Associate Members shall be $3, payable in advance at the time of the Annual Meeting. Non-resident Members shall be exempt from dues, so long as they shall relinquish the privileges of Active Membership. (Vide Chapter X.) 2. Members in Arrears. If any Active Member or Fellow whose dues remain unpaid for more than one year, shall neg- lect or refuse to pay the same within three months after notifi- cation by the Treasurer, his name may be erased from the rolls by vote of the Council. Upon payment of his arrears. how- ever, such persott may be restored to Active Membership or Fellowship by vote of the Cuoncil. 3. Renewal of Membership. Any Active Member or Fellow who shall resign because of removal to a distance from the City of New York, or any Non-resident Member, may be restored by vote of the Council to Active Membership or Fellowship at any time upon application. XiV NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES CHAPTER VI. PATRONS, DONORS, AND LIFE MEMBERS. 1. Patrons. Any person contributing at one time $1000 to the general funds of the Academy shall be a Patron, and, on election by the Council, shall enjoy all the privileges of Active Members. 2. Donors. Any person contributing $50 or more an- nually ‘to the general funds of the Academy shall be termed a Donor and on election by the Council shall enjoy all the priyv- ileges of Active Membership. 3. Life Members. Any Active Member or Fellow contribut- ing at one time $100 to the general funds of the Academy shall be a Life Member, and shall thereafter be exempt from annual dues. CHaPrTer VII. SEGIMONS: 1. Sections. Sections devoted to special branches of Science _may be established or discontinued by the Academy on the recommendation of the Council. The present sections of the Academy are the Section of Astronomy, Physics, and Chemistry, the Section of Biology, the Section of Geology and Mineralogy and the Section of Anthropology and Psychology. 2. Organization. Each section of the Academy shall have a Chairman and a Secretary, who shall have charge of the meet- ings of their Section. The regular election of these officers — shall take place at the October or November meeting of the section, the officers then chosen to take office at the first:meet- ing in January following. ee 3. Affiliation. Members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy, and members of the Scientific Alliance, or men of science introduced by members of the Academy. may attend the meetings and present papers under the general regulations of the Academy. oS 5 a. CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS XV CuHaptTer VIII. | MEETINGS. 1. Business Meetings. Business meetings of the Academy shall be held on the first Monday of each month from October to May inclusive. 2. Sectional Meetings. Sectional meetings shall be held on | Monday evenings from October to May inclusive, and at such other times as the Council may determine. The sectional meeting shall follow the business meeting when both occur on the same evening. 3. Annual Meeting. The Annual Meeting shall be held on the third Monday in December. 4.. Special Meetings. A special meeting may be called by the Council, provided one week’s notice be sent to each Active Member and Fellow, stating the object of such meeting. CHAPTER IX. ORDER OF BUSINESS. 1. Business Meetings. The following shall be the order of procedure at business meetings: 1. Minutes of the previous business meeting. 2. Report of the Council. 3. Reports of Committees. 4. Elections. 5. Other business. 2. Sectional Meetings. The following shall be the order of procedure at sectional meetings: 1. Minutes of the preceding meeting of the section. 2. Presentation and discussion of papers. 3- Other scientific business. 3. Annual Meetings. The following shall be the order of procedure at Annual Meetings: 1. Annual reports of the Corresponding Secretary, Record- ing Secretary, Treasurer, Librarian, and Editor. 2. Election of Honorary Members, Corresponding Mem- bers, and Fellows. Xvi NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 3. Election of officers for the ensuing year. 4. Annual address of the retiring President. CHAPTER X. PUBL CAGIONS: 1. Publications. The established publications of the Acad- emy shall be the Annals and the Memoirs. They shall be issued by the Editor under the supervision of the Committee on Publications. 2. Distribution. One copy of all publications shall be sent to each Patron, Life Member, Active Member, and Fellow, pro- vided, that upon enquiry by the Editor such Members or Fel- lows shall signify their desire to receive them. 3. Publication Fund. Contributions may be received for the publication fund, and the income thereof shall be applied toward defraying the expenses of the scientific publications of the Academy. _CHAPTER XI. GENERAL PROVISIONS. 1. Debts. No debts shall be incurred on behalf of the Acad- emy unless authorized by the Council. 2. Bills. All bills submitted to the Council must be certi- fied as to correctness by the officers incurring them. 3. Investments. All the permanent funds of the Academy shall be invested in United States or in New York State securi- ties or in first mortgages on real estate, provided they shall not “exceed sixty-five per cent. of the value of the property, or in first mortgage bonds of Corporations which have paid dividends continuously on their common stock for a period not less than five years. All income from patron’s fees, life membership fees, and donor’s fees shall be added to the permanent fund. 4. . Expulsion, etc. Any Member or Fellow may be censured, suspended, or expelled, for violation of the Constitution or By- Laws, or for any offence deemed sufficient, by a vote of three- fourths of the Members and three-fourths of the Fellows present ae CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS Xvil at any business meeting, provided such action shall have been recommended by the Council at a previous business meeting, and also, that one month’s notice of such recommendation and of the offence charged shall have been given the Member accused. 5. Changes in By-Laws. No alteration shall be made in these By-Laws unless it shall haye been submitted publicly in writing at a business meeting, shall have been entered on the Minutes with the names of the Members or Fellows proposing it, and shall be adopted by two-thirds of the Members and Fellows present and voting at a subsequent business meeting. MEMBERSHIP OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 1906, PATRONS. Britton, N. L., N. Y. Botanical Garden. Brown, Appison, 45 West 89th Street. Casey, Mazor Tuomas L., U. S. A., Washington, D. C. CuaPin, Cuester W., 34 West 57th Street. Fievp, C. pre Pryster, 21 East 26th Street. GovuLp, Epwin, Dobbs Ferry, N. Y. GouLp, Grorcr J., 195 Broadway. Goutp, Miss HELEN M., Irvington, N. Y. Herrman, Mrs. Estuer, 59 West 56th Street. JuLien, Auexis A., Columbia University. Levison, W. Gooxp, 1435 Pacific Street, Brooklyn. Mean, Watter H., 67 Wall Street. Senrr, Cuarxtes H., 300 Madison Avenue. Sitoan, Samvuet, 26 Exchange Place. HONORARY MEMBERS. 1887. Acassiz, AtExanpER. Director of the University Museum, Cambridge, Mass. 1898. Auwers, ArtHur. Astronomer and Secretary of the Royal Prussian Academy of Sciences, Berlin, Germany. ' 1889. Barrois, Cuaries, Ph.D. Professor of Geology in the University, Rue Pascal 41, Lille, France. 1901. Boys, CHartes Vernon, A.R.S.M., F.R.S., 66 Victoria Street S.W., London, England. 1904. Brocerr, W. C. Director of the Mineralogical In- stitute, Christiania, Norway. 1898. Brooxs, Witit1am K. Henry Walters Professor of Zodlogy, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. © 1887. Dauumncer, Rev. Wituiam Henry, D.D., D.Sc., D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S., Lee, London, S.E., England. XIX xX NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 1899. Darwin, Sir Gerorcke Howarp, M.A., K.C.B., F.R.S., Professor of Astronomy and Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, England. 1876. Dawxtys, W. Boyp. Professor of Geology and Paleontology, — Victoria ee Manchester, England. 1904. Der VRIES, Huco, PhDs. S¢. Ds LLD., Professor of Botany in the University ae Amsterdam, Amsterdam, Netherlands. 1902. Dewar, Sir James, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.E., Jack- sonian Professor of Experimental Philosophy in the University of Cambridge and Fullerean Professor of Chemistry in the Royal Institute of London, 1 Scroope Terrace, Cambridge, England. 1901. Fiscurer, Emit. Professor of Chemistry, Hessische- strasse 2, Berlin, Germany. 1876. GetxKiz, Str Arcuispatp, F.R.S., Former Director General of Geological Survey of Great Britain and Ire- land, Secretary of the Royal Society, 3 Sloane Court, London §.W., England. 1901. Gertxrme, James, LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., Murchison Professor of Geology and Mineralogy in the University of Edinburgh, Edinburgh, Scotland. 1889. Grisss, Woxucott, M.D., LL.D., Professor Emeritus of the Application of Science to the Useful Arts, Har- vard University. Address, Newport, R. I. 1898. Guit1t, Davin, K.C.B., LL.D., F.R.S. His Majesty’s Astronomer, Royal Observatory, Cape of Good Hope, Africa. 1889. GoopaLe, Georce Lincoitn, M.D., LL.D. Profes- sor of Natural History, Harvard Univerns Camb- ridge, Mass. 1894. Harcren,: Kenst, M.D., Ph.D. Sc.D2 .EEay: Professor of Zodlogy and Director of the Zodlogical In- stitute in the University of Jena, Jena, Germany. 1889. Hart, Asaru. Professor of Mathematics, U. S. Navy, (retired), Norfolk, Conn. 1899. Hann, Jutius, Ph.D. Professor of Cosmical Phy- sics in the University of Vienna, Vienna, Austria. 1898. Hitt, Grorce W., LL.D. West Nyack, N. Y. HONORARY MEMBERS XX1 1896. Husrecut, Amprosius, A. W. Professor of Zodl- ogy and Comparative Anatomy in the University of Utrecht, Utrecht, Netherlands. 1901. James, Witiiam, M.D., LL.D. Professor of Phil- osophy in Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. 1876. Ketvix, The Right Hon. Lord, D.C.L., F.R.S., O.M., G.C.V.O. ‘President of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. 15 Eaton Place, London, England. 1896. Kuer, Ferm, Ph.D. Professor of Mathematics in the University of Gottingen, Gottingen, Germany. 1898. Lanxester, E. Ray, LL.D., F.R.S. Director of | the British Museum of Natural History, Cromwell Road, S.W., London, England. 1880. Lockyrr, Sir Norman, K.C.B., LL.D., F.R.S. Director of the Solar Physics Observatory, South Kens- ington, England. 1900. Lerypic, Franz. Professor in the School of Medi- cme, Bonn, Germany (retired), Rothenburg, Tauber, Germany. 1898. Nansen, Frivtrzor, M.D. Professor of Zodlogy in the Royal Fredericks University, Christiania, Norway: 1891. Newcoms, Simon. Professor of Mathematics {re- tired), U. S. N., 1620 P Street, Washington, D. C. 1898. Prencx, Atsprecut, Ph.D. Director, Institut fiir Meereskunde, Georgenstrasse 34-36, Berlin N.W. 7, Germany. 1898. Prerrer, Wittiam. Professor of Botany in the University of Leipzig, Leipzig, Germany. 1900. Pickrrinc, Epwarp Cuaries, LL.D. Paine Pro- fessor of Practical Astonomony and Director of the Ob- servatory, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. 1900. Porncart, Jutes Henri, F.R.S. Professor of Celestial Mechanics, Faculty of Science, Paris, France. 1901. Ramsay, Wim, K.C.B., Ph.D., D.Sc., F.R.S. Professor of Chemistry, University College, London, England. 1899. Rayiricn, Lorp, O.M., LL.D., F.R.S. Terling Place, Witham, Essex, England. 1898 Revuscu, Hans H., Ph.D. Director of the Norweg- ian Geological Survey, Christiania, Norway. XXil NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 1887. Roscozr, Str Henry Enrietp, D.C.L., LL.D., F. R. S. 10 Bramham Gardens, London S. W., England. 1887. Rosrnsuscu, Kart Henry Frrprnanp. Professor of Mineralogy and Geology, University of Heidelberg, Heidelberg, Germany. 1904. Sronsy, G. Jounstone, M.A., D.Sc. 30 Ledbury Road, Notting Hill, London W., England. 1896. THomson, JosrpH Joun, Sc.D., LUL.D., F-.R.S. Professor of Experimental Physics, Cavendish Labora- tory, Cambridge University, Cambridge, Englanii. 1900. Tytor, Epwarp Burnett, LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S. Professor of Anthropology, University of Oxford, Balliol College, Oxford, England. 1904. Von pen STEINEN, Karu. Professor of Ethnology, University of Berlin, Director of the Royal Ethno- graphic Museum, Steglitz-Berlin, Germany. 1876. Von Lane, Vixtor. Professor of Physics in the University of Vienna, General Secretary of the Imperial Academy of Sciences, Vienna, Austria. 1904. Wuownot, Wittiam, Ph.D., M.D., Leipzig, Germany. 1878. Younc, Cuarites Aveustus, LL.D. Professor Emeritus of Astronomy in Princeton University, Prince- ton, N. J. 1904. ZirKet, Ferprnanp. Professor of Mineralogy and Geognosy in the University of Leipzig, Leipzig, Germany. CORRESPONDING MEMBERS 1883. AxssotTt,.CHartES Conrad, M.D. ‘Trenton, N. J. 1898. Apams, Franx D. Professor of Geology in McGill University, Montreal, Canada. 1891. AcurtEra, Jost G. Director of the Geological In- stitute of Mexico, 5a del Ciprés 2728, Mexico, D. F., Mex. 1890. AxexanperR, Wituiam DeWitt. Ass’t in U.S.C. & G. S., Honolulu, Hawaii. 1899. Awnprews, C. W., D.Sc. Ass’t in the Department of Geology, British Museum of Natural History, Crom- well Road, London 8.W., England. ; 1876. AppLteton, Joun Howarp, M.A., D.Sc. Professor of Chemistry, Brown University, 209 Angell Street, Providence, R. I. CORRESPONDING MEMBERS XX111 (1899. Baxser, J. G, F.R.S., F.L.S., M.R.LA. Retired Keeper of the Herbariums and the Library, Royal Bo- tanic Gardens, 3 Cumberland Road, Kew, England. 1898. Bazrour, Isaac Bactey. Professor of Botany in the University of Edinburgh, King’s Botanist in Scot- land, Regius Keeper of the Royal Botanic Garden, Edinburgh, Scotland. 1878. Bett, ALExanpER Grauam. 1331 Connecticut Ave., Washington, D. C. 1867. Berruoup, Enwarp L., M.A., C.E., Golden, Jef- ferson County, Col. 1897. Botton, Hersert, F.Z.S., F.R.S.E. Curator and Secretary, Bristol Museum, Bristol, England. 1899. Bouxuencer, G.A., F.R.S. Ass’t in Teele Brit- ish Museum of Natural History, London, England. 1874. Branveczex, T. §., San Diego, Calif. 1884. Branner, Joun C., Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of Geology and Vice-President of Leland Standford Jr. University, Stanford Uinversity, Calif. 1894. Brauner, Bonustay, Ph.D., D.Sc. Professor of Chemistry, Bohemian University, Prague, Bohemia. 1874. Brewster, Witiiam, A.M. 145 Brattle Street, Cambridge, Mass. . 1876. Brusu, Grorce Jarvis. Professor Emeritus of Mineralogy in Yale University, New Haven, Conn. 1876. CaLDWELL, Grorce CHapman. Professor Emeritus of Chemistry in Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y. 1898. CHameBerimn, T.C. Head of Department of Geol- ogy in the University of Chicago, Chicago, Ill. 1876. CHanpLER, W. H. Professor of Chemistry, Li- brarian of Lehigh University, South Bethlehem, Pa. 1876. Crarxr, Franz WiccieswortH, Chief Chemist U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. aSol. ‘Crurrc, Li. Professor at the Gymnasium, Ekaterin- burg, Russia. 1877. Comstock, THEODORE B., Se.D. Los Angeles, Cal. 1868. Cooxr, M. C., M.A. Rocnee Keeper of Crypto- gamic akbar Royal Botanical Garden, Kew, 53 Castle Road, Kentish Town, London, N. W., England. - 1876. Cornwatzt, H. B. Professor of Applied Chemistry and Mineralogy, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. XXIV NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 1880. Cory, CHartes B. Curator of Natural History, - Field Museum, Chicago, Ill. 160 Boylston Street, Boston, Mass. 1877. Crawrorp, JosepH, Ph.G., 2824 Frankford Ave., Philadelphia, Pa. 1866. Crepner, Hermann, Ph.D. Professor of Geology and Paleontology in the University of Leipzig; Direc- tor of the Geological Survey and of Seismological Ser- vice of the Kingdom of Saxony, Leipzig, Germany. 1895. CusHine, Henry P. Professor of Geology im Western Reserve University, Cleveland, O. 1879. Datz, T. Nezson. Geologist of the U. S. Geo- logical Survey, Pittsfield, Mass. | 1870. Dati, Wittiam Heatey, M.A., Se.D. Curator, Division of Mollusks in the U. 8S. Nat. Museum, Paleon- tologist to the U. 8. Geological Survey, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C. 1885. Dana, Epwarp Sanispury, Ph.D. Professor of Physics in Yale University, 24 Hillhouse Avenue, New Haven, Conn. 1898. Davis, Wirtimam M. Sturgis-Hooper Professor of Geology, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. 1894. Deranr, Ruruven. President of the Illinois Au- dubon Society, 504 No. State Street, Chicago, Ill. 1899. Deprret, Cuartes. Professor of Geology and Phy- — sical Geography in the University of Lyons, Lyons, France. 1890. Derrsy, Orvintz A., F.G.S. Rio Branco, San Paulo, Brazil. 1899. Dotto, Lovis, Ph.D. Conservateur au Musée Royal ‘d’Histoire Naturelle, Professor at the University, Brussels, Belgium. 1876. Exuiorr, Henry W. 17 Grace Avenue, Lakewood, Cuyahoga County, O. 1880. Exuiortr, Joun B. Professor of Theoretical and Practical Medicine in ‘Tulane University, New Orleans, La. 1869. EncetHarnpt, Francis E., Ph.D. Chemist to Syra- cuse Health Bureau, Suan ese: INS 1879. Farrcurtp, Herman LeRoy, B. S. Professor of Geology, University of Rochester, Rochester, N. Y. CORRESPONDING MEMBERS KXV 1879. Firrica, Frieprich Brrnuarp, Ph.D. Professor of Chemistry in the University of Marburg, Marburg, Germany. 1885. Furtcuer, Lazarus, M.A., F.R.S. Keeper of Min- erals in the British Museum, London, England. 1899. Fraas, Eperuarp, Ph.D. Trustee of Kgl. Natura- len-Kabinet, Stuttgart, Germany. 1879. Frirzcartner, Retnuotp, Ph.D. Teguicigalpa, Honduras. 1870. Gitpert, G. K. Geologist to the U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. 1858. Gitt, THroporE Nicuoras, M.D., Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of Zodlogy m George Washington Uni- versity, Washington, D. C. 1876. Gitman, Daniet C., LL.D. President Emeritus of Johns Hopkins University and lately President of the Carnegie Institution. Baltimore, Md. 1865. Goxrssmann, Cuarues A., Ph.,D., LL.D. Professor of Chemistry in the Massachusetts Agricultural Col- lege, Amherst, Mass. 1888. Goocu, Franx Austin. Professor of Chemistry in Yale University, New Haven, Conn. 1868. GreEEentEaF, C. R. Colonel U. S. A. (retired), San ' Francisco, Cal. 1883. Grecorio, Mareuis “Antonio pz, Sc.D. Editor of the Annals of Geology and Paleontology, Palermo, Sicily. : 1877. von Grotru, Paut Hernricu. Professor of Min- eralogy in the Royal Bayr, Ludwig-Maximilians Uni- versity, Munich, Germany. ' 1869. Guppy, R. J. L. Port of Spain, Trinidad, B. W. I. 1898. Hatz, Grorce E., Sc.D., LL.D. Director of the Solar Observatory of the Carnegie Institution of Washington, Mt. Wilson, Cal. : 1882. von Hesse-Wartece, Baron Ernest. Villa Trib- schen, Lucerne, Switzerland. 1867. Hrrcucock, C.H., LL.D. Professor of Geology in Dartmouth College, Hanover, N. H. 1900. Hotmes, .Wittiam Henry. Chief, Bureau of- . American Ethnology, Washington, D. C. XXV1 NEW .YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 1890. Hosxorp, H. D., C. et M.E., F.G.S., F.RIG:S: Buenos Ayres, Argentine Republic. 1896. Ipprnes, J. P. Professor of Petrology in the Uni- versity of Chicago, Chicago, Ill. 1875. -Ines, Matvern W. Dubuque, Ia. 1899. Jarxezt, Ortro, Ph.D. Professor of Geclogy and Paleontology at the University of Berlin and in K6ni- glicher Museum fiir Naturkunde, Invalidenstrasse 43, Berlin, Germany. 1876. Jonnson, Samuet W., M.A. Professor Emeritus of Agricultural Chemistry in Yale University, 54 Trumbull Street, New Haven, Conn. 1876. Jorpan, Davin Srarr, Ph.D., LL.D. President of Leland Stanford Jr. University, Stanford University, Cal. 1876. Kornic, Grorcr A., Ph.D. Professor of Chemistry in the Michigan College of Mines, Houghton, Mich. 1899. KonitrauscH, Frrepricu, Ph.D. Formerly Presi- dent of the Physikalise Technische Reischantalt, Mar- burg (Hessen), Germany. 1888. Kuxi, Baron R. Privy Counsellor, Tokyo, Japan. 1890. Lacroix, Aurrep. Professor of Mineralogy in the Museum of Natural History of Paris, Rue Buffon 61, Paris, France. 1876. Laneiry, Jonn W., Ph.D. Professor of Electro- Metallurgy in the Case School of Applied Science, . Cleveland, O. 1900. Laprarent, ALBERT DE. Professor of Mineralogy, Geology and Physical Geography, Bole Libre des Hautes Etudes, Paris, France. - 1876. Lartmors, S. A. Professor?of Chemistry in Uni- versity of Rochester, Rochester, N. Y. 1890. , Laussepat, Coz. Aimse. Honorary Director of the National Conservatory of Arts and Sciences, Avenue St. Martin 292, Paris, France. 1894. Lispry, Witimm. Professor of Physical Geogra- phy, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. 1899. lLiversipcze, Arcuipautp, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S. Professor of Chemistry, University of Sydney, Sydney, New South Wales. CORRESPONDING MEMBERS XXVIii 1876. Mactosxirz, Grorce. Professor of Biology in Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. 1876. Manitet, Jonn Witiimasm, M.D., Ph.D., LL.D., F.R.S. Professor of Chemistry in the University of Virginia, Charlottesville, Va. 1891. Mann, CuHarites Rizore. Assistant Professor of Physics, University of Chicago, Chicago, Ill. 1867. Matruew, Grorce F., Sec.D., LL.D., F.R.S.C. St. John, N.B., Canada. 1874. Maynarp, Cuartes Jonnson. West Newton, Mass. 1874. Mezap, Turopore Lueverr, C.E. Oviedo, Fla. 1888. Mezex, Seto EK. Field Museum, Chicago, Il. 1892. Menopizapat-TamporreL, J. DE. Palma 13, Mexico. 1874. Merriam, Cuinton Hart, M.D. Chief of U. S. Biological Survey, Washington, D. C. 1898. Merriman, Mansrietp, Ph.D. Professor of Civil Engineering, Lehigh University, South Bethlehem, Pa. 1890. Meyer, A.B., M.D. Director of the Royal Zodlogi- cal, Anthropological and Ethnographical Museum, Dresden, Germany. 1900. Mirsuxuri, Kaxicu1, Ph.D. Professor of Zodlogy, Imperial University of Tokyo. 1878. Minot, CHarites Sepewicr, §.B., §.D., LL.D., D.Se. Professor of Histology and Human Embryology in.the Harvard Medical School, Boston, Mass. 1876. Mrixrer, Witiiam Gitsert. Professor of Chemis- try in Yale University, New Haven, Conn. “1890. Moxupenxe, Ricuarp, E. M., Ph.D. Watchung, N. J. 1895. Morean, C. Lioyp, LL.D., F.R.S. Principal and Professor of Psychology, University College, Bristol, England. q 1864. Morsz, Epwarp §., A.M., Ph.D. Director of the Peabody Museum, Sian Mass. 1898. Murray, Grorce R.M., M.C._ British IVanseui, London, England. —— Netto, Eucen. Professor of Mathematics, Hessische- Ludwigs University, Giessen, Germany. 1866. Newton, Aurrep, M.A., F.R.S. Professor of Zoélogy and Comparative Anatomy in the University of Cambridge, Magdelene College, Cambridge, England. xeVill NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 1897. Nicuoxas, Francis C., Ph.D.. 3 Broad St. 1882. Nicuott, Henry Atrrep Atrorp, C.M.G., M.D.; C.M., M.R.C.S. Kingsland House, Dominica, Br. West Indies. 1881. Nites, Witr1mm H. Professor of Geology in Wellesley College and Professor Emeritus of Geology and Geography in Massachusetts Institute of Technol- ogy, Boston, Mass. 1880. Nozan, Epwarp J., M.D. Recording Secretary and Librarian of Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila- delphia, Logan ‘Square, Philadelphia, Pa. 1879. Oper, Freperick A. Fairmount Avenue, Hacken- sack, N. J. ) 1876. Orpway, JoHn M. 38125 Chestnut Street, New Orleans, La. 1898. OstwaLp, WitHELM. Professor of Physical Chemis- try, University of Leipzig, Linnestrasse 2/3, Leipzig, | Germany. 1900. Parker, Grorce Howarp, S.D. Aqeaeeer Profes- sor of Zodlogy m Harvard University, Cn Mass. 1876. Prcxuam, STEPHEN F., M.A. 280 Broadway, New York City. 1888. Post, Rev. Grorce E., M.A., M.D., LL,D. Pro- — fessor of Surgery in the Syrian Protestant College, Beirtit, Syria. 1894. Pouttron, Epwarp Baenatt, Dee M.A., LL.D. Professor of Zodlogy, Oxford University, Fellow of Jesus College, Oxford, England. 1876. Prescott, Atzert B. Professor of Organic Chem- istry and Director of the Chemical Laboratory in the University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich. 1877. Primer, Freprricx, Ph.D. Professor of Natural History in Girard College, Philadelphia, Pa. 1868. Pumpretty, RapHart. Newport, R. I. 1876. Ranpatt, Burton A. Formerly Clinical Professor of Ear Diseases, University of Pennsylvania, Philadel- phia, Pa. 1888. Reavz, T. Metzuarp, F.G.S. Park Corner, Blun- dellsands, Liverpool, England. CORRESPONDING MEMBERS XX1X 1876. Remsen, Ira, M.D., Ph.D., LL.D. President ‘ Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. 1874. Ripeway, Rozserr. Curator of Division of Birds of the U. S. National Museum, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C. 1886. Ross, Wititmm L., Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of Physics and Electrical Engineering, Rensselaer Poly- technic Institute, Troy, N. Y. 1876. Saprier, Samurent P., Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of Chemistry, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, Philadel- : phia, Pa. 1899. Scuuosser, D. Max, Alte Akademie, Munich, Germany. 1867. Scuwerrzer, Pavut, Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of Agricultural Chemistry and Chemist to the Experiment Station of the University of Missouri, Columbia, Mo. 1898. Scott, W. B. Professor of Geology in Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. 1876. ScuppEer, Samurt H. Cambridge, Mass. 1894. Srpewicx, W. T. Professor of Biology in the Massa- chusetts Institute of Technology and Curator of the ’ Lowell Institute, Boston, Mass. 1876. SHrRwoop, Anprew, Montavilla, Portland, Oregon. 1883. Smirn, J. Warp, 144 Monmouth St., Newark, N. J. 1895. SmytTu, Cuartes H., Jr. Professor of Geology in Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. 1890. Spencer, Rev. J. Se_pen, Tarrytown, N. Y. 1896. STEARNS, Rosgert, E.C., Ph.D. Associate in Zodl- ogy in the U. S. National Meucean Washington, D.C. 1025 East 18th Street, Los Angeles, Cal. 1890. Srevens, Wattrer LeConte. Professor of phivsics, Washington and Lee University, Lexington, Va. 1876. Storer, Francis H. Professor of Agricultural Chemistry in Bussey Institute, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. 1885. Tacorr, Razau Sir Sourtnpro Mouun. Calcutta, India. 1893. Tuomson, J. P., LL.D. Hon. Secretary and Treasurer Royal Geographical Society of Australasia, Brisbane, Queensland, Australia. xox NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ 1899. Traauvatrr, R. H. Keeper of Natural History De- partment of Royal Scottish Museum, Edinburgh, Scotland. 1877. 'Trowsripcr, Joun. Rumford Professor of the Application of Science to Useful Arts i Harvard Uni- versity, Cambridge, Mass. 1876. Turrzie, D. K. U.S. Mint, Philadelphia, Pa. 1871. Van Heurcrx, Henri, M.D. Professor of Botany and Director of Botanical Gardens, Rue de la Sante 8, Antwerp, Belgium. 1900. Van Hise, CHarztes Ricuarp, Ph.D., LL.D. Presi- - . dent of the University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis. 1867. VeErritt, Appison Emory. Professor of Zodlogy in Yale University, New Haven, Conn. 1890. Vocprs, AntHony Wayne. Brig. General U. S. A. (Retired), 2425 First Street, San Diego, Calif. 1898. Watucott, Cuarzes Dooxittie. Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C. - 1876. Watupo, Leonarp. 49 Wall Street, New York. 1876. Warrince, CuHartes B., Ph.D., 288 Mill Street, Poughkeepsie, N. Y. 1900. Wartast, SHo, Ph.D. Professor of Zodlogy, Im- perial University of Tokyo. 1897. Wetter, Stuart, Ph.D. Assistant Professor of Paleontologic Geology, University of Chicago, Chicago, Til. 1874. Wuirs, I. C., A.M., Ph.D. State Geologist, Mor- gantown. W. Va. 1898. Wuirman, C. O. Head Professor of Zodlogy in the University and Director of the Marine Biological Laboratory at Woods Holl, Mass. 1898. Witiams, Henry Suarer. Professor of Geology and Director of the Museum in Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y. 1898. WrycHet, N. H., M.A., Formerly State Geologist, 113 State Street, Minneapolis, Minn. 1866. Woop, Horatio C., A.M., M.D., LL.D. Professor of Materia Medica and Therapeutics, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelpiha, Pa. ACTIVE MEMBERS XXX1 1899. Woopwarp, A. Smiru, LL.D., F.R.S. Keeper of Geology in the British Museum of Natural History, London, England. 1869. Woopwarp, Henry, LL.D., F.R.S. Late Keeper of Geology in British Museum, 129 Beaufort Street, Chelsea, London S. W., England. 1876. Wricut, ArtHuR WituaMms. Professor of Experi- mental Physics in Yale Univeristy, 73 York Square, New Haven, Conn. 1876. Yarror, Harry Creecy, M.D. Professor of Der- matology in George Washington University, Washing- ton, D. C. ACTIVE MEMBERS 1906 Fellowship is indicated by an asterisk (*) before the name. Life Membership is shown by heavy-faced type. in capitals. * ABBE, CLEVELAND, Ph.D. Adams, Edward D. Apuer, I., M.D. ALEXANDER, Cuas. B. *ALuEN, J. A., Ph.D. ALLEN, JAMES LANE *Ariis, Enwarp PHELPs, JR. *AMEND, BERNARD G. Awnperson, A. A. Anperson, A. J. C. Anthony, R. A. Antuony, Wm. A., ARCHER-SHEE, Mrs. M. AREND, Francis J. Armstrong, S. T., M.D. * ARNOLD, E. 8S. F., M.D. Astor, JOHN JACOB AVERY, SAMUEL P., JR. Bailey, James M. Banes, Francis 5S. Barnes, Miss Cora F. Barron, Georce D. * BASKERVILLE, Pror. C. M. Bavueu, Miss M. L. Baxter, M., Jr. Beat, WitiiaM R. Bran, Henry WiLLarp Brarp, Danien C. *Beck, Fanning C. T. BreckHARD, Martin *BrEBE, C. WILLIAM Brers, M. H. Berry, Kpwarp W. *BickmoreE, A. §., Ph.D. Bien, JuLius *BiceLow, Pror. M. A. Billings, Elizabeth. Biniines, FREDERICK Birpsaut, Mrs. W. R. BisHop, H. R. *BuAKE, J. A., M.D.. *Bliss, Prof. Charles B. Boas, Emin *Boas, Pror. Franz Borttrcrer, Henry W. Boyp, JAMES The names of Patrons are 5-0-9 *BristoL, Pror. C. L. Bristox, Jno. I. D. *BRITTON, PROF. N. L. *BROWN, HON. ADDISON Brown, Epwin H. *BROWNELL, Siuas B. *Bumpus, Pror. H. C. *Burr, Wituiam H. Busu, WENDELL T. *Byrnes, Miss Estuer F. *CaLkins, Pror. Gary N. CaMPBELL, Witiiam, Ph.D. CasrE, CHartwes L. *CASEY, COL. T. L. *CaswELL, Joun H. *CaTTELL, Pror. J. McK. CHAMBERLAIN, Rev. L. T. CHAMPOLLION, ANDREW *CHANDLER, Pror. C. F. CHAPIN, CHESTER W. *CHAPMAN, Frank M. *CuEEsMAN, TI. M., M.D. CiarkKson, BANYER Cuine, Miss May Conn, J. M. * COLLINGWOOD, FRANCIS Cotiins, Anna E. Collord, George W. Conpit, Witii1am L. Constant, S. Victor Cornine, C. R. Cowes, Davin S. *Cox, Cuaruzs F. *CrRAMPTON, Pror. Henry E. Crane, Zenas CRAWFORD, JOSEPH Cuiein, Guy W. *CuNNINGHAM, R. H., M.D. .: *DaveNnpPort, Pror. C. B. Davies, J. CLARENCE Davies, WitLiam G. Davis, CHartes H. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES *Day, Witiiam S. *Dran, Pror. BasHFORD De Copper, E. J. De Forest, Ropert W. Delafield, Maturin L., Jr. DELANO, WARREN, JR. Dez Mituav, Louis J. DemoreEst, Wituiam C. De Puy, Henry F. DEVEREUX, WALTER B. Devor, FrepEerick W. DeWitt, Witiiam G. Dickerson, Epwarp N. Dimock, Georce E. Drx, Rev. Morean, 8.T.D. Dopcr, Rev. D. Stuart, D.D. *Dopvce, Pror. Ricuarp E. Donerty, Henry L. Donatp, James M. *Doremus, Pror. Cuas. A. Douglas, James Dovewass, ALFRED Draper, Mrs. M. A. P. Drummonp, Isaac W., M.D. *Dupiey, P. H., Ph.D. *Dunuam, E. K., M.D. Dunscombe, George E. Dv Pont, H. A. DURAND, JOHN S. - *DutcHer, WILLIAM Dwicut, J., Jr., M.D. Dwicut, Rev. M. E. EIcKEMEYER, CARL Elliott, Prof. A. H. EMANUEL, JoHN H., JR. Emmet, C. TEMPLE Eno, Witiiam PHELPS Escopar, Francisco Evans, SamuEt M., M.D. *EYERMAN, JOHN FatrcHILD, CHARLEs 5. ACTIVE MEMBERS Farco, JAMEs C. Farmer, ALEXANDER S. *FaRRAND, Pror. LivINGsToN Frereuson, Mrs. FarQquHar Frrecuson, H. B., M.D. FIELD, C. DEPEYSTER Frevo, Wini1am B. Oscoop *FINLEY, JOHN H. *FisHperc, Maurice, M.D. *FLEXNER, Simon, M.D. Forp, James B. Forster, WILLIAM ‘Foxwortnuy, Dr. F. W. Frissetu, A. S. GapE, Wituiuam F. GALLATIN, FREDERICK *Gies, Pror. WILLIAM J. Gorpon, CLARENCE E. GOULD, EDWIN GOULD, GEORGE J. GOULD, MISS HELEN M. *GRaBAvU, Pror. A. W. GratacaPp, Louis P. Greerr, Ernest F. *Grecory, W. K. GUGGENHEIM, W. Hammonp, James B. Harriman, EK. H. Haver, Louis, M.D. Havemeyer, Wim F. Heinze, Artuur P. Heuer, Max = *Herinc, Pror. D. W. HERRMAN, MRS. ESTHER *Herrer, C. A., M.D. Hess, SELMAR . Hewitt, Epwarp R. Hit, Roserr T. Hincuman, Mrs. C. S. Hirscu, Cuartzes S. *Hircucocr, Miss F. R. M. HopEnpyL, ANTON G. Hor, Rosert Horrman, Mrs. E. A. *Hotuick, Artuur,- Ph.D. Hotst, L. J. R. Holt, Henry Hopkins. George B. Hoppin, W. W. *Hornapay, Witiiam T. *Hovey, E. O., Ph.D. *Howr, Pror. Henry M. *Howeg, M. A., Ph.D. Hubbard, Thomas H. Huspparp, Water C. Hucues, CHARLES E. Huusuizer, J. E. Hunt, Joserpu H., M.D. Hunter, Georce W. Huntington, Archer M. Hurwset, T. D. Huyter, Joun S. Hyde, B. Talbot B Hype, E. Francis Hyde, Frederic E., M.D. Hyper, Henry St. J. Iles, George *Irvine, Pror. Joun D. Irvine, WALTER *Jaconi, Apram, M.D. *Jacosy, Pror. Haroup James, D. Wiis James, F. Witton Jarvie, James N. Jesup, Morris K. Jonxzs, A. Lrroy Jonrs, Dwicut A. *JULIEN A. A., Ph.D. Kaun, O. H. Kewuicott, Wittiam E. *Kemp, Prof. James F. KENNEDY, J. S. Keppler, Rudolph Kessler, George A. XXX11 XXX1V Krar, A. JULIEN Kwapp, Herman, M.D. *Kunz, G. F., M.A., Ph.D. *Lamb, Osborn R. LaMBERT, ADRIAN S. Lanepon, Woopsury G. LANGELOTH, J. *LancMANN, Gustav, M.D. LAWRENCE, A. E. LAWRENCE, JOHN B. Lawton, James M. Lxao, F. Garcia P., M.D. *Lepoux, A. R., Ph.D. *Ler, Pror. FrepeErick 5. Lerrerts, MarsHatt C. *LEVISON, W. G. Levy, EMANUEL LIcHTENSTEIN, Pau -LMINVILEE, Hi, Re, Ph.D. Loeb, James aiioen. Pror. Morris, Ph.D. LounsBerry, R. P. Low, Hon. Seth, LL.D. *Lucas, Frep. A. *Luauer, Pror. Lea Mcl. *Lusk, Pror. GraHAM LutTTcGen, WALTHER McCook, Col. J. J. McDonatp, Joun E. McKim, Rev. Hasietrr McMillin, Emerson *MacDoveat.y, Pror. R. Mack, Jacos W. Macer, Rozerrt F. Mann, W. D. Marsie, Manton Marcou, JouHn B. Maruine, ALFRED Marshall, Louis Marston, E. S. Martin, Bradley *Martin, Pror. D. 8. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES *Martin, TI. C. *Matthew, W. D., Ph.D. Maxwe tu, Francis T. MEAD, WALTER H. Metics, Tirus B. *Mettzer, 8S. J., M.D. *Merrituy, F. J. He PhD. Mertz, Herman A. *Mryrer, Apour, M.D. Mituer, Georce N., M.D. *Miner, Roy Wace MircHetrt, Arruur M. MircHeti, Kpwarp MitcHeELL, Joon Murray Morewoop, Grorce B. Morean, J. PIERPONT *Morcan, Tuos. H. Morris, Lewis R. Mortimer, W. G., Myers, Josep G. Nunn, R. J. Oaxes, Francis J. O’Brien, J. M. Oxsric, ADOLPH OxreTTINGER, P. J., M.D. *QOgilvie, Miss Ida H., Ph.D. Olcott, E. E. Oxucott, Mrs. E. E. *Osborn, Prof. Henry F. Osporn, WiLuiAm C. Owen, Miss Juliette A. Ow ENS, W. W. Paine, "A. G., JR. Painter, H. McM. .» M.D. PARKER, PROF. weleee ParsELt, Henry V. A. Parsons, Mrs. Epwin *Parsons, JOHN E. Patton, John *PELLEW, Pror. C. E. PENNINGTON, WILLIAM Perkins, William H. M.D. ACTIVE MEMBERS \ PEerry, CHARLES J. *PrTerRson, F., M.D. *PETRUNKEWITSCH, A. Prerticrew, Davin L. PPwISTER, J. C. Puiprs, HENRY PHoENrIx, Luoyp PickHaRDT, Car Pierce, Henry Cray *PINCHOT, GIFFORD *Prrkin, Lucius, Ph.D. Poccrensure, H. F. *Poor, Pror. CuHarues L. Poor, Henry W. Porter, Eucene H. Post, ABRAM 5. aiost, ©. A. *Post, Grorce B. “Prince, Pror. J. D. Proctrrer, WILLIAM Proctor, Grorce H. *PRuDDEN, Pror. T. M.,M.D. *Purin, Pror. M. I. Pyne, M. Taylor QuacKENBOs, Pror. J. D. QuINTARD, Epwarp Rertyty, F. James Ricuarpson, Freperick A. *RicketTts, Pror. P. pr P. RieEDERER, Lupwice RIkER, SAMUEL Ritey, R. Hupson Rozz, Hon. J. Hamppen Rogert, SAMUEL Roserts, C. H. Ropcers, JAMES H. Rocers, AtLEN Morrinu ocrrs, EH. L. Rocers, H. H. Rowland, Thomas Fitch *Russy, Pror. H. H. Schermerhorn, F. A. XXXV Schott, Charles M., Jr. SEABURY, GEORGE J. SENFF, CHARLES H. SHEPARD, C. SIDNEY *SHERWOOD, Grorce H. SHILAND, ANDREW, JR. SHuLTz, CHARLEs S. *SickuLes, Ivin, M.D. Sirpere, W. H. J. SLOAN, SAMUEL SmitH, Exiiotr C. SmMitH, Ernest EK., M.D. SmirH, Pror. Joun B. SmiruH, W. WHEELER SNOOK, SAMUEL B. *Srarr, Pror. M. ALLEN Stetson, F. L. *SrEvENS, Greorce T., M.D. *Stevenson, Prof. John J. STOKES, JAMES Stone, Mason A. *STRATFORD, Pror. WILLIAM Straus, Isipor *STronc, Pror. Cuas. A. *STUYVESANT, RUTHERFORD Taceart, Rus *Tatlock John, Jr. Terry, James, THompson, Lewis 8S. *'THOMPSON, Pror. W. G. Tuomrson, WALTER *"THORNDIKE, Pror. E. L. THORNE, SAMUEL AILORRENG as (Cs.n hel): *Towerr, R. W., Ph.D. *TOWNSEND, CHarLes H. Tows, C. D. *TRoTTER, ALFRED W. *TRowBripcE, Pror. C. C. TuckERMAN, ALFRED, Ph.D. *UnpERWwoopD, Pror. L. M. Van BEUREN, Frep. T. ‘XXXVI Van Brunt, JEREMIAH R. _ Van Slyck George W. Van Wyck, Robert A. Von Narprorr, E. R.’ VoratKa, Epwarp J. VREDENBURGH, Wm. H. WaInwricutT, J. W., M.D. *WALLER, Pror. ELwyn WALLIN, Ivan E. Warsure, F. N. Warsoure, Paut M., Warp, ARTEMAS Warp, JoHN GILBERT *WasHineton, H. S., Ph.D. WatTersury, J. I. ~ Weir, John Westover, M. F. *WHEELER, Pror. W. M. Wuitr, Horace Waite, Leonarp D. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES *WHITFIELD, Pron. eee Wickes, WILLIAM Wicecrn, F. H., M.D. Wiuuums, R. H. Wits, Cuarues T. *Witson, Pror. E. B. Witson, Henry R. Witson, J. H. *WissLER, Cuark, Ph.D. © Wotrr, A. R. Woop, Mrs. Crntuia A. Woop, Wim H. S. *WoopsBripceE, Pror. F. J. ¥ *WooDHULL, Pror. JoHN F. *Woopwarp, Pror. R. S. *WoopwortH, Pror. R. S. Yparra, A. M. F., M.D. YouncLove, Joun, M.D. ZABRISKIE, GEORGE ASSOCIATE MEMBERS Berxey, Pror. C. P. Brown, T. C. GorpDoNn, CLARENCE Dusuin, L. J. Harper, Rotanp M., Ph.D. Hunter, Grorce W. James, F. WILTON Jones, A. L. Kewuicott, W. E. Monrtacug, W. P. Nortuup, Dwicut Ossurn, R. C. PEDERSEN, F. M. Reap, ba SHELDON, W. H. STEVENSON, A. E. Van SicLen, MattHew NON-RESIDENT MEMBERS Bucuner, Epwarp F. Burnett, Dove ass Davis, Wititiam H. ~Enewisu, Grorce L. Finuay, Pror. G. I. FRANKLAND, FREDERICK W. Horrmay, S. V. Kennpic, Amos B. *Lutoyp, Pror. F. E. *Mayer, Dr. A. G. *Pratr, Dr. J. H. *Ries, Pror. H. Reuter, L. H. *SumMNeER, Dr. F. B. *van Incen, Pror. G. NEW YORK — CADEMY OF SCIENCES | | . Editor: i CHARLES LANE POOR Rie ‘New York bh Published by the Academy NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES _ OFFICERS, 1906 one President—N. L. Britton, N. Y. Botanical Garden. Recording Secretary—W. M. WHEELER, American Museum. Corresponding Secretary—RicHARD E. Dopce, Teachers College. Treasurer —EMERSON MCMILLIN, 40 Wall St. ! Librarian—Rawtpu W. Tower, American Museum. Editor —CHARLES LANE Poor, 4 East 48th Street. SECTION OF BIOLOGY Chairman—H. E. Crampton, Barnard College. Secretary—M. A. BIGELOw, Teachers College. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY Chairman—EDMUND Otis Hovey, American Museum. Secretary—A. W. Grazav, Columbia University. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY Chairman—C, C. TROWBRIDGE, Columbia University. Secretary—MILTON FRANKLIN, 112 West 47th Street. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY Chairman—RosERT MacDovuca tt, School of Pedagogy, New York ‘ University. K Secretary—R. S. Woopwortu, Columbia University. SESSION OF 1906 The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8.15 o'clock, — from October to May, in the American Museum of Natural — History, 77th Street and Central Park, West. 4 ‘ Acad. Sci., Vol. XVII, Part I, September, 1906. +r hye ARS ie iweem ANNALS N. Y. ACAD.°SCI., VOL. XVII. FRONTISPIECE. BQO GEOLOGICAL MA P GEORGIA WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO THE COASTAL PLAIN SCALE OF MILES iJ 80 7 — Nee re ie S roe NL NS =S BY, Ty HY LS Ea U/ Sa Se aes nea SBS) == 4) fee ims SEN AS ais ME! ‘o Mo! t/Vernep Vi a i} = VF a) x LA Ne Vk ‘i ty 4 Dias, VW, L/ /p A AL Of \ Ks ~ a eat de, AY ee LPR Ze a9 EEE LN SIS . 4 L Map showing geographical relations of the Altamaha Grit region to other parts of Georgia. The fall-line sand-hills, southern lime-sink region and littoral region are not labeled here for lack of space, but they can be readily located by the descriptions given herein. ‘The area labeled Miocene is probably of later age, as indicated in the text. The railroads and county boundaries are shown as they were at the beginning of 1905. ie *z . | [ANNALS N. Y. AcaD. Sct., Vol. XVII, Part 1, pp. I-415. September, 1906. ] A PHYTOGEOGRAPHICAL SKETCH OF THE ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF THE COASTAL PLAIN OF GEORGIA. Rotanp M. HARPER. CONTENTS. Ka ROGHROTAOIML, S bic BRS cecaceore rope enone ncaa Ree a cece es es annie eer yen ent 5 JPUNIEAE Te Temperate Eastern North America and some of the systems which iewemoccmmusedaransuilbdividinos ate jer es a aus scien ei 7 Geological divisions 1. Metamorphic (Piedmont region and Blue Ridge)............ 9 2. Paleozoic (Appalachian Valley, Cumberland Plateau, etc.)... 10 PEC ONS TAU PLAIN (Cretaceous and Tertiary) oo .c 08. os ens ite) Pe uioccoprcalblorida (Ouaternany in... 542s aes. cess ose TT Smt Most AS GS CAO sty a ech chs tract f a wire aad BTeslelie het Nc ally rey eek ae wa bees 12 The coastal plain of Georgia and its subdivisions................ 13 zr. JPalleliom@ Getic tel antl lke aera cates ener anes eee rallye Aer ems NN ena I4 B, CHEBACSO WISE Sard, Sika ae GiOne See Ce ER ica ee Se a A 4 S, LELO VBS AAUE 5 SCENARIO ir Fem overm Ol OCSME Se 5.4 ure ie Wepethe cies Ae San cLe Aa atenices 16 Sem MN Miat MNO OCMC Ear tay aeeisie atet net tg ushal vtillet o. cot aadeyieses e.eb-syenat Sle tess, doeatls 17 PRP AID NITIACEN Ak CIS Sy cycte osiicrege: ei-cth ede om eoh as Se, cua tained sw Osha wae oom Si Id PEN OEEIMOSt OlSOCeMe Helis ls cose es iaiere heed Coe tense od elena 19 SES OU Mera WeImMe-Simks TESTOM 5 04) opr) | 2 Als A epevsicis ole Ge eaters 19 g. Flat pine-barrens..... fag oat, SUNDA OE CRP TIN, Ana te BSCR 19 MME TE ORT OT Oiera sreVemanene so nas aici ct nud ausce cians aetees ac cicte a wralmeeier ge 20 The Altamaha Grit region in detail Location and boundariess.......:....... SYNC RO oeeiel ome ach ehoge s 20 ~ EM SbOmy Ot) SeOloSicalexplOratiOMs -ssct. si. sphessd cies o.0 c siscn wh 21 eee ideyari comorbid em gs camel n ites ccjcie Sere vicars wie ole clare wees 22 ae IRON UN LT LILG Sly ctat Pew var-t ciatiaym fic eeere s/h Giese sie Sie e' o's (fave esl aele 22 Benen ACCS Oily en teenies) 75 to, Shallower pine-barren ponds....:...5. |... 79 ti.’ Deeper ponds along the escarpment... .: 23seeeeeeeee 81 po. Sand-bills. i... eee eae we sleek ae 82 13: Intermediate sand-hills........2......./: ope 89 ra. Sand-hill bogs. wh... ke woe alle wee go r5. Non-alluvial'swamps os...0.....0....5% 2.) Gee 93 16.) Sand-hill ponds... 0... eek ale as ee 95 T7eeSand-hammocks)...i 0.7.0) -).0. 005) ere 97 OPP LA TMM OCKG myer Wetlnsea joonsee wine alo heen aes 2. 3a Ee 98 TQ. (River=bIUMHS cle es eee etn. 102 Statistical summary of the foregoing habitat-groups.......... 106 Relation of the typical habitat-groups to each other .......... 108 Exceptional and little-known habitats....................0-- IIo Weeds h.issac oi iis Nasal dite taal des Saute a tieie 6 a ee II4 Eftects of civilization 2.6 62 bles. bikie eee oc ee ee ee II7 Cultivation, lumbering, turpentining, grazing, fire, destruction and modification of fauna, artesian wells, muddy streams. Remarkable stability of thelflora ss... 25.2 0.1). see 119 ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 3 ParRT II. PAGE History of botanical exploration of the region................. I2I-125 Taxonomic classification of the flora. MOSS R Oh GENE ALIMEIM Gly aie, Taieyc aieh cele aie eis bod was Acai d's oes Gealn 8h 126-132 PO ULCEOURS IC CIOS eee ataie abr cle siete Wl wails gies ote Sig’areiain/ele abe 6 133-322 |S SUBITIRA BROT MARES Sr ces es VR caer nee an sa Pr 133-308 ARGOS OSTA ek SE ac Sic Sina RR a 133-304 ID HGOEN NEC VO sTIS C3 cee is case ne ted eRe ee calor ear cP n 133-253 Gamo petaler sapien ack-ne ooh aie ice are ne bovocono seus Ee gG=Ues Beveicc tat @ EICNUMINN LECe wan, gee te nape mh Ran ele Ne a the anes 188-253 Momtocotylecdomsr seis aetceisiater shoteuc eae en oeeal cane once ets 253-304 REUEINO STC EES Us cyte sro weh a sisee erin eoalb genial wierd «Geet at clic al! acy’e. i.e 304-308 EMoRI GOP NViLOS an te hop eee see crete aera aie snaain a aiecech tl sah oe de ee 3208-312 IB SILI EAS a Gen sree tnt hs iar ic een eA, See ae Se 313-320 WETOSGI 5 5 eG A, Te Ba or ec eure eae er paral a eae te ace Sa 313-318 IHIGIOBABIGZO 2 Bl eMe OECD I ICE eRe eee 312-320 “Ted Sy OU GRASSI So oe ASA NEL ete ee car ee ae 320-322 Penh tava Ol: $Me yCAbALO SUE a einycie 2h cave ce xi] aieepe cue seles sare speimcare eis 323-343 Total number of families, genera, and species............. 323-324 Largest families and genera, and their relations to the 19 Heap OMe Meal OTA cw aetrayay heres ees «cis ta yapcuals sins ore tedns US auecerand shales 324-328 Commonest species “TSRSSSy SAVE UIT FL OVENT| 6 ISIN tN Udo ne RNA cee cee 327-329 Notable absentees. (CHS RBVS ITE), ret Bi aclicn siete Ae lhe Solan eg aeceme a ei ea ae Sa 320-330 SHOISGUGS SSS croc ee etek Onc u ONE et Sere ean a SRSA EE Nn A re ra 330-331 Wlassiicatiom: Iby SthUctlnes seb. ey. cies operas cise ec elec 331-334 NOES CRUE CCS ed ca meek ease epee Sot arate lela eda lame Ah. ihc oi Mate’ ait Bo MM MIMERCES eco cuetowape iene vcore bckaratistn tas tetas at Seay Shasta eudee © 331-332 PROS Ole SERCO: cleric ates esas cheer sacar Se dees ahadicn Neset bin aceue one agp 6 332 ‘SURE OS oa Baas Gator cea ERAN SE a ig Ne Pa eA a 332-333 Vines WWIGECIGIRNE SS Sis lot US ae ete CON Ren reat ae Ba Ina Sa 333 HERG TO ACC OES mea date cay eheen eat ed ve coc’ olicite Sieie. ve ah acehies th aloe aplanoae te 38334 ES PHPMNLEES aC PANASILCS rar crc cvaiel aie Seating acecs isis rave qieiersea yes ole 334 Flowering, dissemination, etc., of four largest families (Composite, Leguminosze, Cyperacez, Graminez) ....... 334-330 Geographical affinities of the flora ............. Matai aks 336-338 Bibliographic history of genera and species................ 338-342 | ELIS ESIOIIS SS, PEER ces Rela eA PE RARE Neer eA Pr en RC oe 342-343 Bibliography 1. Works pertaining to the Altamaha Grit region........... 343-348 MO DIAC CVOLKSKCONSUILCU?. chacn ce cisils cle esses sy-\caes creases 348-357 ILLUSTRATIONS. Map showing geographical relations of the Altamaha Grit region to other parts of Genrgia........ 2.2... = cele a senna zeae TEXT FIGURES. t. Map of an imaginary typical portion of the Altamaha PAGE Grit region, showing relations of twelve of the - principal habitats... 222s k seks 2-16. Phznological diagrams for the several habitats........ 17. Diagram showing relations of the typical habitat groups to each other and to other parts of the country.... 18-21. Phenological diagrams for the four largest families. ... 22. Diagram illustrating bibliographic history of genera of vascular plants and species of woody plants........ 23. Diagram illustrating bibliographic history of 700 species GE vascular plantsi... 2.0 oe Att islam ce 3 HAL#-TONE PLATES. 35 43-105 10g 335 309) 341 INTRODUCTION. In studying the phytogeography of any region the work can usually be divided into three stages. The first is to determine by observation the geographical distribution and habitat re- lations of each species, and to distinguish and classify the habitats and their corresponding vegetation. The second is to correlate these observations with measured environmental factors, historical development, and the properties of the plants themselves; or in other words, to ascertain why each plant grows where it does. The third, which is essentially the converse of the second, is to interpret the geological history and geographical phenomena of the region by means of existing vegetation, just as geologists have done by studying the inorganic crust of the earth. The historical development of phytogeography has proceeded approximately in the order just named. The study of habitats has been traced back to the time of Linneus, and that of geo- graphical distribution still farther; but even yet in most parts of the world no systematic classification of habitats has been attempted. The foundations of the study of environmental factors were laid by Humboldt a century ago, and at the present time great activity is being manifested in this direction and in the study of historical problems and the adaptations of plants to environment, but much has yet to be learned. Inthe use of plants to unlock the secrets of geology and geography, which may per- haps be justly regarded as the ultimate object of phytogeography, only the merest beginning has been made, though some good work along this line was done as far back as the middle of the nineteenth century by Gray, Hilgard, and others. 3) 6 HARPER In the present work, which is a study of the vegetation of a small and in many respects homogeneous portion of temperate Eastern North America, the first stage of investigation above defined has been worked out as completely as time and other limitations would allow. In the second and third stages not so much has been done, but some of the more obvious correlations between different sets of phenomena are pointed out, which is always a step in the direction of explaining their causes. The region is first located with reference to other parts of the world, and its distinguishing characteristics described. The vegetation is then classified, first according to habitat, then taxonomically as in ordinary systematic works, and to some extent according to structure. For each habitat group the environmental factors are indicated as accurately as possible without quantitative measurements, and some attention is paid to development and adaptations, as well as can be done without resort to experimental methods. In the taxonomic classification the local and general geographical distribution and habitat re- lations of each species are discussed as fully as space and existing knowledge will permit; and throughout the work the geograph- ical significance of the facts observed is kept constantly in mind. The characteristics of the habitats, and the ranges and other attributes of the plants, are summarized at the proper places, by means of diagrams and tables wherever possible, to facilitate comparison. In certain parts of the work some observations are recorded which may seem to have little or no significance at present but will in all probability be explained by future re- searches, either in this or in other regions. TEMPERATE EASTERN NORTH AMERICA AND SOME OF THE SYSTEMS WHICH HAVE BEEN USED IN SUBDIVIDING IT. In discussing the distribution of the plants mentioned in this sketch it will rarely be necessary to go beyond the limits of tem- perate Eastern North America, a region which may be regarded as one of the primary phytogeographic provinces of the earth, since its florais mostly endemic. Out of some 6000 known species of vascular plants indigenous to this part of the continent, probably all but a few hundred are confined to it, being hemmed in on all sides by barriers of various kinds: the arctic climate on the north, the tropical climate on the south, the ocean on the east and partly on the south, and the arid region on the west. For subdividing the flora of temperate Eastern North Amer- ica on geographical lines several different methods have been employed. Among them are those based on political boundaries, parallels of latitude, altitude, temperature, drainage basins, and geological formations. The first two are probably the most common, but have little natural significance and are used mainly for convenience. Altitude and temperature vary gradually from place to place, so that the boundaries of zones based on these factors are purely arbitrary, except in a few special cases such as the seashore and the frost line. Drainage basins have little to recommend them, from a phytogeographical standpoint, except definiteness of boundaries; but the areas of different geological formations—in temperate Eastern North America but not necessarily in all other parts of the world — seem to answer the purpose best of all, as will be shown below. The intimate relations between vegetation on the one hand, and soil and topography (which are obviously correlated with geology) on the other, are evident to every observer of geographi- cal phenomena. Certain types of soil and topography are often fairly constant throughout considerable areas, and usually ter- minate more or less abruptly at their edges, so a classification 7 8 HARPER of vegetation based on these factors is in many respects ideal. While the same or similar types of soil and topography sometimes occur in connection with different geological formations, yet in that case they are often separated by such distances or barriers — that plants cannot readily migrate from one formation to the other, and the floras associated with them are then perceptibly different. In Georgia, and especially in the coastal plain, where most of the writer’s field work has been carried on, similar types of topography and vegetation seem almost invariably to indicate similar geological conditions; and for an area of that size and character a phytogeographical classification based on geology seems to be the only logical one. This may not be equally true everywhere else, but the same principles have been recognized by Hollick on Staten Island and elsewhere in that neigh- borhood, Gattinger in Tennessee, Smith in Alabama and Florida, and Hilgard in Mississippi, and given prominence in their writings. Several other botanists and geologists have noted the intimate relations between botany and geology in a superficial way, but there have been comparatively few attempts in this country as yet to generalize observations of this kind or to explain them. 1The following easily overlooked references to this subject, most of them written before. ‘‘ecology’’ became popular, and not exhaustive enough to be mentioned in the bibliography at the end of this paper, may be of interest: Porcher, F.P. Resources of the Southern Fields and Forests. xi. 1869. Flagg, Wilson. Woodsand Byways of New England, pp. 4, 5, 31, 32. 1872. Hollick, Arthur. Relations between geological formations and the distribution of plants [on Staten Island, N.Y.]. Bull. Torrey Club 7: 14. 15. Feb., 1880. Britton. N. L. On the existence of a peculiar flora on the Kittatinny Mountains of northern New Jersey. Bull. Torrey Club 11: 126-128. 1884. Beton: N. L. Note on the flora of the Kittatinny Mountains. Bull. Torrey Club, 142 187-189. 1887. Raymond, R. W. Indicative plants. Trans. Am. Inst. Mining Engineers, 15:644-660. 7. 1-3. 1887. Abstractin Bull. Torrey Club 14: 127. 1887. Evans, H. A. The relation of the flora to the geological formations in Lincoln County, Kentucky. Bot. Gaz. 14: 310-314. 1880. Coville, F. V. The effect of soil on the distribution of plants. Rep. Geol. Surv. Ark., 1888+: 246-247. 1891 ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 9 Most of the papers hitherto published on the subject deal only with the more immediate and obvious effects of geology on vegetation, acting mainly through the physical and! chemical composition of the soil. The more remote and subtle—but no less important—effects of topography and geological history have not attracted so much attention, but it is one of the pur- poses of this thesis to discuss some of them for the region under consideration. GEOLOGICAL DIvISsONS. As the geological divisions of Eastern North America are not often mentioned in botanical literature, a brief outline of them may be of interest. In the order of age, they are as follows: 1. The Metamorphic region, with two subdivisions, the Pied- mont and the Blue Ridge. The former extends nearly in a straight line from Pennsylvania to eastern central Alabama, in a belt averaging about 100 miles in width. Its underlying rocks are mostly granite and gneiss and its soil a deep red clay. It contains little if any limestone. That portion of the Piedmont region included in Georgia is known as Middle Georgia.? It is everywhere hilly, but scarcely mountainous, though a few Dall, W. H. (Geology of Florida). Bull. 84, U.S. Geol. Surv. 95 (near top), 1892. Small, J. K. Studies in the Botany of the Southeastern United States— I. Bull. Torrey Club, 21:15, 1894. (One reference only.) Maxon, W.R. On the occurrence of the Hart’s Tongue in America. Fernwort Papers 30-46. 1900. Mohr, C. The spontaneous flora of Alabama inits relation to agricult- ure. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 6: 821-824. 1901. Macbride, T. H. The Alamogordo Desert Science II. 21: go-97. Jan. 20, 1905. 1For recent maps showing some of these divisions see one by W. M. Davis in Mill’s International Geography, p. 7109, fig. 353, 1900; also fig. 191 in Dodge’s Advanced Geography, 1905. * For some notes on the flora of a typical portion of Middle Georgia see Bull. Torrey Club 27: 320-341. 1900. The plants of the corre- sponding portion of Alabama have been enumerated by Prof. Earle in Bull. 119, Ala. Agric. Exp. Sta, 1902. The physiography and geology of Middle Georgia are discussed by T. L. Watson in Bull. Geol. Surv. Ga. 9A: 60-65 1902. 10 HARPER isolated peaks (called ‘‘monadnocks”’ by physiographers), of which Stone Mountain! is a magnificent example, stand out conspicuously above the rest of the country. The Blue Ridge, extending in its typical development from Pennsylvania to Georgia, borders the Piedmont region on the northwest and includes the highest mountains of Eastern North America. The rocks of this region are chiefly quartzite, sandstone, and marble, and their elevation above the more obdurate granite is explained by the great Appalachian uplift which took place at the end of the Paleozoic period.? The whole Metamorphic region has doubtless been covered with vegetation since Paleozoic or early Cretaceous times, which cannot be said of any other part of Eastern North America. There are many evidences, other than geological, of the great antiquity of this flora, the beginning of which doubtless ante- dates the appearance of all species of plants now living. 2. The Paleozoic region. This is bounded on the southeast by the Blue Ridge. On the north, just beyond the Ohio River, it is overlaid by glacial drift, and on the west it passes beneath the coastal plain. Three divisions of it are distinguished, though not very sharply defined. The Appalachian Valley region is a rather narrow belt extending from Pennsylvania to Central Alabama, and characterized by long narrow parallel ridges with broad level valleys between them. Northwest of that is the Cumberland plateau, with broad table-lands and narrow valleys, and still farther northwest this flattens out into the ‘“‘barrens”’ and prairies of Kentucky and adjoining states. The Palezo- zoic rocks are mostly limestone, sandstone and shale, and the vegetation covering them probably dates from Cretaceous or. Tertiary times. 3. The Coastal Plain. This is defined as that part of the North American continent underlaid by Cretaceous and Tertiary rocks and adjacent to the Atlantic and Gulf coasts.3 It prob- -1See Bull. Torrey Club 28: 454, pl. 29, 7. I. got. 2 For a recent ecological study of the flora of a typical portion of the Blue Ridge see Harshberger, Bot. Gaz. 36: 241-258, 368-383. 1903. >The formations of the same age in the Great Plains region and west of there have nothing to do with the coastal plain. THE ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 11 ably has no counterpart in any other part of the world. In its typical development it extends from about the mouth of the Hudson River uninterruptedly to the Rio Grande, and up the Mississippi valley to southern Illinois. Most of Long Island, Cape Cod, and the southern islands of New England also belong to the coastal plain, strictly speaking, but as these extreme northeastern portions are mostly covered with glacial drift, and otherwise anomalous, they are not usually treated with the rest. Just what becomes of the coastal plain at its other end, in Mexico, is not definitely known, but it probably does not extend very far into that country. The boundary between the coastal plain and the Piedmont region which adjoins it all along the Atlantic slope is very distinct and unmistakable, as has already been pointed out,' and is known as the fall-line. Practically the whole of the coastal plain is or has been covered with a superficial formation known as the Lafayette, believed to be of Pliocene age, and much of that is in turn overlaid with a Pleistocene formation, the Columbia. The importance of these two formations from a phytogeographical standpoint has been quite generally overlooked. They not only constitute the present soils of the coastal plain, making it difficult to trace the older formations beneath except by their topography, but they also show that the present flora of that region must be of very recent origin, differing greatly in this respect from that of the older regions just mentioned. 4. Subtropical Florida. The southern extremity of Florida, including the Everglades and a good deal of contiguous territory, is sometimes regarded as an extension of the coastal plain and sometimes as a distinct province. It is believed to be of Pleistocene age, and is certainly not covered by the superficial formations above mentioned. This alone would be enough to make its soil and flora very different from that of the genuine coastal plain, but it happens also that this is the only part of the Eastern United States free from frost, so it is an open - question whether the peculiar flora of this region (said to resemble that of the neighboring Antilles as much as it does 1 Bull. Torrey Club 31: 10. 1904; Rhodora 4: 69. 1905. 12 HARPER that of the rest of the continent) is due more to soil or to climate. 5. The glaciated region. The greater part of temperate Eastern North America north of latitude 40° is covered with many feet of glacial drift, obliterating most of the pre-existing geological and topographic features. This is believed to be approximately con- temporaneous with or even subsequent to the Columbia form- ation of the coastal plain. The flora of the glaciated region has several features in common with that of the coastal plain, as the writer has recently pointed out,! and this is doubtless due largely to the similarity in age. The older formations are exposed at many points in the glaciated region, however, and this gives a greater diversity to the flora than it would other- wise have. (A few comparatively small areas of Triassic rocks, located chiefly in New Jersey and North Carolina, have not been men- tioned above because they are too limited in extent to have any peculiar flora of their own. They are usually classed with the Piedmont region, which they immediately adjoin.) | Sufficient data are not yet available for estimating with any degree of accuracy the number of indigenous species of plants in the several natural divisions above outlined, and the pro- portion of species endemic to each. In order to do this the known ranges of all the species would have to be worked out in terms of physiographic divisions, instead of political divisions as has been customary hitherto, and that would require years of study. It is perhaps safe to assume, however, that in the coastal plain, between (but not including) the glaciated portion in the northeast, the subtropical portion in the southeast, and the arid portion in the southwest, there are in the neighborhood of 3000 native species of flowering plants. The number of endemic species assigned to a given region depends largely on the interpretation of specific limits, but the coastal plain pro- bably contains a larger endemic element than any one other division, and perhaps as many endemics as all the rest of temperate Eastern North America combined. 1 Rhodora 7: 69-80. April, 1905. z i ¢ THE ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 13 The conclusion is almost irresistible that nearly all these endemic forms (whether species or groups of higher or lower rank) in the coastal plain must be of very recent origin. For they could not have existed in their present habitats in Pleisto- cene times, when the coastal plain was nearly all submerged, and if at that time they grew farther inland they have left no trace of the fact. The considerable number of species which are not quite confined to the coastal plain but grow also at a few isolated localities in adjoining regions are perhaps of equally recent origin, though the evidence is not so conclusive in such cases. THe COASTAL PLAIN OF GEORGIA IN PARTICULAR. There is no more typical portion of the whole coastal plain than the 35,000 square miles of it included in Georgia, where it constitutes the southern three-fifths of the state. This area (popularly known as South Georgia) is about equally divided between the Atlantic and Gulf slopes. It is equally distant from Long Island and southern New England, where the coastal plain formations are mostly buried beneath the glacial drift, and southern Texas, where the aridity of the climate causes an equally profound modification of the coastal-plain flora.! The fact that it is also midway between the highest mountains of Eastern North America, which have presumably been continu- ously covered with vegetation since before the coastal plain existed, and subtropical Florida, where most of our representa- tives of tropical species and genera probably first entered this country, has doubtless had a marked influence on the present composition of the vegetation of south Georgia. Almost all divisions of the coastal plain strata are represented in Georgia, and each is usually recognizable by its characteristic topography and flora. In general the oldest strata come to the surface (disregarding for the present the overlying Lafayette and Columbia formations) farthest inland and at the highest altitude. The strata are believed to have an average seaward slope of 30 or 40 feet to the mile, and their outcropping areas form elongated 1 See Bray, U. S. Bureau of Foresiry, Bull. 47: 15, 29. 1904 14 HARPER belts approximately parallel to the coast, as indicated on the map (See frontispiece). South Georgia contains the following well-marked natural subdivisions. 1. Fall-line sand-hills. Extending with some interruptions along the fall-line, not only in Georgia! but in the Carolinas? and apparently also in Alabama,’ is a rather narrow belt of sand- hills, standing higher than the rest of the coastal plain on one side and the Piedmont region on the other. (Between the Flint and Chattahoochee rivers the summits of the fall-line sand-hills are nearly if not quite 700 feet above sea-level, being probably the highest part of the coastal plain in the Eastern United States.) The soil of the sand-hills is nearly pure sand, apparently of the Columbia formation (though a much greater age is assigned to it by some geologists). The maximum depth of the sand is unknown, but there is no reason to suppose that it constitutes the whole of the hills from top to bottom. The topography of the sand- hill belt was probably carved out during the Tertiary period, and then during the Pleistocene submergence covered with the mantle of sand which effectually protects the underlying clay or rocks from erosion. It is not yet known why sand-hills of this type are confined to the vicinity of the fall-line, or what relation they béar to the Cretaceous and Eocene rocks. Their flora is very similar to that of the river and creek sand-hills which will be dis- cussed in some of the succeeding pages. 2. Cretaceous. The Cretaceous is not very well represented in Georgia, comprising only about 2% of the area of the coastal plain. It is extensive enough to give character to the topog- raphy only west of the Flint River. East of there it is found outcropping in some ravines near the fall-line, but cannot very well be shown on a map. The Cretaceous rocks in Georgia are mostly argillaceous, with some traces of calcium carbonate, and have usually a characteristic gray color. (The Selma Chalk or Rotten Lime- 1 Bull. Torrey Club 31: 10-12. 1904. 2 orreya 3: 120.) 1903. 3 Smith, Geol. of the Coastal Plain of Ala. 349. 1894; Mohr, Plant Lije"of "Ala. 96-97. Igot. a An j P } ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 15 stone, which is said to besuch a notable feature of the Creta- ceous region of Alabama, forming the ‘‘ black prairies”’ there,! is not known in Georgia.) The topography suggests that of the Appalachian Valley on a reduced scale, the valleys being broader than the ridges, showing that the region has been exposed to erosion a relatively long time.? The soils of this region are mostly derived from the Lafayette and Columbia formations, the former being often (perhaps usually) not more than ten feet in thick- ness, and the latter on top of it still less, or wanting. 3. Eocene. The Eocene region is quite extensive in Georgia, reaching entirely across the state and covering about 18% of the coastal plain. Geologists recognize several subdivisions, Mid- wayan, Chickasawan or Sabine, Claibornian, etc., but these do not differ much from each other in surface features except that the Sabine is usually more level than the rest, and contains a few shallow ponds. The Eocene rocks in Georgia were probably mostly limestone when first formed, but now those that crop out (except on river bluffs) are usually almost completely silicified, and their hardness gives rise to the most rugged topography in South Georgia. There are many places in the Eocene region where the topog- raphy and flora are strikingly similar to those of the Piedmont region a hundred miles farther north. Probably 99% of the Eocene strata are covered by the red loam of the Lafayette for- mation, often of considerable thickness. The Columbia is not so extensive here as in the Cretaceous region, probably because it has long ago been washed off the steep hillsides, or because the Eocene region stands higher and was not all submerged in the Columbia epoch. } - In both the Cretaceous and Eocene regions of Georgia broad- leaved forests predominate, and their aspect is quite like that of the Middle Georgia forests, but they are readily distinguished by the constant presence of a few species confined to the coastal plain, such as Pinus glabra, Dendropogon usneoides, Uvularia Floridana, Smilax pumila, Myrica cerifera, Quercus laurifolia, 1 See Mohr, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 6: 97-105. got. 2 For some notes on its flora see Bull. Torrey Club 30: 286-287. 1903. 16 HARPER Magnolia grandiflora, and Sebastiana ligustrina.| And in almost ~ any river-swamp in the Eocene region we can find Taxodimm distichum, Sabal glabra, Planera aquatica, and Brunnichia cirrhosa, whose ranges (in Georgia at least) terminate abruptly at the fall- line. Furthermore, on almost every square mile of South Georgia are sandy bogs containing still other species which rarely or never cross the fall-line. 4. Lower Oligocene. Next to the Eocene region, and appar- ently without any sharp demarcation between them, is the area of the Lower Oligocene formations (Jacksonian, Vicksburgian, etc.). Including the Jacksonian (which by many geologists is placed in the Eocene, but from a phytogeographical standpoint seems more closely allied with the Vicksburgian), this division covers about 19% of the area of South Georgia. The Lower Oligocene rocks are partly soft limestone and partly siliceous. In that part known as the lime-sink region (which is mostly near the Flint River), caves, subterranean streams, large ponds and smaller basin-like depressions are common. Surface streams are rare; one can often travel miles without seeing running water. The topography is comparatively level, with rarely anything thatcan be called ahill. Practically the whole ~ region, except on steep banks of streams, is covered with the Lafayette and Columbia formations, but the influence of the limestone beneath is sometimes noticeable in the vegetation. In this region the pine-barrens (7. e., the forests in which Pinus palustris is more abundant than all other arborescent species combined, and the trees do not grow thickly enough to sensibly diminish the quantity of light which reaches the ground) begin, and from there to the coast they cover about nine-tenths of the country. The pine-barrens do not begin suddenly, however. At their inland limit the pines are mixed with a considerable quantity of oaks, mostly of two species with broad leaves rusty beneath (Q. Marylandica and Q. digitata). Toward the coast the quantity of oaks becomes less, and the two species just men- tioned are gradually replaced by others with narrower or paler or more glossy leaves (Q. brevifolia, Q. Margaretta, Q. Catesbet). See also Bull. Torrey Club 31: 15-16. 1904; 32: 453. 1905. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 17/ The term “‘pine-barrens’’ is not the most appropriate im- aginable, and I am not sure that it isever used in conversation by the present inhabitants of South Georgia, who usually say “piney woods” instead. But the term was undoubtedly used in South Carolina and elsewhere a century or more ago, as is shown by the writings of Catesby, Drayton, Elliott, F. A. Michaux, and others, and it is so common in botanical literature that I have retained itin this work. The name was doubtless given by the early settlers through a misapprehension (owing to the sparsity of trees), as was the case in the “barrens”’ of Kentucky, about which Prof. Shaler says:: “It is an interesting his- torical fact that the first settlers of the country deemed the untimbered limestone lands of western Kentucky infertile, and therefore gave to them the name of ‘barrens.’ They were led to the conclusion that these lands were sterile by the fact that in their previous experience the only untimbered lands with which they had come in contact were unsuited to agriculture.”’ 5. Chattahoochee. Lying just above the Vicksburgian Oligocene in the geological column, and apparently separated from it by a slight unconformity,? is the Chattahoochee for- mation, the oldest member of the Upper Oligocene series. Its area in Georgia is too small to be shown on the map, but it crops out at the base of the Altamaha Grit (the next division) at several points in Decatur County (particularly near the corner of the state,? in a gorge near Faceville,t and at the Lime Sink or Forest Falls*), also at the ‘‘Rock House” (a phenomenon similar to Forest Falls on a smaller scale) about two miles east of Wenona in Dooly County, at. Upper Seven ‘Ann. Rep. U. S. Geol. Surv. 121: 325. 18091. *See Pumpelly, Am. Jour. Sct. III. 46: 445-447. Dec., 1893; Foerste, Am. Jour. Sci. III. 48: 41-54. July, 1894; Vaughan, Science II. 12: 873-875. Dec. 7, 1900. ® Bull. Torrey Club 32: 149, 150. 1905. 4 Foerste, Am. Jour. Sct, III. 48: 51-54. 1894; McCallie, Bull. Geol. Surv. Ga. 5: 51. 18096. 5 Bull. Torrey Club 30: 289-290. 1903. See also the papers by Foerste and McCallie just cited. ‘aa —_ > 18 HARPER Bluffs on the Ocmulgee River (near the mouth of House Creek !) in Wilcox County, and probable at corresponding points on the Oconee and Ogeechee rivers. The Chattahoochee formation seems to be rich in plant-food, and wherever it crops out there is a fine growth of angiospermous trees, about which more will be said later. 6. Altamaha Grit. The formation with which this sketch is chiefly concerned lies just above the Chattahoochee at several places, and for this reason has been considered next to it in age by some geologists. (It is not known to contain any recog- nizable fossils, and its age therefore cannot be determined in the usual way.) But on the other hand nothing older than Lafayette has ever been seen above the Grit, and 1t seems more reasonable to regard the latter as among the more recent for- mations of the coastal plain, probably as Pliocene. There is every reason to believe that the Altamaha Grit is the equiv- alent of the Grand Gulf formation of the states farther west,2 whose age has been equally in doubt,? but as the actual con-- tinuity of these two formations has not yet been traced it seems best to retain the appropriate and distinctive name Alta- hama Grit for the present, until it is proved to be a synonym of the earlier (and somewhat misleading) designation, Grand Gulf. The region in which the unmistakable exposures and char- acteristic topography of the Altamaha Grit occur corresponds approximately with the middle third of the coastal plain of Georgia. Its inland edge is marked nearly all the way across the state by an escarpment which is one of the notable features of the pine-barren region. In Decatur County the Grit stands 200 feet or so above the soft rocks of the lime-sink region, but east of the Ocmulgee River, where the Lower Oligocene rocks are harder (the lime-sink phase seems to be wanting there), the escarpment is not so conspicuous. 1 Dall & Harris, Bull. U. S Geol. Surv. 84: 81. 1802. 2 See Bull. Torrey Club 32: 144, 145. 1905. 3 For references to a discussion of this matter see Bull. Torrey Club 32: 106 (footnote). 1905. : ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 19 The topography and flora of this region will be discussed in detail farther on. 7. Uppermost Oligocene. Just south of the Altamaha Grit country in Decatur and Thomas Counties, and perhaps also in Brooks and Lowndes, are strata belonging to the Alum Bluff group,! which is probably the uppermost member of the Oligocene series in Georgia. It passes southward into Florida, where it is said to be conformably overlaid by Miocene strata toward the Gulf. Its eastern and western limits are not known. The rock of this region is an impure limestone, and the topography is quite rugged, compared with the rest of the coastal plain. In Decatur County (I have not studied it much elsewhere), the soil is almost entirely red loam, presumably Lafayette, and broad-leaved forests (in which Magnolia grandzflora is usually conspicuous) predominate, Pinus palustris being correspondingly scarce. The whole aspect of the country strongly suggests the Eocene region a hundred miles farther north.? 8. Southern Lime-sink region. In the southern part of Lowndes County (and probably also in Brooks and Echols and adjacent Florida) is a lime-sink region having much the same character as the Lower Oligocene lime-sink region already men- tioned, and containing some of the largest ponds in the state. Geologically this region seems to have Lower Oligocene lime- stone strata near enough to the surface to exert a decided influence on the topography, but overlaid by a thin layer of Altamaha Grit, and doubtless also by Lafayette and Columbia in most places. g. Flat pine-barrens. Towards the coast the Altamaha Grit region passes gradually into a country so nearly level that there is little distinction between wet and dry pine-barrens, swamps, ponds, and streams (except the rivers). This region includes Okefinokee Swamp, and stretches coastward about to tide-water. It also extends westward at least to Lowndes County, and north- eastward and southward beyond the borders of the state. It 1 According to Vaughan, Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 213: 392. 1903. 2 For a few additional notes on the Uppermost Oligocene region see Bull. Torrey Club, 30: 289-335. 1903. 3 See Bull. Torrey Club 31: 14, 15, 7. 3. 1904. 20 HARPER comprises about 22% of the area of South Georgia, and its average altitude is about 100 feet above sea-level. The Altamaha Grit or some phase of it probably underlies all the flat pine-barrens, but as it is everywhere covered to such a depth with Lafayette and Columbia that no rock outcrops are known, and the topography is appreciably different, it seems best to keep the flat country apart from the typical Altamaha Grit region for the purposes of the present discussion. Pinus palustris is the prevailing tree in this as in other pine- barren regions, and the whole flora is a good deal like that of the Altamaha Grit region, but probably not so rich, on account of the less diversified topography. 10. Littoral Region. Lastly there is the maritime or littoral region, including the islands and marshes along the coast and part of the mainland of the six maritime counties. Little is known of its geology except that the surface is all of the Columbia formation (mostly sand but sometimes clay), or recent alluvium along the rivers, while the Lafayette is either absent or buried out of reach by younger formations. Pine-barrens are not typical of this region. Sand-dunes, salt and brackish marshes, and dense forests of live-oaks and other angiospermous evergreens are more common. Sabal Palmetto is a characteristic tree. The phytogeographical features do not differ conspicuously from those described by Kearney on. the coast of North Carolina, Cokerin South Carolina, Mohr in Alabama, and Lloyd and Tracy in Mississippi and Louisiana. THE ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION IN DETAIL. LOCATION AND BOUNDARIES. Up to 25 years ago the particular region under consideration seems to have been entirely unknown to science. In 1881 Dr. E. W. Hilgard‘ published a geological map of a part of the coastal plain of the southeastern states, showing among other things a few thousand square miles of “‘ Miocene(?) sandstone”’ in south- eastern Georgia, corresponding for the most part with what we now know asthe Altamaha Grit region. There is no reference to this area in the accompanying text, but it was probably in- serted on the authority of Dr. R. H. Loughridge, who was about that time making a geological and agricultural survey of Georgia for the U.S. Census office. In Dr. Loughridge’s report, published in 1884 in the 6th volume of the final reports of the Tenth Cen- sus, the area of this “‘sandstone’’ was mapped in more detail, and some outcrops of it were described. Its geological posi- tion was also recognized. The name Altamaha Grit was given to the formation by Dr. W. H. Dall? in 1892, after it had been studied along the Ocmulgee and Altamaha rivers by Mr. Frank Burns, of the U. S. Geo- logical Survey. Butits boundaries were very imperfectly known, mostly on account of the great scarcity of outcrops, until inves- tigated from a phytogeographical standpoint by the writer in the summer of 1903% and spring of 1904. And in the latter year Mr. S. W. McCallie of the Geological Survey of Georgia also became interested in it, and discovered some additional out- erops of the characteristic rock, particularly in Johnson County. Our present knowledge of the areal distribution of this and other geological formations of the coastal plain of Georgia (omit- ting subdivisions of the Cretaceous and Eocene) is shown on the Met OUT. SGl. Wily 22) pl. © 3. 2 Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 84: 81. 3See Bull. Torrey Club 32: 141-147. 1905. 21 22 HARPER accompanying map (frontispiece). The Altamaha Grit covers about 11,000 square miles, including parts of twenty counties, midway between the fall-line and the coast. Its inland edge is quite sharply defined, always by a change in topography and a less conspicuous but unmistakable change in flora, and in many places by a bold escarpment besides. Its southern boundary in Decatur and Thomas Counties is pretty well marked by the change from open pine-barrens to the broad-leaved forests of the Uppermost Oligocene region, but toward the southeast it is impossible in the light of present knowledge to say just where the Altamaha Grit terminates or disappears and the flat country begins. This uncertainty makes little difference for the pur- poses of this work, however, for very few species reach their inland limits in the debatable territory. Geodetically the Altamaha Grit region (if confined to Georgia), is included between 30° 45’ and 32° 50’ north latitude and 81° 25’ and 84° 50’ west longitude. In altitude above sea-level it ranges from about 4oo feet where the escarpment intersects the Atlantic and Gulf divide to 50 or 75 feet on the southeast, and there are consequently no alpine or maritime elements inits flora. GEOLOGY AND SOILS. The Altamaha Grit is probably of Pliocene age, as stated above. Outcrops of the characteristic rock are comparatively rare, constituting probably not more than one hundredth of one per cent of the entire area, but they have been seen or heard of by the writer in nearly every county in the region. The outcrops occur either on hillsides in the open pine-barrens, in beds of streams, or on river-banks. The hillside outcrops show usually a fine-grained conglomerate consisting of small quartz pebbles and grains of sand cemented together with argil- laceous material. Chemically it must be composed of silica and alumina, with some iron oxide, but very little if any calcium carbonate. A fresh surface of the Grit (at least the upland phase of it) is yellowish with coarse red mottlings, but it all weathers to a ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 23 dull reddish brown, almost exactly the color of pine bark (a very appropriate resemblance, one might say).! The rock is not very hard, and can easily be broken up with suitable tools. It finds some use locally for curbing and foundations. Where it is exposed on river-banks (near Mount Vernon and Lumber City for instance) it has quite a different appearance from the hillside outcrops, being apparently softer and more homogeneous, with a greenish tinge. But many other coastal plain rocks show an equal diversity between their river-bank and upland outcrops. When thoroughly decomposed by atmospheric agencies the Grit can often hardly be distinguished from the Lafayette loam, and in railroad cuts and other artificial excavations which ex- pose the indurated Grit it issometimes impossible to say whether there is any Lafayette above it or not. The Lafayette probably covers more than 99% of the Altamaha Grit region, but its presence cannot easily be proved, for the reason just stated, and also because neither it nor the Grit is fossiliferous. Little if anything is known as to its maximum thickness in this region. In composition it is a loam, containing probably as much sand as clay. Farther inland it is often brick-red, but in the Altamaha Grit region, and in pine-barrens generally, its color is considerably lighter and might be de- scribed as terra-cotta. The Columbia formation is nearly everywhere present, varying in thickness from 25 feet or more in the sand-hills to nothing on rock outcrops and on some of the ridges. It consists of nearly pure sand, probably containing very little plant-food. Where not mixed with humus it is white or very pale buff. The distinction between the Lafayette and Columbia formations is very familiar to the natives, who know that if they want clay for any purpose they can get it anywhere by digging through a few inches or feet of sand. Unlike the older parts of the coastal plain, the Altamaha Grit region contains almost no traces of limestone, judging from the nature of the vegetation. See also Bull. Torrey Club, 32: 144. 1905. 24 HARPER TOPOGRAPHY AND DRAINAGE. The topography of the region under consideration is typically “rolling,’’ and quite pleasing to the eye, in comparison with the flatness which characterizes most pine-barren regions. But there are no jagged outlines, or even steep-sided gullies or ravines as in the older parts of the coastal plain. The ridges rarely culminate in peaks, and the valleys rarely if ever terminate in ponds or depressions. A straight line drawn across the country in any direction (of which the railroads furnish numerous ex- cellent examples), would cross on an average two or three valleys to the mile, each perhaps 20 or 39 feet lower than the intervening ‘ ridges. In some places the country is quite flat for several square miles, as may be seen around Collins in Tattnall County, also in the eastern edge of Irwin County near the sources of the Satilla River, and more commonly toward the coastward edge of our territory. Such flat areas seem to be always plateaus, and never valleys, showing that the topography is comparatively young, as we should expect. Ponds are pretty well distributed over the whole region, es- pecially in the flat spots, but they are entirely wanting over hundreds of square miles, particularly in the northernmost counties. As has been noted elsewhere, none of the ordinary ponds are deep enough to retain water throughout the year, and strictly aquatic plants are therefore absent from them. The cause of these numerous ponds is not definitely known. The presence of similar depressions in other parts of the coastal plain is often directly traceable to underlying limestone, but the Altamaha Grit region is singularly free from anything of this kind. There are in the region a very few examples (I have seen one near Douglas and heard of another near Statesboro) of “bottomless” ponds, or “‘lime-sinks’’ as the natives call them, but they have little in common with the genuine lime-sinks near the Flint River. At the one near Douglas there is nothing in the color of the water or in the nature of the vegetation around its edges to indicate the presence of any calcium carbonate. In the typical rolling country every little valley contains a 1 Bull. Torrey Club 32: 146. 1905. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 25 small and often intermittent branch,! bordered by more or less swamp.? In some cases the very head of a branch is not surround- ed by swamp, but is occupied by moisture-loving herbs. Sucha place is known as a “‘dreen.’’3 The branches of course unite into larger streams (creeks and rivers) at longer intervals. A most striking feature of the Altamaha Grit region, and in Georgia mostly confined to it, is the sand-hills, which border the swamps of nearly all the creeks and rivers. With few exceptions (such as Rocky Creek in Tattnall County, House Creek in Wilcox, and the Ochlocknee River in Thomas), the sand-hills are all on the left (northeast) sides of the streams to which they belong. The sand-hills consist merely of homogeneous deposits of Columbia sand, sometimes at least 25 feet deep and over a mile wide, bordering the streams. The fact that they are called hills 1The term “branch,” as used universally throughout Georgia and doubtless in adjacent states, and to some extent as far north as Maryland and Indiana, is synonymous with ‘‘brook” in New England and vicinity.’ “Branch’’ in this sense is rarely seen in print, and might be considered by some as a mere provincialism, but the only reason ‘“‘brook’’ has the preference is that it happens to be used in the thickly settled parts of the English -speaking world, where more literature to the square mile has been produced than anywhere else. Abbot in his Georgia Insects (p. 25), published in London in 1797, mentions “‘rivulets, or branches, as they are called in America,’’ and in F. A. Michaux’s North American Sylva, pub- lished early in the 19th century, there are frequent references to branch. swamps. (See for instance under Gordonia Lasianthus in the third volume of the original French edition, where he speaks of ‘“‘les Branchs swamps, marais longs et étroits, qui traversent dans toutes sortes de directions les Pinieres, Pines barrens.’’) 2 The word “‘swamp’”’ is rather loosely defined in the dictionaries. But throughout south Georgia it almost invariably means a wet place full of trees. For the treeless wet places, sometimes called swamps in the North,we already have such words as ‘‘marsh,”’ ‘‘bog,’’ and ‘‘meadow,”’ so there is no good reason why the definition of ‘‘swamp”’ should not be restricted as here indicated. It should be borne in mind that swamps are much more abundant in the coastal plain than in any other part of the United States, so the natives of that part of the country are in a much better position to know exactly what a swamp is than are those who live else- where. 3 A word of local application, doubtless a corruption of ‘‘drain,’’ but not exactly synonymous with it.. \ 26 HARPER does not indicate that they are higher than the country on both sides, but merely that they have a decided slope on one side (toward the stream). They are most delightful places to explore, being free or nearly free from mud, dust, briers, snakes, mosqui- toes and other discomforts, and on them the botanist continually encounters pleasant surprises in the way of rare plants. Their continuity lengthwise of the stream is interrupted by occasional tributary streams, but otherwise one may walk for miles on them almost without any trouble. The origin of these fluvial sand-hills, and the reasons why they are so largely confined to the Altamaha Grit region and to one side of the streams, are as little known as the analogous problems in connection with the fall-line sand-hills. It happens that most of them lie off the main highways of travel, and con- sequently have been little studied by other persons than the writer. One may travel by the usual routes from Macon to Savannah, Brunswick, Valdosta, or Thomasville, right across the Altamaha Grit region, without seeing a sand-hill. On the two most direct routes from Savannah to Jacksonville, sand-hills are seen only at the Altamaha River, and going from Savannah to Waycross and Bainbridge, a distance of 237 miles, the only sand-hills crossed are those of the Altamaha and Satilla rivers. But from the newer railroads of South Georgia (four or five hundred miles of which have been built since 1900), sand-hills are visible at many points. There seem to be very few unmistakable allusions to stream sand-hills in literature dealing with other states, so but little idea can be had of their total geographical distribution. The only “sand-hills’? mentioned as such in Dr. Mohr’s Plant Life of Alabama (p. 195) cannot be definitely correlated with those under discussion here, but in Dr. Smith’s Report on the Geology of the Coastal Plain of Alabama (pp. 56, 57, 84, etc.,) there are brief descriptions of such features, located in parts of the state which Dr. Mohr probably never explored. There are a few meager evidences of the same sort of thing in South Carolina. Elliott,! 1Bot. S. C. &@ Ga., 2: 676. 1824. See also Curt. Bot. Mag, 54: pl. 2758. 1827. | ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA PAT for instance, thus describes a station for Ceratiola ericoides: “Near Murphy’s Bridge on the Edisto it covers a space of three of four hundred yards in width, and two or three miles long, which appears to have been a sand-bank formed by some of the ancient freshets of that river, and on which only lichens, and a few stunted oaks (Q. Catesbez and nigra) are found intermingled with it.” At the base of most sand-hills in our territory is a densely wooded area knownasa‘“‘hammock.’’! A hammock can scarcely be classed as a topographic feature, however, since it is character- ized by its vegetation rather than by topography. The vegeta- tion of hammocks, and of the peculiar intermediate forms known as sand-hammocks, will be discussed at the proper place. Although the topography in the Altamaha Grit country, as in most other parts of the world, has doubtless been determined almost entirely by erosion, yet thereis almost no trace of any erosion going on there at the present time. There are several reasons for this. Before the Columbia period there must have been times when the Lafayette loam which then formed the sur- face was being worn down quite rapidly in places, giving the topography approximately the form it has to-day. But now the porous Columbia sand allows rain-water to sink into the ground almost immediately without disturbing the surface, while at the same time the impervious Lafayette just beneath protects the underlying rocks from decay. Furthermore, the smaller streams are usually so filled with trees, shrubs, and the humus derived from them that they cannot deepen their chan - nels appreciably. Thus we have a topography of unusual stability. The impotence of erosive forces is shown by the appearance of the streams. The branches, creeks, and rivers rising in this region (andin other parts of the coastal plain cov- ered with the Columbia sands) are rarely or nevermuddy. The only sediment they carry ordinarily is finely divided vegetable matter, which gives the water a blackish appearance, just as in the rivers of the glaciated region where analogous soil conditions ‘Fora discussion of the orthography, definition, and geographical dis- tribution of this word see Sczence II. 22: 400-402. Sept. 29, 1905. 28 HARPER prevail.! Some of the rivers traversing the Altamaha Grit, such as the Ohoopee and Canoochee, are bordered in places by sand banks evidently of recent alluvial origin, but these do not necessarily indicate that there is much erosion going on at present. The streams of the Altamaha Grit region may be divided into three classes according to origin, as follows: 1. The rivers which rise north of the fall-line, among the red hills of Middle Georgia, and are consequently always more or less muddy. To this class belong the Ogeechee (which originates such a short distance above the fall-line that it approaches the next class) and the Oconee and Ocmulgee, which unite near the center of the region to form the Altamaha. The Ogeechee is not navigable, but the others are. 2. The rivers and creeks which rise in the Eocene and Lower Oligocene regions of the coastal plain, and are sometimes, but not usually, muddy. To this class belong only the Ohoopee and Little Ocmulgee rivers and some of their tributaries, all finally flowing into the Altamaha. That this class is not more numerous is due to the fact that the Altamaha Grit escarpment is usually so high that not many streams have cut through it, and some of those which do are turned aside until they find a convenient gap. (Note the course of the Ogeechee and Flint rivers in the Lower Oligocene region for instance.) 3. The rivers, creeks, and branches which originate within the Altamaha Grit region, and are rarely if ever muddy. To this class belong the Canoochee, Satilla, Allapaha, Withlacoochee, Little and Ochlocknee rivers, nearly all the creeks, and the innumerable branches. The significance of this classification of streams will be brought out in discussing the vegetation of the swamps ofeach. Different streams differ also in the depths to which they have eroded their channels. The Oconee and Ocmulgee rivers have everywhere cut through the Lafayette and Columbia formations and deep 1 Many persons who have traveled through several degrees of latitude in the Eastern United States hold the erroneous belief that all southern rivers are muddy. But those of Southeast Georgia are just like those of New England, as far as the color of the water is concerned a ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 29 into the underlying rocks. The Ogeechee in the first class, the rivers in the second class, and some of the rivers and creeks in the third class, seem to have cut through the Lafayette in most places, but perhaps not throughout their length, while the branches and smaller creeks flow over beds of Columbia sand. CLIMATE, The following statistics of temperature and rainfall have been compiled by taking the averages of the figures given in the most recent U. S. Weather Bureau reports for fifteen stations in South Georgia in and near the Altamaha Grit region, namely, Albany, Allapaha, Dublin, Fitzgerald, Fleming, Harrison, Hawkinsville, Jesup, Louisville, Millen, Poulan, Quitman, Savannah, Thomas- ville, and Waycross. Average mean temperature (in degrees Fahrenheit) and total rainfall (in inches), by months. Months Jan. |Feb. Mar.|Apr. May Jun. Jul. lAug.| Sep.|Oct. Nov.|Dec. Temperature |48.7 |49.6 |58.4 |65.4 |73.7 179.6 |82.6 | 80.7 76.1 |66.6 |56.9 |50.1 Rainfall Bee ese2 ede val gee 3.0 | 5-3 | 6.3 | OXG)) geo} 320) | 2:4) | 3.5) The same by seasons. Spring | Summer | Autumn Winter Seasons Annual [dieurela= len) (June-Aug.)) (Sept.—Nov.) (Dec.—Feb.) Temperature 65.8 | 80.6 66.2 49.5 | 65.6 Rainfall 10.8 | 18.2 O33 II.9 anes one The averages for the whole of South Georgia would probably correspond very closely with these. It did not seem worth while to give the figures separately for each station, for they do not differ greatly from each other. The lowest average annual temperature included in the above compilations is that of Hawk- -insville, 63.6°, and the highest that of Thomasville, 67°. The driest place on the list seems to be Allapaha, with an average rainfall of 46.1 inches, and the wettest Thomasville, with 54.1. Perhaps the most striking fact in connection with the above 30 HARPER figures is that the summer rainfall is nearly twice as great as that of any other season, and over one-third of the total for the year. This seems to be generally true throughout South Georgia,! but not in Middle Georgia and many places farther north. Snow does not fall in the Altamaha Grit region every year, and the insignificant amount that does fall has so little effect on the vegetation that it may be dismissed from further consider- ation. Statistics showing the maximum and minimum temper- atures, dates of frost, velocity and direction of the wind, humidity, cloudiness, etc., could have been compiled at the expense of con- siderable time and labor, but they would be of little interest in this connection, since the effects of these factors on the vegeta- tion, in comparison with the mean temperature and rainfall, are not striking. P 3 q ; y VEGETATION. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. The Altamaha Grit region is typically a well wooded one. It contains no prairies, lakes, or marshes, and the largest continuous area in it naturally devoid of trees is probably the channel of the Altamaha River, a few hundred feet wide. But while forested throughout, it is typically an unshaded region, for the greater part of the forests consist of pines, which grow far apart 3 and give no shade worth mentioning. Consequently light-loving herbs abound everywhere, and perhaps the most prominent characteristic of the flora as a whole is the prevalence of adap- tations for enduring direct sunlight. For this reason the removal of the forest by lumbermen has little effect on the herbaceous vegetation, a state of affairs quite different from that which ob- tains in the thickly settled and better known parts of the country. 1See Bull. Torrey Club 27: 414. 1900. (The figures for temperature given there, based on observations made from 1878 to 1884, seem to be a little too high.) 2See Bull. Torrey Club 27: 321. 1900. 3In the pine-barrens the trees average from 20 to 50 feet apart, and from any point an unobstructed view of about a quarter of a mile can usually be had in almost any direction. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 31 Both in dry and wet places, not only in the area under con- sideration but in other pine-barren regions, we find plants with well-known devices for protection against excessive transpiration, such as reduced, coriaceous, glaucous, or vertical leaves. From one end of the region to the other, a distance of some 240 miles, the general aspects of soil and topography remain about the same, and we find essentially the same types of vegetation repeated in each county. The slight differences in the composition of the flora of similar habitats in different parts of the region are probably due more to distance than anything else. Differences in climate doubtless have some effect, but probably not as much as distance. It would be hard to find an area of equal extent in the Eastern United States with a more uniformly distributed flora. Probably at least three-fourths of the species known from the whole region may be found in any one ofits counties. In view of these facts it seems safe enough to treat the whole region as a unit in most of the discussions which follow. Causes oF Loca. DIVERSITY. The factors determining the composition of the vegetation of any particular region or locality are extremely complex. The location of each individual plant in the Altamaha Grit region may be considered as due to the combined influence of some or all the factors enumerated in the following synopsis (which has been designed with special reference to the region here discussed, and is therefore not to be regarded as of universal application). A. Present environment. ii, VaVeishantey verage intensity of light (varying with the nattfre of the sur- rounding vegetation, slope of ground, etc.). Range of diurnal variation. Seasonal variations (due to defoliation of deciduous trees, etc). 2. Atmospheric (climatic). Temperature. Average, maximum, minimum, etc. Diurnal and seasonal variations. Humidity. Precipitation. Average annual amount. Seasonal variations. Wind: on HARPER 3. Terrestrial (edaphic). Water. Amount present in soil, or depth if covering the surface. Average. Seasonal variations. Substances held in suspension or solution. Temperature. Movements (especially whether flowing or stationary). Soil and subsoil. Presence or absence of Lafayette. Thickness of Columbia. Alluvium, if any Humus. 4. Organic (biotic). Plants. Equal (associates). Inferior (vines, epiphytes, parasites, etc.). Superior (furnishing nourishment, support, or shade). Animals (man excepted). Beneficial, by Pollination or dissemination. Food for carnivorous plants. Influence on soil and humus. Injurious or destructive. 5. Frequency of fire. B. Past history. Changes in 1. Environment. Climate. Topography and soil, by Elevation and subsidence. Erosion and sedimentation. Accumulation of humus. is) Vegetation itself, by Evolution, mutation, hybridization, etc. Rate of variation, and time elapsed. Extinction. Migration, Agencies and routes. Barriers. Time and space. C. Properties of the species. Adaptations to environment. - Growth and reproduction. Dissemination. Geographical distribution, past and present. Some of these factors are essentially the same throughout the region, as is assumed to be the case for instance with climate, which has just been discussed. Those factors which vary in com- paratively short distances give the flora whatever diversity it has. . ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 33 These variable factors depend almost entirely on local conditions of topography and soil, which are indicated for each habitat dis- cussed below. The extent of many of the factors has never been — ascertained, while of some others it can only be roughly indicated. Local differences of temperature for instance have not. been measured, but these depend mostly on the amount of shade and therefore on the vegetation itself. Historically the whole flora without exception is believed to have come into the region since the Pleistocene period (which may have been not more than ten or fifteen thousand years ago). Many of the species have probably come into existence since that time, as already suggested, while others which are older have found their way in from more or less distant regions. Little is known about the actual facts of migration in the coastal plain, but the study of ranges throws some light on the subject, and in the discussions which follow the probable origin of some of the habitat- groups is suggested by this means. Some of the factors under the third head, such as adaptations to environment, are briefly indicated for each habitat-group, but it is not expedient to discuss*the properties of each species separately where so many are enumerated and so little space can be given toeach. This will be a fruitful field for future investi- gation, especially since so many of these plants are of such restricted range that they have not yet come to the notice of morphologists. In the taxonomic list will be found references to anatomical studies which have been made of some of the same species elsewhere. CLASSIFICATION ACCORDING TO HapsirTat. _ A plant-community is generally understood as an association of plants growing in proximity and subject to the same conditions of soil, temperature, moisture, illumination, and other factors - which go to make up environment. An assemblage of similar plant-communities, not too widely separated to differ essentially in environment, constitutes a habitat-group. There are many analogies between habitat-groups and tax- 34 HARPER onomic groups, such as species, though the latter are mutually exclusive categories and the former often are not. For instance, both are capable of being discovered, described, named, and associated with certain type-localities. Records of both may be preserved by descriptions, photographs, measurements, and other means. Both have their diagnostic characters, with more or less variation and intergradation. Both have passed through pro- cesses of evolution, are self-perpetuating, and are liable to dis- appear through geological or climatic changes of the works of man. New ones may also originate, suddenly or gradually. Both have more or less definite geographical distributions and regions of best development. Both are capable of being subdivided, combined, or relegated to synonymy, with the increase of our knowledge concerning them. MHabitat-groups, like species, can also be aggregated into larger categories, analogous to genera and families. In the following pages about twenty different habitat-groups or kinds of plant-communities are described and analyzed. These it is believed will cover something like 99% of the area under con- - sideration. There are several other kinds of plant-communities in the region, but they are rare and as yet imperfectly understood, and it seems scarcely worth while to describe many of them from single examples, without knowing their variations, any ‘more than a new species should be described from a single ‘specimen. Some of them when better known may be described ain future editions. The accompanying map (fig. 1) shows the actual relationships on the ground of twelve of the principal habitat-groups in an imaginary typical portion of the Altamaha Grit region. It is more or less conventionalized and does not pretend to show the relative area of each. The names used will be explained farther on, when the groups are discussed individually. It is quite possible to give technical names to these groups, as well as to plants, as Dr. Clements has shown,! but in order to do this new names would have to be coined for most of them, a task which may well be left to future investigators. 1 See Olsson-Seffer, Bot. Gaz., 39: 187—193. March, 1905. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 35 23.9 3.3 £ 3-3 F 3° 3 8 s HF 8 WA ets Me he Sh 8 eee tN AG Oe eet ia 8 2 88 Fs 6 tt ees ss sorts 4). Gre Map of an imaginary typical portion of the Altamaha Grit region, showing relative situation of twelve of the principal habitats. R, rock outcrops: DPB, dry pine-barrens; IPB, intermediate pine-barrens; MPB, moist pine-barrens; BS, branch-swamp; CS, creek-swamp; P, cypress pond; S, sand- hills ; SP, sand-hill pond; SB, sand-hill bog ; H, hammock ; NAS, non- alluvial swamp. Scale about 1 : 5000, or approximately a foot to the mile. 36 HARPER METHOD OF TREATMENT OF HABITAT-GROUPS. It has been customary with phytogeographers in discussing a group of plants having the same habitat to treat the component species all alike, arranging them in systematic sequence, or alphabetically, or in no definite order. But this gives no ade- quate idea of their arrangement innature. Inthetreatmenthere adopted I have endeavored by several comparatively simple | devices, the application of which will be self-evident after a little | explanation, to give the reader (especially if he is acquainted with the species mentioned) as vivid an idea as possible of the actual appearance of each group. First of all, the species are separated into four classes, corre- sponding to the four principal strata of vegetation observable in almost any forest, viz., trees, shrubs, vascular herbs, and cellular cryptogams.! These are distinguished by their positions with respect to the lateral margins of the page, the names of trees being placed farthest to the left and the others suc- cessively farther to the right. These four groups are not al- ways sharply defined in nature, however, and some exceptions have to be allowed for. For instance, a few species, such as Magnolia glauca and eight or ten others, are sometimes trees and sometimes shrubs. Again, our two palms, Sabal and Serenoa, are neither trees, shrubs, nor herbs, but I have classed them arbitrarily with the shrubs. And some species which have an evergreen aérial stem and therefore do not come within the strict definition of herbs, such as Mzutchella, Opuntia, Smilax pumila, Dendropogon, Selaginella, and Lycopodium, are classed as herbs on account of their size, and lack of genuine woody tissue. Then I have distinguished evergreens by heavy type,? and vines by italics. Annual, biennial, and perennial herbs, not evergreens, are designated by the customary signs, placed immediately after the names. Perennial woody fungi are distinguished by small capitals. Parasites are placed in 1 The germ of this idea was taken from J. W. Blankinship’s paper on the plant formations of Eastern Massachusetts, in Rhodora for May, 1903. ® In the case of a few species which are partly evergreen the generic name is printed in ordinary and the specific in heavy type. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 37 parentheses and epiphytes in brackets. The following table will illustrate the system: An evergreen tree. A deciduous tree. An evergreen shrub. A deciduous shrub. An evergreen woody vine. A deciduous woody vine. (An evergreen shrubby parasite.) An evergreen herb. [Same, epiphytic.] A perennial herb, not evergreen %. An annual herb ®. A biennial herb @. A perennial herbaceous vine %. (A parasitic annual herbaceous vine,) ©. A bryophyte, on the ground. [Same, epiphytic.] (A PERENNIAL PARASITIC FUNGUS.) A fleshy saprophytic fungus. This morphological classification is significant in more ways than one. It is obvious that the relation of trees, with their deeply penetrating roots, to the soil is different from that of herbs, especially in the coastal plain where soil and subsoil are often quite unlike, as was ably pointed out by Dr. Hilgard many years ago.!| The greater size of trees as compared with other plants, and of shrubs as compared with herbs, also subjects them to a greater variety of conditions above ground, and by reason of their greater age (a century or more in the case of some trees), they are subjected to greater variations of climate. For the Same reason the process of evolution is probably much slower in trees than in annual species, so there may have been a time when the herbaceous flora of the pine-barrens was quite different from what it is now while the arborescent flora was about the same. It is also obvious that evergreens must stand ina different 1 Geology and Agriculture of Mississippi, pp. 202-204. 1860. 38 HARPER relation to environment from non-evergreens, annuals from per- ennials, epiphytes from parasites, etc. By the classification here adopted the dominant members of any habitat-group are at once distinguished from those which are more or less dependent, such as vines, epiphytes, and parasites. By making evergreens con- spicuous as I have done the difference between winter and summer aspects of each group is shown at a glance. Some striking dif- ferences between different hobitaleteuee are also brought out in this way. It is interesting to note that all epiphytes and bryophytes (in our territory at least) are evergreen. Second: keeping the four main classes distinct (for it would not be practicable or fair to compare trees with shrubs, shrubs with herbs, etc.,) the species in each class are arranged as nearly as possible in order of abundance. In all but some of the rarest hab- itat-groups I have placed before each name a number correspond- ing to the number of times I have definitely noted that species in that particular habitat. This gives approximately the rela- tive frequence, which in most cases is very nearly the same as the relative abundance. Some phytogeographers in recent years have undertaken to determine relative abundance by actu- ally counting the individual plants on small measured areas of ground. While this method leaves nothing to be desired as far as accuracy is concerned, it would take an incalculable amount of time to apply it to any considerable portion of the region under discussion, and then the final results might not differ much from those obtained by the simple method adopted here. In the case of a few very abundant species I have not taken the trouble to note them in the field as often as some rarer ones, but it is easy enough to place these in their proper places at the head of their respective lists. Furthermore, after each species, if it is a flowering plant, I have indicated its normal flowering period, as far as known, by figures - representing the months. (In the case of the vascular cryptogams these figures are replaced by 0.) And if the flowers are ento- mophilous the predominating color of the corolla (or other organ which serves to attract insects), is indicated. For this purpose ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 39 the colors are somewhat generalized, purple including both the common pink-purple of Rhexia, Sabbatia, and Gerardia, and the _ deep purple of Vernonia and related genera. The dark purple, such as occurs in the heads of many Composite, is kept distinct, for that probably has a different entomological significance. In the case of anemophilous flowers the color is replaced by a dash. And where a color or time of flowering or other character is not known, or not easily described, it is simply omitted. - If space had permitted it would have been interesting to in- dicate for each species in these lists its total range, its mode of dissemination, and special adaptations to environment, if known. But these data, when known, have been borne in mind and sum- marized for each group as far as possible, the same as if they had been printed. It would perhaps have facilitated reference to repeat each list in systematic sequence, so as to contrast the relative abundance, range, and other characters of related species, and to show at a glance the number of representatives of each genus and family, but this would have greatly increased the size of the work. The names of the species are intended to be the same as in the taxonomic list in the latter part of the work, where author-cita- tions and other bibliographic details will be found. The phe- - nological data are also intended to correspond throughout. How these were obtained will be explained at the beginning of the taxonomic list. The treatment of each habitat-group ends with a partial sum- mation of some of the facts brought out in the lists, together with some of the characters above mentioned which cannot very well be included in the lists for lack of space. The summation of the times of flowering is accomplished graphically in each case, except where the species are too few in number, by means of a phe- nological diagram. It would require too much space to explain _ here the method by which these diagrams are constructed, but they are probably as accurate as the data on which they are based, if not more so. For as the flowering periods are just as likely to be overestimated as underestimated, errors of this kind 40 HARPER tend to counterbalance each other when the statistics are consolidated. These phenological diagrams are somewhat of an innovation, but their importance will probably be better realized when they come into more general use. They will doubtless afford a valu- able means of comparing different habitat-groups in the same region, and similar habitat-groups in different regions. And their application is by no means restricted to habitat-groups, but may be extended to structural and taxonomic groups, such as trees, shrubs, families, genera, etc. By dividing the area of any phenological diagram by the number of species entering into it the average duration of the flowering period for single species is obtained. Although ex- treme accuracy could not be expected on account of the present incompleteness of my observations, the figures obtained in this way for different diagrams are remarkably consistent. Another interesting feature brought out by these diagrams, which might have escaped attention otherwise, is that most of them show a falling-off in the number of species in bloom about the first of May. This is not a peculiarity of the Altamaha Grit region, for I found the same to be true in Middle Georgia in 1896, and I have recently ascertained that in Massachusetts Gn some habitats at least) a similar decrease comes about a month later. This falling-off can hardly be correlated with any climatic feature, but it probably indicates that there is a more or less fundamental distinction between spring and summer flowers, connected most likely with the leafing-out of the deciduous trees. Last but not least, each habitat-group, where practicable, is illustrated by one or more photographs. It should be borne in mind that Nature draws few hard and fast lines, and the nearest we can get to her methods is only an approximation. I may have drawn the limits of the different habitat-groups too far apart in some cases and too closely in others, but further study will always bring us nearer the truth. By the frequency method above described the typical and characteristic members of each group are placed at the head of the list, while those whose membership is more or less ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 4] in doubt come at the foot. Such species as have been noted but once or twice in any particular habitat are usually omitted pending investigation. A species which really belongs in a certain habitat should be observed there repeatedly. Rare plants are not without significance to the phytogeographer, but caution should be used in attempting to draw any conclu- sions from them. We are now ready to consider the several habitat-groups in- dividually and in detail. It is not possible to arrange these groups, any more than taxonomic groups, in a space of a single dimension (a linear sequence) and still have each immediately adjoining its nearest relatives. A space of two dimensions would be better, and three dimensions would probably be ideal. A diagram at the end of the detailed discussion shows the relations of the various groups in two dimensions, as accurately as present knowledge will permit. : Species which are believed not to be indigenous are carefully excluded from the habitat lists, and brought together in a single list at the end of the ecological treatment, under the head of weeds. THE HABITAT-GROUPS. t. Rock OvutTcrops. We may appropriately begin with the hillside outcrops of the Altamaha Grit itself. The nature of these has already been dis- cussed, and the accompanying illustrations (Plate I, Figs. 1-2) will give a still clearer idea of their appearance. As already stated, they are quite rare. Their aggregate area probably does not ex- ceed one square mile. The rocks and their surroundings are usually dry, except around their edges or in flat places, where water sometimes collects for a time in wet weather. In the absence of the surrounding pine-barren vegetation they would look very much like some of the granite outcrops in Middle _ Georgia, except in color. The plants in the following list have been observed in the counties of Tattnall, Dodge, Wilcox, and Dooly, principally the first mentioned. Although they are arranged as nearly as pos- sible in order of abundance, according to the system above 42 HARPER described, the frequency numbers are omitted, for none of the species has been noted more than four times. Pinus palustris ames — Liquidambar Styraciflua 3 — Quercus geminata 4 — Pinus Tada 3-4 — Azalea candida 3-4 Tecoma radicans 5-10 red ; Symplocos tinctoria 3-4 cream Gaylussacia dumosa 4 _ white Ilex glabra 4-5 white Gelsemium sempervirens 3 yellow Pentstemon dissectus 2 4—5 purple Talinum teretifolium 5-9 purple Crotonopsis linearis © 8-I0 Sarothra gentianoides @ 6-10 yellow Ilysanthes refracta 4-7 blue Chondrophora virgata 9 Marshallia ramosa ; 5-6 Selaginella arenicola fo) fo) Arenaria brevifolia@® 3 Polygala Chapmani@® 6 Danthonia sericea 5 eo) Polypodium polypodioides fe) Afzelia cassioides® 8-9 yellow Manfreda Virginica 6-7 cream Selaginella acanthonota fo) fo) Rhynchospora cymosa 5-6 peas Aster squarrosus 2 II Sporobolus Floridanus 1]. 9 = Eryngium yuccifolium 2 6-7 white Houstonia longifolia sana purple Diodia teres 5-10 purple Krigia Virginica 25 yellow Pteridium 1}. ° fo) Cracca Virginiana VL 4-5 white and purple Ascyrum pumilum 2 4-9 yellow Trichostema lineare @ 8-10 blue Allium Cuthbertii 2 5-6 white Andropogon tener 7-9 — Yucca filamentosa 5-6 cream Nolina Georgiana 5 Amsonia tenuifolia 4-5 pale blue Utricularia subulata 4-7 yellow Senecio tomentosus 4 yellow Rhynchospora plumosa 4-5 _ Grimmia leucophzea Thelia asprella Frullania Kunzei Hedwigia albicans viridis Scapania nemorosa Ptychomitrium incurvum Leucobryum glaucum Summary. Vascular herbs are in the majority, as is the casein ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 43 most habitat-groups in temperate climates. There are two vines, both woody. Most of the trees and shrubs are evergreen and most of the herbs are not. The herbs are mostly perennial. The trees all have anemophilous flowers, while nearly all the shrubs and herbs are entomophilous. Yellow flowers are most numerous, with white and purple next. The phenological dia- gram shows that there are about a dozen species in bloom at the same time late in May and early in September, but only about half as many at the end of July. This scarcity of summer Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. 1 1 t poot bes essess Fie, 2. Phzenological diagram for 40 plants growing on Altamaha Grit outcrops. flowers is characteristic of many other exposed rocky places,! and is due of course to the drying up of the rocks in the summer sun. But this is not so marked in the Altamaha Grit region as elsewhere, because there the extra rainfall in summer tends to counteract the evaporation. The 40 species of flowering plants represent at least 26 fam- ilies and 38 genera, pretty well scattered through the whole range of families. ‘But the most striking feature of the whole group is the heterogeneity of their ranges. Two species, Marshallia ramosa and Pentstemon dissectus, are not definitely known out- side of the region, though they are not exclusively confined to rock outcrops. Azalea candida I have seen only on or near out- crops of the Grit, but it has been collected by others at two or three stations south of our territory. The remarkably anomalous range of Chondrophora virgata has been discussed elsewhere.? A considerable number, including Senecio tomentosus, Ilysanthes refracta, Crotonopsis, Manjreda, Arenaria,> Talinum, and some of the bryophytes, are more at home on granite outcrops in 1 See Small, Bull. Torrey Club, 24: 333. 1896; Mohr. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 6:67, 68, 82. 1901; Gattinger, Fl. Tenn. (ed. 2) 22, 23. 1901. 2 Bull. Torrey Club, 32: 168. 1905. 3 See Torreya, 4: 138-141. 1904. > 44 HARPER Middle Georgia. Others are often weeds, growing in various situations in the southeastern states. The rest are mostly species which have strayed in from the neighboring pine-barrens, hammocks, or sand-hills. The origin of this rock outcrop flora, particularly the rarer members of it, is a mystery. As rocks of this kind are so few and far apart it is difficult to imagine how some species could have migrated from one rock to another, a hundred miles away, apparently without establishing themselves in intermediate territory. There is no reason for supposing that the total area of these rocks was ever (at least since the coastal plain received its present plant population after the last submergence) greater than it is now. Perhaps the rock-loving plants from farther inland were among the first to take possession of the coastal plain as it emerged from the sea, and have been gradually driven to a last stand on the rocks, to which they were best adapted from previous experience in the Piedmont region. The origin of the three nearly endemic species first mentioned is another problem. The Marshallia and Azalea do not differ very much from some of their relatives, but the Pentstemon is very distinct. Further study will doubtless tend to elucidate these problems. In the meanwhile we will pass on to the next habitat-group, namely, 2. Dry PINE-BARRENS. The summits and upper slopes of all the ridges (except the sand-hills which will be described later) are covered with dry pine-barrens, which constitute probably at least half the area of the whole Altamaha Grit region. This habitat-group has suffered most from the effects of civilization, for in it are located nearly all the dwellings, farms, and other works of man. Lumber- ing and turpentining have already destroyed the finest pines, and the fires which sweep over this area every winter and spring do great damage to the young trees. But dry pine-barrens are so abundant that suitable portions of them for study can be found on almost any square mile, and it is easy to allow for the effects of civilization and imagine just what the natural condition of this group should be. (For illustrations see Plate II.) ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 45 The surface soil is usually of the Columbia sand, but never too deep for the roots of trees to penetrate it into the Lafayette below. The Lafayette is also so sandy on these ridges, however, that it seems to make little difference to the vegetation whether the Columbia is present or not. Lack of shade is a prominent char- acteristic of this as well as several of the other habitats. The following species are characteristic: co Pinus palustris 3 naan 8 Quercus brevifolia 3 — 7 = Catesbei 3 = 2 ° Marylandica 3 — I oY digitata 3-4 — I Margaretta 3-4 — 1 Diospyros Virginiana 4-5 white g Gaylussacia dumosa 4 white 8 Ceanothus microphyllus 4-5 white 7 Quercus pumila 3 — 7 Chrysobalanus oblongifolius 6 white 7 Asimina angustifolia 5 white 5 Myrica pumila — 4 Serenoa serrulata 6 cream 3 Rhus copallina 7-9 cream 3 Castanea alnifolia 5 white 3 Asimina speciosa 4-5 white 2 Amorpha herbacea 6 purple 2 Pieris Mariana 4-5 white 1 Rubus trivialis 3-4 white 1 Polycodium cesium 4 white t Ilex glabra 4-5 white 1 Ceanothus Americanus 5-6 white 1 Diospyros Virginiana 4-5 white 1 Vaccinium nitidum 2 Elliottia racemosa 6-7 white 1 Crategus uniflora white o Aristida stricta 2 9 — 13 Cracca Virginiana 2 4-5 white and purple 13 Eriogonum tomentosum 1 7-9 cream 13 Vernonia angustifolia 11 7-8 purple 12 Stillingia sylvatica 2 4-7 yellow 11 Baptisia lanceolata 2 3-4 yellow 10 Pteridium 12 fe) fo) 9 Dolicholus simplicifolius 2 4- yellow 9 11 Helianthus Radula 2). g-1o dark purple 46 HARPER 7 Aster squarrosus 2 6 Chrysopsis graminifolia 2 6 Breweria humistrata VY 6 Stylosanthes biflora 27 5 Phlox subulata 5 Houstonia rotundifolia 5 Smilax pumila 5 Psoralea canescens 2 5 Laciniaria tenuifolia 11 5 Morongia uncinata YU 4 Calophanes oblongifolia 1 4 Crotalaria Purshii 2 5 Polygala incarnata® 4 Rhynchospora Grayii 2 - 4 Solidago odora 2 4 Euphorbia corollata 2 4 Ascyrum pumilum 3 Baptisia perfoliata 2 3 Sporobolus gracilis? 3 Polygala nana @) 3 Rudbeckia hirta 3 Euphorbia gracilis 2 3 Asclepias cinerea 1 3 Pterocaulon undulatum 2 3 Scutellaria multiglandulosa VU 3 Angelica dentata 2 3 Baldwinia uniflora @) 3 Anthenantia villosa 2 3 Kneiffia linearis 3 Gerardia setacea © 3 Hieracium sp. 3 Meibomia arenicolaY. 3 Gerardia filifolia © 2 Verbena carnea?! 2 Galactia erecta 1 2 Aster adnatus 2 2 Psoralea Lupinellus 2 Asclepias humistrata 2 2 Eupatorium album 2 2 Gaura Michauxii 2 Berlandiera pumila 2} 2 Jatropha stimulosa 2}. 2 Asclepias tuberosa 2 2 Tragia linearifolia 1 2 Salvia lyrata 2 Tot Dana CO “sO | H (e) CL SoS wl | | H (0) yellow white yellow white white cream blue purple purple blue yellow purple yellow white yellow yellow yellow yellow and dark purple dark purple gray purple cream white white yellow yellow purple yellow purple purple white and pink white blue white white and pink yellow white orange blue ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 47 2 Sericocarpus bifoliatus 2} 2 Aletris farinosa? 2 Buchnera elongata 2 Trilisa odoratissima 2 2 Salvia azurea 2, 2 Cyperus filiculmis 2 2 Gaillardia lanceolata @ 2 Andropogon furcatus 2 2 Coreopsis lanceolata 1 2 Croton argyranthemus 2}. 2 Stenophyllus ciliatifolius@® 1 Manisuris cylindrica 1 1 Tium apilosum 1 t Psoralea gracilis 2 1 Sorghastrum secundum 1}. 1 Hieracium sp. UY 1 Lupinus villosus 2 zt Panicum angustifolium 2 1 Galactia mollis VL 1 Scleria glabra? 1 Tium intonsum 1} 1 Sabbatia paniculata 1 Polygala grandiflora 7 1 Baptisia alba 1 Eryngium synchetum 2 1 Sorghastrum nutans 12 t Phlox amoena I t Laciniaria gram nifolia 2 1 Trichostema lineare @ 1 Crotalaria rotundifolia 2 1 Fimbristylis puberula 2 1 Coreopsis delphinifolia 2} i Helianthemum Carolinianum 1 Polygala polygama 1}. 1 Clitoria Mariana 2! zq Ruellia humilis? 1 Cyperus ovularis 2 zt Yucca filamentosa 1 Lygodesmia aphylla 1 Rhynchospora plumosa 1 Meibomia tenuifolia xs Eupatorium tortifolium 2 i Silphium Asteriscus angustatum t Muhlenbergia expansa t Petalostemon albidus2/ 8-9 white white purpie purple blue or white yellow and dark purple yellow cream cream blue yellow purple pale yellow white purple white white purple purple blue yellow yellow yellow purple blue blue cream blue purple white yellow white 48 HARPER 1 Afzelia pectinata ® 8-9 yellow 1 Dasystoma pectinata ® 8-9 yellow 1 Chamelirium luteum 2 5 white 1 Laciniaria squarrosa 2 7 purple t Kuhnistera pinnata 2 - 9-10 white 1 Chrosperma muscetoxicum 2 5-6 cream 1 Manfreda Virginica 6-7 cream | 1 Galium pilosum 1 t Pentstemon hirsutus 2 4-6 purple t Onosmodium Virginianum 2 5-6 cream 1 Amsonia ciliata? 4-5 pale blue 1 Amsonia tenuifolia VL 4-5 pale blue 1 Eupatorium com positifolium 2 site) white 2 Coltricia parvula Summary. In the dry pine-barrens herbs are in overwhelming majority, not only in number of species but in individuals, and nearly all of them are perennial. The’latter fact was considered by Mr. Nash! in the case of the “high pine land” in central peninsular Florida as a protection against destruction by fire, but it might just as well be considered as a protection against drought. Evergreens are scarce, and mostly confined to shrubs. There are only four or five vines, mostly herbaceous. As already noted, adaptations for reducing transpiration are prevalent. The fili- form rigid leaves of the two most abundant plants in the whole region, long-leaf pine and wire-grass, are typical examples.” The frequency of such specific names as angustifolia, gracilis, gramintifolia, lanceolata, tenusfolia, and others of similar import is not without significance in this connection. Flowers seem to be most abundant early in June (see diagram), and at the end of July the number of plants in bloom is scarcely half as large. There is a second but smaller maximum early in September, to which the Composite contribute largely. The trees flower early here, as in most other habitats. The average length of the flowering period for a single species is 49 days. About 24 species in this list have anemophilous flowers, and of those fertilized by insects about 34 are white, 11 cream, 23 1 Bull. Torrey Club 22: 143, 144. 1895. *For references to anatomical studies of Baptisia perfoliata, Cyperus filiculmis, and Pinus palustris see the catalogue of species. = ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 49 yellow, 15 purple, and 12 blue. Most of the shrubs have white flowers. The manner of dissemination is not definitely known for over half the species. Three or four (the Baptisias and Psoralea canescens) are tumbleweeds. About 23 others, mostly Composite, have seeds or fruits transported by the wind. Thirteen, mostly shrubs, have fleshy fruits, adapted to be eaten by birds. Only four or five have barbed fruits. The Cupulifere of course have nuts which are supposed to be carried off by squirrels. In per- Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. { ] / { sastsceatsoasbeos soespeses) SIO) r-c-c- 20 f----------4---- ----7----|20 lOb----'----t a2odoceseee: eto eee 110 FIG. 3. Phenological diagram for 131 plants of dry pine-barrens, including 24 trees and shrubs. haps a dozen species the seeds are scattered by elastic force, which is either accumulated in capsules and legumes or actuated by the wind or animals. . _ The above list contains about 137 species belonging to 100 genera and 38 families. Only 16.4% of the angiosperms are monocotyledons. As in dry sunny places throughout North America, the Composite are most largely represented, with 25 species, and Leguminose next with 23; but this list contains a larger proportion of the total Leguminosz of the region than it does of Composite. Grasses are not as numerous as one might expect, but one species, Aristida stricta, is probably more 50 HARPER abundant than all other herbaceous vegetation combined. Cryp- togams are represented only by one fern and one fungus. The ranges of the dry pine-barren plants are quite interesting. None of them are confined to the Altamaha Grit region, or even to Georgia, and not more than two-thirds are confined to the coastal plain. Most of the remaining third are found in dry woods and fields and on southern slopes of mountains in the upper parts of the state,! where they are subjected to very similar conditions of soil, light, and heat. Quite a number range still farther north, and are inclined to become weeds in the northern states. Nearly all the dry pine-barren plants grow also in the adjacent Lower Oligocene region of the coastal plain, but not so many descend into the flat country toward the coast. - Very few extend southward to the tropics, or even to sub- tropical Florida; and none of them are native in the Old World. The highest and driest parts of the pine-barren ridges are often a little sandier than the rest, and contain a larger pro- portion of oaks, and are known as ‘‘oakridges.’’ The flora of the oak ridges, though approaching that of the sand-hills (to be discussed below) scarcely merits separate recognition, and has all been included in the foregoing list. 3. INTERMEDIATE PINE-BARRENS. Descending the slope of any of the innumerable low ridges in the Altamaha Grit country we passby imperceptible gradations from dry pine-barrens into those which are perpetually moist. Very few species range all the way from dry to moist pine-barrens, however, and between these habitats there is always a transition zone of varying width where species from both meet on common ground. This transition zone, which may be designated as the intermediate pine-barrens, (See Plate III, Fig. 1.) for want of a better name,” usually contains in addition some species which are tare or wanting in both adjacent zones, and these therefore entitle it to be considered separately, though its boundaries are often ‘See Bull. Torrey Club 27: 327, 328. 1900; 30: 294. 1903; Torreya, 5: 56. April, 1905; also Kearney, Science, II. 12: 830-842. rg00. 2In my previous writings I have usually referred to them as rather dry pine-barrens. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 51 extremely vague. In the more level parts of the region the dry pine-barrens become scarcer and the intermediate largely take their place, and in the flat country toward the coast the former almost disappear and the latter doubtless cover more than half the total area. In the Altamaha Grit region the following species can be definitely assigned to the intermediate pine-barrens. co Pinus palustris 3 = “ serotina 3-4 — I “ Elliottii 2 — 5 Kalmia hirsuta 6-9 purple 4 Serenoa serrulata 6 cream 4 Ilex glabra 4-5 white 4 Vaccinium nitidum 4 Gaylussacia frondosa 4 — 4 Gaylussacia dumosa 4 white 3 Cholisma ferruginea 5 white 3 Quercus pumila 3 — 3 Myrica pumila — 1 Hypericum opacum 7-9 yellow 1 Pieris Mariana 4-5 white 1 Asimina speciosa 4-5 white 1 Castanea alnifolia 5 white 1 Hypericum myrtifolium 6-9 yellow 1 Azalea nudiflora 3-4 pink 7 Helianthus Radula 12 g-10 ©dark purple 7 Aster squarrosus 1 uy 5 Pterocaulon undulatum 1 . 5-6 cream 5 Trilisa odoratissima 2 8-9 purple 5 Asclepias cinerea 6-7 gray-purple 2 Aristida spiciformis 1 7-9 — 4 Rhynchospora ciliaris 5-8 — 4 Sarracenia minor 2 4-5 yellow 5 Fimbristylis puberula 2 5-7 4 Syngonanthus flavidulus 2 5-9 cream 4 Rhexia Alifanus 1 6-8 purple 3 Afzelia cassioides © 8-9 yellow 3 Chondrophora nudata 2 8-9 yellow 3 Eupatorium rotundifolium 2 7-9 white 3 Eryngium synchetum 2 6-7 white 3 Lachnocaulon anceps 2 4-8 white 3 Aletris lutea 2 5 yellow g ““ obovata 2. 5 white 52 HARPER 3 Baptisia lanceolata 1} 3 Thyrsanthema semiflosculare YL 3 Keellia nuda 1 3 Polygala incarnata @ 3 Xyris flexuosa 2 2 Baldwinia uniflora @) 2 Sabbatia Elliottii @ 2 Doellingeria reticulata 2 2 Chrysopsis graminifolia 2 2 Polygala ramosa @) 2 Linum Floridanum 21 2 Ascyrum pumilum 2 2 Crotalaria Purshii 2 2 Eupatorium verbenzfolium 2 2 Trilisa paniculata 7 2 Polygala lutea @) 2 Rhexia ciliosa 2 Lobelia Nuttallii @ 2 Cracca hispidula 2 2 Ludwigia virgata 2 Cracca Virginiana 2} 2 Euphorbia eriogonoides 2 2 Muhlenbergia expansa 2 Carphephorus tomentosus 2} 2 Habenaria blephariglottis 2 2 Polygala setacea® 2 Sporobolus Curtissii 2 t Psoralea gracilis 2 2 Asclepias Michauxii 2 1 Rhynchospora Torreyana 1, 1 Polygala Harperi @) 1 Habenaria nivea 2 1 Aster adnatus 2 t Pteridium %{ t Laciniaria gracilis? 1 Rudbeckia nitida 7 1 Sophronanthe hispida 12 1 Polygala nana @) t Salvia lyrata 2 t Rhexia filiformis 2 1 Juncus biflorus 1 Xyris brevifolia @ 1 Gerardia Skinneriana@ 1 Sporobolus gracilis 2 1 Campulosus aromaticus 2 wou cw y i Pw ca Oo a oO BONG oe Ge Sr ons DO H yellow cream white purple yellow yellow white white and yellow yellow yellow yellow yellow yellow white purple orange purple blue yellow white and purple white purple white cream blue gray-purple purple white le) purple yellow and dark purple white yellow blue white yellow purple ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 53 1 Sporobolus Floridanus 1 9 — 1 Pinguicula lutea 4 yellow 1 Erigeron vernus 2. 4-8 white and yellow 1 Lupinus villosus @) 4 1 Ludwigia hirtella 6-8 yellow 1 Vernonia oligophylla 1 6-7 purple I % angustifolia Y} 7-8 purple 1 Piriqueta Caroliniana 2 6-8 yellow 1 Scleria glabra 2 — 1 Polygala Chapmani® 6-7 purple 1 Pinguicula pumila 4-5 pale blue 1 Gerardia aphylla® 9-10 purple 1 Angelica dentata 1 9-10 ~=white 1 Bartonia lanceolata 7—-LO. Cream 1 Eupatorium Mohrii 2 8-9 white 1 Podostigma pedicellata UY 7-8 yellowish 1 Eleocharis Baldwinii1! — Summary. Perennial herbs predominate here, as in the dry pine-barrens just mentioned. The trees (all of one genus) and most of the shrubs, but few if any of the herbs, are evergreen. There seem to be no vines, epiphytes, parasites, or cellular cryptogams. Biennial herbs seem to be a little more numerous than annual ones.! The number of flowers increases gradually until the beginning of September, and then falls off rapidly. The explanation of Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. IO p----4----- =--7--- - tH Fic. 4. Pheenological diagram for 92 plants of intermediate pine-barrens. this is not yet apparent. Each species blooms 45 days, on the average. About 16 species have anemophilous flowers, 18 white, 6 cream, 22 yellow, 14 purple, and 4 blue. ‘For references to anatomical studies of Ilex glabra and Muhlenbergza expansa see the catalogue of species. 54 HARPER The manner of dissemination is not definitely known for about half the species. Some 25 species have wind-borne seeds or achenes, about half as many have stiff stems which scatter the seeds short distances by waving in the wind, and some of the shrubs have fleshy fruits. Few if any have fruits adapted for attaching themselves to animals. The 98 species represent 7o genera and 33 families. The largest family is Composite, constituting a fifth of the whole list, but the largest genus is Polygala, with seven species. The mono- cotyledons constitute 22.3% of the total number of angiosperms. The ranges of these plants are more restricted than those of dry pine-barrens. They are typical coastal plain plants, only about 15 of them being known in other parts of the United States. These 15 are divisible into three classes, namely, those which belong more properly to the dry pine-barrens already discussed, those which are widely distributed in the coastal plain and glaciated region but rare elsewhere, and those which occur in damp sandy places at a few isolated stations in the southern mountains and Piedmont region. Those of the two latter classes belong also to the next habitat group to be discussed. Within the coastal plain many of the intermediate pine-barren plants do not extend farther inland than the Altamaha Grit region, but nearly all of them grow also in the flat country toward the coast, where similar habitats predominate. Many of them extend well down into Florida, but none reach the tropics, with the possible exception of Pinus Elhotiu. Less than a third of the number of species range as far north as Virginia, so as to be in- cluded in the “Manual region.’”’ 4. Morst PiNE-BARRENS. The lower slopes of every little valley in the region under consideration are perpetually moist. The explanation of this is simple. The Columbia sand holds water like a sponge, and the Lafayette clay a short distance beneath prevents it from percolating deep into the earth. The sand being a poor con- ductor of heat protects the water in it from evaporation, so whatever water the soil contains is constantly trickling down the slopes and seeping out at the lower levels. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 55 Although the moist and dry pine-barrens have almost no species in common, their vegetation has much the same aspect, both being equally exposed to light and other factors which come into play above the surface of the ground. See Plate III, Fig. 2, and Plate IV, Fig. 1 Moist pine-barrens probably reach the height of their de- velopment in the Altamaha Grit region, and their list of species is a long one, constituting nearly one-fourth of the total flora of the region. 20 Pinus Elliottii 2 — 8 Taxodium imbricarium 2-3 — 1 Pinus serotina 3-4 — 8 Ilex glabra 4-5 white 7 Hypericum fasciculatum 4-8 yellow 6 Myrica Carolinensis — 5 Azalea viscosa 6-7 white 5 Magnola glauca 4-7 white 4 Pieris nitida 3-4 white 4 Liquidambar Styraciflua 3 — 4 Cholisma sp. (888) white 3 Kalmia hirsuta 6-9 purple 3 Ascyrum stans 5-9 yellow 2 Styrax pulverulenta 4 white 2 Hypericum opacum 7-9 yellow 2 Clethra alnifolia 7-8 white 2 Aronia arbutifolia 3-4 white 2 Cliftonia monophylla 3-4 white 1 Pieris Mariana 4-5 white 1 Hypericum myrtifolium 6-9 yellow 1 Itea Virginica 4-6 white 1 Gaylussacia frondosa 1 Gaylussacia dumosa white 4 4 1 Pieris phillyreifolia 2 white 41 Sarracenia flava 2 4 yellow 27 Eriocaulon decangulare 1 6-9 white 27 Oxypolis filiformis 2 7-8 white 19 Chondrophora nudata 1 8-9 yellow 19 Drosera capillaris? 6-8 purple 37 Sarracenia minor 7 4-5 yellow 20 Eriocaulon lineare 2 4-5 white 22 Tofieldia racemosa 2 6-8 white 27 Sarracenia psittacina 4 ted 22 Syngonanthus flavidulus 1° 5-9 cream HARPER 20 Rhexia Alifanus 2 6-8 purple 24 Baldwinia atropurpurea @) 8-10 yellow and dark purple 20 Juncus trigonocarpus 2 8-9 — 19 Chaptalia tomentosa 2-4 cream 18 Eryngium Ludovicianum 7 4-10 ~©=> blue 18 Mesadenia lanceolata virescens?! 9-10 cream 14 Marshallia graminifolia 2 7-9 pale purple 12 Fuirena squarrosa hispida 2} 6-9 = 12 Lycopodium alopecuroides fo) ° 12 Trilisa paniculata 2 8-9 purple 12 Pogonia ophioglossoides 2 4-5 purple 11 Lycopodium pinnatum fo) fo) tr Rhexia lutea 2 6-7 yellow 11 Rhynchospora Baldwinii 5-7 — iz Campulosus aromaticus 2 5-8 = tr Anthenantia rufa 2 8-10 — 10 Eupatorium rotundifolium 271 © 7-9 white 9g Coreopsis angustifolia 2 7-9 yellow to Xyris Baldwiniana 1 6-9 yellow to Rhynchospora semiplumosa 71 5-7 ao 9 Polygala ramosa @) 5-9 yellow ; 12 Burmannia capitata@ 8-10 — pale blue . 9 Scleria trichopoda 2} 7-9 — 9 Sabbatia macrophylla i] white 8 ts lanceolata 6-7 white 8 Aletris aurea 6-7 yellow | 9 Lycopodium Carolinianum fo) 9 Deellingeria reticulata 2 white ie) 8 Lophiola aurea? 6-7 8 Sporobolus teretifolius 2 7-9 — 8 Juncus biflorus 2 5-6 — 8 Rhynchospora solitaria 5-10 —: 8 Eryngium virgatum 1 8-9 blue 8 Utricularia juncea 70 yellow 7 Rhynchospora ciliaris 27 5-8 — 7 is oligantha 5-6 = 7 Centella repanda 7-8 cream 7 Laciniaria spicata 2 8-10 purple 7 Erigeron vernus 4-8 white and yellow 7 Ludwigia hirtella 6-8 yellow 6 Mesospherum radiatum 2 6-8 7 Rhynchospora axillaris? a) — 6 Pinguicula elatior 3-5 blue 6 Lobelia glandulosa 8-10 blue Ge” 6 Leptopoda Helenium 4-5 yellow ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 57 6 Baldwinia uniflora @) 7-9 yellow 6 Sagittaria Mohrii 2 6-9 white 6 Sabbatia campanulata 6-8 purple 6 Lachnocaulon anceps 4-8 white 6 Polygala lutea @) 4-9 yellow 5 Sophronanthe pilosa 6-8 white 5 Afzelia cassioides ® 8-9 yellow 5 Rhexia ciliosa7 6-9 purple 5 Polygala cruciata@ 6-9 purple 5 Gerardia aphylla@ 9-10 = purple 5 Sisyrinchium Atlanticum 1, 4 blue 7 Drosera filiformis 1 7 Oxypolis ternata? II white ro Anantherix connivens 1 7 cream 5 Muhlenbergia sp. (1667) 2 8-9 — 5 Mayaca Aubleti 6-9 pinkish 5 Eleocharis tuberculosa ® 4-6 aa 5 Utricularia macrorhyncha 4-9 yellow 5 Pogonia divaricata 2 5-6 purple 5 Bartonia lanceolata 7-10 ©. cream 4 Rhexia stricta 2 7-9 purple 4 Coreopsis sp. (1666) 2 9 yellow 4 Tracyanthus angustifolius 1 4-5 cream 4 Utricularia subulata 4-7 yellow 4 Carex turgescens 2 4 — 4 Paspalum Curtisianum g-I0 — 4 Limodorum tuberosum 1} 5-7 purple 4 Proserpinaca (intermediate) 21 greenish 3 Eupatorium verbenefolium 1 8-9 white 3 Rudbeckia Mohrii 2,’ 6-9 yellow and dark purple 3 Dichromena latifolia 2) 5-7 white 3 Rhynchospora gracilenta 6-7 = 3 Gerardia paupercula 9-10 purple 3 Andropogon Tracyi ? 2 9Q-10 — 3 Rhynchospora rariflora 5-6 = 3 Habenaria ciliaris 1 7-8 orange 3 Rhynchospora alba macra 1 9-10 white 3 Anchistea Virginica 2 fo) fo) 3 Helianthus angustifolius 2 9-10 = yellow 3 Manisuris rugosa 2 8-9 — 3 Xyris fimbriata 2 7-9 yellow 3 Utricularia cornuta 5-7 yellow 2 Pinguicula lutea 4 yellow 3 Fimbristylis puberula 2 5-7 a= 2 Qu ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 1 Scleria trichopoda 2 7-9 _— 1 Xyris ambigua 2 6 yellow 1 Clematis crispa 2 4-9 pale blue 1 Rhynchospora inexpansa 5-6 — 1 Oxytria crocea 5 yellow 1 Sphagnum macrophyllum 1 Pallavicinia Lyellii 1 Odontoschisma prostratum 1 Lycogala epidendrum Summary. Trees and shrubs here form the bulk of the vegeta- ation, the herbs, though more numerous in species, being rela- tively scarce and inconspicuous. About half of the woody plants are evergreen. The herbs are mostly perennial, as usual. There are 6 vines, 3 of them woody and 3 herbaceous, and two parasites, one a shrub and one an herb.’ Flowers seem to be most numerous in midsummer, but if trees and shrubs alone were considered spring flowers would pre- Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. IIE G Pheenological diagram for 66 plants of branch-swamps, including 21 trees and shrubs. dominate. The phenological diagram is very similar to that for moist pine-barrens, making allowance for the much smaller mumber of species involved. The average flowering period too, is nearly the same, 48 days. None of the herbs seem to bloom before April. There are about 15 anemophilous species in the list, and the - Same number with white flowers. Other colors are less abundant, “and there are not many conspicuous flowers in the whole lot. Probably the most conspicuous are those of Pinckneya, which are ' For references to anatomical studies of Ilex glabra Aronia arbutifolia, and Magnolia glauca see the catalogue. 66 HARPER unique in that the attractive organ is an enlarged pinkish calyx- segment, the corolla being greenish and not visible a short dis- tance away. The principal modes of dissemination are by wind, resilient stems, and fleshy fruits, there being about a dozen cases of each kind. The 78 species of vascular plants belong to about 63 genera and 42 families. The largest family in the list is Cyperacee, with 7 species. Monocotyledons here constitute not quite 30% of the an- giosperms, a much smaller proportion than in the moist pine- barrens, and about equalling that for the whole region. This is perhaps as good an indication as any that the branch-swamps are considerably nearer the mesophytic climax condition than are the moist pine-barrens. In general range the species of this group resemble those of the preceding. Most of them are confined to the coastal plain. 6. CREEKS AND SMALL RIVERS. As the branches just described flow toward the sea they of course unite into creeks and those in turn into rivers. The distinction between a branch and a creek is one of degree rather than of kind, namely, a creek contains water all or nearly all the time, while a branch frequently dries up. The plants in the following list grow in streams of the third class described on a preceding page, 7. e., those which originate within the Altamaha Grit region and are rarely or never muddy. Streams of this class do not become very large before they leave the region, not large enough to be navigable, for instance. They do not usually have well-defined banks, and very often the whole channel is full of trees, as may be seen in the Allapaha and Little rivers within a few miles of Tifton. (See Plates VI, VII, and VIII, Fig. 1.) The water-level in these small endemic rivers varies a few feet at different seasons, but rarely gets beyond the edge of the swamp. The species here enumerated nearly all grow between high and low water marks. 6 Nyssa biflora Fe Olas 4-5 ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 4 Acer rubrum 4 Taxodium imbricarium 4 a (intermediate) 4 Magnolia glauca 3 Pinus Teda 2 “ Elliottii 2 ‘“ serotina 2 Liquidambar Styraciflua I Quercus nigra 1 Taxodium distichum 1 Ilex opaca 3 Fraxinus Caroliniana 4 Cyrilla racemiflora 4 Cliftonia monophylla 4 Bignonia crucigera 3 Itea Virginica 3 Clethra alnifolia 2 Pieris nitida 2 Viburnum nudum 1 Hypericum fasciculatum 1 Smilax Jaurifolia I Serenoa serrulata o (Phoradendron fiavescens) 1 Aronia arbutifolia 1 Leucothoé axillaris 1 Leucothoé racemosa 1 Cholisma ligustrina 1 Berchemta scandens 6 Sabbatia foliosa 2). 3 Lorinseria areolata 2 3 Dulichium arundinaceum 2 2 [Dendropogon usneoides] 2 Orontium aquaticum 2 Xyris sp. (1700) YY. 2 Hymenocallis sp. 2 t Pluchea imbricata 1. 1 Pontederia cordata 2 1 Iris versicolor. 1 Ludwigia pilosa 1 Rhynchospora glomerata pani- culata 1 Lobelia flaccidifolia 1 (Cuscuta compacta) ® t Osmunda cinnamomea 21 1 Asclepias lanceolata 2 greenish white white red and yellow white white white white yellow cream cream white white white white greenish purple 67 68 HARPER 1 Uniola laxa YJ 7 — 1 Habenaria cristata 2 7-8 yellow 1 Nymphea fluviatilis 7 6 yellow 1 Eriocaulon decangulare Y 6-9 white 1 Fimbrystylis autumnalis® 6-9 — 1 Rhynchospora corniculata 2 6-8 — 1 Sparganium androcladum VJ 5-6 1 Viola sp. (1675) 2 white? 2 Pallavicinia Lyellii t [Porella pinnata] 2 [Archilejeunea clypeata] 1 [Schlotheimia Sullivantii] 1 Scapania nemorosa 1 Odontoschisma prostratum 1 Sphagnum macrophyllum 1 [Leskea denticulata] 1 [Mastigolejeunea auriculata] 1 Cephalozia Virginiana 1 Lycogala epidendrum Summary. Many of the remarks made about the flora of branch-swamps will apply almost as well to his group. This contains a few more species of trees and bryophytes, and fewer of shrubs and vascular herbs. Our commonest vascular epiphyte, Jan. Feb. Mar.- April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct.) (Nov.s@Dee: iG, — Fs Phzenclogical diagram for 46 plants of creek and small river-swamps, including 26 trees and shrubs. Dendropogon usneoides, appears for the first time in this list.! The 54 vascular plants enumerated belong to 47 genera and nearly as many families. The largest families are Conifere, Ericacee, and Cyperacee. The only composite in the list is more typical of other habitats, and the Scrophulariacee, Labiate, 1For references to anatomical studies of Leucothoé racemosa, L. axillaris, Berchemia, Liquidambar, Itea, Magnolia glauca, Phoradendron, Dendropo- gon, and Dulichium see the catalogue of species. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 69 Euphorbiacee, and Leguminose are not represented at all. _ As in the preceding list, most of the species are confined to the coastal plain. 7. RIVERS AND CREEKS OF THE SECOND CLASS. In the classification of streams on a preceding page those which rise in the upper third of the coastal plain are mentioned. To this class belong the Ohoopee (see Plate VIII, Fig. 2, and IX, Fig. 1) and Little Ohoopee rivers, which rise in Washington County, join with each other in Emanuel, and discharge into the Altamaha in Tattnall, also Gum Swamp Creek, which rises in Twiggs County, and unites with Alligator Creek to form the little Ocmulgee River just before it discharges into the Ocmulgee near Lumber City. These doubtless carry more calcium carbonate in solution than those previously mentioned, because they originate in more calcareous regions, and this is probably the principal reason for the difference in the flora of their swamps. The following species are characteristic. 5 Taxodium (intermediate) 2-3 —_— ’ 4 Nyssa uniflora 4 4 Pinus Tada 3-4 — 4 Planera aquatica a= — 3 Nyssa Ogeche 4-5 3 Acer rubrum 2 red 3 Fraxinus Caroliniana 3-4 2 Nyssa biflora 2 Betula nigra a — 1 Liquidambar Styraciflua — = t Taxodium distichum Q=2 = 1 Quercus lyrata erty. — I rn Michauxii —_— — me | nigra 3-4 = 1 Salix nigra 4 cream 1 Gleditschia sp. 1 Pinus glabra 3 == 1 Juniperus Virginiana 2% = 1 Magnolia grandiflora 5-6 cream 3 Viburnum obovatum 3-4 white 3 Cephalanthus occidentalis 6-9 white 3 Fraxinus Caroliniana 3-4 = 2 Cyrilla racemiflora 6-7 white 70 HARPER a Crategus apiifolia — white a Berchemia scandens 5 greenish 2 Wtstarta frutescens 4 blue 2 Hypericum galioides pallidum 7 yellow 1 Smilax Walteri 1 Sebastiana ligustrina 6 1 Sabal glabra 6-7 white 1 Amorpha fruticosa 1 Crategus estivalis white 1 Serenoa serrulata 6 cream 1 Trachelospermum dtfforme 6 yellow 3 Nymphea fluviatilis? 6 yellow 1 Orontium aquaticum 3 yellow 1 Carex bullata 2 4 — Wi tolienlatae! 4 — t Echinodorus radicans 1 white 1 Carex triceps 1} 4 — 1 Lobelia flaccidifolia 67 blue 1 Carex debilis 2 4 — 1 Mikania scandens VU 7-10 ~=white 1 Carex reniformis 2! 4 — 1 Clematis crispa dU 4-9 pale blue 1 [Brachelyma robustum] t Fontinalis flaccida Summary. In most particulars where this list differs from the preceding it approaches the next, so a detailed discussion will Jan. Feb. Mar, April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. GaGe Phenological diagram for 37 plants growing in river and creek-swamps of the second class, including 27 trees and shrubs. not be given here. But we may note in passing, the increasing number of trees and vines,! and the decreasing number of ever- greens and herbs. There are no purple flowers. It is interesting to note that the Graminee, the Ericacee, and 1For references to anatomical studies of Berchemia_ and Liquidambar see catalogue of species. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA (i all plants with irregular gamopetalous corollas are absent, and that the Cyperacez are all of the genus Carex. Nearly all of the species in this list grow in the upper third of the coastal plain, but not so many in the lower third. Nearly half of them extend up the Mississippi valley to Missouri or there- abouts, probably because of the abundance of swamps in that part of the country, and also because the older formations of the coastal plain are extensively developed there. 8. Muppy RIverR-SWAMpPs. Next in order are the swamps of the rivers which rise in the Piedmont region and are always more or less muddy, namely, the Ogeechee, Oconee, and Ocmulgee. (See Plate IX, Fig. 2.) The Altamaha of course belongs to this class too, but no railroad crosses it in the territory assigned to this work, and I have not yet had a chance to examine it there. But the flora of its swamps down in the flat country is so similar to that along its two prin- cipal affluents, the Oconee and Ocmulgee, that there is no reason to believe that the unexplored portion presents any peculiarities in this respect. The muddy rivers are usually bordered with swamps on both sides, and it is rather the exception to finda bluff or steep bank rising abruptly from the water’s edge to above the limits of inundation. But the swamps along these rivers in the Altamaha Grit region are not so extensive as in the upper third of the coastal plain, probably because the Grit is harder than most other coastal plain rocks and therefore stands higher above the streams. The following plants characterize these swamps 7 Taxodium distichum 2-3 —_ 5 Liquidambar Styraciflua 3 = 4 Nyssa uniflora 4 4 Salix nigra 4 cream 4 Planera aquatica 2-3 = 3 Fraxinus Caroliniana 3-4 3 Quercus lyrata 3 -- 2 Carpinus Caroliniana 3-4 = 2 Hicoria aquatica 2 Quercus Michauxii = 2 Acer rubrum 2 red ‘2 HARPER 2 Crategus viridis 3-4 white 1 Betula nigra 3 = 2 Pinus glabra ; 3 = ri) Steeda 374 _— t Ulmus sp. = t Quercus alba 4 _ I ee etiellos 4 — 4 Ampelopsis arborea 6 cream 4 Sabal glabra 6-7 white 4 Adelia acuminata | 4 Ilex decidua 3 white 4 3 Sebastiana ligustrina 6 ; 3 Brunmichia cirrhosar, 8 greenish ; 2 Tecoma radicans 5-10 - ted 2 Rhus radicans 5 cream | 1 Cephalanthus occidentalis 6-9 white 2 Trachelospermum difforme 6 yellow 1 Crategus apiifolia white 1 Viburnum obovatum 3-4 white t Amorpha fruticosa blue t Baccharis halimifolia 1 Arundinaria sp. 3 Saururus cernuus VU 5 white 2 [Dendropogon usneoides] 2 Nymphea fluviatilis T 6 yellow 2 Baptisia leucantha 2 ; 4 2 Echinodorus radicans 1 white 1 [Polypodium polypodioides] ° ° 1 Asclepias perennis 2 5-8 1 Lobelia cardinalis 2 7-9 red t Conoclinium ccelestinum 11 7-11 blue 1 Anastrophus paspaloides 7-8 —_ t Passiflora lutea r. 6-7 cream t Onoclea sensibilis YU fr) fe) | t Carex bullata2 4 _ t Ludwigia glandulosa 7-8 greenish t Lycopus rubellus 2 9 white 1 Carex glaucescens 2 . OH _— rt Triadenum petiolatum YY 9 _ 1 Carex debilis 2 4 _ t Mtkania scandens 1 7-10 white 1 Calophanes humistrata 1 6 blue Fe 1 Eupatorium serotinum 2 8-9 white ; 1 Carex reniformis 2 4 —_— I “ intumescens 2 4 _ a a ih - ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 73 , 1 Hymenocallis sp. 2 7 white 1 Ludwigia alternifolia 6-9 yellow 1 Carex triceps? 2 4 — 1 Scutellaria lateriflora 7 9 blue 1 Carex squarrosa 1} 4 — 2 [Porella pinnata] 1 [Brachelyma robustum] Summary. This habitat-group is noteworthy for containing seven vines and only five evergreens. This is a larger number of the former and a smaller number of the latter than in any previously mentioned group. The scarcity of evergreens makes these swamps look very lifeless in winter. The number of trees is the same as in the group immediately preceding. The heros are mostly if not all perennials. Broad, thin leaves are the tule here, as in most swamps, principally because of the shade.! _ The trees without exception flower between February and April, and most of them are wind-pollinated. The number of flowers of all kinds is greatest early in April, though there is a second but smaller maximum about the summer solstice. The average flowering period seems to be about 39 days. Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Fic. 9. Phzenological diagram for 49 plants of muddy river-swamps, including 15 trees and 10 shrubs. The prevailing mode of dissemination seems to be through the agency of the wind, about 17 species having winged or comose seeds or fruits. Ten species have fleshy fruits. At least nine have fruits adapted to floating on the water, and it is very likely that the fruits of nearly all the species will float away if not taken care of otherwise. Five species of trees have nuts or acorns. The resilient herbaceous stems (‘‘tonoboles’’), so common in the ‘Por references to anatomical studies of Baccharis, Liquidambar, and Dendropogon see the catalogue. TALS HARPER moist pine-barrens, are rare here, and adhesive fruits are alto- gether wanting, which would seem to indicate that hairy quad- rupeds do not frequent these swamps. The number of species, genera, and families in this list is al- most the same as for the creek-swamps. The largest family is Cyperacez, with seven species, all of the genus Carex. The Ericacee are conspicuous by their absence. Only 23.2% of the angiosperms are monocotyledons. Probably every species in this list grows in the upper third of the coastal plain, and many of them extend still farther inland. Several of them are rare—and others absent—in Florida, doubt- less because there is only one muddy river! in that state, the Apalachicola. It is noteworthy how many of these plants (some- thing like half of them) extend up the Mississippi valley nearly or quite to the extreme edge of the coastal plain in southern Illinois. This points to an exceptional development of swamp vegetation along and near the Mississippi River. These species are all strictly American, and mostly Eastern North American, probably none reaching the Pacific coast, and less than half a dozen reaching the West Indies. REMARKS ON THE EIGHT PRECEDING LisTs. The eight habitat-groups thus far discussed (with the possible exception of the rock outcrops) may be considered as forming a linear sequence. There is an almost perfect gradation from rocks through pine-barrens and branch-swamps to muddy river- swamps. This is proved by the fact that as a rule any species which occurs in more than one of these habitat-groups occurs only in consecutive groups. The same is perhaps true to a lesser extent of genera and families. For instance Aster squarrosus grows on rocks and in dry and intermediate pine-barrens; Gaylussacia dumosain dry, intermediate, and moist pine-barrens; Erigeron vernus in intermediate and moist pine-barrens and branch-swamps; Ludwigia pilosa in moist pine-barrens, branch- swamps, and creek-swamps; and Acer rubrum in branch-swamps and all three classes of river-swamps. It is unusual however to 17. e., one which originates north of the pine-barrens and carries mineral sediment. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 75 find any one species in more than two of these habitats, though some genera (Pinus for instance) are represented in all of them. This particular sequence cannot be carried farther in the same direction, so we will now consider a series of habitats which are not.so closely related to the preceding, namely, the ponds. These are principally of three kinds, cypress ponds, shallower ponds, and deeper ponds. g. Cypress Ponps. These ponds, (plate X, fig. 1.) characterized always by a rather dense growth of pond-cypress, Taxodium imbricarium, occur in most of the counties, but are rather scarce in the northernmost ones. They are simply shallow depressions in the otherwise nearly level pine-barrens, varying perhaps from one to a hundred acres inextent. (What originally caused these depressions I cannot say.) In wet weather they may contain two or three feet of water, but they dry up frequently enough to prevent floating aquatics like the Nymphzaceze, Potamogetons, and some Uriricularias, from establishing themselves. The cypress by reason of its erect branchlets and minute appressed leaves (quite different from those of its swamp-loving congener) gives little shade, and the cypress ponds are almost as sunny as the adjacent pine-barrens. The bottoms of these ponds are covered by a very thin layer of humus. The frequent desicca- tion and sunning to which they are subjected doubtless limits the accumulation of humus, as in the pine-barrens. The Columbia sand seems to be always present in these ponds, as in every other place where Taxodium twmbricarium grows. The following are the characteristic species of cypress ponds. 15 LTaxodium imbricarium 23 — tr Pinus Elliottii ee — 2 Nyssa biflora 1 Ilex myrtifolia 6 Ilex myrtifolia _ 6 Hypericum myrtifolium 6-9 3 es fasciculatum 4-8 yellow 2 Pieris nitida 3-4 1 Stillingia aquatica 4-7 1 Malapoenna geniculata t Pieris phillyreifolia 2 white 76 HARPER a 9g Pontederia cordata 2 8 Polygala cymosa @) 7 Ludwigia pilosa 11 9 Coreopsis nudata 1 6 Rhynchospora axillaris 1} 8 Aristida palustris 2 6 Eriocaulon compressum 2 6 Sabbatia decandra 5 Scleria Baldwinii 2 5 Pluchea bifrons 2 6 Dichromena latifolia 2 4 Rudbeckia Mohri 2} 3 Lobelia Boykinii 3 Centella repanda 2 3 Saururus cernuus 2 3 Sclerolepis uniflora 7 2 Gratiola ramosa 2 Pluchea imbricata 2 2 Xyris fimbriata 2 2 Juncus polycephalus?/ 2 Rhynchospora corniculata 2 2 Carex sp. 2 rt “ gilaucescens 2 t Anchistea Virginica 2 t Rhynchospora filifolia 2 I Scleria gracilis 2 1 Erigeron vernus 1 1 Panicum stenodes 2 1 Rhynchospora leptorhyncha 2 1 Xyris Smalliana 2 E ssp. (1452) Y 1 Ludwigia linifolia t Lycopus pubens t Rhynchospora fascicularis 2 1 Proserpinaca pectinata 2 oe I palustris 2 ‘1 Hypericum acutifolium 12 1 Rhexia stricta? 1 Leptopoda Helenium 1 t Amsonia rigida 2 1 Eleocharis prolifera 1 Sphagnum macrophyllum ot estate ar Do 6 © (ieee liee eae elie, a Oonuon Own OOF “I On Stet Aum I Ww OL 1 ~yj ~T mado © blue yellow purple white purple white yellow and dark purple — blue cream white pinkish yellow white and yellow yellow yellow yellow white greenish greenish yellow purple yellow blue Summary. Perennial herbs are here much more numerous than woody plants, but one of the trees (the Taxodiwm) exceeds ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 77 in bulk all the rest of the vegetation combined. Fhe trees and shrubs are mostly evergreen, but probably none of the herbs are. There are no vines (except the unique Pvreris phillyrei- _jolia), and no epiphytes or parasites have been noted. Adaptations for reducing transpiration (principally taking the form of coriaceous or reduced leaves) are just as conspicuous here as in the pine-barrens. Coreopsis nudata, differing from all its congeners in having terete leaves, is an excellent example. Saururus and Pontederia, with broad thin cordate leaves, seem rather anomalous; but the Saururus is more frequently found in shaded places, and the Pontederia has narrower leaves in these ponds than anywhere else. Both of these species have a wide range, and are by no means confined to ponds. An interesting character of the pond vegetation is that most of the species have their stems noticeably enlarged toward the base, more so than their congeners (if any) which grow in other habitats. This is most conspicuous in the cypress itself, but is pretty well exhibited by the Pius and Nyssa. Among the herbs Ludwigia pilosa often has a spongy bark several times as thick as the rest of the stem, and many other species have stems which are perceptibly spongy inside toward the base.! The number of flowers seems to be greatest in midsummer. Jan. Feb. Mar. ‘April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. IMG, ©, Phzenological diagram for 46 plants of cypress ponds. Fourteen species have anemophilous flowers, 11 yellow, 7 white, 3 purple, and 3 blue. The purple flowers (all pink purple) are much -larger and more conspicuous than the blue, and also a little more abundant. The average flowering period is exceptionally long, 55 days. * For references to morphological notes on Pluchea bifrons, Stillingia aquatica, and Taxodium imbricarium see the catalogue of species. 78 HARPER The modes of dissemination for these plants are not very well | known. About half a dozen species have seeds transported — by the wind, and two or three of the woody plants have drupes. There are a few instances of resilient stems (‘‘ tonoboles’’), but — these obviously would not scatter seeds from one pond to another. Probably as many seeds are carried on the feet of | aquatic birds as in any other way. Taxonomically the list contains 52 species belonging to about 38 genera and 26 families. Cyperacee is the largest family, © as is often the case, and Composite next. There are only two — species in the list between Euphorbiacee and Juncacee, and © none between Polygalacee and Saururacee. Rhynchospora is the largest genus here, asin many other habitats. Nearly 40% — of the angiosperms are monocotyledons. These cypress-pond plants are quite restricted in range, doubt- — less because similar habitats are not very widespread. About half the species are confined to the pine-barren region, and only about 10% extend farther inland than the fall-line. Only about 35% range as far north as Virginia, in the coastal plain or — otherwise. Seven species are reported from the tropics, but perhaps not correctly in every case. All but one or two have been reported from Florida, and they probably all grow in the flat pine-barrens of Southeast Georgia, where cypress ponds are common. A few are not known farther inland than the Altamaha Grit escarpment, but the majority range nearly throughout the pine-barrens of Georgia (as the typical species, Taxodium wu- bricarium, does). Almost none of them are reported up the Mississippi valley even as far as Arkansas. In this respect there is a marked contrast with the group just preceding this. | There is probably not a phytogeographical unit in the whole region more stable than the cypress ponds. While the glacial ponds in the north last only a very short time, geologically speaking, the cypress ponds probably have not changed materially in thousands of years, barring the works of man and possible climatic changes. Erosion is of course out of the question, and the quantity of humus (the principal factor which determines the life of a glacial pond) probably does not vary much, for the fires which get into the ponds occasionally in dry seasons doubt- ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 79 less keep the humus down, if nothing else does. The number of species adapted to growing in such places is limited, and those which are easily disseminated are already established nearly everywhere. The individual cypress trees themselves show a certain amount of stability, for their ages are often reckoned in hundreds of years. Io. SHALLOWER PINE-BARREN PONDS. Toward the inland edge of the Altamaha Grit region, particu- larly in Bulloch, Dooly, Irwin, Berrien, and Colquitt counties, are found shallow pine-barren ponds, which while not essentially distinct from the cypress ponds, usually contain no cypress, and are probably empty of water half the time. The Columbia sand seems to be thinner in these ponds than in the cypress ponds, and is probably sometimes entirely absent. Their flora con- sists principally of the following species. 2 Pinus Elliottii @ 2 oa 2 Nyssa biflora t Taxodium imbricarium 2-3 — 6 Hypericum myrtifolium 6-9 yellow 2 Ilex myrtifolia 1 Cephalanthus occidentalis 6-9 white 2 Diospyros Virginiana 5 white 2 Serenoa serrulata : 6 cream 1 (Phoradendron flavescens) 1 Malapoenna geniculata 4 Gratiola ramosa 6-7 3 Dichromena latifolia 1 5-7 white 3 Rudbeckia Mohrii2l 6-9 yellow and dark purple 3 Pluchea bifrons 2 6-9 3 Aristida palustris 1 9 — 3 Scleria gracilis 2). 5-7 — 2 Ludwigia pilosa 2 6-9 2 Coreopsis nudata VL 4-6 purple 2 Isnardia palustris 2 5-9 greenish 2 Leptopoda Helenium1 4-5 yellow 2 Brewerta aquatica YU. 6-7 purple 2 Rhynchospora axillaris? 5-7 — 2 Ludwigia linifolia 7-9 yellow 2 Tridens ambiguus 12 6-9 — 2 Manisuris Chapmani2 8-9 — 2 Chondrophora nudata2 8-9 yellow 80 HARPER 1 Hypericum gymnanthum@® yellow 1 Keellia hyssopifolia 2 1 Juncus repens 6 = 1 Proserpinaca pectinataj1 5-8 greenish 1 Panicum stenodes 2 6-9 = 1 Sclerolepis uniflora 1 coy pinkish rt Eriocaulon compressum 2 3-4 white 1 Diodia sp. (1682) 9 white 1 Sabbatia campanulata 6-8 purple 1 Eriocaulon decangulare 2 6-9 white 1 Monniera Caroliniana 2 7-8 blue t Rhexia Alifanus 2 6-8 purple 1 Sporobolus Floridanus? 9 —_— t Gerardia linifolia 7 8-9 purple t Mesospherum radiatum 2 6-8 1 Fuirena breviseta 2) I= = 1 Amsonia rigida 1 5 blue 1 Eleocharis prolifera 2 — 1 Rhynchospora perplexa a 1 Carex glaucescens 2 O= 7 — i Panicum Combsii 1 9 = 1 Eupatorium Mohrii2 9 white t Lachnocaulon anceps 4-8 white t Polygala ramosa @) 5-9 yellow 1 Lycopus pubens 12 g-10 white 1 Polygala Chapmani@® i purple t Xyris sp. (1574) 2 8-9 yellow 1 Rhexia lutea 2 O=7 yellow t Euthamia Caroliniana 1 g-10 =©yellow 1 Panicum melicarium 5-7 — 1 Tofieldia racemosa 1. 6-8 white rt Sarracenia minor? 4-5 . yellow 1 Laciniaria spicata Uf 8—ro purple 1 Juncus biflorus 2, 5-6 — Summary. This group does not differ greatly from the pre- ceding. The only vine is Brewerta aquatica, a perennial herb. The proportion of trees, shrubs, and herbs is about the same as. in the cypress ponds.! About the same families are represented, but the shallower ponds contain more Composite and Graminee than the cypress. ponds, and fewer Cyperaceee. There are no Ericaceze or Legu- iFor references to anatomical studies of Pluchea bijrons, Juncus repens, and Eriocaulon decangulare see the catalogue. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 81 minose. Composite is the largest family, with Cyperacee and Graminez a tie for second place. Cryptogams are rare or absent, and monocotyledons constitute about 37% of the whole list. man. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. \ i] 20|--- -|-- -$ ---+ --4---4-f-r-SS---f\-4--- 20 ( FIG. II. Phznological diagram for 52 plants of shallow pine-barren ponds. The ranges of these species are slightly different from those of the cypress ponds. Nearly all of them occur in the Lower Oligocene region, but not quite so many are known in the flat pine-barren ~ country. Nearly all have also been reported from Florida, but quite a number only from the northwestern part of that state. Ir. PONDS ALONG THE ALTAMAHA GRIT ESCARPMENT. Just at the inland edge of our territory, perhaps occupying holes in the thin edge of the Altamaha Grit, are a number of small but apparently permanent pine-barren ponds. These are too few and scattered to contain a very rich flora. The following species have been observed in such places in Screven, Wilcox, and Decatur Counties. (For explanation of asterisks see summary.) 3 Taxodium imbricarium Das, = 2 Pinus Elliottii 2 — t Nyssa biflora 2 Hypericum fasciculatum 4-8 yellow 2 Cephalanthus occidentalis 6-9 white 1 Nyssa Ogeche 4-5 — t Pieris nitida 3-4 white’ 1 Magnolia glauca 4=7 white *3 Myriophyllum heterophyllum 1 *2 Brasenia purpurea 1 5-6 purple 2 Pontederia cordata 2 4-8 blue 2 Iris versicolor 1! 4-5 blue *2 Utricularia inflata 2 3=7] yellow 82 HARPER 2 Carex sp. 2 4 _ 1 Eriocaulon compressum 2 3-4 white *z Castalia odorata 2. 4-8 white 1 Xyris fimbriata 2 7-9 yellow *r Scirpus cylindricus 2 5-6 _— 1 Anchistea Virginica 2 fe) o) 1 Gratiola ramosa O=7 — 1 Sclerolepis uniflora 2 5-7 pinkish 1 Carex alata 2 4 — *r Eleocharis interstincta 1 5-6 — *r Ludwigia spherocarpa 1 1 Dulichium arundinaceum 1, 7-8 = *r Limnanthemum aquaticum 2 6-9 white 1 Carex venusta 1 4 —_ 1 Sphagnum macrophyllum Summary. There is little noteworthy about these plants ~ except their ranges. All of them except Nyssa Ogeche grow in many places in the adjacent Lower Oligocene region, but nearly ~ a third of the species (the names of which are starred) are not known to be native elsewhere in the Altamaha Grit region (doubtless because they require permanent water), though some of these grow also in artificial ponds and ditches. At least a dozen range northward to the glaciated region, where they usually occupy similar habitats. Five or six are reported also from the tropics, but their identity or indigeneity there may in some cases be questioned. Te) .OAND-HininSs: Most of the habitats hitherto discussed may be considered as located on the right-hand side of some creek or river. If we cross the stream we find quite a different series of habitats, of which the sand-hills are the type. (Plate X, fig. 2, and Plate XI.) Sand-hills have been described on an earlier page (21). Their most prominent characteristic is the sparsity of vegetation, and consequent lack of shade and humus, together with conspicu- ous adaptations for reducing transpiration in most of the plants.? 1See Rhodora, 7: 76. April, 1905. ° For references to anatomical or morphological notes on Chrysoma paucifiosculosa, Galium hispidulum, Asclepias humistrata, A. verticillata, — Batodendron arboreum, Lupinus perennis, Baptisia perfoliata, Dendro- — pogon usneoides, Cyperus retrofractus, and Pinus palustris see the cata- logue of species. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA CAs tOe In these respects they resemble .deserts, but the dryness of the sand-hills is of course-in the soil, and not in the air as in most desert regions. The Columbia or Ozark sand of which the sand-hills are composed is always too deep for any roots to reach the bottom of it, and it is practically homogeneous from top to bottom, except the very uppermost layer which is exposed to the atmosphere and is usually whiter than the rest. Analyses of this kind of soil in Dodge and Decatur counties and other parts of the southeastern coastal plain by the U. S. Bureau of Soils show usually about 10% of clay and silt, less than 1% of organic matter, and the rest all sand. The whiteness of the sand together with the sparsity of the vegeta- tion makes the sand-hills conspicuous. They probably consti- tute about 10% of the area northeast of the Altamaha River and 5% of the remainder of the region. They have been little damaged by civilization, except that many if not most of the pines on them have been turpentined or removed. Fires sweep over the sand-hills occasionally, but there is so little grass to burn that not much damage is done, except to trees which have been turpentined. The land is of little value agriculturally, and has few buildings on it other than churches. The following list of plants has been compiled from about 25 different sand-hill areas widely distributed over the region. 25 Quercus Catesbei 3 oe 14 Quercus brevifolia 3 _ 11 Pinus palustris 3 = to Quercus Margaretta 3-4 — 9 Quercus geminata 4 oa 1 Crategus Michauxii? white 1 Diospyros Virginiana 4-5 white 17 Chrysobalanus oblongifolius 6 white 14 Serenoa serrulata 6 cream 13 Polycodium cesium 4 white 7 Ceanothus microphyllus 4-5 white 4 Batodendron arboreum 5 white 4 Gaylussacia dumosa 4 white 5 Clinopodium coccineum red 6 Polygonella Croomii 9 3 Asimina angustifolia ; 5 cream 2 Cholisma ferruginea 5 84 HARPER 2 Asimina speciosa . 4-5 2 Rhus Toxicodendron . 2 Bumelia reclinata 2 Chrysoma pauciflosculosa 9 1 Cratezegus uniflora t Bumelia lanuginosa 1 Myrica pumila 1 Ceanothus Americanus 5- 1 Pieris Mariana 4- 1 Elliottia racemosa 6 24 Eriogonum tomentosum 2 7 21 Kuhnistera pinnata 2} 9- 16 Cracca Virginiana 2 17 Actinospermum angustifolium @ 15 Stipulicida setacea Vf 15 Rhynchospora Grayii 2 6 Baptisia perfoliata YY 12 Psoralea Lupinellus 2 g Arenaria Caroliniana 9 Cuthbertia graminea 1) 11 Dasystoma pectinata @ 9 Stillingia sylvatica 2 8 Stenophyllus cilliatifolius ® 8 Euphorbia gracilis? 8 Stylosanthes biflora 1 9g Stenophyllus Warei@ 8 Aristida stricta? 8 Paronychia herniarioides@ or @) 8 Croton argyranthemus 2 8 Laciniaria tenuifohaY | 7 Dolicholus simplicifolius 2 8 Indigofera Carolainina 2, 8 Lupinus diffusus 2 4 7 Krameria secundtflora i, 67 7 Chrysopsis graminifolia 2 8-11 7 Afzelia pectinata® 9 | Ma Fon mM O So ees | oy | fopiees SION DDA~Y aS | Sana Seach MmM~ar @owon wo ont ll (on JS (09) at (Oy) apie eS) MOH Ona Oo 8 6 Brewerta humistrataY. 5 6 Solidago odora 2. 9- 6 Asclepias humistrata 2 4 6 Sericocarpus bifoliatus 2 8 6 Gerardia filifolia © 9 6 Lupinus perennis 2 4 6 Opuntia vulgaris 2 5-7 5 Amsonia tenuifolia 2, 4-5 5 Dicerandra odoratissima@ = 9-10 cream cream yellow white cream white white white cream white cream and purple yellow white yellow blue white pinkish yellow yellow dark purple yellow greenish purple yellow blue dark purple yellow yellow white yellow gray-purple white purple blue yellow pale blue white ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 6 Tium apilosum 2 4 Polygonella gracilis@ 6 Thysanella fimbriata © 5 ocleria glabra? 5 Pteridium 2! 5 Galastia regularts 2. 4 Jatropha stimulosa 1 6 Triplasis Americana, 4 Sporobolus gracilis 2 4 Euphorbia corollata 2 4 Laciniaria elegans? 4 Chrysopsis gossypina 2 4 Psoralea canescens 2 4 Vernonia angustifolia?! 4 Berlandiera pumila1 3 Lechea tenuifolia2! 3 Siphonychia pauciflora@ or @) 3 Phlox subulata 3 Meibomia tenuifolia 2 Smilax pumila 3 Gaura Michauxii@) 3 Sorghastrum secundum 2 3 Crotalaria rotundifolia 4 Warea cuneifolia@ 3 Galium hispidulum 2 3 Trichostema lineare Q) 3 Selaginella acanthonota 3 Stphonychia Americana ® 3 Salvia azurea 2 2 Cyperus retrofractus 2 2 Verbena carnea 2 2 Aristida condensata 21 2 Calophanes oblongifolia 2 2 Morongia uncinata 2 Zornia bracteata YY. 2 Eupatorium album, 2 Lespedeza hirta 2 2 Froelichia Floridana® 2 Houstonia rotundifolia 2 Clitoria Mariana2l 2 Yucca filamentosa 2 [Dendropogon usneoides] 2 Petalostemon albidus1 2 Dicerandra linearifolia@ 2 Angelica dentata {e) see Se Tot Tey COU Ee On ieine ee () © iF (e) Toy \O OW Ue leek ie) Sec em Ne) cone hele ©) ©) cream white white ) purple white white white yellow blue purple yellow white pale blue purple cream pinkish yellow pale blue cream blue ° white blue or white pinkish blue purple yellow white cream white white blue cream white white white 85 86 HARPER 2 Baptisia lanceolata 3-4 yellow t Asclepias verticillata 1 6-9 white 1 Tradescantia reflexa 2). 6-7 blue 1 Lespedeza repens VU. 9 purple 1 Meibomia arenicola 9-10 purple t Anthenantia villosa 2} 8-10 — 2 Carex tenax 12 4 — 1 Ruellia humilis? 6 blue 1 Euphorbia Floridana 2 7-8 1 Sarothra gentianoides® 6-10 = yellow t Nolina Georgiana 5 1 Cyperus Martindalei2 6-7 — 1 Asclepias tuberosa 1 5-9 orange 1 Gaillardia lanceolata@® or @ 6-9 yellow and dark purple 1 Pentstemon multiflorus 8-10 white 1 Coreopsis delphinifolia 2 6-8 yellow t Aldenella tenuifolia® 6-8 white 1 Aristida sp. (1988) 2 9 — 1 Solidago Boottii2 9 yellow 1 Coreopsis lanceolata 2 4-6 yellow 1 Polygonella sp. (2010) @ 9 white 1 Pentstemon hirsutus 2 4-6 purple 1 Helianthus Radula 1 g-10 =©dark purple 1 Batschia Carolinensis? 5-6 orange 1,Onosmodium Virginianum 2 5-6 cream 1 Euphorbia cordifolia@’* 9 greenish 2 Astreeus hygrometricus 1 Dicranum Bonjeani Summary. The sand-hill vegetation is more like that of the dry pine-barrens than any other previously discussed. A little more than half of the species in each of these habitats are com- mon to both, but their order of abundance is very different in the two lists, and if only the 25 most abundant species in each were considered there would be very few in common. The proportion of trees, shrubs, and herbs is almost identical in the two groups. Quercus Catesbei probably exceeds in numbers all other trees on the sand-hills combined. It would be hard to find a Georgia sand-hill without this tree and Eriogonum tomentosum, the most abundant herb. An interesting feature of the sand-hill flora is the occurrence of three rare shrubs, Chrysoma, Clinopodium, and Polygonella Croomiu, belonging to families which are mostly herbaceous. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA . 87 About one-eighth of the species in the above list are ever- green, but most of the evergreens are not abundant, so the sand- hills have quite a desolate appearance in winter. There are half a dozen or more perennial herbaceous vines, but these usually do not climb. Instead they trail over the bare sand, where there is plenty of room. Perennial herbs are in the majority here as in most of the groups already discussed, but there are more an- nuals on the sand-hills than in any other habitat. Almost every sand-hill plant has some evident contrivance for reducing transpiration. Quercus Catesbet, the commonest species, is a good example. Its leaves are coriaceous, apparently about alike on both sides, and turned at all sorts of angles to the horizon, so that only a few of them receive the full effect of the sun’sraysatanyone time. Glaucous and woolly leaves are quite common. Asclepias humuistrata (see plate XIX, fig. 1.), Baptista perfoliata, Polygonella gracilis, Chrysopsis gossypina, Serico- carpus bifoliatus, Chrysoma pauciflosculosa, and probably other species, have their leaves vertical, and alike or nearly so on both surfaces.1 In Stipulicida setacea, one of the slenderest plants imaginable, and many other species, the same end is accomplished by reduction of leaf-surface.? There are few spring flowers on the sand-hills, which is. not surprising, since it is well known that vernal-flowering plants are usually most numerous in dense deciduous forests, where the ground is covered with humus, and the sand-hills are just the opposite of this. The species which bloom before April are mostly trees. The annual plants mostly bloom between July 1st and October 1st. The height of the flowering season for the whole sand-hill flora seems to be in September. (See diagram.) The average length of the flowering period is 51 days. The proportions of the various colors of flowers are almost the same as in dry pine-barrens. Only 20 species are anemophilous, and of the entomophilous ones about 36 have white flowers, 12 cream-colored, 21 yellow, 9 purple, and 12 blue. Apparently the sand-hill insects are not as fond of purple as are those which 1 See Bull. Torrey Club, 30: 336, 339- 1903. 2 The frequent occurrence in this group of such specific names as angus- tufolia, filifolia, gracilis, lanceolata, pectinata and tenuifolia is suggestive. 88 HARPER live on the other side of the creek, where purple flowers are much more numerous. As usual, the modes of dissemination are not known for more than half the species. About 17 species have wind-borne seeds, and 15 fleshy fruits. Some of the latter are berries which can only Jan. Feb. Mar. Apmnl May June July Aug, Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec: ee a eee Phzenological diagram for 120 sand-hill plants, including 20 trees and shrubs. be reached by birds, while others are larger fruits close to the ground for the benefit of terrestrial animals. Nine or ten species are “‘tonoboles”’ (see p. €1) and about the same number have adhesive fruits. A few of the Leguminose have pods which open suddenly with a twisting motion, and expel the seeds in that way. One of these, Clitor1ia Mariana, has sticky seeds which are probably adapted to adhere to any animal which may be passing at the time they are discharged. There are at least four tumble-weeds in the list. . The list contains 133 species belonging to about 103 genera and 4s families (a larger number of genera and families than in the dry pine-barrens, but a smaller number of species). The largest family is Leguminose, with 22 species, and the next Composite, with 16. Euphorbiacee, Cyperacee, and Graminez tie for third place, with seven each. The Gentianacee and Polygalaceae are conspicuous by their absence. The largest genera are Euphorbia and Quercus, with four species each. Cryptogams are represented by two pteridophytes, one moss, ~t.-. —-T ; F j : q ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 89 and one fungus. Only 17.6% of the angiosperms (about the same proportion as in dry pine-barrens) are monocotyledons, which seems to indicate that the sand-hill flora is pretty highly specialized. The following families have at least two more representatives on the sand-hills than in the dry pine-barrens: Caryophyllacee, Illecebraceez, Polygonacee, and Commelinacese. The reverse is true of Composite, Polygalacee, Cupulifere, and Graminee. In range the sand-hill plants are more restricted than those of dry pine-barrens. Those peculiar to the sand-hills are nearly all confined to the coastal plain, and conversely, those whose ranges cross the fall-line nearly all occur also in dry pine-barrens. Most of the characteristic sand-hill plants do not range farther north than North Carolina or farther west than Mississippi. (This throws an interesting side-light on the geographical distribution of coastal-plain sand-hills.) About two-thirds of the whole list occur also on the fall-line sand-hills of Georgia (according to notes from Richmond County furnished by Mr. A. Cuthbert, and my own observations there and elsewhere along the fall-line). A few of the species listed are not yet known outside of Georgia, and at least one of these (Dicerandra odoratissima) 1s perhaps really confined to the state. Only one species in the list is known from the tropics, and that (Dendropogon usneoides) is an epiphyte, by no means confined to sand-hills. In descending from the summit of a sand-hill toward the creek at its base, we may pass through either of two series of inter- mediate habitats, bogs or hammocks. Approaching a springy place in the sand-hills, or a branch passing through them, we usually encounter first a slightly damp area, analogous to the intermediate (rather dry) pine-barrens on the other side of the creek. For want of a better designation this may be called 13. INTERMEDIATE SAND-HILLS. _ The flora of such habitats is rather meager, and not sharply distinguished from those on either side of it. The following species are characteristic. 2 Pinus serotina 3-4 — 5 Kalmia hirsuta 6- urple 9 Purp 90 HARPER 3 Cholisma ferruginea ~ 5 white 2 Vaccinium nitidum | t Ilex glabra 4-5 white 1 Myrica Carolinensis _ 1 Cliftonia monophylla 3-4 white 1 Serenoa serrulata 6 cream 1 Gaylussacia frondosa Chek t Leucothoé elongata white -r Pieris Mariana 4-5 white 1 Hypericum myrtifolium 6-9 yellow 3 Juncus biflorus?2 5-6 _— 3 Pterocaulon undulatum 1 5-6 cream 3 Polygala lutea@ 4-9 orange 2 Lachnocaulon anceps 4-8 white 2 Trilisa odoratissima 1} 8-9 purple 2 Syngonanthus flavidulus 2). 5-9 cream 1 Lechea Torreyi2 1 Juncus scirpoides compositus 2 7 —= 1 Aristida spiciformis 2 7-9 —_ 1 Xyris fimbriata2 | 7-9 yellow r IPiwersebyei Wh fo) fo) 1 Xyris brevifolia @ 4 yellow 1 Sophronanthe hispida 12 7-9 white 1 Sabbatia Elliottii 9-10 white t Doellingeria reticulata 2]. white and yellow 1 Xyris Elliottii 2 6-8 yellow t Rhynchospora ciliaris. 5-8 — t Rhexia filiformis 6-9 white 1 Polygala nana @) 4—6 yellow 1 Zygadenus glaberrimus 2 7-8 white As the species in this list are so few, and nearly all grow also in the intermediate pine-barrens or in some of the habitats to be mentioned below, it is not worth while to summarize much concerning them. It will be noticed that most of the woody plants are evergreen. 14. SAND-HILL Boes. The branches in the sand-hills are analogous to those in the pine-barrens, and have a somewhat similar flora. The differences — between the two are doubtless due mostly to the much greater thickness of the Columbia formation on the sand+hills. In boggy places at the heads of the sand-hill branches (plate XII, fig. 2) are found the following species. 5 ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 6 Pinus serotina 3-4 = 4 Magnolia glauca 4-7 white rt Persea pubescens 2 Gordonia Lasianthus 7-9 white 2 Pinus Teda 3-4 — 1 Liriodendron Tulipifera 4 cream 6 Cliftonia monophylla 7 3-4 white 4 Rhus Vernix : cream 3 Myrica Carolinensis _— 3 Pieris nitida 3-4 white 3 Clethra alnifolia 7-8 white 2 Pinckneya pubens 6-7 pink 3 Gaylussacia frondosa 4 2 Ilex glabra 4-5 white 2 Ilex coriacea 5-6 white 2 Smilax laurifolia cream 1 Viburnum nudum white 1 Aronia arbutifolia 3-4 white rt Leucothoé axillaris 4-6 white i Hypericum opacum 7-9 yellow 2 Osmunda cinnamomea 2. ° c 2 Lycopodium alopecuroides ° fe) 2 Pogonia ophioglossoides 1{ 4-5 purple 2 Tracyanthus angustifolius 2 4-5 cream 2 Anchistea Virginica 2 fo) ° 2 Polygala lutea @ 4-9 orange 2 Sarracenia rubra 4 red 2 Utricularia subulata 4-7 yellow t Mayaca Aubleti 6-9 pinkish 1 Habenaria blephariglottis 2 8-9 white 1 Centella repanda 2 7-8 cream t Pteridium 7 ° ° 1 Xyris fimbriata TY 7-9 yellow 1 Habenaria ciliaris 2 7-8 orange 1 Rhexia ciliosa 2 6-9 purple 1 Habenaria cristata 2 7-8 yellow 1 Juncus trigonocarpus UY 8-9 _— 2 Oceanoros leimanthoides 2, 6 white I Xyris platylepis 2 7-8 yellow 1 Sarracenia purpurea 3-4 red 1 Carex Elliottii2L 4 — 1 Erianthus brevibarbis 2 9 — 1 Panicum verrucosum 1 9 — 1 Sarracenia flava 2 4 yellow I ¥ minor 2. 4-5 yellow 92 HARPER 1 Zygadenus glaberrimus 2 7-8 white 1 Habenaria blephariglottis x ciliaris 2 8 cream 1 Cyperus Haspan? 6-8 1 Marshallia graminifolia 2 7-9 pale purple 1 Mesospherum radiatum 2 6-8 ; 1 Macranthera fuchsioides 2 g-Io orange 6 1 Ludwigia pilosa 2. —9 1 Aptos tuberosa VY 8 dark purple 1 (Cuscuta compasta) @® 9 cream 1 Sphagnum tenerum (and doubtless other species) 1 Batrachospermum vagum keratophytum Summary. The flora of the sand-hill bogs can best be com- pared with that of moist pine-barrens and branch-swamps, al- ready discussed. The woody plants are much more abundant and conspicuous than the herbs (usually growing so densely that these bogs are difficult to penetrate), and about two-thirds of them are evergreen. There are three vines, one quite com- mon, a woody evergreen, and the other two rarer, one a peren- nial herb and the other an annual parasite. Nearly all the herbs are perennial.! Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. FIG. 13, Pheenological diagram for 45 plants of sand-hill bogs, including 15 trees and 7 shrubs. I know of no flowers in these bogs earlier than March or later than October. Perhaps the flowering season is thus re- stricted by the cold, shaded, water-soaked soil, with its covering of peat. The height of the flowering season seems to be in August, but there is another conspicuous maximum in April. The average flowering period is about 43 days. The proportions of various colors of flowers are about the same 1 For references to anatomical studies of Leucothe axillaris, Ilex glabra, Magnolia glauca, Myrica Carolinensis, and Smilax laurifolia see the catalogue. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 93 as on the adjacent sand-hills. (Perhaps this indicates that they are pollinated by the same insects.) There are 8 anemophilous species, 13 with white flowers, 7 cream, 7 yellow, 2 purple, 2 red, and 3 orange. The list shows 56 species in about 47 genera and 35 families. .35-4% of the angiosperms are monocotyledons. Orchidacez is the largest family and Sarracenia and Habenaria the largest genera. Grasses and sedges are scarce. The generalized ranges of these plants do not differ much from those in the moist pine-barrens and branch-swamps, except that a somewhat larger proportion of them grow in similar habitats in the glaciated region of the north. ! 15. Non-ALLUVIAL ‘CREEK-SWAMBS. Entering the swamp of a creek or small river from the sand-hill (left) side, we usually tind that part of it above the reach of inun- dation to be kept perpetually moist by springs issuing from the sand-hills. Being usually densely shaded by large trees the tem- perature of such a place is of course considerably lower than that of the sand-hills on one side and the alluvial swamp (with its Warmer water) onthe other. Asplendid example of such aswamp can be seen at Gaskin’s Spring on Seventeen Mile Creek in Coffee County. (See Plates XIII and XIV, Fig. i.) This has been visited in February, May, July, and September, and in four different years, and most of the following species have been oberved there. 5 Magnolia glauca 4-7 white 4 Gordonia Lasianthus 7-9 white 4 Persea pubescens 3 Pinus Teda 3-4. — 2 Cliftonia monophylla 3-4 white t Osmanthus Americana o Pinus serotina 3-4 — 3 Itea Virginica 4-6 white 2 Leucotnoé axillaris 4-6 white 2 Vitis rotundifolia 5 cream — 2 Viburnum nitidum 4 white 1 Ilex coriacea 5-6 white 1 Viburnum nudum white 1 Smilax laurifolia cream 1 See Rhodora, 7: 69-80, April, 1905. pi ee ee 94. HARPER 1 Pieris nitida~ 3-4 white 1 Alnus rugosa I—2 —_— 1 Lorinseria areolata 2 ° ° o Dulichium arundinaceum 7-8 —_ t Carex Elliottii2 4 — 3 Peltandra sagittzfolia 1 5-7 white 1 Xyris sp. (1700) 2} 8-9 yellow 1 [Epidendrum conopseum] 6-7 cream 2 Sphagnum cuspidatum I 1 cymbifolium 1 Rhizogonium spiniforme 1 Bazzania trilobata 2 Odontoschisma prostratum 1 Thuidium sp. (1700 a) t Pallavicinia Lyellii 2 [Plagiochila undata] 2[ «< " Ludoviciana] 2 Isopterygium micans t Radula sp 1 Frullania Caroliniana I as Kunzei 1 Lejeunea Americana 1 Harpalajeunea ovata I (POLYPORUS VERSICOLOR) I (SCHIZOPHYLLUM COMMUNE) Summary. This group is somewhat intermediate between the sand-hill bogs and the ordinary alluvial creek-swamps already discussed, but differs from both, and probably from all other habitat-groups in the region, in the larger proportion of ever- ~ greens, and of bryophytes. There is the greatest possible contrast — between these swamps and the sand-hills near by, in almost — every respect. Particularly is this true in winter, when nearly — all vegetation on the sand-hills looks dead, while that in the non- — alluvial swamps looks about the same asin summer.! There are no species common to the two places, and not many families even. — In these swamps all the trees and most of the shrubs are ever- _ green. The few and relatively inconspicuous herbs are all perennial, and all either monocotyledons or cryptogams. Flowers 1 For references to anatomical studies of Leucothoé axillaris, Persea pubescens, Ilex coriacea, Itea Virginica, Magnolia glauca, Smilax laurtfolia, and Dulichium see the catalogue of species. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 95 are rather scarce and inconspicuous. In May as many as half a dozen species may be in bloom at once, but there are not so many at other times, and apparently none after September. White is the prevailing color. Nearly half the flowering plants have fleshy fruits. Of vascular plants there are only 22 species, belonging to nearly as many families and genera. In range they are chiefly confined to the coastal plain (but not to the pine-barren region). Most of them do not range farther north than Virginia or farther west than Louisiana. 16. SAND-H1LL PonpDs. Ponds occur in the sand-hills as well as in the pine-barrens, but much more rarely. ‘There seem to be no references to sand- hill ponds in botanical literature, and perhaps they do not occur outside of Georgia. They seem to be a little more common in Coffee County than anywhere else. They are usually quite small, and contain no water except in wet weather (Plate XIV, Fig. 2). The following species grow in them or around their edges. 2 Pinus Elliottii 2 — 1 Nyssa biflora 2 Ilex glabra 4-5 white 2 Leucothoé elongata white t Hypericum myrtifolium 6-9 yellow 1 Kalmia hirsuta 6-9 purple ‘rt Cliftonia monophylla 3-4 white 1 Pieris nitida 3-4 white 6 4 1 Cyrilla racemiflora —7 white 1 Hypericum fasciculatum —8 yellow 1 Serenoa serrulata 6 cream t Persea pubescens 1 Pieris Mariana 4-5 white 1 Malapoenna geniculata 1 Benzoin melisszfolium 3 Juncus scirpoides compositus 1 7 = 3 Syngonanthus flavidulus2L 5-9 cream 2 Aristida spiciformis 7-9 — 8 2 Xyris Elliottii2L 6- yellow 2 Xyris fimbriata 1 7-9 yellow 2 Dulichium arundinaceum 2 7-8 — 2‘Trilisa odoratissima 1} 8-9 purple Sige HARPER 1 Lophiola aurea 2 6-7 we 1 Panicum stenodes 6-9 a 1 Xyris neglecta 7 yellow 1 Xyris brevifolia @) 4 yellow t Eleocharis Robbinsii 2 7-8 — 1 Rhynchospora ciliaris 2 5-8 — 1 Rhynchospora distans 2 —_ t Anchistea Virginica 2 ° fo) t Eleocharis melanocarpa 2. 4-7 1 Xyris sp. (1452) % 7-8 yellow 1 Centella repanda 2 7-8 cream 1 Lycopodium alopecuroides ° fo) 1 Rhexia filiformis 6-9 white 1 Xyris Baldwiniana 6-9 yellow 1 Sophronanthe hispida 2 7-9 white 1 Ludwigia suffruticosa 1 7-8 cream 1 Sphagnum Fitzgeraldi immersum I a cuspidatum angustilimbatum I “e Garberi I a Harperi Summary. This flora has affinities with that of the shallow pine-barren ponds and with that of the intermediate sand-hills (and consequently more remotely with intermediate pine-bar- rens), but contains a fewspecies not known elsewhere in the region. The woody plants are mostly evergreen, as is often the case, and the herbs are nearly all perennial, as usual.! Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct Now. )Dec: FIG. 14. Phzenological diagram for 30 plants of sand-hill ponds. The number of flowers seems to culminate about the last of July, with 18 species in bloom, but decreases to none in Septem- ber. The average flowering period is nearly as long as that of cypress ponds, namely, 53 days. 1 For references to anatomical studies of Ilex glabra and Dulichium arundinaceum see the catalogue. 4 ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 97 The colors of the flowers are distributed about as follows: anemophilous, white, and yellow, 8 each; cream, 4; purple, 2. Wind and resilient stems seem to be the principal agents for dissemination. : Xyridacez is the largest family in the list and Xyris therefore the largest genus. The fact that this list contains all the Laur- acee and Cyrillacee of the Altamaha Grit region is interesting. This is the only habitat group in which dicotyledons are in the minority, and 48.6% of the angiosperms are monocotyledons. The total absence of anything between Cyrillacee and Hemo- doracee is striking. There is no marked peculiarity about the ranges of these species. About half of them are confined to the pine-barren region. 17. SAND-HAMMOCKS. There are a few examples of sand-hills, which while having much the same aspect as others, have quite a different vegetation, consisting of more woody plants than herbs, and a considerable proportion of evergreens. The reason for this difference however is still a mystery. Such places are sometimes called -sand- hammocks (plate XV, figs. 1 and 2), doubtless because of the resemblance of their flora to that of the hammocks (which will be discussed next). They must bear considerable resemblance to the “scrub” of Florida, from all accounts. The “‘rosemary” sand-hills of Emanuel County, which I visited in 1go1!, are a good example of sand-hammock, and there is a similar place on the Ohoopee River nearly opposite the mouth of Pendleton Creek in Tattnall County. The following species have been observed at these two places. (They are arranged in approximate order of abundance, as usual, but the frequency numbers are omitted, as they would be only either 1 or 2 in each case.) Quercus Catesbe 2 — Quercus laurifolia B — = Magnolia grandiflora 5-6 cream Ilex opaca 4-5 greenish Pinus palustris 3 — Osmanthus Americana greenish 1 See Bull. Torrey Club, 30: 285. 7. 2. 1903. 98 HARPER Batodendron arboreum 5 white Hamamelis Virginiana 1o-1 _—- yellow Asimina parviflora - 3-4 dark purple Ceratiola ericoides x Quercus geminata 4 _— Polygonella Croomii 9 white Polycodium cesium 4 white Clinopodium coccineum red Ilex ambigua Vitis rotundifolia 5 cream Gelsemium sempervirens 2 yellow Pieris nitida 3-4 white Vaccinium sp. Castanea pumila white Amelanchier Canadensis white Persea pubescens Rhynchospora dodecandra 1 5-6 Paronychia herniarioides © 6-7 greenish Stipulicida setacea M 4-7 white 6 Actinospermum angustifolium © 9 yellow Arenaria Caroliniana 4- white Smilax pumila 9 cream Opuntia vulgaris 5-7 yellow Jatropha stimulosa 4-9 white Cuthbertia graminea 5-7 pinkish Paronychia riparia 7-8 greenish Cyperus echinatus 12 Aldenella tenuifolia ® 6-8 Linaria Floridana@® white As most of these species grow also in the regular hammocks (see below) a detailed summary of their characteristics is hardly necessary here. We may note in passing that about half of the woody species are evergreen, and that there are more shrubs than herbs. . About one-third of these species are found also on sandy river-banks in the Lower Oligocene region. 18. HAMMOCKS. Hammocks have been briefly defined elsewhere (see page 26). In the region under consideration they are always situated at the foot of a sand-hill (plate XVI, figs. 1 and 2), and bordering the adjacent creek or river swamp, but in many cases the hammock is reduced to such a narrow strip as to be scarcely distinguish- able. Ina few places the streams cut into the sand-hills, forming bluffs without any swamp at their bases, and such bluffs usually have a hammock vegetation. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 99 The soil of a hammock is the same Columbia sand as on the adjacent sand-hill, but mixed with more or less humus derived from the more luxuriant vegetation. Whether the underlying Lafayette is near enough to the surface in the hammocks so that roots of trees can reach it I am unable to say, but if it is, this would largely account for the nature of the vegetation. The hammock soil must also contain more water than that of the sand-hills, but it is never perceptibly moist at the surface (ex- cept of course in rainy weather). The boundary between sand-hills and hammocks is never very sharp, and it is altogether probable that the hammocks are tending to encroach on the sand-hills as the humus accumulates, just as the branch-swamps are probably encroaching on the moist pine-barrens, as already pointed out. Reasoning backward we may imagine a time, not long after this region emerged from the sea for the last time, when there were no hammocks at all. When we examine the ranges of the plants we will find evidence in support of this supposition. The following species are characteristic of hammocks in the Al- tamaha Grit region. 8 Quercus laurifolia 3 == 9 Osmanthus Americana greenish 7 Magnolia grandiflora 5-6 cream 6 Ilex opaca 4-5 greenish 5 Cornus florida 3-4 white 5 Pinus glabra 3 — 2 Cholisma ferruginea 5 white 2 Mohrodendron dipterum white 2 Persea pubescens 2 Hicoria sp. = 2 Quercus geminata 4 = 1 Ostrya Virginiana 3-4 — rt Pinus Teda 3-4 — 1 Prunus serotina a4 white 1 Prunus Caroliniana 3 cream 9 Batodendron arboreum 5 white 8 Hamamelis Virginiana IO-I yellow 4 Vitis rotundifolza 5 cream 4 Callicarpa Americana 6-7 purple 4 Asimina parviflora 3-4 dark purple 3 Rhus copallina 7-9 cream 3 Serenoa serrulata 6 cream 3 Gelsemium sempervirens 3 yellow 3 Sebastiana ligustrina 6 greenish 2 Parthenocissus quinquefolia 5 greenish 1 Symplocos tinctoria 3-4 cream 100 HARPER t Bumelia lanuginosa 7 cream 1 Bignonia crucigera 3-5 red and yellow 1 Rhus Toxicodendron cream 1 Pieris nitida 3-4 white t Clinopodium Carolinianum g-10 = pink 1 Castanea pumila 5-8 white t Viburnum rufotomentosum 4-5 white t Ilex vomitoria 1 Amelanchier Canadensis 3 white t Ilex ambigua rt Euonymus Americanus 5-6 greenish t Polycodium cesium 4 white 6 [Dendropozon usneoides| 6 Rhynchospora dodecandra 1 5-6 — 5 Opuntia vulgaris 5-7 yellow 4 [Epidendrum conopseum] 6-7 cream 3 Smilax pumila 9 cream 3 Paronychia riparia 7-8 greenish 3 |[Polypodium polypodioides] ° fo) 2 Siphonychia pauciflora 6-9 white 3 Cyperus echinatus 2} a 2 Cyperus cylindricus 1 — 2 Erythrina herbacea 2 5 red 2 Scleria triglomerata 5-6 a 2 Dicerandra linearifolia © 9-10 white 2 Panicum Ashei 7 — 1 Indigofera Caroliniana 6-8 t Dicerandra odoratissima © 9-10 white 1 Mitchella repens 5 white 1 Galactia regularts YY. 6-7 purple 1 Clematis reticulata VU. 6-8 1 Euphorbia cordifolia @ 9 greenish 1 Galium hispidulum 7 greenish 1 Solidago Boottii 2} a) yellow t Froelichia Flo1idana@® 1-8 white 1 Tipularia discolor 8 brown 2 Thelia asprella | 1 [Schlotheimia Sullivantii] I (ELFVINGIA FASCIATA) Summary. Like the adjacent non-alluvial swamps, the ham- mocks are conspicuous for the prevalence of woody plants, and of evergreens, and thereis not a great deal of difference between their winter and summer aspects. The trees are nearly as numerous as the shrubs, and there are about as many shrubs as herbs.!. The proportion of vines and epiphytes is quite © large, showing that the vegetation is becoming pretty highly specialized, in some ways at least. The herbs are mostly — 1 For references to anatomical studies of Galium hispidulum, Gelsemium sempervirens, Symplocos tinctoria, Batodendron arboreum, Quercus lauri- jolia, and Dendropogon usneotdes see the catalogue. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 101 perennial, and the few annuals have evidently crept in from the adjacent sand-hills. Flowers are never very abundant or conspicuous in these places, but seem to be most numerous in the latter part of March. In this respect the hammocks are very different from the sand-hills, and more like the non-alluvial swamps. The average flowering _ periodis 39 days. White flowers predominate (as in the swamps and on the sand-hills too), there being at least 15 white-flowered species. There are 11 species with anemophilous flowers, 9 green- ish entomophilous, 10 cream-colored, 4 yellow, and one or two each of several other colors. Jan, Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. ( v { ( I { { { FIG, WS). Phzenological diagram for 50 plants of hammocks, including If trees and 2t shrubs. Fleshy fruits are more common than any one other contriv- ance for dissemination. In Hamamelis we have a well-known case where the seeds are forcibly ejected from their capsules. The ranges of the hammock plants are of considerable interest. Out of 58 species whose ranges are pretty well known, 14, or nearly one-fourth, grow almost anywhere in the Eastern United States, probably in all or nearly all the geological divisions de- scribed near the beginning of this paper. Twelve others have an equal disregard for geological formations in the southeastern states, but for some reason (climatic most likely) do not range farther north than Virginia. Nineteen species (about one-third) are confined to the coastal plain or nearly so, but not to the pine- barrens. About 13 others are confined (in Georgia at least) to the lower three-fourths of the coastal plain, which includes the pine-barrens and littoral region. Only 5 of these last 13 are not known northwest of the Altamaha Grit escarpment (and some. of these belong more properly to other habitats than hammocks). These figures can be presented in another way. Over 90% of the 102 HARPER hammock flora ranges farther inland than the Altamaha Grit — region, 78% grows in the upper fourth of the coastal plain (z.e.,in — the Cretaceous and Eocene regions), and 45% crosses the fall-line. — Most of the trees and shrubs are also characteristic inhabitants of rich woods in the Eocene region. { It is evident from these statistics that the species now inhab- — iting the hammocks have mostly come in from other places which are farther north and farther inland (and consequently cooler and more elevated). The fact that they tend to flower early, as already shown, is pretty good evidence that they range mostly toward cooler climates. As many of them are now also perfectly at home in places which were not submerged during the time that the Columbia sand was being deposited, they doubtless an- tedate that period, and are therefore older than the typical pine- — barren species are supposed to be. As the typical hammock plants have evidently arrived in the ~ region under consideration since the sand-hills were formed, it — is reasonable to suppose that others are still coming in, and that — if unmolested the hammocks a few thousand years from now would be more extensive and have a richer flora than at present. It is an interesting fact that most of the hammock plants which © have been noted in the region but once or twice are known ~ only in the uppermost counties, as may be seen by consulting the catalogue of species. This alone would seem to indicate that they are still on their way toward the coast. Taxonomically the list shows 65 species belonging to about 57 genera and 42 families. No family has more than four re- — presentatives, and no genus more thanthree. There are only 10 © monocotyledons, which is about 17% of the total angiospermous flora of the hammocks. 19. RivER BLUFFS. The muddy rivers which traverse the Altamaha Grit region (2. e., the three largest ones, which rise in the Piedmont region) are bordered in places by steep bluffs (plate XII, fig. 1), formed — by erosion in much the same way as other bluffs the world over. These bluffs are best developed at or near the inland edge of our territory (where the Chattahoochee formation probably crops : ips ¥ ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 103 out). The plants listed below have been observed on the Ogeechee River near Echo in Bulloch County (opposite Rocky Ford), on the Oconee at two places near Mount Vernon, and on the Ocmulgee at Upper Seven Bluffs in Wilcox County (see pages 17-18). A bluff on the Ocmulgee near Lumber City has about the same flora, but is not included in this enumeration because its geological structure is probably not exactly the same. _ These bluffs are the only examples in the Altamaha Grit region of the typical mesophytic forests which are so characteristic of the older parts of the continent. Like the hammocks just dis- cussed they are characterized by abundance of shade and humus; and their flora may be regarded as a step farther removed from that of the pine-barrens than the hammock flora is, as will be seen from the following list. 5 Cercis Canadensis purple 3 Cornus florida 3-4 white 2 Magnolia grandiflora 5-6 cream 2 Ilex opaca 4-5 greenish 2 Quercus alba 4 — 2 Pinus Teda 3-4 — 2 Pinus glabra 3 = t Morus rubra 4 1 Liquidambar Styraciflua 3 2 Pinus echinata 4 = x Ostrya Virginiana 3-4 — 1 Quercus Michauxii — 1 Liriodendron Tulipifera 4 cream 1 Quercus minor 4 — 1 Castanea pumila 5-8 white 4 Atsculus Pavia 3-4 ted 3 Hamamelis Virginiana IO-1 yellow 3 Batodendron arboreum 5 white 3 Parthenoctssus quinquefolia 5 greenish 3 Viburnum rufotomentosum 4-5 white 2 Chionanthus Virginica 4-5 white 2 Lonicera sempervirens 4-6 ted 2 Vitis rotundifolia 5 cream 2 Aralia spinosa 8 cream 2 Rhus copallina 7-9 cream 2 Ceanothus Americanus 5-6 white 2 Asimina parviflora 3A dark purple rt Amelanchier Canadensis 3 white 1 Euonymus Americanus 5-6 greenish 1 Vites estivalis 5 cream 1 Clinopodium Carolinianum g-1o = pink 1 Myrica cerifera 3 — 1 Callicarpa Americana 6=7 purple 1 Bignonia crucigera 3-5 red and yellow -_ t= aie a a a Ee Se : neh ab YO ep. 104 HARPER 1 s t Azalea. nudiflora 3-4 pink t Rhus aromatica 3 1 Alnus rugosa I-2 — 3 Polystichum acrostichoides fo) fe) 3 Asplenium platyneuron fo) fo) 3 Phaseolus polystachyus YU. 6 purple 2 Dioscorea villosa 4-7 cream 2 [Dendropozon usneoides| 2 Mitchella repens 5 white 2 Meibomia nudiflora 2 6-8 purple 2 Smilax pumila 9 cream. 2 Houstonia longifolia 7 5-11 purple 2 Asplenium Filix-foemina 2 fo) ° 2 Spigelia Marilandica 2 5 red and yellow . 2 Zizia Bebbii 2 2 Scleria triglomerata 2 5-6 — 2 Salvia lyrata 2 45 blue t Galium uniflorum 2 4-5 greenish 1 Pentstemon hirsutus 4-6 purple t Sanicula Marilandica 2 5 cream t Podophyllum peltatum 2 3-4 white 1 (Conopholis Americana) 2 3-4 brown t Uniolia latifolia 1 — 1 Verbesina Virginica UL re) white 1 Scutellaria Mellichampii 6 blue 1 Metbomia Michaux1t 1, purple 1 Panicum barbulatum 2 6 — 1 Thalictrum macrostylum 2 6 1 Pteridium 2 fo) fo) 1 Euporbia corollata YY 4-11 white t Melica mutica 3-4 — 1 Sanguinaria Canadensis 2}. 3 white 1 Asclepias variegata 1 5-6 white’ I Stipa avenacea 2 A=5 — r Aristolochia Serpentaria 1 Summary. All the plants in the above list do not have exactly the same habitat, for the amount of shade and moisture varies on different bluffs and on different parts of the same © bluff; but the differences in habitat are probably not great enough to introduce any serious error into the generalizations which follow. This flora is comparable only with that of the hammocks just discussed. Just about one-third of the species on the bluffs are 4 common to the hammocks, as far as known, and future discov- — eries probably will not change this proportion much. Woody plants are more numerous than herbs, as in the ham- mocks, but on the bluffs, unlike the hammocks, evergreens are - in the minority. Vines are quite numerous, and there are a few — ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 105 epiphytes and parasites. The herbs are probably all perennial. Broad thin leaves and other ‘“‘mesophytic’’ adaptations are of course the rule here.! The flowering season seems to reach its height in spring, as in mesophytic forests nearly everywhere, and there are few flowers on the bluffs after the middle of the year. (See diagram.) The average flowering period is 40 days. The proportions of the various colors of flowers are much the same as in the hammocks. Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Phzenological diagram for 60 plants of river-bluffs, including 14 trees and 22 shrubs. There are 12 anemophilous species, 13 white-flowered, 9 cream, 7 purple, 4 greenish, 4 red (some of these with yellow limb to the ' corolla), and a few yellow, pink, blue, and brown. The four red flowers all happen to have tubes about two inches long, and per- haps they are all pollinated by the same insect, or by humming- birds. Fleshy fruits (in 22 species) greatly outnumber all other modes of dissemination. Nine or ten species have seeds transported by the wind, and five or six have adhesive fruits. A systematic list would show 69 species in 61 genera and 44 families, which is very near the corresponding figures for the hammocks. The four largest families in the list, Leguminose, Cupulifere, Gramineze, and Polypodiacee, have four represen- tatives each. The two largest families in the whole Altamaha Grit region (and probably in the whole coastal plain as well), Cyperacee and Composite, are each represented on the bluffs by a single species. The Orchidaceze seem to be entirely absent, which is rather surprising. The proportion of monocotyledons 'For references to anatomical studies of Lonicera, Batodendrow, Liquid- ambar, Podophyllum, Myrica certfera, and Dendropogon see the catalogue of species. 106 HARPER (less than 13% of the angiosperms) is smaller than in any other habitat-group here discussed. A study of the ranges of these plants bates out some inter- esting facts. Quite a number do not extend farther into the Altamaha Grit region than its very edge, but without exception they all range farther inland. Only six species, Scutellaria Mellichampu, Magnolia grandiflora, Myrica cerifera, Smilax pumila, Dendropogon usneoides, and Pinus glabra, seem to be con- fined to the coastal plain. All the rest (over 90% of the whole list) therefore occur above the fall-line, and most of them grow nearly all over the Eastern United States, a large proportion finding congenial homes in the cool shaded valleys of the Blue Ridge.! All this goes to show that the bluff-inhabiting species are pretty old geologically, probably as old as any now living in this part of the world. It is easy to imagine how they have crept down along the rivers into the coastal plain as that territory gradually emerged from the sea the last time, after the close of the Pleistocene period. These river-bluffs evidently represent the extreme of mesophy- tic conditions for the pine-barren region. It is noteworthy that — Fagus Americana, which Dr. Cowles considers the most typical mesophytic tree of Eastern North America, does not yet occur on these bluffs, or anywhere else in the Altamaha Grit region, as far as known. It does occur however nearly everywhere farther inland, and comes to the very edge of our region in Decatur County at Forest Falls and along the escarpment from Faceville westward, where the Chattahoochee formation crops out. These places, and the vicinity of the Rock House in Dooly County, where the geological conditions are doubtless similar, (see page 17) have about the same kind of vegetation as the ~ : river-bluffs, with most of the same species. STATISTICS OF THE TypicAL HapBitatT GROUPS. In the appended table are given in condensed form some of the numerical statistics already elaborated for the 19 typical 1Their tendency to range northward is pretty well illustrated by the frequency of such specific names as Americana, Canadensis, Marilandica, and Virginiana. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 107 habitat-zroups, and scattered through the summaries. The figures in the first column represent the percentage of the whole area of the Altamaha Grit region supposed to be occupied by each habitat; and those in the second the percentage of the total native flora included in each. Columns 3 to 5 show the relative proportions of trees, shrubs, and herbs among the species of Per cent of || Percent of “| @ - sas op > 3} a O38 les n a n = ¢ ae Be BS HABITATS oe det i er) & || 8O\Ea Slalme alo | a |iseee Area |Flora ; ays Fa 3 = t. Rock outcrops ©.0r| 6.4|| 9 |14|77 ||28) 41] 44 || 24 | 52 2. Dry pine-barrens Oman 7a) eae PaaS Oia 7 TOON 3. Onl| TOs 146 3. Intermediate pine-bar- Tens PRO SEs) esate aS 2uliea) ie7om| O80) 22-45 4. Moist pine-barrens 14. |23:4|| 2/12 |87 || 46 | 105 | 187 || 44 | 49 5. Branch-swamps 6. |ro.3/|12 | 24 | 64 || 42! 63] 781) 30) 48 6. Creeks and small rivers| 4. 8.1|/ 24/32 ]/44 141 | 47] 54/1/35 | 44 7. Rivers of 2nd class rie BF AOua sil S4ueiSul ease, We4ae Nezt0) 1317 8. Muddy rivers 2. 8.0||290 |25 | 46 ||38| 49] 61 || 23 | 39 9g. Cypress ponds I. GoGill Bae (So Nao B77) Bro W 5s to. Shallower ponds Got | Fol Fue lee NOG re epi ere ce 11. Escarpment ponds Ou) So. Eilan | ao yo Woy 27 | Brae 12. Sand-hills Sees E7eOllmselen se ISON inal wos isa Nr S| 5 13. Intermediate sand-hills| 0.1 | 4.0|| 3 | 34 | 63 ||21 | 28] 32 ||37 14. Sand-hill bogs OnSe | FO EE (26 G3n 22 ase |— 54: l/35 143 15. Non-alluvial swamps it. Aeron) Ate yall Loner 2On|pe22 || 32 16. Sand-hill ponds 0.02] §.3|| 5/34 |61 ||20| 30]. 38 || 49 | 53 17. Sand-hammocks OQLOR| Acai eet | AO eye NOE Sie Gy | ee 18. Hammocks in Sree an ayaa t4ee 54 | 2629/17/30 19. River-bluffs ©.3 | 8.6)|22 |32 | 46-\|44 | 61} 69 || 13 | 40 —--—'- vascular plants. (The three cases where these figures add up more than too are where one species occurs both as a tree and a shrub.) Columns 6 to 8 show the number of families, genera, and species of vascular plants. Column 9 gives the percentage of monocotyledons among the angiosperms, and the tenth and last column the average duration of the flowering period, in * days. The accuracy of the figures for each group is of course approxi- mately proportional to the number of species included. The figures for flowering period are omitted in three cases where the 108 HARPER number of species was so small that the results which would have been obtained by the usual method might have been misleading. . a Some of the interesting facts brought out by the above table are as follows. Dry pine-barrens cover the greatest area and moist pine-barrens have the richest flora. Moist pine-barrens have the smallest proportion of trees and shrubs and consequently the largest proportion of herbs. The swamps of rivers of the second class have the smallest proportion of herbs and by far the largest proportion of trees. The largest proportion of shrubs is found in sand-hammocks, with non-alluvial swamps second. Sand-hill ponds have the largest percentage of monocotyledons, with moist pine-barrens next, and the three last groups the smallest. Cypress ponds, shallower pine-barren ponds, and sand- hill ponds seem to have the longest flowering periods, and river- swamps, hammocks, and bluffs the shortest. In general the smallest percentages of monocotyledons and the shortest flowering periods belong to those groups a large propor- tion of whose members range inland to the Piedmont region and mountains, while the typical coastal-plain habitats have many monocotyledons and longer flowering periods. Investigations of this kind will perhaps hereafter throw a great deal of light on the origin and age of the flora of various other parts of Eastern North America. It will be noticed that the percentages in the second column add up 168.2. This gives an idea of the extent of overlapping of the different habitat-groups. If the number of species common to two or more habitats decreases in geometrical progression with the number of habitats, which is not an unreasonable supposition, then about 60% of the species would be confined to one habitat each, 24% to two, 10% to three, 4% to four, and so on. RELATIONS OF THE TypicaL Hapitat-Groups to EacH OTHER. Having completed a preliminary outline of the habitat-groups which may be considered fairly typical of the Altamaha Grit region, in which outline they have been treated in linear sequence, it will be appropriate to pause at this point and show their re- ee . 550. 1901) Eeeceuciata lu op. Pl 70) 1753. Moist pine-barrens; not common. MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN, COLQUITT, DECATUR. FI. all summer. Pretty well scattered over South Georgia, and extending inland to Meriwether County (see Bull. Torrey Club, 30 : 294. 1903). Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, mostly in the glaciated region and coastal plain (see Rhodora 7:74. 1905). 216 HARPER P. Harperi Small, Fl. 688. 1903. BULLOCH: Rather dry (intermediate) pine-barrens near Bloys, June 15, 1901 (896, type). More common in similar sit- uations in the flat country: Effingham (Curtiss 6839, July 10, 1901), Chatham, Bryan, Camden, Charlton, and Ware Counties. Fl. June-Aug. Also known from Louisiana, and will doubtless turn up in other states. (?) P. Chapmani T. & G., Fl. 1: 131. 1838. TATTNALL: Rock outcrops near Ohoopee River (1853) and Pendleton Creek, also in intermediate pine-barrens near Ohoopee. MONTGOMERY: Dry pine-barrens near Mount Vernon (1565). iIRwin: Rather dry pine-barrens around a shallow pond near Fitzgerald (7421). Fl. June-July. Also in Lowndes County. South to Florida and west to Mississippi, in the pine-barrens. Pe anicarnata 7S pela Onan ee Dry and intermediate pine-barrens; rather rare and incon- Spicuous. BULLOCH, TATTNALL, APPLING, IRWIN, BERRIEN. Fl. May—Sept. Inland to Sumter County, coastward to Ware County, and at a few stations in the mountains. New Jersey to Florida, Illinois, and Texas, mostly in the pine-barrens. Pe setaceas Vix. sh au2 ease Intermediate pine-barrens. Even less conspicuous than the preceding and probably still rarer. COFFEE (1439), BERRIEN. Fl. May—July. Not known farther inland, but more fre- quent in the flat pine-barrens toward the coast. North Carolina to central Florida, in the pine-barrens. P. polygama Walt., Fl. Car. 179. 1788. BULLOCH: Dry pine-barrens near Bloys, June, 1901 (945). More common farther inland, in Middle Georgia and else- where. Fl. May—July. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but probably not everywhere native. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 217 P. grandiflora Walt., 1. c. Dry pine-barrens; rare. BULLOCH (958), IRWIN. Also in Sumter and Charlton Counties. Fl. June—Sept. south Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain. OXALIDACE:. OXATIS E:, Sp. Pls 433. 1753: O. recurva Ell.. Sk. 1:526. 1821; Small, Bull. Torrey Club 21 2471-474. Pl. 422. 1894. SCREVEN: Dry pine-barrens near Sylvania, April 1, 1904 (2082). EMANUEL: Near Swainsboro; April 5, 10904. Possibly not native. More common farther iniand, but usually as a weed. Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, but natural range and habitat uncertain. LINACEZ. EINUM Esp Ele 277. 27 53. L. Floridanum [Planch.] Trel., Trans. St. L. Acad. Sci. 5 :13. 1886. Intermediate pine-barrens; not abundant. BULLOCH (949), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, IRWIN, DECATUR. Fl. June—July. Inland to Washington and Sumter Counties and coastward to Ware and Charlton. South Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana (?), in the coastal plain. LEGUMINOSE. PHASEOLUS Le) Sp. Pl 723. 1753. P. polystachyus (L.) B.S. P., Prel. Cat. N. Y. 15. 1888; MacM., Met. Minn. 312. 1892. Wooded bluffs along the muddy rivers. MONTGOMERY: Stallings’ Bluff; TELFAIR: near Lumber City; wiLcox: Upper Seven Bluffs. Fl. June. More common farther inland and northward. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. 218 HARPER APIOS Moench, Meth. 165. 1794. A. tuberosa Moench, 1. c. COLQUITT: Branch-swamps near Moultrie, Sept. 23, 1902, Aug. 22, 1903. Fl. August. Known also from Sumter and Camden Counties. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. CLITORIA Lz, Sp.) Pl 75s-en see C. Mariana L., 1. c. Sand-hills; rare. BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY. . Fl. May—Aug. Also in Middle Georgia, in Sumter County, and on Cumber- land Island, usually as a weed. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but natural range and habitat uncertain. BRADBURYA Raf., Fl. Lud. ro4. 1817. B. Virginiana (L.) Kuntze, Rev. 1: 164. 1801. MONTGOMERY: Bluff along Oconee River above Ochwalkee, July 1, 1903. More common in the upper third of the coastal plain, but usually a weed. Maryland to South Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the coastal plain; also in tropical America, where it perhaps originated. GALACTIA P. Br., Hist. Jam. 298. 1756. °G. mollis Mx., Fl. 2:61. 1803. BULLOCH: Dry pine-barrens near Bloys (825). TATTNALL: Sandy west bank of Ohoopee River, June 24, 1903. Also in Dooly, Sumter, and Lee Counties, in the Lower Oligocene region. North Carolina to Florida, in the pine-barrens. G. regularis (L.) B. S..P., Prel. Cat.-N. Y. 14. 2888-eSaibtar Mem. Torrey Club 5: 208. 1802. Sand-hills, especially toward the hammocks at their bases. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE (1450), BERRIEN. Fl. June-July. Inland to Richmond County and coast- ward to Effingham. New York to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 219 G. erecta (Walt.) Vail, Bull. Torrey Club 22 : 502. 1895. _ Dry pine-barrens; infrequent. BULLOCH (824), EMANUEL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN. Fl. June-July. Also in Johnson, Laurens, and Sumter Counties, in the Lower Oligocene region. North Carolina to West Florida and Louisiana, in the pine- barrens. ERYTHRINA L., Sp. Pl. 706. 1753. E. herbacea L., 1. c. Figured in Meehan’s Native Flowers and Ferns II. 2 : 45-48. PITIE. 1880: Hammocks; rare. COFFEE, witcox. Fl. May. Also occurs in a few similar places along the Oconee, Flint, and Chat- tahoochee Rivers, in the older parts of the coastal plain. North Carolina (?) to South Florida and Texas (?), in the coastal plain. DOLICHOLUS Medic., Vorles. Churpf. Phys. Ges. 2 :354. 1787. D. simplicifolius (Walt.) Vail, Bull. Torrey Club 26 :114. 1899. “DOLLAR WEED.’ . Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens; common but not abundant. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, THOMAS. FI. April—Sept. Virginia to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. LESPEDEZA Mx., Fl. 2:70. 1803. Eeenitta (.) Ell., Sk. 2:207. 1822. Sand-hills; rather rare. DODGE (1975S), BERRIEN. Fl. Sep- tember. More common farther inland,. particularly in Middle Georgia. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but often merely a weed in old fields. mecepens(l.) Bart. Prodr. Bl. Phila. 2:77. 1818. coLguitT: Sand-hills of Okapilco Creek near Moultrie, Sept. 1902 (I06T). General distribution and habitat like that of the preceding. L. strRiATA (Thunb.) H. & A., Bot. Beechey 226. 1836. (JAPAN CLOVER.) 220 HARPER A common weed along roads and railroads, particularly in and near towns. Now distributed nearly all over Georgia and other southeastern states. Fl. Aug.—Oct. Native of Eastern Asia. MEIBOMIA Heist.; Fabr., Enum Pl. Hort. Helmst. 168. 1759. (DEsmopium Desv.) BEGGAR-LICE. M. tenuifolia (T. & G.) Kuntze, Rev. 1:198. 1891. Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens. . IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT (1660). Fl. Sept.—Oct. North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. M. Michauxii Vail, Bull. Torrey Club 23:140. 18096. Desmodium rotundtfolium (Mx.) DC., Prodr. 2 :330. 1825. Wooded bluffs along the muddy rivers. TELFAIR: Near Lum- ber City; witcox: Upper Seven Bluffs. More common farther inland and northward. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. M. arenicola Vail, 1. c. Desmodium lineatum (Mx.) DC., 1. ¢. Dry pine-barrens; not common. MONTGOMERY, IRWIN (1704) BERRIEN, COLQUITT. Fl. Sept—Oct. Also in Sumter and Charlton Counties. Maryland to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. M. nudiflora (L.) Kuntze, Rev. 1:197. 1891. MONTGOMERY: Wooded bluffs on both sides of the Oconee River near Mount Vernon and Ochwalkee. Fl. June—Aug. More common farther inland and northward. A characteristic inhabitant of mesophytic forests nearly throughout temperate Eastern North America. STYLOSANTHES Sw., Prodr. 108. 1788. S. biflora (L.) B.S. P., Prel. Cat. N. Y. 13. 1888; Britton, Mem: Torrey Club 5 :202. 1894. Sand-hills, dry pine-barrens, etc.; not abundant. BULLOCH (946), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, BERRIEN, DOOLY, COLQUITT, DECATUR. FI. May—July. Pretty well distributed over South Georgia, also in several places in Middle Georgia, where it is perhaps only a weed. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 22k Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. Also in Mexico and Africa (?). ZORNIA Gmel., Syst. 2: 1096. 1791. Z. bracteata (Walt.) Gmel., 1. c. Sand-hills; rare. EMANUEL, MONTGOMERY. Also farther in- land, in Laurens and Sumter Counties, and on Cumberland Island. Sometimes a weed. Virginia to central Florida and Mexico, in the coastal plain. Also in Africa. ZESCHYNOMENE L., Sp. Pl. 213. 1753. Peavaronmica. (i) Bb. 9. P. Prel Cat. N.Y: 13. 1888; Britton, Mem. Torrey Club 5: 202. 1894. BERRIEN: Edge of branch-swamp, Tifton, Sept. 19, r9g00. Not seen elsewhere in the region, and perhaps not indigenous. It is evidently a mere weed in some other parts of South Georgia. New Jersey to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. Perhaps native near the coast. KUHNISTERA Lam., Encyc. 3:370. 17809. K. pinnata (Walt.) Kuntze, Rev. 1: 192. 1891. Petalostemon corymbosus Mx., Fl. 2:50. 1803. Sand-hills; common. Noted in every county except Screven, Laurens, Coffee (which is rather surprising), Worth, and Mitchell; but there is no known reason why it should not grow in these also. Fl. Sept—Oct. Extends inland to the fall-line in Richmond and Glascock Counties. North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain. PETALOSTEMON Mx., Fl. 2:48. 1803. P. albidus [T. & G.] Small, Fl. 630. 1903. Dry pine-barrens, etc. DODGE, WORTH, COLQUITT, THOMAS. Fl. Aug.—Sept. More common in the Lower Oligocene region, but occurs also in Camden County. Also in Florida and southeastern Alabama. AMORPHA L., Sp. Pl. 713. 1753. A. fruticosa L., 1. c. Swamps and banks of rivers rising north of our territory. 222 HARPER TATTNALL, TELFAIR, COFFEE. FI. spring. Pretty well scat- tered over the state in more or less calcareous situations. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but dis- tribution not fully understood. A. herbacea Walt., Fl. Car. 179. 1788. Dry pine-barrens mostly. BULLOCH (895, 942), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, cCoLguiTT. Fl. June. Also in Lee and Charlton Counties. North Carolina to central Florida, in the coastal plain. PSORALEA L., Sp. Pl. 762. 1753. (Our three species if standing alone might well be regarded as representatives of as many different genera.) P. gracilis Chapm.;T. & G., Fl. 13303. 1838. (GAs syaonmyaaam) Dry or intermediate pine-barrens. BULLOCH, EMANUEL (805), witcox. Fl. May—June. Also in Chatham and Bryan Counties, near the coast, and in Florida. P. canescens Mx., Fl: 2:57. 1803. (PLATE SOG a hice Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; frequent but not abundant, BULLOCH (S21), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, DECATUR. Fl. May— June. Inland to Richmond (A. Cuthbert), Johnson, and Sumter Counties, and coastward to Camden. This, like the Bapttsias which it so much resembles; and fie some of its western relatives, becomes a tumble-weed in the fall. North Carolina to central Florida and Alabama in the coastal plain, mostly in the pine-barrens. P. Lupinellus Mx., Fl. 2:58. 1803. Sand-hills, or more rarely in dry pine-barrens. BULLOCH (875), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, WILCOX, COFFEE. Fl. June-July. Inland to Johnson, Laurens, Pulaski, Dooly, Sumter, and Lee Counties in the Lower Oligocene region, and coastward to Bryan. North Carolina to central Florida, in the pine-barrens. TIUM Medic., Vorles. Churpf. Phys. Ges. 2:73. 1787. T. apilosum (Sheldon) Rydb.; Small, Fl. 619, 1903. : Astragalus glaber Mx., not Lam. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 223 Sand-hills and very dry pine-barrens; not abundant, BULLOCH (907, 914), EMANUEL, TATTNALL. Fl. June. Also in Richmond (A. Cuthbert), Johnson, and Sumter Counties. North Carolina to Florida (?), in the coastal plain, mostly in the pine-barrens. T. intonsum (Sheldon) Rydb., 1. c. Astragalus villosus Mx., not Gueldenst. BULLOCH: Dry pine-barrens near Bloys, June 11, 1901 (872). Also in Laurens and Dooly Counties, in the Lower Oligocene region, where it flowers in March and April. South Carolina to northern Florida and Alabama, in the coastal plain. WISTARIA Nutt.,Gen. 2 :115. 1818. W. frutescens (L.) Poir., Tab. Encyc. 3 :674. 1823. Branch- and creek-swamps; not common. EMANUEL (2092), TATTNALL, TELFAIR, wiLcox. Fl. April-Aug. Probably more common in the upper third of the coastal plain. Virginia to Florida and westward, in the coastal plain. CRACCA L., Sp. Pl. 752. 1753. OPHROSTAN ers. iyi 2/5320." 1oO3. C. Virginiana L., 1. c. “DEvIL’s SHOESTRING.”’ Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills, abundant throughout. Grows nearly all over the state, even on mountain-summits in Northwest Georgia (Pigeon Mountain, 2329 feet), but less common north of the fall-line. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, perhaps usually as a weed northward. C. hispidula (Mx.) Kuntze, Rev. 1 :175. 189r. Intermediate pine-barrens; rare. BULLOCH (S49), BERRIEN. Associated at both places with Euphorbia ertogonoides. Fl. May-June. Also in Chatham and Bryan Counties. Virginia to Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens. INDIGOFERA L., Sp. Pl. 751. 1753. I. Caroliniana Walt., Fl. Car. 187. 1788. Sand-hills, hammocks, etc. BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, 224 HARPER TELFAIR, APPLING, COFFEE, BERRIEN. Fl. June—Aug. Ex- tends inland to the Pine Mountains of Middle Georgia (see Bull. Torrey Club 30 : 294. 1903), and coastward to Cumber- land Island, but in some places only a weed. | North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain, — with the above-mentioned exception. TRIFOLIUM L., Sp. Pl. 704. 1753. T:; REPENS L., Sp: Pl. 767. 1753. Ware Crowe Lulaville and Fitzgerald, May 17, 1904. Common in Middle Georgia and northward, introduced from Europe. LUPINUS) Ly. Sp 3b lease. L. villosus Willd., Sp. Pl. 3 : 1029. 1805. (PLaTtE XXII, Fie. 2). Dry and intermediate pine-barrens; not abundant. TATTNALL (2148), BERRIEN. Fl. April. North Carolina to northern Florida and Louisiana, in the pine- barrens. L. diffusus Nutt., Gen. 2 :93. 1818. b Sand-hills; not common. BULLOCH, EMANUEL (2097), TATT- NALL, COFFEE, wiLtcox. Fl. April. Extends inland to Richmond and Laurens Counties. North Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain. Pe perennis: 2 isp.) Bivona 7530 t Ee gracilis Nutt., Jour. Acad: Pina. 17)= 115eewease Sand-hills; not common. BULLOCH (969), TATTNALL, MONT- GOMERY, COFFEE, BERRIEN. Fl. April. Also on the sandhills of the Oconee River opposite Dublin, and on sand-banks along the head-waters of the same river in Middle Georgia (see Bull. Torrey Club 27:328. 1900). Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but often in unnatural habitats northward. Root-anatomy studied by W. E. Britton, Bull. Torrey Club BO O05. 003. CROTALARIA L., Sp. Pl. 714. 1753. C. rotundifolia (Walt.) Poir., Suppl. 2:402. 1811. Sand-hills, etc.; rather rare. BERRIEN, COLQUITT, THOMAS. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF .GEORGIA 225 More common in the upper third of 'the coastal plain, and in ~ Middle Georgia, where it flowers May-—September. Also in Glynn County near Brunswick. Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, also in Mexico and South America, but not everywhere native. C2 Purshn DC., Prodr. 2 :124. 1825. Dry and intermediate pine-barrens; frequent but not abundant. BULLOCH (S557), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN, coLguiTT, THOMAS. FI. May-June. Inland to Sumter County and coastward to Ware. South Carolina to South Florida and Louisiana, confined to the pine-barrens or nearly so. BAPTISIA Vent., Dec. Gen. Nov., 9. 1808. B. perfoliata (L.) R. Br. in Ait. f. Hort. Kew. ed. 2.3.25. 1811. ‘““GOPHER WEED.” Pericaulon perfjoliatum Raf., New Fl. N. A. 2:51. 1836. Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills, abundant in the eastern part of our territory. SCREVEN, BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, © MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR (eastern part, rare), APPLING (two or three miles north of Baxley only), COFFEE (extreme north- eastern corner). Fl. April-June. Coastward to the upper edge of Bryan County, and inland to the fall-line sand-hills of Georgia and South Carolina. Not definitely known from the intervening Eocene region, or farther west than Telfair County. Why its range is so restricted (much like that of Elliottia) is an unsolved problem. For description of some of its peculiar morphological features see Gray, Am. Jour. Sci. III. 2 : 462. 1871; Ravenel, Proc. eee eA S202 301-203" 1872. B. lanceolata (Walt.) Ell., Sk. 12467. 1817. Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills, principally the former. Common in all the pine-barren region of Georgia, and as far inland as Americus. Fl. March—April. North Carolina to northern Florida and Alabama (Baldwin Co.), in the coastal plain, very nearly confined to the pine- barrens. 226 : HARPER B. alba (L.) R. Br. in Ait. f., Hort. Kew: ed. "2) 3): Dry pine-barrens, etc.;not common. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, IRWIN. Fl. April-June. More frequent in the upper third of the coastal plain, and inclined to become a weed. Minnesota (?) to Florida (?); but distribution not well worked out. B. leucantha T. & G., Fl. 12385. 1840. Swamps of the muddy rivers. monTGOMERY: Near Mount - Vernon; COFFEE: Near Barrow’s Bluff. Fl. spring. Distribution in Georgia and elsewhere not well worked out, but said to be similar to that of the preceding. — GLEDITSCHIA L., Sp. Pl. 1056. 1753. G. aquatica Marsh., Arb. Am. 54. 1785. River-swamps. SCREVEN and BULLOCH: Along the Ogeechee River near Dover, June 19, 1901; TATTNALL: Along Ohoopee River near Ohoopee, June 26, 1903. FI. spring. Also in Laurens County a little north of our limits, and prob- ably in many other places in the upper third of the coastal plain. ; Distribution not well worked out; but confined to the coastal plain or nearly so. Reported from South Carolina to Florida, Indiana, Missouri, and Texas, but not from Alabama. CASSIA. Li Sp Bl 276), asee C. Tora L., 1. c. CoFFEE WEED. Streets of Tifton, Sept. 27, 1902. More common in and around some of the older cities of South Georgia, especially Americus. Nearly throughout the Southeastern United States. Jn- troduced from the tropics. C, occrpEeNTALIS L., .Sp..Pl. 397, 17535 (‘Cormmeriieeu With the preceding; also at Faceville, Decatur Co., Aug. 13, 1903. Has about the same distribution in Georgia as well as in other parts of the world. CERCIS L., Sp. Pl. 374. 1753. C. Canadensis L., 1. c. REDBUD. Not a characteristic inhabitant of our territory, but growing ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 224 only in those exceptional places with rich (perhaps cal- careous) soil which constitute considerably less than 1% of the whole area. On wooded bluffs along the muddy rivers in BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY, atid WILcox, also near the Rock House in Dooty and in the woods where the Lafayette formation seems to be absent (see p. 110) in BERRIEN. Farther south seen in Effingham, Charlton, Brooks, and Thomas Counties. More common in the upper third of the coastal plain, and in Middle and Northwest Georgia, where it flowers in March. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States between New England and latitude 30°. MIMOSAE., MORONGIA Britton, Mem. Torrey Club 5: 191. 1894. M. uncinata (Willd.) Britton, 1. c. Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; not common. BULLOCH, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, Fl. May—June. (Perhaps includes M. angustata, which I have never succeeded in distinguishing.) Also in Middle Georgia, and coastward to Cumberland Island; sometimes a weed. Southeastern United States mostly. KRAMERIAE, KRAMERIA Loefl., Iter Hisp. 195. 1758. ? K. secundiflora DC., Prodr. 1:341. 1824. ‘“‘SAND-SPUR.’’ Sand-hills. BULLOCH (971), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONT- GOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX. Fl. June-July. In- land to Laurens County and coastward to Bryan. (See Bull. Torrey Club 30 :336. 1903.) Also in central and West Florida (but not reported from Alabama). It may well be doubted whether our sand-hill plant is identical with the type of this species, which came from Mexico. The absence of the genus from Alabama (as far as known) is perhaps significant. Its range suggests that of Frelichta Floridana (which see). 228 HARPER ROSACE. PRUNUS ‘L., Sp) Pl. 472) 753) P. Caroliniana (Mill.) Ait., Hort. Kew. 2: 540. 1789. EMANUEL: Hammock of Little Ohoopee River, April 5, 1904. Known at a few other points in South Georgia, but so rare that its indigeneity might be questioned. It is commonly cultivated in some of the older cities cf the state and readily escapes. Supposed to be native somewhere in the coastal plain between North Carolina and Texas. -P. serotina Ehrh., Beitr. 3:20. 1788. WILD CHERRY. With the preceding, also near the Ocmulgee River in the northeastern corner of COFFEE County. Very rare in our territory, but increases in abundance toward the mountains. Fl. March—April. Ranges nearly throughout the Eastern United States, and said to occur also in Mexico and Northwestern South America. P. ANGUSTIFOLIA Marsh., Arb. Am. 112, 1785.) Wimp eeeome IB (Glace, Nbc Il Rasa, ws. Roadsides, old fields, etc. SCREVEN, BULLOCH, DODGE, COFFEE. Rare in our territory, but common in the older parts of the state. Scarcely native in Georgia; believed to have been introduced by the aborigines from somewhere westward. P. umbellata Ell., Sk. 1:541. 1821. Hoc Puiu. COFFEE: Woods near the Ocmulgee River opposite Lumber City, Sept. 11, 1903. More common in Middle and Southwest Georgia, both along rivers and as a weed like the preceding. Fl. March—April. South Carolina to Florida, Missouri, and Louisiana. CHRYSOBALANUS L. C. oblongifolius Mx., Fl. 1 :283. 1803. GROUND OAK. (Figured without name in Abbot’s Georgia Insects, pl. 68. 1797.) Sand-hills and very dry pine-barrens; rather common. Noted ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 229 in every county except Screven, Dodge, Worth, and Thomas. Fl. June. Inland to Laurens and Dooly Counties in the Lower Oligocene region, and coastward to Pierce and Charlton in the flat country. South to central Florida and west to Mississippi, in the pine- barrens. : CRALTAGUS La op. Bl 475. 1753... Haw.’ C. apiifolia (Marsh.) Mx., Fl. 1: 287. 1803. Swamps of rivers rising north of our territory. EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE. Fl. spring. Grows in similar situations at several other stations in South Georgia. Usually shrubby, rarely if ever a tree. . Virginia to Florida, Missouri, and Texas, chiefly in the coastal plain. : C. estivalis (Walt.) T. & G., Fl. 1:468. 1840. May Haw. C. lucida Ell. not Mill. TELFAIR: Shallow pond between Scotland and Towns, seen from train Sept. 10, 1903. TATTNALL: Bank of Ohoopee River west of Reidsville (2760). Reported from BERRIEN County by the natives. Most frequent in the Lower Oligocene region. south Carolina (?) to Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain. ©] vidis L., Sp. Pl. 476. 1753. C. arborescens Ell., Sk. 13550. 1821. Only in swamps of the muddy rivers. Ogeechee River near Rocky Ford (also near Millen, just north of our territory) ; Oconee River near Mount Vernon. Fl. March-April. More common in the upper third of the coastal plain, and per- haps also in the Paleozoic region. North Carolina to northern Florida, Missouri, and Texas. ?C. Michauxii Pers. Syn. 2 :38. 1806. C. glandulosa Mx., not Ait (?). SCREVEN: Oak ridge two or three miles west of Sylvania, April 2,1904. TATTNALL: Sand-hills of Rocky Creek, June 24, 1903. Also in Richmond, Pulaski, and other counties of the coastal plain. North Carolina to Georgia. 230 HARPER C. uniflora Muench., Hausv. 5 :147. 1770. BULLOCH: Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens near Bloys, June, 1901. More common in the upper third of the coastal plain, and in old fields in Middle Georgia. New Jersey to Florida and Arkansas. AMELANCHIER Medic., Phil. Bot. 1:155. 1789. A. Canadensis (L.) Medic., Gesch. 79. 1793. On bluffs and in other places where more or less mesophytic conditions prevail. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WIL- cox, DpooLty. Fl. spring. More common farther inland, especially in Middle Georgia, where it flowers in March and April. Widely distributed in temperate Eastern North America. A. sp. (See Bull. Torrey Club 33:237. 1906.) EMANUEL: Sandy bog in pine-barrens near Graymont, June 6, tgor (&r9). Also in Richmond County. ARONIA Medic. A. arbutifolia (L.) Pers. Mostly in branch-swamps; frequent. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, THOMAS, DECATUR. Fl. March-April. Also coast- ward to Camden County. Like Viburnum nudum, with which it commonly associates, it is rare or absent in the Lower Oligocene region of Georgia, but reappears in the Eocene region and in a few moist sandy places in Middle Georgia. Newfoundland to Minnesota in the glaciated region, south to Florida, Arkansas, and Louisiana in the coastal plain. Rare in the intervening highlands. (See Rhodora 7:74. 1905.) Leaf-anatomy discussed by W. E. Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 30 =595- 1903. . . AGRIMONIA L., Sp. Pl. 448. 1753. A sp. pooLty: Around lime-sink east of Wenona, Sept. 1, 1903 (1961). Does not strictly belong to our flora, but rather to that of the upper third of the coastal plain. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 231. j RUBUS L., Sp. Pl. 492. 1753. R. CUNEIFOLIUS Pursh, Fl. 1:347. 1814. ‘‘BRIER-BERRY.”’ Roadsides, old fields, etc., and perhaps sometimes in dry pine- barrens. BULLOCH, DODGE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COL- QUITT, and probably all other South Georgia counties. FI. spring. Connecticut to Florida, Missouri, and Louisiana, mostly in the coastal plain, but natural range and habitat uncertain. R. Nigrobaccus Bailey, Ev. Nat. Fr. 306, 370, 379. f. 59, 60. 1898. BLACKBERRY. Damp woods and swamps, apparently only where the Lafayette formation is thin or absent. COFFEE, BERRIEN. Also in similar situations in Camden County and elsewhere in South Georgia. Owing to uncertainty of specific limits in this genus the range of this cannot be given satisfactorily. R. Trivialis Mx., Fl. 1: 296. 1803. DEWBERRY. Dry pine-barrens, or perhaps oftener a weed. SCREVEN, EMANUEL, BULLOCH. FI. spring. Common in old fields in Middle Georgia. Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, but natural range and habitat uncertain. HAMAMELIDACE. LIQUIDAMBAR L., Sp. Pl. 999. 1753. L. Styraciflua L., l.c. ““Swert Gum.” Common in river-swamps and on bluffs and rock outcrops, also often in moist pine-barrens, where it is only a shrub (and apparently sterile). Fl. March. Grows all over the state, reaching its best development north of our territory, in swamps or alluvial bottoms. Common from Connecticut to Missouri, Florida, and Texas. Also in Mexico and Central America, if it is all the same species. Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herbs 5:490. 1901. For a discussion of some other properties of this species see Bull. 58, U. S. Bureau of Forestry. 232 HARPER HAMAMELIS L., Sp. Pl. 124. 1753. H. Virginiana L., 1.c. Witcu Hazev. Hammocks, bluffs, etc.; frequent. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN, DOOLY. Widely distributed over the state, more common farther inland. Flowers from October to January in Middle Georgia. Throughout the Eastern United States north of latitude 30°. SAXIFRAGACE. ITEA WL, Sp: Pip roo..a75er Toavarcinitca aL c Chiefly in creek-swamps. BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. Fl. June—April. Coastward to Camden County, and inland at least to Athens in Middle Georgia. New Jersey to South Florida and Arkansas, most abundant in the coastal plain. Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 5 :490-491. I90OT. DECUMARIA L., Sp. Pl. ed. 2. 1663. 1763. D. barbara L., l. c. Only in the peculiar low woods already mentioned (see p. 110), west and southwest of Tifton, BERRIEN Co., September, 1902. Also in Camden County, but more common farther inland, at least as far north as Northwest Georgia, but per- haps notinthe mountains. Fl. May. Virginia to Florida and Louisiana. Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. BUNAgT)) LOOE: SARRACENIACE. SARRACENIA L., Sp. Pl. 510. 1753. PITCHER PLANTS. S. minor Walt., Fl. Car. 153. 1788. S. variolaris Mx. Fl. 1:310. 1803. (See Bull. Torrey Club 30 : 331-332. 1903.) Moist and intermediate pine-barrens; common (but not as abundant as the next) in every county except Decatur. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 233 Fl. April-May. Also in every county in the flat country, and inland to Johnson, Sumter, and Early Counties in the Lower Oligocene region. North Carolina to central and Middle Florida, strictly confined to the pine-barrens. Suitlavayl:, 1. c. . PircHers.” Probably the most abundant and conspicuous herb in our _ moist pine-barrens. Much more rarely in branch-swamps and shallow ponds. Noted in every county in our territory except Laurens and Decatur (see plate XXIII). Its inland limit coincides very closely with the Altamaha Grit escarp- ment, not extending beyond it more than a mile or two, if at all (see Bull. Torrey Club 32 :147. 1905). FI. April. Toward the coast it extends only to Effingham, Wayne, Pierce, Ware, Lowndes, and Brooks Counties in the flat country. In other states its range is not so restricted, for it has been found above the fall-line in Virginia and North Carolina (see Torreya 3 :123-124. 1903). Dinwiddie County, Virginia (see Torreya 4:123. 1904), to northern Florida and Alabama, mostly in the coastal plain. Also in western North Carolina (Small & Heller.) S-cubra Walt., Fl. Car: 152.1788. Sand-hill bogs and moist pine-barrens; ratherrare. BULLOCH, EMANUEL (SIO), TATTNALL (2147), MONTGOMERY (1871). FI. April. Known otherwise in the state only from Richmond and Sumter Counties (see Bull. Torrey Club 27 : 428. 1900; 30 3334. 1903). North Carolina to West Florida and Mississippi, mostly in the coastal plain. S. psittacina Mx., Fl. 1:311. 1803; Croom, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. AppLOU, T3237). S. calceolata Nutt., Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. 4:49. pl. 1. 1833. S. pulchella Croom, Am. Jour. Sci. 25:75. 1833. Moist pine-barrens, from BULLOCH to COLQuITT, inland to WIL- cox, and coastward to Charlton County. Abundant but inconspicuous; usually with S. minor or S. flava or both ofthem. Fl. April. Never seen northwest of the Altamaha 234 HARPER Grit escarpment. (Michaux reported it from Augusta, but that is almost certainly an error, as the plant has not been seen within 60 miles of there since Michaux’s time.) South to Florida and west to Louisiana, in the pine-barrens. S. purpurea L., Sp. Pl. 510. 1753. TATTNALL: Sand-hill bog near Reidsville, April 26, 1904, past flowering (2151). Known from only one or two other stations in Georgia (see Bull. Torrey Club 31 :23. 1904). Ranges throughout the glaciated region of the northern states and adjacent Canada, and in the coastal plain from North Carolina to Middle Florida and West Tennessee, but absent from most of the intervening territory (see Rhodora 7:74. 1905). The following natural hybrids have been noticed in ourterritory, each in moist pine-barrens in company with both parents. S. flava x minor Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 30: 332. 1903. 31:22. 1904. 32.2462. 7. 4. To05: (Gee plate ee eenyeans 1, and plate XXV, fig. 2). BULLOCH (855), COFFEE (1437). Also reported from South Carolina (Macfarlane, Trans. & IPTROC, EXO SOs IPB TE 8 AAO), - ROCA). S. minor x psittacina Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 33: COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN (2217), COLQUITT. Not known elsewhere. DROSERACE., DROSERA L., Sp. Pl. 281. 1753. D. filiformis Raf., Med. Rep. II. 5 :360. 1808. coLguitr: Abundant in moist pine-barrens at several stations within a few miles of Moultrie (7645) and Autreyville. Not seen in flower or fruit. Also occurs in Thomas County, a little south of our limits, but not known in other parts of the state. Massachusetts to Delaware, and Georgia to West Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain; but there seem to be some considerable gaps in its range; or perhaps the Bon Aer and southern plants are not identical. OE ae one ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 235 ? D. capillaris Poir., Encyc. 6:299. 1804. Moist pine-barrens; common but inconspicuous. Probably grows in every county in the region, but only noted in BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, and DECATUR. FI. June—Aug. Ranges nearly throughout South Georgia, wherever the Columbia sand occurs. Our plant does not agree exactly with published descriptions of D. capillaris, and might just about as well be D. brevijolia Pursh. ‘These two species are said to range from North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana in the coastal plain. The fact that the whole foliage of this plant (whichever species it may be) is red is rarely if ever mentioned in descriptions. CAPPARIDACE/. ALDENELLA Greene, Pittonia 4 :212. 1900. A. tenuifolia (LeConte) Greene, 1. c. Polanisia tenurjolia (LeConte) T. &. G., Fl. 1: 123. 1838. Sand-hills and sand-hammocks; rather rare. TATTNALL (1861), MONTGOMERY. Fl. June-Aug. Also in Liberty, McIntosh, Wayne, and Pierce Counties in the flat country. Reported also from Florida and southeastern Alabama. CRUCIFERA. WAREA Nutt., Jour. Acad. Phila. 7:83. 1834. W. cuneifolia (Muhl.) Nutt., 1. c. 84. Cleome cunetfolia Muhl.; Nutt. Gen. 2:73. 1818. Stanleya gracilis DC., Syst. 2 :512. 1821. sand-hills, particularly toward the hammocks at their bases; sometimes with the preceding, and almost as rare. MONT- GOMERY (I9SI), TELFAIR, COFFEE. Fl. July—Sept. Also in Richmond (A. Cuthbert) and Pierce Counties. Found by Elliott on the fall-line sand-hills somewhere between Milledgeville and Columbus. South Carolina (Bartram, according to DeCandolle) to South Florida, in the coastal plain. This, the only native crucifer in our flora, has considerable affinity with the preceding family, as was noticed by Nuttall 236 HARPER when he described it. The similarity of its habitat to that of the preceding species is probably not without significance, LEPIDIUM L., Sp. Pl. 643. 1753. L. Vircinicum L., Sp. Pl. 645. 1753. PEPPERGRASS. A weed in the streets of Collins, Fitzgerald, Tifton, Nashville, and doubtless other places. More common farther inland. Widely scattered from Canada to Central America, but natural range and habitat unknown. CORONOPUS Gaert., Fr. & Sem. 2 : 293. 1791. CC) pipymus (L.) J. E-Smith, FE Brit. 3 0onssesce: Streets of Swainsboro, April 6, 1904. More common in older cities. Canada to Brazil; also in Europe. Natural range and hab- itat unknown. , PAPAVERACE. SANGUINARIA L., Sp. Pl. 505. 1753. S. Canadensis L., 1. c. (BLOopROOT.) wiLcox: Upper Seven Bluffs on the Ocmulgee River, May 17, 1904. Not properly belonging to our flora. More common in the upper third of the coastal plain and farther inland, ranging northward to Canada. The Wilcox County plant is probably identical with a specimen from Sumter County, without flowers or fruit, which was made by Prof. Greene the type of his S. rotundtfolta (Pit- tonia 5 :308. 1905). It does not seem best to take up Prof. Greene’s species until more is known about it, however. BERBERIDACE. PODOPHYLLUM L., Sp. Pl. 505. 1753. P. peltatum L., 1. c. (May Appz.) BULLOCH: Wooded bluff along Ogeechee River near Echo, March 31, and April 4, 1904, in flower (2079). Like the preceding, this does not properly belong to our flora, but is more common in the older parts of the country. It is nowhere abundant in Georgia. Ranges northward to Canada. Anatomy described by Holm, Bot. Gaz. 27: 419-433. j. I-I0. 1899. ‘ ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA Dat NYMPHA ACE. CASTALIA Sal., in Koenig & Sims, Ann. Bot. 2:71. 1805. C. odorata (Dryand.) Woodv. & Wood in Rees Cycl. 6:—. 1808. WATER LILY. Not a typical member of our flora, because it seems to require permanent stagnant water. Grows in a pine-barren pond ‘near the Altamaha Grit escarpment in SCREVEN, and in an artificial pond (Heard’s Pond) just within our southern _ border in THomasS. FI. April—Aug. Widely distributed in the glaciated region and coastal plain of the Eastern United States, but mostly wanting in the Piedmont region and mountains, or if occurring there prob- ably introduced. (See Rhodora 7 :78. 1905.) NYMPHAA L., Sp. Pl. sro. 1753. N. fluviatilis Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 234-236, f.2, 1906. ““BONNETS.’’ In slow-flowing water in small rivers and in swamps of the larger rivers. In the Ogeechee near Rocky Ford and Dover (also at several points north of our territory), in the Ohoopee near Ohoopee and Reidsville, in the Oconee swamps near Mount Vernon, in the Little Ocmulgee near Lumber City, and in the Withlacoochee near Nashville. Flowers in June, and doubtless also somewhat earlier and later. Pretty widely distributed in South Georgia, from Glascock and Crawford Counties to McIntosh, but not yet known in other states (see original description). N. orgicurata Small. Bull. Torrey Club 23 : 128. 1896. Known in our territory only from Heard’s Pond in THomas County, an artificial pond made by damming up an ordinary branch-swamp. (1178). This happens to be the type- locality, but the species is evidently not native there. (See Bull. Torrey Club 30:331; 32:146. Rhodora 7:78.) It is native however not far away, in the large lime-sink ponds of Decatur and Lowndes Counties (see Bull. Torrey Club 30 :331 and errata. 1903; 31:14. 1904), and adjacent Florida. 238 HARPER BRASENIA Schreb. B. purpurea (Mx.) Caspary. Like Castalia, this does not properly belong to our flora. It grows in ponds along the escarpment in SCREVEN and WILcox, and adventive in Heard’s Pond, tHomas County, with the preceding, and in accidental ponds (caused by building a railroad embankment across branches without allowing any outlet) in the northern corner of TELFAIR and adjacent portions of popcre. Fl. May—June. General distribution in North America about the same as that of Castalia odorata. Said to grow also in Cuba, Central America, Asia, Africa, and Australia, but probably it is not native in all that territory, or else there is more than one species involved. The same or a related species has been found fossil in Europe. MAGNOLIACEZA. LIRIODENDRON L., Sp. Pl. 535. 1753. L; Tulipifera Ul. c., (Quire TRpe)): | Porusmeg Chiefly in branch-swamps, frequent throughout. Apparently a little more abundant in coLquiTt than in any other county in our region. Fl. April. Probably grows in every county in Georgia, reaching its best development in mountain valleys. Ranges throughout the Eastern United States between lati- tudes 30° and 42°. MAGNOLIA L., Sp. Pl. 535. 1753. M. grandiflora L., Syst. ed. 10. 2: 1082. 1759. ““Macno.ia”’! LOBUOLIY. 4 Hammocks, bluffs, Altamaha Grit escarpment, etc.; frequent but not abundant. EMANUEL, TATTNALL (1862), MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN, DOOLY, WORTH, THOMAS, DECATUR, and doubtless in the remaining counties as well. (Magnolia P. O. in Mitchell County, which seems to be on or near the escarpment, is in all probability named 1 How the technical name Magnolia could have penetrated to some of the remotest rural districts is a problem for the philologist. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 239 for this tree.) Fl. May—June. Widely distributed over South Georgia up to within about ten miles of the fall-line. (See in this connection Croom, Am. Jour. Sci. 25:314-315. 1834.) North Carolina to central Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, strictly confined to the coastal plain. Weesianca iy op. Pl ied. 2, 755. 1703. “Bay.” “Wit Bay.” A small tree in branch-swamps, very common. Also in non- alluvial creek-swamps one of our largest trees (24 by 80 feet in COFFEE County), and in wet pine-barrens often abundant as a knee-high shrub,! flowering and fruiting freely. Noted in every county except Laurens and Mitchell (but my work in the portions of those counties included in this flora has been confined to about five miles of car-window observations in each case). Fl. April-July. Ranges throughout South Georgia, and inland to Carroll County in western Middle Georgia, where it reaches a considerable size. Abundant in Chattahoochee County, in the Cretaceous region. Massachusetts (one station, doubtfully native), Long Island (rare) and eastern Pennsylvania to central Florida, Arkan- sas and Texas, mostly in the coastal plain. Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 5 :488-489. Igor. ANONACEZ. ASIMINA Adans., Fam. 2 :365. 1763. Pawpaw. A. parviflora (Mx.) Dunal, Monog. Anon. 82. pl. 9. 1817. Hammocks, bluffs, etc. EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN. Fl. March—April. Widely distributed in Middle and South Georgia. North Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi (?), in the Piedmont region and coastal plain. A. speciosa Nash, Bull. Torrey Club 23 : 238. 1896. Only south of the Altamaha River, in dry pine-barrens, sand- hills, etc. APPLING, COFFEE (1435), and the northeastern 1A similar form has been noted by Dr. Hilgard in Jackson County, ' Mississippi (Geol. and Agric. Miss., p. 368. 2816. 1860.) 240 HARPER corner of BERRIEN. Fl. April-May. Also coastward in Pierce, Charlton, and Camden Counties, and reported from adjacent Florida. A. angustifolia Gray, Bot. Gaz. 11 :163. 1886. Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; not common. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. FI. May. Inland to Lee, Early, and Decatur Counties in the Lower Oligocene region (especially common around Bain- bridge), and coastward to Cumberland Island and adjacent Florida. RANUNCULACEA. Represented by only three species, none of them common. THALICTRUM L., Sp. Pl. 545. 1753. T. macrostylum (Shuttl.) Small & Heller, Mem. Torrey Club BUSH erage MONTGOMERY: Bluff along Oconee River near Ochwalkee, July 1, 1903 (1867). More frequent in the lime-sink region. Western North Carolina to Middle Florida. CLEMATIS L., Sp. Pl. 543. 1753. C. reticulata Walt., Fl. Car. 156. 1788. COFFEE: Lower slopes of sand-hills of Seventeen Mile Creek near Douglas, July 30, 1902. (1463). Also known farther inland, in Sumter and Marion Counties. South Carolina to Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the coastal plain. C. crispa L., 1. ¢: Swamps; rare. TATTNALL: Along Ohoopee River; COLQUITT: Branch-swamp near Moultrie. Fl. spring and summer. Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States. CARYOPHYLLACE. ARENARIA L., Sp. Pl. 423. 1753. A. Caroliniana Walt., Fl. Car. 141. 1788. A. squarrosa Mx., Fl. 1 :273. 1873. On sand-hills; not rare in the eastern part of our territory. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 241 BULLOCH (QII), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, COFFEE. Fl. April—June. Extends inland to the fall-line in Richmond County and coastward to Bryan County. Long Island to West Florida, in the coastal plain. A. brevifolia Nutt.; T. & G., Fl. 1: 180. 1838. TATTNALL: Flat rocks near Ohoopee River (2157). FI. early spring. This is supposed to be the type-locality, or very near it (see Torreya 4 :138-141. 1904). Known elsewhere in the state only from granite outcrops in Middle Georgia, where it is quite abundant in spots. Occurs also in the upper parts of North Carolina and Alabama. SAGINA L., Sp. Pl. 128. 1753. Se PECUMBENS, (Ell.) T.&G., Fl. 22177. 1838. A weed. Lulaville, May 17, 1904. More common in the older-settled parts of the state. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of latitude 41°, but natural range and habitat unknown. STIPULICIDA Mx., Fl. 1:26. 1803. S. setacea Mx.,1.c. pl. 6. Sand-hills, etc.; rather common. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATT- NALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. FI. April—July, if not later. Less common in other parts of South Georgia. North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain. PORTULACACES. PORTULACA L., Sp. Pl. 445. 1753. 12 SeTICORIN IDEA IRN oe A weed, mostly around dwellings; not common! TELFAIR, COFFEE, COLQUITT. Not noticed farther north. Doubtless introduced from the tropics. TALINUM Adans., Fam. 2 :245. 1763. T. teretifolium Pursh, Fl. 365. 1814. Figured in Meehan’s Native Flowers & Ferns 2 :53-56. pl. I4-. 1879. Rock outcrops. TATTNALL (1859), pooLy. (See Bull. Torrey 242 HARPER Club 32 :143, 160. 7. r. 1905. The illustration in Torreya 4 :140 represents another station for it.) Known elsewhere in the state only on flat granite rocks in Middle Georgia, where it flowers from May to September. New York to Alabama, mostly in the Piedmont region. AIZOACE:. MOLLUGO L., Sp. Pl. 89. 1753. M. VeRTICILLATA L., 1: c. witcox: Near dwelling, Queensland, May 17, 1904. More common in the older-settled parts of the state. Widely distributed in North and South America, but natural range and habitat unknown. NYCTAGINACE. BOERHAVIA L., Sp. Pl. 3. 1753. Bee PRE CTAG IY. silence A weed in Tifton, Sept. 27, 1902. More common in larger and older cities in other parts of the state (e. g., Athens, Ameri- cus, Brunswick). Fl. June—Oct. South Carolina to Mexico and the West Indies. Certainly not native in Georgia, and probably introduced from the tropics. ILLECEBRACE. GIBBESIA Small, Bull. Torrey Club 25 :621. 1808. G. Rugelii (Shuttl.) Small, 1. c. MONTGOMERY: Lower slopes of sand-hills of Little Ocmulgee River, Sept. 10, 1903. (2990). Fl. Aug—Sept. Known otherwise only from the lime-sink regions of Decatur and Lowndes Counties, and a few places in Florida. SIPHONYCHIA T.&G., Fl. 1:172. 1838. S. Americana (Nutt.) T. & G., Fl. 1:173. 1838. Sand-hills;not common. COFFEE (700), IRWIN, BERRIEN 1606). Fl. Sept-Oct. Inland to Richmond County (A. Cuthbert). South Carolina to Florida, in the pine-barrens, with the above exception. “spn S. pauciflora Small., Fl. 4o2. 1903. ' Hammocks and sand-hills. Perhaps intergrades with the d ‘ ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 243 preceding. BULLOCH (967, type), DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE. Fl. June-Sept. Extends inland to the vicinity of Augusta (A. Cuthbert) and Dublin. _ Also in Florida. PARONYCHIA Adans., Fam. 2 : 272. 1763. P. herniarioides (Mx.) Nutt.; Spreng., Syst. 1:822. 1825. Sand-hills and sand-hammocks. BULLOCH (912), EMANUEL (975), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX. (See Bull. Torrey Club 30: 328. 1903.) Inland to Taylor (H. M. Neisler) and Pulaski Counties and coastward to Bryan. North Carolina to central Florida, in the coastal plain. Eetipatia Chapm., Fl. -ed. 2,607. 1883. Hammocks, sand-hammocks, and sandy river-banks. EMAN- UEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY (15809), TELFAIR, COFFEE. Extends inland to several points along and near the Flint River in the lime-sink region, and coastward down the Altamaha River to McIntosh County. Not definitely known outside of South Georgia. AMARANTHACE. FRCLICHIA Moench, Meth. 50. 1794. F. Floridana (Nutt.) Moq. in DC. Prodr. 137: 420. 1849. MONTGOMERY: Sand-hills and hammock of Gum Swamp Creek and Little Ocmulgee River, Sept. 10, 1903; a little past flowering. Also occurs in sandy soil in Richmond, Sumter, TELFAIR; Liberty, and Charlton Counties, but apparently there only as a weed. Reported also from several places in Florida and one in Alabama, but whether native or not cannot be ascertained at present. Material from the Great Plains region formerly referred to this has been made the type of a new species (F. campestris) by Dr. Small. ALTERNANTHERA R. Br., Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. 416. 1810. _A. REPENS (L.) Kuntze, Rev. 2 : 536. 1891. _ A, Archyrantha (L.) ; A weed along streets and near dwellings. In Helena and at 244. HARPER a farmhouse about five miles north of Whigham. More common nearer the coast, in Savannah, Brunswick, and Thomasville. Widely distributed in the tropics, and naturalized along the southern coasts of the United States. CHENOPODIACES. ~ CHENOPODIUM L., Sp. Pl. 218. 1753. C. AMBROSIOIDES L. (or perhaps C. anthelminticum L.) Streets of Tifton, Sept. 27, 1902. Common in older com- munities. Introduced from the tropics. POLYGONACE. ERIOGONUM Mx., Fl. 1: 246. 1803. E. tomentosum Mx., l.c., pl. 24. Sand-hills and very drv pine-barrens; common throughout South Georgia, where the Columbia sand is present (see Science, II. 16:68. 1902), from the fall-line to within about 2c miles of the coast along the Altamaha River. Fl. July-Sept. One can hardly imagine a Georgia sand- hill without this plant on it. South Carolina to central Florida and southeastern Alabama, strictly confined to the coastal plain. RUMEX L., Sp. Pl. 333. 1753. R. HASTATULUS, Baldw.; Ell:, Sk. 1:416. 1817. Fields and roadsides; often with Linaria Canadensis. BUL- LOCH, EMANUEL, and probably other counties. Fl. April— May. New York to Florida, Texas, and Kansas, mostly in the coastal plain. Natural range and habitat unknown. POLYGONELLA Mx,, Fl. 2 : 240. 1803. P. Croomii Chapm., Fl. 387. 1860. Sand-hills. A diminutive diffusely-branched shrub. EMAN- UEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY (2985). Fl. September, and perhaps later. Not definitely known elsewhere. See Bull. Torrey Club 3211150100. L905, ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 245 fee. gtacilis (Nutt.) Meisn., in DC. Prodr. 14:80. 1856. _ Sand-hills. DODGE (1977), MONTGOMERY, and doubtless else- where. In corFree County I have collected a form (2070) with linear acute leaves, but apparently otherwise identical. Fl. September. Coastward to McIntosh County. south Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, 1n the pine-barrens. THYSANELLA Gray, Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist. 5 : 24. 1845. T. fimbriata (Ell.) Gray, 1. c. (excl. descr.). Sand-hills. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX, BER- RIEN (2694). Fl. Sept.—Oct. Extends inland to the fall- line sand-hills in Taylor County, where Elliott discovered it Geen bully Dorey Club: 3n.:12.\ 109004), and coastward. to Bryan County. Also in Florida and southeastern Alabama. BRUNNICHIA Banks; Gaert., Fr. & Sem. 1:213. pl. 45. f. Pel 700. B. cirrhosa Banks, 1. c. Swamps of the muddy rivers. Oconee River near Mount Vernon, and Ocmulgee River near Lumber City. Fl. July— Aug. Extends down the Altamaha to Doctortown and Barrington, but more frequent along the Flint and Chatta- hoochee Rivers in the upper third of the coastal plain. South Carolina to Florida (River Junction), Illinois, and Ar- kansas, in the coastal plain. ARISTOLOCHIACE. ARISTOLOCHIA L., Sp. Pl. 960. 1753. A. Serpentaria L., Sp. Pl. 961. 1753. WiLcox: Upper Seven Bluffs, May 17, 1904. Does not prop- erly belong to our flora, but is more common in the upper third of the coastal plain and northward to the mountains and beyond, much as in the case of Sanguinaria and Podo- phyllum, already mentioned. Connecticut to Michigan, northern Florida, and Missouri. LORANTHACE. PHORADENDRON Nutt., Jour. Acad. Phila. II. 1 : 185. 1848. P. flavescens (Pursh) Nutt.; Gray, Man. ed. 2, 383, 1856. ‘“‘Mrs- TEETOR.: ; 246 HARPER In our territory its usual host is Nyssa biflora, and it grows wherever that does, in swamps and ponds. SCREVEN, BUL- LOCH, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY. Distributed nearly all over Georgia. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of the glaciated region. Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 5 : 487. 19or. MORACE. MORUS L., Sp. Pl. 986. 1753. M. rubra L., 1. c. MULBERRY. In our territory only where the Lafayette formation seems to be absent, in rich or slightly calcareous soil. MONTGOMERY: Stallings’ Bluff; BERRIEN: Woods west of Tifton (see p. 110); pooLy: Around the Rock House. Fl. spring. More com- mon farther inland, particularly in the Paleozoic region (Northwest Georgia). Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. ULMACE. ULMUS Ly 9Sp.. Pin 2255 27535) ne U- alata Mix iP Sie Ose DOOLY: In lime-sink between Wenona and the Rock House, near the Altamaha Grit escarpment, Sept. 1, 1903 (1963). A large tree. More common farther inland, like most other species growing along the escarpment. Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States. What is probably another species grows in some of the muddy river-swamps. PLANERA Gmel., Syst. 2 :150. 1791. P. aquatica (Walt) Gmel., 1.c. HornBEam. (WaTER) Em. River-swamps. SCREVEN, BULLOCH (2080), TATTNALL, MONT- GOMERY, COFFEE. Fl. Feb.—March. Pretty widely dis- tributed in South Georgia, from Crawford and WSs Counties to McIntosh and Clinch. North Carolina to Florida, Illinois, and Texas, in the coastal plain. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 247 CUPULIFERZ. OUERCUS L., Sp; Plvoo4, 1753, OAxs: » Q. alba L., Sp. Pl. 996. 1753. WuiTE Oak. Rather rare in our territory. Usually on bluffs with Poly- stichum acrostichoides (see Fern Bull. 13 :13. 1905). MONT- GOMERY: Along Oconee River near Mount Vernon and Ochwalkee; COFFEE: Barrow’s Bluff; pooLty: Around the Rock House. More common farther inland, particularly toward the mountains. Throughout the Eastern United States north of latitude 209°. Q. minor [Marsh.] Sarg., Gard. & For. 2 :471. 1889. Post Oak. MONTGOMERY: Stallings’ Bluff, June 29, 1903. More common farther inland, like the preceding, and having nearly the same range. Q. Margaretta Ashe. ‘Post Oak.” Sand-hills, oak ridges, etc.; common. Ranges nearly all over South Georgia. North Carolina to Florida and Alabama, in the coastal plain. Q. lyrata Walt., Fl. Car. 235. 1788. (Post Oak.) Only in swamps of rivers which rise north of our territory; usually with Jlex decidua. BULLOCH: Ogeechee River; EMANUEL: Little Ohoopee River; MONTGOMERY: Oconee River; TELFAIR: Ocmulgee River. More common in the upper third of the coastal plain. Extends sparingly inland to Columbia, Gwinnett (Small), and Carroll Counties, and down the Altamaha to McIntosh. 5 North Carolina to Florida (?), Missouri, and Texas, mostly in the coastal plain. Q. Michauxii Nutt., Gen. 2:215. 1818. Noted in our territory at each of the same places as the pre- ceding, and on the same dates. Its general distribution in Georgia and elsewhere is much the same, except that it seems to range a little farther north. Q. geminata Small, Bull. Torrey Club 24: 438. 1897. “‘LivE Oax.”’ Sand-hills, hammocks, etc. Noted at several stations in 248 HARPER TATTNALL, COFFEE (2050), and BERRIEN. Doubtless grows in some of the other counties, but probably not in all, as it seems to be confined to the lower half of the coastal plain, like Cholisma ferruginea, Castanea alnifolia, and Serenoa. Fl. April. In corrEe County it becomes as much as two feet in diameter, and thirty feet tall. Its trunk is ascending or curved, never strictly erect. Ranges mostly southward, but distribution not well worked out. Until recently confused with Q. Vuzurginiana. (See Bull. Torrey Club 32 :465. 1905.) Q. pumila Walt., Fl. Car. 234. 1788. ‘Oak RUNNER ” Intermediate and dry pine-barrens; not rare. SCREVEN (2080), BULLOCH (905), TATTNALL, TELFAIR, APPLING, COFFEE (1457), IRWIN, BERRIEN, WORTH, COLQUITT, DECATUR. FI. March. Common toward the coast, but apparently wanting in the upper third of the coastal plain. North Carolina to Florida, in the pine-barrens. Q. digitata [Marsh.] Sudw., Gard. & For. 5:98,99. 1892. (SPAN- ISH OAK): > REDO May 7 Dry pine-barrens. Noted only in coFFEE County, but doubt- less occurs elsewhere in the region, where the Columbia formation is thin or absent. Common farther inland, es- pecially in Middle Georgia. Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States north of latitude 30°. Q. Catesbei Mx., Hist. Chen. Am. pl. 29, 30. 1801. “‘BLACK Jack.” ““TuRKEY Oak.” On every sand-hill, and in dry pine-barrens; abundant through- out. Fl. March. Pretty widely distributed in South Geor- gia, and seen also on the rocky slopes of the Pine Mountains (see Bull. Torrey Club 30 : 294. 1903). Usually a small tree trunk rarely over a foot in diameter. North Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain (with the exception above noted). Q. Marylandica Muench., Hausv. 5 :253. 1770. ‘“‘DOLLAR-LEAF OAR io BLACK PACKS, Dry pine-barrens, where the Lafayette loamis at or near the a ee a ee a ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 249 surface. SCREVEN, BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONT- GOMERY, APPLING, COFFEE, WILCOX, DOOLY, DECATUR. More common farther inland, particularly in Middle Georgia. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of latitude 41°. ener op. Pl oo5. 1753. Gn part.) ~~ WatER OAK.” Q. aquatica {[Lam.| Walt., Fl. Car. 234. 1788. Chiefly in creek-swamps with Acer rubrum; not very common. SCREVEN, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, BERRIEN, DOOLY, COLQUITT, THOMAS. More common in the upper third of the coastal plain, and in Middle Georgia. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of latitude 39°. e Q. brevifolia [Lam.] Sarg., Silva 8: 171. pl. 437. 1803. Q. cinerea Mx. “‘TurKEyY Oak” (HIGH-GROUND WILLOW Oak). sand-hills and dry pine-barrens throughout, usually with Q. Catesbei and almost as common. A small tree, rarely a foot in diameter. Ranges from the fall-line sand-hills al most to the coast. North Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain. Q. laurifolia Mx., Hist. Chen. Am. pl. 17. 1801. ‘“‘ WATER OAK.”’ The prevailing oak in hammocks and allied habitats SCREVEN, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN. Pretty widely distributed in South Georgia. Differs from its nearest relatives in being evergreen, like most hammock trees, and therefore unmistakable in winter. Virginia to central Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. Leaf-anatomy discussed by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 5 :295. 1900. Both Kearney and Small speak of this species as deciduous, but it is decidedly evergreen in Georgia, and Croom found it so in North Carolina (Cat. Pl. Newbern, 47. 1837.) Q. Phellos L., Sp. Pl. 994. 1753. WuiLLow Oak. Ocmulgee River swamp at Barrow’s Bluff, correE County, May 14, 1904; and probably elsewhere in similar situations. 250 HARPER Fl. March. Distribution in Georgia not well worked out, but it is known to grow also in the Paleozoic region, and around mayhaw ponds in the Lower Oligocene region. This tree looks much like the preceding in summer, but in winter, and still more so in early spring when the leaves are unfold- ing, it is very distinct. Staten Island to central Florida, Missouri, and Texas. CASTANEA Adans., Fam. 2: 375. 1763. C. pumila (L.) Mill. (no. 2), Dict. Gard. ed. 8. 1768. CHINQUAPIN. EMANUEL: Rosemary sand-hills, June 28, 1901; MONTGOMERY: sand-hills of Gum Swamp Creek, Sept. 10, 1903; WILCOX: Upper Seven Bluffs, May 17, 1904. Grows also in Pierce County in situations similar to that first mentioned, but it is more common farther inland, all the way to the mountains. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of latitude 40°. C. alnifolia Nutt., Gen. 2 :217. 1818. ‘“‘CHINQUAPIN.”’ C. nana Muhl.; Ell., Sk. 2:615. 1824; Kearney, Bull. Torrey Club 21: 261-262. pl. 206. 1894; Small, Bull. Torrey Club 23: 126. 18096. : C. alntfolia pubescens Nutt., Sylva 1:19. pl. 6. 1842. Dry and intermediate pine-barrens. APPLING, COFFEE (2202), IRWIN, BERRIEN. Fl. May. Common in the flat country ‘toward the coast, but not known farther inland. South Carolina to northern Florida, in the lower half of the coastal plain. Also reported from Arkansas and Louisiana (Sargent). BETULACE. ALNUS Gaert., Fr. & Sem. 2 : 54. pl. 90.1791. ALDER. A. rugosa (DuRoi) Koch, Dendrol. 2 :635. 1872. In branch-, creek-, and river-swamps; not common. SCREVEN, BULLOCH, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, witcox. Flowers in January, being probably our earliest spring flower. More common farther inland, especially in Middle Georgia. Nearly throughout the Eastern United States. F ; ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 251 BETULA L., Sp. Pl. 982. 1753. Burcu. Beoniera i., |. c Banks of creeks and rivers. SCREVEN, TATTNALL, TELFAIR, THOMAS (1938). Extends down the Ogeechee, Canoochee, and Altamaha Rivers to within about 20 miles of the coast. More common farther inland, particularly in Middle Georgia, and reaching its largest dimensions probably in Northwest Georgia. . Widely distributed in the Eastern United States outside of New England. OSTRYA Scop., Fl. Carn. 414. 1760. O. Virginiana (Mill.) Willd., Sp., Pl. 4:469. 1805. BULLOCH: Rich woods along Ogeechee River near Echo; DODGE: Hammock of Gum Swamp Creek east of Eastman; BERRIEN: Rich woods near Little River, southwest of Tifton. Rare coastward, but more common farther inland. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States and adjacent Canada. CARPINUS L., Sp. Pl. 998. 1753. C. Caroliniana Walt., Fl. Car. 236. 1788. IRoNWwoobp. MONTGOMERY: Oconee River swamp near Mount Vernon, TELFAIR: Ocmulgee River swamp near Lumber City; DOOLY: Lime-sink between Wenona and the Rock House. More common farther inland. Has about the same range as the preceding. SALICACEZ:. SALIX L., Sp. Pl. rors. 1753. WILLow. S. nigra Marsh., Arb. Am. 139. 1785. Banks of rivers, often with Betula nigra, usually overhanging the water; not abundant. TATTNALL, (see Plate IX, Pig. 1.) MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, THOMAS. Also ina few wet places away from rivers (TATTNALL, TELFAIR, and BERRIEN) probably introduced in some way since the country was settled up. Fl. spring. Widely distributed over the state but most common in the older parts. Throughout the United States, or nearly so. 252 HARPER MYRICACEZ. MYRICA L., Sp. Pl. 1024. 1753. M. Carolinensis Mill., Gard. Dict. ed. 8. 1768. (BAYBERRY.) (Included in M. cerifera by nearly all 19th century authors.) Sand-hill bogs, non-alluvial swamps, moist pine-barrens, etc. BULLOCH, EMANUEL (982), MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN, DOOLY, coLquitr. Fl. spring. Pretty well scattered over South Georgia. . | Nova Scotia to Lake Erie in the glaciated region, south to northern Florida and eastern Louisiana in the coastal plain. (See Rhodora 7:74. 1905.) Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 5 F204. LOC. M. cerifera L., 1. c: MyrtT Le. BULLOCH: Rich woods along Ogeechee River near Echo (oppo- site Rocky Ford), March 31 and April 4, 1904. BERRIEN: Low rich woods west and southwest of Tifton, Sept. 29 and 30, 1902 (seepp.1i0, 111). Fl.March. Quite abundant near the coast, and scattered pretty well over South Georgia, reaching its best development probably in the Cretaceous region. This species seems almost always to indicate the absence of the Lafayette formation. Maryland to South Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the coastal plain. Leaf-anatomy briefly described by Kearney, Contr. U.S. Nat. Hlerb..5) 2204. ) Looe: M. pumila [Mx.] Small, Bull. Torrey Club 23 : 126. 18096. Usually in dry or intermediate pine-barrens. SCREVEN, EMAN- UEL (992), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, APPLING, COFFEE, COLQUITT. Common in the flat country toward the coast, and extending inland to Sumter, Lee, and Early Counties in the Lower Oligocene region. North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the pine baa Also in upper Alabama (Mohr). JUGLANDACE:. HICORIA Raf., Med. Rep. II. 5 :352. 1808. ‘‘Hickory.” H. aquatica (Mx. f.) Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 15 : 284. 1888. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA Dae Swamps of muddy rivers. Oconee River near Mount Vernon and Ocmulgee River near Lumber City. Also in a few localities coastward, but more frequent in the upper third of the coastal plain. Southeastern Virginia to central Florida, Illinois, and Texas, in the coastal plain. H. sp. Another species (perhaps more than one), grows in hammocks in COFFEE, WILCOX, and doubtless other counties, but I have never identified it. It is probably identical with some species growing farther inland, very likely H. alba or Hf. glabra. SAURURACE. SAURURUS L., Sp: Pl. 341. 1753: S. cernuus L., 1. c. River-swamps, cypress ponds, etc.; not common. SCREVEN, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, BERRIEN. Fl. May. Scat- tered over the state from northwest to southeast, but apparently absent in most of the counties Widely but erratically distributed over the Eastern United States outside of New England. Its general as well as its local distribution 1s difficult to explain. ORCHIDACE/:. EPIDENDRUM L., Sp. Pl. 952. 1753. LARNANDRA Raf., Neogen. 4. 1825. (Based on the following species. ) E. conopseum R. Br. in Ait. f. Hort. Kew. ed. 2, 5 :219. 1813. Figured in Curt. Bot. Mag. 62: pl. 3457. 1835. - Usually on Magnolia grandiflora in hammocks. MONTGOMERY (1870), DODGE, COFFEE. Also in the latter county on M. glauca in a non-alluvial swamp near by. Fl. June—July. Extends inland to Dooly and Early Counties in the Lower Oligocene region and coastward to Brooks, Thomas, and DWeeatina ssce Bulli Gorey Club 32): 159. 1905.) South Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barren region and coastward. 254 HARPER TIPULARIA Nutt., Gen. 2 :195. 1818. PLEcTRURUS Raf., Neogen. 4. 1825. T.discolor (Pursh) Nutt., 1. c. (2?) Limodorum untfolium Muhl., Cat. 81. 1813. (nomen nudum.) EMANUEL: Hammock of Little Ohoopee River, April 5, 1904. More common in the upper parts of the coastal plain, and northward. Also in Thomas County, a little south of our limits. Fl. August. Vermont to Michigan, Middle Florida, and Louisiana. For notes on the mycorhiza of this species see Clifford, Bull. Torrey Club 26 : 635-638. pl. 372. 1899. POGONIA Juss., Gen. Pl. 65. 1789. P, divaricata (L.). R. Br.in Ait. 1, Hort, Kewed. 2,5 7207s memar Moist pine-barrens, especially near branch-swamps; not common. BULLOCH (S83), EMANUEL (812, 816), COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN. Rarely as many as a dozen specimens can be seen at one time. Fl. May—June. New Jersey to northern Florida and Alabama, mostly in the pine-barrens. Also in the mountains of East Tennessee (Gattinger). P. ophioglossoides (L.) Ker., Bot. Reg. 2: pl. 148. 1816. In similar situations to the preceding, but commoner. BUL- LOCH (2162), TATTNALL, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, coLguitt. Fl. April—May. Widely distributed in the coastal plain and glaciated region of temperate Eastern North America, but rare in the mountains and Piedmont region. Also reported from Japan. LIMODORUM L., Sp. Pl. 950. 1753. L. tuberosum L., 1. c. Moist pine-barrens. BULLOCH (877), COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN. Fl. May—July. Inland to the vicinity of Ameri- cus and coastward to Charlton County. General distribution in North America similar to that of the preceding. Also reported from the Bahamas (Northrop). L. graminifolium (Ell.) Small, Fl. 322, 1329. 1903. In similar situations to the preceding, of which it is demere i 3 i ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 255 only a reduced form. BULLOCH (851), COFFEE, BERRIEN, Fl. May-July. Also in Bryan County. North Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine- barrens. HABENARIA Willd., Sp. Pl. 4:44. 1805. H. blephariglottis (Willd.) Torr., Comp. 317. 1826. Intermediate and moist pine-barrens and sand-hill bogs; not common. MONTGOMERY, APPLING, COLQUITT (I944), DE- catur. Fl. Aug.—Sept. Inland to the vicinity of Americus, but probably more abundant in the flat pine-barrens toward the coast. Widely distributed in the glaciated region and coastal plain (see Rhodora 7:73, 74. 1905). Also in Middle Tennessee (Gattinger). Hevetians (L.) R. Br.in Ait: f. Mort. Kew. ed. 2, 5 : 194. 1813. Often with the preceding, and commoner. COFFEE, IRWIN, WORTH, COLQUITT (1943), MITCHELL, THOMAS, DECATUR. Fl July—Aug. Inland to Americus (and rarely in Northwest Georgia), and coastward to Glynn and Camden Counties. Range similar to that of the preceding, but extending farther inland in the South and not quite so far west in the North (see Rhodora 7 :73. 1905). : Plants intermediate in appearance between this and the pre- ceding, and probably hybrids, have been seen growing with them in coLquitt and Lowndes Counties. The same pheno- menon has been noted elsewhere by Dr. Morong (Bull. Tor- rey Cli 20) 2 409). 1893): WW, cristata (Mx.) R. Br., 1. ¢. Moist pine-barrens and swamps; not common. COFFEE, COL- QUITT, THOMAS, DECATUR. Fl. July—Aug. Also inland to Sumter County, but I do not know how far coastward, for I have probably sometimes confused it with the next. New Jersey to Florida, Missouri, and Louisiana, mostly in the coastal plain. H. integra (Nutt.) Spreng., Syst. 3 :689. 1826. Moist pine-barrens. DOOLY, COLQUITT (1948), DECATUR. FI. 8 256 HARPER August. Not easily distinguishable from the preceding a short distance away, and certainly more closely related to it than to the following species. Occurs also in the flat country. New Jersey to Florida (?) and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. Also in Middle Tennessee (Gattinger). H. nivea (Nutt.) Spreng., 1. c. (Plate XXV, Fig. 1.) Intermediate and moist pine-barrens; not abundant. BuUL- LOCH (852, 954), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR. Fl. June-July. Also in the Lower Oligocené region in Sumter and Lee Counties, and coastward to Bryan County. Delaware and South Carolina to Florida, Arkansas, and Louisi- ana, nearly confined to the pine-barrens. BURMANNIACE. BURMANNIA L., Sp. Pl. 287. 1753. B. capitata (Walt.) Mart., Nov. Gen. & Sp. Pl. Bras. 1:12. 1824. (See Torreya 1:34. ig01; Bull. Torrey Club 28: 470. 1901.) Moist pine-barrens; not rare but very inconspicuous. DODGE, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN (669), DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT, DECATUR. Fl. Aug.—Oct. Seems to reach its inland limit near Cordele, at the extreme edge of our territory. North Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine- barrens. Also in the West Indies and South America (if the tropical plant is correctly identified). B. biflora L. ought to grow in our territory, but I have never seen it there. Apteria, the related genus, is known at several points in the Upper Oligocene region, just south of our limits. IRIDACE/. IRIS @., sp. Pl 38) 2753. I. versicolor L., Sp. Pl. 39. 1753. Mostly in and near branch-swamps, more rarely around per- manent ponds or in low woods. BULLOCH, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN, coLtguitt. Fl. April-May. Pretty widely distributed in the pine-barrens of Georgia, but not seen in other parts of the state. ee ¢ Nearly throughout the glaciated region and coastal plain of temperate Eastern North America. Also said to occur throughout Tennessee (Gaitinger) and Alabama (Mohr). SISYRINCHIUM L., Sp. Pl. 954. 1753. S. Atlanticum Bicknell, Bull. Torrey Club 23: 134. pl. 264. 1896. Moist pine-barrens. TATTNALL (2149), BERRIEN (2797), and doubtless other counties. Fl. April. Said to range from Maine to Florida. My material could be referred with equal certainty to S. Floridanum or S. jus- catum, two species described by Mr. Bicknell in 1899 from the pine-barrens of the Gulf states. DIOSCOREACE&. DIOSCOREA L., Sp. Pl. 1032. 1753. D. villosa L., Sp. Pl. 1033. 1753. In shaded situations, only in those exceptional places already mentioned where the Lafayette and perhaps the Altamaha Grit too is wanting. BULLOCH: Wooded bluff near Echo; witcox: Upper Seven Bluffs; BERRIEN: Low woods west of Tifton; DooLy: Lime-sink near the Rock House. FI. April— July. Commoner farther inland, all the way to the moun- tains. Its local and general distribution is very similar to that of Cercis Canadensis (which see), which accompanies it at each of the above-mentioned stations. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States north of latitude 30°. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 257 AMARYLLIDACEZ. HYMENOCALLIS Sal. Trans. Hort. Soc. 1 :338. 1812. SPIDER LILy. H.sp. (See Bull. Torrey Club 32 : 463-465. f. 5. 1905.) A species with only two flowers, more rarely one, on a scape, and narrow leaves, grows in creek-swamps in COFFEE and coLguiTT, flowering in April and May. (See Plate XXIV, Fig. 2). Although its characters are not at all obscure, and good specimens have been collected (outside of our terri-. tory), it cannot be determined in the present rather confused state of the literature relating to this genus. It was. evidently known to LeConte, but does not seem to have been given a tenable name in his writings. H.sp: What is probably a totally different species, identical with one which is frequent in the Lower Oligocene region, was ob- served in the Ocmulgee River swamp near Barrow’s Bluff, COFFEE County, May 14, 1904, but not in flower. MANFREDA Sal., Gen. Pl. Fragm. 78. 1866. M. Virginica (L.) Jackson, Ind. Kew. 2 : 161. 1894; Rose, Contr. Winss Nat. blerb. es rs 5. ego Wiggue: Vareiricd Wee aime ae een, ase Rock outcrops in TATTNALL and DODGE, and dry pine-barrens in coLrguiTT. Fl. June-July. More common farther in- land, all the way to the mountains, but nowhere abundant. Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States. HYPOXIS L., Syst. ed. 10, 2 :986. 1759. H. juncea J. E. Smith, Spicil. 15. pl. 16. 1792. H. filsjolia Ell, Sk. £2397. 1827. MONTGOMERY: Outer base of sand-hills of Gum Swamp Creek west of Erick, Sept. 10, 1903; COFFEE: Intermediate pine- barrens near Bushnell Junction, May 10, 1904. FI. May— Sept. Accompanied at the first locality by Sporobolus Curtiss, which frequently grows with it in the flat country toward the coast. South Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens. Also in the Bahamas (Northrop). HAMODORACE. GYROTHECA Sal., Trans. Hort. Soc. 1: 327. 1812. G, tinctoria (Walt.) Sal., 1. c. (See Torreya I : 33-34. 1901.) 258 HARPER Branch-swamps, etc.; not common. COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN. Fl. June-July. More characteristic of other parts of the pine-barrens, ranging inland to Sumter County and coast- ward to Camden. Massachusetts to South Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain. Also in the West Indies (?). ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 259 LOPHIOLA Ker, Curt. Bot. Mag. 40: pl. 1596. 1813. (The affinity of this genus with the preceding is too obvious to allow them to be placed in different families merely on account of a difference in the number of stamens, as has been done by Engler & Prantl and subsequent authors.) L. aurea Ker, 1. c. (See Barnhart, Torreya 4 :132, 135. 1905.) Moist pine-barrens. MONTGOMERY (seen from train near Erick, July 4, r901, July 3, 1903), COFFEE (1432), WILCOX (common in southeastern corner), IRWIN (1417). Fl. June— July. Also in Ware County, a little southeast of our limits. New Jersey to West Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens, AVE TRIS) i sp. Pl 420: 1753: A. obovata Nash; Small, Fl. 286. 1903; Torreya 4 : 102. 1903. Intermediate pine-barrens; not rare. WARE (probably extra- limital), COFFEE (2201), WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN. Fl. May. Known otherwise only from the type-locality in northeastern Florida. (See Bull. Torrey Club 32 : 463. 1905.) Before this species was described I noted what I took to be A. farinosa in many similar places in the region, but it was probably all A. obovata. What seems to be genuine A. jarinosa grows in the Lower Oligocene region and farther inland, however. A. lutea Small, Bull. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 1:278. 1899. Intermediate or slightly moist pine-barrens. Quite common in COFFEE and BERRIEN (2193), and in some of the counties nearer the coast. (See Bull. Torrey Club 32: 154. 1905.) FI. May. South to Florida and west to Louisiana(?), in the pine-barrens. What is doubtless a hybrid between this and the preceding was seen growing with them in corrEE County, May 11, 1904. A. aurea Walt., Fl. Car. 121, 1788. Moist pine-barrens. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TEL- FAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, DOOLY, COLQUITT, THOMAS. Fl. June-July. Inland to the southeastern part of Sumter County, and coastward to the vicinity of Waycross. Virginia to Florida and Texas, in the pine-barrens. 260 HARPER SMILACACE:. SMILAX L., Sp. Pl. 1028. 1753. S. pumila Walt., Fl. Car. 244. 1788. Very elastic in habitat, growing in dry pine-barrens, sand- hills, hammocks, bluffs, etc. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN (1688), coLguitt. Flowers in September, and probably at other times. Pretty widely distributed in South Georgia, but never seen more than a mile or two above the fall-line South Carolina to central Florida and Texas, very nearly confined to the coastal plain. S. auriculata Walt., Fl. Car. 245. 1788; Chapm., Fl. 476. 1860. S. Beyrichit Kunth, Enum. 5: 207. 1850; Morong, Bull. Torrey Club 21 3430. 1894. MONTGOMERY: Sand-hills of Little Ocmulgee River opposite Lumber City, Sept. 10, 1903. Also in the hammock of the Altamaha River in McIntosh County, and on St. Simon’s. Island, Glynn County. North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, mostly near the coast. Also in the Bahamas (Northrop). See Nash, Bull. Torrey Club 22: 144. 1895; Mohr, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 6: 445. Igol. : : S. laurifolia L., Sp. Pl. 1030. 1753. BamsBoo VINE. _ In swamps, especially non-alluvial creek-swamps. SCREVEN,, BULLOCH, (955) TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, APPLING,, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, COLQUITT, DECATUR. Pretty com- mon throughout South Georgia, except perhaps in the lime-sink region and near the coast. New Jersey to South Florida, Arkansas, and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. Also in East Tennessee (Gattinger). Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. Br Ao0s nO, Loom S. Walteri Pursh, Fl. 249. 1814. SARSAPARILLA. In Gum Swamp Creek near McRae, July 3, 1903. More com- - mon in the upper third of the coastal plain. New Jersey to northern Florida, Tennessee (?), and Louisiana, in the coastal- plain. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 261 Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 5 :487. 19or. LILIACE. NOLINA Mx., Fl. 1:207. 1803. N. Georgiana Mx., 1. c. 208. BULLOCH: Sand-hills of Big Lott’s Creek, June 27, 1902 (965); DODGE: Rock outcrop near Eastman, Sept. 8, 1903. FI. spring. Common on the fall-line sand-hills in Richmond, Columbia, Jones, and Bibb Counties, and known from Washington, Johnson, and Laurens Counties in the upper . third of the coastal plain. Said to occur in corresponding parts of South Carolina, and in Florida. YUCCA Sp: Pl. er9; 1753. Y."filamentosa L.,1.c. “Bear Grass.”’ Dry pine-barrens, sand-hills, etc.; not common. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY. Fl. May—June Common in the upper third of the coastal plain, and in Middle Georgia, but there apparently only as a weed in old fields. Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, but natural range and habitat not well understood. OXYTRIA Raf., Fl. Tell. 2:26. 1836; Pollard, Bull. Torrey Club 24 2405. 1897. O. crocea (Mx.) Raf., 1. c. BERRIEN: In and near small open branch-swamps, near Nash- ville (2194) and Tifton, May, 1904, in flower. Rare. (Collected by Curtiss near Allapaha, in the same county). Total range not well worked out. LILIUM L., Sp. Pl. 303. 1753. L. Catesbei Walt, Fl. Car. 123. 1788. L. spectabile Sal., Ic. Pl. Rar. 9. pl. 5. 1791. Moist pine-barrens, rather rare. COFFEE, DOOLY, WORTH, “corguitt. Fl. Aug.-Sept. Pretty widely distributed through the pine-barrens of Georgia, but rarely as many as a dozen specimens visible at once. 262 HARPER North Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the pine- barrens. NOTHOSCORDUM Kunth, Enum. 4 :457. 1853. N. bivalve (L.) Britton, Ill. Fl. 1: 415. f. roor. 1896. Allium striatum Jacq., Coll. Suppl. 51. 1796. BERRIEN: Shallow exsiccated pond near Tifton, Oct. 2, 1902, in flower (1706). Also occurs as a weed in some other places a few miles away, but possibly not indigenous in our territory at all. I have seen it oftener on flat granite outcrops in Middle Georgia. Said to range from Virginia to Chile, but natural range and habitat not well understood. ALLIUM L., Sp. Pl. 294. 1753. A. Cuthbertii Small, Fl. 264. 1903. WILCOX: Rock outcrops near the center of the county, May 18, 1904, in flower (2272). Also occurs on and near the fall- line sand-hills in Richmond County (type-locality). Distribution and habitat not well worked out. MELANTHACE. MELANTHIUM L., Sp. Pl. 339. 1753. M. Virginicum L., 1.c. | Moist pine-barrens; not common. TELFAIR, WILCOX, IRWIN. Fl. June-July. Also in Sumter County near Americus. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States north of latitude 30°. ZYGADENUS Mx., Fl. 1: 213. 1803. Z. glaberrimus Mx., Fl. 1 : 214. pl. 22. 1803. Sandy bogs, etc.; rare. MONTGOMERY (1984), THOMAS. FI. July—Aug. Seen once near Americus. Virginia (?) to West Florida and Louisiana in the coastal plain, very nearly confined to the pine-barrens. OCEANOROS Small, Fl. 252. 1903. .O. leimanthoides (Gray) Small, 1. c. Amianthium leimanthoides Gray, Ann. Lyc.N. Y.4:125. 1837. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 263 Zygadenus lermanthoides Wats., Proc. Am. Acad. 14 : 280. 1879. Sand-hill bogs, rare. EMANUEL (959), MONTGOMERY. FI. June. Not seen elsewhere in the state. _ New Jersey to Alabama, in the coastal plain and mountains. TRACYANTHUS Small, Fl. 250. 1903. T. angustifolius (Mx.) Small, 1. c. 251. Amianthium angustifolium Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y.4: 124. 1837. Zygadenus angustifolius Wats., Proc. Am. Acad. 14: 280. 1879. Moist pine-barrens, borders of branch-swamps, and sand-hill bogs. BULLOCH, TATTNALL (2150), MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN, and probably in other counties, but easily overlooked when not in flower. Blooms from about the middle of April to the middle of May. Not seen farther inland, but extends coastward to Glynn County. North Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens, Also in western North Carolina (Small & Heller). CHROSPERMA Raf., Neogen. 3. 1825. C. muscetoxicum (Walt.) Kuntze, Rev. 2: 708. 1891. Dry pine-barrens, etc.; rare. BULLOCH, EMANUEL (815), MONT- GomeRY. Fl. May-June. Extends inland to Middle Geor- gia, where it grows usually in rich woods. ' New Jersey to Arkansas, West Florida, and Louisiana. CHAMALIRIUM Willd., Mag. Nat. Fr. Berl. 2 : 18. 1808. C. luteum (L.) Gray, Man. 503. 1848. Dry or rather dry pine-barrens; not common. WARE (perhaps extralimital), COFFEE, BERRIEN, May 5, 1904, in flower. Grows also in rich woods in Middle Georgia, like the preceding. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. TOFIELDIA Huds., Fl. Angl. 2 2157. 1778. T. racemosa (Walt.) B.S. P., Prel. Cat. N. Y. 55. 1888; Morong, Mem. Torrey Club 5 : 109. 1894. (See Plate XXIV, Fig. 1). Moist pine-barrens. Common from MONTGOMERY County 264 ' HARPER southwestward, and probably northeastward also. Fl. June— Aug. Inland to Sumter and Randolph Counties and coast- ward to Charleston. New Jersey to northern Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. JUNCACE. JUNCUS -E.) Sp. Gel 2252 isee J. Elliottii Chapm., Fl. 494. 1860. “J. acuminatus (?) Mx.” Ell., Sk. 1 : 409. 1817. (?) J. Pondit Wood, Class-Book, 724. 1861. Branch-swamps, etc., sometimes ruderal; rather rare. BUL- LOCH (841, 864, S69), EMANUEL. Possibly not indigenous. North Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain. ¢ J. diffusissimus Buckl., Proc. Acad. Phila. 1862 :9. 1862. EMANUEL: Marshy place near Stillmore, July 3, t90z (995). (See Bull. Torrey Club 30: 327. 1903.) As I have not met with it since, its indigeneity may be doubted. Ranges mostly westward. J. trigonocarpus Steud., Syn. Pl. Cyp. 308. 1855. Moist pine-barrens, etc.; common. EMANUEL, DODGE, COFFEE (717), IRWIN, BERRIEN (667), DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT, pEcATUR. Fl. Aug.—Sept. Inland to Americus and Meri- wether County (see Bull. Torrey Club 30: 294. 1903) and coastward to Charlton County. South Carolina to Middle Florida and Mississippi, mostly in the pine-barrens. J.: polycephalus Mx., Fl. 1: 292. 1803. Typically in rather open branch-swamps, more rarely in other related habitats. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONT- GOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, COLQUITT. Pretty widely distributed in the pine-barrens of Georgia. North Carolina to northern Florida and Texas, in the pine- barrens. J. scirpoides compositus Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 233. 1906. Margins of sand-hill ponds and bogs. DODGE, COFFEE (1445), | ; ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA — 265 BERRIEN. Fl. July. Also in several counties nearer the coast, but not seen farther inland. South Carolina to Florida, in the coastal plain. J. biflorus Ell.; Sk. 1 : 407. 1817. J. marginatus biflorus Chapm., Fl. 495. 1860. J. aristulatus pinetorum Coville; Small, Fl. 259. 1803. . Typically in moist pine-barrens, more rarely on sand-hills or around the bogs at their bases. BULLOCH (868), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, coLguiTT. Fl. May—June. Pretty widely distributed in the pine-parrens of Georgia (see Bull. Torrey Clubs 33: 232. 1906.) North Carolina to Florida, in the pine-barrens. J. repens Mx., Fl. r:191. 1803. Cephaloxys flabellata Desv., Jour. Bot. 1:324. pl. 2. 1808. Branch-swamps and shallow ponds, or more commonly a weed in ditches. EMANUEL, COFFEE, IRWIN. Pretty well distributed over the pine-barrens of Georgia. North Carolina to Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the coastal plain. Also in Cuba. Anatomy discussed by Holm, Bull. Torrey Club 26: 359-364. pl. 363. 1899. J. dichotomus Ell, Sk. 1: 406. 1817; Wiegand, Bull. Torrey Club 27:525-527. 1900. SCREVEN and BULLOCH, in various habitats, but not well under- stood and perhaps not indigenous. Quite common along the Central R.R. from Millen to Savannah. This has been more or less confused with other species, and its distribution has not been satisfactorily worked out. ie eurontus L., Sp: Pl. 328. 2753. BULLOCH: A weed on damp roadsides near Bloys (S62). Cosmopolitan, but natural range and habitat unknown. BROMELIACE. DENDROPOGON Raf., Neogen. 3. 1825. D. usneoides (L.) Jackson, Ind. Kew. 1:733. 1893. ‘‘Moss.’ Hancine Moss. ats 7 a ' 266 HARPER Tillandsia usneoides L., Sp. Pl. ed. 2. 411. 1762. On various trees, mostly in hammocks and river-swamps. It seems to have a decided preference for trees growing in calcareous soil, and is therefore not as common in our terri- tory as in the lime-sink region and along the coast. Ranges throughout South Georgia, but I have never seen it in Middle Georgia except once near the Chattahoochee River a mile or two above the fall-line in Muscogee County. Its range is similarly restricted in Alabama, according to Mohr and Earle, but just why this should be the case is a mystery. Virginia to South Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain. Also in tropical America. For an anatomical study see F. H. Billings, Bot. Gaz. 38: gg-120. 7. I. pl. S-II. 1904. : PONTEDERIACE. PONTEDERIA L., Sp. Pl. 288. 1753. P. cordata L., 1. c. A typical inhabitant of cypress ponds, more rarely in other ponds, and in streams. Quite common throughout the pine-barrens of Georgia and in brackish marshes along the coast. Not seen farther inland than the outlying area of pine-barrens near Omaha (see Bull. Torrey Club 32: 457. /. 392 905:) In our territory it nearly always has narrow leaf-blades, quite different from the robust broad-leaved forms in the brackish marshes, but all gradations between them can be found. Fl. April—Aug. Nearly throughout the glaciated region and coastal plain of temperate Eastern North America (see Rhodora 7: 73. 1905). Also reported from Central and South America, which de- serves closer investigation. COMMELINACE. TRADESCANTIA L., Sp. Pl. 288. 1753. T. reflexa Raf., New Fl. N. A. 2 :87. 1836; Small, Bull. Torrey Club 24232. (18072 Sand-hills; rare. BULLOCH, COFFEE. Fl. June. Range not fully worked out. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 267 CUTHBERTIA Small, Fl. 237. 1903. C. graminea Small, 1. c. Tradescentia rosea Vent., in part. Sand-hills. BULLOCH (913), EMANUEL (S17), TATTNALL, MONT- GOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILcox. Fl. May—July. Also on the fall-line sand-hills in Richmond County, where it was discovered. Maryland (?) to Florida, Missouri (?), and Texas (?), in the coastal plain. ERIOCAULACE. ERIOCAULON L., Sp. Pl. 87. 1753. E. decangulare L., |. c. Buttons. “ WuiTE-HEADS.”’ (See Plate XXIV, Bie. a One of the most abundant and shamacietsthie plants of moist pine-barrens; more rarely inswamps. Common throughout the pine-barrens of Georgia, and a little farther inland almost to Sandersville and Americus. Fl. June—Sept. New Jersey to central Florida and Texas in the coastal plain, and locally inland in the mountains of North Carolina, Tennessee, and Alabama. Anatomy discussed by Holm, Bot. Gaz. 31:17-37. f. I-95. Jan. 1got. E. lineare Small, Fl. 236. 1903. (See Plate XXIII, and XXV, Biss 2). With the preceding in our territory, and equally abundant wherever it grows, but as it is almost invisible except in Spring, I have not noted it so often. (See Bull. Torrey Club 32 : 461-463. 7. 4. 1905). BULLOCH (830, type, collected in a branch-swamp, an exceptional habitat), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY (2146), COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN. FI. April-May. Inland to Sumter County. Not yet known outside of Georgia. (see Torreya 5 :114. 1905). E. compressum Lam., Encyc. 3 : 276. 1789. Cypress and other ponds; not rare. SCREVEN, TATTNALL, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, and doubtless elsewhere. Flowers in March and April, and easily overlooked later in the season. New Jersey to central Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain. 268 HARPER SYNGONANTHUS Ruhl. in Urban, Symb. Ant. 1 : 487. 1900. S. flavidulus (Mx.) Ruhl. in Engler’s Pflanzenreich 4°° : 256. 1903. Eriocaulon flavidulum Mx., Fl. 2 :166. 1803. (Not £. fla- vidulum Ruhl., Pflanzenreich 49°: 33. 1903.) Dupatya flavidula Kuntze, Rev. 2:745. 1891. Moist pine-barrens and margins of sand-hill ponds and bogs, always on the Columbia sand; common. EMANUEL (803), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, APPLING, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, COLQUITT, DECATUR. FI. May-Sept. Seen only once farther inland (near Coney, Dooly Co.), but common in the flat country toward the coast. Virginia (?) to central Florida and Alabama, in the pine- barrens. LACHNOCAULON Kunth, Enum. 3 : 497. 1841. L. anceps (Walt.) Morong, Bull. Torrey Club 18 : 360. 1891. With the preceding or often in slightly drier places; less com- mon. EMANUEL (S04), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT,. DECATUR. FI. April—Aug. Pretty widely distributed in South Georgia, mostly in the pine-barrens. North Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain. Also on Lookout Mountain, Alabama (A. Ruth). XYRIDACE. XKYVRIS dU Sp: ely Aen, 17/58 X. Baldwiniana Schult., Mant. 1:351. 1822. Moist pine-barrens and margins of sand-hill ponds. BULLOCH (845), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN, COLQUITT. Fl. all summer. Inland to the pine-barrens of Laurens and Sumter Counties. Originally discovered in Camden County, in the southeastern corner of the state, but probably not seen there lately. North (?) Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the pine- barrens. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 269 X. flexuosa Muhl.; Ell. Sk. 1:51. 1816. X. torta of many authors (see Torreya 5 : 129. 1905). Intermediate pine-barrens; not abundant. TELFAIR, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT,*-THOMAS, DECATUR. Fl. July— Aug. General distribution in Georgia about like that of the preceding. New Jersey to Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, mostly in the pine-barrens. X. fimbriata Ell., Sk. 1:52. 1816. Sand-hill ponds and related habitats. APPLING, COFFEE, IR- WIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, COLQUITT. FI. July—Sept. Extends inland to Sumter County and coastward to Camden, but I have not yet observed it north of the Altamaha River and its tributaries, perhaps because I have not been in that part of the state much when it was in flower. New Jersey (?) to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-barrens. X. Smalliana Nash, Bull. Torrey Club 22 :159. 1895. COFFEE: Cypress pond at outer edge of sand-hills of Seventeen Mile Creek near Chatterton, July 29, 1902, in flower (1453). Also noted in Stewart (see Bull. Torrey Club 30 :325. 1903; 32 2457. 1905) and Pulaski Counties, and in Okefinokee Swamp. Discovered in central peninsular Florida. X. Elliottii Chapm., Fl. 500. 1860. ae oreuijolia Mx.) Elle Skt 252: 1816. coFFEE: Margins of sand-hill ponds, etc.; three or four stations within seven miles of Douglas, July, 1902 (1448). FI. June- Aug. Also in several counties nearer the coast. South Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens. X. sp. COFFEE: With the two preceding, at two stations a few miles apart (1452). Fl. July—Aug. Scapes erect, solitary or nearly so. Flowers closing earlier in the morning than those of X. Smalliana. 270 HARPER X. platylepis Chapm., Fl. 501. 1860. Moist pine—barrens and sand-hill bogs; rather rare. COFFEE (1423), COLQUITT (1941), THOMAS (1774). Fl. July—Aug. Not observed elsewhere in the state. South Carolina to central Florida, in the pine-barrens. X. sp. Chiefly in creek-swamps. A shade-loving species, with acute spikes and dark bracts. COFFEE, BERRIEN (1700), WORTH, coLtouiTT. Fl. Aug.—Sept. What seems to be the same thing extends inland to Sumter County and coastward to the vicinity of Okefinokee Swamp. X. neglecta Small, Bull. Torrey Club 21 :300. 1894. (?) X. bulbosa minor Wood, Class-Book. 728. 1861. COFFEE: Sand-hill ponds (1446) and moist pine-barrens (2013) Fl. summer. Known otherwise from northeastern Florida and the pine- barrens of Mississippi. X. ambigua Beyr.; Kunth, Enum. 4:13. 1843. MONTGOMERY: Branch-swamp near Mount Vernon, June 29, 1903, in flower (1863). Discovered by Beyrich in Effingham County. . North Carolina to northern Florida and Texas, in the pine- barrens. X. brevifolia Mx., Fl. 1:23. 1803. coFFEE: Rather dry pine-barrens and corresponding places in the sand-hills, three or four stations. Fl. spring. More common in the flat country toward the coast. North Carolina to central Florida, in the pine-barrens. MAYACACEZ. MAYACA Aubl., Pl. Guian. 1:42. 1775. M. Aubleti Mx., Fl. 1:26. 1803. M. Michauxit Schott & Endl., Melet. 1:24. 1832. Moist pine-barrens and sand-hill bogs; not rare. EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, j ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA uel DOOLY, WORTH, coLguiTT. Fl. all summer. Inland to Americus and coastward to Folkston. Virginia to Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain. M. fluviatilis Aubl., 1. c., pl. 15. In our territory seen only in Heard’s Pond, THomas, where it is of course not native. (See remarks under Nympha gorbiculata, p. 237). Possibly only a form of the preceding (see Bull. Torrey Club 30 : 234. 1903). Commoner in Florida and the tropics. LEMNACE. LEMNA L., Sp. Pl. 970. 1753. L. sp. MONTGOMERY: Floating in large sand-hill pond opposite Lumber City, Sept. 10, 1903. ARACEZ. ARISAMA Mart., Flora 14: 459. 1839. A. triphyllum (L.) Torr., Fl. N. Y.2: 239. 1843. (INDIAN TuRNIP). BERRIEN: Low woods just southwest of Tifton, Sept. 29, 1902. Fl. spring. Scattered over the state, most common north- ward. (Seen once within 5 feet of sea-level in Liberty County.) Nearly throughout temperate Eastern North America, but rather rare in the coastal plain. PELTANDRA Raf., Jour. Phys. 89:103. 1819. P. sagittifolia (Mx.) Morong, Mem. Torrey Club 5: 102. 1894. Figured in Meehan’s Native Flowers and Ferns, 1: 121-124. pl. 31. 1879. Non-alluvial swamps; rare. COFFEE (1449), BERRIEN. FI. May-July. Known otherwise in the state only from Okefinokee Swamp. Said by Elliott (Sk. 2 :632) to have once been abundant near Savannah. Virginia (?) to central Florida and Mississippi, in the pine- barren region. ORONTIUM L. Sp. Pl. 324. 1753. O. aquaticum L.. 1. c. Sluggish but not muddy creeks and rivers. BULLOCH: Big 242 HARPER Lotts Creek, June 24, 1901, April 28, 1904 (seen from train). MONTGOMERY: Little Ocmulgee River; COFFEE: Seventeen Mile Creek (1456); BERRIEN and worTH: Little River. Fl, March. Pretty widely distributed over South Georgia. Massachusetts to Central New York, central Florida, Missouri, and Texas, mostly in the glaciated region and coastal plain. see Rhodora x '184,, 20263 nS Ow yaenger PALM. SERENOA Hook. f., in B. & H., Gen. Pl. 3 : 926, 1228. 1883. S. serrulata (Mx.) “Saw PaLmertTo.” Sand-hills, dry and intermediate pine-barrens, or rarely in creek swamps. Very common in the lower counties, but rather rare or absent in the upper ones. It does not quite reach the Altamaha Grit escarpment, and I have not seen it in the counties of Screven, Emanuel, Laurens, Dodge, Dooly, Worth, Mitchell, and Decatur, in our territory. But in the last-named it is known at two or three places in the lime-sink region. It is very abundant in the flat pine- barrens toward the coast, and extends even to the dunes on the outer edges of the sea islands. Its size seems to vary approximately in inverse proportion to its distance from the coast. Flowers in June (perhaps not every year though), and fruits in September. South Carolina to South Florida and Louisiana, in the lower half of the coastal plain. SABAL Adans., Fam. 2 :495. 1763. S. glabra (Mill.) Sarg., Silva N. A. 10 3:38. 1896. PALMETTO. S. Adansonu Guerns.; S. minor (Jacq.) Pers.; S. pumila (Walt.) Ell.; Chamerops acaulis Mx. Mostly in swamps of rivers rising north of our territory SCREVEN, BULLOCH, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COF- FEE, BERRIEN. Fl. June-July. Scattered over the coastal plain of Georgia, most common in the upper third, but stopping abruptly at the fall-line. North Carolina to central Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the coastal plain. a Py . ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 273 CYPERACE. CAREX L., Sp. Pl. 972. 1753. C, reniformis [Bailey] Small, Fl. 220. 1903. Swamps of rivers rising north of our territory. TATTNALL: Ohoopee River swamp west of Reidsville (2153); COFFEE: Barrow’s Bluff, May 14, 1904. Known otherwise only from Mississippi and Louisiana. C. alata Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3 : 396. 1836. WiILcox: Pond near Queensland, just on the edge of our terri- tory, May 17, 1904 (2207). What is probably the same thing (for I collected it the next day along the same river near Millen) was seen from a train in the Ogeechee River swamp at or near Halcyondale, scREVEN Co., June 4, 1901. 12 | ova oneal New Hampshire to Michigan in the glaciated region, south to Florida and Mississippi in the coastal plain. C. tenax Chapm.; Dewey, Am. Jour. Sci. II. 19 : 254. 1855. C. Chapmani Sartw. Sand-hills; rare. TATTNALL, COFFEE. More common on the fall-line sand-hills in Richmond County, and known also from Pulaski County. South Carolina to West Florida, in the coastal plain. C. venusta Dewey, Am. Jour. Sci. 26: 107, pl. T. f. 62. 1834, TATTNALL: Bog at head of branch near Reidsville, April 27, 1904. wiLcox: With C. alata (see above). Fl. April. Also in Laurens County. North Carolina to Florida. C. debilis Mx., Fl. 2:172. 1803. With C. renijormis at both stations mentioned above. FI. April. South Carolina to Florida and Louisiana. eemtiiceps Mx Bl 2170. 1803. In swamps with the preceding. TATTNALL (2152), COFFEE (2205, an exceptionally slender form). Fl. April. Eastern United States. 274 HARPER C. glaucescens Ell., Sk. 2 2553. 1824. Chiefly in branch-swamps. MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, IRWIN, COLQUITT, THOMAS. Remarkable for its late flower- ing, June-July. Inland to Americus and coastward to Charlton County. South Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain. Cosp, \ (See Bull? Vorrey Club 32 = 40019055) Differs from the preceding in having its pistillate spikes on stouter mostly erect peduncles, and flowering regularly about three months earlier. It is not at all rare, and was doubtless known to southern botanists of a century ago, but it is almost impossible to decide if any of them have ever given it a tenable name, on account of the confusion in this particular group. Cypress ponds principally. COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN, and doubtless other counties. Seems to be pretty well dis- tributed over the pine-barrens of Georgia. C. macrokolea Steud., Syn. Pl. Cyp. 223. 1855. What I took for this species was noted in cypress ponds in IRWIN (near Ocilla, July 15, 1902) and DECATUR (near Climax, Aug. 13, 1903). More study is needed to determine the specific limits of this and the two preceding. Florida to Missouri (?) and Texas, in the coastal plain. C. Walteriana Bailey, Bull. Torrey Club 20 : 429. 1893 CG. siriaia’ Mx,, Fl. 22174, 1803) Not of Gilioien7ee In rather permanent ponds; not common. SCREVEN (2090), IRWIN. FI. April. Inland to Dooly County and coastward to Effingham, but details of distribution imperfectly under- stood. See Bull Torrey Club 32 : 460. 1905. ‘New Jersey to Florida, in the pine-barrens. C. squarrosa L., Sp. Pl. 973. 1753. COFFEE: Rather dry swamp of Ocmulgee River near Bartow Ss. Bluff, May 14, 1904 (2204). Fl. April. No other station seems to be known for it within two or three hundred miles. See Bull. Torrey Club 32 : 460. 1905. Connecticut to Michigan, Georgia, and Texas (?). ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 275 C. bullata Schk., Riedgr. Nachtr. 85. f. 166. 1806. Swamps of rivers rising north of our territory. TATTNALL: Ohoopee River swamp (2155); COFFEE: Ocmulgee River swamp opposite Lumber City, Sept. 11, 1903. Fl. spring. I have also collected it in the Ogeechee River swamp in Effingham County. A glaciated region and coastal plain plant, ranging from New Hampshire to Pennsylvania and Georgia. See Rhodora 8: 28-29. 1906. C. turgescens Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3 : 419. 1836. Moist pine-barrens and edges of branch-swamps. BULLOCH Grim), CORFER, WILCOX, BERRIEN. El) April. Not ob- served elsewhere. North Carolina to Florida (?) and Louisiana, in the pine-barrens. Cerliomiscawe c Lor: Ann Lyc. N. Y. 1 2357. 1825. C. fulua Muhl., Gram. 246. 1817. Not of Good. 1794. C. castanea EM., Sk. 2:546. 1824. Not of Wahl. 1803. Sphagnous bogs, etc.; rare. EMANUEL (SIS), COFFEE, BERRIEN (2190). Fl. April. I have not seen it elsewhere in the state, but both Muhlenberg’s and Elliott’s specimens came from Georgia, the latter from Chatham County. North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens. C. intumescens Rudge, Trans. Linn. Soc. 7:97. pl. 9. f. 3. 1804. BULLOCH: Branch-swamp near Pulaski, June 24, 1901 (939); COFFEE: Swamp of Ocmulgee River near Barrow’s Bluff, May 14, 1904. FI. April-May. More frequent in Middle Georgia. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. C. folliculata L., Sp. Pl. 978. 1753. TATTNALL: Swamp of Ohoopee River west of Reidsville, April 26, 1904, just past flowering (2159). The typical form not known elsewhere in Georgia. Ranges northward to Canada. Var. australis Bailey, Proc. Am. Acad. 22 :62. 1886. BULLOCH: Branch-swamp near Bloys, June 11, 1901 (582); COFFEE: Edge of swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek, July 10, 276 HARPER 1902. Flowers later than the type, or at least retains its perigynia longer. Known also from Johnson and Sumter Counties (see Bull. Torrey Club 27 : 462. 1900.) South Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. SCLERIA Berg., Kgl. Sv. Acad. Handl. 26 :142. 1765. S. Michauxii Chapm., Fl. 532. 186c. (?) S. hirtella Sw., Prodr. 19. 1788. coLquiTT: Moist pine-barrens, several stations near Moultrie, September, 1902. With the typical form is often one with glabrous leaves, but apparently otherwise identical (1646). Fl. summer. Also in McIntosh, Glynn, and Charlton Counties in the flat country. South Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine- barrens. S. verticillata Muhl.; Willd., Sp. Pl. 4 :317. 1805. coLquiTT: Moist pine-barrens, with the preceding and else- where; rare (1647). Also in Sumter and Early Counties, in the Lower Oligocene region. Glaciated region and coastal plain of the Eastern United States, but with many gaps in its known range (not reported from Alabama, for instance). Also in Mexico and the West Indies, if it is all the same species. S. pauciflora Muhl.; Willd., Sp. Pl. 4 :318. 1805. BULLOCH: Rather dry pine-barrens near Pulaski, June 24, tg01 (940). Grows also on dry slopes of the mountains of Northwest Georgia. New Hampshire to Missouri, Cuba, and Texas; but not reported from Alabama. S. glabra [Chapm.] Britton; Small, Fl. 200. 1903. sand-hills chiefly. EMANUEL (S07), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE (1460), WILCOX, DECATUR. Identity of my speci- mens still a little doubtful. North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens. S. trichopoda Wright; Britton, Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 3: 232. 1883. (as syn.) S. reticularis pubescens Britton, 1. c. Moist pine-barrens, etc. MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE, BER- ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA AAT RIEN, DOOLY, COLQUITT (1643). Fl. summer. Somewhat variable in morphological characters, as well as in habitat. Extends coastward to Okefinokee Swamp, and inland to Pike County, Middle Georgia (see Bull. Torrey Club 30: 294. =903). New Jersey(?) to the West Indies and Mexico. S.ztriglomerata Mx., Fl. 2 : 168. 1803. Hammocks and bluffs. MONTGOMERY, wWiILcox. Fl. May-— June. More common farther inland. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. S. Baldwini (Torr.) Steud., Syn. Pl. Cyp. 175. 18555. Cypress ponds. TATTNALL (998), COFFEE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. Fl. May—June. Inland to Pulaski, Sumter, and Early Counties, and coastward to Bryan, McIntosh, Ware, and Charlton. South to central Florida and west to Texas, in the pine-barrens. S. gracilis Ell., Sk. 2 2557. 1824. Shallow ponds, more rarely in moist pine-barrens. BULLOCH (908, 943), TATTNALL, DODGE, IRWIN, DOOLY. Inland, to Sumter, Lee, and Early Counties, and coastward to Charlton. South Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the pine- barrens. Also reported from Cuba. RHYNCHOSPORA Vahl, Enum. 2 : 229. 1806. (Original spelling Rynchospora). R. inexpansa (Mx.) Vahl, Enum. 2 : 232. 1806. Moist pine-barrens; rather rare. BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE. More common in the upper third of the coastal plain. Virginia to Florida(?)and Louisiana, mostly in the coastal plain. R. mixta Britton; Small, Fl. 197. 1903. BULLOCH: In Big Lott’s Creek near Bloys, June 27, 1901 (974). Coastal plain of Georgia and Florida. R. compressa Carey; Chapm., Fl. 525. 1860. Moist pine-barrens; rare. COFFEE (2200), IRWIN (I4I4). Reported also from Alabama, Florida, and Cuba. 278 HARPER R. cymosa (Willd.) Ell., Sk. 1:58. 1816. (excl. descr.) BULLOCH: Rather dry sandy roadside near Bloys, June 11, 1901 (880); TATTNALL: Flat rocks near Ohoopee River, June 24, 1903. Fl. May—June. Extends inland to Middle Georgia. 2 New Jersey to Missouri, Florida, and Texas. R. perplexa Britton; Small, Fl. 197. 1903. IRWIN: Shallow pond near Fitzgerald, July 17, 1902. Also in mayhaw ponds in Sumter County. (Identity of my specimens somewhat uncertain.) “North Carolina to Florida.’’ Doubtless confined to the coastal plain. R. Torreyana Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3 :197. 1835. Intermediate and moist pine-barrens. BULLOCH (884, 941), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY (1868). Fl. June. Coastward to Bryan County. Not seen SOLHINTTES: of the Ocmulgee and Altamaha Rivers. New Jersey to Georgia, in the oie denned (Reported from Alabama by Dr. Mohr, but the specimens so labeled in his herbarium are some other species.) R. rariflora (Mx.) Ell., Sk. 1:58. 1816. Intermediate and moist pine-barrens; not common. BULLOCH (879), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, WILCOX, BERRIEN. FI. May-June. Inland to Washington and Sumter Counties. North Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain. | R. Grayii Kunth, Enum. 2 :539. 1837. Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; frequent in most of the counties. Fl. April-June. Inland to Richmond, Sumter, and Early Counties, and coastward to Cumberland Island. North Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain. R, dodecandra Baldw.; Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3 : 207. 1835. Hammocks and sand-hammocks. EMANUEL (977), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILcox. Fl. May. Inland to the lime-sink region of Decatur County, and coastward to Bryan, McIntosh, and Wayne. a ee ee ee ee ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 279 North Carolina to South Florida and Mississippi, in the pine- barrens and coastward. R. fascicularis (Mx.) Vahl, Enum. 2 : 234. 1806. Moist pine-barrens and margins of ponds; not common. coF- FEE (1440), THOMAS (1173). Also in Okefinokee Swamp and east of there. North Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine- barrens. R. distans (Mx.) Vahl. Enum. 2:235. 1806. Mostly in intermediate pine-barrens, but usually in places which have been tampered with. BULLOCH (878), COFFEE (684, 1447). Nos. 684 and &78 grew along roadsides, and the same plant occurs in the same way in Charlton County just east of Okefinokee Swamp. No. 1447, from the margin of a sand-hill pond, looks a little different, and may not be identical with the others. The same thing occurs among the sand-hills of the Little Satilla River in Wayne County west of Hortense. south Carolina to Florida, in the pine-barrens. R. brachycheta Sauv., An. Acad. Cienc. Habana, 8 : 85. 1871. (?) R. fascicularis trichoides Chapm. BULLOCH: Unfrequented road in rather dry pine-barrens, June I5, 1901 (897). Probably either a depauperate form of the preceding, or else not indigenous. North Carolina (?) to Cuba. R. Baldwinii Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 210. 1835. Moist pine-barrens. BULLOCH (852), MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, DECATUR. Fl. May—June. Coast- ward to Effingham, Bryan, McIntosh, Ware, and Charlton Counties. North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens. R. solitaria Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 28: 468. 1901; 31:19. 1904. Moist pine-barrens; rather inconspicuous. IRWIN, BERRIEN (608, type; 1677, from same place), coLrguitt. Fl. May— cir Not known elsewhere. (See Torreya 5 :114. 1905.) 280 HARPER R. ciliaris (Mx.) Mohr, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 6 : 408. 1ger. R. ciliata Vahl, Enum. 2 : 235. 1806. Normally in intermediate pine-barrens; not rare. BULLOCH (887), MONTGOMERY, APPLING, COFFEE (683, 70I), WILCOX, IRWIN; BERRIEN, WORTH, COLQUITT, DECATUR. Fl. May— Aug. Inland to Sumter, Lee, and Mitchell Counties, and coastward to Ware and Charlton. North Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens. R. leptorhyncha Sauv., An. Acad. Cienc. Habana, 8 :84. 1871. (Our specimens not quite typical. See Bull Torrey Club 33: 231-232. 1906.) COFFEE: Cypress ponds about three miles south of Douglas, July 24, 1902. Also in Pulaski and Sumter Counties in the Lower Oligocene region. Fl. June—July. Also in western Cuba, where it was discovered. R. filifolia Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 366. 1836. COFFEE: Cypress ponds near Douglas (1434) and Chatterton. Fl. summer. Also in a similar place in Charlton County. Not seen elsewhere. North Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the pine- barrens. R. gracilenta Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 216. 1835. Moist pine-barrens; infrequent. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN, Fl. June-July. Also in Sumter County. New Jersey to northeastern Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain. R. axillaris (Lam.) Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 15: 104. 1888. Cypress ponds, branch-swamps, etc.; common in most if not all of the counties in the pine-barren region of Georgia. Fl. May-July. . Long Island to central Florida, Arkansas, and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. R. glomerata paniculata [Gray] Chapm., Fl. 528. 1860. © Branch-swamps, etc.; not common. MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, eee ee ee ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 281 IRWIN, coLguitT. Fl. June-July. More common farther inland. Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, mostly in the coastal plain. R. alba macra Clarke; Britton, Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 11: 88. 1892. Wet pine-barrens; rare. COFFEE (716), IRWIN. Fl. Sept.— Oct. Not seen elsewhere in the state. South to Florida, west to Texas, in the pine-barrens. R. semiplumosa Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 213. 1835. Intermediate and moist pine-barrens; not rare. BULLOCH (853, 893), EMANUEL, DODGE, COFFEE (706), WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, DECATUR. Fl. May-July. Inland to Sumter and Lee Counties, coastward to Charlton. South to Florida, west to Louisiana, in the pine-barrens. R. plumosa Ell., Sk. 1: 58. 1816. Dry pine-barrens and rock outcrops; apparently rare. BUL- LOCH (859), TATTNALL (2756), COFFEE. FI. April—June. South Carolina to West Florida and Louisiana, in the pine- barrens. R. oligantha Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 212. 1835. _ Moist pine-barrens; inconspicuous. COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN. Fl. May—June. Also in Sumter County. North Carolina to northeastern Florida and Texas, in the pine-barrens. R. Chapmani M. A. Curtis, Am. Jour. Sci. II. 7: 409. 1840. Moist pine-barrens, or sometimes along roadsides or in other unnatural places; rare. COFFEE, IRWIN (1420), DECATUR. Fl. July—Aug. Also in Bryan County. North Carolina to northern Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-barrens. — R. pusilla Chapm. Fl. 528. 1860. Moist or intermediate pine-barrens; rare. TATTNALL (997), COFFEE. South to Florida and Cuba, west to Texas. 282 HARPER R. corniculata (Lami.) Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 205. 1835. Ceratoschenus longirostris (Mx.) Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y, 3: 260: 1836: Mostly in and near branch- and creek-swamps. APPLING, COFFEE, IRWIN, DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT, THOMAS. FI. June—Aug. More common in some other parts of the pine- barrens, particularly in the flat country. Delaware to Ohio, northern Florida, Missouri, and Texas, a rather anomalous distribution. Mostly in the coastal plain. DICHROMENA Mx., Fl. 1:37. 1803. D. latifolia Baldw.; Ell., Sk. 1:90. 1816. Moist pine-barrens or oftener in ponds; frequent. TATTNALL (1000), TELFAIR, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, WORTH, coLguiITT, THOMAS. Fl. May—July. Inland to Sumter County and coastward to McIntosh (where it was discovered) and Camden Counties. Virginia (?) to central Florida and Texas, in the pine-barrens. The flowers of this species and the next are presumably ento- mophilous, a rare character in the Cyperacee. (See page 60 of this work, also Hilgard, Geol. & Agric. Miss. 369. 1860.) D. colorata (L.) Hitchcock, Rep. Mo. Bot. Gard. 4: 141. 1893. BERRIEN: Low grounds southwest of Tifton, Sept. 29, 1902. (see p. 112.) Fl. May-June. Inland to Dooly, Lee, and Early Counties in the Lower Oligocene region and coast- ward to the islands, always‘in places where the Lafayette formation seems to be absent. New Jersey to the West Indies, Tennessee (?), Texas, and South America. STENOPHYLLUS Raf., Neogen. 4. 1825. S. Warei (Torr.) Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 21 : 30. 1894. sand-hills. BULLOCH (972), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONT- GOMERY (several stations), COFFEE (1459). Fl. July—Aug. Inland to the sand-hills opposite Dublin and Hawkinsville, and coastward to Bryan, Liberty, Wayne, and Lowndes Counties. Previously reported only from Florida. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 283 S. FLoripAnus Britton; Nash, Bull. Torrey Club 22 : 161. 1895. ““WATER GRASS.” A common weed in cultivated fields, around dwellings, etc., nearly always on Columbia sand. Now pretty well distrib- uted through the pine-barren region of Georgia, and inland at least as far as Houston County, but how and when it first appeared in the state, probably no one knows. It is scarcely visible before the middle of June, but after that it comes up rapidly, and flowers in July and August. Otherwise known only from Florida. Certainly not indige- nous in Georgia, and natural range and habitat still un- known. See Bull. Torrey Club 28 : 467. rgor. S. ciliatifolius (Ell.) Mohr, Bull. Torrey Club 24: 22. 1897. sand-hills chiefly. BULLOCH (973), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE (696), IRWIN, BERRIEN, CoLquiTT. FI. July—Sept. Also on the fall-line sand-hills (A. Cuthbert) and in the Lower Oligocene region. Less frequent coastward. North Carolina to Florida and Texas in the coastal plain, mostly in the pine-barrens. FIMBRISTYLIS Vahl, Enum. 2 : 285. 1806. F. autumnalis (L.) R. & S., Syst. 2:97. 1817. Trichelostylis autumnalis Chapm., Fl. 522. 1860. Low grounds and swamps; apparently usually a weed. cor- FEE, IRWIN, COLQUITT. Fl. summer. Pretty well scattered over the state; probably indigenous in Middle Georgia if anywhere. Throughout the Eastern United States and tropical America, but natural range and habitat not fully understood. HerAxaA Vahl) Enum. 222092. 1806: In a ditch in Moultrie, Aug. 22, 1903. Occurs in similar situations in Americus and Leslie, Sumter County, and on moist rocks in Middle Georgia, where it may be indigenous. Pennsylvania to Missouri, Florida, and Texas. Also in the tropics. F. puberula (Mx.) Vahl, Enum. 2 : 289. 18006. Chiefly in intermediate pine-barrens; not abundant. BULLOCH 284 HARPER (858, 866), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, cCoLguiTT. Fl. May-July. I have never observed it in salt marshes as Dr. Mohr did in Alabama (see Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 6 : 400. igor). South Carolina to Florida and Texas, in the pine-barrens. ELEOCHARIS R. Br., Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. 1 : 224. 1810. E. melanocarpa (Baldw.) Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3 1 31r, 1836. Moist pine-barrens and sandy margins of ponds. BULLOCH (910), MONTGOMERY, DODGE (in accidental pond, not indige- enous), COFFEE, wiLcox. Fl. April to July. Inland to Pulaski and Lee Counties and coastward to Bryan and Charlton. Originally discovered near Savannah. Massachusetts to Indiana in the glaciated region, south to central Florida in the coastal plain. Also reported from the West Indies. (See Rhodora 7:72. 1905.) For some morphological notes on this species see E. J. Hill, Bull. Torrey Club 25 : 392-394. pl. 344. 1808. , E. Baldwinii (Torr.) Chapm., Fl. 519. 1860. Normally in intermediate pine-barrens, but most abundant in unfrequented roads and paths in the pine-barrens, where it forms a dense, close turf, often excluding all other vege- tation for several square feet. Easily recognizable, even from a moving train, by its characteristic habit and color. APPLING, COFFEE (085, 1451 from sandy margin of a cypress pond), IRWIN, BERRIEN, THOMAS. Common in the flat country toward the coast, but never seen northwest of the Altamaha Grit escarpment, and rarely north of the Altamaha River. Otherwise known only from Florida. E. prolifera Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 316. 1836. IRWIN: Shallow pond near Fitzgerald; THomas: Heard’s Pond (therefore not indigenous); DECATUR: Cypress pond near. Climax. More frequent in Sumter County. North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. E. tuberculosa (Mx.) R. & S., Syst. 2: 152. 1817. Moist pine-barrens. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, COFFEE, ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 285 WILCOX, BERRIEN, coLquitT. Fl. April—June. Pretty widely distributed in South Georgia; also occurs in Meriwether County, Middle Georgia. Massachusetts to Pennsylvania, Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, mostly in the coastal plain. (See Rhodora 7:72. 1905.) E. bicolor Chapm., Fl. 517. 1860. Moist pine-barrens; very inconspicuous. IRWIN: Near Fitz- _ gerald, Oct. 4, 1902 (r7rr); coLguittT: Near Moultrie, Sept. 24, 1902 (1665). Known otherwise from the type-locality in Gadsden County, Florida, near the southwestern end of our region. E. ochreata (Nees) Steud. BULLOCH: Wet woods (imperfectly understood) near Bloys, June 26, 1901 (952). Associated with a few other species rarely seen elsewhere in the region. Virginia to central Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain. Also in tropical America. E. Robbinsii Oakes, Hovey’s Mag. 7:178. 1841. COFFEE: Sand-hill pond near Seventeen Mile Creek, July 30, tg02. Also in Pulaski, Sumter, and Lee Counties, in the Lower Oligocene region. (See Bull Torrey Club 30: 323. 1903.) Known from two or three localities in the pine-barrens of North Carolina and Florida. More common in the glaciated region from New Brunswick to Michigan. (See Rhodora Toe 2OAe LSOQ)) 7.720 LOOS:) E. interstincta (Vahl) R. &. S. Syst. 2 : 148. 1817. E. equisetoides (Ell.) Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 290. 1836. Only in permanent ponds and therefore not properly belonging to our flora. TELFAIR: Accidental pond near Helena (see note under Brasenia), July 4, 1903; DECATUR: Pond along the escarpment (see p. 82) between Faceville and Recovery, Aug. 14, 1903. Occurs in several other places in South Georgia, both in natural and artificial ponds. Massachusetts to Michigan in the glaciated region, south to central Florida and Mexico in the coastal plain. Also in the West Indies. See Rhodora 7:72. 1905. 286 HARPER SCIRPUS: LL; sp. Pla r75se S. Eriophorum Mx., Fl. 1: 33. 1803; Fernald, Proc. Am. Acad. 34 2: 500. 1899. Moist pine-barrens; rather rare. APPLING, WILCOX. Pretty well scattered over the state, but in most places as a weed inditches and moist railroad cuts. In the coastal plain it is very apt to be found where the Lafayette formation has been artificially removed, exposing the underlying Tertiary strata. New Jersey to northern Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, mostly in the coastal plain. . ; S. cylindricus [Torr.] Britton, Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 11: 79. 1892. DECATUR: With Eleocharis interstincta (see above), abundant in that locality. It does not seem to occur actually within our limits. Elsewhere in South Georgia I have seen it in . Stewart, Sumter, Decatur (Cane Water Pond), and Lowndes | Counties, in permanent ponds. Fl. May-June. Maryland to northern Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. FUIRENA Rottb., Descr. et Ic. 70. 1773. F. squarrosa hispida [Ell.] Chapm., Fl. 514. 1860. Moist pine-barrens. EMANUEL, TATTNALL, DODGE, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN (665), DOOLY, coLguiTrT. Fl. June—Sept. Widely distributed in South Georgia, and known from a few places in Middle Georgia. New York to Florida and Texas, mostly in the coastal pie F. breviseta Coville; Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 28: 466. 1go1. Moist pine-barrens and around shallow ponds; not common. COFFEE, IRWIN, DOOLY. Fl. July—Sept. Inland to Sumter, Calhoun, and Early Counties in the Lower Oligocene region, and coastward to Liberty and Lowndes. North Carolina to Florida and Texas, in the pine-barrens. KYLLINGA Rottb., Descr. et Ic. 13. 1773. K. pumila Mx., Fl. 1: 28. 1803. Wet woods; rare. BULLOCH (953), COLQUITT. FI. June—Sept. More common farther inland, extending up into Northwest Georgia. : ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 287 Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of latitude 30°. CYPERUS L., Sp. Pl. 44. 1753. C. echinatus (Ell.) Wood, Class-Book 734. 1861. Hammocks and sand-hammocks; ratherrare. EMANUEL (979) MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE (I455.) Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, but natural range and habitat not well worked out. Martindalei Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 15:98. 1888. Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens. MONTGOMERY, COFFEE (1402), coLouITT. Fl. summer. Otherwise known only from the pine-barrens of West Florida and Alabama. C. filiculmis Vahl, a closely related species, is widely distributed in the Eastern United States. C.'cylindricus (Ell.) Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 6 : 316, 339. 1879. Hammocks, rare. MONTGOMERY, COFFEE (1454). Our speci- mens are scarcely typical, and may represent a distinct species, C. ovularis (Mx.) Torr., Ann Lyc. N. Y. 3: 278. 1836. BULLOCH: Dry pine-barrens near Bloys, June 27, tgo1 (960). Not seen since, and possibly not indigenous. Grows also in Middle and Northwest Georgia. New York to Missouri, Florida, and Texas. C. retrofractus (L.) Torr.; Gray, Man. 519. 1848. Sand-hills;not common. BERRIEN, COLQUITT. FI. July—Aug. Occurs also in the upper third of the coastal plain, and in several places in Middle Georgia. See Bull. Torrey Club 30: 321-322. 1903. New Jersey to Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, mostly in the coastal plain. C. Haspan L., Sp. Pl. 45. 1753. In and near branch-swamps. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN, DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT. Fl. June-Aug. Also in the upper and lower thirds of the coastal plain, and in Meriwether County (see Bull. Torrey Chile sors264. » 1902). 288 HARPER Virginia to South Florida and Texas, mostly in the coastal plain. Also in the tropics (if it is all the same species). C. pseudovegetus Steud., Syn. Pl. Cyp. 24. 1855. Shallow ponds and other damp places; not common. TatTT- NALL, MONTGOMERY, BERRIEN. More common in the upper third of the coastal plain. Occasional in Northwest Georgia. Delaware to Florida, Tennessee, Indian Territory, and Texas, mostly in the coastal plain. C. compressus L., Sp. Pl. 46.-2752: A weed of fields and roadsides. corrEE: Douglas (675); coLguiTT: Moultrie and Autreyville. Fl. summer.:° Scat- tered pretty well over the state, at least in the Palzozoic region and coastal plain. Introduced from the tropics. C.-souarrosus, W4-Cemt. bli 2) 20 icon A diminutive weed, abundant along the streets of Douglas, in what was once flat pine-barrens (674). Also in similar places in Wayne, Charlton, and Clinch Counties, and re- ported from adjacent Florida. Introduced from the tropics. DULICHIUM Pers., Syn. 1:65. 1805. D. arundinaceum (L.) Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 21: 29. 1894. Sphagnous bogs, creek-swamps, sand-hill ponds, etc. MONT- GOMERY, COFFEE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, DECATUR. FI. July- Aug. Pretty well scattered over South Georgia, but never observed farther inland (7. e., above the fall-line). Nearly throughout the glaciated region and coastal plain of North America. Occurred in Europe in the Pleistocene period. (See Rhodora 7:72. 1905; 8:28. 1906.) Anatomy and morphology discussed by Holm, Am. Jour. Sci. IV. 3: 429-437. 7. 1-8. 1897. LIPOCARPHA R. Br., App. Tuckey Exp. Congo, 459. 1818. L. macuLaTa (Mx.) Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 288. 1836. Moist roadsides and ditches. booty: Near Cordele; IRWIN: Fitzgerald. Fl. ee Scattered over South Georgia, but not common. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 289 Virginia to central Florida and Alabama in the coastal plain, but natural range and habitat unknown. Also in the West Indies. The representation of Cyperacee in our territory is remark- able for the large number of species of Rhynchospora (27 being here enumerated), the small representation of Scirpus (only one normally belonging to the region, and that rare in the natural state and at the same time not a typical Scirpus), and the moderate number of Carices (16 species and a variety). In these respects the flora of the Altamaha Grit region probably resem- bles that of the tropics more than it does that of the glaciated region, which would not be the case with some other families. GRAMINE. ARUNDINARIA Mx., Fl. 1: 73. 1803. REED. A. tecta (Walt.) Muhl., Gram. tot. 1817. Moist pine-barrens, mostly near branch-swamps; not common. IRWIN, BERRIEN (2795), DOOLY, coLguITT. Fl. May. The species of Arundinaria are very imperfectly understood, and it is not at all certain that this one is identified cor- rectly, so it is scarcely worth while to attempt to give its whole range. What may be another species occurs in some of the muddy swamps and rich woods. HORDEUM L., Sp. Pl. 84. 1753. Pervonosum I. oop. Pl.ved. 2. 126. 1752. Streets of Fitzgerald, May 17, 1904. Also in Athens (Middle Georgia), and northward and westward. Fl. April. Probably native of Europe. FESTUCA L., Sp. Pl. 73. £753. 'F. octorrora Walt., Fl. Car. 81. 1788. Ppearcncuae Willd, ‘Sp. PE Ips 419. 1797. Sandy roadsides near Ohoopee, Fitzgerald, and elsewhere, ~ Fl. April-May. Widely distributed 1n the United States, probably introduced. from the tropics. 290 HARPER UNIOLA L., Sp. Pl. 71. 1753. U. latifolia Mx., Fl. 1:70. 1803. MONTGOMERY: Stallings’ Bluff on the Oconee River near Mount Vernon, June 29, 1903. More common in the upper third of the coastal plain, and in Middle Georgia. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States between latitudes 30° and 40°. - Leaf-anatomy discussed by Holm, Bot. Gaz., 16 : 168-171. pl. 15. 1891. U. laxa (L.) B.S. P., Prel. Cat. N: Y. 60. 1888; Serine ema Dorrey ‘Clu 5 ssn. 0 reed: COFFEE: Margins of creek-swamps, July, 1902; not common. Scattered over the state, but nowhere abundant. New York to central Florida, Tennessee, and Texas. MELICA L., Sp. Pl. 66. 1753. M. mutica Walt., Fl. Car. 78. 1788. wiLcox: Upper Seven Bluffs, May 17, 1904. Belongs more properly to the Eocene region of the coastal bes and to Middle Georgia. Fl. March—April. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States between latitudes 32° and 309°. ERAGROSTIS Beauv., Agrost. 70. 1812. (All our species weeds.) E. aMaBivis (L.) Wight & Arn.,; Hook. & Arn., Bot. Beechey 251. 1840. (Not E. amabilis Walt.) coLquiTT: Moist roadsides, etc.; about half a dozen stations within a few miles of Moultrie. This species has a remark- ably restricted range in the United States, being known only from coLguiTT, Thomas, and Brooks Counties, Georgia, and Jefferson and Suwanee Counties, Florida, all of which are within too miles of each other. (See Bull. Torrey Club 31: 17. 1904.) How and when it was introduced is still a mystery. Native of Asia. Excrrtaris*(L.) Link, Hort. Berol. 1 : 1o2:nersere Streets of Ocilla, July 15, 1902. Occurs in similar situations in the Lower Oligocene region. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 291 South Carolina to South Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain. Introduced from the tropics. EB. stImPLex Scribn., Bull. Div. Agrost. U.S. Dept. Agr. 7, ed. 3. 2501, Qo. “E. Brownei Kunth”; Chapm., Fl. 664. 1883. A common weed along railroads. TELFAIR, IRWIN, BERRIEN, _ DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT (1656), THOMAS, and doubtless other counties. (See Bull. Torrey Club 31:17. 1904.) Also in the flat country toward the coast, and in Florida. Natural range and habitat unknown. E. rerracta (Muhl.) Scribn., Mem. Torrey Club 5: 49. 1894. . APPLING: Sandy roadside northeast of Prentiss, Sept. 12, 1903. Delaware to central Florida and Texas, but natural range and habitat uncertain TRIPLASIS Beauv., Agrost. 81. 1812. _T. Americana Beauv., |. c. pl. 16. f. Io. Uralepis cornuta Ell., Tricuspis cornuta Gray, Triplasis cornuta Benth. Sand-hills; inconspicuous and probably not common. MONT- GOMERY, DODGE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT (1659). Fl. Sept.—Oct. Extends inland to the fall-line sand-hills of Richmond (A. Cuthbert) and Taylor Counties, and southeastward nearly to the coast. North Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. TRIDENS R. & S., Syst. 2:34. 1817. TRICUSPIS Beauv.,.Agrost. 77. 1812. (Not of Pers.) URALEPIS and WrInpsoriIA Nutt., 1818. T. ambiguus (Ell.) Schult., Mant. 2 : 333. 1824. Poa, Ell.; Windsoria, Nutt.; Tricuspis, Chapm.; Triodia, Vasey; Szeglingia, Kuntze. Triodia Elliott Bush, Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis 12: 73. 1902. Moist pine-barrens and shallow ponds; rather rare. BULLOCH, DODGE (1979), BERRIEN, coLguiTT. Fl. June—Sept. Also in Sumter and Charlton Counties. There are some peculi- arities about its habitat which are not well understood. 292 HARPER It is likely to be found in the same kind of places as Brewerza aquatica and Kellhia hyssopijolia, and with practice one can learn just about where to look for it. South Carolina to northern Florida and Texas, in the pine- barrens. ELEUSINE Gaert., Fr. & Sem. 1:7. 1788. E. Inpica (L.) Gaert., 1. c. 8. Roadsides, etc. APPLING (two stations), WoRTH (Ashburn). More common in almost any other part of the state. Introduced from the tropics. CAMPULOSUS Desv., Bull. Soc. Philom. 2 : 189. 1810. C. aromaticus (Walt.) Trin.; Steud., Nomencl. ed. 2, 272. 1841. Moist pine-barrens; not abundant. BULLOCH (898), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, WORTH, COLQUITT, and probably in most of the other coun- ties. Ranges throughout the pine-barren region of Georgia and a little farther inland, to Sandersville and Americus. Fl. May—Aug. Virginia to central Florida and Louisiana, mostly in the pine- barrens. CAPRIOLA Adans., Fam. 2:31. 1763. C. Dactyton (L.) Kuntze, Rev. 2: 764. 1891. ‘‘ BERMUDA GRASS.” Streets of Tifton, Sept. 27, 1902. Doubtless occurs in many other places, where 1 may have passed it without making a note of it. Common in Middle and Southwest Georgia, both as a valuable pasture and lawn grass and as a despised weed. Introduced from the tropics. DANTHONIA DC., Fl. France 3:32. 1805. D. sericea Nutt., Gen., 1:71. 1818. TATTNALL: Rock outcrops near Ohoopee River and Pendleton Creek, June, 1903; past flowering. More common in Middle Georgia. . Massachusetts to northern Florida and Arkansas. SPOROBOLUS R. Br., Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. 1: 169. 1810. S. Floridanus Chapm., Fl. 550. 1860. Habitat variable, embracing rocks, shallow ponds, small ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 293 branch-swamps, moist and intermediate pine-barrens. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, APPLING, COFFEE, BERRIEN, COL- guiTT. Fl. September. More abundant in Sumter and Mitchell Counties, in the Lower Oligocene region. Known otherwise only from northern Florida. For some notes on this species see Bull. Torrey Club 28: 464- BOG.) OO: S. teretifolius Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 33 : 229-231. 7.7. 19006. Moist pine-barrens; not rare. DODGE, COFFEE (677), IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, COLQUITT (1642 type). Fl. July—Sept. Not known elsewhere. S. Curtissii [Vasey] Small; Scribn., Bull. Div. Agrost. U.S. Dept. Agr.7:142.f.124. 1897. (The name was used by Kearney in Bull. Div. Agrost. 1: 24. 1895, but in such a way as would hardly constitute publication.) Intermediate pine-barrens and corresponding places in sand- hills; rare. MONTGOMERY, APPLING. Fl. Aug.—Sept. Also in the flat country, and in adjacent parts of Florida. S. gracilis (Trin.) Merrill, Rhodora 4: 48. 1902. S. junceus (Mx.) Kunth, Rev. Gram. 1:68. 1835. S. ejunicdus Nash; Britton, Manual, 106. r1gor. Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; not abundant. MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. FI. July—Sept. Also in vari- ous other parts of South Georgia. Has a wide and rather anomalous distribution in the Eastern United States. MUHLENBERGIA Schreb. M. expansa (Poir.) Trin., Unifl. 193. 1824. (fide Merrill, Rhodora AREAS HOO2: M. trichopodes (Ell.) Chapm., Fl. 553. 1860. Two forms of this occur in our territory, but the differences between them are not easily described. One I have seen in dry or intermediate pine-barrens in APPLING, COFFEE, COLQUITT (1641) and Sumter Counties, and the other in moist pine-barrens in DODGE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT (1667) and McIntosh Counties. The moist pine-barren form is — 294 HARPER handsomer and stouter than the other, with broader and straighter leaves, the bases of which when old finally split up into fibers as in many species of Sisyrinchium. A micros- copic examination of the leaf shows at once the reason for this, and reveals certain differences in the form and arrange- ment of the vascular bundles, but whether these characters are constant enough to be of specific valueI cannot say. It has not been customary to separate species of grasses by such minute leaf-characters, and furthermore it is not known at present which of the two forms is the type of the species. Both forms seem to flower at the same time, in August and September, and I have seen specimens of both from other states. The species is said to range from South Carolina to northeastern Florida and Mexico. The leaf-anatomy, apparently of the moist pine-barren form, has been described by Kearney in Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 5: 288. 1900. ; STIPA TL Sp. Pl 78) purse S. avenacea L., 1. c. TATTNALL: Sandy west bank of Ohoopee River; wiLcox: Upper Seven Bluffs. Fl. April-May. More common in Middle Georgia. New York to Missouri, Florida, and Texas. ARISTIDA L., Sp. Pl., 82. 1753. A. spiciformis Ell., Sk. 1: 141. 1816. Rather dry (intermediate) flat pine-barrens, and corresponding places in sand-hills. APPLING, COFFEE (636), BERRIEN, COLQUITT, THOMAS. Fl. July—Sept. Never seen near the escarpment or northwest of it, or northeast of the Altamaha River, but common in all the counties east of those men- tioned and south of the river, 2.e., in the flat country around Okefinokee Swamp. South Carolina (?) to central Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens. For a morphological note see Bull. Torrey Club 28: 464. TgoT.. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 295 A. palustris [Chapm.] Vasey, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 3:45. 1892. . Cypress and other ponds in the pine-barrens. COFFEE (690), IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, coLquiTT. Fl. September. Inland ; to Sumter, Lee and Early Counties in the Lower Oligocene region, and coastward to the vicinity of Okefinokee Swamp, but not known northeast of the Altamaha River. South to central Florida and west to Louisiana, in the pine- barrens. A. virgata Trin.; Spreng. Neue Entdeck. 2:60. 1821. A. condensata Chapm., Bot. Gaz. 3:19. 1878. A. Combsu Scribn. & Ball, Bull. Div. Agrost. U. S. Dept. PG = Aa) 7]. L 7. “OOO: MONTGOMERY: Sand-hills of Gum Swamp Creek (1982) and Little Ocmulgee River, Sept. 10, 1903. Inland to the fall- line sand-hills near Augusta (A. Cuthbert), and coast- ward to Liberty, McIntosh, and Wayne Counties. Also in northern Florida. AS stricta Mx), Fl. 1: 41. 1803. ‘‘ WIRE-GRASS.”’ Everywhere in dry pine-barrens; doubtless the most abundant vascular plant in our territory. Of little intrinsic value, but its abundance makes it of considerable economic importance, it being the principal food supply for countless thousands of cattle and sheep. Other uses are being discovered for it, such as its manufacture into matting. Virginia (?) to central Florida and Louisiana, confined to the pine-barrens or nearly so. Alsointhe Bahamas (Hitchcock). _ A. sp. (near Mohrit). MONTGOMERY: Sand-hills of Little Ocmulgee River, Sept. to, 1903 (1988). Grows in tufts which die out at the genet as they grow at the edges, giving a sort of ‘“‘fairy- ee appearance. CENCHRUS L., Sp. Pl. 1oso. 1753. © TRIBULOLDES, L., |. .c. ~ BERRIEN: Brookfield, Sept. 27, 1902. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, probably introduced from the tropics. 296 HARPER PANICUM (L.) Sp) Blass a7 P.{Currani Ashe, Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 15 : 113. 1898. BERRIEN: Rich woods (see p. 111) southwest of Tifton, Sept. 29, 1902. Also in similar situations in Brooks County, in the Upper Oligocene region. Scattered over the Southeastern United States, but not very well known. P. Ashei T. G. Pearson, Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 15: 35. 1808. COFFEE: Sand-hills and hammock of Seventeen Mile Creek, July, 1902; rare (1435). Also on sandy river-banks in Middle Georgia. Distribution not fully worked out. P. scabriusculum Ell., Sk. 1: 121. 1816. Branch-swamps, etc.;not common. BULLOCH (881), EMANUEL, COFFEE, IRWIN. Fl. June. Inland to Sumter County and coastward to Charlton. North Carolina to Florida (?) and Texas, in the coastal plain. P.ETennesseense Ashe, Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 15: 52. 1898. BERRIEN: Rich damp woods southwest of Tifton, Sept. 209, 1902 (1689). “New York and Illinois to Tennessee and Florida’’ (Small). P. longiligulatum Nash, Bull. Torrey Club 26 : 574. 1899. BULLOCH: Branch-swamp near Bloys, June 10, 1t90r (839). Otherwise known only from Florida. P. lucidum Ashe, Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 15 : 47. 1808. BULLOCH: Wet woods near Bloys, June 7, 1901 (829). Also in Clarke County, Middle Georgia. New Jersey to Florida and Mississippi. P. barbulatum Mx., Fl. 1: 49. 1803. MONTGOMERY: Stallings’ Bluff on the Oconee River, june 29, 1903. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. P. angustifolium Ell., Sk. 1: 129. 1816. BULLOCH: Dry pine-barrens near Bloys, June 7, tg01 (628). Doubtless grows elsewhere in our territory. . “ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 297 . Virginia to Florida and Texas, mostly in the coastal plain. -P. Combsii Scribn. & Ball, Bull. Div. Agrost. U. S. Dept: Agr. 205742: 7. LO. 1900. COFFEE: Moist pine-barrens near Douglas, Sept 22, 1903 (2014). BERRIEN: Shallow pond near Tifton, Sept. 26, 1902 (1679). Krown otherwise only from West Florida. Pavircatum i. Sp. Pl. 50. 1753. WORTH: Low grounds east of Tyty, with P. hemitomon, Sept. 30, 1902. Scattered over South Georgia, in dry or wet places, but natural habitat uncertain. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. P. cocnatum Schult. IRWIN: In Lafayette soil along railroad cuts, Cycloneta and southward, Oct. 2, 1902, beginning to flower (1702). Also in the Eocene region. Becomes a tumbleweed in late fall. Said to range from South Carolina to Minnesota and Arizona, but natural range and habitat unknown. P. verrucosum Muhl., Gram. 113. 1817. P. debile Ell., Sk. 1: 129. 1816. (Not of Desf., 1800.) Moist pine-barrens, branch-swamps, etc.;not common. IRWIN, BERRIEN, WORTH, COLQUITT. FI. September. Also in Sum- ter County. Massachusetts to central Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. P. stenodes Griseb., Fl. Brit. W. I. 547. 1864. P. anceps strictum Chapm., Fl. 573. 1860. Not P. strictum Re ese Margins of ponds, particularly cypress and sand-hill ponds; not common. COFFEE, COLQUITT. FI. summer. Inland to Sumter and Early Counties and coastward to Ware and Charlton. South to South Florida and west to Texas, in the pine-barrens. Also reported from the West Indies and South America, but it is not certain that our plant is identical with the tropical one. 298 HARPER P. hemitomon Schult., Mant. 2: 227. 1824. MatDEN Cane. Brachiaria digitarioides (Carpenter) Nash; Britton, Manual 77. 1901. (For other synonyms see Merrill, Circ. Div. Agrost. US Wepteene rani: Seangoms) Open branch-swamps and adjacent moist pine-barrens. COF- FEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, DOOLY, woRTH. Fl. June. More abundant in some other parts of South Georgia, especially in Okefinokee Swamp. Delaware to Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain. P. melicarium Mx. Fl. 1: 50. 1803. Steinchisma hians (Ell.) Raf.; Seringe, Bull. Bot. Soc. Genev. I: 220. 1830. (fide Ind. Kew.) Moist pine-barrens or oftener along damp sandy roadsides, perhaps not indigenous. BULLOCH (838), WILCOX, COL-~ QUITT. North Carolina to South Florida, Missouri, and Texas, in the coastal plain. Also in the tropics. OPLISMENUS Beauv., Fl. Owar. et Benin 2 : 14. pl. 08. f. I. 1807. O. setarius (Lam.) R. & S., Syst. 2 : 484. 1817. Panicum Nuttallianum Steud., Nomencl. ed. 2. 2: 260. 1841. TELFAIR: Ocmulgee River swamp near Lumber City, Sept. 11, 1903. Widely distributed over the coastal plain of Georgia, but most frequent in the upper third. Fl. Aug.—Oct. South Carolina to South Florida and Texas, nearly confined to the coastal plain, though a shade-loving species. ECHINOCHLOA Beauv. EB. corona (L.) Link, Hort. Berol. 2: 209. 1833. Railroad yard, Tifton, Oct. 2, 1902. More common in the older cities of Georgia. Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, also in the tropics, where it doubtless originated. ANTHANANTIA Beauv., Agrost. 48. 1812. A. villosa (Mx.) Beauv., Agrost. Ill. 8. pl. ro. f. 7. 1812. Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills. IRWIN, BERRIEN (1686), coLtguiTT. Fl. Aug.—Oct. Also in Richmond (A. Cuthbert), Sumter, and Brooks Counties. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 299 South Carolina to central Florida and Texas in the coastal plain, mostly in the pine-barrens. A. rufa (Ell.) Schult. Mant. 2: 258. 1824. Moist pine-barrens. DODGE, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT (165T). Fl. Aug.—Oct. Alsoin McIntosh County. South Carolina to northeastern Florida, in the pine-barrens. SYNTHERISMA Walt., Fl. Car. 76. 1788. S. SANGUINALE (L.) Crop Grass. Crap Grass. Crap GRASS. 3 3 Chiefly in cultivated fields and around dwellings. pDopcE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, and doubtless elsewhere where I have not taken the trouble to note it. Common almost everywhere in the Eastern United States. Introduced from the tropics. > ANASTROPHUS Schlecht., Bot. Zeit. 8: 681. 1850. A. COMPRESSUS (Sw.) Nash; Britton, Manual 75. 1901. WoRTH: Tyty, Sept. 30, 1902. Also near Union, Waycross, and doubtless many other places in South Georgia, always as a weed. Introduced from the tropics. A. paspaloides (Mx.) Nash; Britton, Manual 75. 1go1. TELFAIR: Ocmulgee River swamp near Lumber City. Scat- tered over South Georgia in damp places, but like several other of our plants which range southward to the tropics, its indigeneity is a little doubtful. Fl. summer. North Carolina to Florida and Texas in the coastal plain. Also in the West Indies. PASPALUM L., Syst. ed. 10, 2: 855. 1765. Ee pacox Walt, Bl. Car. 75: 1788. BULLOCH: Moist pine-barrens near Bloys, June 15, 1901 (900). South Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain. _P. Curtisianum Steud., Syn. Pl. Glum. 26. 1855. Moist pine-barrens. COFFEE (672), IRWIN, BERRIEN, WORTH, coLguiITT. Fl. Sept.—Oct. 300 HARPER South Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens. SORGHASTRUM Nash; Britton, Manual 71. 1gor. S. secundum (Ell.) Nash; Small, Fl. 67. 1903. ‘‘ Witp Oats.” “Andropogon nutans L.,”’ J. E. Smith, in Abbot, Insects of Garenee at sal Oe Andropogon secundum Ell., Sk. 1: 580. 1821. Sorghum secundum (Ell.) Chapm., Fl. 583. 1860. Chrysopogon secundus (Ell.) Benth.; Vasey, Grasses U. S. 29. 1885. Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills. APPLING, COFFEE (7/Q), WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT. FI. Sept._Oct. Doubtless grows in most of the other counties, but it is not recognizable when _not in flower. Widely distributed over South Georgia, from the fall-line sand-hills of Richmond (A. Cuthbert) and Taylor (where Elliott dis- . covered it) to the flat pine-barrens. See Bull. Torrey Club PAIS NOB) HOMER Sha) 2. ROY, Also reported from Florida as far down as Tampa, and doubt- less grows in the coastal plain of South Carolina and Alabama as well. . nutans (L.) Nash; Small, Fl. 66. 1903. Sorghum avenaceum (Mx.) Chapm., Fl. 583. 1860. Dry pine-barrens. BERRIEN, COLQUITT (1657). FI. Sept.—Oct. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, most common northward. The three known species of this genus have been much con- fused, and it is difficult to identify them from most descrip- tions, because they all look about alike when pressed. But they areamply distinct in life, and were pretty well described by Dr. Chapman in the first edition of his Flora. The other species (Sorghum nutans Chapm., Sorghastrum Linneanum Nash) grows in many places in the upper third of the coastal plain of Georgia. ANDROPOGON L., Sp. Pl. 1045. 1753. A. furcatus Muhl.; Willd., Sp. Pl. 4: 919. 1806. Dry pine-barrens; not common. BERRIEN (1685), COLQUITT. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 301 Fl. July—Sept. Also in the upper third of the coastal plain. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States and Canada. often a weed in old fields in the North. Anatomy of leaves and roots studied by W. E. Britton, Bull. Mocpey eCluly 30.2 580; 500: pl. 27e. 1903. ? A. Tracyi Nash Moist pine-barrens. IRWIN (abundant near Fitzgerald), BER- RIEN (2707). Fl. Sept.—Oct. peewarcmicus L., Sp. Pl. 1046. 1753. Dry pine-barrens. SCREVEN, WILCOX, and doubtless else- where. Inland to the mountains, where it grows on dry sunny slopes. (See Torreya 5:56. 1905.) Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but probably not everywhere native. Ree Moni Elack:; Vasey, Contr. U.S: Nat. Herb. 3: 11. 1892. IRWIN: Moist pine-barrens near Fitzgerald, Oct. 4, 1902 (1708). West to Mississippi, in the pine-barrens. A. corymbosus [Chapm.] Nash; Britton, Manual 69. 1901 (without proper synonymy). IRWIN: With the preceding (17709). Virginia to Florida and Mississippi (?), in the coastal plain. A. scoparius Mx., Fl. 1: 57. 1803. Broom SEDGE. BERRIEN: Rather dry pine-barrens near Brookfield, Sept. 27, 1902 (1684). Possibly not indigenous. Nearly all over North -America, but usually as a weed. Anatomy of leaves and roots described by W. E. Britton, Bull Torrey Club, 30: 588, 508-599. pl. 27d. 1903. A. tener (Nees) Kunth, Rev. Gram. 2: 565. pl. 197. 1832. Dry and intermediate pine-barrens, usually where the Lafay- ette formation is at or near the surface; often abundant. Rarely on rocks. DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, DOOLY, COLQUITT, THOMAS, DECATUR. Fl. summer. Inland to Sumter County and coastward at least to Lowndes. West to Texas and south to Argentina. This species is as good an illustration as any of the singular fact that nearly all the species in our territory which range 302 HARPER | southward to the tropics have a noticeable tendency to become weeds. Some of course are known to have been introduced from the tropics, and occur with us only as weeds, but in the case of many which grow in natural habitats like this one there is an indefinable something about their appearance which leads one to suspect that they may not beindigenous. The explanation of this is probably that a species which ranges through ‘several degrees of latitude is usually capable of adjusting itself to different edaphic as well as climatic factors, and is therefore able to encroach on the territory of less tolerant species. There is of course another category, of strictly native plants which are now supposed to have a very wide range but will be found on further study to be distinct from the related forms in the tropics. With practice one can usually distinguish the strictly native from the doubtfully native plants without much trouble. ELIONURUS H. & B.; Willd., Sp. Pl. 4: 941. 1806. (Original spelling Elyonurus.) E. tripsacoides H. & B., 1. c. Rottbellia ciliata Nutt., Gen. 1 : 83. 1818. Andropogon Nuttall Chapm., Fl. 580. 1860. BERRIEN: In those peculiar Lafayette-less spots already men- tioned several times (see pp. 111, 112) southwest of Tifton. Collected once in a similar place near the southwestern corner of Camden County. Also in East Florida, and in the tropics. MANISURIS L., Mant. 2: 164. 1771. M. rugosa (Nutt.) Kuntze, Rev. 2:780. 1891. Rottbellia corrugata Baldw., Am. Jour. Sci. 1:355. 1819. Moist pine-barrens, etc.;not common. DOOLY (1959), WORTH, BERRIEN, CoLguiTT. Fl. Aug.—Sept. Not known farther inland, but extends coastward to Echols and Charlton Counties (originally discovered in Camden County). South to Florida and west to Texas, in the pine-barrens. Also in Delaware. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 303 M. Chapmani (Hack.) Nash; Small, Fl. 56, 1326. 1903. “ Rottbellia rugosa Nutt.”’ Chapm., Fl. 575. 1860. Shallow ponds; rare. DOOLY, BERRIEN (1650), Fl. Aug.— Sept. More common in the Lower Oligocene region (see Bull. Torrey Club 27: 425. 1900). North Carolina to Florida and Alabama, in the pine-barrens. M. cylindrica (Mx.) Kuntze, Rev. 2: 779. 1891. Dry pine-barrens; rare. BULLOCH (835, 904), TATTNALL. FI. May-June. Also in Dooly, Sumter, and Lee Counties, in the Lower Oligocene region. Also in northern Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens. ERIANTHUS Mx., Fl. 1:54. 1803. E. strictus Baldw.; Ell., Sk. 1:39. 1816. BERRIEN: Low grounds where the Lafayette formation is absent, southwest of Tifton, Sept. 29, 1902 (1691). Also in the Altamaha River swamp in McIntosh County. I have seen it somewhere else in South Georgia under similar con- ditions, when I did not know what it was and therefore could not very well make a note of it. Georgia to Florida, Tennessee, and Texas, mostly in the coastal plain. : E. saccharoides Mx., Fl. 1: 55. 1803. Moist pine-barrens and small branch-swamps. WORTH, COL- ~QUITT (1662), Fl. September. New Jersey (?) to Florida and Texas (?), in the coastal plain. E. brevibarbis Mx., 1. c. BERRIEN: Moist place at base of sand-hills of Little River southwest of Tifton, Sept. 29, 1902 (1693). Delaware (?) to Florida and Texas (?), in the coastal plain. ALISMACE, SAGITTARIA L., Sp. Pl. 993. 1753. S. Mohrii J. G. Smith; Mohr, Bull. Torrey Club 24:19. pl. 289. @ PSO PAOOntiWs, Sa Naber. .07.383. Pl. 3, LOOL. Moist pine-barrens and open branch-swamps; also a little inclined to become a weed in ditches. EMANUEL (994), Meee) RWSL n° + oe tes: { q 304 HARPER MONTGOMERY, COFFEE (715), WILCOX, IRWIN, DooLy. FI. May—Sept. (See Bull. Torrey Club 28: 462. 1901; 30: 327. 1903). Known otherwise only from Mobile County, Alabama. (?) S. graminea Mx., Fl. 2: 190. 1803. Small ponds and branches; not common. BULLOCH (950), COFFEE. Fl. April—Aug. ECHINODORUS Engelm.; Gray, Manual 460. 1848. E. radicans (Nutt.) Engelm., 1. c. Swamps of rivers rising north of our territory. TATTNALL: Ohoopee River near Ohoopee; MONTGOMERY: Oconee River near Mount Vernon. Fl. summer. Like most of its associ- ates, this is more frequent in the Lower Oligocene region. North Carolina to Florida (Apalachicola), Illinois, and Texas, in the coastal plain. (Its occurrence in Florida only along the Apalachicola River is significant, for that is the only river in that state which rises north of the pine-barrens, as noted on p. 74.) TYPHACE. ; SPARGANIUM L., Sp. Pl. 971. 1753. S. androcladum [Engelm]. Morong, Bull. Torrey Club 15: 78. 1888. ; TELFAIR: Edge of swamp of Sugar Creek near McRae, July 4, 1903. DOOLY: Small pond near the Rock House, Sept. 1, 1903. More common farther inland. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. CONIFER. PINUS L., Sp. Pl. tooo. 1753. PINEs. P. palustris Mill. (no. 14). Gard. Dict. ed.8.1768. “LONG-LEAF PINE.” P . australis Mx. f., Hist., Arb. Am. 1: 64. pl. 6. 1810. For illustrations see plates 2, 3, 5, 6, 18 and 26 of this volume, In dry and intermediate pine-barrens everywhere in our territory, far more abundant than jall the other trees ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 305 combined. In the region under consideration one can hardly get out of sight of this species, except in the depths of some swamp. It is equally abundant in all that part of Georgia underlaid by Oligocene or later rocks (7. ¢., the ‘‘pine- barrens’), except in Okefinokee Swamp, where it is absent, and in the Upper Oligocene and maritime regions, where it is infrequent. It ranges nearly throughout the coastal plain (but is rare or wanting in most of the Eocene region), and near the western boundary of the state it extends inland to the mountains a little north of latitude 34° (see Torreya 5: 55-60. 1905). Extreme southern Virginia to central Florida and eastern Texas (see Torreya 3: 122. 1903; Bray, Bull. Bureau Fores- [OM SuDeOt Aen 472 212353) Pl. 1.0. Map Tl: 1904). Confined to the coastal plain except in Georgia and Ala- bama as above noted. This is perhaps the most abundant and important tree in North America at the present time. For a summary of almost everything known about this and the following species of Pinus see Mohr’s Timber Pines of the Southern United States, especially the revised edition. P. Elliottii Engelm., Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis 4: 186. pl. 1-3. WESG. “SLASH PINE.” (?) P. Cartbeéa Morelet, Rev. Hort., de la Cote d’Or. 1851. (?) P. Bahamensis Griseb., Fl. Brit. W. I. 503. 1864. P. heterophylla Sudw., Bull. Torrey Club 20:45. 1893. (excl. syns.) (See G. R. Shaw, Gard. Chron., March tg and Aug. 6, 1904.) For illustrations see plates 4, 5, 14 f. 2, and 17 f. 2. Moist pine-barrens, branch-swamps, cypress ponds, etc. (never in mud or permanent water); common throughout, probably on every square mile of our territory, but far less abundant than the preceding. In Georgia its inland limit coincides with that of the pine-barrens (1.e., with the boundary between the Eocene and Oligocene regions). From there to the coast it can be found almost everywhere, in- cluding Okefinokee Swamp and some if not most of the sea islands, where P. palustris is absent. 306 HARPER In many places it occurs as asecond growth (known as “‘old- field slash-pine’’) in drier situations than its natural habitat. Perhaps its tendency to become a weed is correlated with the fact that it ranges southward to the tropics (see remarks under Andropogon tener, above). South Carolina to South Florida and Louisiana, in the pine- barrens and coastward. Believed by some to be identical with a species growing in the Bahamas, Cuba, and perhaps other tropical regions. In Georgia it seems to be confined — to the Columbia formation, but not quite to the Lafayette. P,. Teda L., Sp. Pl. 1000. 1753. ‘“‘SHORT-LEAF PINE.” In our territory almost confined to the swamps of creeks and small rivers. Has been noted in most of the counties. FI. March—April. Found in nearly all parts of the southeastern United States below tooo feet above sea-level, and northward in and near the coastal plain to Delaware; but so commonly a weed in old fields that its natural habitat is difficult to determine in some sections. ’ P, serotina Mx., Fl. 2: 205. 1803. ‘‘Biack PINE.’ P. rigida serotima Loud., Encyc. Pl. 979. 7. 1824-1827. 1829. P. Teda serotina Wood, Class-Book 660. 1861. Illustrated in Pilapenie ise 2: Moist pine-barrens, sand-hill bogs and branch-swamps; com- mon throughout, but not abundant. Noted in every county except Mitchell. Fl. March-April. Invariably associated with the Columbia formation, and can be found almost anywhere in South Georgia, including Okefinokee Swamp but excepting the lime-sink region and the sea islands. Its range terminates abruptly at the fall-line. Most abundant in the flat pine-barrens toward the coast. Norfolk County, Virginia (see Torreya 3 : 122. 1903) to central and West Florida, strictly confined to the coastal plain. - P. echinata Mill. (no. 12), Gard. Dict. ed. 8. 1768. >, mitts Mx., Fl. 2: 204. 1803. (SHORT-LEAF PINE.) On bluffs along the muddy rivers; rare. MONTGOMERY, COF- FEE, WILCOX. Occurs in a few widely separated localities —s—- - ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 307 in the pine-barrens nearer the coast, but most abundant in the Eocene region (see Bull. Torrey Club 31: 15. 1904) and thence northward to the mountains. Long Island (?) to Missouri, northern Florida, and Texas. P. glabra Walt., Fl. Car. 237. 1788. Spruce Pine. ‘‘ WHITE Pine.”’ (Bottom WHITE PINE.) P. mitis paupera Wood, Class-Book 660. 1861. Hammocks and bluffs; frequent but not abundant. sSCREVEN, BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COF- FEE, WILCOX, THOMAS. Fl. April. Reaches a diameter of three feet in COFFEE County. Rarer toward the coast and commoner in the upper third of the coastal plain, but not quite reaching the fall-line. Its distribution in Georgia is very similar to that. of Magnolia grandzflora, with which it is commonly associated. South Carolina to northern Florida and southeastern Louisiana, in the coastal plain. TAXODIUM L. C. Rich., Ann. Mus. Par. 16: 278. 1810. ie distichum (i): C: Rich: 1. c..2098. 1810. . ““CypREss.2”’ wuomillustrations see pl. of 2-and pl. 27.4. 3. River-swamps, almost confined to those streams which rise north of our territory and have eroded their channels through the superficial formations into the Tertiary strata. Occurs all along the Ohoopee, Oconee, Ocmulgee, Little Ocmulgee, and Ochlocknee Rivers. (The latter is a little anomalous in some respects among our supposed endemic streams, and if investigated it might be found to have some of its sources in the lime-sink region.) Fl. spring. In Georgia this species is confined to the coastal plain, and is most abundant in the upper third. The characters and dis- tribution of this and the following species have been more fully discussed elsewhere (see Bull. Torrey Club 29 :383-—399. MOOZ S32 OS EL 5.1 LOOS )) Delaware to Florida, Tennessee, Indiana, Missouri, and Texas, almost confined to the coastal plain. A form apparently intermediate between this and the next grows in the Ogeechee, Little Ohoopee, Allapaha, and 308 HARPER Withlacoochee Rivers, and in Ochwalkee and Gum Swamp Creeks. (See Plate X XI, Fig. 1). T. imbricarium [Nutt.] Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 29: 383. 1902. ‘““Cypress.’’ (For illustrations see Bull. Torrey Club 32: 109, TIO, 113, 114. 1905; and plates 5, 6, 7, 10, 27eamcmeaman this work.) Common throughout in moist pine-harrens, branch-swamps, and cypress ponds, usually with Pinus Elliottu. Noted in every county in our territory; least abundant in SCREVEN, EMANUEL, MONTGOMERY, and the upper part of BULLOCH, where there are few or no cypress ponds and where this species does not grow in most of the branches as it does on the other side of the Altamaha River. Ranges through- out the pine-barrens of Georgia, including Okefinokee ‘Swamp, and known from a few outlying stations in the upper fourth of the coastal plain. Virginia (Dismal Swamp) to Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain. JUNIPERUS ©. Sp. UPI 10385) Seager JoVirsinianay Ly Sp. Pl roso, n75ce 2 CEDAR TATTNALL: Along the Ohoopee River near Ohoopee; COFFEE: Along Ocmulgee River near Lumber City. More common in the upper third of the coastal plain and northward, particularly in the lme-sink and Palzozoic regions. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but often as an escape from cultivation, so that it is difficult to deter- mine its natural range accurately. Pav © EVA AS ISOETACE. ISOBLES Wr ops lel toon s7icer I. flaccida Shuttl.; Chapm., Fl. 602. 1860. Branch-swamps. BULLOCH (843, 951), COFFEE (12429), and doubtless elsewhere Known also from Laurens and Sumter Counties in the Lower Oligocene region, and from Florida. pee Bully Dorey Club 30: 420. noes > ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 309 : SELAGINELLACEA. SELAGINELLA Beauv., Prodr. Aitheog. 101. 1805. : _§.acanthonota Underw., Torreya 2:172. 1902. (Plate XXVIII, — Biss. '2), Sand-hills along the tributaries of the Altamaha River. Tatt- NALL (1852), MONTGOMERY (1987). Extends down the Altamaha to Liberty County. (See Bull. Torrey Club Boe 2 7.) .3) L905.) A form not quite typical (1957) grows on rock outcrops in DooLy County near Arabi. North Carolina to Florida (?), in the pine-barrens. | S. arenicola Underw., Bull. Torrey Club 25: 541. 1808. TATTNALL: Rock outcrops near Ohoopee River (1854) and Pendleton Creek (1560), June, 1903. (See Fern Bull. 13: 15. 1905.) Previously known only from the lime-sink region of Decatur County, and from Lake County, Florida, on Columbia sand. S. apus (L.) Spring, in Mart., Fl. Bras. 17: 119. 1840. _ BERRIEN: Damp woods west and southwest of Tifton, Sep- tember, 1902. More common in the upper fourth of the coastal plain, and northward. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States LYCOPODIACE. LEYCORODIUM Wasp. Piv\ i100. (57 53.- L. Carolinianum L., Sp. Pl. rroq. 1753. Moist pine-barrens; comparatively rare. EMANUEL, TATTNALL, COFFEE (1428), IRWIN, COLQUITT, DECATUR. Extends inland to a few miles beyond Americus, and coastward to Bryan and Charlton Counties, always on Columbia sand. New Jersey to central Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain. L. alopecuroides L., Sp. Pl. 1102. 1753. Moist pine-barrens, sand-hill bogs, etc.; rather common. SCREVEN, BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR. COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, THOMAS, 310 HARPER DECATUR. Scattered nearly all over South Georgia, where- ever there is wet Columbia sand. Long Island to Florida and Mississippi, mostly in nae coastal plain. f L. prostratum Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 33 : 229. 1906. L. pinnatum [Chapm.] Lloyd & Underw., not Lam. Moist pine-barrens; sometimes with the preceding but less common. COFFEE (705), IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, DECA- TUR. I have seen it also in Meriwether, Sumter, Calhoun, Early, and Ware Counties, but never east of the Altamaha River and its tributaries. Known also from the pine-barrens of West Florida and Ala-_ bama. POLYPODIACE. DRYOPTERIS Adans., Fam. 2 : 20, 551. 1763. D. Floridana (Hook.) Kuntze, Rev. 2: 812. 1891. y BERRIEN: Rich damp woods near Tifton, Sept. 29, 1902 (7657). Known also in Sumter, Early, and Thomas (W/7rs. Taylor) Counties, and a few stations in Florida and Alabama. POLYSTICHUM Roth, Tent. Fl. Germ. 3: 69. 1800. P. acrostichoides (Mx.) Schott, Gen. Fil. 2 “(LO: 4) eave Bluffs, etc., at or near our inland boundary (see pp. 102~106). MONTGOMERY (two stations), WILCOx, DOOLY. Associated with Quercus alba at each place, as is usually the case (see Pern wbulls 13522. v905): Nearly throughout temperate Eastern North America. ONOCLEA L. Sp. Pl. 1062. 1753. QO. sensibilis L., 1. c. MONTGOMERY: Oconee River swamp near Mount Vernon, June 30, 1903. Rarely nearer the coast, but frequent in the upper third of the coastal plain. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States bectle of Florida, but scarce in the pine-barren region. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA oli LORINSERIA Presl., Epimel. Bot. 72. 1852. L. areolata (L.) Presl, 1. c. Wocdwardia angustifolia J. E. Smith, Mem. Acad. Tor. 5 : 411. 1793. Wet woods and various other kinds of swamps. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. Prob- ably grows in nearly every county in Georgia. Nearly throughout the Eastern United States. ANCHISTEA Presl, Epimel. Bot. 71. 1852. A. Virginica (L.) Presl, 1. c. Woodwardia Virginica J. E. Smith. Mem. Acad. Tor. 5 : 412. 1793. Moist pine-barrens, open branch-swamps, and various kinds of ponds. Noted in most of the counties. Ranges nearly throughout South Georgia, but never seen farther inland, Nova Scotia to Michigan in the glaciated region, south to central Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the coastal plain. see Rhodora 7:71. 1905. For references to some interesting literature on this species see Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 5:428 (footnote). 1901; Fern Bullies vio! Loos: ASPLENIUM L., Sp. Pl. 1078. 1753. A Filix-foemina (L.) Bernh., Schrad. Neues Jour. Bot. 17:26. 1806. Damp shaded places on bluffs; rare. MONTGOMERY: Stallings’ Bluff; w1tcox: Upper Seven Bluffs. Scattered over South Georgia, but commoner in the upper half of the state. Nearly throughout the north temperate zone in one form or another. A. platyneuron (L.) Oakes; D. C. Eaton, Ferns N. A. 1:24. 1879. Rich or damp woods; rare. With or near the preceding at both places, also at two stations in the upper part of BUL- LOCH (956). Commoner in the upper fourth of the coastal plain, and still more so in Middle Georgia and northward. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. oe HARPER PTERIDIUM Scop., Fl. Carn. 169. 1760. P. aquilinum pseudocaudatum Clute, Fern Bull. 8:39. 1900. (as syn.) Chiefly in dry pine-barrens, less frequently in hammocks or ~ on sand-hills or rocks. Common throughout, and often abundant. Long Island to Florida and Texas. MARGINARIA Bory, Dict. Class. Hist. Nat. 6 : 587. 1824. M. polypodioides (L.) Tidestrom, Torreya 5: 171. 1905. © Polypodium incanum Sw. (For other synonyms see Tidestrom, 1. c.) On angiospermous trees in swamps and hammocks, also on projecting ledges of Altamaha Grit. TATTNALL, MONTGOM- ERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, BERRIEN. Scattered all over the state. Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States and tropical America. — . OSMUNDACEZ. OSMUNDA L., Sp. Pl. 1063. 1753. O. spectabilis Willd. Sp. Pl. 5:98. 1810; Underw., Torreya Bien OOS” In various kinds of swamps; rather 'rare. MONTGOMERY, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. Scattered over the state. Nearly pinodeneue temperate Eastern North America. ee related to the European O. regalis L. O. cinnamomea L., Sp. Pl. 1066. 1753. Moist pine-barrens, branch-swamps, sand-hill bogs, etc.; com- mon in most of the counties in our territory, and in all other parts of Georgia. Throughout the Eastern United States. OPHIOGLOSSACEZ. BOTRYCHIUM Sw., Schrad. Neues Jour. Bot. 18007: 110. 1801. B. obliquum Muhl.; Willd., Sp. Pl. 5:63. 1810. BERRIEN: Rich damp woods near Tifton, Sept. 29, 1902 More frequent in Middle Georgia, but nowhere abundant. Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. — ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 313 The treatment of the cellular cryptogams which constitute ' the remainder of this catalogue is necessarily less complete than _. that of the vascular plants. Their bibliography has not been as carefully investigated as has that of the higher plants since the nomenclature reforms of recent years, and consequently in some cases I have not been able to cite the place of publication cor- rectly. For local distribution in Georgia in most cases I can only cite localities for specimens collected, for I am not suff- ciently familiar with these plants to identify many of them in the field. Most of the mosses have been determined by Mrs. Eliza- beth G. Britton, the hepatics by Miss Caroline C. Haynes, and the fungi by Dr. W. A. Murrill, and their assistance is hereby gratefully acknowledged. Our knowledge of the general distribution of most of these plants is very fragmentary, for they are not usually mentioned in local floras, and consequently many of them are known only from the comparatively few stations where they have been col- ‘lected. For this reason I have not attempted to give the total range in every case. The number of cellular cryptogams known in the region will of course be considerably increased by future field work. It has been my custom while in the field to collect all bryophytes and woody fungi which I was not sure I had already, and there may not be over twice as many of these in the region as are listed here. The fleshy and parasitic fungi remain almost untouched, but it is not likely that they are very numerous, mainly for the same reasons noted by Kearney (Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 5: 314. 1900) on the coast of North Carolina and Lloyd & Tracy (Bull. Torrey Club 28:81. r901) on the coast of Mississippi. The lack of shade in the pine-barrens is unfavorable to the growth of a large number of cryptogams, from ferns down. Lichens I have never collected at all, but they are fairly abundant in hammocks and some other places. BRYORE YA. MUSCI. SEMATOPHYLLUM Mitt., Jour. Linn. Soc. 8:5. 1864. - 9. adnatum (Mx.) E. G. Britton, Bryologist 5:65. 1902. On trunks of angiospermous trees. COFFEE (1434)). Also 314 HARPER in Sumter, Clinch, and Lowndes Counties, in other parts of the coastal plain. Eastern United States ISOPTERYGIUM Mitt. I. micans (Sw.) E. G. Britton, Bryologist 5:67. 1902. On damp decaying logs, in shade. coFFEE (144Q9a; also with 2046c). Also in Sumter and Randolph Counties, in the upper third of the coastal plain. New Jersey to Florida and Louisiana. RHYNCHOSTEGIUM. R. serrulatum (Hedw.) Jaeg. & Sauerb. Habitat similar to that of the preceding.. BULLOCH (SS4C, in part). Also in Randolph County. Eastern North America. THUIDIUM Br. & Sch. T. sp. BERRIEN: On roots of trees in non-alluvial swamp of Little River west of Tifton (17700a). LEUCODON Schwaegr. Suppl. 2:1. 1816. L. julaceus minor COFFEE: On bark of Acer rubrum, on bank of Sevonieae Mile Creek (1434a). HEDWIGIA Ebrh., Hann. Mag. 1781. H. albicans viridis (Schimp.) TATTNALL: On cliffs of Altamaha Grit near Pendleton Creek (7860b). This genus is rare in the coastal plain, on account of the scarcity of dry non-calcareous rocks which it prefers. THELIA Sull. T. asprella (Schimp.) Sull. TATTNALL: On ledge of Altamaha Grit near Ohoopee River - (1857a); COFFEE: On the ground in hammocks and sand- hammocks (1434d). Eastern North America. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 315 LESKEA Hedw. 1, denticulata Sull. COLQUITT: On rough bark of old dead tree in Ocklocknee Creek swamp near Moultrie (1673a). Middle and Southeastern United States. FONTINALIS L. F. flaccida R. & C., Bull. Soc. Bot. Belg. 27!:134. pl. 9; Bot. Gaz. 13: 201. pl. 19. 1888. TATTNALL: About low-water mark in rocky bed of Ohoopee River at the shoals west of Reidsville (2r51a). I have collected what has been identified as the same thing in a cypress pond near Brunswick, a totally different habitat. BRACHELYMA Schimp., Syn. Musc. Europ. ed. 2. 557. 1876. B. robustum (Cardot) E. G. Britton, Bryologist 7:48. May 1904. Crypheadelphus robustus Cardot, Rev. Bryol. 31:8., 1904; Brotherus in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam.1° : 731. 1905. On trees and bushes subject to inundation, along all three classes of streams. TATTNALL: Ohoopee River west of Reidsville; CoFFEE: Ocmulgee River at Barrow’s Bluff; WILcox: abundant along branches about five miles southeast of Rochelle. Our largest moss (Sphagnum excepted). Occurs also in Jefferson, Laurens, Pulaski, and Miller Counties, in the upper third of the coastal plain. (The species is based on material from the two counties last mentioned. ) Not known elsewhere. TETRAPLODON Br. & Sch. T. australis Sull. & Lesq. Mosses U.S. 53. 1856. coLguitT: On old cow dung in moist pine-barrens north of Moultrie, Sept. 24, 1902 (z66Sa). Prehistoric habitat unknown. New Jersey to Florida, in the coastal plain. . - RHIZOGONIUM Brid., Bryol. Univ. 2:664. 1827. R. spiniforme (Hedw.) Bruch, Flora 29:134. 1846. COFFEE: Abundant on rotten logs and bases of trees in non- 316 HARPER alluvial swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek, February, 1904 (2046a). Also in Lowndes County. Otherwise known only from Florida, Alabama (Mobile Co.), Louisiana, and some tropical countries. FUNARIA Schreb. F. hygrometrica (L.) Sibth., Fl. Oxon. 288. 1794. BULLOCH: Wet woods near Bloys (&8&4c, in part). Cosmopolitan, but apparently not native everywhere. PHYSCOMITRIUM Brid. P. turbinatum (Mx.) Brid. BULLOCH: With the preceding (884a). Alsoin Clayton County, Middle Georgia. Throughout most of the United States. SCHLOTHEIMIA Brid., Mant. Musc. 114. 1819. S. Sullivantii C. Mull. On trees, especially Magnolias, in hammocks and swamps. MONTGOMERY, BERRIEN, CoLguiTT. Also in Effingham and Brooks Counties, nearer the coast. South Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. PTYCHOMITRIUM Br. & Sch. P. incurvum (Schwaegr.) Sull. TATTNALL: Ledge of Altamaha Grit near Ohoopee River (7857b). Rare and inconspicuous. Ranges northward to Canada. GRIMMIA Ebrh., Beitr. 1; 168. 1787. G. leucophza Grev., Act. Soc. Wern. 4: fl. 6. TATTNALL: Cliffs of Altamaha Grit near Ohoopee River (1858a) and Pendleton Creek, June, 1903. Probably not previously reported from the coastal plain. More common on granite outcrops in Middle Georgia. North to New York and Ohio. Also in the Mediterranean region. LEUCOBRYUM Hampe, Flora 20: 282. 1837. L. glaucum (L.) Schimp. TATTNALL: Cliffs of Altamaha Grit near Pendleton Creek, ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA Sly June 26, 1903, Quite common in some other parts of _ Georgia, usually on bases of trees. DICRANUM Hedw., Fund. 2: 91. 1782. D. Bonjeani DeNot. ia BERRIEN: Sand-hills of Little River southwest of Tifton, Sept. 29, 1902. Also on Cumberland Island. SPHAGNUM L. §. cuspidatum [Ehrh.] Russ. & Warnst. coFFEE: Non-alluvial swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek near Gaskin’s Spring; abundant (694a, 2203a, in fruit). Eastern North America. Var. angustilimbatum Warnst. popDGE: Sand-hill pond in sand-hills of Gum Swamp Creek east of Eastman (7976b). Also in Okefinokee Swamp. _§. Fitzgeraldi immersum Warnst. COFFEE: Shallow sand-hill pond in sand-hills of Satilla River south of Douglas (1448a). S. Garberi L. & J. popGE: Edge of sand-hill pond east of Eastman (1976c). S. Harperi Warnst., Bot. Centralb. Beihefte 16: 250. 1904. DoDGE: With the preceding (1976d, type). Only locality known. S. tenerum [Aust.] Warnst., Hedwigia 29: 194. 1890. BERRIEN: Sand-hill bog near Little River, Sept. 29, 1902. Also in Charlton County S. macrophyllum Bernh. Ponds, and swamps of endemic (7. e., not muddy) streams. SCREVEN, COFFEE, IRWIN, COLQUITT. Also in pine-barren ponds in Sumter County. New Jersey to Florida and Alabama, in the coastal plain. S. cymbifolium Ehrh. Non-alluvial swamps. BULLOCH (S29a), COFFEE (2203), in 3 fruit). Also in Sumter and Decatur Counties and doubt- less elsewhere in the state. Cosmopolitan. 318 HARPER S. acutifolium Ehrh. IRWIN: Swamp near Fitzgerald, July 16, 1902 (1420a). HEPATIC. = ANTHOCEROS L., Sp. Pl. 1139. 1753. A. Carolinianus Mx., FI. BULLOCH: Wet woods near Bloys (884b). Scattered over the state. FRULLANIA Raddi, Atti Soc. Ital. Sci. Mod. 18: (9). 1818. F. Kunzei Lehm. & Lindenb. TATTNALL: Rocks near Ohoopee River (1S60a). COFFEE: On bark of rotten log in non-alluvial swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek (2046d). Also in Walton, Sumter, and Lowndes Counties. F. Caroliniana Sull. COFFEE: With the preceding (2046e). Also in Sumter and McIntosh Counties. ARCHILEJEUNEA [Spruce] Schiffn. A. clypeata (Schw.) Schiffn.; Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam. Ee OnE LOO ss On trunks of angiospermous trees, mostly inswamps. COFFEE (7434¢), CoLQuiTT (7677a). Also in’ Clarke) \Wiamenelar Echols, and Thomas Counties. ~ Middle and Southeastern United States. MASTIGOLEJEUNEA. M. auriculata (Hook. & Wils.) Schiffn., 1. c. 129. 1893. CcoLguiTT: On rough bark of old dead tree in swamp of Och- locknee Creek near Moultrie (7673b). Also in Lowndes County. Ranges west to Louisiana, in the coastal plain. Also in tropical America. HARPALEJEUNEA. H. ovata [Hook.) Schiffn., 1. c. 127. 1893. COFFEE: On bank of Magnolia glauca in non-alluvial swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek near Gaskin’s Spring, February, 1904 (with 20467, 2047a, and 2047)). Virginia to Georgia. Also in western Europe. | ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 319 LEJEUNEA Lib. L. Americana [Lindb.] Evans, Mem. Torrey Club 8:154. 1902. COFFEE: On bark of rotten log of Gordonia in non-alluvial swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek, Feb. 5, 1904 (2046, in part). North Carolina to Florida and Texas. Also in tropical America PORELLA L., Sp. Pl. 1106. 1753. P. pinnata L. On bark of trees subject to inundation, along rivers and creeks. MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, COLQUITT. Scattered over the state. Temperate Eastern North America. Also in Europe and Cuba (Mohr). RADULA Dumort., Comm. Bot. 112. 1822. R. sp. (undetermined). | COFFEE: On bark of rotten log of Gordonia in non-alluvial swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek near Gaskin’s Spring, Feb. 5, 1904 (2046c). SCAPANIA Dumort., Ree d’Obs. Jung. 14. 1835. S. nemorosa (L.) Dumort., |. c. Swamps, bluffs, and rock outcrops; terrestrial. TATTNALL (1860C), MONTGOMERY (1863¢), COLQUITT (1674a). Prob- ably commoner in the upper parts of the state. Europe and temperate North America. BAZZANIA 5S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1: 704. 1821. B. trilobata (L.) S. F. Gray, l. c. : COFFEE: On rotten wood and bases of trees in non-alluvial swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek near Gaskin’s Spring, Feb. 5, 1904 (2046b). Notseen elsewhere in Georgia. Ranges north to New England. Also in Europe. KANTIA 8. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1: 706. 182r. K. Trichomanis (L.) S. F. Gray, l. c. MONTGOMERY: Perpendicular clayey bank of ravine near Stallings’ Bluff on the Oconee River (1863b). Also in Chattahoochee, Stewart, and Lowndes Counties, in similar situations. 320 HARPER ODONTOSCHISMA Dumort. O. prostratum (Sw.) Trevis. Chiefly on roots of trees in swamps (not muddy) and ravines. MONTGOMERY (I863a), COFFEE, IRWIN (I4I5a), BERRIEN (1699a), COLQUITT (1674), in part). Also in Chattahoochee, Lowndes, and Clinch Counties, and in Okefinokee Swamp. CEPHALOZIA Dumort., Rec. d’Obs. Jung. 18. 1835. C. Virginiana Spruce. COLQuITT: On small rotten log in swamp of Ochlocknee Creek near Moultrie (1674b, in part). Also in Lowndes County. Virginia to Louisiana. PLAGIOCHILA Dumort., Rec. d’Obs. Jung. 14. 1835. P. Ludoviciana Sull COFFEE: On bark of Magnolia glauca in non-alluvial swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek near Gaskin’s Spring (1448b, 2047). Also in Clarke County. West to Louisiana (Mohr). P. undata Sull. © COFFEE: With the preceding (1448c, 2047a). Also in Clarke, Chattahoochee, and Brooks Counties. PALLAVICINIA 5S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1: 775. 1821. P. Lyellii (Hook.) On the ground in non-alluvial swamps, etc. COFFEE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. Scattered over the state; one of our commonest hepatics. MARCHANTIA L., Sp. Pl. 1137. 1753. M. potymorpuHa L., l. c. TATTNALL: Fruiting abundantly along railroad near Ohoopee, in a place where some cross-ties had. been recently burned, June 26, 1903. Natura] habitat uncertain. Cosmopolitan. THALLOPHYTA. FUNGI. ASTREUS Morgan, Jour. Cin. Soc. Nat. Hist. 12:19. 1889 A. hygrometricus (Pers.) Morgan, l. c. 20. Sand-hills. COFFEE. DODGE Also in Lee County. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA BVA . LENTINUS. L. sp. On rotten logs. witcox, coLtouitr. Also in Columbia County. SCHIZOPHYLLUM Fr. S. commune Fr. COFFEE: On fallen trunk of Magnolia glauca in swamp of _ Seventeen Mile Creek near Gaskin’s Spring (694b). BOLETUS L. B. Ananas M. A. Curtis, Am. Jour. Sci. I]. 6:351. 1848. COFFEE: Rather dry pine-barrens near Douglas, July 31, 1902. Also in Meriwether County. ELFVINGIA Karst., Finlands Basidsv. 333. 1880. E. fasciata (Sw.) Murrill, Bull. Torrey Club 30:298. 1903. DODGE: On dying trunk of Magnolia grandiflora at base of sand-hills of Gum Swamp Creek east of Eastman (1976a). Also in Randolph County. COLTRICIA S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1:644. 1821. C. parvula (Klotzsch) Murrill, Bull. Torrey Club 31:345. 1904. Among ashes in dry pine-barrens. IRWIN, BERRIEN (1696a). Also in Bartow and Glynn Counties. Pennsylvania to Georgia and Alabama. INONOTUS Karst., Medd. Soc. Faun. & Fl. Fenn. 5: 39. 1879. I. amplectens Murrill, Bull. Torrey Club 31:600. 1904. TELFAIR: On living twigs of Astmina parviflora in swamp of Ocmulgee River about a mile above Lumber City (rggo0a, type). Not known elsewhere. CORIOLUS Quel., Ench. Fung. 175. 1886; Murrill, Bull. Torrey (Clheilo) 6778 WLI eV C. versicolor (lu.) Quel., 1. c. On dead trees and fallen logs. COFFEE (693a), DOOLY (1962a) Scattered over the state. C. pargamenus (Fr.) Pat., Tax. Hymen. 94. 1900. - BULLOCH: On small dead tree in wet woods near Bloys (884d). Also in Bibb and Chattahoochee Counties. one HARPER ALG BATRACHOSPERMUM Roth. B. vagum keratophytum (Bory) Sirdt. (Determined by Dr. M. A. Howe.) BERRIEN: Swift-flowing branch in small non-alluvial swamp or bog in sand-hills of Allapaha River about three miles east of Allapaha, May 5, 1904 (2189a). SPIROGYRA. ©: Sp. (according to Dr. TE. Hazen): COFFEE: Shallow cypress pond at outer edge of sand-hills of Seventeen Mile Creek near Chatterton July 29, 1902 (1453). MYXOMYCETES. . LYCOGALA Mx. L. epidendrum (L.) Buxb. On rotten logs in swamps. MONTGOMERY, COLQUITT (1676a). Also in Brooks County, south of our limits. , STEMONITIS Gled. S. sp. BULLOCH: On pine stump in dry pine-barrens near Bloys (984a). Possibly not indigenous SUMMARY OF THE CATALOGUE. The total number of families, genera, and species and varieties at present known to occur naturally in the Altamaha Grit region may be tabulated as follows: ee Species and Groups Families Genera | SOs Gamopetalee 31 m2 238 Archichlamydez 58 138 260 Monocotyledones 23 80 23 Gymnosperme I 3 9 Pteridophyta 6 I4 IQ Musci 20 28 Hepatice » Ts 17 Thallophyta TZ 13} Total dicotyledons- 89 260 498 Total angiosperms 112 340 Gata Total spermatophytes rng 343 720 Total vascular plants IIQ 357 730 Total cellular cryptogams 47 58 Grand total 404 7907 ke | a The 75 weeds which have already been listed separately (pages 114, 115) are not included in this enumeration, and all the following statistics will refer to native plants only, unless otherwise specified. How nearly complete this catalogue is can only be conjectured. Considering the uniformity of the environmental conditions in different parts of the region, the open character of the forests, the conspicuousness of many of the species (at least 300 being large enough to be recognizable from a moving train), and the fact that I have passed through every county in the region more than once, it is not likely that more than 25 per cent. of the vascular plants (according to our present conceptions of species) haveescapedme. The total number of spermatophytes probably does not exceed 1000, pteridophytes 25, and bryophytes too. The number of thallophytes may ultimately run up to several hundred, but it is not likely that they are in the majority here as they are in most other parts of the world. 323 324 HARPER Two interesting things are brought out by the above table. The uniformity of the flora is shown by the small number of species; only 739 vascular plants known in 11,000 square miles. There are several states in the Union with a smaller area which contain nearly twice as many species. Second, the comparative newness of the flora is probably correlated with the large pro- portion of mcnocotyledons, which here constitute 30 per cent. of the total angiosperms. All parts of the coastal plain and glaciated region which have been sufficiently studied seem to have very nearly thesame proportion, while in the Metamorphic and Paleozoic regions the monocotvledons average only about Dis Ose Ceiaub,,” 3 Among the vascular plants it will be noticed that there are three times as many genera as families, and twice as many species as genera. Largest families. The twelve largest families (each of which contains more than 1.5 per cent. of the total spermatophytic flora), and the number of native genera and species in each, are as follows: Composite (including Cichoriacez), 45 genera, 88 species; Cyperacez, 12 genera, 79 species; Graminee, 21 genera, 55 species; Leguminose (including Cesalpiniaceee and Mimo- sacez), 24 genera, 43 species; Scrophulariacee, 10 genera, 24 species; Ericaceze (including Vacciniacee, Pyrolacee, and Cleth- race), 12 genera, 23 species; Labiatz, 9 genera, 18 species; Cupulifere, 2 genera, 16 species; Umbellifere, 7 genera,14 species; Onagracee, 4 genera, 13 species; Euphorbiacez, 7 genera, 12 species; Orchidacez, 5 genera, rr species. The relations of these twelve largest families to the nineteen typical habitats previously described may be summarized as follows. In the table below, the number immediately following each family name indicates the number of native species, and the numbers in the columns the number represented in each habitat. The last column, which does not strictly belong to this table, but is added here for convenience, shows the ratio of each family to the total number of spermatophytes. 1 See Torreya 5: 207-210. 1905. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 325 0) soyAydoyeurteds | ammnanocnoanoo re Tl@ JO “yusc1eg AMAMHHHOAHHE : ca 4 [e) ~ S]N]q-IOATYy BS GG) MMSE SSeese I) Te Sse 5 on sxspoWmUtTe Hi mt! | ammatee 5d Pi H 3 v a) syoouleYy-pues ELIS Gon ll) Bote sells ut ee 2s Oo spuod jj1y-pues etfs Saleh te) DAM aD a SES) 3 2s : .|sdurems TerAnite-vON | Pt Pod ha Dees 1s : 3 4 s30q [tu-pues HHAtHH | A ] Ways} S) (o) » - < “Op 9Jelpoutiezuy cahwl Vi i tl esti) fe ‘ za ; OmmMmoneHH OAT! ODN am STTEU-Pues I S at! q o ‘Op yueudreosqy hE tet th i WT SSou 82 = g ‘op semoreys | qanelilolliinng 5 ry spuod sseidAég | SSIS Sin aed a eae B So sIoAtl Appuyl SPL GHD oCieEGy se USS GIRS. G < ssepp pue jo ss9ary | SR Us eh ceseill ais a Ln | sduteMs-39019 | Hi twl ad Pe pHs 2 we) = + GH sdureMs-youeig | ntMnNAH{ A] Inv+x 4 mrMAr~mM) | | Aanoa n sueiieq-oeutd 4stoy iS) Hoo fl F y 2 5 4 S : otana Ne} Op eyeIpeutieqyuy | 2 mA gO A a nO ‘o a Ve) sueiieq-eutd Arq | Shh oat ie aS 3 g o sdoioyno x90 Eel GAG N ial Fok MCL Mise) iS 45) ° q a im oO a S a | oS n g H o st bg) 25) < 0 8 HmB TOTO is On @ & Og HO pH 7 alte} S| s= le “Hop 8 (3) B na, a gee’ oesgesege | 24 es Bs ghe shes gseon One SER OGRE OSU EAE a n Al 85 WS 33's o EF oe z BeereegeGeere | » © maHon ot 3 OpnANPONACOOGS “ea, ey = ; 2 3B < i= + 2 Ov Leal 326 HARPER Many interesting conclusions can be drawn from this table, but only a few of them will be mentioned here. It will be noticed first of all perhaps that Cyperacee occur in all the habitats, Composite in all but one, Ericaceze in all but three, Grami- nee in all but four, Scrophulariacee in all but five, and Orchi- dacez in only six. It happens that intermediate pine-barrens is the only habitat in which all these families are repre- sented. If we add together the figures in each row and divide by the number of species in the corresponding family, we shall get a ratio representing roughly the adaptability to different habitats of the species in each family. In this respect Ericacez lead, with a ratio of 2.87, and Graminez come last, with 1.22. This is perhaps correlated with the fact that Graminez are more characteristic of old regions and Ericacee of new regions, in temperate Eastern North America at least. The ratio for the whole Altamaha Grit region was shown on page 108 to be about 1.68. It will be noticed further that Orchidacee do not usually associate with Cupulifere, Leguminose, or Euphorbiacez, and that the habitats in which the three last-mentioned families do not occur contain nearly twice as many monocotyledons (see page 107) as those in which they do. This may indicate that these three families are comparatively highly specialized with respect to the orders to which they belong. To eliminate from the above table differences due to the greater number of species in some habitats than in others, we should express the figures in each column in terms of their ratios to the number at the bottom of the column. Doing this, we would find that while Composit2 are most numerous in dry pine-barrens, they are most prominent in intermediate pine- barrens where they constitute 21% of the flora. Likewise Leguminosz constitute about 17% of the flora of dry pine- barrens and sand-hills. Cyperacez are much more numerous in moist pine-barrens than anywhere else, but most prominent in cypress and escarpment ponds. Graminez, too, have nearly twice as many representatives in moist pine-barrens as in any other one habitat, but are more prominent in the shallow pine- . ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA Oot barren ponds. Euphorbiaceze, like Leguminose, are most numerous and prominent in dry pine-barrens and on sand-hills, ‘Largest genera. The twenty-one largest genera in the Altamaha Grit region seem to be Rhynchospora, with 27 species; Carex, with 17; Quercus, 14; Panicum, 14; Xyrts, 11; Polygala, 11; Lud- wigia, 10; Eupatorium, 10; Juncus, 10° Gerardia, 8; Ascleptas, 8; Sabbatia, 8; Scleria, 8; Eleocharis, 8; Hypericum, 7; Andropogon, - 7; Ilex, 7; Cyperus, 7; Laciniaria, 6; Rhexta, 6; Pinus, 6. The relations of these 21 genera to the 19 typical habitats are shown in the following table. The names of the genera are arranged systematically, each followed by the number of species just mentioned. Under each habitat is the number of species of each of these genera which it contains. Pinus is represented in all the habitats, J/ex in all but three, and Rhynchospora in all but six. No Quercus ever associates with a Juncus or Eleocharis in our territory. Xyris is represented in every group in-which Quercus is not, and associates with Quercus in only one. Quercus would seem to be essentially an old and mesophytic genus. It does not occur in any habitat with over 35% of monocotyledons, but it does occur in all that have less than 20%. The proportion of monocotyledons in the nine groups in which it does occur is about 20%, and in the remaining ten, 37%. These figures would be just about reversed for Juncus and Xyris, and still more so for Eleocharis. Sabbatia, Ludwigia, Rhexia, and Hypericum, characteristic dicotyledonous coastal plain genera, show a marked liking for the society of monocotyledons, while Carex, Cyperus, and Pant- cum, cosmopolitan monocotyledonous genera, lean a little the other way. Commonest species. The 45 commonest species in the region, grouped according to size, and arranged as nearly as possible according to relative frequence in each group, are about as follows. (The left-hand columns are to be read first.) TREES. Pinus palustris Pinus Elliotti -Quercus Catesbzi Magnolia glauca Nyssa biflora Taxodium imbricarium 328 HARPER SHN]G-IEATy H 1 [oo syOOWIUIE FT A ese a syOOUUTeY-pues Pate fe i Se ee spuod * ][ty-pues bh eer) sce yl mes | Sdurems [erAn|[e-uo0N| VO TW de Bei tit Le ssoq ][Ty-pues Ro te Werner vie nh ee ‘Op a4eIpeutiezuy Deh Wolk To ete Sttsbiaiy} so en s][TU-pues aeHHol | tl} i tl tea at at dle] ‘Op jueudreosq Lia ai) ew | Lol ‘Oop 198MOTTeEYyS HHH [| HANAAH | SH HAHAH] wm] | a spuod ssordég | Pl tt Haet hme |} ama wink | w]e sroary ApH | Wee ee SSRs ets eS iol ih ll ibs ssefo puz jo szoary | Het Uo A eee Say ema poi bh fps sdurems-901) | PUSS eh eee ey tah yh bt jes sdwems-youeig Pe eee A] Peal aaa] a sueiteg-suld 4Stoy\, HMMM MiNnd oe | ae Or Sas e ‘Op a}erpeul1szuy HOmAAH AMON AH | pouea i! |= susiteq-ourd Arq mame] | tl] Holl] | Hal scl sdoiojno 390% PP Wa Sey ey ee Deeg, ih ty) n & > Ss N ° cal a [as] ~ a ie uw Ne} 9 eS a Ecco 4 mg SH A. nn" 8 SS a Qe S A Sy ay meee ae bo < BES G85 BH ww aH Gu Qlo Soo Rs Wa Ss iw 5] 0 asess& a eee SO S-o we oO] Sn wn eo HO Oly ASGVOr KS Hon SHES Om HIS a G55 ne sadn e SE Eka ee f5 ale 13) —_ oc o AROFG IMAM O] EM One aon ] (2) fm] m em) rs) = S ar ao 2 s 5 A 2 a = nN 3 iB S ‘= Bate = 2 i lao} fe) s + ee eines ee : | is tabs pte OC tee : OS, ree | | 2 A : Teale Gee ae rare peter | lias e l : 2 sete a4 | : : —f — — — 40881 = 2 2 | | 4 Co) | aoe Oe eae in aera ner ee oven Nie maaan nae alle eg ae ns, mel ee eee ee So ph ake —_— —_—_ —_— ve 6 2 ! iE =| O48! e) cE Se We : a a eee = aH : 3 I ae ola eel gee a fs é Prise tal ee GBI Be = = ee Sel i | lt BPE z ee } s | | | | SUS, Olmert ere yp | ape ees aes | oe g 8 ¢- —--J--!'~ ~+ ~~ joes Zo Bb ai j | a 8 a coe a eae pal ' | Oran : i SS Oe eiiaes e e l a = a ae Se Sy, Bo Bp ce Se at Se ae : 1 : 7 oo! 4 Se se E - Se a Stell ae S a a ‘i 342 HARPER the names that Linneus gave them, and also illustrates the great activity of the nomenclature reformers in the last two decades. (The differences between two such curves are probably less for this region than they would be for almost any of the older-settled and more densely populated parts of the civilized world.) | CONCLUSIONS. The most important points brought out in the foregoing pages seem to be the following: The most satisfactory system of geographical classification of the vegetation of temperate Eastern North America is one based on geology. The coastal plain, which is defined on strictly geological grounds, is probably the most distinct natural subdivision of temperate Eastern North America, differing notably from all ‘other subdivisions in soil, topography. and geological history, and to a corresponding extent in its flora. The Aitamaha Grit region of Georgia is a centrally located and otherwise fairly typical portion of the coastal plain, in many respects homogenous and in some respects unique. Its bound- aries are fairly well defined, and its flora differs perceptibly from that of adjacent regions. The comparatively recent submergence of this region, which has been demonstrated by purely geological evidence, is borne out by the phytcgeograpnical evidence herein set forth. Owing to the comparative newness of the soil, and other considerations, open pine forests which give little shade are eminently characteristic of the region. With this state of affairs are correlated marked adaptations for reduction of transpiration in most of the plants inhabiting the region. Similar types of soil and topography recur in all parts of the region, the climate is essentially uniform throughout, and the final details of plant distribution seem to be governed mainly by the amount of water in the soil—which in turn depends on topography—and by variations in the thickness of the mantle of Columbia sand. All natural features of this region seem remarkably stable, ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 343 and any changes which may be taking place in the flora through natural causes must be extremely slow. The changes due to civilization have hitherto been much less marked than in most other parts of temperate Eastern North Atnierica. The species indigenous to the region are in general rather re- stricted in range, most of them being confined to the coastal plain, as far as known, and about one-third of them to the pine- _ barren portion of the coastal plain. A few range southward into the tropics (and most of these are quite variable in habitat), but probably none cross the Atlantic Ocean or the Great Plains. As a rule the most widely distributed species of vascular plants occupy habitats which are likewise widely distributed in Eastern North America, and belong to taxonomic groups relatively high in the scale. As a whole the species composing this flora were mostly made known to science during the nineteenth century. But the woody _ plants have been known relatively much longer than the herbs, and the trees somewhat longer than the shrubs. BIBLIOGRAPHY. t. Works in which the plants or other natural features of the Altamaha Grit region are described or mentioned (though in most of these no dis- tinction is made between the region under consideration and those ad- joining it). Arranged chronologically. 1797. Abbot, John The natural history of the rarer lepidopterous insects of Georgia. Including . . . the plants on which they feed. Edited by J. E. Smith, who wrote the descriptions of new species. Folio. 104 plates, with text. London. Some if not most of the plants figured in this work are believed to have come from the northeastern portion of the Altamaha Grit region. 1817. Elliott, Stephen. Sketch of the botany of South Carolina and Georgia. Vol. 1. Charleston, 1816-1821. Contains on page 286 the original description of Sabbatia gentianoides from Bulloch County. Several plants described as having been collected near Louisville by James Jackson may have also come from the Altamaha Grit region, as has been pointed out elsewhere. 1833 (?). Nuttall, Thomas. Description of a new species of Sarracenia. Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. 4: 49-51. pl. T. Mentions its occurrence in Tattnall County. See Torreya 4: 140. 1904. 344 HARPER 1849. White, George. Statistics of the State of Georgia. 624 +77 pp. and map. Savannah. 1855. White, George. Historical Collections of Georgia. 745 pp New York. The most valuable features of these two works are the detailed descrip- tions of the counties. The supplement of the former contains among other things an alleged state flora, but as no localities are given for any of the species it has no obvious connection with that part of the state under consideration. : 1876. Janes, Thomas P. Handbook of Georgia. vii +256 pp. and map. Atlanta (published by the state agricultural department). A descriptive work, somewhat similar in scope to the preceding. Con- tains a list of woody plants, prepared by State Geologist George q Little, but there is no evidence that any of these were observed in the Altamaha Grit region. 1881. MHilgard, E. W. The later Tertiary of the Gulf of Mexico. Am. joursscry Ml 22258 o5- pleas. (aap): The map shows an area of ‘‘ Miocene (?) sandstone”’ in Georgia, corres- ponding approximately with the present known area of the Altamaha Grit, but there is no reference to it in the text. It was probably inserted on the authority of Dr. Loughridge (see next title). 1884. Loughridge, R.H. Report on the cotton production of the state of Georgia. Tenth Census U. S., 6:259-450. Map. A valuable compendium of the geological, geographical, and agricultural features of the state, which has scarcely been surpassed since. The boundaries of the Altamaha Grit are located fairly accurately, ex- cept toward the west, and some outcrops of the rock are described. A bottomless ‘“‘lime-sink’’ (see page 24 of this work) is mentioned in the description of Bulloch County. 1885. Henderson, J. T. The Commonwealth of Georgia. pp. i-viti, 3-184, 184a, 184b, 185-379. 15 colored double-page maps and 13 text figures. Atlanta. (Constitutes part 2 of vol. 11 of Publications of Georgia Department of Agriculture.) This also contains many notes on the geology, geography, and agri- culture of the state, largely copied from the preceding. 1892. Dall, W. H., & Harris, G. D. Correlation papers.—Neocene. Bull. 84, U. S. Geol. Surv. ; Altamaha Grit described on pages 81 and 82, with references to some previous literature on the subject. 1893. Foerste, Aug. F. Studies on the Chipola Miocene of Bainbridge, Georgia, and of Alum Bluff, Florida, with an attempt at correlation of certain Grand Gulf Group beds with marine Miocene beds eastward. Am. Jour. Sci. II]. 46:244-254. Oct. 1893. ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 345 In the same journal for December 1893 and July 1894 the discussion is continued by the same author and Prof. Raphael Pumpelly, but without special reference to the Altamaha Grit. See Bull. Torrey Club 32:150 (footnote). 1905. 1896. Nesbitt, R. T. Georgia: her resources and possibilities. Pp. Xvili+475. Atlanta (published by the state agricultural depart- ment). : A work of similar scope to Henderson’s ‘‘Commonwealth’’ (1885), containing fewer maps and more illustrations (most of the latter half-tones), and about the same geographical matter, with the ad- dition of county descriptions. 1898. McCallie, S. W. A preliminary report on the artesian-well system of Georgia.. Bull. 7, Geol. Surv. Ga. 214 pp. Illustrated. Contains some valuable notes on the stratigraphy and topography of the coastal plain, but without mentioning the Altamaha Grit by name. 1899. Gannett, Henry. A dictionary of altitudes in the United States. Third edition. Bull. 160, U. S. Geol. Surv. Pages 122-131 refer to Georgia, and include several stations in the Altamaha Grit region. 1899. U.S. Geological Survey. (Precise levels from Atlanta to Bruns- wick). 20th Annual Report, 1:380-383. From about Cochran to Jesup this line of levels passes through the Altamaha Grit region, and the figures given show in a striking manner its elevation above contiguous regions. 1900. Coulter, J. M., & Rose, J. N. Monograph of the North Amer- feqnnUimibelliferse: Contr WU. ts. Nat. Herb. 7:1-256. Dec. 31, Ig0Oo. On page 49 are cited two specimens of Eryngium integrifolium Ludo- vicianum, both from the Altamaha Grit region. Igor. Beadle, C. D., & Boynton, F. E. Revision of the species of Mar- shallia. Biltmore Bot. Stud, 1: 3-10. pl. r-11. April 8, 1901. Contains description of M. ramosa, n. sp., based on a single collection from the Altamaha Grit region by C. L. Boynton. Igor. Small, John K. The rediscovery of Elliottia. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 2:113-114. Aug. 1901. Copied in American Gardening 22 AOS Se Pum shay eGo. Refers to the finding of this rare plant in Bulloch County. Igor. Stevens, O. B., & Wright, R. F. Georgia, Historical and Indus- trial. 955 pp., several maps, and numerous illustrations. Atlanta (published by the state agricultural department). A successor to the works of Janes, Henderson, and Nesbitt (mentioned above), and much more comprehensive. 346 HARPER 1902. Sargent, C. S. Elliottia racemosa. Silva N. A. 14:31. pl. 712. 1903. Small, John.K. Flora of the Southeastern United States. xii + 1370 pp) New York, “july 22: 1g08: Reviewed by Beadle in Torreya 3: 125-127. 1903; Pollard in Plant . World, 6: 192-195. 1903; Clute in Fern Bull. 111: 27-128. 1903 ; Coville in Science II. 18: 626-627. Nov. 13, 1903; and Baker in Jour. Bot. 42: 56-58. 1904. Contains descriptions of the following new species based wholly or partly on material from the Altamaha Grit region, collected in Bulloch County in 1901:—Eriocaulon lineare, Siphonychia pauct- flora, Polygala Harperi, and Sabbatia Harperi.. But the type- localities are not designated with sufficient accuracy to show that the plants came from this region, : 1904. Warnstorf, C. Neue europaische und. exotische Moose. Bot. Centralb. Beihefte 16: 237-252. The last species described in this paper is Sphagnum Harpert, based on a single collection from the Altamaha Grit region. 1904. U.S. Geological Survey. Report of progress of stream measure- ments for the calendar year 1903. Part JI. Southern Atlantic, eastern Gulf of Mexico, and eastern Mississippi River drainage. Water Supply and Irrigation paper No. 08. On pages 71-84 are some statistics of the flow of the Canoochee and Ohoopee Rivers in and near the Altamaha Grit region. 1904. Murrill, W. A. The Polyporacee of North America. IX. Inonotus, Sesia, and monotypic genera. Bull. Torrey Club 31: 593- 610. Nov. 1904. Contains description of Inonotus amplectens, n. sp., based on a single collection from the Altamaha Grit region. 1905. U.S. Department of Agriculture. (Annual summaries, Georgia section of climate and crop service of the Weather Bureau, for 1904 and several preceding years.) Reports from several stations in the Altamaha Grit region are included, and have been used in compiling the climatic data in this work. ‘I905. Ames, Oakes. Contributions toward a monograph of the American species of Spiranthes. Orchidacee 1:113-156. April 8, 1905. Cites a specimen of S. Beckit from the vicinity of Lumber City, pre- sumably collected by C. L. Boynton. | 1905. Bush, B.F. The North American species of Puirena. Rep. Mo. Bot. Cont 16:87—99. . Cites a specimen of F. hispida from Tifton (mo. 665). 1905. Fippin, E. O., & Drake, J. A. Soil survey of the Bainbridge area, Georgia. Field operations of the Bureau of Soils, U. 5. Dept. Agriculture, for 1904. 25 pp.andmap. July, 1905. The area mapped is all in Decatur County, and about half of it is located Se ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 347: in the Altamaha Grit region near its southwestern end. The re- mainder of the survey covers portions of the Lower Oligocene, Chat- tahoochee, and Uppermost Oligocene regions. 1905. Derry, J.T., & Wright, R.F. Georgia’s resources and advantages. too pp. (including numerous full-page illustrations) and several maps. Atlanta (published by the state department of agriculture). _ This is practically a much condensed edition of Stevens & Wright’s “Georgia, Historical and Industrial,’’ which was published four years earlier. 1905. Rose, J. N. Two new Umbelliferous plants from the coastal plain of Georgia. Proc. U. 5.’ Nat. Mus. 29:441-4 42. pl. 3. Oct. 1905. The type specimen of one of them, Zzz7a arenicola, is from the Altamaha Grit region. 1905. Ely, C. W., & Griffen, A. M. Soil survey of Dodge County, Georgia. Field operations of the Bureau of Soils, U. S. Dept. Agriculture, for 1904. 20 pp. and map.. Oct. 1905. About three-fifths of Dodge County is in the Altamaha Grit region. There are references to the Altamaha Grit region or its flora at the following places in my own writings, though I did not distinguish it until the summer of 1903, or mention 1t by name until September, 1904: Bull. Torrey Club 28:458—465, 467, 468, 470, 475-477, 479, 480, 483, 484. (, 2O> Tic Bo ANOS, Uo\en. Torreya I:115-117. Oct. 1gor. Plant World 5:87-90. pl. 13. 1902. Bull. Torrey Club 29: 386, 393, 394, 397- June, 1902. Plant World 6:60. 1903. Bull. Torrey Club 30:282—285. f. 2. May, 1903; 320, 324, 327, 328, 331, 332, B60es 45. | une, 1903.) Torreya 3:106. July, 1903. Bulle Porey Club 31:13, 15, 27, Lo, 22-20, Jan. 1904. Torreya 4:139-141. (lllust.) Sept. 1904. Torreya 4:162. Nov. 1904. Bull Norrey,. Club 32:108, 109, TI1. jf. 2-4. 1905. Fern Bull. 13:3, 13-16. 1905. : Rhodora 7:76-77 (one sentence). April, 1905. Bull) Torrey Club 32:141-147, 150-153, 159, 160, 162, 165-170. 7. I, 3. 1905. Bull. Torrey Club 32:452, 460-467. 7. 4, 5. Sept. 1905. Torreya 5:164. Sept. 1905. Torreya 5:183-185. Oct. 1905. Also in the following reports of meetings of the Torrey Botanical Club: Bull. Torrey Club 28: 648. Nov. t901;Science II. 14:850. Nov. 29, 1901. 348 HARPER Torreya 3:77-78. May, 1903. (See Just’s Bot. Jahresb. 311. 508. 1904.) Science II. 21:920-g21. June 16, 1905; Torreya 5:113-115. Jume, 1905. ~ 2. Other works consulted. To enumerate all from which suggestions have been derived would involve several hundred titles, but the following seem to be the most important, and in some of them may be found refer- ences to other works of like nature, together covering almost the whole field of phytogeography. A few titles mentioned in footnotes on the preceding pages, or in my own earlier papers, are not repeated here. The names of authors are arranged alphabetically, and the works of each (where more than one) chronologically. Adams, Chas. C. Southeastern United States as a center of geographical distribution of flora and fauna. Biol. Bull. 3:115-131. July, rgo2. Reviewed by Cowles’in Bot. Gaz. 34:385. Nov. 1902. Adams, Chas. C. Postglacial origin and migrations of the life of the northeastern United. States. Jour. Geog. 1:303-310, 352-357- Map. 1902. Adams, Chas. C. The postglacial dispersal of the North American biota. Biol. Bull. 9:53-71. 7. 1. June, 1905; Rep. 8th Int. Geog. Cong. 623-637. Map. 1905. Atkinson, G. F. Relation of plants to environment (or plant ecology) (Outlines of a course of lectures). 67 pp. Ithaca, 1904. Contains an excellent bibliography. Bartram, William. Travels through North and South Carolina, Georgia, East and West Florida (etc.). xxiv +526 pp., frontispiece, map, and 7 plates.’ Philadelphia, 1791, London, 1792 (these two not seen), Dublin, 1793, London, :794. Also a German translation, published in Berlin in 1793. A most interesting narrative, describing faithfully the flora and other geographical features of these regions as they appeared in the 18th century. The author in all probability crossed the extreme north- eastern end of the Altamaha Grit region more than once, but there is no direct evidence of it in the book. Beal, W. J. Some unique examples of dispersion of seeds and fruits. Am. Nat. 32:859-866. 1808. Beal, W. J. Michigan Flora. Ann. Rep. Mich. Acad. Sci. 5:1-147. 1905. The first 34 pages contain some very interesting phytogeographical as well as historical information. Beck von Mannagetta, G. Ueber die Umgrenzung der Pflanzenformationen. Oesterr. Bot. Zeit. 52:421-427. 1902. Reviewed by Cowles in Bot. Gaz. 36:396. Nov. 1903. a ! . ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 349 Blankinship, J.W. Plant formations of eastern Massachusetts. Rhodora 5:124-137. May, 1903. This is the first work of its kind for New England, and contains several original ideas well worth imitating. Bray, W.L. The ecological relations of the vegetation of western Texas. Pony Ga7.)32.90~123) 105-2175) 202-208. fF. F-24. | 190r. The author had the advantage of working in a sparsely settled region whose geology and climatology were already pretty well known, and he made good use-of his opportunities. Two papers dealing with the forests of the same general region by the same author, published as bulletins of the U. S. Bureau of, Forestry in 1904, are also of considerable interest. Brendel, F. Notes on the flora of southern Florida. Am. Nat. 8:449- 452. Aus. 1874. One of the earliest discussions of the geographical affinities of this flora. : Britton, W. E. Vegetation of the North Haven sand plains. [New Haven County, Connecticut. | Bull. Torrey Club 30:571-620. il. 23-28. Nov. 1903. (Thesis): The area discussed is comparable in many respects with the sand-hills of the Altamaha Grit region, and resembles most of them in being on the left side of the stream. Unfortunately no distinction is made by the author between native and introduced plants. Catesby, Mark. The Natural History of Carolina, Florida, and the Bahama Islands. 2 vols. London, 1754. (There was also an earlier edition.) The latter part of the second ‘volume contains some interesting geographical matter. Clarke, Henry L. The philosophy of Mower seasons. Am. Nat. 27:7609- Felis SSODlioy WAS Clements, F.E. Asystemofnomenclature for phytogeography. Engler’s Bow wahrb, Beibl2 7o:1 20.) Aue. 29, 1902. Advocates giving technical names to all classes of habitats, and presents an elaborate system of this kind. Clements, F. E. The devclopment and structure of vegetation. Bot. suny. Nebr. 7:5-175. April, r904: An excellent synopsis of the subject, witha good bibliography, but no index or table of contents. Reviewed by Ganong in Science, II. 20:177. Aug. 5, 1904; and by Cowles in Bot. Gaz. 38 : 303-304. Oct. 1904. Clements, F. E. Research methods in ecology. xvii+334 pp., 85 figs. Lincoln, Neb. 1905. Covers most of the same ground as the preceding, with considerable additional matter and a greatly improved typography, but no index. Reviewed by MacMillan in Science II. 22: 45-46. July 14, 1905. 350 HARPER Clements, F. E. See also Pound & Clements. Coulter, J. M. Plant Relations. 264 pp., 206 figs. New York, 1899. One of the best of the modern text-books. Coulter, S. M. An ecological comparison of some typical swamp areas. Rep. Mo. Bot. Gard. 15:39-71, pl. 1-24. 1904. (Thesis.) | Contains a good deal of information and some excellent illustrations, but few generalizations or deductions. Reviewed by J. M. Coulter in Bot. Gaz. 38:156-157. Aug. 1904. Coville, F. V. Botany of the Death Valley Expedition. Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. vol. 4. 363 pp., 22 plates and map. Nov. 29, 1893. Pages 10-55 and 284-300 are the most valuable to the reader who has no special interest in the region or its flora. Cowles, H. C. The ecological relations of the vegetation on the sand dunes of Lake Michigan. Bot. Gaz. 27:95-117, 167-202, 281-308, 201-30 tn ja eon ae ESO: (Thesis.) (Contr. Hull Bot. Lab. No. 13.) One of the foremost works of its kind, cited in most subsequent American phytogeographical papers. Cowles, H. C. The physiographic ecology of Chicago and vicinity; a study of the origin, development, and classification of plant societies. Bot. Gaz. 31:73-108, 145-182. jf. I-35. 1901. -(Contr., Hull Bot. Lab. No. 24.) This is of rather broader application than the preceding, and will probably for a long time remain a standard. To praise it would be superfluous. Cowles, H. C. The influence of underlying rocks on the character of the vegetation. Bull. Am. Bureau Geog. 2:163-176, 376-388. f. I-10. «gor. (Contr. Hull Bot. Lab. No. 34.) Argues that topographic history is more potent than paolenier! age or chemical composition of the strata in determining the character of the vegetation. Cowles, H. C. Recent contributions to American phytogeography: the Eastern United States. Bot. Gaz. 34: 383-387. Nov. 1902. Cowles, H. C. Recent contributions to American phytogeography. Bot. Gaz. 35:147-149. Feb. 1903. Croom, H. B. Botanical communications. Am. Jour. Sci. 25: 69-78. Oct. 1833; 26:313-320. July, 1834; 28:165-168. April, 1835. These papers contain some very interesting notes on plants observed near if not in the Altamaha Grit region. Davis,W.M. Systematic geography. Proc. Am. Phil. Soc. 41:235—-259. Igo2. Davis,W.M. a 2) 6) > e 3) op) fal a = > Z dp) -] < a Zz a Se Age ae (363) ‘5 e y —_—_— \ _—— come 4 ‘a : . ae | s suf Se ; S ce ets PEAR ele Fic. 1.—Intermediate pine-barrens south of Moultrie, Colquitt Co. Sept. 20, 1902. (The pines here are all turpentined, as is now the case nearly everywhere in this region) . : : : 50 PAGE Fic. 2.—Moist pine-barrens about two miles northeast of Moultrie. Sept. 22, r902. Shows Pinus Elliottit, Sarracenia flava, Er1o- caulon decangulare, Laciniaria spicata, Mesadenia lanceolata ° virescens, etc. 54 (364) PAG wile NNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. IG. « PLATS IN (365) PLATE IV. Fic. 1.—Moist pine-barrens (in foreground) about three miles south of Moultrie, Colquitt Co. Aug. 25, 1903. Sarracenia flava conspicuous. A small branch-swamp in the middle distance 54 PAGE Fic. 2.—Branch-swamp near Fitzgerald, Irwin Co. Oct. 4, 1902. Considerably denser than the one shown on Plate V. The trees seem to be mostly Nyssa biflora and Pinus Elliotiz. Moist pine-barrens in foreground : : : : : 63 (366) PLATE IV. + _ > ry 3 © S eee, eT Ut a - LASS) We (367) PLATE V. Small branch-swamp in pine-barrens near Douglas, Coffee Co. Feb. 7, 1904. Contains Pinus Elliottat, Taxodium imbricarium, and very few,shrubs. Dry pine-barrens with Pinus palustris in foreground : : . : : : «03; 2OhmaaOe (368) PAGE re rg Dea ake Deatbc? Ve" x PLATE VI. (369) . eh : 8 PLATE VI. Winter aspect of an ‘““endemic”’ creek-swamp. Twenty Mile Creek, Coffee County. Feb. 5, 1904. Trees all deciduous, and nearly all Taxodium imbricarium. Dendropogon usneotdes is on some of them. A fringe of shrubs, mostly Cyrilla and Fraxinus Caroliniana, along the edge. Dry pine-barrens with a specimen of Pinus palustris in the foreground 66, 308 PAGE (370) . : ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE VI. valle (371) Peas PEIN, WN, Interior of the same swamp shown on Plate VI. Feb. Sy (372) PLATE VII.4 ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE VIII (G78) JNM, SITIO, Fic. 1.—Swamp of Little River about four miles west of Tifton, a looking directly up the middle of the stream from a railroad trestle. Sept. 30, 1902. The larger trees are Taxodium tm- bricartum and the smaller ones Fraxinus Caroliniana . : 66 Fic. 2.—A river of the second class: the Ohoopee, looking upstream from Shepard’s Bridge, Tattnall Co. June 24, 1903 . : 69 (374) PLATE VIII. ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. Fic. 2. Be age, PEATE TN: (375) PLATE IX. PAGE Fic. 1.—Looking across the Ohoopee River from the right bank at same point shown on Plate VIII, fig. 2. April 26, t904. Salix nigra on sandy bank opposite, and Pinus palustris on sand-hills beyond c ; : : : 69 Fic. 2.—One of the muddy rivers: the Ocmulgee. Looking down- stream from the railroad bridge near Lumber City. Sept. 11, 1903. Jaxodium dtstichum on both banks. 71 esr (376) PLATE IX. VOL. XVII. ’ ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. Fic. 1. Fic. 2. PLATE X. ae | i (377) : EGA exe Fic. 1.—Cypress pond about 3 miles south of Douglas, Coffee Co. July 24, 1902 ~— 4 3 : 5 : 3 F : Fic. 2.—Artificial section through sand-hills of Gum Swamp Creek on western border of Montgomery Co., exposing about 20 feet of homogeneous Columbia sand. July 3, 1903 ‘ : Bis (hs) (378) PAGE 75 a ca) a < =) ay id JEG. i. vs ' 4 . = aD PLATE XI. PAGE Fic. 1.—Sand-hills of House Creek near Bowen’s Mill, Wilcox Co. May 17, 1904. The trees are Pinus palustris and Quercus Catesb@i, as usual. Patch of Chrysobalanus in foreground SO Fic. 2.—Scene on sand-hills of Little Ocmulgee River on western border of Montgomery Co., showing Quercus Catesbet, Pinus palustris, and Selaginella acanthonota. Sept. 10, 1903 . eee: (380) .. ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE XI. - BVA, Sau. (381) IRIE, WTI, Fic. 1.—Scene on Upper Seven Bluffs on the Ocmulgee River, Wilcox Co. May 17, 1904. Showing especially Magnolia grandtfiora and Quercus alba : 18, 102, 103 Fic. 2.—Sand-hill bog near center of Tattnall Co. April 26, 1904. The only known locality in the region for Sarracenia purpurea. Pines nearly all P. serotina. Magnolia glauca and Clijlomia in background 92, 300 PAGE (382) PLATE XII. he tet a '? oe 8H = len! > a = fe) > SCL; ANNALS N. Y. ACAD PLATE XIII. PAW eile Non-ailuvial swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek near Gaskin’s Spring, Coffee Co. May 12, 1904.. The large tree is Magnolia glauca, 85 inches in circumference. Next to it on the left is a trunk of Gordonia, and next to that, Persea. Osmanthus, Jtea, and Vitus rotundifolia are also visible : : : é oo OS (384) PAGE PLATE XIII. 4 -_ > a 4 ©) 5 S O) op) [a < 3) < bt Zz op) 4 < 4 re ia 4 Oo > ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SC Wout ‘, ¥ III, OTL: PAGE Fic 1.—The two commonest weeds, Helenium tenuifolium and Acanthospermum australe. Streets of Douglas, Sept. 22, 1900 116 Fic. 2.—Pine-barrens after lumbering and fire. Near Ohoopee, Tattnall Co., June 26, 1903. Herbaceous flora scarcely affected. The young pines in the foreground are Pinus Elliotti1. (The water in the foreground is more or less accidental, being in an excavation along a railroad embankment) 117, 118 (392) PLATE XVII. ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE XVIEL ea (393) PLATE XVIII. Fic. 1.—Fire burning in dry pine-barrens (after lumb Covena, Emanuel Co. April 5, 1904 . : ; Fic. 2.—Dicerandra odoratissima at the type-locality. Igoo ; e . e e te . tes = 'i8) (394) ‘ " ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE XVIII. : a PLATE XIX. (395) PLATE Ix Fic. 1.—Asclepias humistrata, a typical sand-hill plant. Sand-hills of House Creek, Wilcox Co., May 17, t904. Note the vertical leaf-blades : : : S74. Fic. 2.—Elliottsia racemosa, near ‘Bloss, Bulloeh Cor June 29, 1901. 187 (396) PAGE PLATE XIX. 4 - > a s © S oO op) [a xq 1S) x Ps a mn e. mA JDILIMIND, NOX 4 as ges COM e) | PLATE Oe -Elliottia racemosa, near Bloys, Bulloch Co. June 29, view of flowers BED pari ga eeriee huh oe : es (398) ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE XX. PLATE XXT. (399) JENLWEINS, 2OOU2 Fic. 1.—Nyssa Ogeche (in center and left fore ground) in Allapaha tat River east of Allapaha, Berrien Co. May 5, 1904. Taxodium (one of the puzzling intermediate forms) at right. Pznus Teda in background . ; ; , : : : 5 HO Fic. 2.—Ceratiola ericoides in sand-hammock near Rosemary Church, Emanuel Co. June 28, r9o1 i ‘ : : 3 pe Diet (400) mNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE XXI. Bees oy ; PVA Dexa: (40r) PLATE ONL Fic. 1.—Psoralea canescens in dry pine-barrens near Bloys, Bu Con inerzon nooner 3 Bi} sees : : : Fic. 2.—Lupinus villosus (no. ors), in. tavormedtate -sfbste- (9 near Ohoopee, Tattnall Co. April 25, 1904 . (402) ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE’ XXII. Iwai, OSCUUl (403) PLATE XXIIL.* ‘ i . . . a nail Pts ; ~ Sarracenia flava in moist pine-barrens (already defores Douglas, Coffee Co. May 15, 1904. Eriocaulon line spicuous in foreground : 3 5 ‘ : (404) ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE?XXIII. “PLATE XXIV. Ges) Jeet, OXI Fic. 1.—Sarracenia flava X minor in most pine-barrens, Douglas Ose (within a few feet of place shown in Plate XXIII). July 22, tgo2z. Withit can be seen JZ arshallia graminijolia, By locaulen decangulare, and Tofieldia . zed Fic. 2.—Hymenocallis sp. in Seventeen Mile Creek swamp, Callies Co. May 12, 1904 : Ree 255) (406) PLATE XXIV. Fic. 2. Ric. 1. ‘PLATE XXV. (407) PUAD Ey XO. Fic. 1.—Habenaria nivea (No. 954) in intermediate pine-barrens near Bloys, Bulloch Co. June 26, 1901. The larger of these two plants was mentioned in Bull. Torrey Club, 30: 327, 1903 256 PAGE Fic. 2.—Eriocaulon lineare in moist pine-barrens, Douglas. May 16, 1904. Sarracenia flava X minor associated with it . 234, 267 (408) PLATE XXV. = = > a ist e ACAD. SCI., VOL N Y ANNALS JE 8INIS, OCONEE : (409) PLATE XXVI. PAGE Pinus palustris in dry pine-barrens near Douglas, Feb. 7, 1904. The specimen in the foreground is just three feet in diameter at the place indicated by thetape . : : ; é . 304 (410) PLATE XXVI. ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE XXVII. (431) PLATE XXVII. Fic. 1.—Taxodium imbricarium in Twenty Mile Creek, Coffee Co. ei Sept. 24, I9g00 . . ° 5 - : : «1 308 Fic. 2.—Taxodium imbricarium in moist, pine-barrens, Coffee Co. Feb. 3, 1904 5 . c c 4 > 308 Fic. 3.—Base of trunk of Taxodium distichum in swamp of Oconee River near Mount Vernon, Montgomery Co. June 27, 1903 307 (412) ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE XXVII. Fic. 3. PAE, Ss eS i Be 4 Ee Zo ee = oe 2 fe ae =a which was revised and extended in his memoir® of 1893. 1Teleostet (Systematic Part), The Cambridge Natural History, vol. ‘“‘ Fishes, Ascidians,’’ etc., 1904, pp. 539-727- 2An Introduction to the Study of Fishes, 8vo, Edinburgh, 1880, Pp. Xi—Xvi. ’ ‘Observations on the Systematic Relations of the Fishes,’”’ Proc. Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sct., 20th meeting, Indianapolis, 1871, pp. 317-343- 4 “Catalogue of the Fishes of the Eastern Coast of North America,” Proc. Acad. Nat. Scz., Phila., 1861, pp. 1-63. 5 “Arrangement of the Families of Fishes, or Classes Pisces, Marsipo- branchu, and Leptocardi,’”’ Smithsonian Misc. Coll., No. 247, 1872, pp. i-xlvi, I-49. 6 ‘‘Families and Subfamilies of Fishes,’’ Wem. Nat. Acad. Scz., Vol. VI, Pp. 125-138. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 439 In this classification which has been the basis of all subsequent work of the American school, precision, classicism, and a strict adherence to the canons of nomenclature reinforced a keen analysis and a judicious weighing of taxonomic values. The attempt was made to readjust these values so that they might express more nearly the various degrees of affinity, and to intro- duce more uniformity in the value assigned to the same taxo- nomic grade in different groups of vertebrates. Many currently recognized families were variously divided, the component parts being elevated to the rank of separate families, while many groups were labeled ‘‘of uncertain position.”” “The dictum that “‘analysis must precede synthesis’’ was consistently followed, and a great increase in the number of ordinal, subordinal, and family divisions was deemed preferable to the premature group- ings of the traditional classification. Attention was in this way directed to the very numerous families and groups which were really of uncertain affinities, but which had always been thrown in with other divisions by the conservatism which resents the introduction of new groups and new names. An important synthetic step was the frequent use of the superfamily. In England and on the Continent the Gtintherian system was gradually found inadequate, and the importance of the skeleton in classification became recognized as ichthyology and especially paleichthyology developed. Dr. A. S. Woodward adopted the broad features of Cope’s classification, which he improved in many respects, but the older system still remained in general use. The new and very notable classification of Dr. Boulenger, re- ferred to above, is the first since that of Gunther to gain general acceptance in England. Dr. Boulenger refers! to the classifica- tion of Gunther as being to a ‘‘great extent based on physiological principles,” whereas his new classification ‘‘aims at being phylogenetic.” It is based upon his studies of the rapidly grow- ing collection of fish skeletons in the British Museum; it reflects also the labors of Cope, Gill, Sagemehl, A. S. Woodward, of Jordan and his co-workers, and thus represents the most com- prehensive analysis of osteological characters which has yet appeared. LOPp.cit., p: 542. 440 WILLIAM K. GREGORY Boulenger’s classification is true to British tradition in the fewness of its larger divisions; and many families, suborders, and orders of the American system are not recognized as distinct divisions. Thus the differences between the English and Ameri- can systems are very salient. By the American method as exemplified in Dr. Jordan’s latest work, 18 orders, about 33 sub- orders, and considerably more than 200 families of true Teleosts are recognized; by the English method all are swept into the single ‘‘order’’ Teleostei which is codérdinate in value with the orders Crossopterygii, Chondrostei, Holostei, and which is sub- divided into thirteen suborders which for the most part have the value of the orders of the American system. Boulenger’s treatment of the ‘“‘suborder’’ Ostariophysi may serve as an in- stance of this extensive synthesizing. Since this assemblage is regarded as a natural one the divisions Heterognathi, Eventog- nathi, Nematognathi are not used, and the Characins, Carps, and Catfishes are all united as families in the suborder Ostario- physi. In Boulenger’s definitions of these families the trench- ant structural differences between them are revealed, but so far as the classification itself indicates they might be no more separated than, say the Tarpons (Elopide) from the Lady-fishes (Albu- lide), or the Herrings (Clupeidz) from the Salmons (Salmonide). These differences in method seem to arise from the dual nature and function of a natural classification in the modern sense. A natural classification must necessarily express, first, degrees of homological resemblances and differences and, second, degrees of genetic relationship; but it cannot at the same time express both with equal accuracy, and its primary purpose is to express degrees of homological resemblances and differences. In comparing the end forms of diverging lines of descent we find that between any two forms degrees of genetic relationship are solely a function of time and of the rate of reproduction, while degrees of homologous structural relationships are a function of varying rates of evolution. To borrow an illustration from mammalogy, we may suppose that a certain group of pre-Tertiary mammals has given rise to the modern Insecti- vores on the one hand and to the Bats on the other. Between this ancestral group and each of the two modern groups a number THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 441 of generations has elapsed which we may assume to be roughly equal along both lines of descent. Therefore, in degree of blood kinship to this ancestral group both Bats and Insectivores are about equally far removed. But in homological structural re- semblances the modern Insectivores are much nearer to this sroup than are the Bats, and hence so far as classification is. concerned, the ancestral group and the Insectivores would probably be placed in a single order, while the Bats are set off in another order. Here plainly, degrees of blood relationship do not exactly correspond to degrees of homological structural resemblances and differences, nor to the divisions of classification. In order to make classification correspond even roughly to. degrees of blood relationship, 7.e. to phylogeny, we must assign varying systematic values to different characters in proportion to their inferred relative phylogenetic age. For example, the notochord and other chordate characters which appear in certain larval Ascidians are regarded as of far greater phylogenetic age than the typical characters of adult Ascidians, and hence these transient characters are given a very high systematic value, so. that through them the group is placed within the phylum Chordata. On the other hand neomorphs or ‘“‘teleological”’ characters are given much lower systematic values. The unique sucking-disc of the Remoras, for example, which is believed to represent a modified spinous dorsal fin,! does not avail to remove the family beyond the borders of the order Acanthopterygii. In this way classification is roughly adjusted to phylogeny, but the adjustment can never be complete or exact. _ These considerations reveal the general defects of both the American and English methods of classification. The American system may fail to emphasize the underlying affinities of struc- turally well-defined groups, as, for example, of the Nematognathi or Catfishes with the Plectospondyli or Characins and Carps. The English system emphasizes the larger phylogenetic affinities. but may not give due value to the equally important structural diversities. Again the English system seems to follow the general principle ~1R. Storms, ‘‘The Adhesive Disk of Echeneis,” Ann. Mag. Nat. H1st., (6) II, 1888, pp. 67-76. 442 WILLIAM K. GREGORY that when intermediate forms between related groups are dis- covered, these connections of form and of kinship should be expressed by the assembling of the extreme forms and the middle forms in one group, usually without any higher subdivisions than families. Thus the Zeus-like fishes are thought to be related to the Flatfishes through the Eocene Amphistiide. Hence Boulenger abandons the groups Zeoidea, Heterosomata, and by an ingenious definition links the two in a new group called Zeorhombi. Whether related groups are now continuous or discontinuous is partly an accident of time and of the degree of completeness of our collections of fossil and recent forms. Surely such terms as Nematognathi for the Catfishes, Squamipinnes for the Cheto- donts and their allies, and many other useful group-names stand for perfectly clear types of structure, in forms clustered around central types but grading into other groups at the peripheries. The idea underlying the American method is that the best way to map out the topography of this varied morphological expanse is to assign a name to every conspicuous cluster of elevations, even if some lesser outlying elevations may connect with neigh- boring systems. Thus the two classifications emphasize different sets of facts about the same subject-matter, so that in a general way the Eng- lish method emphasizes better both resemblances and phylogeneti- gaps between different groups. Furthermore, as we have seen, the results of the two methods are expressed in terms of a standard ithe ‘‘order’’ which has a very different value in the two sys- tems, in the English system covering the entire range of forms from certain generalized Triassic physostomes (the Pholido- phoridz) to the most advanced spiny-finned fishes and even to such wonderfully metamorphosed beings as Mola and Malthe; while in the American system the same term “‘order”’ implies a much narrower range, as for example in the Haplomi. The American and English methods are fortunately not en- tirely irreconcilable or contradictory, not like the two horns of a dilemma between which only a bad choice is possible. Con- ceivably the differences may be adjusted, and all the antitheses and syntheses which the two systems seek to convey may be harmoniously expressed. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 443; The first step is to note the necessity for a larger number of grades of taxonomic divisions between the subfamily and the class than is found in the English system, which deals only with the order (Teleostei), the suborder, the division, the family, and the subjamily. As degrees of homological resemblances and of phylogenetic affinities are infinite in number even a highly differ- -entiated system of classification must be more or less Procrustean in nature, since in order to force all the different grades of assem- blages into appropriate compartments some phylogenetic values must be relatively compressed and others somewhat stretched. But surely by using more grades of subdivision we may distort the facts less than by using fewer grades; although common sense must soon impose a limit to the increase in the number of grades, since each grade requires a corresponding set of terms throughout the system. One advantage ofa highly differentiated system with many grades of divisions is that it permits us to retain on different taxonomic levels many old useful and ex- pressive names such as Malacopterygii, Isospondyli, which if applied to divisions of the same taxonomic rank would compete with each other as synonyms. The process of the differentiation of taxonomic grades has been going on for a long time in ichthyology and elsewhere, and it has usually been accompanied by the elevation in rank of certain taxonomic grades and the lowering in rank of others. Thus the rank of the grade called “‘species’’ by Linnzeus has really been lowered, since many of his species are now called “‘ genera’”’ and his genera “‘ families’ while in Gill’s system many of Ginther’s. “families ’’ were elevated to the rank of the division called by Gill “‘superfamily.” From these inevitable shiftings many of the differences between the American and English systems have arisen. The desirability of a highly differentiated system has suggested the use of the terms class, subclass, infraclass, cohort, superorder, order, suborder, division, superfamily, family, subfamily in the accompanying classification, which is offered asa tentative com- promise between the American and English systems. The only ones of these terms requiring special comment are the infraclass, superorder, cohort, and order. The infraclass is. 444 WILLIAM K. GREGORY a division recently suggested by Professor Osborn to express the relations of Marsupials to Placentals which together consti- ~ tute the subclass Eutheria Gill (not of Huxley) in contrast to the subclass Monotremata. The differences between Marsupials and Placentals do not seem to be more deep-seated than the differences between the Crossopterygii on the one hand and the Actinopteri Cope (all the remaining Ganoids and Teleosts), onthe other. Hence I regard the Crossopterygii and Actinopteri as infraclasses. Again the Dipnoi show many resemblances to the Crossopterygii in their comparative anatomy, embryol- ogy, and palzontology, and it seems advisable to express this relationship by ranking the Dipnoi as an infraclass, coédrdinate with the Crossopterygii and Actinopteri, the three groups being embraced within the subclass Teleostomi, a procedure already suggested in essentials by Gill.t After the exclusion of Polyp- terus and its allies from the Ganoidei, this classic term with its congeneric term Teleostei may be used in a perfectly clear sense as by Jordan and Evermann, for the upper and lower divi- sions of the Actinopteri. These divisions we may call cohorts, the cohort having been used by Storr in 1780 in the classifica- tion of the Mammals. The cohort Ganoidei may be taken to in- clude the superorders Acipenseroidei Traquair, Lepidosteoidei (as understood by Bridge in The Cambridge Nat. H1st., vol. ‘‘ Fishes,”’ etc.); the cohort Teleostei to include the superorders Mala- copteroidei (embracing the orders Isospondyli, Ostariophysi), Mesichthyes (Hay) (embracing the orders Haplomi, Synentog- nathi, Salmoperce), Thoracostraci Swinnerton (embracing the orders Hemibranchii, Lophobranchii), Acanthopteroidei (em- bracing the orders Percesoces, Anacanthini, Labyrinthici (?), Acanthopterygii, Selenichthyes, Tzniosomi, Plectognathi, Hypo- stomides, Opisthomi, Pediculati). The superordinal relationships of the eel-like orders Apodes, Symbranchi, Heteromi, whether tothe Ganoid, Malacopteroidei, or Mesichthyes are not clear. It will be seen that the classification given herewith adheres tothe American standard in regarding as orders such great groups as the Ostariophysi, the Acanthopterygii proper, the Haplomi, 1‘ Addresses in Memory of Edward Drinker Cope,” Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc., Memorial Vol. I, 1900, pp. 15, 16. altered; whenever the THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 445 Isospondyli, etc., which seem in a general way to be of about the same rank as the orders of the Mammalia. Such divisions proposed by the American school as Squamipinnes, Berycoidei, Percomorphi, etc., which often represent the breaking up of larger assemblages, have been frequently adopted, while on the other hand the synthetic results of the English system have been ex- pressed in the present classification by the extensive grouping of families into superfamilies, of orders into superorders, and so forth. Fortified by considerable historic precedent, I have not hesitated to raise or lower the rank of various groups while retaining for them the old names. Gill’s principle of keeping groups apart until they have been shown to belong together has also been kept in mind. In regard to nomenclature old and prior names have been retained wherever possible even where the limits of the groups designated have become considerably ‘““core’”’ of an old group appeared to be natural that name, after its content had been amended, has been retained. A CLASSIFICATION OF THE JAW-BEARING FISHES. (Compare Plate X XIX.) SupercLtass GNATHOSTOMATA Crass PISCES Subclass ELASMOBRANCHII Bonaparte Superorder PLEUROPTERYGII Dean! Order Cladoselachii Dean Fam. Cladoselachide Order Acanthodei Owen Fam. Acanthoéssidze ‘“ Acanthodidz ‘« Diplacanthidz Superorder IcHTHYoTomi Cope Order Pleuracanthides Hay Fam. Pleuracanthide Superorder PLaciostomi Duméril Order Diplospondyli Hasse (Opisarthri Guzll, Notidani Jordan, 1The reasons for believing the Pleuropterygii to be related to the _- Acanthodeiare given by Dean in Journ. Morph., 1894, pp. tog-111._ The iil structural divergence between the two groups seems to warrant the retention of the two orders as such. 446 WILLIAM K. GREGORY Protoselachii) Parker & Haswell Fam. Notidanide ** Chlamydoselachidze Order Prosarthri Gil] (‘‘ Les Cestraciontes’’ Agassiz) : Fam. Orodontide ““ Heterodontide (Cestraciontidez) ‘‘ Edestide ““ Cochliodontide Inc. Sedis1 y. Order Batidoselachii (nom. nov.) (‘‘ Tectospondyli’’ (Hasse) Smith Woodward) Suborder Cyclospondyli Hasse 2 Fam. Spinacide (Squalide) Subfam. Squaline, Squalus, (Acanthias), Centrina, Cen- trophorus, Spinax,Centroscyllium Scymnine (Dalatiine), Scymnus, Somnosus (Lemargus) Echinorhinine Suborder Tectospondyli (Hasse) Div. 1. Pristes Gill Fam. Pristiophoride “ Pristidee Div. 2. Rhinobati (nom. nov.) Fam. Rhinobatide ** Tamiobatidez 3 Inc. Sedis Div. 3. Rhine Gill (?) Fam. Rhinide (Squatinide) Div. 4. Rajze auct. (Pachyura Gill) Fam. Rajide Div. 5. Torpedines (nom. nov?) Fam. Torpedinide (= Narcobatide) Div. 6. Masticura (Gil) Fam. Petalodontide Inc. Sedis ““ Psammodontide Inc. Sedis 4 Dasyatide (Trygonide) ‘“ Myliobatidee Order Asterospondyli (Hasse) (Galei, Euselachii) Superfamily Scylliorhinoidea (nom. nov. ?) Fam. Scylliorhinide (Scylliide) Superfamily Lamnoidea (nom. nov.?) ce oe “ce 1Possibly allied to the Petalodontide and Rays (Eastman). 2See Jordan, 1905, Vol. I, pp. 545-547. 3 Devonian, possibly allied to Cestracionts (Jordan). 4 Possibly allied to Cestracionts but more raylike in dentition. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES . Carchariide (Odontaspide) 447 ‘Mitsukurinide (Mitsukurina, Scapanorhynchus) Alopeciidee Lamnidze Cetorhinidz Rhinodontidze Spbyrnidee Galeidee Superorder CHIMZROIDEI! auct. Order Holocephali /. Miller Fam, ia} te Ptyctodontidz Squalorajide Myriacanthide -¢ Menaspidz Rhinochimeridee Callorhynchidz Chimeridze Sanclass ARTHROGNATHI Dean 2 Inc. Sedis. Order Anarthrodira Dean Suborder Stegothalami Dean Fam. 66 Macropetalichthyide Asterosteidze Inc. Sedis. Order Arthrodira A. S. Woodward Suborder Temnothoraci Dean Fam. Chelonichthyidze Suborder Arthrothoraci Dean ana: ee ee Coccosteidee Trachosteidee Dinichthyide Mylostomidze Selenosteide Subclass TELEOSTOMI (Bonaparte) Owen Infraclass DipNeusti1 Haeckel Order Ctenodipterini Pander Fam. oe Uronemidz Ctenodontidze Order Sirenoidei J. Miiller Fam. Ceratodontide a3 Lepidosirenidze Infraclass CROSSOPTERYGII Cope -1$ee Garman in Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoél., Vol. XLI, pp. 243-272; and Dean, ‘‘ Chimaeroid Fishes and their Development,’ Carnegie Inst., Washington, 1906. 2 The classificationis from Dean in Mem. N.Y. Acad. Sct. Vol. II, Part III, r901, pp. 120-123. 448 WILLIAM K. GREGORY Order Haplisitia Cope Fam, Tarasiide Order Osteolepida Boulenger Suborder Rhipidistia Cope Fam, Osteolepidz ** Rhizodontide (=Megalichthyide) * _Holoptychide Suborder Actinistia Cope Fam. Ccelacanthide Order Cladistia Cope Fam, Polypteridz Infraclass ACTINOPTERI Cope Cohort Ganorpe! (J. Miller) Jordan and Evermann Superorder AcCIPENSEROIDEI Traquair Order Heterocerci Zzttel (Lysopteri) Cope Fam. Paleoniscids “ Platysomida Catopteride (Dictyopygide) Order Chondrostei J. Muller Suborder Glaniostomi Cope Fam Chondrosteide ‘* Acipenseridze Suborder Selachostomi Cope Fam. Polyodontide Superorder LepipostrorpEe1 Bridge (Holostei J. Miller in part) Order Protospondyli (A. S. Woodward) Suborder Mesoganoidei nom. nov. Fam. Stylodontide (Semionotide) ““ Lepidotidze ‘* Macrosemiidee “ Dapediidee 1 “« Pholidophoride Suborder Pycnodonti 2 Fam. Pycnodontide: Suborder Aspidorhynchi nom. nov. (Aetheospondyli Woodw. in part) Fam. Aspidorhynchide Suborder Ginglymodi Cope (Aetheospondyli Woodw. in part) Fam. Lepidosteide Suborder Halecomorphi Cope (Amioidei Litken) 66 / 1 Placed near the Pholidophoridz by Boulenger. 2Cf. Hay, Bibliography and Catalogue of the Fossil Vertebre of North America, p. 372. ih, THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 449 Fam. Eugnathide (Caturide) ““ Pachycormide “ Amiidee “ Oligopleuride ‘Cohort TELEOSTEI Superorder MaLacoPTEROIDEI nom. nov Order Isospondyli Cope: (Malacopterygii (Cuvier) iBoulenger in part) Fam. Archeomenide ““ Leptolepidide Elopidee “< Albulide Mormyridz ““ Hyodontide Notopteridze Osteoglosside ‘* ~ Pantodontide ** Ctenothrissidz Phractolemidz ‘““ Saurodontide (Cope non Zittel) ““ Ichthyodectide Crook “¢ Clupeidze2 Subfam. Thrissopatrinze “ Engrauline Clupeinz Chaninze Fam. Salmonide Alepocephalide Stomiatidee ” Subfam. Chauliodontinz ‘* Gonostomatinz Sternoptychinz Stomiatine 2 Fam. Gonorhynchide ‘* — Cromeriidz Order {Ostariophysi Sagemehl Suborder Heterognathi Gilt Fam. Characide ? Subfam. Erythrininze ““ Hydrocyoninze Serrasalmoninze “ Ichthyoborine ec (73 6c 6é 1 Boulenger’s division into families is followed. 2 Boulenger’s classification. 450 WILLIAM K. GREGORY x Subfam. Xiphostominze e Anostominze a ‘¢ Hemiodontinze “« Distichodontine “ Citharininz Suborder Glanencheli Cope (Gymnonoti Gill): Fam. Gymnotide Suborder Eventognathi Gz/l Fam. Cyprinide Subfam. Catostominz ““ Cyprininze ‘* Cobiditinze ‘‘ Homalopterinz Suborder Nematognathi Gzll Fam. Siluridee Subfam. Clariine st) wiltirin Bagrinze “* Doradinz Malopterurinz “ Callichthyinz ““ Hyophthalmine Trichomycterinz Fam. Loricariide Subfam. Argine “« Loricariinz Fam. Aspredinidz Superorder UNCERTAIN Order Apodes (Linn.) Kaup Suborder Archencheli Jordan Fam. Anguillavide Suborder Enchelycephali Cope Fam. Anguillidee ** Nemichthyidz “« Synaphobranchidee Suborder Colocephali Cope Fam. Murenide Suborder Carencheli Gzil 2 Fam. Derichthyide Suborder Lyomeri Gill and Ryder 2 Fam. Saccopharyngide 1 Boulenger’s classification. 2Incertz Sedis may deserve a higher rank coérdinate with Apodes. 7" ~~ ess, = . question. a eS ee ee a ee eee a i ee Se ee y THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES ‘Order Symbranchii Gill Suborder Ichthyocephali Cope Fam. Monopteridz Suborder Holostomi Cope Fam. Symbranchide ‘Order Heteromi (Gill) Boulenger 1 Fam. Dercetide (Inc. Sedis) ““ ~~ Halosauride Lipogenyide ““ Notacanthide *“ Fierasferidze 66 Superorder Mesicutuves (Hay) mihi Order Haplomi Gzi/ Superfamily Aulopoidea (Gill) (Iniomi Gill) Fam. Scopelide ‘“ Alepidosauride Cetomimidze ‘“* Chirothricide Inc. Sedis ‘« — Enchodontide ““ Kneriide Inc. Sedis “* Cobitopside Inc. Sedis Superfamily Esocoidea Starks Fam. Umbride ‘“* — Esocidee Superfamily Dalloidea mihi (Xenomi Gill) Fam. Dalliide Superfamily Pceciloidea Starks Fam. Poeciliide (Cyprinodontide) Superfamily Amblyopsoidea Starks Fam. Amblyopsideze Superfamily Stephanoberycoidea nom. nov. Fam. Stephanoberycide 2 Superfamily Galaxoidea nom. nov. UES Sedis) Fam. Galaxiide: ““ Haplochitonide? "Order Salmoperce Jordan and Evermann (Incerte Sedis) Fam. Percopside Order Synentognathi Gill Fam. Belonide “ Exoccetide _Protaulopside (Inc. Sedis) ce 2 Placed by Boulenger in this order. 451 1 According to Jordan the naturalness of this assemblage is open to 452 WILLIAM K. GREGORY Superorder THORACOSTRACI Swinnerton (Phen or e Hay) Order Hemibranchii Cope1 : Fam. Gasterosteidz “« Aulorhynchidze “« Aulostomidze “ Fistulariidze ‘« Macrorhamphosidze =. Centriscide “« Amphisilidz Order Lophobranchii2 Cuvier Fam. Solenostomidz “ Syngnathidee Superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDEI nom. nov. Order Percesoces (Cope) Guill Superfamily Sphyreznoidea Slarks Fam. Sphyrenideze Superfam. Atherinoidea Starks Fam. Atherinidz ‘« Chiasmodontidz Superfam. Mugiloidea Starks Fam. Mugilidz Superfam. Polynemoidea mom. nov. Fam. Polynemide Order Anacanthini /. Miiller (?) Fam. Macruride “ Gadidee Order Labryinthici Jordan (?) Inc. Sedis Fam. Osphromenidz “ Anabantidee “* Ophiocephalidz Order Acanthopterygii (Cuvier) Suborder Berycoidei Jordan (?) Fam. Berycide “~~ Holocentridz ““ ~ Monocentride “ Polymixide Suborder Zeoidei Jordan (?) Fam. Zeide ““ Amphistiide 1 Families as given by Boulenger. 2For the position of the Pegaside which are usually placed with this order see p. 505. : Placed by Boulenger in this assemblage. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 453 Suborder Heterosomata Bonaparte Fam. Pleuronectide Suborder Percomorphi Cope Division Perciformes (Ganither) Boulenger Superfamily Percoidea1 Fam. Aphredoderidz ‘* Elassomide Centrarchide Percidze Apogonidz Oxylabracidze Acropomatide Serranidee Subfam. Serraninz ‘“ Grammistinz Priacanthinz Centropominze Ambassinze ““ Pomatominz ““ Chilodipterinze Lutjanine Cirrkitine Pentacerotinz Fam. Sillaginide ““ Trichodontide Scizenidee Gerridze “ Pristipomatide (Hemulide) Sparideze “ Mullidee ““ Pseudochromide (Latilide) “ Cepolidze Superfamily Embiotocoidea nom nov. (Holconoti Cope) Fam. Embiotocide Superfamily Toxotoidea Gill Fam. Toxotide Superfamily Pomacentroidea Gill (Chromides) Fam. Cichlide “* Pomacentridz . Superfamily Labroidea Gill (Pharyngognathi Cope?) Fam. Labride “ ‘Seardiz ‘ Only the principal families as given by Boulenger are listed. 454 WILLIAM K. GREGORY Division Squamipinnes (J. Miller) Fam. Scorpidide ‘“ Caproide (Antigoniidz) ““ Cheetodontidze “ Zanclidze ‘* Acanthuridee ““ Teuthidide ‘ Pygeide ‘« Siganidz Division Nomeiformes nom. nov. Superfam. Tetragonuroidea (Gz/l) Fam. Tetragonuride ‘« Stromateide *« Icosteidee Division Scombriformes: Boulenger Fam. Carangidz ‘‘ — Rhachicentridze ““ Scombridee “ Trichiuride “* — Histiophoridz “ Xiphiide “« Luvaride ““ Corypheenidee ‘« Bramidee Suborder Kurtiformes Boulenger Fam. Kurtide Suborder Gobioidei Jordan and Evermann Fam. Gobiide Suborder Discocephali Jordan and Evermann? Fam. Echeneidide Suborder Pareioplitez Richardson (Scleroparei Goulenger) Superfam. Scorpxnoidea Gill Fam. Scorpznide ‘« Hexagrammide ‘* ~~ Comephoridz Superfamily Rhamphocottoidea Guzll Fam. Rhamphocottide Superfam. Cottoidea (Gzl/) Fam. Cottide ‘ Cyclopteridz ch Liparidze Superfam. Platycephaloidea Gill 1A grouping of the various Scombriform families into superfamilies has not yet been successfully attempted. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 455 Fam. Platycephalide “ Hoplichthyide Superfam. Agonoidea Gzll Fam. Agonidz Superfam. Trigloidea Gzll Fam. Triglidze ““ Dactylopteride Suborder Jugulares (Linn.) Boulenger: Superfam. Percophoidea Gzll Fam. Trachinidee Se hercopianda ““ Leptoscopidze ““ Notothentidz ‘“‘ — Uranoscopidee Superfam. Callionymoideat nom. nov. Fam. Trichonotide “* Callionymidee ‘* — Gobiesocidee Superfam. Blennoidea 1 Fam. Bleniide “ Ptilichthyide ““ Batrachide “ Pholididz Zoarcidee ““ ~ Congrogadidee “* Ophidiidee “* Podatelidze Order Selenichthyes Boulenger (Incertz Sedis) Fam. Lamprididz Order Tzniosomi. Jordan and Evermann (Incerte Sedis) Fam. Trachypteride Order Plectognathi /. Muiller 2 Suborder Sclerodermi (Cuvier) 1 Fam. Triacanthide “ Triodontidz fee Salisoiclae “ Monacanthidee ““ Ostraciidee Suborder Gymnodontes (Cuvier) 1 Fam. Tetrodontide ““— Diodontide “ Molidze ? 1 Families as defined by Boulenger. 2 A division of this order into superfamilies is desirable. 456 WILLIAM K. GREGORY Order Hypostomides Gz/l1 Fam. Pegasidz Order Opisthomi Gzl/ Fam. Mastacambelidz Order Pediculati Gz//2 Fam. Lophiide “ Ceratiidz ““ Antenariide Gigantactinidze “ Maithidee Infraclass CROSSOPTERYGII? Cope. “These forms appear in the Upper Devonian, flower out in the late Palzozoic, and one group, the Cclacanths, persists almost unchanged throughout the whole series of formations from the Lower Carboniferous to the Upper Chalk’’ (Woodward). The superorder is sharply distinguished from the Actinopteri by the following assemblage of characters, (1) The paired fins are lobate,* i.e., with a cartilaginous axis, scaly externally and fringed on both sides by dermal rays. (2) The dorsal and anal fins are remarkably analogous to the paired fins in form and probably in function, and in the relations of the dermal rays to the endoskeletal supports; the median fins usually lack the numerous supporting fin fulcra so characteristic of the primitive Actinopteri. (The Osteolepide however exhibit modified enamelled anterior ridge scales which resemble the fulcra of higher forms.) (3) The axonosts of the dorsal and anal fins exhibit various degrees of coalescence, so that finally the paddle-like median fins probably enjoyed a high complexity and independence of movement. (4) There are two dorsal fins in the primitive forms. (5) The tail fin, in the earliest forms heterodiphycercal, often coalesces with the posterior dorsal and anal fins into the gephy- rocercal form.’ (6) A spiracle is present. (7) The distal end 1 Incertz Sedis, see page 505; may be only a division of the Acanthop- terygii Pareioplite. 2 Families as defined by Boulenger. 3 (up06601, tassels, a fringe, rrepvyzor,a little wing, fin, in allusion to the tassel-like pectoral fins, or to the fringe-like dorsals of Polypterus.) 4 Except possibly the ventral fin of Eusthenopteron and its allies. 5 See Appendix II. / THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES it of the hyomandibular has not yet segmented off to form a symplectic, although the jaw suspension is methyostylic.! (8) The mandible has usually several dentigerous splenials on its inner side. (9) The large gular plates are bordered by small anterior and numerous lateral gulars. (10) The scales are bony with a heavy coating of ganoine, and apparently represent clusters of shagreen-like denticles. (11) The ribs are both hypaxonic (hemapophyses) and epaxonic (parapophyses). There is much evidence that the Crossopterygii are nearly related to the Dipnoi and Amphibia (pp. 444). And in the > other direction Dean calls them “osseous sharks,’’ because: (1) The scales seem to indicate derivation from clusters of shagreen cusps. (2) Polypterus retains a spiracle, an optic chiasma, and shark-like viscera including a spiral valve and a conus arteriosus. (3) The lobate paired fins may be interpreted as having been derived from the non-lobate form seen in Sharks and in the pelvic fin of Eusthenopteron. The Crossopterygii parallel the Actinopteri in (1) the replace- ment of cartilage by bone, both in the endo- and exoskeletons, (2) the aggregation and fusion of shagreen tubercles into scales and plates, (3) the development (in the Coelacanths) of the swim- bladder as a hydrostatic organ and its ossification, as in certain catfishes, (4) the adaptive radiation of the body form from the primitive fusiform type into short-bodied and long-bodied types (even an eel-like form, Calamotchthys, being at last evolved), (5) the modification of the heterocercal tail into the diphycercal and gephyrocercal types, (6) the reduction in number of the der- mal rays for closer correlation with the endoskeletal supports and the development of mobile fins supported by strong dermal rays, (7) the reduction and proximal withdrawal (especially in Coelacanths) of the cartilaginous elements of the paired fins part passu with the increase in size of the dermal fin rays. Nos. 4-7 enable the movements of the internal skeleton to be trans- 1]. e. with the metapterygoid and opercular bones assisting the hyo mandibular in the support or bracing of the quadrate or mandible. See Gregory, ‘‘The Relations of the Anterior Visceral Arches to the Chon- drocranium,’’ Biological Bulletin, Vol. VII, No. 1, June, 1904, pp. 55-69. 458 WILLIAM K. GREGORY mitted without loss of power to the dermal fins. In general among vertebrates, as specialization for easy swimming progresses, the sources of movement become more deeply seated, and the extent and mobility of the freely flapping membrane increase. ‘This law is illustrated among fishes, marine reptiles, and aquatic mammals. Boulenger, followed by Bridge,! includes the Rhipidistia and Actinistia under the “‘suborder’’ Osteolepida (here taken as an order), with the following definition: ; ‘““The obtusely or acutely lobate pectoral fins articulate with the pectoral girdle by a single basal endoskeletal element. WNostrils on the ventral surface of the snout. Two dorsal fins and an anal fin. Dermal bones of the ethmoid region often fused with one another and with the premaxille in front and the frontals behind to form a continuous rostral shield. Infra-dentary bones may be present. A series of lateral jugular plates often present in addition to the pair of principal plates.” In contrast with this the surviving order Cladistia (including only the Polypteride) is thus defined: “Pectoral fins uniserial and abbreviate, with three basal endoskeletal elements. Nostrils on the upper surface of the snout. Entire skeleton well ossified. Notochord replaced by bony amphiccelous vertebral centra. Bones of the ethmoid region not fused to form a rostral shield. Infra- deutary bones absent. Juglar plates reduced to a single pair of large plates.”’ The following analysis of the ordinal characters of the Cros- sopterygii was drawn up by Prof. H. F. Osborn and Dr. J. H. McGregor after Cope and Smith Woodward. 1 Cambridge Nat. Hist. Vol. Fishes, etc., pp. 477, 481. 459 THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES "yU200 XT “styzyvompjpy *sndajgajod *AqrAeo djnd s[dutg *TeOLUOD “Orquioy “‘quosoid (sosAydodrurey) Sqit o1uoxedAY pue (sesAydode -Ingjd) stuoxeda YAOg “x21q9,19A snojaoo1ydure peyisso Aq pooeidat Ajesi1eT *poonp -o1 ApjeoIs aqo7Ty *sTeSeq salut, “oyeqoy Ajasnyqo “4104S "shel [eur -Iop surpuodsor -109 94} Isquinu ut [enbe sjerpeiose g *jeore001A4 des TAL ‘soyUy oqur . dn uexoiq [esiod Agyxn Speer dion (adoQ) nessun] oy ciika ee) “Q 0 (@) wossq “nN DUOGosID I DULpus) snYyUDIDIDD PIOPAD x21q, -9}.10A PoyissoO ON pe}ort4suo0du () ayeqo} Ajesnyzqo “4104S ayeqot Ajesnyqo “4.1045 ‘sheUl uy [eWtop pue seys1e [erqez1eA snonsty -u09 Y4IM Jequinu Ul sade s|eIpetr Jepneg ‘[eors9Ayd -Ip-o1sydes Ie, “wins A1904.diseq, poytOF YJIM jeue pure [esiop IOT1e Sod (4m) ply} weovpaog (edo) nysiuijsp uBlUIed “OT ‘uOgieD “UOADG shyzyqupose WY sndajgo0jdrq SNISANY T, $1421031SC Moy ‘ased qe ADYBYS Peplod o1quroy y peyis -SO @Iqo}JOA SUTY ayeqoT Ajyesnzqo “4104S 9yeq OT Ajesnjzqo ‘4104S ‘mOgIeD “UOANG UOsaIGOUsYISHA, sesdopoz1yyy SnposdadS SHPOZLYST MoT aseq 7@ pepjoy PIOPAD peyis -SO &1Go}.19A-SUIyy ayeqoy Ajasnzqo ‘4104S ay eqoy Ajasnzqo ‘4104S UeIUOADG snryotjqgojo ry snosewin Poploy Apeor4) PIopsg wid, -9}19A PaYIssoO ON peyorysuo0ou () ye10j0ed uelyy osnjqo oto} ‘shel [eULop YIM sepis 40g uo poesursy ‘(su0]) eyeqoy ‘Ajaynoy ‘sheer [eulIop posoddo oy} uUeY} SnoJouINU Sse] S[EIPER ‘001d a[SUIS @ SUIUIIOT “PadseyPOO ole UY YoOee JO STeSeq ay} [eIJUSA oY} pPue [esIOp 1OI10}sod oy} UT *jepneo ® pue ‘[er}UeA uO ‘sTesIOop OM} Aq poJueseides uy weIpeyy (PreEMpoomM *S “V) seprdejoojsC, (arenbexy) epryuopozry | (dog) nusypedyy (avenbexy) wpryoAydojory IIDAYALIOSSOUD AAGCAOAAd NS Sniojimoqieg “MOT SNUSDAAD T, proquoyy q quojsisiag uMOUxU A) ayeqoy Ajssn}qO “snorjouinu o10Ur yonu sker [eur -I9q, “UOj}eTS3{S erxe JO seyore pesoddo ueyy snoieumnu 910ur ‘sjpipDs pure SjDsS -DQ JO SaTies IPT -nsel ‘Uy UeIpeut snonut}uo0os suC_ piusessey, (edog) used x7 14429, S31DIS 1D4qaj4a f\ pup psoyzojoNn) ssuyf 202J9q Jsuty, 1040499q ‘suit, UDIpa Ty *ATINVA >awad ao 460 WILLIAM K. GREGORY Infraclass ACTINOPTERI! Cope. This infraclass includes all the remaining ‘Ganoidei’ and “Teleostei,’ the vast majority of living fishes. In fossil forms these ray-finned types are readily distinguished from the lobe- finned Crossopterygii or the Dipnoi. Principal Characters. (Compare Crossopterygii, p. 456). (1) The paired fins are non-lobate, i.e., the endoskeletal parts (basals or “‘axonosts’’ and radials or ‘‘baseosts”’) are greatly reduced, so that the blade or free portion of the fin is formed entirely of dermal rays. (2) The median fins are unlike the paired fins; they exhibit dermal rays which articulate proximally with baseosts and these in turn with axonosts, which primarily cor- respond in number with the neural and hemal spines; the median fins are primitively bordered anteriorly by large fin fulcra (lost in later and progressive forms). These fulcra or ridge-scales are ‘‘ medium, spine-like or \-shaped scales”’ (Bridge). (3) In the most primitive forms there is only one dorsal fin, which may give rise in the higher forms to two or more, (4) caudal fin is primitively heterocercal, but in later forms is modified into the homocercal, diphycercal, and gephyrocercal types. (See Appendix II.) (5) The spiracles are reduced or obliterated. (6) The distal end of the hyomandibular gives origin to the symplectic (sometimes absent). (7) The jaw suspension is methyostylic? and the mandible progressively simplifies by the reduction of splenials and surangulars. (8) The gular plates are progressively reduced; concomitantly the branchiostegals become more and more important. (9g) The scaly exoskeleton (sometimes reduced) consists either of (@) rhombic bony scales covered with ganoine and articulating one with the other, or (6) of cycloid or ctenoid scales with little or no ganoine, the bony tissue lacking the Haversian canals, or (¢c) of bony scutes and plates. (10) The ribs are hypaxonic (hemapophyses) only. (11) Except in sturgeons, etc., the chon- droskeleton largely ossifies, and the notochord is more or less superseded by enveloping vertebra. 1(auris, ray, TTEPOY, wing, fin.) 2See footnote’ page 457. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 461 The infraclass Actinopteri exhibits an amazing variety of forms grading from the shark-like cartilaginous Sturgeons and Paddle-fishes to the most specialized bony fishes. Two more or less continuous major groups or series are recognized, a more generalized ancient series the Ganoidei (term used in the sense explained on p. 444), and a more specialized modern series the Teleostei. Because morphologically annectant forms are nu- merous, it is difficult to draw a hard and fast taxonomic line between the two groups. Morphological Transition from Lower to Higher Types.! In the more generalized fossil Ganoids (Acipenseroidei): (1) the notochord is persistent (though strengthened by neural and hemal arches), (2) intermuscular or epipleural bones are absent, (3) infraclavicular plates are retained, (4) the scales are rhombic, bony, with a heavy ganoine lacquer, often with a peg-and- socket .articulation, (5) the dermal fin rays are much more numerous than their endoskeletal supports, (6) large fulcra strengthen the median fins anteriorly, (7) the tail is strongly heterocercal (save in Belonorhynchide), (8) baseosts (radials) persist in both pectoral and pelvic fins. But the higher or Hol- ostean Ganoids (e. g. Caturus, Leptolepis, see page 464) approxi- mate more and more to the Teleosts. Usually (1) the notochord is surrounded or replaced by ring-like ossifications (pleuro- and hypocentra) which finally (e. g. in Oligopleuride) become perfect vertebrz; (2) the scales, losing the peg-and-socket articu- lation, most of the ganoine, and the Haversian canals in the bone, become rounded to cycloidal, and deeply overlap; (3) the infra- clavicles are reduced or wanting, functionally replaced by the cleithra, or ‘“‘clavicles’; (4) intermuscular (epipleural and epineural) bones appear, giving the muscles better control of the backbone, while the development of a bony supraoccipital gives the body muscles a better hold upon the head; (5) the fins gradu- ally lose the fulcra and the dermal rays and become closely cor- related by reduction with their endoskeletal supports; (6) in the tail fin an upturning and abbreviation of the caudal axis causes an approach toward true homocercy (Appendix II); (7) baseosts disappear from the pelvic and are reduced in the pectoral fins; 1 See Plate XXX. A, ee. 462 WILLIAM K. GREGORY (8) gular plates slowly give way to branchiostegals as the head becomes narrower; (9) the splenials disappear from the mandible; (10) the hinder expansion of the maxillary gives rise to a separate supramaxillary; (11) the preoperculum withdraws from the cheek and comes into closer relationship with the pterygopalatine series, assisting in the support of the quadrate (note 1, p. 457); (12) the chondrocranium is now much reduced, and replaced by cartilage bones. Cohort GanorbeE! (J. Miller, Jordan, and Evermann) Superorder ACIPENSEROIDEI Traquair. (Palte X XIX) Notochord persistent, with neural and hemal arches. Teeth small or wanting. Infraclavicles present. Paired fins actinop- terous with a row of baseosts. A single dorsal and anal fin, with dermal rays more numerous than their supports; caudal fin (at least) with fulcra. Caudal fin heterocercal, the upper lobe usually scaly. Chondrocranium apparently but little ossi- fied, the cranial bones mainly dermal. Order Heterocerci Zittel Notochord persistent, but arches, spinous processes, and fin supports more or less ossified; opercular apparatus well developed; branchiostegal rays numerous. Unpaired, and usually also paired fins fringed with fulcra. Scales rhombic or rhomboidal, rarely cycloidal. Paleoniscidz Devonian to Upper Jurassic Platysomide Carboniferous and Permian Dictyopygide (Catopteride) Incerte Sedis Trias Order Chondrostei /. Miiller 1846. Endoskeleton chiefly cartilaginous. Opercular apparatus im- perfectly developed, the branchiostegal rays usually absent. Trunk almost or completely naked or with rows of bony plates. Chondrosteide Lias (Lower Jura) Acipenseridze Tertiary and Recent Polyodontidz Cretaceous (?) Eocene to Recent Belonorhynchide Incertz Sedis Trias and Lias (Lower Jura) / THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 463 The earliest known Actinopteran, Chetrolepis, of the Lower Old Red Sandstone and Upper Devonian, forerunner of the Palzoni- scide, can be readily distinguished from the contemporary and numerous Crossopterygians by its non-lobate paired fins, the archaic form of its heterocercal tail, its lack of paired central gular plates, and the corresponding development of lateral branchiostegal rays, and by its minute rhomboidal, obliquely arranged scales (almost suggesting those of Acanthodian Elasmo- branchs). This generalized type may be traced on the one hand into the deep-bodied Platysomide of the Carboniferous and Permian, and, on the other hand, through the Chondrosteide, into the long-bodied and more or less scaleless and degenerate Sturgeons (Chondrostei). Possibly on account of the restriction imposed by the simple rhombic type of squamation upon lateral flexures of the body in swimming, we observe: (1) the occurrence of deeply overlapping and even cycloid scales (Coccolepis of the Palzoniscide), and (2) the partial or complete suppression of the scales in Phanerosteon of the Palzoniscide, Dorypierus of the Platysomide, and in the entire suborder Chondrostei. It is noteworthy that the early Heterocerci, commonly grouped together in the family Palzoniscide, include forms (e. g¢. Chetro- lepis, Holurus, Coccolepis) which are so different in several important respects that they might almost be regarded as the types of distinct families. The Catopteride present a morphological advance in the direction of the Holostei, since they combine a Palzoniscid type of head with an externally homocercal tail. Dorypterus of the Upper Permian of Germany, regarded by Smith Woodward as a specialized offshoot from the Platysomide, is deep-bodied and Stromateus-like, and suggests Lampris in its general body form and its many-rayed ventrals (Jordan, ’o5). The Belonorhynchide may be either very aberrant Chon- drostei or ‘‘abnormally modified Crossopterygians.”! There is no trace of heterocercy in the tail (cf. the tail of Eusthe- 1 Reis, O. M., ‘‘ Zur Osteologie und Systematik der Belonorhynchiden _- und Tetragonolepiden,”’ Geogr. Jahresh., 1891 (1892), p. 157 A. S. Woodward, Cat. Foss. Fishes, Brit. Mus., Part III, 1895, pp. vii, Pl.’23. 464 WILLIAM K. GREGORY nopteron among Crossopterygians); the large conical teeth are separated by intervening minute teeth (cf. Rhizodontide among Crossopterygii but also Cheirolepis among Heterocerci); the opercular series is incomplete; the paired fins apparently exhibit a very feeble lobation (A. S. Woodward); fin fulcra are minute or absent; the sclerotic ring was probably ossified (cf. Undina among Crossopterygians). Superorder LEPIDOSTEOIDEI Bridge. (HoLosTEI J. Miller in part.) (Plate X XIX.) The superorder includes those Actinopterous Ganoids which are _ Lepidosteoid in the larger sense; it may have been derived from some stich forms as the Catopteride (page 463) among the Acipenseroidei, and indeed its oldest and most generalized representative, Acentrophorus of the Upper Permian, was long mistakenly referred to the Paleoniscide. But the group has progressed beyond the Chondrostei in the following assemblage of characters: Notochord and vertebre varying inversely in development, the vertebre ranging from incomplete pleuro- and hypocentral rings to complete centra. Teeth well developed. Chondrocra- nium more or less completely replaced by cartilage bones corresponding to those generally present in Teleosts, ‘‘while the palato-pterygoid cartilages, likewise modified by the growth of cartilage bones, separately articulate with the lateral ethmoid regions instead of meeting in a ventral symphysis beneath the basis cranii”’ (Bridge). A supramaxillary (derived from the hinder portion of the maxillary). The preoperculum no longer extending over the cheek but coming into intimate relation with the pterygoquadrate series and assisting in the support of the mandible (see p. 462). Opercular apparatus usually complete, with branchiostegal rays and often a gular plate; a bony supraoc- cipital in the higher types; baseosts in paired fins reduced, in pelvic fins lacking. The dermal rays in all fins extensively developed, equal in number to the endoskeletal supports. Infraclavicles replaced by cleithra (clavicles) meeting in a ventral symphysis. Fulcra on median and paired fins present, or reduced in later THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES A465 forms; tai] hemiheterocercal (to homocercal). Scales rhombic or rhomboidal, generally arranged in oblique series, frequently united above and below by peg-and-socket articulations, and grading into very thin rounded or cycloidal scales, which greatly overlap. The mandible retains splenial and coronoid elements. The principal divisions of the superorder Pep closrecicle: may be broadly sketched as follows: Suborder 1. Mesoganoidei nom. nov. r. Trunk more or less fusiform. Mouth small, teeth either styliform (Stylinodontide, Macrosemiidz), conical (Pholido- phoride), or tritoral (Lepidotide). Stylinodontide, examples: Acentrophorus, Trias, Up. Perm.; Semi- onotus (Ischypterus) Upper Permian to Upper Jurassic. Lepidotide, examples: Colobodus, Lepidotus, Trias to Cretaceous. 2. Trunk more elongate, mouth larger, marginal teeth styli- form. Macrosemiide, examples: Macrosemius, Ophiopsis, Notagogus, Trias to Cretaceous. 3. Retaining rhombic ganoid scales, but approximating in other characters toward the more generalized Isospondyles. Pholidophoridz, examples: Pholidophorus, Phioldopleurus, Trias-Jura. Dapediide, examples: Dapedius (placed near the Pholidophoride by Boulenger). Suborder 2. Pycnodonti Hay ex Agassiz Trunk deeply fusiform or cycloidal. Teeth, prehensile on premaxillary and dentary, tritoral on vomer and splenial, form- ing a highly specialized crushing apparatus. Systematic posi- tion uncertain but apparently an offshoot of the Lepidotus-like genera (Woodward, ’98, p. 101). Pycnodontide, examples: Pycnodus, Gyrodus, Microdon, Anomedus, Lower Jurassic to Lower Eocene. Suborder 3. Aspidorhynchi nom. nov. (Aetheospondyli Woodward in part.) Swordfish-like Lepidosteoids, ordinally united by Woodward - with the Lepidosteide, but differing from them in the possession of a predentary or premandibular bone and in the more normal character of the vertebre. 466. WILLIAM K. GREGORY Suborder 4. Ginglymodi Cope. With opisthoccelus vertebre. Lepidosteide, Lepidosteus, Up. Cretaceous to Recent. Suborder 5. Halecomorphi Cope. (Amioidei Liitken.) Trunk elongate; mouth large; predaceous, with piercing teeth. Exhibiting a progressive advance in the direction of the Iso- spondyli. 1. Eugnathide. Vertebre absent or incomplete. Examples: Eug- nathus, Caturus, Trias to Cretaceous. 2. Pachycormide. Swordfish-like Amioids. Vertebral axis without segmental vertebre. Upper Lias (Lower Jurassic) to Upper Cretaceous. 3. Amide. WVertebree complete. Pleuro- and hypocentra in caudal region. Upper Jurassic to Recent. 4. Oligopleuride. WVertebre well ossified, with no distinct pleuro- and hypocentra. Scales very thin and cycloid. Upper Jurassic to Upper Cretaceous. This family may deserve a higher taxonomic rank (Dean). Cohort TELEosTE!! Owen. The difficulty of separating the lower Teleosts from the higher Ganoids has been commented upon above (page 461). Although no phylogenetic series of genera has been definitely traced, connecting the Lepidosteoidei (Holostei) and the Mala- copteroidei, it is easy to arrange a morphological series? leading back into some such Triassic Ganoids as the Pholidophoride. These show rhombic ganoid scales, small fin-fulcra, ring-like centra, and no intermuscular bones (i. e. ganoidean characters), combined with a carp-like form, homocercal tail, and no gular plates.. The Leptolepidide furnish the desired transition to the Isospondyli; since they reduce the ganoine and fin fulcra, develop a few intermuscular bones, and perfect the centra, changing the rhombic into cycloid scales. In the early Cretaceous Clupeoids the skeleton is so closely similar to that of the typical Jurassic Leptolepidide that Smith Woodward? believes that the Clupeoids “‘may well be direct descendants” of the Leptolepidide. 1 réleos, perfect, o6réor, bone. 2See Plate XXX, 2 Cat. Foss. Fishes, Brit. Mus., Part IV, 1901, p. vii. ; q | THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 467 Superorder MALACOPTEROIDEI nom nov.! Puysostomr? (J. Miller in part.) (IsoSPONDYLI -+- OSTARIOPHYST.) (Plate: SOS.) The connection between the Ostariophysi or Characin-Carp- Catfish series and the Isospondyli or typical soft-rayed fishes (ec. g. Clupeide, Salmonide, Osteoglossidz) is indicated by the following characters in common: (1) The air bladder if well developed communicates with the digestive tract by a duct. (2) The mesocoracoid arch is present. (eine orbitosphenoid. is present. (4) The pelvic fins if present are abdominal. (5) The fin rays (except the single pectoral and dorsal spines of Catfishes) are soft or articulated. (6) The presence of an adipose dorsal fin in many Heterognathi (Characins) and Nematognathi (Siluroids) as in the Salmon-like fishes. However all these common characters may have been inherited from different ancestral families of the Mesoganoidei (p. 465). Boulenger restricts the term Malacopterygii of Artedi and of Cuvier to practically the same content as the term Iso- spondyli of Cope, the two divisions, Malacopterygii and Ostario- physi, being given coérdinate rank as suborders of the order Teleostei. For the reasons given it seems better to use a new term, Malacopteroidei, in a broad or superordinal sense to include the two orders Isospondyli Cope and Ostariophysi Sagemehl. Order Isospondyli? Cope The name Isospondyli refers to the fact that, in contrast with the Ostariophysi (see page 472), the anterior vertebre are not coalesced, nor are their processes modified into Weberian auditory -ossicles. The vertebral centra are calcified, without separate pleuro- and hypocentra, but sometimes (in the Leptolepidide) slightly perforated by the notochord. The broad maxillary forms part of the margin of the upper jaw, in the more primitive 1 wahanuos, soft, mrepor, fin. 2 pv6os, bladder, 6rou“a, mouth, in allusion to the duct from the swim bladder into the cesophagus. 31605, equal, GrovdvA0s, vertebra. 468 WILLIAM K. GREGORY forms articulating independently of the premaxillary with the ethmoid (contrast the Ostariophysi). A symplectic is usually present!; the opercular bones are complete? (contrast the Ostariophysi) ;the pharyngeal bones are simple, above and below; the bony supraoccipital, in many forms still separated by the parietals from the frontals, progressively gains contact with the frontals (see page 471). Asin Ostariophysi and actinopterous Ganoids, the precoracoid (mesocoracoid) arch is retained and the pectoral arch is suspended from the skull by a bony post- temporal. The simple air bladder (usually present) has a pneumatic duct leading into the digestive tract. The dermal rays of the median fins articulate with an equal number of endoskeletal supports. The dorsal and anal fins are spineless,° i. e. the fin rays are articulated, the pectorals (when present) are abdominal. Intermuscular bones are present. The caudal heemapophyses and neurapophyses progressively expand and fuse into hypural and epural bones, the caudal portion of the verte- bral column degenerating and becoming upturned, the tail finally becoming completely homocercal. Ganoidean characters, such as intergulars, interclavicles, fin fulcra, ganoine, splenials, coro- noids, the intestinal spiral valve, and the multivalvular bulbus arterious, are all greatly reduced or absent. The ordinal characters of this group are all generalized as ~ compared with those of other Teleosts, which is equivalent to saying that the order is a central one related to the ancestors of the Mesichthyes and Acanthopteroidei. The generalized Lep-- tolepidide from the Jurassic and Cretaceous have already been noticed. The Elopidz are the most generalized of living Teleosts, with numerous representatives in the Cretaceous (e.g. Spaniodon), and with two surviving genera, Elops and the Tarpon (Ve- galops), both of which retain the Ganoidean gular plates. A progressive character is the forward and upward growth of the supraoccipital, which attains such importance in higher orders, 1 Except in Mormyride, Phractolemidez, Cromeriide. 2 Except in Pantodontide. 3’ Compare, however, the non-articulated rays in the dorsal fin of the Ctenothrisside. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 469 but the supraoccipital has not yet displaced the parietals in the median line. “The Albulide are merely Elopine fishes with a forwardly inclined mandibular suspensorium, a small mouth, and reduced branchiostegal apparatus. Their primitive character is, indeed, shown by the presence of a muscular conus arteriosus with two rows of valves inthe heart of the sole surviving species.! They seem to differ from the Elopide in exactly the same manner as the more generalized Pycnodontide differ from the Semi- onotide among Jurassic fishes. Now, however, the splenial bone has disappeared, and is no longer available to bear a powerful dentition. A new modification, therefore, occurs for the first time, and is almost constantly repeated in later fishes which have teeth on the palate or the base of the skull. This upper dentition is henceforth usually opposed not to the mandible but to a dental arrangement on the tongue or hyoid apparatus” (A. S. Woodward?). Among the Cretaceous Albulids, [stieus is ancestral to the existing genus Bathythrissa, a long-bodied, deep-sea form. The existing members of the Elopide and Albulide undergo a developmental metamorphosis, the ribbon- shaped larve frequently being abyssal, like the larve of Eels. In both families the large maxillary is movably articulated above the premaxillary to the ethmoid (Boulenger), and the jaws, oral cavity, and throat are thickly studded with teeth. The Osteoglosside are more specialized than the preceding families in the union of the larger maxillaries with the pre- maxillaries. The teeth, on the jaws, pterygoid and hyoid bones are thickly clustered. The four existing genera parallel the three existing genera of Dipnoi in habit and especially in distribution. This probably indicates that the Osteoglosside existed in the Jurrasic, side by side with the widely dispersed Dipnoi, the ranges of the groups being subsequently restricted part passu. The head is scaleless, protected by thick derm bones; the large bony scales are composed of mosaic-like pieces. The huge Ar- 1**7. H. V. Boas, ‘ Ueber den Conus arteriosus bei Butirinus und bei anderen Knochenfischen,’ Morphol. Jahrb., Vol. VI, 1880, p. 528.” 2 Catalogue of the Fossil Fishes in the British Museum, Pt. 1V, 1901, pp. WAL, Walle 470 WILLIAM K. GREGORY apawna gigas of Brazil, sometimes weighing 400 pounds, is more or less anguilliform (Appendix I). Osteoglossum also presents some approach toward the gephyrocercy of the tail fin (Ap- pendix II). More generalized short-bodied genera (Dapedoglossus, Brachyetus) are known fromthe Eocene. The peculiar Pantodon- tide of West Africa, also short-bodied fishes, are essentially Osteoglossid flying-fishes with the pectoral fins greatly enlarged and the ventrals far forward as in the Ctenothrisside. A still more aberrant member of the Malacopterygii, apparently related to the Osteoglosside, is the unique Phractolemus ansorgu, which might almost be placed in a separate suborder codrdinate with the Scyphophori. The mouthis edentulous, projectile, proboscidi- form; the supraoccipita! is in contact with the frontals; the enormous interoperculars overlap below in the median line. The Mormyride of the fresh waters of Africa north of the tropic of Capricorn have a funnel-like cavity in the pterotic region, closed by a lid-like supratemporal, possibly functioning like a Weberian auditory apparatus since the air bladder com- municates with the ear. Cope founded the order Scyphophori chiefly upon this character, which is largely realized also in the Hyodontidz or Moon-Eyes of North America. Boulenger believes this group to be related to the Albulidze. The brain is comparatively enormous. The Gymnarchide are eel-like Mor- myrids, and like them have a feebly developed electric organ on either side of the tail. The long dorsal fin enablesthem to swim backward or forward equally well. The West African and oriental Notopteridze (Feather- backs), which Boulenger regards as ‘‘an eccentric modification of a type very similar to the Hyodontide,’”’ are of a peculiar rhomboidal shape, with very long anal fin (hypocercal type, Appendix II), which characters (here possibly correlated with marsh-living, partly terrestrial habits) are realized to a slight extent in Dorasoma (the Gizzard Shad) and more strongly in Cozla among the Herrings. “The primitive nature of the Chirocentride’’ (Sauro- dontide), says Smith Woodward,' ‘“‘has long been inferred from the presence of a rudimentary spiral valve in the intestine of the sole surviving species, Chirocentrus dorab. This family 1 Cat. Foss. Fishes Brit. Mus., Part IV, 1901, p. Vii. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES A471 of fishes is, indeed, now proved to be very old, dating back at least to the beginning of the Cretaceous period, during which it attained its maximum development.” The Cretaceous genus _ Portheus attained gigantic size (4.7 m.). Like so many other relics of Cretaceous fish faunas, the nearest living representative of this family (Chirocentrus) is found in the Indian Ocean and the seas of China and Japan. The true Clupeoid fishes (Herrings, Anchovies, etc.) lead back through the genus Thrissopater of the Middle Cretaceous to the Elopide. The Anchovies (Engrauline) may be derived from Spaniodon of the Upper Cretaceous, the Milk-fishes (Chanine) from Prochanos of the Cretaceous, the Clupeinze from Pseudo- beryx and several other genera from the Upper Cretaceous. Certain Cretaceous Clupeoids, namely, the Ctenothrisside, were formerly allocated with the spiny-finned Berycide (see p. 501), on account of the forward displacement of the pelvic fins, and of the spiny or non-articulated character of the four anterior rays of the dorsal; but Boulenger points out that in the small pre- maxillaries and enlarged maxillaries they agree with the Mala- copterygii, whilst inthe forward position of the ventrals they are “most nearly approached by the Pantodontide’’ (Boulenger). The Salmonidze and their allies differ from the Clupeide chiefly in (1) the presence of a small adipose fin, (2) in the con- tact between the supraoccipital and the frontals, and (3) in the vestigial condition of the oviducts, the ova (as in the Osteo- glosside, Hyodontide) falling into the cavity of the abdomen before exclusion (Boulenger); but their exact relationships are not known. They are believed by Boulenger to be of ‘‘compara- tively recent age, no remains older than Miocene. . . being certainly referable to this family.” The Alepocephalidz, deep-sea Clupeoids, lacking an adipose dorsal, and with the rayed fin very far back. The Stomiatide, aberrant deep-sea forms paralleling the Scopeloids, but with the maxillary instead of the premax- illary greatly enlarged, the pectoral fins often disappearing, while the pelvic fins are large. Extremely variable in body form, including long, eel-like forms, and short, Beryx-like forms. The Gonorhynchide are believed by A. S. Woodward 472 _ WILLIAM K. GREGORY to be nearly related to the Scopelide (p. 487), but are assigned to the Isospondyli by Boulenger. They are represented in the Upper Cretaceous of Europe and in the freshwater Eocene beds of France and North America. The sole existing species is known from the seas off Japan, South Africa, Australia, and New Zealand. They are somewhat pike-like in form, with sturgeon- like mouth and snout; they have scaly fins, peculiar ctenoid scales of an advanced type, and a long ‘accessory scale’ on the paired fins, like certain other members of this assemblage. Resembling the Gonorhynchidzis the tiny fish Cromeria, recently discovered in the White Nile, for which a new family has been erected. Superorder MALACOPTEROIDEI (cont'd). (Plate XXIX.) Order Ostariophysi! Sagemehl 1885. (Plectospondyli Cope + Glanencheli Cope + Nematognathi Gill.) In this principally fresh-water group, which comprises the Catfishes, Carps, Characins and Gymnotids, the anterior four vertebre are greatly modified, often codssified, their ribs and neural and hemal elements forming a chain of bones connecting the air bladder with the auditory organ. The importance of these bones in classification was indicated by Cope in his diagnosis of the orders Plectospondyli Cope (Carps and Characins), Glan- encheli Cope (Gymnotids), and Nematognathi Gill (Catfishes). These ossicles have been shown by Sagemehl to be severally homologous and to have the same relations with the spinal nerves, throughout the order, which is hence regarded by Bou- lenger as ‘‘one of the most natural groups of the class Pisces.” Points of agreement with the Isospondyli are: (2) the air bladder, if well developed, communicates with the digestive tract by a duct; (2) the pectoral arch is suspended from the skull; (3) . the mesocoracoid (precoracoid) arch is present; (4) the pelvic fins if present are abdominal; (5) the fin rays are soft and articu- lated, except the pectoral and the dorsal spines of catfishes, 1 66radplov, a little bone, puGos, bladder, in allusion to the Weberian auditory ossicles. ; : THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 473. each of which results from the codéssification of the segments of a single articulated ray. Four suborders are here recognized: (1) Heterognathi Gill (Characins), (2) Glanencheli Cope (Gymnonoti Gill, Gymnotids), (3) Eventognathi Gill (Carps), (4) Nematognathi Gill (Catfishes). These exhibit many divergences of form and structure, upon which several orders have hitherto been based. On the other hand, their common origin seems so well assured that Smith Woodward and Boulenger, in adopting Sagemehl’s group ““Ostariophysee,” unite them into a single order, without major divisions; but it here seems preferable to recognize the suborders named above. The Characins are undoubtedly the most generalized and are regarded by Boulenger as representing the ancestral stock, which gave off (1) the Gymnotids as a specialized eel-like side branch, and (2) an undiscovered annectant form leading to both Catfishes and Carps. The group is almost exclusively non-marine. Order Ostariophysi(coni’d). Suborder Heterognathi! Gull The Characins. The subordinal characters of this group, as compared with those of the Carps and Catfishes, are nearly all primitive. Thus barbels are lacking, the head is naked, the body covered with eycloid scales, both premaxillaries and maxillaries form the margin of the upper jaw,? the premaxillaries are not protrusile, the jaws usually toothed; the upper pharyngeal bones are often as many as four; lower pharyngeals are normal, armed with small, sometimes villiform teeth; the osseous brain-case is not produced between the orbits, an adipose dorsal is often present, the air bladder is transversely divided into two portions; and (in contrast with the Catfishes) the maxillaries are well developed, the fin 1érepos, different, yvvd@os, jaw, in allusion to the various modifica- tions of the jaws and teeth. 2 Save in Ichthyoborus and Neoborus, which parallel the Nematognathi in the reduction of the maxillary and its exclusion from the oral gape (Boulenger). ATA WILLIAM K, GREGORY rays all soft, the body scaly, the parietals not fused with the supraoccipitals. None of their independent specializations is of subordinal value, but in the typical Characins (1) the skull is ‘‘more or less invaded by reéntering valleys from behind,”’ (2) the supraoccipi- tal is ‘‘partly superior and carinated by a procurrent crest” (Gill), (3) the ribs are mostly sessile, all the greater number of the precaudal vertebrae being without parapophyses (Boulenger.) The Characins, although clearly allied to the other Ostario- physi, show many analogies in appearance with the Salmonide among Isospondyles. They present a great range of genera and species characteristic of the fresh waters of tropical America and Africa south of the Sahara. In Africa they accompany their re- mote relatives the Carps, but in tropical America they entirely replace them. Many are extremely predaceous, others are ex- clusively vegetable feeders; the dentition is equally diversified.+ A peculiar group, the Gymnotide, or Characin Eels, was given ordinal rank (Gymnonoti) by Cope, Gill, and others, but Rein- hardt has proved that they are simply a highly specialized offshoot from the Characins, from which they differ chiefly in the eel-like body, obsolete dorsal and pectoral fins, and forward shifting of the anus to a point near the throat. They exhibit close analogies (due to living in turgid rivers) to the eel-like Mormyrs of Africa (Appendix I). The famous Electric Eel (Gymnotus electricus) also parallels the Mormyrid Gymnarchus and the Electric Catfish (Walapterurus) in the possession of an electric organ on either side of the tail. ‘COMPARISON OF THE CHIEF DiaGNosTic CHARACTERS OF THE SUBORDERS OF OSTARIOPHYSI. (Compiled from Jordan and Evermann, Eigenmann, Boulenger.) HETEROGNATHI EVENTOGNATHI NEMATCGNATHI (Characins) (Carps) (Catfishes) Bodyawieehumeear oCaly 05 Sick sheer Scaly or naked...Naked or armed with bony plates. Gad s.ueeienns INiailce diese: Creaae INaiedinea: wee Naked or armed with bony plates. Barbelsia neta INOS abe rece Present or absent Present. IM Gui at cieremeeae Not protractile...More or less pro- Not protractile. tractile. 1See Eigenmann, C. H., in Biol. Bull., Vol. VIII, Jan, 1905 p. 6r. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 475 Margin of upper (Characins) (Carps) (Catfishes) TEA che eee Formed by pre- Formed by pre- Formed by pmx. max. and max. max.orby pre- alone;mx. much max. and max. reduced. Mechonjaws....Often present.....Absent......:... Absent or limited to pmx. Upper pharyn- Beals. Seon pee Tee Airey sires le eieaconate DES a OREN pee ee ? Normal. Lower pharyn- BAIN ae -ocmae Normal, toothless. Falciform, toothed. Normal. Opercular appara- (OS e cee Normal, complete. Normal, complete. Lacking suboper- culum and some- times operculum. Braid CHase....... Not ossified later- Ossified laterally Ossified laterally ally between between orbits. between orbits. orbits. eetals ss... Distinct from su- Distinct from su- Usually fused with praoccipital. praoccipital. the supra occipi- tal which is great-_ ly developed. Adipose dorsal....Often present..... PANO G apiaowe Ue Often present. mliaberelavicles’’). Absent.......... INSANE Ao pico eo Present. Parapophyses on precaudal WER ahapae ANOSHME ns oda ae eee MNOSEMNG He So ness Often present. IbyAoniciczeca...... Oftenworesemts mene NOSeibn eevee se ? Order Ostariophysi (cont'd). Suborder Nematognathi! Guill The Catfishes. The name Nematognathi refers to the reduction of the maxil- lary to a slender element bearing the thread-like barbels; the premaxillaries alone forming the margin of the upper jaw.? Barbels are always present; the premaxillaries are not protractile, jaw-teeth if present are limited to the premaxillaries; the skull (as in Carps) is closed at the side by the orbitosphenoids and ethmoid; the supraoccipital is greatly developed, and usually fused with the parietals; an adipose dorsal fin is often present. The Catfishes show certain resemblances to the Acipenseroidei, in that: (1) the skin is naked, or armed with either bony scutes or plates; (2) the suboperculum is absent; (3) certain forms (Doras) exhibit fulcra-like scutes on the anterior border of the median fins; (4) the clavicles are braced inferiorly: by infraclavicular plates. The latter, however, are not generally 1vnua, thread, yva90S, jaw. 2 Except in Diplomystes (Eigenmann.) A476 WILLIAM K. GREGORY regarded as homologous with the infraclavicles seen in Ganoids and all the resemblances to the Acipenseroidei are doubtless analogical, not homological, In the armored forms an elaborate system of tuberculated bony plates protects the head and shoulders (in a manner analo- gous to the plates of Dinichthyids among Arthrodires), and is supported posteriorly by the coalesced neural arches and by the stout shoulder girdle. The anterior fin ray, in the pectoral and dorsal fins, forms a great bony spine, which is erected and locked (in the dorsals) by an ingenious modification of the underlying neural spines, or (in the pectorals) of the basals. The adaptive radiation of structure and habit among the 1000 species of Siluroids is extraordinarily great, and may indicate -a great antiquity for the group; but many seemingly annec- tant forms still exist, and Eigenmann! traces all the higher subfamilies back to the American Diplomysteidz, which retain dentigerous maxillaries forming part of the border of the mouth.? Fossil forms are rare. KRhineastes from the Wasatch or Lower Eocene of North America is probably related to the Pimelodine, from which, says Eigenmann,? “‘the present North American forms are, not unlikely, lineal descents.’’ The gigantic Leopard Catfish Bagarius yarrelt of India and Java is represented in the Pliocene of the Siwalik Hills in Northern India. Although some of the genera belonging to the least specialized subfamilies Pimelodinze and Tachisurine are marine, the ma- jority of Catfishes shun competition with the higher Teleosts by living in muddy instead of clear water, a fact which may have determined the survival of the group. In correlation with this habit: (1) the eyes are often comparatively small; (2) the direction in which food lies is detected by the barbels or even by the skin, both of which in the naked forms are sensitively gustatory as well as tactile in function (Herrick); (3) in many genera the 1“ Revision of the South American Nematognathi or Catfishes,”’ Calzf. Acad. of Science, Occasional Papers, Vol. I, 1890. 2 The single genus Diplomystes should not be confused with the Clupeoid genus Diplomystus. 3** A Catalogue of the Fresh-Water Tienes of South America,’”’ Proc. U- Sh Nats Mauss Viole eiVE Teor ips it. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES A477 _ difficulties of respiration in muddy water have been met by the development of accessory organs enabling the fish to take oxygen directly from the air. As inthe case of certain Dipnoi, this condition has made possible more or less amphibious or even terrestrial habits, with correlated specializations for locomotion. Thus Doras, one of the South American forms, moves rapidly on land, “‘projecting itself forward on the pectoral spines by the elastic spring of the tail, travelling long journeys overland from one drying pond to another, spending whole nights on the way.”’ Equally noteworthy are such bizarre forms as Malapterurus, the Electric Catfish, the completely cuirassed Callichthys, Chetostomus, Loricaria, the Sucking Catfish Pseudecheneis, and the parasitic Bdellostoma-like Vandellia. Order Ostariophysi (cont'd). Suborder Eventognathi! Gill. (Plectospondyli Cope in part.) The Carps. In the Carps the food is sucked in by the toothless protrusile mouth and is masticated in the throat by the falcate toothed lower pharyngeals, which thus function like the jaws of other fishes. To this fact the name Eventognathi refers. In contrast with the Catfishes, the Carps have no spine in the fins, the broad parietals are distinct from the supraoccipital, the opercular appa- ratus is complete (i. e. the suboperculum is present), scales are usually present and there are no infraclavicular plates, nor an adipose dorsal fin. On the other hand, a suggestive agreement with the Catfishes is expressed in the naked head, the frequent presence of barbels, the frequency with which the premaxillary alone forms the margin of the upper jaw, and the closure of the brain case laterally by the orbitosphenoids and ethmoid; while further points of agreement with the Catfishes are found under the ordinal characters of the Ostariophysi (p. 473). Again, some of the Loaches parallel certain of the Catfishes, in (1) the elongation _ of the body, (2) the reduction of the scales, (3) the presence of an erectile, defensive spine (in this case suborbital), (4) the 1 ev, well, évTds, Within, yvabos, jaw. 478 WILLIAM K. GREGORY presence of six barbels, (5) the inferior position of the mouth, — (6) the fact that the air bladder is in immediate contact with — the skin; and these independently acquired characters seem to indicate the possession of ‘‘a potential of similar evolution” by ancestors of each of the groups. : The order does not present as wide a range of variation as do the Nematognathi, possibly because of its more recent origin. There are four families: (1) The Catostomide or Suckers’ (e.g. Ictiobus) are the more primitive, in that the maxillary forms part of the margin of the upper jaw while the pharyngeal teeth are very numerous. On the other hand, in (2) the Cyprinide or true Carps, the maxillary does not form part of the margin of the upper jaw, simply assisting in the protrusion of the mouth, while the pharyngeal teeth are reduced in number. About 200 genera and nearly 1000 species are known (Jordan). The North American genera while very closely related, are separated by characters which although reasonably constant are often of slight structural importance (Jordan). An interesting speciali- zation is the highly colored breeding dress of the males. (3) The Cobitideze or Loaches (described above). (4) The Homalopteride, mountain forms with depressed head and horizontally expanded paired fins ‘“‘which sometimes form a sucking disk.’’ All members of the order inhabit freshwater. Fossil forms date from the Upper Tertiary and are closely allied to or identical with living genera. The Eventognathi are probably ‘‘modern”’ (Middle Tertiary) offshoots of the ostariophysan stem. The union of the Eventognathi (Carps) with the Heterognathi (Characins) into the order Plectospondyli while justly expressing the ultimate kinship of these two groups arbitrarily separates them from the Nematognathi (Catfishes). Superorder UNCERTAIN. Order Apodes! Linnaeus. The Eels. (Plate XXIX.) Under this name Linnzus grouped many wholly unrelated forms 1 d, without, 7ovs, foot, from the absence of pelvic fins. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES A7Y which had independently lost the pelvic fins (Cf. Appendix I). By successive eliminations the order has been restricted to include only the Eels proper and their near allies, and the Morays. “The typical Apodes are unique among the so-called teleostean fishes in possessing more than five basal bonesinthe pectoral fin— a feature characteristic of all the lower groups of Actinopterygii - (A. S. Woodward').”’ They agree with the other physostomes (Isospondyli, Ostariophysi, Haplomi, etc.) in the following primitive characters: ‘(1) the air bladder (if present) communi- cates with the digestive tract by a duct, (2) the fins have no spines, (3) the small supraoccipital is separated from the frontals by the distinct parietals. They agree with the Haplomi, Iniomi, and higher Teleosts in the absence of the precoracoid (meso- coracoid) arch. The Apodes are especially distinguished by the following combination of characters: (i) the lack of any bony connection between the skull and the shoulder girdle which is in fact separated entirely from the skull. (2) The absence of the premaxillaries, which are functionally replaced by the den- tigerous vomer. (3) The coalescence of the vomer with the ethmoid. (4) The reciprocal development of the maxillaries and pterygopalatines, which functionally replace each other in different families. (5) The reduction of the opercular bones, which are deeply sunk in the integument. (6) The absence of the symplectic, or possibly its non-separation from the hyoman- dibular. (7) The absence of pelvic fins (except in the Anguilla- vide (Hay) of the Cretaceous, p. 481). (8) The multiplication of the vertebre (upto 225). (9) The anguilliform body. (10) The disappearance or extreme reduction of the scales. (11) The loss of the homocercal tail (vestiges of which seem to persist in Sim- enchelys and which was well developed in the Cretaceous genera Urenchelys and Anguillavus). (12) The union of the dorsal and anal fins with the tail-fininto the gephyrocercal form. (13) The occasional reduction of the vertical fins. The order seems to be an offshoot from some long-bodied Cretaceous Actinopteran with weak premaxillaries, slender, _toothed maxillaries, teeth on the vomers and pterygopalatines. The question of their relationship to the Isospondyliis not settled. 1Cat. Foss. Fishes, Brit. Mus., Part IV, root, p. x. Tt + ASO WILLIAM K, GREGORY On account (1) of their having more than five basal bones in the pectoral fin, and (2) of the presence of true Eels in the Cretaceous period, Dr. Smith Woodward! is of the opinion that the Apodes are not degenerate offshoots from the Isospondyli as here defined, but independent derivatives from some Holostean Ganoids. The ancestral Apodes were possibly pelagic, subsequently invading the rivers and giving off the fresh-water eels. These still require the salt water for the development of the reproductive organs, and undergo a remarkable metamorphosis, passing through a ‘Leptocephalus’ or Glass-eel stage quite similar to that of the Albulids among Isospondyles. Extremely predatory and vor- acious, sometimes becoming semiparasitic (Simenchelys; com- pare similar results among Cyclostomes). Swimming rapidly by lateral undulations, hence not requiring a homocercal tail for propulsion. Teeth primarily adapted for seizing and holding a struggling prey. The reduction of the maxillaries their functional replacement by the more advantageously placed pterygopalatines, and the separation of the latter from the quadrate, finally resulting (nthe Morays) ina large snake-like and very loose jaw-apparatus with backwardly inclined sus- pensorium; these changes in turn necessitating the great reduc- tion of the branchial and opercular bones, the total separation of the shoulder girdle from the skull, and the development of large branchial pouches for sucking in water. The classification here adopted is as follows: Order Apodes (Linn.) Kaup. Suborder'1. Archencheli Jordan Fam. Anguillavide Hay. Up. Cretaceous, Mount ee, non, Syria. Suborder 2. Enchelycephali Cope Fam. Anguillide (Eels) ‘‘ Nemichthyide (Thread Eels) ‘“« Synaphobranchidz Suborder 3. Colocephali Cope Fam. Murenide (Morays) 1 Op. Cit., p. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 481 Suborder 4. Carencheli! Gill Fam. Derichthyide Suborder 5. Lyomeri! Gill and Ryder Fam. Saccopharyngide (Gulpers) (1) Archencheli. Upper Cretaceous ‘“‘Apodes with well- developed cleithrum, pectoral arch, pectoral and ventral fins, and a distinct caudal fin . . . Palatopterygoid arch de- veloped. Scales rudimentary [vestigial] or absent; in some cases a row of enlarged plates on each side, probably on. the lateral lines. Ribs present. One genus Anguwillavus’”’ (Hay? 1903, Pp. 436). (2) Enchelycephali Cope (Eyxelus, eel, Kedardr, head), includ- ing according to Gill and Jordan, the Anguillide or true Eels, Simenchelyide (Pug-nosed Eels), Ilyophide (Ooze Eels), Synaphobranchide (Deep Sea Congers), Leptocephalide (Conger Eels), Murznesocide, Nettastomide (Sorcerers), Nemichthy- ide (Snipe Eels), Myride (Worm Eels), Ophichthyide (Snake Eels); these are all (except Nemichthyide) included in the family Anguillide by Boulenger. In these the gill openings are well developed, leading to large interbranchial slits, the tongue is present, the opercles and branchial bones are well developed, the scapular arch is present. (3) Suborder Colocephali Cope (xoAos, defective, xepadry, head), including according to the American school the Murenide (Morays), Myrocongride, Moringuidz; these are all called Mure- nide by Boulenger. In this highly degenerate group the gill openings are small, rounded, leading to restricted interbranchial slits, the tongue is wanting, the pectoral fins (typically) are wanting, the opercles reduced, the fourth gill arch modified, strengthened, and supporting pharyngeal jaws, the maxillaries are functionally replaced by the toothed palatopterygoid, the premaxillaries by the toothed ethmovomer. (4) Suborder Carencheli. According to Gill these deep-sea forms differ from the true Eels and Morays in the retention of 1 Of more or less uncertain relationship to the typical Apodes; may deserve separate ordinal rank. 2 Hay, O. P. “‘ Cretaceous Fishes from Mount Lebanon, Syria,’ Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., Vol. XIX, 1902. <0 ee 482 WILLIAM K. GREGORY premaxillaries, which are united by suture with the maxillaries, and immovably connected with the cranium. (5) Suborder Lyomeri (Gill and Ryder). According to Boulen- ger the very anomalous abyssal forms known as Saccopharyn- gide (Gulpers), formerly set apart as a distinct order Lyomeri, may be regarded as extremely degraded Eels, possibly related to the Synaphobranchide, which have entirely lost the pterygo- palatine arch, the branchiostegal rays, and the pharyngeal bones, the enormous slender jaws being loosely slung from the cranium by means of the slender hyomandibular and quadrate. Superorder UNCERTAIN (cont'd). Order Symbranchii! Guill. These extraordinarily eel-like and apodal forms? are distin- guished from the true Apodes by the following fundamental char- acters: (1) The more normal structure of the skull, in which the symplectic and metapterygoid are present, and the pre- maxillary is well developed, forming the greater part of the oral border. (2) In the more generalized family (Symbranchide) the shoulder girdle is attached to the skull through the well- developed forked posttemporal, but in the Amphipnoide the absence of the posttemporal leaves the shoulder girdle free from the skull, as in Apodes. (3): The gill openings on both sides are confluent into a single slit beneath the throat. (4) All known members of the group parallel Lepidosiren and Protop- terus among the Dipnoi, both in environment and in habits. The Amphipnoide possess lung-like respiratory diverticula of the branchial chamber, on each side of the neck, which are capable of taking oxygen directly from the air. From the structure of the skull we may infer that the Symbranchii are allied to the Isospondyli or possibly to the Haplomi. Superorder UNCERTAIN (cont'd). Order Heteromi?’ (Guill). ‘guy, together, Bpayyia, gills, in allusion to confluence of the gill openings into a single ventral slit. 2 Compare Appendix I. 3 érepos, one of two, wos, shoulder, possibly in allusion to the attach- ment of the shoulder to either the supraoccipital or the epiotic. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 483 The Halosauries, Thornbacks, etc. This order as defined by Boulenger embraces certain eel-like! deep-sea fishes formerly assigned to the suborders Lyopomi Gill (Halosauridze) and Heteromi Gill (Notacanthide), together with the more recently discovered Lipogenyidze which are said to bridge over the gap between these two groups. To these Boulenger adds the marine Fierasferide and the Cretaceous Dercetide. All these families retain archaic or Isospondylous characters in the abdominal position of the many-rayed ventral fins (when present), especially in the union of the broad parietals along the median line which widely separates the supraoccipital from the frontals. ‘‘They are all characterized,’ says Smith Woodward,‘ ‘‘by a primitive cranium of the Jurassic type; but they exhibit the new specialization by which the extending premaxilla gradually excludes the maxilla from the upper border of the mouth. Their elongated shape alone is indicative of high specialization; but no intermediate forms are yet known to afford a clue to their more normally shaped ancestors.’’ On the other hand, they parallel the Acanthopteroidei in the closure of the air bladder, in the absence of the mesocoracoid arch, and in the frequent appearance of spines in the fins. The pectoral arch is suspended from the supraoccipital or the epiotic (as in the Iniomi), the posttemporal is small and simple, or replaced by a ligament. The group parallels the Macruride among the Ana- canthini and many other eel-like forms in the loss of the homo- cercal tail (which is, however, preserved in the Cretaceous Der- cetide) and itsreplacement by the hypocercal type (Appendix IT). The existing Halosaurus ‘‘cannot be clearly distinguished from the Cretaceous Echidnocephalus; while Notacanthus of the present fauna only seems to differ from Protonotacanthus of the Cretaceous period in the possession of dorsal spines and fin-rays. The Dercetide, on the other hand, are only known by fossils from Cretaceous formations, in which they are widely distributed. They are interesting as being the earliest type of fish in which evidence of a distensible stomach has been observed. 1 See Appendix I. 2 Cat. Foss. Fishes, Brit. Mus., Part IV, 1901, p. Viil. 484. WILLIAM K. GREGORY Their fins are less specialized than those of the. . . [Halo- sauride and Notacanthide] and their trunk is provided with paired longitudinal series of enlarged scutes [Compare Eurypholis among Scopeloids].”’ (Smith Woodward loc. cit.) Jordan is sceptical as to the naturalness of this assemblage (1905, p. 484) especially as to the inclusion of the Fierasferide. Possibly this order might be included in the superotder Mesich- thyes defined below (p. 484), but the retention of the very archaic type of cranium militates somewhat against this associa- tion. On the other hand the closure of the air bladder, absence of the mesocoracoid arch, and frequent appearance of spines in the fins seem to separate the group from the Malacopterygii. It may prove advisable eventually to raise the group to super- ordinal rank, codrdinate with the Mesichthyes, Thoracostraci, etc., retaining the divisions Lyopomi and Heteromi as orders. Superorder MresicutuyveEs! (Hay) muh. i (Plate XXIX.) The groups of families known as Iniomi (Scopeloids), Haplomi (Pikes, etc.), Salmoperczee (Sand-rollers), Synentognathi (Fly- ing-fishes, etc.), are all doubtless descended from various soft- rayed, isospondylous, or perhaps even Holostean stocks which had evolved more or less toward the spiny-finned or physoclistous type of structure. Hence these intermediate groups present numerous combinations of the leading characters which dis- tinguish typical soft-rayed and spiny-finned fishes. For example, in some of them (Synentognathi) we find abdominal ventrals and soft or non-articulated rays (Isospondyl characters), in combina- tion with a closed air bladder (acanthopterous character), while in others (Percopside), which are referred by Boulenger to the Haplomi, an open air bladder, and an adipose dorsal fin persist in combination with forwardly displaced ventrals and spines in the fins. Hence asthe passage from typical soft-finned, physostomous, to spiny-finned and physoclistous fishes is very gradual systematists have experienced difficulty in segregating 1 wéoos, middle, txOus, fish, in allusion to the transitional character of the group. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES A485 ordinal assemblages around central forms without disrupting natural connections at the peripheries. Although, as implied _ by Jordan, any such attempt must over-emphasize certain breaks in the sequence, yet on the whole the least distortion of natural relationships seems to be secured in the following scheme. The group Mesichthyes Hay,’ proposed as an order to include the Haplomi, the Synentognathi, and the Percesoces, is here modified by the addition of the Iniomi to the Haplomi, by the transference of the Percesoces to the Acanthopterygii, and by the inclusion in it of the order Salmoperce Jordan and Evermann, the whole group being raised to superordinal rank, codrdinate with the superorders Malacopteroidei, Thoracostraci, Acanthopteroidei. In defense of this procedure I may say, first, that the close connection between the Iniomi and Haplomi has led Boulenger to merge the Iniomi in the Haplomi. Second, the removal of the Percesoces to the Acanthopteroidei (already advocated by Jordan and Evermann) is justified by the fact that in the Per- cesoces for the first time among fishes with a closed air bladder appear (1) a separate spinous dorsal, (2) the connection of the pelvis with the clavicular arch, (3) the reduction of rays in the ventrals to one spine and five soft rays. These characters (usually found among the Percesoces in combination) serve to separate them sharply from their supposed near allies, the Synentognathi. Third, as to the inclusion of the Salmoperce in the Mesichthyes, Boulenger unhesitatingly pronounces the Sand-rollers to be progressive Haplomi, but it seems better to regard them as codérdinate in rank with that group. As constituted above the superorder may be separated from the Malacopterygii by (1) the absence of the mesocoracoid arch (a character believed by Swinnerton,? from the evidence of embryology, to indicate a very ancient separation from the Malacopterygii) and (2) (apparently) by the absence of the orbitosphenoid. From the Thoracostraci the superorder may 1‘ Bibliography and Catalogue of the Fossil Vertebrata of North America,’ Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv., No. 179, Washington, 1902, p. 397- 2‘** A Contribution to the Morphology and Development of the Pectoral Skeleton of the Teleosteans,”’ Quar. Jour. Micros. Sci.,n.s., No. 1941, Vol. 49, Part 2, 1905, pp. 363-382. ae te OPN ; x 486 WILLIAM K. GREGORY be separated by the normal characters of the gills and coracoid, from the Acanthopteroidei by either (1) the abdominal or sub- abdominal position of the ventral fins, which (save in Percopside) are entirely separated from the pectoral arch, or (2) by the feeble development of spines in the fins, or (3) in the Haplomi, Salmo- perce by the open air bladder, or (4) by the high number of rays (usually more than six) in the ventrals. The adipose dorsal fin seen in Salmonidze, Nematognathi, Characinide among Malacopteroidei is retained in some families (Scopelide, Alepidosauridze, Percopside) of the present super- order. The number of rays in the ventral fins is progressively reduced as follows: Iniomi 10 to 5, Haplomi 11 to 3, Salmoperce 9, Synentognathi 6, the number thus being higher, as a rule, than in the Acanthopteroidei. The inarticulated rays or spines in the fins exhibit various stages of development but are never numerous: absent or at most incipient in Scopeloids and true Haplomi, Synentognathi, distinct but very few in Salmoperce. A separate spinous dorsal is never developed. The soft dorsal is nearly always well back (save in Salmopercze) usually opposite or nearly opposite the (usually short) anal. The parietals are usually (save in Galaxoidea) separated by the supraoccipital. By this character the Mesichthyes may be separated from the Heteromi, from which they are further distinguished by the normal non-anguilliform body and the broadly homocercal tail. Our division of the superorder is as follows: Superorder MresicutHvEs (Hay) mihi. Order 1. Haplomi (Gill) Boulenger crepe analy Aulopoidea (Gill) (Iniomi Gull) Esocoidea Starks Dalloidea nom. nov. Peeciloidea Starks Amblyopsoidea Starks Stephanoberycoidea nom. nov. (Incertz Sedis ) Fam. Chirothricide (af. Iniomi?) ‘‘ Kneriide Superfamily Galaxoidea nom. nov. (af. Isospondyli?) THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 487 Order 2. Salmoperce Jordan and Evermann Fam. Percopside Order 3. Synentognanthi Gill Fam. Belonidze Me xO COchidee Superorder MresicutHyEes (Hay) (cont'd). (Plate XXIX.) Order 1. Haplomi! (Gill) Boulenger The ‘superfamily Aulopoidea (Iniomi?), represented by a few shore species and many deep-sea forms, combine characters of ' the Salmonoid Isospondyli and of the Haplomi. In so far as the osteology is known they differ from the Isospondyli in the absence of the mesocoracoid arch in the shoulder girdle and of the orbitosphenoid in the skull and thus the group falls within Boulenger’s definition of the Haplomi; while on account of the close relationship of the Alepidosauridz to the more generalized Enchodontide of the Cretaceous Smith Woodward includes them allin the Isospondyli. Inthe Scopelide, the posttemporal is forked and (as in the Salmonide, Clupeide) the upper branch meets the epiotic, the lower the opisthotic, but here, not as in the Isospondyli, the posttemporal merely touches and is not firmly attached to the skull. In the Alepidosauride the upper branch of the supratemporal is lacking, the simple supratemporal being attached on the side of the occiput to the opisthotic. To this peculiar mode of attachment of the shoulder girdle to the Skull at the nape the word Iniomi alludes. Asin other Haplomi and progressive Isospondyli the supraoccipital has thrust aside the parietals to gain contact with the frontals, and sometimes, as in the Salmonide, is itself partly overlapped by the parietals. The most primitive genera (Aulops, Chlorophthalmus) retain the Salmonoid adipose dorsal, a normal maxillary (fide Jordan) and show no luminous spots. In the more specialized genera 1 GirXovs, simple, ®pmos, shoulder, in allusion to the want of the meso- coracoid. 2 tywov, nape, @pos, shoulder. ae ee 488 WILLIAM K. GREGORY the adipose dorsal is frequently lost, the premaxillaries lengthen and grow fast to the slender maxillary which is excluded from the oral border (Boulenger), and an elaborate system of photo- phores is developed. The group is known from numerous fossil genera in the Cretaceous and Eocene. The Chirothricide (Cretaceous forms) are probably related to the Scopeloids, but superficially resemble Flying-fishes (Exo- cetus). The “wings,” however, are formed by the greatly - enlarged ventral fins, which are placed very far forward. The Cretaceous Enchodontide are said to agree with con- temporary Isospondyls in most respects, but are progressive in the backward enlargement of the delicate preniaxilla, which nearly excludes the maxilla from the border of the mouth. The long, slender teeth are acrodont (z.e., not in sockets but fused with the supporting bone). An adipose fin is often present. Their nearest existing relatives are the deep-sea Alepisauride. The true Haplomi as understood by Gill, Jordan, and Starks, include only the Mud-minnows (Umbride) and Pikes (Eso-= cidz) of Europe, Asia, and America, the Killifishes (Peeciliide or Cyprinodontide) of Southern Europe, Africa, Asia, and America, and the famous subterranean Blind-fishes (Amblyop- side) of the southern United States. These families have been grouped by E. C. Starks! in a recent paper on the osteology of the Haplomi as follows: Esocide (Pikes) Superfamily Esocoidea Umbride (Mud-minnows) Order Haplomi i Peeciloidea Poeciliide (Killifishes) Cyprinodontinze Poeciliinee y at Amblyopsoi- dea Amblyopside (Blind-fishes) “The families of the Haplomi,’’ he says, “have either widely diverged from each other or are not of the same line of descent. The order is not held together by any important character, though some very peculiar characters may be used to rather widely separate three groups.”’ 1‘*A Synopsis of Characters of Some Fishes belonging to the Order Haplomi,’’ Biological Bull., Vol. VII, No. 5, Oct. 1904, pp. 254-262. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 489: The order as thus constituted is trenchantly separated by the _ loss of the mesocoracoid from the Isospondyli, with which it agrees in: (1) the suspension of the shoulder girdle from the skull by the posttemporal, (2) the abdominal position of the pelvic fins, (3) the persistence of the pneumatic duct connecting the air bladder with the gut, (4) the soft-rayed character of the fins. The derivation of the group from Cretaceous Isospondyls is probable. ‘“‘The Esocide”’ says Dr. Smith Woodward,! ‘‘are essentially fresh-water Scopeloids, and the Cyprinodontide [Poeciliidze] are generally admitted to be closely allied to this family. Nothing of importance is known concerning their geological history.”’ Jordan and Starks mention the following additional characters as defining the Haplomi proper: (5) alisphenoids not meeting in a median line in front of brain case, (6) the supraoccipital wedges in between the parietals (a mor- phological advance beyond the more primitive families of Isos- pondylt), (7) the exoccipitals are separated by the basioccipital, a frequent character among the lower Teleosts (Starks), (8) the post-clavicle is composed of a single element, (9g) actinosts four,. (10) opercular bones all present, (11) pectoral fins placed low, (x2) dorsal fin placed more or less posteriorly, (13) head usually covered with cycloid scales like those on the body. To this assemblage Boulenger? adds besides the forms usually called Iniomi the following families, and adopts a more elastic definition of the order Haplomi. 1. Galaxiide or Southern Pikelets. This family and the nearly related Haplochitonide are more primitive than the true Pikes (Esocidz) in that: (1) the supraoccipital has not yet. pushed aside the parietals to gain contact with the frontals, (2) an adipose fin (in the Haplochitonidz) is present. Swinner- ton? says of Galaxias, ‘‘In some respects, ¢.g., forward extension of the cranial cavity, and the condition of the articular head of the hyomandibular, it is as lowly as, or even more lowly than, the salmon.’”’ 'Cat. Foss. Fishes, Brit. Mus., Part IV, 1901, Pp. ix. 2Boulenger, G. A., Cambr. Nat. Hist., Vol. ‘‘ Fishes,” p. 605. 3‘*The Osteology of Cromeria ntlotica and Galaxias attenuatus,’’~Zoo: Jahrb., 1903, Bd. XVIII, pp. 58-70. 490 WILLIAM K, GREGORY These characters and the many similarities to the Salmonide “incline Jordan to regard the Galaxiide and Haplochitonide as Isospondyls. But they lack the mesocoracoid, and Boulenger has consequently placed them with the Haplomi. In order to express their wide differences from the typical Haplomi we set them apart from the Esocoidea in a codrdinate superfamily Galaxoidea. Boulenger shows that the present range of the ‘group in Southern Africa, Australia, New Zealand, and South America may be accounted for by the fact that the genus Galaxias is not confined to fresh waters but occurs also in the sea. 2. The Dalliide or Alaska Black Fishes. These peculiar forms, in which the coracoids are coalesced and cartilaginous and the actinosts are represented by a longitudinally divided and distally fringed cartilaginous plate, were set apart by Gill as the order Xenomi; but their close relationship to the true Haplomi has been demonstrated by Starks.1 We may provision- ally assign them to a separate superfamily, the Dalloidea. 3. The Stephanoberycide (Crowned Beryces). ‘‘This [abys- sal] family has hitherto been placed near the Berycide, among the Acanthopterygii, but there are no spinous rays in the dorsal and anal fins, and the ventrals formed of one simple and four or five branched rays are abdominal’ (Boulenger.) The air bladder has a wide duct (Boulenger). Mr. Tate Regan (see p.498) regards this family as possibly related to the ancestors of the Anacanthini or Cods. Gill suggests that the Stephanobery- cide may be degraded berycoids in which the ventral fins have lost their normal connection with the clavicle. 4. The Percopside. The Sand-rollers inhabit the Great Lakes, the rivers and streams of the northern Mississippi valley and of Canada, and the Columbia River. This family (repre- sented in the present fauna by only two genera, each with a single species) is of extraordinary interest, since, according to Jordan and Evermann, it is apparently derived directly from “the extinct transitional forms through which the Haplomi and Acanthopterygii have descended from allies of the Isospondyl1. The group shows the remarkable combination of true fin spines, 1‘*The Osteology of Dallia pectoralis.”’ Zool. Jahrb., Bd. XXI, Heft 3 1904, Pp. 249-262. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 491 ctenoid scales, and a percoid mouth [Acanthopterygian charac- ters| with the adipose fin [also open air duct], abdominal ventrals, and naked head of the Isospondyli” (Jordan and Evermann). “The relations of the Percopside with such archaic spiny-rayed fishes as Aphredoderus and Elassoma are certainly not remote, and the close resemblance of the head of Percopsis to that of Gymnocephalus (Acerina) [the Ruffe of the Percide] may be more than accidental’’ (Jordan). The family is made a suborder (Salmoperce) of the Acanthopteri by Jordan and Evermann with the following definition: “‘ Adipose fin present; dorsal and anal with spines in very small number; ventral fins abdominal, with more than 5 soft rays [9g], vertebre about 35.’’ On the other hand, Boulenger believes that “‘an analysis of their characters shows them to belong to the Haplomi, of which they may be regarded as highly specialized members having evolved in the direction of the Acanthopterygu.” By Boulenger the degree of separation from other Haplomi is indicated in the synopsis of families (p. 606) as,follows: ‘‘Dorsal and anal fins with true spines; scales ctenoid; an adipose dorsal; ventral fins with 9 rays.’’ These characters taken together appear to us to justify the ordinal separation of the Percopside from the Haplomi. (5) Cobitopsidz. The Oligocene genus Cobitopsis may belong with the Haplomi or Synentognathi. The family Ammodytide may be related to the Cobitopside (Boulenger), or since one of them, Embolichthys, has the ventrals beneath the throat (jugular) the family may be allied to the Percophiida among the Acan- thopterygii Jugulares (Gill, Jordan)—another instance of the confusingly close analogical remembrances so ca uent among teleostome fishes. Superorder MESICHTHYES (cont'd) Order Synentognathi! Gull. (Plate XXIX.) The Needle Fishes and Flying Fishes. Jordan (1905, pp. 208-214) divides the group into two families. , Sane > : ra - 3 1ouv, together, évrds, within, yva0os, jaw, in allusion to the fusion of the lower pharyngeals. 492 WILLIAM K. GREGORY as follows: (1) Belonidz, the Garfishes. These have strong jaws and teeth, the third upper pharyngeal is small with few teeth, the maxillary is firmly soldered to the premaxillary and the vertebre have zygapophyses. (2) Exoccetide, the Skippers (Scombresox), Half-beaks, and Flying-fishes. These have small and nearly equal teeth, the maxillary is separate from the pre- maxillary, the third upper pharyngeal is much enlarged, and there are no zygapophyses on the vertebre. The genera Hemiexo- cetus and Fodiator are intermediate in structure and in leaping or flying habits between the Half-beaks (Hyporhamphus, Hemi- rhamphus) and the true Flying-fishes. All these forms are in- cluded in the single family Scombresocide by Smith Woodward and Boulenger. The order‘! retains archaic or isospondylous characters and agrees with the Haplomi in the lack of fin spines, and in the abdominal position of the ventrals, which have more than five rays; and a further agreement with the Haplomi is the absence of the mesocoracoid arch. A possible representative of the coronoid of the lower jaw, is, however, retained. As in the Thoracostraci? (1) the open communication between the swim bladder and the gut has been lost (physoclistous condition), (2) the parietal bones are absent or well separated by the supra- occipital, (3) the exoccipitals are not united over the basi- occipitals, (4) the scapula is suspended from the skull by a simple non-furcate posttemporal, and (5) the supraclavicle when present is small, (6) the postclavicle is absent, (7) para- pophyses are developed on all the abdominal vertebree (Starks’). In characters 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, aS well as in the high position of the pectoral fins and in many other characters, they agree with the typical Percesoces; andthus tend to connect the physostomes (represented by the Haplomi) with the physoclists. The character to which the name Synentognathi refers is the complete union of the lower pharyngeals in the median line, 1 Starks, E. C., ‘“A Review of the Synentognathous Fishes of Japan,’”’ Proc. U. S. National Mus., Vol. XXVI, 1904, pp. 525-544. . 2Starks, E. C., ‘‘The Shoulder Girdle and Characteristic Osteology of the Hemibranchiate Fishes,’’ Proc. U. S. National Mus., Vol. XXV, 1902, Pp. 619-634. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 493 a condition independently acquired elsewhere, notably by the labroid or pharyngognathous fishes among Acanthopterygians. The upper pharyngeals are variously enlarged and afford good differential characters for splitting the group up into families (Starks, Jordan). A peculiar and characteristic detail is the position of the lateral line, which is concurrent with the belly. The Sauries (Scombresocide proper) “bear strong analogical resemblances to the mackerels in form, color, and habits, as well as in the dorsal and anal finlets’’ (Starks). Hence thename Scombresocide or mackerel pikes. Belone and Scombresox are known from the Upper Miocene of ‘Croatia and Algeria, while Hemirhamphus is recorded from the Upper Eocene of Monte Bolca near Verona, Italy. Jordan (1905, p. 214) suggests that the genera Exocetus, Exonautes, and Cypselurus are of very recent [?Upper Tertiary] origin. Boulenger (1904, p. 632) thinks that Protaulopsis, hitherto re- ferred to the Sea-horse assemblage may belong to the Synentog- nathi. Superorder THorAcosTRaci! Swinnerton. (Plate XXIX, This superorder, which has been shown by several authors _ to be a natural group, embraces (1) the order Hemibranchii of SS eS OTe) — Cope, including the Gasterosteride or Sticklebacks, the Aulo- rhynchide or Tube-snouts, the Protosyngnathide, the Aulos- tomide, the - Fistulariide or Cornet-fishes, the Macrorham- phoside or Snipe-fishes, the Centriscide, the Amphisilide; (2) the Lophobranchii of Cuvier, including the Solenostomatide or ‘Tube-mouths, the Syngnathide or Pipe-fishes and Sea-horses. (The Pegasidz which are usually treated as Lophobranchs are discussed on p. 505) Setting aside for the moment the peculiar lines of specializa- tion of this order, we have left certain primary ancestral charac- ters in which the group resembles the Synentognathi and the 19@pa€, thorax, doTpaxov, potsherd, shelly test, in allusion to the ‘shelly exoskeleton of many of the forms. (Phthinobranchii Hay, Hemibranchii Cope, Lophobranchii Cuvier, Physoclisti in part.) 494 WILLIAM K. GREGORY Percesosces, and thus represents a considerable advance upon the Isospondyli. These are the loss of the mesocoracoid, the lack of open communication between the swim bladder (when present), and the gut, the separation of the parietals by the supraoccipital. Archaic isospondylous characters are the abdominal or subabdominal position of the pelvic fins (when present), and the suspension of the shoulder girdle from the cranium by a bony posttemporal. The latter bone is simple, non- furcate, and immovably attached to or even fused with the cranium. Progressive characters are the following: (1) In the ancestral types (the Sticklebacks which, as shown by Gill! lead beautifully into the Aulorhynchidz) the pelvis is either free or attached to the backwardly produced coracoids (hypocoracoids), but this con- nection may be secondarily lost in the more specialized forms through partial atrophy of the shoulder girdle; (2) the coracoids (hypocoracoids) are much enlarged, forming so-called “infracla- vicular plates’ often enameled externally; (3) the anterior vertebre (except in Gasterosteids) are more or less modified or coalesced, often forming a long tube; (4) the branchial arches are always more or less reduced; (5) the branchial lamelle are pectinated (Hemibranchit), or producedinto tufts (Lophobranchit) ; (6) the dorsal fin often has a spiny portion consisting of free spines, and the anal fin also occasionally develops a spine; (7) the snout in the Gasterosteide is either conical or but slightly tubiform, but in all the higher forms it is fully tubiform, the small mouth being terminal and bounded solely by the premaxillaries; (8) the scales are small (Fistulariide), reduced (Aulorhynchide), or absent (Gasterosteidz), progressively superseded by bony scutes; the latter process culminates in the complete bony cuirass of Amphisile, which is fused with the enlarged ribs and other portions of the endoskeleton. In discussing the probable affinities of the Hemibranchii and the Percesoces (excepting Sphyreena), Dr. Starks? enumerates the 1 Gill “On the Mutual Relations ot the Hemibranchiate Fishes,’’ Pros. Acad. Nat. Sct. Phila., 1884, p. 154. -“The Shoulder Girdle and Characteristic Osteology of the Hemi- branchiate. Fishes.”’ Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Voi. XXV, 1902, p. 622. § THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 495 following characters as common to both groups: (1) the parapo- physes are developed on all the abdominal vertebre; (2) the supraclavicle when present is small; (3) the exoccipitals are not united above the basioccipital; (4) the supraclavicle, when present is reduced in size;.(5) Fustularia and Aulostomus have processes running backward from the epiotics, which are strikingly similar to the epiotic processes possessed by all the Percesoces. On the other hand, the Hemibranchs easily stand apart from the Percesoces ‘‘in having no opisthotics and usually no parietals; in having the posttemporals simple, not typically forked; and in having the clavicle composed of a single piece when present (composed of two pieces in the Percesoces).”’ The most generalized form, Gasterosteus, is carnivorous and active, but the prey is the small “fry” of other fishes which the Sticklebacks seek out “with the utmost industry, sagacity, and greediness.”” The taste for minute prey to be sought by poking about in odd corners may have determined some of the peculiar specializations of the Sea-horse order. We may imagine these to have continually sought smaller and smaller food until the tiny particles came to be sucked up by the elongate muzzle. After probably passing through a stage somewhat like Syngnathus but less eel-like the ancestral Sea-horse did not need the quick- darting form of body to capture its food or escape enemies; hence the fan-like tail fin was suppressed (in Hippocampus), and the rapidly vibrating pectoral and dorsal fins enabled the fish to poise, humming-bird fashion, while sucking food through its tub- ular beak. The pectoral fins have been thought also to assist in drawing a steady current of water through the gillchamber. Ata a very early period protection was secured by the development of an osseous cuirass and (in certain forms) of fucus-like outgrowths of the skin. Respiratory improvements consisted in the elabora- tion of tufted gills from the pectinate type. For the elaborate * nesting habits and attentive care of the eggs by both sexes in the Sticklebacks, may have been substituted first the adhesion ' of the eggs to the abdomen of the male, then the develop- '-ment in the male of abdominal grooves and ridges to hold : the eggs, finally, by fusion of opposite ridges, a perfected pouch. 496 WILLIAM K. GREGORY Superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDE!! (nom. nov.) (Plate X XIX.) The superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDEI may be taken to include the orders Percesoces, Anacanthini, Labyrinthici, Acanthop- terygii, Selenichthyes (Inc. Sedis), Tzniosomi, Plectognathi Hypostomides (Inc. Sedis.), Opisthomi, Pediculati. The air bladder if present is without open duct (save in certain Bery- cidz), the parietals are always separated by the supraoccipitals, the mouth is usually “‘bordered by premaxillaries to the ex- clusion of the maxillaries, and if these should by exception enter the oral edge they are always toothless’”’ (Boulenger). The orbitosphenoids are typically absent (retained in Berycide). The pectoral arch, typically of the Perciform type, is suspended from the skull (save in Opisthomi). There is no mesocoracoid. The ventral fins, if present, are usually below or in front of the pectorals. The pelvic bones, if present, are typically attached to the clavicular arch either movably and by ligament in most Percesoces and Nomeiformes or more firmly in Acanthopterygii and the remaining orders. Fins usually with spines, ventral fins typically with 1 spine and 5 soft rays. Scales various, typically ctenoid. Vertebre typically 10 + 14 but frequently increased in number through “repetitive degeneration.”’ The superorder Acanthopteroidei represents the highest phases of piscine evolution or “‘ichthyization.’”’ From the swollen stream of central types realized in the Percesoces, the short-bodied scombroids, zeoids, berycoids, percoids, by cen- trifugal development many new types have been thrown off, which constitute an irregular but less thickly crowded zone of differentiation of the second degree, including such types as the long-bodied Scombroids, the Squamipinnes or Cheetodontoids, the Pharyngognathi or Labroids, the Pareioplitee (Scorpznids, Cottids Triglids, etc.) the Jugulares (Blenniids, Trachinids, etc.) the Gobioids. Each of these in turn has become a new center or vortex of differentiation and they have thrown off such’groups as the Heterosomata, the Plectognathi, the Hypostomides, Disco- cephali Opisthomi, Pediculati,which may be said to constitute’the sparsely filled zone of differentiation of the third degree(Pl. XXIX) 1Acanthopteri, «tOos, form. See ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Pe ee eee ee eee THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 497 Superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDEI (cont'd). (Plate XXIX.) Order Percesoces! Cope. This group, being on the borderland between soft-rayed and spiny-finned fishes, may be classified with either, according to the characters selected to separate the spiny-finned fishes from the orders that lead upto them. Cope proposed the term to in- clude only the Atherinide (Silversides), the Mugilide (Mullets), the Sphyrenide (Barracudas), but Smith Woodward and Boulenger? include not only the Synentognathi but also several families which are regarded by the American school as Acan- thopterygit. If we accept the term in its limited sense the order is readily defined from the Synentognathi, on the one hand, and from the true Acanthopterygii, on the other. Although certain Percesoces (e.g. Atherina area) show a general resemblance to the more generalized Synentognathi (e.g. Chriodorus atherin- oides), and although fossil forms may be discovered, intermediate between the two orders, yet in the Percesoces a trenchant dis- tinction from the Synentognaths and other physoclists with abdominal ventrals is afforded by the fins, in the appearance (1) of a separate spinous dorsal more or less remote from the soft dorsal, and (2) of an anterior spine in the pelvic fins. Further- more the ventral fins are more forward than in the Synentog- nathi and the pelvic bones (save in Sphyrenide) are either attached to the backwardly produced postclavicles (Mugilide, Polynemidz) or by ligament to the clavicular symphysis (Ather- inidez, Chiasmodontide). The ventral fin formula is now re- duced tol, 5. In order to differentiate the Percesoces from the true Acanthopteryeii ‘“we must turn to the well known external characters—a spinous dorsal in conjunction with the abdominal ventral fins, high pectoral fins, and unarmed opercles [1.e. opercu- lum and preoperculum without posterior spiny processes].”’ (Starks.) 1 Perca, perch, esox, pike, in allusion to the mingling of ancathopterous and haplomous characters. 2 Cambr. Nat. Hist., Vol. ‘“‘Fishes,’’ etc., p. 636. 3 Starks, E. C., ‘‘The Osteological Characters of the Fishes of the Sub- order Percesoces,” Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Vol. XXII, 1899, pp. 1 et seq. 498 WILLIAM K. GREGORY Starks shows that the skull and shoulder girdle of Sphyrenide, Atherinide, and Mugilide present a number of peculiar charac- ters in common, among which are the following: (1) epiotics of adult produced backward and more or less divided into bristle- like filaments (2) supraoccipital developed posteriorly, not ex- tending above level of balance of cranium, (3) postclavicle divided into superior and inferior parts (Starks). The Polynemidz or Threadfishes of the shores of the tropical seas, and the deep sea Chiasmodontide present many detailed resemblances! to the Sphyrenide-Atherinide-Mugilide group, and probably belong in the present order. Jordan (’96) notes. the resemblance of this family to the Scizenide of the Acanthop- terygii on the one hand and to the Mugilide of the present order on the other; but remarks that in both cases the resemblances. may be merely analogical. The Crossognathide (a Cretaceous family including Crosso- gnathus and Syllemus of the American Cretaceous) are regarded by Smith Woodward as forerunners of the Percesoces, Crosso- gnathus agreeing very closely (so far as known) with the existing Atherines, but differing in having one continuous dorsal fin with the right and left halves of each Spine not completely fused together (Smith Woodward) ,—a very primitive condition. How- ever, Boulenger (1904, p. 565) believes that this family should probably be placed with or near the Clupeidz among the Iso- spondyli. The earliest members of the families Mugilide, Sphy- renide, and Atherinide occur in the Upper Cretaceous of England, Colorado, and New Mexico. (Zittel, 1902). Superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDEI (cont'd). (Plate XXIX.) Order Anacanthini? (/., Miller) The Cods. The order Anacanthini, properly including only the true Cods. (Gadide) and their allies (Macruride, Murznolepidide) was formerly burdened by the inclusion of the Heterosomata. 1Boulenger, 1904, pp. 640, 641. 2a, ava, privative, akavOa, thorn, spine, in allusion to the typically spineless condition of the anterior dorsal fin. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES _ 499 4Pleuronectide) or Flatfishes, but this association has been shown by Boulenger to be wholly unnatural. The Anacanthini differ from the Acanthopterygii chiefly in: (1) the lack of fin spines in the vertical and ventral fins (the first dorsal of some Macrurids has a single spiny ray); (2) in the feeble, ligamentous attachment of the pelvic bones to the pectoral arch; (3) the separation of the prodtic from the exoccipital by the enlarged opisthotic; (4) theloss ofthe primary homocercal tail (Appendix IT,) the caudal fin-supports of the seemingly homocercal tail of the Gadide being perfectly symmetrical above and below the vetebral axis and composed mainly of dorsal and anal rays (Boulenger!); (5) the position of the scapular foramen, which lies between the hypercoracoid (scapula) and hypocoracoid (‘coracoid’’), instead of perforating the hypercoracoid, as in most other Teleosts. However Tate Regan has shown that in one of the Macruridz the position of this “‘scapular foramen’”’ is normal. As in the typical Acanthopterygii the parietals are separated by the supraoccipital, the toothed premaxillaries alone enter the upper margin of the mouth, the maxillaries simply acting as levers for the protrusion of the mouth, the air bladder is without open duct, the ventral fins are below or in front of the pectorals. Of the two principal families, Gadide and Macruride, the Macruride are believed by Tate Regan and Boulenger to be, on the whole, more primitive. “In the Macruride we pass from the more generalized forms with cycloid scales, terminal mouth, and continuous or subcontinuous dorsal fins, to those with rough or spinous scales, inferior mouth, and projecting snout, and a well differentiated anterior dorsal” (Tate Regan). Among the more central Macrurids the genus Macruronus closely resembles Merlucius of the Gadide in its skull, but is ‘“‘a true Macrurid in the position of the ventrals and the absence of a caudal fin” (Tate Regan). In the Gadide the scales are reduced, the dorsal and anal fins are often divided into two or three portions, and a secondary fan-like tail is formed from the dorsal and anal fins. As to the derivation of the order, whether from true Acanthopterygians or from some less specialized stock, such as 1Anu. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) Vol. X. Oct., 1902, p. 298. 5) OO) WILLIAM K. GREGORY the Haplomi, Mr. Tate Regan, who has carefully studied the oste- ology of the group, concludes that the absence of non-articulated fin rays, the large number of rays in the ventrals, and the lack of direct attachment of the pelvic bones to the clavicles, taken together, must be regarded as primitive features. ‘“‘From their anatomy and appearance,’ he says, “I am inclined to think that the Gadoids are not related to the Percesoces, but are derived from some Haplomous stock from which the Berycide have also descended, and of which the Stephanoberycide may well be the living representatives.’’! The group is typically carnivorous, marine, often abyssal. Fossil Gadoids are rare, but are recorded from the Eocene and Miocene. Superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDEI (cont'd). Order Selenichthyes? Boulenger (Plate XXIX.) The Opahs. The systematic position of the Opah or Kingfish (Family Lampridide) is somewhat uncertain, but it seems entitled to occupy at least provisionally a separate order. It may be re- lated either (1) to the Thoracostraci as held by Boulenger,* or (2) to such deep-bodied Scombroids as Brama and Mene (Gill).* or it may possibly be “‘transitional between deep-bodied extinct Ganoids [such as Dorypterus|] and the forms allied to Platax, Zeus, and Antigonia’’ (Jordan). The Opahs resemble the Bramidz in the heaviness of the shoulder girdle and in the great dilatation of the coracoid (hypocoracoid); superficially they 1°°On the Systematic Position and Classification of the Gadoid or Ana- canthine Fishes.”’ Aun. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7), Vol. XI, May, 1903, pp. 459-400. St 2 Gedy vy, the moon, zy6vS, fish, in allusion to the gibbous form of the body. 3Boulenger,G. A., ‘‘ Notes on the Classification of Teleostean Fishes. Ill. On the Systematic! Position of the Genus Lampris, and on the Limits7and Contents of the Suborder Catosteomi.”’ Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Vol. 10 (Ser.), Aug., 1902, pp. 147-152. 4 Gill, T. ‘‘On the Relations of the Fishes of the Family Lamprididze or Opahs.”’ Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Vol. XXVI, 1903, pp. 915-924. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 501 resemble Mene rather closely. The supposed relationships either to the Thoracosfraci or to the Scombriformes turn upon the resemblances of the shoulder girdle to that of Gasierosteus among Thoracostraci and to that of such deep-bodied fishes as ’ Antigonia among the Acanthopterygii. The Opah differs from typical Acanthopteri ‘“‘in-the absence of spines in the fins, and the position of the ventral fins, together with the great number of rays [14-17] in the latter, which is only met with in the lower Teleosteans’’ (Boulenger). Gull suggests that the attachment of the pelvis to the greatly enlarged hypocoracoids, as in the Gasterosteidz, may be due to convergent evolution, and points out that the Opah agrees with the Mackerel-like fishes in a characteristic modification of the vertebre and in “‘the deep bifurcation of the roots of the caudal rays which clamp the hypural and epural bones.”’ The case is an instructive one as illustrating the difficulty, without knowledge of the less special- ized members of a group, of deciding whether resemblances to_ some other group are genetic or convergent. Order Acanthopterygii ! Cuvier The Spiny-rayed Fishes. The structural characters enumerated under the superorder Acanthopteroidei (page 497) are here seen in their most typical condition. In addition, the opercle is always well developed. the gill opening usually large and in front of the base of the pec- toral fin, the scapula is typically perforated by the scapular foramen, which may, however, appear between the scapula andthe coracoid. It isnot certain whether the order is polyphy- letic, or, as usually held, monophyletic and derived from Cre- taceous Berycide, which are generally conceded to be directly ancestral to the Perciformes. The Berycide retain such archaic characters as an open swim-bladder, an orbitosphenoid, and more than five soft rays in the ventrals. They are comparatively numerous in the Upper Cretaceous and may conceivably have given rise to the Stromateide through Berycopsis, to the deep- bodied Scombroids through the Pempheridz, and to the Scor- taxuavoa, a thorn, rrepvyzor, a fin, in allusion to the sharp spines in the fins. 502 WILLIAM K. GREGORY pidide through Azpichthys. On the other hand, all these and other deep-bodied families, such as the Bramide, Kurtide, Carangide, Menide, Bathyclupeide, Caproide (Antigoniide), Zeide, Amphistiide, Chetodontide, may be the result of par- allel evolution from similar but distantly related Cretaceous families. Some of the Acanthopterygii may have been derived from Cretaceous Percesoces (compare, for example, the suggestive ~resemblance of Sci@na to Polynemus), others from Cretaceous Haplomi (e. g. Berycide, Aphredoderide, from Percopside). Again the presence of Berycide, Stromateide, Scorpidide (Aipichthys), Sparide, in the Upper Cretaceous and the flores- cence of the order in the Eocene would push back the prob- able origin of the different sections of the order to the Middle Cretaceous, when very many Isospondyli and Haplomi were doubtless independently evolving in the direction of the Acan- thopterygii At any rate all the ancestral Acanthopterygi probably were short-bodied, with the typical vertebral formula of ro + 14, and all were in process of reducing the ventral fin-formula to I, 5 (Boulenger). The Acanthopterygii very early enjoyed an adaptive radiation unequalled by that of any other order of fishes, so that by Lower Eocene times Scombroids, Percoids, Labroids, Plectognaths, Scorpenoids, Cottoids, Goboids, and Blennoids were already well differentiated. The history of the order since the Eocene is not fully known (Woodward).! Superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDE! (cont'd). Order Acanthopterygii Cuvier. Suborder Percomorphi Cope. Division Nometformes (divisio nova). There is considerable divergence of opinion as to the systematic position of the group of marine fishes formerly classified by Jordan under the families Nomeide or Portuguese-men-of-war- fishes, Centrolophide or Rudder-fishes, Stromateide or Butter- 1Cat. Foss. Fishes, Brit. Mus., Part IV, 1901, p. Xi. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 503 fishes, Icosteide or Rag-fishes, Acrotide, Tetragonuride or Square-tails. By Gill and Jordan the first four families were placed with the Scombroidea after the Bramide or Pomfrets, while the Tetragonuride were segregated by Gill in a super- family coérdinate with the Scombroidea. Boulenger sinks the Nomeidz and Centrolophide in the Stromateide, the Acrotide in the Icosteide, and believes that the near connection of the Tetragonuride with the Stromateide is shown by the common possession of cesophageal pouches beset with papille and gill- raker-like knobs below the pseudobranchie. Both families are pelagic or deep-sea, feeding on Crustaceans, the fry of other fish, or more frequently upon Medusz, under the protection of whose stinging tentacles certain of them swim, as in the Caranx medusi- cola among Scombroids (Boulenger). The deep-sea Icosteide, which have a flimsy cartilaginous skeleton, lack the cesophageal teeth and the processes of the last gill arch, but Icosteus at least has the gillraker-like knobs below the pseudobranchie and the family is conceded by all to be allied to the Stromateide. The Tetragonuride, though unlike the cycloid Bramide of the Scombriformes in form, resemble them, according to Tate Regan, in many significant details of the skeleton. On the other hand, they present some resemblances to the Mugilide near which they were placed by Giinther, and Boulenger even places the whole group of families with the Percesoces, thus removing them from all connection with the Scombriformes. The group has apparently descended from some deep-bodied or subcycloid forms resembling the Bramidz and probably retaining the vertebral formula 10 + 14 which seems to be demanded for the ancestral Acanthopterygians. This low formula is actually very nearly realized inthe Black Ruffs or Rudder-fishes, Centro- lophus, Palinurichthys (10 + 14 or 15), the number of vertebre rising to 30-46 in the remaining Stromateide, 58 in the Tetra- gonuride, and, finally, to as many as 70 in Acrotus of the Icos- teide (Jordan ’96). In the Tetragonuride and Stromateide the ventrals when present, have one spine and at most 5 soft rays, as in Percesoces, Scombriformes, and typical Perciformes. As we seem forced to rely on rather trivial but possibly significant characters, the group may be distinguished from the Percesoces 504 WILLIAM K. GREGORY by the presence of but a single long dorsal fin, the spinous portion often much reduced, or else formed of numerous short — spines. From the Scombriformes it may be distinguished by the presence of the oesophageal pouches or when these are absent by the gill raker-like knobs below the pseudobranchize. The small cycloid scales (when present) of the Stromateide, Icosteide, resemble those of many Scombriformes and of the Lampride, while the scales of the Tetragonuride, which are described as hard, bony, adherent, ciliated, and grooved or strongly keeled, may perhaps be compared with the cycloid, heavily ridged or keeled scales of the Bramide. The pelvic bones are free from the clavi- cle in Tetragonuride, Icosteide, and in some Stromateide, in others more closely, but still movably, attached by ligament (Boulenger). On the assumption that this loose attachment is “‘a primitive character and not the result of specializa- tion, such as occurs in some cases among true Acanthoptery- gians,’’ Boulenger, as we have said, removes the group from the Scombriformes to the Percesoces. This enables him to improve the technical definition of the Scombriformes, and, furthermore, the Nomeiformes may well be remotely related to the true Percesoces, by inheritance of the typical formule of to + 14 in the vertebre andI, 5 in the ventral fins. But this does not seem to lessen the phylogenetic significance of the many resemblances of this group to the Scombriformes. Con- vergence plus the inheritance of primitive characters hardly seem enough to account for the detailed resemblances between the Butter-fish, Rhombus (Poronotus) triacanthus of the family Stromateide and the Common Pampano (Trachinotus carolinus) of the family Carangide, or the osteological similarities between the Tetragonuride and the Bramide. If, as Boulenger holds, the families in question cannot be regarded as Scombriformes without rendering it impossible to define that group, then I suggest that they be segregated asa division, Nomeiformes, of the suborder Percomorphi, codrdinate with and in the neighborhood of the Scombriformes. Ifthe Upper Cretaceous genera Omosoma and Platycormus are correctly referred to this group, the Nomei- formes are older than any known Scombroids, and as old as any other known Acanthopterygians. THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 505: Superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDEI (?) (Plate X XIX.) Order Hypostomides! Gull The Sea-moths, Pegasidz, are often regarded as an offshoot of the Stickleback-Sea-horse series, and they indeed resemble different members of that assemblage in general appearance, in the possession of a bony exoskeleton, pectinated gills, reduced gill openings, a single dorsal fin, and in the loss of the preoper- culum. But Boulenger? admits that the supposed relationship: with the Thoracostraci is still somewhat doubtful, Gill assigned the group to a separate suborder Hypostomides of the order Teleocephali, following the suborder Acanthopterygii, and Day3 regarded Pegasus as a widely aberrant member of the Gurnard. group, a view which seems favored by the following evidence. Pegasus differs from the Thoracostraci in the fact that the greatly enlarged pectorals are not vertical but horizontal, and the mouth instead of being terminal as in the Sea-horses is placed beneath the base of the elongate tubular snout. But these are also points. of resemblance to certain of the Agonide3 among the cheek- armored Acanthopterygii, with which there is also a general agreement in the characters and arrangement of the dorsal scutes, of the pectoral dorsal and caudal fins, in the dorsal position. of the eyes, great reduction of the rays of the dorsal fins, etc.° Order Opisthomi* Gill nec Cope The Spiny Eels. (Plate X XIX.) These ‘‘spiny-finned eels,’’ forming the family Mastacambelide,. were mistakenly grouped with the pelagic Notacanths (p. 483), 1 do, beneath, or@ua, mouth, in allusion to the position of the mouth below the produced snout. 2 Cambridge Natural History, Vol. VII, p. 629. 3 Compare the figures of Pegasus draco in Day, Fishes of India pl. 1xi,. fig. 1, and P. natans in Gunther, Introduction, etc., p. 483, with the figures of certain Japanese Agonidz described by Jordan and Starks in Proc. Nat. Mus., Vol. XX VII, 1904, p. 596, especially Podothecus thomp- sont (fig. I1). 4 OmioGev, behind, @mos, shoulder, in allusion to the backward. displacement of the pectoral arch. 506 WILLIAM K. GREGORY by Cope. They parallel the true Apodes! in the anguilliform body, the multiplication of the vertebre, gephyrocercal tail,? loss of the ventral fins, reduction of the scales, and especially in the severance of the pectoral girdle from all connection with the skull, it being far removed from the skull and attached to the vertebral column. The group inhabits brackish and fresh waters of southern Asia and tropical Africa, and parallels the anguilli- form Dipnoi, Gymnarchs (p. 470), and. Gymnotids of those regions in its mud-loving habits and in the ability to respire air directly. The allocation of this group to the Acanthopteroidei (possibly to the Blenniidz, Boulenger) is‘indicated by a number of characters, including the closed condition of the air-bladder, the interjection between the parietals of the supraoccipital, and the contact of the latter with the frontals, the presence of the spines in the vertical fins, the exclusion of the maxillaries from the border of the mouth. APPENDIX I. - Independent or homoplastic evolution of the eel-like jorm of body, illus- ee in a list of eel-like vertebrates belonging to different families and orders. Criteria: anguilliform body with multiplication of vertebra, gephyro- cercal tail, reduced pelvic limbs, usually predatory habits, SUBCLASS ORDER, SUBORDER, ETC. FAMILY OR GENUS REMARKS. ~Cyclize Palzospondylus Incompletely anguilliform , Marsipobrancbii Hyperotreti Bdellostomide s Hyperoarti Petromyzontidz -Elasmobranchii Diplospondyli Chlamydoselachus Ventral fins only some- what reduced. .Dipneusti Sirenoidei Lepidosirenidze Teleostomi Crossopterygii Calamoichthys ss Chondrostei 3 (?) Belonorhynchys Incompletely anguilliform. Isospondyli Stomiatide Tail not gephyrocercal. ts ss Osteoglosside (Arapaima) wy a Gymnarchidze ¢ Heteromi Notacanthide a sf Halosauride “ Heteromi (?) Dercetide 6 ss Fierasferide ss Symbranchii All (2 families) Apodes (proper) All (3 suborders and numerous families) 1 See Appendix I. 2 See Appendix II. 3 The scarcity of known eel-like forms among the Canoids is remark- .ablee ; 4 THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 007 SUBCLASS ORDER, SUBORDER, ETC. FAMILY OR GENUS REMARKS. Teleostomi Apodes (?) Car- encheli Derichthyidze as ApodesLyomeri Saccopharyngide ss Nematognathi Several genera especially $0 Clarias, Stegophilum. oe Eventognathi Cobitide Tail not gephyrocercal. co Gymnonoti _Gymnotide Eel-like Characins. Haplomi Neochanna apeda (Galaxiide) es Thoracostraci Several genera elongate but : not strictly anguilliform a Anacanthini Enchelyopus a Gadid <6 Acanthop. Jugulares Ammodytide Tail not gephyrocercal.. “e “ Congrogadidz ae s Blenniidz Chenops, Xiphasia, Cryptacanthus Stathmonotus, and many others. ss ot Ptilichthyide bs *s Zoarcide (Lycodes, Ly- . cenchelys, and other genera.) fe ee Ophidiide “s cs Ateleopodide (Podatelide) i ss Brotulide (Bassoszetus and 2 other genera) ae Heterosomata Symphurus (a Soleid; body incont- pletely elongate, tail gephy- tocercal; apodal). sé Tzeniosomi Trachypteride (Regale- cus.) ANGUILLIFORM AMPHIBIA, REPTILIA, MAMMALIA. Amphibia Stegocephali Aistopodide (No limbs). Ke Urodela Amphiumidze (Limbs vestigial). CH Gymnophiona Coecilians (No limbs). 2 Reptilia Lacertilia Anguide (Ophisaurus, Anguis) (no. limbs). “s Ophidia Enhydrina (Body compressed, tail eel- like). fs Rhynchocephalia Saurophidium (?Aquatic) (Limbs reduced). <6 Pythonomorpha Tylosaurus etc. (But limbs functional). a Crocodilia Metrtorhynchus (But limbs functional). Mammalia Archzoceti Zeuglodon APPENDIX II. Evolution of the Caudal Fin. (Modified from Ryder: and Dollo?) 1**On the Origin of Heterocercy and the Evolution of the Fins and Fin- Rays of Fishes.’’ Rept. U.S. Commission Fish and Fisheries, 1884, pp. 981-1107. Also in Am. Naturalist, 1885, pp. 90-97, 200-204. 2‘*Sur la Phylogénie des Dipneustes,’”’ Bull. Soc. Belgique de Geol., tome ix, 1895, pp. 79-128. ‘‘Results du Voyage du S. Y. Belgica . . .,” Zoologie, Poissons, 4to, Anvers, 1904, pp. 234-239. 508 WILLIAM K. GREGORY Stage 1, DipHycercy Notochord straight, cpisthure symmetrical and separate from caudal fin. Examples: Amphioxus, Paleospondylus, Cyclos- tomes, certain Chimeroids (Hariotia), certain Acanthodians, Chlamydoselachus, embryonic sharks, ganoids, and teleosts. Stage 2, HETEROcERCY Derived from diphycercy by development of the true caudal fin beneath the notochord, the opisthure upturned. The dermal portion may become fan-like (rhipidoid). Stage 3, Homocrercy Derived from heterocercy by progressive upturning and reduction of the opisthure and by the co- alescence of the posterior interhemals into broad “hypurals,’ which form a fan-shaped (rhipidoid) bony tail. The dermal portion may be fan-like (rhipidoid) or pointed (gephyroid). Examples: Clupea, Salmo. Stage 4, EunHomocercy Derived from homocercy by the loss of the (New term) opisthure, the reduction of the hypurals and epurals, which are functionally replaced by ossified dermal rays, producing a perfectly symmetrical bony tail. Examples: mackere: group. (= Homocercal rhipidocercy Dollo.) Stage 2’, GpPHYROCERCY Derived from heterocercy by degeneration of the opisthure; the posterior portion of the median superior and inferior fins fuse posteriorly to form a new and symmetrical, pointed tail fin. Examples: Polypterus, Ceratodus. (=Heterocercal gephyrocercy Dollo.) Stage 3’, Hypocercy (new term). Derived from homocercy by co- alescence of the fan-like caudal with the pro- longed anal, the conjoined inferior fins being then pulled out into a long pointed tail fin. Example: Notopterus, Macrouride. (=Homocercal gephyrocercy Dollo.) Stage 3’ IsocERcy Derived from homocercy or hypocercy by the eB atrophy of the pointed tail and the development of a new fan-shaped tail around the stump of the old one. Examples: Gadus, Anguilla Stmenchelys. (=Dorso-caudal rhipidocercy Dollo.) Lreptocercy A condition in which the tail ends in a long delicate wisp, often an adaptation to deep-sea conditions. May be derived from Stages 1, 2, 2’, or 3’. . [Annats N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vor. XVII, No. 4, Part II, pp. 509-518, August, 1907.| A PERIDOTITE DIKE IN THE COAL MEASURES OF SOUTHWESTERN PENNSYLVANIA. By J. F. Kemp anp J. G. Ross. The discovery of dikes and other forms of intrusive rocks in | the almost undisturbed Paleozoic strata west of the Appalachian upheavals is a.matter of much scientific interest and has been so esteemed in the several announcements which have been hitherto made. The occurrences are all in localities where, under ordinary circumstances, intrusive rocks would not be anticipated, and they tend to make a geologist cautious in inferring the necessary absence of igneous phenomena beneath any region from the mere fact that they do not appear on the surface. By way of introduction to a new occurrence it will be of interest to recapitulate briefly with the accompanying outline map the cases already known. The first three discoveries were mentioned by Lardner Vanuxem in his report on the Third District of New York in 1842, although one of them, the Syracuse Serpentine, had been noted five years before.t The serpentine, however, was not recognized as igneous in its nature, until the microscopic exam- inations of Professor Geo. H. Williams demonstrated its true character in 1887. Since then other neighboring occurrences have been discovered from time to time and have been described in the citations given below. Speaking in general terms, the rock is a peridotite and penetrates the Onondaga Salt Group. In some more recently afforded material C. H. Smyth, Jr., has identified melilite, and it is possible that this mineral was once 1For a full account of this interesting rock and a sketch of its history in the literature see Geo. H. Williams, ‘‘On the Serpentine (Peridotite) Occurring in the Onondaga Salt Group at Syracuse, N. Y.,’’ Amer. Jour. Se7.,, Aug. 1887, p. 137. 599 © 510 J. F. KEMP AND J. G. ROSS a ee aes me ) hf ~y 3) } { “A 4 —— Menominee H i = b//, Marinette §, 3 Hints e % < boy) j Warisd SS Tear ie all gdensbidka % | oy rf t \s - READS Applat PP fon. ° Mairi ste Ry bs) | F cortownl Oshkash & @ Fort ie Litc'e Q s LZ le, S swede . ta oO ° Sag mrate 2 Aster Cf) fe so a Sees ‘J ono ik ree BRELREG OR ci 2 H “Lockport L , . Fe Sch aetna a] | , 2 flint | ‘, ——-— 5 Bifralo PA TT Sele aibainy: nee Grind Rahiage rt fac | y g ml : » Lansing J oD) phaca © z1lel E ; E hrenrcirhe SS Binghprten sn .gstons ew m ao rk Se ngs ore focktard ere ttle Creek aaeson oth ee Hornelisville® Corpeng See scat: »Llgin Leconte) | Ann £Fbor a7 SSH 3 ee Lepiyhkert, 6 OLR PY ee ee ry burs Min, South Bera| \—Tateatos | pe: : Sach en City ! wunksbarrc} fe ‘ H , “A are : ; Say he S : i u 7 conta (Ompesport i j o Lima ° shield “lepton Poreshille eA tw le w oT Bloomington i Kokoma Mario i Btanstiele Aug. bur eKeadi N- ene 1 kakiyets, i ) We Steeubgreaile di wal ee hse MMuncee; Piqua’ A NEN ainte aT blaure Vine nile i = ca pe paecatur | Richmonh sity feelel BrOUS — Zanesvitle « Chtrmbersburge | ier Hauedndianupotis| een ‘Lancaster ae RY, fet ER = of | r nea me Po a ra) 1 eHanilton REA aoe Kitcersbifin +" - & | eCincinnati f ae ats ——— ——___| “72. & = Ss Mawkisdehs ON rongnow 6 re evtitle y b AS rennes oe os Rerton S =~ AYO But \ i ew Albany ofa” Bontvort fi i a Bie , es ay untiugton | (F g Evansville Louisy Ue i QO \ cs a i A l_ = . ° Leacing toi . 4 i = OHI aS SS Owensboro » Ws \ Ey e Jopeet ees i te ‘ N 4 Miinchestont" 4 oH N ais io) oN NL Radnoke. Whynchbury Sere, sot ¥ | ie ey, (ee tetersbury Paducah, > = = pet SS : > = =" SST P as a” V ¥ = Portsmouth - : " C Sa Ey Rees T SSS Eo: a _._ Dani, = ae ¢ ‘ ee ene Coleone zh ee iy Nashville Taner = T rE 1 nozrville RSA Pe Nea Ning Bin iS es aia) ain i Raleigh a £ iA N_/ 4 7 | NOR TH c.A/R OLE Asheville | \ FIGURE I. Outline map of known localities of basic dikes from New York to western Kentucky. of general occurrence, but that it has disappeared in the course of decomposition, to which it is quite sensitive. P. F. Schneider has noted that one of the dikes strikes N. 5° E., and this bear- ing has been used in plotting the map here employed.! iN. H. Darton and J. F. Kemp, “‘A New Intrusive Rock near Syracuse,” Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., V1, p. 477, 1895. P. F. Schneider, “New Ex- posures of Eruptive Dikes in Syracuse, N. Y.,”’ Amer. Jour. Sct., July 1902, p.24. See also Proc. Onondaga Acad. of Sciences, I, p. 110, 1903. C. H. Smyth, Jr., “‘Petrography of the recently discovered dikes at Syracuse, etc.,”” Amer. Jour. Sci., July 1902, p. 26. E.H. Kraus, ““A New Exposure of Serpentine at Syracuse, N. Y.,”’ Amer. Geologist, May, 1904, p, 330. —————— OO _ A PERIDOTITE DIKE IN PENNSYLVANIA COAL MEASURES 511 The second record by Vanuxem is that of a dike near Manheim Bridge, on East Canada creek, 75 or 80 miles east of Syracuse. The dike comes up on a well-known fault between the Beek- mantown limestone on one side and the Trenton and Utica formations on the other. (See p. 270 of Vanuxem’s Report.) The petrography of this and of more recently discovered neighbor- ing dikes has been worked out by C. H. Smyth, Jr., who proves that the rock is the rare and interesting species alnoite, a melilite-basalt. The dike strikes with the fault, which varies from N. 40° E. to N. 20° E., the former bearing being the direction where the dikes are exposed. P. F. Schneider sub- sequently identified five dikes, all of which cross the creek. This rock is of much interest in connection with the new occur- rence here described, even though no melilite has been as yet demonstrable in the latter. Professor Smyth has also worked out some extremely interesting data regarding the amount of weathering since the disappearance of the glacial ice-sheet. The third occurrence mentioned by Vanuxem is of four narrow dikes near Ludlowville, N. Y., in the Genesee slate (p. 169 of his Report). Ludlowville is about ten miles north of Ithaca on the east side of Cayuga lake, and is approximately fifty miles southwest of Syracuse. As will appear, the region about the southern end of Cayuga lake is another center of fairly numerous outbreaks. The original discovery has since been added to by others in and near Ithaca, and in the largest case of all, in a small ravine, a mile south of Glenwood, a dike, has been reported by V. H. Barnett which is certainly 25 ft. and may be more than too ft. in width. These dikes cut the Devonian strata as high up as the Portage. The petrography has been most care- fully worked out by G. C. Matson. Olivine and biotite are the chief minerals present, with less abundant diopside, magnetite, iC. H. Smyth, Jr., ‘‘ A Third Occurrence of Peridotite in Central New York,’ Amer. Jour. Sci., April 1892, p. 322. ‘‘Alnoite Containing an Uncommon Variety of Melilite,” Idem, August 1893, p. 104.‘ Weathering of Alnoite at Manheim, N. Y.,”’ Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., TX., 1897, p. 257. P. F. Schneider, ‘‘ The Correlation of Some Alnoite Dikes in East Canada Creek, N. Y.,’’ Science, Nov. 24, 1895, p. 673. The first dike discovered is illustrated in the cut on p. 247 of Scott’s Introduction to Geology. 512 J. F. KEMP AND J. G. ROSS ilmenite, perofskite, picotite, and apatite. Alteration products q are also much in evidence, but no melilite was discovered. The dikes strike nearly north and south and are believed by Mr. Matson, from their relations with the gentle folds and faults to have entered near the close of the Paleozoic.1 Three interesting bowlders have been found in the drift at Aurora, Canandaigua, and Syracuse, apparently from not remote sources. They are all obviously dike rocks of basic character, and are in quite fresh condition. They are of unusual types, each, however, differing from the dikes which have been found in place. Full descriptions are given in the papers cited below. ? In southwestern Pennsylvania, 200 miles from Ithaca, the dike occurs which is shortly to be described in this paper. In Elliott Co., Ky., 200 miles farther to the southwest there occur two dikes less than a mile apart and cutting the Coal Measures. The dikes strike northwest and the eastern one sends off a long prong to the northeast. The longest exposure is a little less than a mile in length, and the greatest width is fifty feet. The rock is a typical peridotite in which olivine is much the most abundant mineral, constituting with the serpentine referable to it, more than half the mass. With it are pyrope, ilmenite, enstatite, biotite, and apatite in decreasing order among the original components, and serpentine, dolomite, magnetite, and perofskite (first determined as octahedrite) among the secondary.? 1J. F. Kemp, “‘Peridotite Dikes in the Portage Sandstones near Ithaca, N. Y.,” Amer. Jour. Sci., Nov., 1891, p.410. In this paper several earlier local records are mentioned. P. F. Schneider, “‘Notes on Eruptive Dikes near Ithaca, N. Y.,” Proc. Onondaga Acad. Scz., I, 130; pe rgosee eae Barnett, ‘‘ Notice of the Discovery of a New Dike at Ithaca, N. Y.,” Amer. Jour. Sci., March, 1905, p. 210. G.C. Matson, “Peridotite Dikes near Ithaca, N. Y.,’’ Jour. Geol., April-May, 1905, p. 264. 2J. F. Kemp, ‘‘A Remarkable Erratic from Aurora, N. Y.,”’ Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci., XI, 1892, p.126. B.K. Emerson, ‘‘ Notes upon Two Boulders of very Basic Eruptive Rock from the West Shore of Canandaigua Lake, etc.,” Am. Rep. N. Y. State Mus., 46, p. 251, 1893. This eruptive had a piece of Trenton limestone adhering to it and showing contact effects. C. H. Smyth, Jr., “‘On the Syracuse bowlder,”’ Amer. Jour. Scz., July, 1902, Pp. 30. 3J. S. Diller, “‘Peridotite of Elliott Co., Ky.,” Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey, _A PERIDOTITE DIKE IN PENNSYLVANIA COAL MEASURES 513 Some 275 miles west of the Elliott Co. exposure there is a similar dike in Crittenden Co., Ky. It appears in a fault, which has the St. Louis beds of the Lower Carboniferous on the north- west and the Upper Chester and Coal Measure beds on the southeast. It strikes N. 44° E., is known over a stretch of six miles, and is more than 20 ft. wide at one place. At least one other dike has been discovered in the same section. The rock is a mica-peridotite, 75 per cent. of the mass being biotite and serpentine from olivine. Perofskite, magnetite, chlorite, and calcite make up the remainder. Some fluorspar deposits are -associated with the dike.! More than 300 miles southwest of the last-named exposure is found the peridotite of Pike Co., Ark. This again is a biotite- bearing peridotite with augite, perofskite, and magnetite. It certainly cuts both Carboniferous and early Cretaceous strata and is believed to have entered at the close of the Cretaceous.? In central Arkansas there are numerous basic dikes outside the area of nephelite-syenite which are of peculiar mineralogical composition. They are rich in biotite and augite but lack oli- vine. No melilite could be identified.° Leaving for the moment this review of earlier records, the reader may now follow the details of the Pennsylvania occur- rence, after which some general comparisons may be drawn. The dike which furnishes the special subject for the present paper lies in southwestern Pennsylvania about thirteen miles north of the West Virginia state line. It was first noted more than forty years ago, by Mr. Alexis H. Ross, a local resident, but it seems not to have become known to any geologist. In the last few years during which coal mines have been developed 38, 1887. Some interest has been excited in the possible discovery of diamonds in this dike, and the same idea has been current with regard to the Syracuse dike. 1J. S. Diller, ‘‘Mica-peridotite from Kentucky,” Amer. Jour. Sct., @et 1802, p-. 286. 2J. C. Branner, ‘‘Peridotite of Pike Co., Ark,” Amer. Jour. Sct., July 1889, p. 50. Rept. Geol. Surv. Ark., Il, p. 377, 1890. 3J. F. Kemp, ‘‘ Basic Dikes Outside the Syenite Areas of Arkansas,” Rept. Geol. Surv. Ark., Il, p. 392, 1890. 514 J. F. KEMP AND J. G. ROSS it has been found underground, and thus the best exposures and the freshest rock have been obtained. Specimens were handed to the senior writer in the fall of 1905 by J. G. Ross, the son of Alexis H. Ross, and at the time Fellow in Mining in Columbia University. The dike was announced and briefly described before the Geological Society of America at the Ottawa meeting December, 1905, and since then additional specimens have been studied and an analysis has been prepared. The extent and location of the dike have been worked out in detail by J. G. Ross and his brother Donald. The dike is in the Masontown quadrangle and on the east bank of the Monongahela River. It cuts across one of the small tributaries of the Monongahela called Middle Run, at whose mouth is the coal-mining town of Gates. To the southeast it has been found as far as the little town of Edenborn, where, in the coal mines of the Frick Coal Company, it pinches out, after forming three separate branches. ‘To the northwest, it appears in the highway along the east bank of the Monongahela, but efforts to find it on. the west bank have not been successful. The details of situation are shown in Fig. 2. The local geology is shown in detail in the Masontown—Union- town folio, No. 82, of the U. S. Geological Survey. The Monon- gahela series is exposed along the river bank with the Pittsburg seam, at the mouth of Middle Run, 240 ft. below the river. The Monongahela series is 380 ft. thick at this point, so that the Waynesburg seam is r4o ft. above the river. Still higher the Dunkard series covers the hill-tops. The dike certainly cuts the Waynesburg seam and rises at least 20 feet higher in the overlying Dunkard series. On the surface the dike is narrow wherever discovered and is single, except at the crossing of Middle Run. The observed thicknesses vary from about one foot to about 3 feet, except in the Waynesburg coal where it is 10 feet. Under ground, how- ever, where the opportunities for exact study are better, the thickness at the horizon of the Pittsburg seam reaches a reported maximum of 35 feet. The dike moreover is known to spht up. At the southeast, as it runs out, there are three narrow branches, each a few inches across. At the extreme northwest there are : g \E aS iN\ \) SA (NX CN — \ ON a fi A) ) ) y Z Ems . Lincolnose2 ) ane Ate ) 2. Kilauase. 2. Prowersose. Schist. III. Salfemane. 5. Gallare. (4. Auvergnase. 3. Auvergnose. Diabase and Horn- blende schist. V.Perfemane. 1. Maorare. 1. Dunase. 1. Dunose. Peridotite(dunite) In the following pages the rocks will be discussed under two groups according to age. In one of these groups fall the more or less metamorphosed rocks of all compositions; in the other the younger rocks which according to the old nomenclature would have been called diabases. The great scientific value of the new system of classification becomes evident in a region such as the one under discussion, where two series of rocks differing in age, megascopic and microscopic characters are found to be closely related in quantitative chemical characters and in the possible (but not actual) proportions of certain “‘standard”’ minerals. The authors of the new system expressly state that meta- morphic rocks are excluded from their scheme. Nevertheless, in the following pages the system is applied to metamorphic rocks with great significance. It is of course evident that the system is not applicable in cases where there is any doubt of the igneous origin, or in cases where either weathering or per- colating solutions have so altered the rock that its original character cannot be determined. In the types in question it was always possible to determine what the original was. The * 1 Cross, Iddings, Pirsson, Washington, Jour. Geol., X, 1902. 2 New name proposed in this paper. A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 529 metamorphism was mainly of the nature of intense crushing, without chemical addition or subtraction. In most cases there were occasional less altered patches, where the original texture and mineralogy could at least be inferred, if not actually observed. It was found that the rocks were invariably originally holocrystalline, usually of granitic texture. The authors of the new system propose various prefixes for the description of texture. These are used in the following pages when the original texture could be observed. When a rock is thoroughly schistose or gneissic the prefix ““meta’’is employed. Where it is meta- morphic, but shows indications of what the texture was before metamorphism, the prefix ““meta’’ is used and also a textural prefix. Thus, “‘meta-grano-sitkose’”’ is a metamorphic rock in which a former granitic texture is evident, while ‘“‘meta- auvergnose,”’ is a hornblende schist in which all trace of original texture is lost. In those cases where both metamorphic and non-metamorphic portions were found, the metamorphism is ignored in the nomenclature. Only one rock in the region was seriously altered by weathering. This was the most basic of the types, being an almost pure olivine rock. It contains serpentine and other alteration products, and in the analysis a notable amount of water and of carbon dioxide was determined. The analysis as a whole could not be recast in terms of the new system because of these ex- traneous substances. Nevertheless it was perfectly possible to classify fhe rock, since the alteration products were found on microscopic examination to be all replacements of the olivine. The composition of the olivine could be determined from the analysis, and the alteration products could be ignored in classi- fying. ‘The only possible chance for error in such a case lies in the doubt about the original proportions between olivine and magnetite, but the mathematical grouping is sufficiently broad for classification to be made in this respect with reasonable certainty. The tedious labor involved in the production of “‘superior”’ analyses necessarily limits the number of them. In this case all of the principal types were analyzed, but many subordinate variations were of necessity examined only microscopically. 530 OGILVIE The petrographic descriptions of the various types which were not analyzed are given in each case after the discussion of the similar type which was analyzed. It is however realized that there may be errors in the inferred relationships and quantitative development of these unanalysed types. The accurate mathe- matical estimation of quantities of minerals seen under the microscope is not without difficulty, and is apt to be inaccurate where there are variations in coarseness of grain and where there is a gneissic arrangement of minerals in bands. The problem too becomes the more involved, when the majority of the min- erals present are not the ones on which the classification is based. With full regard for the uncertainties involved, calculations were made and the unanalyzed rocks placed with their nearest analyzed allies. In spite of the manifold possibilities of error, it is con- fidently believed that only by such estimations will the real significance of the metamorphic rocks be appreciated. For example, a dark hornblende schist, consisting mainly of horn- blende and plagioclase would in the old system have been reck- oned with the gabbros. If any proportions were recorded at all, merely the ratio between hornblende and feldspar would have been noted. In the light of the new system it becomes evident that that ratio has no significance at all, except as regards metamorphism, and the essential and significant conception of the type involves the splitting up of the hornblende into an- orthite, diopside and hypersthene molecules which possibly never existed as minerals in the rock, and whose ratios may show more acid affinity than would be supposed on casual inspection. It is not possible to do this without any analysis of the rock, but given one good analysis of a type, it is possible to consider slightly dissimilar types by means of microscopical inspection only. The acid rocks were the ones which received least attention from us. These were very common and in no way notable, and did not seem of sufficient importance to justify any great ex- penditure of time on either mapping or analysis. The types will be taken up proceeding from acid to basic within each of the two series. It is, however, to be bornein mind that the acid types are very much the most common. A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 531 THE PERSALANES. Grano-Lassenose. I. 4. 2.4. (Granite.) Occurrence.—This type was found in the form of dikes on Damariscove Island, There were many of the dikes, some running with the strike, some cutting across it at various angles. There was considerable variation in coarseness of grain, and the borders of the dikes were often pegmatitic. The schist was much contorted near the contact and was full of quartz lenses. In fact the whole island was thoroughly injected. Time did not allow of detailed map- ping of these dikes. Specimens were collected of all that were found and slides were studied. All of the dikes appeared to be of essentially the same type, so one analysis only was made of them. TABLE IV. Chemical Composition and Classification of Damariscove Lassenose. 1 prope one vom SiO , 67.59 1.126 | Qu 19.56 Al,O; 17.41 sit | Or 15.59 Fe,0,; Sai .009 | Ab 41.39 FeO 2.98 .040 An 14.18 MgO i 1.40 035 Cor a CaO 2.05 .054 Hyp 6.27 Na,O 4.89 .079 Mag 2.09 K,O 2.59 .028 Ilm it, 52 lel oOia= 18 Ap 34 H ,O- oO4 | COE none TiO, 83 .O1O 1P 50) 3 .19 .OO1 Total IOL.30 On consulting Washington’s tables' it becomes evident that lassenose is one of the commonest of rock types, hence a com- parison with other regions would be futile. _ Microscopic characters.—Microscopically the dikes are found to be essentially alike, differing mainly in coarseness of grain. They contain biotite, brown hornblende, a very little augite, 1Prof. Paper, r4., U. S.G.5. aa2 OGILVIE orthoclase, albite, oligoclase, titanite, apatite and quartz. In some cases the dikes were but little metamorphosed, in others they were intensely sheared, and there are all the intermediate degrees of change. In the crushed varieties there is a pale biotite poor in iron, associated at times with ordinary deep brown biotite, at times with the orthoclase. The light biotite is apparently secondary, of deep-seated or metamorphic origin. Frequently the shreds of the secondary biotite are strung out in lines having parallel orientation, giving the rock somewhat of a — schistose structure. In the crushed varieties microcline is com- mon, as are undulatory extinction in the quartz, microperthitic intergrowths and some granulation. A few crystals of zoisite were to be seen, apparently derived from the plagioclase as a product of dynamic metamorphism. Reaction rims are frequent between the biotite and the hornblende. It is very common to see a hornblende individual with deeply corroded edges sur- rounded by a radiating mass of biotite leaves interspersed with feldspar and dotted with magnetite, the whole enclosed in a biotite individual. The feldspars, particularly orthoclase, contain inclusions of a fine reddish black dust. Some mica is also present as inclusions. The dust is to be seen especially in the central zones, the edges being free from it. This type of inclusion is present in all the rocks of the region. For reasons that will be discussed later (see p. 538) these are thought to be titaniferous, and to consist of several minerals notably perofskite, rutile,titanite and magnetite. Norm and Mode.—Plagioclase was the commonest mineral; next in abundance, biotite and orthoclase in about equal amounts, hornblende, augite and zoisite were in small amounts. It ap- pears that the norm agrees fairly well with the mode. The disagreements are that there is no anorthite (all the plagioclase being near the albite end of the series) and no corundum, and that the actual percentage of orthoclase is less than the normative. All of these discrepancies are accounted for by the presence of biotite, hornblende, augite and zoisite. These minerals are too variable to admit of accurate recalculation, but it is evident that some potash is in the biotite, and Hme in the other three with alumina distributed among them. A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 533 Related Types.—On the mainland and neighboring islands are many granitic dikes and bathyliths. Microscopic examination of many of these revealed mineralogical similarity to the type just described, but with some variation between the proportions of constituents. An estimation of these constituents in terms of standard minerals reveals the fact that class and order are evidently the same as for the type just described, but that there is some variation in the relative amounts of alkalies and of lime. The commonest types from the mainland appear to fall into I. 4. 3. 4, yellowstoneose, no analyses of which were made. THE DOSALANES. Meta-grano-sitkose. II. 3. 3. 4. (Quartz-augite-Diorite; Actino- lite Schist.) | Occurrence.—The rock thus classified is one of the most remarkable of the whole region. It forms dikes on Fisherman’s Island in a country rock of sandy biotite schist. The dikes frequently parallel the structure, and, as they weather into a gray sand and frequently contain inclusions of the schist, they appear deceptively like a sedimentary rock. They are how- ever found unmistakably cutting the bedding at various angles. Megascopic Character.—In a fresh hand specimen the igneous nature of the rock is unmistakable. Pink with green spots is its general appearance. The texture is moderately coarse to fine. Actinolite and a schistose structure develop in the crushed parts. Microscopic Character.—In the less crushed varieties the fol- lowing minerals were observed, in order of abundance: a greenish augite, quartz, plagioclase (albite and oligoclase), zoisite, brown hornblende, titanite, biotite, apatite. In the more crushed varieties actinolite develops almost to the exclusion of the other ferro-magnesian minerals, while there is a marked increase in zoisite; microcline is abundant, and the quartz is _ completely crushed. Similar Types.—The rock just described is confined to the general vicinity of Fisherman’s Island. On Ocean Point are a few dikes which may be of the same rock, but the actinolite is not conspicuous in them. The dikes on Ocean Point are like most of the dikes of the region in cutting their enclosing rock sharply, in which respect they differ from the sitkose just described. 534 OGILVIE The latter develop very conspicuous contact zones of actinolite along the borders. The dikes are all small, usually three inches or less in width, and they are not of great length. On the same island are many large granitic dikes, microscopically similar to the lassenose, which are thirty feet or more in width. ‘These granite dikes are entirely distinct from the sitkose. Mega- scopically the latter seems to contain primarily pink feldspar and actinolite. Comparison with Alaskan Sitkose.—It is worthy of note that in the only other known locality where this subrang is found, namely in the neighborhood of Sitka, Alaska, the field relations are described! as being essentially similar to those above in- dicated for Fisherman’s Island. In both cases the dike rock is involved with sediments in a way that seems deceptively like bedding, and in both there is a crushing of the quartz on a microscopic scale. The essential differences between the two are the much higher lime content of the Maine rock and the dynamic metamorphism of the whole Maine region at a time subsequent to the intrusion of the dike. ‘The analysis of the Sitka rock is here reproduced for comparison. TABLE W, Analyses, Molecular Proportions and Norms of Sitkose. Molecular .Composition. Baa aeenione, Norm, IL JL Te It il, iO. SiO , 67.04 65.94 Tite) 1.099 Qu 28.68 30.1 Al,O, Tie) BWA .II2 .134 Or 6.12 10.0 Fe,O,; .78 49 .005 .003 Ab 23.06 23.6 FeO 2575 52k ORE .O71 An 15.85 14.2 MgO Bug 2 2.33 .088 .058 C 2.0 CaO 7.60 2.87 58 AO .O51 Di 16.96 Na,O 2.70 2.80 .044 .045 Hy 3.96 13.6 K,0 1.00 1.63 .OII .o18 Mag. 1.66 ay) H,O+ 16 2.59 Iim 3.19 #5 H,O- .09 2 Ap Be CO, none 59 TiO, 1.68 .80 .O2T .O1O IP (0) 5 .12 sak .OOL .002 Total 99.84 99.41 1 Becker, Annual Rept. U. S. G. S., XVIII, Pt. III, p. 43. A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 535 I. Analysis, molecular proportions and norm of sitkose from Fisher- man’s Island, Me. : Il. Analysis, molecular proportions and norm of sitkose from Alaska, described by Becker; analysis, by Hillebrand. Analysis and norm published in Washington’s tables, Proj. Paper 14, U. S. G. S. p- 219. (.61% of rare.oxides omitted.) The Maine rock is perfectly fresh as regards weathering; the Alaska one contains notable amounts of water and of carbon dioxide and is described as containing secondary chlorite, calcite and muscovite. The comparison between them cannot there- fore be pushed too far. It is well known that in the weathering process the lime is the first constituent to be attacked and that of all the others alumina is the most constant actually, but apparently grows greater because of the percentage decrease in the others. These two analyses would be much closer if a recasting were made because of weathering. Norm and Mode.—In the less crushed varieties of the Maine rock the mode differs from the norm mainly in the entire absence of anorthite and the presence of various calciferous alferric minerals. Titanite is moderately abundant, thus using up the ilmenite molecule in combination with CaO. There is a very little biotite, which calls for a slight re-arrangement of the potash molecules. Metamorphism.—As a rttle the rock has been greatly sheared. The shearing took place in some instances along the strike of the dike, in some directly across it, and in some obliquely. The result of the shearing is seen in granulation of the quartz, un- dulatory extinction of quartz and feldspars, bending of the feldspar lamelle, cracking of the feldspars and the pres- ence of the metamorphic minerals microcline, actinolite and zoisite. Grano-tonalose. II. 4. 3. 4. (Quartz-mica Diorite). Occur- rence.—The rock which falls into this subrang makes up the greater part of the island of Southport, where it is found in irregular masses of bathylithic or laccolithic character. The same type of rock occurs to some extent in the form of dikes on the mainland. Megascopic Character.—It is a fairly coarse-grained light gray rock of granitic texture occasionally gneissoid. In the field it 536 OGILVIE can readily be distinguished from all other granitic types of the region in that its color tones are all of black and white order. The other granites are pinkish, greenish or brownish in tone. TABLE VI. Analysis and Norm of Tonalose jrom Southport. Composition. peepee Norm. SiO , 63.44% I.057 Qu 17.58 Al,0O; 18.84 .184 Or Ir.68 Fe,O0,; .16 .OOL Ab 36.15 FeO 4.05 .056 An 19.18 MgoO 1.99 .049 Cor BOs CaO 4.23 O75 Na.,O 4135 .069 Hyp 9.78 1K AO) 2.07 .021 ag 28 H,O0+ 33 Ilm 2.74 H,O — .06 Ap .607 CO, none AO) I.41 .018 P.O; Ree .002 Total IOI.25 Microscopic Character.—This rock type is too common to make extended comment desirable. It contains orthoclase, plagioclase, biotite and quartz, in order of abundance, with a little accessory magnetite and apatite and a moderate amount of titanite. Metamorphism.—There is evidence of strain, though not of as intense degree as in the case of the Damariscove lassenose. A little undulatory extinction, a few individuals of microcline and considerable cracking of the feldspar are the evidences of it. There is alittle kaolin developed along the cracks in the feldspar, and some chlorite borders the biotite. The Germanares (II. 5). (Augengneiss; Monzonite; Gabbro; Anorthosite.) In the Journal of Geology for April and May, 1906, is a paper by Edson S. Bastin on prowersose from Knox County, Maine. The rock I am about to describe appears to be another occurrence of the same type. The points of similarity will be evident. on comparison with Mr. Bastin’s description. The Boothbay rock is variable in structure, mineralogy and chemical > iife A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 537 composition. Of the various types selected by us for analysis and for microscopic study no one is identical with his, yet our types from the same rock mass differ from another in as essential respects as do most of them from his rock. The Boothbay rock is invariably porphyritic, the phenocysts being feldspathic, the ground-mass micaceous. On analysis, the ground-mass only ! corresponds to Mr. Bastin’s analysis and falls into the subrang prowersose. The whole rock of each of our types is more salic, and the various types respectively fall into the subrangs mon- zonose, umptekose and the unnamed subrang (II. 5. 3. 2.) of which the only analysis given in Washington’s tables is that of the augite-minette from the Plauensche Grund of Dresden. Since the Maine rock is of notable extent, and the analysis accurate and from fresh material, it appears justifiable that a name from this locality be given to this subrang of the new system, and the name /incolnose is here proposed for it from Lincoln County, Maine. The Boothbay rock (including uwmptekose, monzonose and lincolnose) is found in two parallel bands about two miles apart. The eastern band outcrops on Squirrel Island (see map, Fig. 2) and again on Spruce Point. In both localities it has been much cut up by later intrusives. Its strike varies from due N.-S. to N. 15° E. and it may be found at intervals throughout the length of the quadrangle. It forms Mt. Pisgah and there has a width of about a quarter of a mile. This band was traced in the direction of its strike for twelve miles, the width being very variable. It is often concealed by vegetation and sometimes appears to pinch out altogether. The indications point towards a string of lens-shaped masses barely connected with each other and arranged in a uniform direction. The western band is shorter and wider being apparently three miles in length and one in maximum width. Its widest part is found on the south shore of Campbell pond; from there it extends southward rapidly narrowing to the coast. Mr. Bastin’s exposures are about forty miles distant in a N. 20° E. direction. Wherever exposed on the Boothbay quadrangle both bands show a marked difference between core and edges. The core 1 See Analysis II, Table VII. O38 OGILVIE consists of a very friable, easily weathered, dark rock, which usually forms a depression. It consists of blue ‘‘augen”’ an inch or less in length in a ground-mass of brown mica and feldspar. The augen are without orientation, and the mica plates also have no uniform arrangement. In the border zones the rock is schis- tose. The biotite and the augen are arranged with the long axes in the same direction. The latter often being completely crushed and represented by white bands between the mica plates. This border rock resists weathering much better than the rock of the core, hence it usually forms ridges. It is not among the hardest rocks of the region, but it is sufficiently resistant to form hills of moderate altitude. Fresh specimens of the border rock can readily be found, while the core disintegrates so readily that it might easily be overlooked altogether, and fresh specimens are difficult to obtain. Microscopically the augen are found to be similar to the graphic granite which forms one of the youngest intrusions of the region. They consist of albite, microcline, microperthite and orthoclase, in order of abundance, with sometimes a little quartz. A few scales of mica are to be seen scattered through the augen, especially in the sheared varieties. Zonal structure is common in the feldspars. The augen are essentially similar in all var- ieties of the rock, differing only in degree of metamorphism. In some instances they are cracked, the cracks being filled with either quartz or muscovite, the former containing dark in- clusions. Other occurrences are granulated on a microscopic scale, and still others are so completely crushed that they are drawn out into bands and are white megascopically. The feldspars contain large numbers of inclusions. Quartz, titanite, perofskite, magnetite and rutile could be identified, the needles of the last-named being usually arranged in two intersecting directions. In the following analysis, care was taken to exclude as far as possible the scales of biotite which are occasionally within the augen. The mica of the ground- mass adheres most persistently to the augen, and particular care was taken to break it away. Considering these precautions, the amounts of iron, magnesia and titanium are very large; they are undoubtedly to be accounted for in the inclusions, as is some ——_ A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 539 of the quartz. The amount is so large that the analysis can be classified as a whole rock, falling into the subrang I. 5. 1. 3, phlegrose. Since the inclusions in these feldspars are of pre- cisely the same type as those in other rock types of the region, the conclusion seems justified that the inclusions described else- where are of the same type. The high alkalies and low lime are noteworthy and correspond with the absence of lime feldspar. This again is a general characteristic of the igneous rocks of the whole region, lime whether great or small in amount being invariably in a ferro- magnesian mineral and nearly or quite lacking in the feldspar. aie: WILL. Analyses and Molecular Proportions of Monzonite from Spruce Point, Me. I ite Si0 » 65.69% 1.095 55-957 933 Al,O, 18.54 .18t I2.2 21 Bes O> -66 .004 25 002 FeO 50 .007 5.61 078 MgO 12 .003 9.17 r.48 CaO -99 .O17 4.63 082 Na,O Bests .090 T.QI O31 K,0 7-30 .078 6.28 067 H,O+ .09 i8 H ,O- .OI O5 TiO, JR5 .007 Bou 040 CO; none none P,O; 2s .002 .83 .006 Total 100.26 100.29 I. “Augen” from monzonite of Spruce Point, Me. Position in the quantitative system, I. 5.1.3. Phlegrose. II. Schistose ground-mass of monzonite from Spruce Point. Me. Position in the quantitative system III.5.2.2. Prowersose. Table VII. gives the analysis of the augen and also of the ground-mass. The distribution of ingredients is evident with- out especial comment. The potash is noteworthy, being high in both parts and is of course in orthoclase in I and in biotite in II. A more detailed description of the whole rock will be given under monzonose. 540 OGILVIE Lincolnose. II. 5. 3. 2. As already mentioned this new name is proposed for the soft rock which forms the core of both in- trusions. Megascopically it is seen to contain large blue augen set in a ground-mass which is dense and dark except for mica scales. Microscopic Character.—The augen are found to be in all respects similar to those already described, and are of the least crushed variety. In the ground-mass are found biotite, pyroxene, hornblende, titanite and magnetite, with a very little microcline, and more plagioclase, which is partly labradorite and partly albite, and a little microperthite. There are three types of pyroxene. One of these is an ordinary colorless or greenish augite, remarkable only for its inclusions. The inclusions are opaque black grains or rods, probably of titaniferous magnetite, and are so abundant as to make the augite appear opaque. Prismatic faces are occasionally present in this augite, but terminal faces are lacking. About the edges there is frequently an intergrowth of biotite along the cleavage cracks, and biotite and brown hornblende together frequently form rosettes which seem derived from the augite by dynamic metamorphism. The second type of pyroxene is faintly pleochroic from pink to violet and has an extinction angle (measured from C in the plane oro) which varies from o° to 13°. In addition to the ordinary pyroxene cleavage, a parting parallel to 100 can be plainly seen, and a less distinct parting parallel to o10. These properties seem most nearly to correspond to diallage. This mineral contains great quantities of brownish red inclusions, apparently both rutile and titaniferous magnetite being present. Crystal boundaries are lacking in the diallage. It is usually surrounded by biotite and brown hornblende. The third type of pyroxene is apparently secondary, the result of dynamic metamorphism of either of the two preceding types, and is usually associated with the rims of biotite and hornblende. It occurs in irregular grains, without in- clusions, is frequently twinned, and is occasionally altered to uralite. The hornblende is reddish brown and occurs in two ways. A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 541 As already implied, one of these occurrences is evidently sec- ondary aiter the pyroxene, it and the biotite being together arranged in rosettes or rims around the augites. The other type of hornblende is also brown, but it forms large individuals and is apparently original. Itisrare. Considerable apatite is present in long prisms containing transparent inclusions arranged paral- lel to the axis. The biotite is evidently poor in iron, ranging in pleochroism from yellow to reddish brown. As an original mineral it is found in scales, which are frequently bleached at the edges. The secondary biotite consists of small individuals associated with the alteration of the pyroxene. Chemical Composition.—Analysis I, Table VIII, is of the typical lincolnose from the core of the western intrusion. Meta-monzonose. II. 5. 2. 3. Occurrence.—Bordering the lincolnose on both sides is the schistose portion already men- tioned, of which the analyses in Table VII give separately the composition of augen and ground-mass. This differs from the lincolnose not only in having a schistose structure and in being less easily weathered, but also chemically and mineralogically. The augen are similar to those of the lincolnose but are more frequently crushed, especially near the edges of the rock mass. The ground-mass is quite different. It contains mainly biotite with little green hornblende and very little augite, which is sur- rounded by large rims of secondary brown hornblende. Biotite, microcline, microperthite, albite and a little quartz with titanite and magnetite make up the rest of the rock. There is great strain in the feldspar. The biotite is bleached along its edges, Analysis II in Table VIII is compounded of the two analyses in Table VII in the proportion of two parts of the augen to three of ground-mass, which is the ratio in which they were observed in the slides. Meta-umptekose. II. 5. 1. 4. In the northern part of the Boothbay quadrangle the rock re-appears about two miles east of South Newcastle. In this locality is found the third type. Here the augen are without orientation and there is little or no schistosity, in which it resembles the type first described (lincolnose). The rock is of moderate hardness and not readily 542 OGILVIE weathered, in which it resembles the second type (monzonose). It differs from both in that the ground-mass is lighter colored, and the general tone of the rock is greenish gray rather than black. Mucroscopic Character.—The lighter color is found to be due to the presence of a larger proportion of orthoclase, albite and quartz, with less mica, and the green tone to the presence of green hornblende. Hornblende is the prevailing femic mineral and is of two varieties, a deep reddish, basaltic variety and a colorless or green- ish one. The latter is frequently twinned. Biotite is present, frequently intergrown with the colorless hornblende, in which relationship the biotite appears to be the older. Titanite and apatite are abundant. The titanite is remarkable for having double refraction and slight pleochroism from colorless to red- dish. It has deep irregular cracks and polysynthetic twinning. It encloses apatite, and is frequently surrounded by rims of magnetite with the colorless hornblende. Pyroxene is entirely lacking. The analysis of umptekose is given in Column III of Table VEL: | MABLE VAIL. Analyses and Molecular Proportions of Monzonites. Tf If Teale se 55-17% -919 59-64% .994 58.74% .979 Al,O; 18.01 .176 14.76 .145 14.61 .143 Fe,0; .08 .OOL AG .003 48 .003 FeO 5-41 .075 Basi .050 3.70 .O51 MgO 5.29 Bia BAGS .138 5-47 137 CaO 5-64 .IIQ 3.47 .057 3.34 .060 Na.,O 2.12 .034 RiDy .059 5-70 .092 K,O 5-48 .059 6.69 5O\7aE 3.79 .040 H,O+ -29 oil 27 H ,0O- OL 03 7 WiO) 5 BBR .029 2,11 .026 1.87 .024 CO, none none none 12 O5 .25 .60 I.00 Total 100.86 99.92 99.14 A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 543 TasBLe VIII—Continued. Analyses and Molecular Proportions of Monzonites Norms. it iO, Ee Or 32.80 Or 30.47 Or 22.24 Ab 17.81 Ab 27 Ab 48.40 An 22.24 An 5.84 An 2.00 C oRit Di 7.06 Di 5-93 Hy EGG 5 Hy 13.47 Hy I5.80 Ol 2.34 Il 2.85 ag 3.54 Il 4.31 Mg .46 Mg 7O Ap 1.96 Ap mie Ap DBR I. Monzonite from Campbell Pond, Maine. Position in the quantitative system II. 5.3.4. Lincolnose. II. Schist. Analyses I and II of Table VII combined in the proportions of 2:3. Position in the quantitative system II. 5.2.3. Monzonose. III. Monzonite from South Newcastle, Maine. Position in the quantitive system II. 5.1.4. Umptekose. This group of rocks presents similarities to the shonkinites, yogoites and monzonites of the Bearpaw and Little Belt Mountains, and with the prowersose of Two Buttes, Col. It also has affinities with the ciminites and vulsinites of Italy. It has no close allies near at hand, except the prowersose described by Bastin, which is probably part of the same rock-body. The similarity with the distant rocks is chemical only. The other types are unmetamorphic and in some cases surface voleanics. The Maine rocks are evidently of deep-seated origin, and highly metamorphic, the resulting mineralogy and structure departing widely from those of the allied types. The mode departs widely from the norm for the same reason, namely that the minerals actually present are in large part the result of dynamic processes, and are in general those of higher specific gravity than the normative ones. THE SALFEMANES. Meta-auvergnose. III. 5. 4. 3. Hornblende Schist. Occur- rence. —Hornblende schists are common on the coast of Maine and common also on the Boothbay quadrangle. They are involved 544 OGILVIE ry with acid igneous rocks and with mica schists in a very complex way. Asarule the trend of the rock is the same as the strike of the schistosity, but there are occasional exceptions. The way in which it is caught in with other rocks is shown on the small map of Cabbage Island. It was not put on the large map, because the patches of it are so numerous and so small. There are, however, several large and persistent streaks of the rock. One of these is on Southport near Cape Newagen, where a band of it is cut by a large diabase dike. Another very persistent streak extended from near the head of Linekin’s Bay northward for about five miles. It was from this band that the chemical analysis was made. Megascopic Character.—The rock is somewhat variable in color, ranging from black to dark gray. In the black types horn- blende is the only mineral distinguishable; in the gray, feldspar and hornblende. The gray portions are very distinctly banded, the bands consisting of alternating streaks of light and dark minerals. The black and the gray portions both show fissility, caused by a parallel orientation of the hornblende. Chemical Character.—It is evident that the chemical association is with the diabases, though the lime is higher than is usual; the potash lower; and the sum of the alkalies is low as compared with lime. TABLE IX. Analysis and Norm of Meta-auvergnose from Bayville, Maine. Composition. ie ae Norm. S10 2 49.00% .816 © Qu .48 Al,O; 15-46 -152 Or 2.22 | Fe,0, 2.58 .o16 Ab 23.06 FeO 7.98 anc An 28.91 MgO 6.46 -161 Diop 22.34 CaO I1.83 .211 Hyp iG ik Na,O 2.95 .044 Mag 3.7 K,0 44 .004 Tim 6.84 H,O+ .09 Ap 67 H,O- 07 CO, none TiO » onze -045 IP Oe -30 .002 Total , 100.68 A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 545 Norm and Mode.—The correspondence between norm and mode is not close. The lime is not in anorthite, but in ferro- magnesian minerals, mainly hornblende. The alumina is not all in feldspar, but also in hornblende giving an alferric mode. Diopside, hypersthene and ilmenite are lacking. The titanium is in titanite. The normative amounts of quartz, orthoclase, albite and magnetite are present. Microscopic Character.—Green hornblende is found to be the prevailing mineral. It is arranged in parallel leaves, giving the schistose structure. The schistosity is not perfect, but is in- terrupted by many crumpled areas and by occasional patches where the minerals are without orientation. The texture simulates the granitic. Titanite is abundant. Plagioclase (albite and oligoclase) is moderately abundant, with a little orthoclase and less quartz. There is found to be no great mineralogical difference between the gray and the black types. The gray have been more intensely crushed and the light bands are due to granulated quartz and feldspars. These are present in the black variety also but are less crushed and so do not appear white in the hand specimen. There is a slight kaolinization of the feldspar. The orthoclase has inclusions of the reddish black dust mentioned before. Small amounts of apatite and magnetite are present. Comparison with Monhegan Rocks.—The close analogy of this rock with those from Monhegan Island described by Lord! which fall into the same subrang is so striking that his analyses are reproduced for comparison together with ours. Since some of our later dikes also fall into this subrang, the discussion will be taken up after they have been described. The comparative table of analyses will be found on page 554. The most conspicuous difference between the Monhegan rocks and the schist of the mainland is that the former contains olivine in both norm and mode, while the hornblende schist does not. Moreover there is a slight excess of silica in the schist, while two of the Monhegan rocks lack silica to the extent of having nepheline in the norm. 1 Am. Geol., XXVI, pp. 340 and 346. 546 OGILVIE THE PERFEMANES. Dunose. V. 1. 1. 1. (Dunite). Occurrence.—This rock was found in a single exposure, close to the cross roads where the road from Bayville to Pleasant Cove intersects that from East Boothbay to Boothbay Harbor. The exposure was not large: the rock disappeared on the one hand under a vegetable garden, on the other it was cut off by the highway. The occurrence was apparently a dike. Petrological Character.—In the hand specimen the rock was dense, black with green talcose spots, and fine textured. It proved on microscopic examination to be somewhat altered, but — its origin could so clearly be seen that it is placed in the new system of classification. Microscopically it was found to be mainly olivine. This is evidently of a very magnesic variety, magnetite and chromite enough being visible to use up all the iron shown in the analysis. There is present a small amount of an alteration product which has the strong double refraction, high interference colors, and low index of refraction characteristic of a carbonate. From the analysis it is evident that it must be magnesite, no lime being present. A little muscovite and a little chlorite are present: The green spots which were in evidence megascopically are found to consist of fibrous anthophyllite with a few small areas of opaline quartz. A few rosettes of serpentine are also to be seen. These alteration products occupy relatively small areas and invariably occur either along the cracks of the olivine or else they retain the form of the olivine. It is evident that the original rock was pure olivine of the variety forsterite, with small amounts of magnetite and chromite. Fully three fourths of the areas of the slides are now occupied by these original minerals, and since the alteration products retain the olivine form, the inference is safe that no lime can have been lost in the alteration process. There is a little mica which may possibly be ongiaal No feldspar or pyroxene is or has been there. A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 547 AMMsAD) DS, Analysis of Dunose from near Bayville, Maine. Composition, Reecoees Norm. SiO, Ages Ye 1023) Or 2.22 Al,O; 2.18 .022 Ab 4.19 Fe,O; 2.04) .023 Cor I.02 FeO 3.40 .048 Hyp Teo Gil MgO 41.08 1.027 Ol 72.32 CaO none Mg .02 Na,O 54 .008 Cmr 32 ©) oli .004 ql 30 H 20 ae 8 84 H,O- 09 CO, DOR TiO , .12 .002 P,O 5 .08 Cr O)¢ .16 .OO1 Total 100.04 THE DIABASE DIKES. Diabase dikes are well known on the coast of Maine. To the list of localities already reported should be added at least six dikes from the Boothbay quadrangle. The fiord character of the coast makes it impossible to determine whether one dike or several are present when the trend is such that they cross the bays, but wherever the alignment coincided we assumed one dike whatever the variation in width. The topography how- ever is very suggestive of faulting and it is recognized that the alignment may be accidental in some cases. For this reason a series of microscopic slides was made and studied, of every exposure. The distribution of the dikes is shown on the map. The dikes described by Dr. Bascom from! the eastern part of the quadrangle are inserted on the map (Fig. 2.). It will be observed that there are four dikes having a direction ot N. 85° BE. These dikes are all large, varying in width from thirty to one hundred and fifty feet. The southernmost one outcrops on the coast of Southport Island near Cape Newagen ; 1** Dikes from the Vicinity of John’s Bay, Maine,’’ Am. Geol., XXIII, 1899, Pp. 275. 548 OGILVIE the second is Dr. Bascom’s, which has two outcrops on Ruther- ford Island, and one on the east side of Linekin’s Neck; the third is the longest of them and outcrops on Cabbage Island, on the east and west coasts of Spruce Point, in the woods about a quarter of a mile inland on Southport, twice respectively on the east and west sides of the promontory of West Southport and in Georgetown north of Five Islands; the northernmost dike crosses Linekin Bay, being exposed on both coasts and on Cabbage Island. These four dikes are closely related in their petrographical characters, being porphyritic olivine diabases, and in their chemical characters, falling into Class III of the new system. Another large dike is found on the mainland running parallel to the Sheepscot River with a strike of N. 10° E. This differs chemically and mineralogically from the others, being an acid, very feldspathic diabase without olivine and non-porphyritic, and falling into Class II of the new system. The remaining dikes are small, varying from a few inches to a few feetin width. They are entirely variable in composition, and variable also in direction. These three series were never found together so the age rela- tions are unknown, but it is believed that there are two, possibly three, types distinct in age, and that this classification holds for other parts of the Maine coast. Placerose. II. 4. 3. 5. Diabase. Occurrence.—The rock which falls into this subrang is the big dike with N. 1o° E. trend, already mentioned (see Plate XX XI, Fig. 2). It hasa maximum width of about thirty feet, with a length of more than four miles, during the greater part of which it is a conspicuous topographic feature. In two localities it disappears for a short distance, and in one place seems to be represented by three small dikes. It grows narrower towards the south; at its northern end it disappears suddenly. Its location can be seen on the map, where it will be found running parallel to the trend of the shore and a short distance inland. Megascopic Character.—In the hand specimen the rock is a dense black or gray black, fine-grained trap. A few needle-like black crystals can be distinguished. In view of the apparent A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 549 basicity, the analysis was a surprise, and so was the position of the rock in the quantitative system. It falls into the same rang as a rock from Southport which in the field was considered a granite. Microscopic examination leaves no doubt that the analysis is correct, the black color being deceptive. Microscopic Characters.—Thin sections show the rock to have a normal diabasic texture; to be of coarse grain, and to lack phenocrysts. The edges are finer than the center. The prin- cipal constituent is plagioclase, appearing as a network of lath- shaped crystals. The extinction angles of these were measured and they were found to be of two kinds: one corresponding to albite of the composition abs an;, the other oligoclase, ab3 an;. A microperthitic intergrowth of albite and orthoclase is of oc- casional occurrence, and one interesting type of intergrowth was seen, where laths of albite alternated with strips of micro- perthite. A fine dust of kaolin is to be seen in some of the feldspars. A few broad orthoclases are present. Anhedra of magnetite are common, occupying the interstices between the feldspars. The principal ferro-magnesian constituent is common augite which is entirely xenomorphic, consisting of long strips or of irregular areas between the feldspar laths. The augite is entirely fresh and without inclusions. TABLE XI. Analysis and Norm of Placerose from Dike near Sheepscot River. Composition. pone aes. : Norm. SiO, Psou727, 945 Qu 10.56 Al,O,; 15.06 .148 Or 3.89 Fe,0; 73 .OTO ! Ab 30.82 FeO 6.33 .088 An 18.07 MgO 2.58 ‘064 Diop A 9.98 CaO 6.61 .118 Hyp 5-88 Na.O 4.73 .076 Mag 2.32 K,O .69 .007 Ilm 755 H,O+ Bae Ap .98 H,O- 15 CO, none TiO 4.04 .049 IP Oe .40 .003 MnO 325; .004 Total 99.91 550 OGILVIE Slides of the three smaller dikes into which the large one appears to ramify in the middle of its extent show a similar diabasic structure, but a much finer grain and a porphyritic tendency. They show a felty appearance with fine feldspar needles in a mass of magnetite, with very tiny augite anhedra, and porphyritic plagioclase. The phenocrysts are of essentially the same size as the average crystals of the center of the large dike; the fineness of the ground-mass is the essential difference between the two. In Washington’s tables there are ten rocks within this subrang, none of which comes from eastern America. Several are dikes from California, but the one which is the closest analogue in analysis and in norm is a porphyritic lava from the St. Augustine volcano, Alaska. ! TABLE XII. ; Analysis of Dike from Eastern Shore of Linekin Bay. Composition. pee Norm. S10 , 3.01% 883 Ou 4.20 AN OQ). 15.54 a2 Or 3.34 Fe, ©, 1.85 Ont Ab 20.44 FeO 6.09 .096 An 29.75 MgO 7.70 .192 CaO 10.60 .189 Diop 18.40 Na,O Bay .039 Hyp 18.92 KO) .62 .006 | Ilm 3.04 lel (Q)=5 78 Mag 2°55 H,O- -47 CO, none TiO, 1.70 .020 12 {Qs trace trace i Total 100.68 Auvergnose. III. 5. 4. 3. Diabase. Occurrence.—This rock is found in the form of a dike on the eastern side of Linekin’s Bay. The dike is about ten feet wide near the shore; it may be followed for some rods inland, until it disappears under vegeta- tion. The most vigorous search did not bring it to light farther east. Westward it re-appears on Cabbage Island, where it has 1 See Becker, Annual Rept. U. S.G. S., XVIII, Pt. ITD, po 52: | | A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 551 a width of thirty-five feet, and again on the western shore, where itis still wider. On this latter exposure are glacial strie point- ing N. 10° W. The slightly inclined columnar structure is evident here as elsewhere among the dikes. The subrang is a very common one, the most notable thing about it being that within it are to be found four of the rock types described by Mr. Lord from Monhegan Island. Of these, two, malchite and beerbachite, are dikes; two, gabbro and gabbro diorite, are part of the older plutonic mass. The resemblance to the Linekin diabase is chemical only, the mineralogy being quite different. Microscopic Character.—The Linekin dike has a diabasic texture, in which it is like the Sheepscot River dike just de- scribed, but the resemblance is only of a very general nature. The Linekin dike is porphyritic throughout, its principal phenocryst being a broad plagioclase of the variety labradorite; other phenocrysts are augite and olivine. The augite is usually surrounded by secondary hornblende. The ground-mass con- sists of a network of lath-shaped plagioclases, in the interstices of which are magnetite and augite. This dike is in all respects similar in petrographic character to the one described by Dr. Bascom, hence mineralogical details need not be repeated. Identical with these is the long dike extending from Cabbage Island to Five Islands. All are porphyritic olivine diabases, with slight variations in coarseness of grain according to distance from the edges. The southernmost of these east and west dikes, which out- crops on the coast near Cape Newagen, shows considerable metamorphism. The dike is the largest, measuring (by pacing) one hundred and twenty feet in width. The original rock was evidently identical with the others, but in places it has been so crushed as to be practically a hornblende schist. Of the six slides examined from different parts of this exposure all degrees were to be observed between a slightly altered diabase with a little green hornblende in addition to the minerals enumerated ~ above, to a true schist with hornblende and biotite as the only ferro-magnesian minerals, and a schistose arrangement of these leaves. The commonest type is a partly altered one containing 552 OGILVIE green hornblende without orientation, with the diabasic texture in part interfered with by the green hornblende which cuts the feldspar boundaries. ' As indicated on the map, there is another outcrop of this dike to the west. This is a small area in the woods, no other rock being visible and a few feet only of the diabase exposed. ‘Thin sections show this to be identical with the shore exposure, but of coarser grain. It is evident that a large proportion of the width of the dike is covered by vegetation, since its grain is too coarse to be produced in the width exposed. An estimation of the contents of these dikes leaves no reason- able room for doubt that they would all fall into the subrang auvergnose. The Cape Newagen dike forms a connecting link between these dikes and the older complex. It is practically intermediate between the diabases and the hornblende schist of this same subrang. The smaller dikes, although diabases, present notable differ- ences, from all of the above and from each other. On Capitol Island are two, of which one has a nearly east and west, the other a nearly north and south trend. The first mentioned has a strike of N. 80° E. and is exposed on and near the western shore. A gorge on the mainland of Southport indicates that the dike continues there, but no material could: be found in the latter locality. Microscopically it is found to be a porphyritic diabase, with phenocrysts of plagioclase with less augite and olivine. In the ground-mass are plagioclase and augite. Its affinity is with the east and west large dikes (auvergnose), but there is a larger proportion of augite in the ground-mass and the diabasic texture is not perfect. The plagioclase phenocysts are older than the femic ones and sometimes are entirely surrounded by them. In such occurrences the edges of the plagioclase are corroded and the femic silicate enters it irregularly, notably along the twinning planes. ‘Titanite and grains of magnetite are present in notable amount. Much of the olivine is altered to’ brownish green serpentine and a carbonate. The north and south dike of Capitol Island is exposed in a bay on the southern shore, and after extending about onehundred feet inland the strike turns to N. 20° E. Microscopically it is A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 553 much finer grained than the other dike, and is a peculiar rock with no ferro-magnesian minerals in evidence. Phenocrysts and ground-mass are both of plagioclase while a dendritic form of magnetite makes up a large proportion of the rock penetrating both phenocrysts and ground-mass. The feldspar phenocrysts show a kind of twinning unusual in this mineral, the laths cross- ing each other in a manner resembling the twinning of staurolite. Other phenocrysts are H-shaped, the two vertical arms having a similar orientation, the cross-piece being placed at right angles to the others. A few faint outlines suggest augite, but magnetite now makes up their bulk with a dust of a brownish substance which under a high power seems to be a laminated serpentine. It has a cleavage and is probably antigorite. It does not seem to occupy space formerly held by another mineral, but to be redeposited. On the western shore of Ocean Point is another small dike. The dike itself is only about ten inches wide, but a chasm four or five feet wide has been eroded along it (see Plate XXXII, Fig. 2). The gully on this dike is about two hundred feet long and has a strike of about N. 65° E. The dike rock is a dia- base, slightly vesicular on one surface. Microscopically the rock is found to be porphyritic, but the phenocrysts are completely altered. There seem to be three types of alteration product, one of which is kaolin and muscovite and is probably de- rived from feldspar; another is a green serpentine, psobably from augite; and the third a gray serpentine with calcite and quartz, probably from olivine. In the ground-mass is much pyrite and a network of plagioclase with needles of a hornblende which is pleochroic in brown and pink, and a little actinolite. The texture is not typically diabasic, some feld- spar occupying the interstices. Some rods farther north is another dike identical with the last. It is only three inches wide but forms a chasm. STRIKING PETROGRAPHICAL FEATURES ILLUSTRATED ABOVE. The magmatic relationship of the trap dikes to the older metamorphic complex is admirably illustrated on the Boothbay quadrangle. The similarities will be apparent after an inspection 554 OGILVIE of the following table to which are added all rocks from the same | subrang that have previously been analyzed from the immediate vicinity. TABLE XIII. Analyses of Auvergnose from the Coast of Maine. ie Ta | LED gat eal V. VI. SiOz 49.00% | 53.01% | 46.29% | 45.66% | 44.70% | 47.20% Al,0O; 15.46 HARA | LAO 16.26 D5 18.64 Fe,O, 2.58 TAO vem en 2.07 4.13 1.96 FeO 7.98 6300) Suh lo87, 0. jeaOanm 8.21 6.82 MgO 6.46 TiS a Wy eae 10.21 FOR 8.28 CaO TOR 10.60 T2204 a ell 2mops 14.10 11.52 Na,O 2.75 2.37 Bron al corner 2.18 2.91 K,0 44 62 EiGuw aly eo .30 28 H,O+ .09 .73 | sega H,O — .07 See | | COZ none none | | Ign Ri | .92 eae I.44 TiO , Bu 7D I.70 Let 4, Nt 3g 1.84 .84 Or 30 itacel a) eaedh | n.d n.d. n.d Total 100.08 TOOLOS.S hI VOOLGr. alsa Or2 99.99 99.89 Norms of Auvergnose. : Ou Wes eee OT it ehle 20 woe arenes ae Wir Or .66 4.20 | Ab 2.22 3.34 Rei 7, i597) ite'7/ An 23.006 20.44 18.3 II.0 | reR6 Dito s ve - 28°08 8) | 20n75 36.4 Ages | eLo 36.7 1 aE aee7 Hy 22.77 18.40 19.5 19.3 | 218 16.6 Ol 11.50 18.92 2.4 Te | Mt 15.8 tW2 9.5 I5.9 Il See 2.55 3-7 4.4 | 5.8 3-0 Ap | 6.99 3.04 | 2.2 2.6 | ot ge oS .67 | I. Hornblende schist from Bayville. (See p. 543). II. Diabase dike from east side Linekin’s Bay. (See p. 550). III. Beerbachite. Lord, A. G., XXVI, p. 346. Monhegan Island. (Dike.) IV. Malchite. Lord, A. G., XXVI, p. 346. Monhegan, Island. (Dike.) V. Hornblende-gabbro. Lord, A. G., XXVI, p. 340. Monhegan Island. VI. Gabbro-diorite. Lord, A. G., XXVI, p. 340. Monhegan Island. The general similarity among all six of these types is evident. A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 555 - : All of the chemical ratios are essentially the same, as is of course _ indicated by the fact that they fall into the same subrang. The similarity is such as to indicate chemical relationship or magmatic unity between the plutonic metamorphic rocks of the older series and the younger diabases. This chemical and “normative” likeness is the more striking in that it is not accompanied by a mineralogical or model similarity. Any re- calculation of the analyses of the older rocks in terms of the minerals that are actually there brings about an appearance of greater basicity than the normative relationship warrants. In the hornblende schist the amount of hornblende is so great as to give the rock every appearance of belonging among the basic gabbros. When interpreted in terms of standard minerals it becomes evident that the amount of hornblende has increased at the expense of anorthite molecules and that the rock is practically identical with the diabase. In Table XIV the analysis of all the Boothbay types analyzed by us are repeated for comparison. It is evident that there is a regular progression in chemical characters from I to IX, and then a great difference when X is reached. It remains for future investigation to show whether types intermediate between IX and X are in existence, or whether X is really not a part of this co-magmatic region. The distribution of peridotite and allied dikes along the eastern parts of the United States is suggestive of other than purely local relationships for this rock. Leaving this dike aside we may thus sum up the chemical char- acters of the region: the range of silica is moderate and its amount intermediate, 49.00 to 67.59% being its extent. Alumina is moderate in amount and does not show any definite serial relation with other oxides. The ratios between lime, potash and soda are variable, but in general as the basic end of the series is approached, soda becomes in excess of potash, and lime in excess of the sum of the alkalies. Iron and magnesia, as well as lime, increase as the silica decreases; titanium is high throughout. In the majority iron exceeds magnesia, but ~ magnesia increases relatively to iron as silica decreases. 556 OGILVIE TABLE XIV. Analyses of Boothbay Rocks. 1 The TEE SO We VI. | VIL.| Vill ieee X. SiO, | 67.59] 67.04] 63.44] 56.72] 58.74] 59.64] 55.17| 49.00! 53.01) 37.41 Al,0;] 17-41] 11.40] 18.84] 15.06] 14.61] 14.76] 18.0%] 15.46] 15.54| 2.18 1B (0) g Bras .78 SHOP seas .48 41 .08| 2:58) 2.85) aamor FeO 2.98| 3-75) 4.05} 6.33| 3-70] 3-57] 5-41| 7.98]. 6.09] 3.46 MgO E.40| 3-52| 1-99) 2.58] 5-47] 5-53] 5-20] ©.46)| S@s7a/eameos CaO 3.05| 7.00] 4.23] 6.61] 3.34) 3.07] 5:64) 11.82) | smonccrmmncries Na,O 4.89| 2:70] 4.35] 4.73) 5.70 | 3:27] | 2502) 2.7 ene ae K,0 Anko} 26S) BOF .69/ 3-79} 6.69] 5.48 -44 (OD ili CO, none] none] none} none] none} none} none] none} none 2.03 H,0+ 18 16 “33 si By .I4 .20 .09 Seale chtov! H ,0- .04 .09 .06 ats ony; .03 Or .07 47 | OG TiO, .83] 1.68] =.41| 4.04) 4.87|| 2.10/| 2:33)|) 3272) eae oe O; .19 at) 32 PALG| aROO .60 25 .30| trace .08 iE MnO a Gla) otalg Gla ial, le .35| nm. d.| n.d.| n.d.) nodo|Singcdy neler Total| 101.30] 99.84|101.25| 99.91] 99.14] 99.92 100.86 100.68 |100.68 I00.04 | . Grano-lassenose, I. 4. 2. 4. VI. Meta-monzonose, II. 5. 2. 3. . Meta-grano-sitkose, II. 3. 3. 4. Wil: Lincolnoses isaac : III. Grano-tonalose, II. 4. 3. 4. VIII. Meta-auvergnose, III. 5. 4. 3. IV. Placerose, II. 4. 3. 5. IX. Auversnose, iil ae V. Um~ptekose, II. 5. 1. 4. XG Dirnoses Vacant METAMORPHISM. Since unaltered dikes and metamorphic masses are clearly derived from the same magma, it becomes possible to estimate “the kind and amount of alteration that has taken place in the metamorphic types. A comparison of the mode with the norm among all of the preceding metamorphic types brings out the fact that the difference between mode and norm is of a constant character, and that it is closely similar to the difference between the auvergnose dike and the meta-auvergnose. The presence of titanite seems to be an invariable character of the unaltered mode. The following are the essential chemical differences between mode and norm in the metamorphic rocks: A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 557 1. The presence of alferric minerals, thus affecting the distribution of alumina. 2. The alferric mineral may be biotite, in which case there will be less than normative orthoclase. 3. The alferric mineral may be hornblende or augite of a lime-bearing variety, in which case there will be less than normative anorthite. 4. The quartz content will depend upon whether 2 or 3 takes place, or if both upon the amount of biotite formed. The silica in hornblende and augite is in approximately the same ratios as in anorthite; biotite does not require as much silica as orthoclase, hence more than normative free quartz will be present in the biotite rocks. 5. Zoisite may be present, affecting the distribution of lime and alumina. : 6. Actinolite may be present, calling for a re-distribution of lime and iron and magnesia from diopside. 7. Normative hypersthene disappears under these re- arrangements. Soda invariably remains unchanged, in albite. Quartz rarely departs far from the estimated excess of silica. In addition to these chemical characteristics, there are certain mechanical alterations, such as undulatory extinction, microcline twinning, and granulation. A consideration of the minerals present and of the chemical possibilities brings out the fact that the mineralogy is character- istic of a zone of considerable depth. The minerals are those _ of high specific gravity and are almost without exception those ~ that might be formed in igneous rocks under deep-seated condi- tions. The garnet-staurolite-tourmaline group of minerals, of still higher specific gravity and indicative of more intense or longer continued metamorphism! are entirely absent. Reference should be made to the recent book of Grubenmann, Die Kristallinen Schiefer. This book aims to classify the metamorphic rocks on a basis primarily of chemical com- position, and secondarily of the place where the metamorphism 1 See Van Hise, Monograph XLVII, U.S. Geol. Survey, p. 183, et seq. 958 OGILVIE occurred. The chemical system used is the artificial one of Osann. From the metamorphic standpoint three divisions are made according to the depth at which the alteration took place, certain minerals being taken as indications of each zone. In its main lines Grubenmann’s system is built upon precisely the foundation which is needed for a natural classification of the metamorphic rocks, but in its details it seems to be open to two objections. One of these is the artificial character of the chem- ical basis; the other, the practical difficulty of recognizing the rock types formed in the respective zones, since the several types of mineral sometimes occur in the same rock. This is especially the case with the middle and lower zones and it appears to be practically an impossibility to know from the minerals only to which of them a given rock type can be referred. The Maine rocks do not fit into either of the zones as defined by Gruben- mann, though their resemblances are more nearly with the lowermost. The prefix ‘“‘kata’’ is attached to this by him, which seems unfortunate as that has already been used by Van Hise in the word “‘katamorphism”’ as a designation of the highest zone. It yet remains for future workers to determine whether it is possible to build up a system that shall accurately measure pressure, heat and stress by means of the minerals formed. In the present state of knowledge it appears better to attempt no such subdivision, but to designate by the prefix ““meta” any kind of metamorphism exclusive of weathering, and to apply this prefix to the subrang name of the quantitative system. The conception of metamorphism here entertained is that of alteration without addition or subtraction of material. Ob- viously rocks injected, cemented, weathered or otherwise chemi- cally changed would not be available for classification in this manner. In the region here discussed there is no reason for suspecting any changes in chemical composition, and it is believed that the quantitative system furnishes the most logical method of regarding them. I PLATE SOOGs. me Fic. 1.—‘“Graben”’ on Negro Island, Me. . ° . Fic. 2.—Ridge formed through weathering of diabase from the coast. Near Sheepscot River, Me. we 2 4) i : / ue wie sh i aes dies ds ‘ SEC Ap, a 4 s ; an a | = eo NEY ACAD: SCI, VOL. XVI. PLATE XX XI. PLATE XXXII. PLATE XXXII. Fic. 1.—North Dike of (aber Island, Me. shomee: incl: umnar structure 5 5 2 a: ; ‘(Cen ee ‘Me. 5 z A 5 5 AVIAN, XOOrCI mNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI.. VOL. XVII. BU BLICATIONS- La a, | The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz. : @ The #ianals (cetavo ie) established in 1823, contain ae of meetings, exhibitions, etc. Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discon- : ( ‘tinued with the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the Annals. | A volume of the Annals will in general coincide with the calendar year and will be distributed in parts. The price of the current issues is one dollar per part or three dollars per volume. Authors’ reprints are issued as soon as the separate papers are __ printed, the dates appearing above the title of each paper. _ (2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall a be devoted to monographs relating to some particular department of science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II to Zodlogical Memoirs, etc. The price is one dollar per part as issued. _ All publications will be sent free to Fellows and Active Members. _ The Annals will be sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members _ desiring them. : | Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers of any of the publications o the Academy should be addressed to a j THE LIBRARIAN New York Academy of Sciences American Museum of Natural History. New York City. Rone Wines ATSIC EE SOLU hina ts a in the Ae Measures of f Southwestern Penny f Ry i i Ay Ogilvie, I. HL e Contribution Vata Southern ITED TTBS MEGA fi et iy aaa \ i . f , : Hy ; f\ ant € CADEMY OF SCIENCES 4 Ve i j Editor: CHARLES LANE POOR ; \ | vo PUCa He Cave NVC USN Ah " New York SUS aH Published by the Academy Treasurer-—EMERSON Me Men 40 Wall Stree Librarian—Ratpu W. Tower, ‘American Museum. \ . Editor—Cuar Les LANE Poor, 4 East 48th Street. SECTION OF BIOLOGY Chairman—Henry E. Crampton, Barnard College. _ Secretary—R. W. Miner, American Museum. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY HY EN, Ww. GraBau, Columbia University Ga A, JuLien, Columbia University. \ ; Chairman—CHARLES C. TROWBRIDGE, Columbia University. Secretary—WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia ee Chairman—ROBERT MacDoueatt, New York Universi. Secretary—R. S. WoopwortH, Columbia University. SESSIONS OF 1907 The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8 from October to May, in the American Museum of Natur 77th Street and Central Park, West. ENE NPM DSc | )RK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES WY ‘ ‘ 3 i , . ‘ . ( ‘ ‘ e ie . P : re ‘ nye . : a ‘6 y im | } , | [Annats N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vol. XVII, No. 6, Part ITI, Pp. 563-657 (December, 1907)] RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. January, 1905, to December, 1905. Hermon C. Bumpus, Recording Secretary. BUSINESS MEETING. JANUARY 9, 1905. The Academy met at 8.15 p.m. at the American Museum of Natural History, President Kemp presiding. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The following candidates for election as Active Members, recommended by the Council, were duly elected: J. H. Wilson 3120 Broadway George H. Sherwood American Museum Nat. History Prof. Chas. Baskerville College of the City of New York Robert T. Hill 25 Broad Street Maurice Fishberg, M.D. 79 West 115th Street W. T. Roberts 108 West 84th Street Roy W. Miner 435 West 123d Street It was voted that Chapter. V, Section 1 of the By-Laws be amended by omitting the following words: “Every active member shall pay an initiation fee of five dollars within three months of his election or such election shall be void.” It was voted that the following recommendation of the Coun- cil be adopted: “Active workers in science may at the discretion of the Council be elected to Associate Membership in the Academy in the manner prescribed by the By-Laws, with annual dues of $3.00 for a term of two years, and they may be re-elected. 4 563 564 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE Associate Members shall receive the publications of the Academy ~ and may offer their papers for publication in the Annals and Memoirs, but because of constitutional provisions they shall not have the power to vote and shall not be eligible to election — as Fellows. At any time subsequent to their election Associate Members may assume the full privileges of Active Members — by the payment of the dues required by Chapter V, Section 1 of the By-Laws. Persons now Active Members may not be elected Associate Members.” The following resolution, having been presented by vote of the Council, was then adopted: Resolved, That the Council of the New York Academy of Sciences place on record its warm interest in the efforts which are being made by the Peary Arctic Club under Mr. Morris K. Jesup as president to outfit another expedition to the polar regions under the direction of Commander Peary. In the opinion of the Council, such an expedition may become one of great importance, and, in addition to the chief geographical objects of the expedition, valuable observations and discov- eries may be made in the sciences of geology, terrestrial physics, geography, zoology, anthropology and botany. Resolved further, That the Academy codperate so far as pos- | sible with the Peary Arctic Club in raising funds not only in sup- port of the chief object of the expedition, but, if the necessary additional funds can be secured, in support of a small scientific staff to accompany Commander Peary and make permanent ob- servations and collections in the chief bases of the expedition en route. The Academy then adjourned. Hermon C. Bumpus, Recording Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. JANUARY 9, 1905. Section met at 8.40 P.M., Vice-President E. O. Hovey presiding. Twenty-eight persons were present. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: _ ’ a ee. ee a ee ee NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 565 George F. Kunz, THE JAGERSFONTEIN DIAMOND, THE LARGEST EVER FOUND: THE History OF ITS CuT- TING AND ULTIMATE DISPOSITION. John J. Stevenson, THE CoALs OF SPITZBERGEN. James F. Kemp@ New Sources or SuppLy oF IRON ORE. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Dr. Kunz said that the Excelsior-Tiffany diamond, the largest diamond ever found up to the present time, weighed 970 carats, and was a gem of most marvellous purity. This dia- mond was most expertly cleaved into pieces, and from it were cut ten gems weighing from 13 to 68 carats each, a total of 340 carats, and these were imported into the United States. Dr. Kunz also stated that carbon silicide had been detected in the meteorite from the Cafion Diablo by Dr. Henri Moissan of Paris, together with transparent diamond and black diamond. As carbon silicide has been made artificially with the electric furnace by Messrs. Cowles, Acheson, and Moissan heretofore, and was first determined in nature by Professor Moissan, if agreeable to Professor Moissan he would suggest the name Motssamte for this compound. The paper was illustrated by models and photographs. It was discussed by Professors Kemp, Stevenson, the chairman, and others. Brief replies were made by Dr. Kunz. Professor Stevenson said that the coals of Spitzbergen, accord- ing to Nathorst, are in great part of Jurassic age. The mining operations are confined to Advent Bay, a branch of the Icefiord of West Spitzbergen, where coal has been opened on both sides of the bay. The deposit has been followed northwardly for about ten miles, and for an equal distance westwardly. The chief enterprise is on the easterly side of the bay, where the bed is somewhat less than five feet thick. The coal from the upper part is splint-like, while that from the lower part is brilliant and somewhat prismatic. The divisions show a notable difference in the percentage of volatile, the upper containing about ten per cent. more than the lower. The coal shows no tendency to coke, and that from the lower portion is attacked energetically by caustic potash. 566 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE The coal was compared with that from other localities in which the benches show notable difference in volatile. The results of tests with caustic potash made upon a number of — coals appeared to show that non-coking coals are attacked promptly, while coals yielding a firm coke Be not affected even after prolonged boiling. The speaker promised to give at a future meeting the results of an extended series of tests. The paper was discussed by Professor Kemp and others. The last speaker was Professor Kemp, who discussed new sources of the supply of iron ores. Emphasis was first placed upon the enormous demands made by the iron industry of to-day upon the mines of the United States, Great Britain, and Germany. The conviction was held by many that within fifty years the local American sources of rich ores, of whose existence we now know, would be exhausted and the iron masters would be compelled to seek new deposits. The follow- ing possible new districts were passed in review: the Labrador prospects discovered by Mr. A. P. Low of the Canadian Geologi- cal Survey, which might also ship to Europe; Adirondack areas of reported magnetic attraction and possible lean ores; the Temagami district and the Michipicoten range, Ontario; the southern continuation of the Marquette range beneath the drift; the southern half of the Mesabi probable syncline beneath the swamps northwest of Duluth, as suggested by C. P. Ber- key; the Baraboo range; the deposits in Iron County, Utah, and in the Wasatch Mountains; the magnetites of southern Califor- nia and the prospects in Washington and along the coast. The speaker emphasized the important reserves in the titaniferous magnetites and their great quantity. Passing to Europe the new developments in Sweden at Gellivara and Kirunavaara were reviewed and the possibilities at Routivaara; also the Dunderland valley in Norway and the similar deposits farther north. Their relations to the smelting centres in Great Britain and Germany were explained and their comparative amount with the “minette” ores of France, Luxemburg, and Germany brought out. Other deposits in Spain, Algiers, Venezuela, India, Australia, and Shan-si in China were mentioned. i a a NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 567 The necessary connection between the coal fields and any great development of the iron and steel industry was emphasized and the future of the three great producers of to-day forecast as involved in the permanency of the coals. The reserves of coal are greater in Germany and America than in Great Britain. The province of Shan-si, China, having rich stores of both coal and iron, seems to be the one possible new lecation of the future great iron industry. Professor Kemp’s paper was discussed by Messrs. McMillin and Kunz, the chair, and others. Replies were made by Professor Kemp. A. W. GRABAU, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. JANUARY 16, 1905. Section met at 8.15 pP.M., Vice-President W. M. Wheeler presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: Esther F. Byrnes, TRANSITIONAL STAGES AND VARIATIONS IN CERTAIN SPECIES OF CYCLOPS. W. M. Wheeler, ANTs THAT RatsE MUSHROOMS. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Dr. Byrnes described the transitional stages and variations in some species of Cyclops. The species C. segnatus occurs sexually mature in morphologically incomplete stages. It is then characterized by eleven antennal segments instead of the adult number, seventeen, and is comparatively small in size and pale in color. Large numbers of adults of the type C. viridis show striking variations in the armature of the swim- ming feet. Similar antenne and fifth feet are correlated in one type of individual with the swimming feet of C. parcus, in another form with C. viridis (var. americanus), and in another with C. brevispinosus. Occasionally serial and lateral varia- 568 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE tions combine the swimming feet of C. parcus and C. brevi- spinosus in the same individual. These facts, together with the frequent replacement of sete by spines, the constant asso- ciation of the forms, and their occasional sequence in small aquaria, indicate a very close relationship among the species observed and suggest that they are transitional forms in the development*of a single species. Dr. Wheeler described the structure and ecology of many “ants that raise mushrooms,” giving special attention to the species of Texas and Mexico, where his own studies of these - ants were made. Numerous lantern slides illustrated this lecture, and at its close many slides from photographs of ants kept in captivity by Miss Adele M. Fielde were exhibited. M. A, BIGELow, Secretary. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY. JANUARY 23, 1905. Section met at 8.15 P.M. at Fayerweather Hall, Columbia University, Vice-President E. R. von Nardroff presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: A. P. Wills, Tue MAGNETIC SUSCEPTIBILITY OF WATER. H. C. Parker, EXPERIMENTS RELATING TO THE CONDUCTIVITY oF PowpDErRs AT High TEMPERATURES. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. In connection with Dr. Wills’s paper, experiments were made with the large electro magnet of Columbia University to determine the magnetic susceptibility of water. With the aid of this magnet, which is one of the largest in existence, Dr. Wills found the coefficient of susceptibility of water to be —o.72 X 10-®, and also to be independent of the field strength over a range from 4,000 to 16,000 C.G.S. units. Dr. Parker said that when a conducting powder like graphite is mixed with a non-conducting refractory powder, the resistance ; | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 569 increases quite rapidly at first, as the proportion of graphite is decreased, then more slowly, and after a time reaches a critical point where there is no conduction or the graphite is destroyed by arcing. When the percentage of the conducting powder is low, a mechanical separation or ‘“‘striation’’ takes place on packing in the refractory tubes. Besides this an electrolytic separation usually takes place after a time and the conductivity: of the mixture is destroyed by arcing. A very great variety of substances and mixtures were experi- mented with in the search for a permanent compound of high resistance. C. C. TROWBRIDGE, Secretary. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. JANUARY 30; 1905. The Section met at 4.15 P.M. at Columbia University, and at 8.15 P.M. at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice- President F. E. Woodbridge presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: At the afternoon session: R. §. Woodworth and F. G. Bruner, CoLoR PREFERENCES. _M. Tsukahara, THE RELATION OF INTENSITY OF SENSA- TION TO ATTENTION. Dickinson S. Miller, IDEAS AND TEMPERAMENTS. At the evening session: Robert MacDougall, Orcanic LEVELS IN THE EVOLUTION OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. Robert MacDougall, Note on NuMBER Hasir. W. P. Montague, RELATIONAL THEORIES OF CONSCIOUSNESS, Charles H. Judd, RADICAL EMPIRICISM AND WUNDT’s PHI- LOSOPHY. 570 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE The Section met in conjunction with the New York Section of the American Psychological Association. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Drs. Woodworth and Bruner said that tests of different races, made at the St. Louis Exposition, showed that red was the color most often preferred, both by men and by women, and by all the races tested. The predominance of red choices was very great. Now previous authors have found, in the white race, that red was a woman’s choice, but blue that of most men. ‘This difference of result, as between the present and previous authors, is probably due to the different material used for presenting the colors—colored papers having previ- ously been employed, whereas in the present tests use was made of colored worsteds, such as are used in the Holmgren test for color blindness. Special tests showed that the same individual is very likely to express a different preference, according as the colors are presented in paper, worsted, or glass. Many persons were also found to dislike strongly the colors of the rose, the violet, and the sunset, when presented in paper or worsted. The inference is that the ‘‘color-tone” is by no means a compelling factor in determining likes and dislikes of colored objects. Dr. Tsukahara said that in an experimental study of the effects of distraction on the apparent intensity of a stimulus, a new method of distraction was employed. Two sorts of stimulus—the sound of a falling ball and the impact on the skin of a falling hammer—were employed, and sometimes presented simultaneously, so that the attention had to be divided between them. For instance, first a sound was given; next, simultaneously, a sound and an impact; and last an impact alone. The subject was required to compare the inten- sities of the two sounds and also of the two impacts. The result was that, contrary to the conclusion of Miunsterberg, distraction decreased the apparent intensity of the stimuli; but this result is so far merely provisional. Dr. Miller stated that in the psychology of intellectual bias one may study the individual or type in its relation to a variety ee eae ee ee ee NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES wel i of ideas, or the idea in relation to a variety of individuals or types. Attempting the latter with the so-called “ideas of _ the French Revolution,” liberty, fraternity, equality, reason, the natural goodness of man, and the rights of impulse, spontane- ously advocated in literature, we find that different phases of these ideas must first be distinguished. As regards the ideas in these phases, the sympathy or antipathy of authors is found to depend in a determinate manner on the temperamental type. Dr. MacDougall, in his paper discussing the organic levels in the evolution of the nervous system, said that the relation of organization to discriminative reaction may be stated in terms of four types, the non-nervous, the ringed nervous, the segmented, and the cephalic. The types were described. In his second paper, Dr. MacDougall said that by number habit is meant the distribution of frequency in the recurrence of each of the digits when the choice is determined by mental constitution rather than objective evidence. Previous reports have given two types, a curve (Minot’s) in which the changes from figuré to figure are slight, presenting a high plateau in the middle of the series with a depression toward either end; and a curve (Dresslar’s and Sanford’s) in which maxima system- atically appear in the odd numbers and minima in the even. From an apparently similar series of guesses in the present case a curve was obtained presenting three different levels. Zero and five formed maxima in relation to which all the other digits fell in a low plateau, and of the rest the even numbers formed maxima and the odd minima throughout. Dr. Montague stated that the new movement in favor of a relational theory of consciousness is to be welcomed in the interest of a scientific psychology. It is, however, seriously hampered by a failure on the part of most of its advocates to realize the incompatibility of any form of idealism with the view that consciousness is a relation between its objects, and not something in which they adhere. Things must be before they can be related; hence if consciousness is a relation no object can depend for existence upon the fact that it is per- ceived. In short the realistic theory of the world is a necessary implication of the relational theory of consciousness; while, 572 ; RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE conversely, if we follow common-sense in admitting the effective reality of both primary and secondary qualities, there will be © no temptation to treat consciousness as anything other than special relation between an organism and its environment. Realism and the relational view of consciousness are strictly correlative. They are different aspects of the same truth, and cannot be defended or understood apart from one another. Dr. Judd. stated that Wundt’s critical realism is closely related in its fundamental positions to James’s recent philo- sophical discussions. Reality and immediate experience are made synonymous by Wundt. The concept of consciousness is not like the concept matter of the physical sciences, but includes only the immediate processes of experience in their totality. On the basis of these closely related fundamentals Wundt develops the details of his system in such a way as to emphasize the distinctions between physical and psychical phenomena, while James strives to minimize these distinctions. R. S. WoopwortTH, * Secretary. BUSINESS MEETING. FEBRUARY 6, 1905. The Academy met at 8.15 p.m., President Kemp presiding. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. No business was reported from the Council and the Academy adjourned. Hermon C. Bumpus, Recording Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. FEBRUARY 6, 1905. Section met at 9.20 P.m., President Kemp presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. . The following program was then offered: George F. Kunz, (a) Moissanite, A CARBON SILICIDE FROM THE CANON DiasLo METEORITE (by title)- “NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 573 George F. Kunz, (b) ON ZiRKON FROM NEAR LawTON, OXKLA- HOMA (by title). (c) ON MonaziteE Sand FROM IDAHO (by title). V. F. Marsters, THE SERPENTINES AND ASSOCIATED ASBES- TOS OF BELVIDERE MOUNTAIN, VERMONT. Charles P. Berkey, INTERPRETATION OF CERTAIN INTERGLACIAL CLAYS AND THEIR BEARINGS UPON MEas- UREMENT OF GEOLOGIC TIME. A. W. Grabau, EVOLUTION OF SOME DEVONIC SPIRIFERS. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Dr. Marsters stated that Belvidere Mountain lies approxi- mately along the line between the counties of Orleans, Lamoille, and Franklin. It is a sharp-crested ridge with a maximum elevation of some 2100 feet above Eden Corners at its southern termination. Three topographic elements are prominent—a sharp-crested ridge forming the upper goo feet of the mountain, a cresentric plateau with a flat top 1200 feet above the valley floor and rimming the end of the mountain, and lastly a steep lower slope composing the foot of the plateau and extending to the valley bottom. The upper part with steep slopes is composed of amphibolite. In addition to the hornblende, which makes up seventy-five per cent. of the rock, there is also present an inconsiderable amount of epidote and a non-pleochroic colorless mineral regarded as zoisite, together with magnetite and pyrite. Towards the base, garnet becomes a prominent constituent, sufficient to make a well-defined garnet zone. In nearly all cases observed the garnet is largely altered to penninite, a variety of chlorite. Along the garnet zone the hornblende has also undergone marked alteration, in part to serpentine. The nose-like pro- jection forming the plateau is composed of serpentine. In this rock occur the so-called asbestos, deposits recently pros- pected and worked for this product. In thin section the serpentine appears to be made up largely of a felty and fibrous mass, apparent only under cross nicols. It is typical fibrous 574 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE serpentine. In thin sections from the upper part of the pla- — teau, and in close proximity to the overlying amphibolite, there — appear shredded masses presenting the original structure of hornblende as seen in the amphibolite, but mineralogically altered to a fibrous mass with the optical characteristics of anthophyllite. It is not improbable, moreover, that a portion of the hornblende has altered to tremolite. These fibrous constituents form the so-called “‘slip-fibre.”’ The serpentine belt has also been subjected to peculiar fault- ing and crushing. The cracks thus produced, even on a micro- scopic scale, have been filled with these fibrous constituents — and then the whole mass submitted to further slipping. This has caused the slickensiding phenomena on the fracture planes and a consequent stretching of the fibrous content; hence the term “‘slip-fibre’’. ‘“‘Cross-fibre’’ or true thrysotile is to be found in this area. It is best developed along lines of maxi- mum fracture and minimum lateral thrust. There appear to be two bands of maximum fracture, one stretching along the upper portion of the plateau and not far from the garnet zone, the second along the foot of the plateau and best shown on the property of Judge Tucker. Dr. Berkey said that laminated clays of Glacial and Post- glacial age are abundant in many districts of the Northern States and Canada. They are especially abundant about the head of Lake Superior, where the origin of the deposits is intimately related to the closing fluctuations and final with- drawal of the Wisconsin ice-sheet. One of these deposits at Grantsburg, Wis., exhibits a remarkable uniformity of structure and is so clearly bounded by other accu- mulations of known significance that its history is readily inter- preted. From a detailed analysis of its laminated structure it is argued that this deposit was about 1700 years in accumulating. A like interpretation of similar isolated deposits following the retreating ice-sheet would give data for time estimates from an entirely new standpoint. In some areas laminated clays occupy interglacial positions, and it may be possible to apply the same method to them. The last paper of the evening was by Professor Grabau, on NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Siy7iis _ the evolution of some Devonic spirifiers. Spirifier mucronatus (Conrad) is a Linnean species comprising a large number of mutations. A remarkable fact is that all mutations pass through a mucronate type such as is characteristic of the typical mutation after which the species is named. (The term muta- tion is here used’in the sense in which it was originally proposed by Waagen, and not in that in which it was subsequently used by De Vries; i.e., for the result and not for the process.) A still earlier stage in development (nepionic) shows the non- mucronate features of the ancestral species similar to S. duo- denarius of the Onondaga. The mucronate feature is carried to excess in a number of mutations of the Lower Hamilton group. It is especially persistent in the Michigan region. This type of outline is accompanied by a rib in the median sinus and a depression in the fold. In Ontario the primitive mucronate type gives rise upward to a number of mutations which are especially characterized by progressive increase in height with- out corresponding lengthening of the hinge. The median plication and depression quickly disappear. Acceleration and retardation in development are the chief principles which explain the development of the great number . of mutations. For the principle of retardation the term brady- genesis (from fpadus, slow,) was proposed, corresponding to the term tachygenesis proposed by Hyatt for acceleration. In the New York province the primitive mucronate type gives rise to high and short-hinged mutations, but these retain the median rib and depression. In form these are tachygenetic; in respect to the surface features, bradygenetic. In the are- naceous beds of the later Hamilton in eastern New York, a mutation with many ribs and moderate mucronations exists, This is in many respects a bradygenetic type. Side by side with extremely accelerated or tachygenetic types in all horizons (i.e., very short-hinged, non-mucronate, high and thick mutations) occur slightly retarded or bradygenetic types, which retain in the adult the mucronate character which is typical of the young of all the mutations. A. W. GRABAU, Secretary. “ 576 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE SECTION OF BIOLOGY. FEBRUARY 13, 1905. Section met at 8.15 p.m., Professor Wheeler presiding. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. It was voted to postpone the program of the evening until the March meeting, to enable the members of the Section to attend a lecture by Professor Henry F. Osborn, on the “‘Evo- lution of the Horse,’’ in the auditorium of the museum. M. A. BicELow, Secretary. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. FEBRUARY 27, 1905. Section met at 8.20 p.m., General Wilson presiding. ; The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read | and approved. : | The following program was then offered: Maurice Fishberg, ANTHROPOMETRY OF THE JEWS OF NEW MORI R. S. Woodworth and ANTHROPOMETRIC WORK AT THE ST.e Frank G. Bruner, Louis EXPosiITION. The Section met in conjunction with the American Ethno- logical Society. ——— ae eee SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Dr. Fishberg, in an interesting paper, stated that whether — the Jews have maintained their racial purity to the present day is a question that can be examined by comparing the physical type of Jew from different countries. Extensive measurements of Jewish immigrants in New York from various i countries of Eastern Europe show that the Jewish type in those — countries is not Semitic, but varies in the different countries, — always approximating, in stature and cephalic index, to the ~ native or Christian population of the respective countries. | s NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 577 Drs. Woodworth and Bruner said, As many as possible of the racial groups represented at the Exposition were measured The best material was found among the Philippine Islanders, of whom about 700 were measured. The Christianized tribes, such as the Tagalog, Pampango, Ilocano, Bicol, Visaya, were found very uniform in physical type. Measurements showed no clear evidence of differentiation among them. The average height of the several tribes differed but little from 161 cm., the cephalic index differs little from 83, etc. The Moros of Mindanao also are practically identical in physical type with the Christian tribes. The pagan Igorots and Bagobos seem to differ considerably from this type, especially in height, which is about 155 cm.; while the Negritos were clearly marked off from all the rest by their kinky hair, small stature (144 cm.), broad nose, and small head in proportion to stature. F R. S. WoopwortnH, Secretary. BUSINESS MEETING. MarcH 6, 1905. The Academy met at 8.15 p.m. at the American Museum of Natural History, President Kemp presiding. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The following names were then presented for election as Active Members, having been recommended by the Council: William A. Anthony Cooper Union Charles M. Bergstresser 60 West 47th Street R. A. Canfield Providence, R. I. Banyer Clarkson 26 West soth Street Mrs. Farquhar Ferguson 20 West 38th Street _ Mrs. Theodore Kane Gibbs Newport, R. I. James B. Hammond 205 West 57th Street motu Bb. Heinze - 220 Madison Avenue George D. Hilyard 144 East 49th Street Mrs. L. S. Hinchman 3635 Chestnut Street, Philadel- phia, Pa. Patrick Kiernan 14 East 83d St. 578 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE Bradley Martin (Life) 4 Chesterfield Gardens, Mayfair, 7 London | Henry V. A. Parsell 770 West End Avenue Mrs. Edwin Parsons 326 West goth Street Miss Frances Pell 206 Madison Avenue William. H. Perkins (Life) Park Avenue Hotel ; Gifford Pinchot, 1615 Rhode Island Avenue, © Washington, D.C. Samuel Robert 906 Park Avenue | George J. Seabury, 59 Maiden Lane | Paul M. Warburg, 3 East 82d Street Horace White, 18 West 69th Street AssociaTE AcTIVE MEMBER James, F. Wilton 257 West 12th Street It was voted that the Secretary cast a unanimous ballot for . the above candidates. There being no further business, the meeting adjourned. Hermon C. Bumpus, Recording Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. MArcH 6, 1905. Section met at 8.45 P.M., Professor Stevenson presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: E. P. Adams, ON THE ABSENCE OF HELIUM FROM CARNOTITE (by title). F. Wilton James, NoTES ON THE MINNEWASKA REGION OF ULsTER County, N. Y. A. A. Julien, DETERMINATION OF BRUCITE AS A ROCK- CONSTITUENT. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Dr. Adams’s paper was read by title. The following brief account of his experiments was handed later to the Secretary: ee NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 579 “The experiments of Sir William Ramsay and Seddy on the formation of helium from the radium emanation account very readily for the well-known fact that the minerals which contain helium in appreciable quantity contain as well one or more of the radioactive elements. It might therefore be ex- pected that all radioactive minerals should contain helium. “I have recently been testing various specimens of carnotite to determine whether or not helium is present in them. Car- ' notite promises to become an important source of ‘radium; certain specimens have been found which have a radioactivity 1.6 times that of the metallic uranium, although it appears to be difficult to obtain large quantities of mineral of this high activity. On heating 7 vacuo several grams of this carnotite, considerable quantities of carbon dioxide and water were driven off, and when these were absorbed by caustic potash and phosphorus pentoxide, respectively, only the nitrogen spectrum could be observed in a vacuum tube connected to the pump. No trace of helium could be detected, although no difficulty was found in obtaining the helium spectrum when only a tenth as much pitchblende, monazite sand, or thorianite! was used. “The quantity of gas which was obtained from this amount of carnotite was so small that it was thought worth while to work with a larger quantity of the mineral. For this purpose 300 grams of carnotite, of activity 0.8 times metallic uranium, was heated at a red heat zm vacuo for three hours, and after absorbing the carbon dioxide by caustic potash, about Io c.c. of a gas remained. On sparking this, after adding oxygen, in order to absorb the nitrogen present, a rapid decrease in volume took place, and when finally the excess of oxygen was absorbed by means of phosphorus, only about o.1 c.c. of a gas remained. This, when introduced into a spectrum tube, showed the characteristic red spectrum of argon. It was observed that the greater part of the gas, aside from the carbon dioxide, was given off on the first gentle heating; and it is 1 The recently discovered mineral from Ceylon, containing about 75% of thorium, was kindly supplied by Dr. George F. Kunz for this purpose. 2 580 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE therefore probable that the argon was associated with the air held in the powdered mineral which was completely driven off only upon heating it. “Tt therefore appears that if helium is contained in carnotite at all, it exists in far smaller amount than would be expected from the quantity of radium present. But it is probable that this absence of helium may be explained by the physical proper- ties of the mineral. Carnotite is a very fine powder which is usually found disseminated through sandstone. Now even the most compact specimens of this, sandstone containing carnotite are quite permeable to gases. This was shown by closing one end of a glass tube with a piece of the mineral about 2 cm. in thickness, and filling it with illuminating gas over water. In a few minutes the water rose a distance of 6—7 cm. in the tube. If we then assume helium to be formed in this mineral by the disintegration of the radium it appears reason- able to suppose that it rapidly diffuses away. The minerals that contain helium are known to be massive, impervious substances, which are therefore able to retain the helium formed in them. ‘““This explanation of the absence of helium from carnotite appears to be supported by the views of Travers! on the state in which helium exists in minerals. According to him the helium is present in the minerals in a state of super-saturated solid solution; the minerals being impermeable to the gas at ordinary temperatures, the velocity with which equilibrium is established between the helium in solution and the helium in the gaseous phase is very small, but increases rapidly with rise of temperature. In the case of carnotite, however, the mineral is permeable to the gas at ordinary temperatures, and therefore we could not expect to find any appreciable amount of helium in this mineral.”’ Mr. James stated that the stripping of the grit from the crest of the second anticline of the Shawangunk Mountain (Darton, Rep. 47, N.Y. State Mus.) appears to be due to a slight cross fold by anticlinal fracture and erosion, as the rocks at the southwest end of the eroded area show an upward pitch. 1 Nature, Jan. 12, 1905. ee ee ee ee ae | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 581 Through this depression the Peterskill probably flowed, while its own valley and Coxing Clove were dammed by the front of the ice sheet, and cut then the Paltz Gap in the crest of the first anticline, 200 feet deep, through which the road to New Paltz now runs. _ The basin of Lake Minnewaska is vertically walled except at the southwest end. The cliffs are highest under Cliff House, where they stand 160 feet above the surface of the lake and 65 feet below it. The grit is probably about 230 feet thick here. The walls are pierced by four crevasses, now filled with drift,—the remains of two fissures crossing each other at the deepest point in the lake, which is there 74 feet deep. There is no drift in the lake basin, not even under the: south-facing cliffs, although the fissure running S. 25° W. is filled, and the transverse breach is blocked to 150 feet above the lake. The glaciation is here S. ro° W. The cause of the absence of drift is not clear; elsewhere the cliffs are heavily skirted. . Lake Awosting lies along a vertical fault plane, drift-filled at both ends. The fault has not been studied. The north wall of the Palmaghat is a vertical fault of 200 feet throw. Both these faults seem to be derived from the overthrown anticline of the Coxingkill escarpment. Mr. Barton is in error in declaring the absence of extended faults. Dr. Julien, after a brief review of the life of Dr. Archibald Bruce of New York City, the discoverer of brucite, discussed the fact of the wide distribution of the mineral, both in lime- stone and serpentinoids, either in its unchanged condition, or in the form of its derivatives, especially magnesite and hydro- magnesite, aS maintained by Volger in 1855. The following are its most marked characteristics for recogni- tion as a rock-constituent: . t. In addition to the known basal cleavage, two other systems may be distinguished on plates or folia: that of the hexagonal prism, often becoming rhombohedral, intersecting at 60° or 120°; and that of the hexagonal pyramid, intersecting at 90°. 2. Nemalitic structure or fibration, commonly occurring in brucite, within serpentinoids subjected to dynamic stresses. la las BO eed A ll iy 582 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE The major axis of elasticity always lies parallel to the direction — of the fibres. 3. Refractive Index, 1.57, sufficient, where the associated — minerals are pure, to distinguish it by the Becke method from serpentine on the one hand, and from amphiboles, dolomite, etc., on the other. 4. Birefringence (7y—a@ = 0.020), presenting interference colors of the upper First Order up to sky blue of the lower Second Order, in plates or sections of the usual thinness. 5. Characteristic strain phenomena; particularly by dis- turbance of the interference figure, examined by convergent light in basal cleavage plates of folia; also by a variable, small extinction angle in sections parallel to the vertical axis. 6. Optically positive character of the uniaxial figure, in distribution from talc, serpentine, etc. 7. Occasional twinning, observed in crystals enclosed in limestone. 8. Certain chemical tests, in confirmation of the optical diagnosis. The meeting then adjourned. A. W. GRABAU, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. MARCH 13, 1905. Section met at 8.15 p.m., Vice-President Wheeler presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: L. I. Dublin, THE History oF THE GERM CELLS IN Pedicelli- na americana. F. A. Lucas, WHALES AND WHALING ON THE Coast oF NEw- FOUNDLAND (illustrated with lantern slides). F. S. Lee, TEMPERATURE AND MUSCLE. FaTIGUE (illustrated with lantern slides). =" ee ee ee ee ee NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 583 SUMMARY OF PAPERS. - Mr. Dublin described the history of the germ-cells in Pedi- cellina americana, giving special attention to the chromatic changes. The somatic number of chromosomes is twenty- two. These bodies behave, throughout, very much as~has been described by many workers on other forms; but in addition there has been observed a peculiar process in connection with the reduction of the chromosomes. These are V-shaped in the somatic cells and in the several generations of oogonia and spermatogonia with the exception of what appears to be the last. In this the number is still twenty-two, but they are bar-shaped. These divide and, either before or at the telo- phase, apparently unite end to end in pairs to form eleven new V’s each bivalent as compared with the earlier structures. A longitudinal splitting of these loops, coincident with the extensive growth of the individuals, produces in the first matura- tion division eleven ring- or bar-shaped chromosomes, each of which is structurally a tetrad. The first division 1s thus reducing; the second equational. The change in chromosome form in the last oogonial and spermatogonial generations is then clearly a striking adaptation to the subsequent synapsis or reduction, making the latter easily possible. Mr. Lucas gave an account of whales and whaling on the coast of Newfoundland, illustrating his remarks with stereop- ticon views of the whales and stages of their capture. Three species of whales were described: the finback, the humpback, and the sulphur-bottom, the first two being found on the south and east coast, the last one on the south coast only. The speaker then described the past and present methods of capture and utilization, saying that whales are now worked up so rapidly that within forty-eight hours after one is brought to the whaling station it is reduced to oil, fertilizer, and bone. The lecture closed with an interesting account of the method employed in making the mould of the large model of a whale shown by the National Museum in the exhibit at St. Louis. This was pos- sibly the largest mould ever made, and the cast was the first accurate representation of a fully grown whale. 584 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE Professor Lee discussed temperature and muscle fatigue. He and others have previously pointed out that the contraction process of the muscles of cold-blooded animals in the course of fatigue becomes greatly slowed, while those of warm-blooded animals show no such phenomenon. Lohmann has recently claimed that a cold-blooded muscle on being heated to a mam- malian temperature shows a course of fatigue similar to that of mammalian muscle; and, on the other hand, that a warm- blooded muscle on being cooled fatigues like the muscles of cold-blooded animals at a similar temperature. From these supposed effects he infers that in the matter of fatigue there is no real physiological difference between the two groups of muscle. Professor Lee has not been able to confirm Lohmann’s conclusions. Every variety of muscle which has been tested, whether of cold-blooded or warm-blooded animals, shows its characteristic method of fatigue, whatever the temperature may be. The original conclusion regarding the difference between the two groups of muscles seems, therefore, to be justified. M. A. BIGELow, Secretary. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY. MARCH 20, 1905. Section met at 8.15 Pp. M., Vice-President von Nardroff pre- siding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: S. A. Mitchell, THE SIXTH SATELLITE OF JUPITER. E. R. von Nardroff, A Pocket Form oF THE PiEzIC BAROMETER. George F. Kunz, EXHIBITION OF THE U.S. GEOLOGICAL SUR- vEY RapiumM EXHIBIT, WHICH WAS SHOWN AT THE St. Louis EXPOSITION. L. G. Cole, RECTILINEAR RONTGEN Rays. ee Ee Se ee ee NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 585 SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Dr. Mitchell gave an interesting account of the recent dis- covery of a sixth and also a seventh satellite of Jupiter by Professor C. D. Perrine at the Lick Observatory, and described the details of the photographic method by which these satel- lites were discovered last December and January. Dr. Mitchell also spoke of the discoveries of satellites of the other planets, including the ninth satellite of Saturn, which was found by Professor W. H. Pickering in August, 1899. Dr. von Nardroff defined the Piezic barometer as an instru- ment to measure the atmospheric pressure by measuring the elasticity of a portion of air. In the small pocket form of the instrument exhibited, a piece of heavy barometer tubing, of 3 mm. bore and about 12 cm. long, was provided at its lower end with a pear-shaped bulb, having an inter- nal volume equivalent to about 7o cm. length of the tube. At its upper end the tube was provided with a second small bulb containing about 1 c.c. of mercury. Entering into the tube from above was a short tube having at its lower end a capillary opening. Through this tube the mercury was introduced. In using the instrument all the mercury is brought into the upper bulb by inverting. The instrument is then turned into the erect postion, when the mercury enters the main tube a few centimeters, the exact distance depending upon the atmospheric pressure. The less the pressure, and hence the less the elasticity of the air, the more the mercury will enter. The mercury stands in the upper portion of the tube and partly in the upper bulb, without any tendency to run down the sides of the tube. A scale on the main tube drawn by comparison with a standard barometer indicates the pressure. To understand the theory of the instrument assume the lower bulb replaced by a continuation of the barometer tubing of equal volume. Let 5 stand for the standard barometer height, m for the length of the thread of mercury entering the tube, and a for the length of the column of compressed air. Then from Boyle’s law (pu = p’v’) we have 586 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE b(iat+tm) =(b4+m)a, b =a, and hence Ab = Aa.’ That is, the divisions of the scale on the Piezic barometer are of the same size as those on the ordinary barometer. How- ever, in practice the upper bulb always contains some mercury after the air is entrapped. The general effect of this is to make AG << IND: Dr. Kunz described the object of and the success of the radium exhibit, stating that many of the most eminent investigators, in- cluding Sir William Crookes and Professor Rutherford, had sent their original material. The collection was shown in an upper hall of the museum. There was also exhibited the Kunz 1081- pound mass of Cafion Diablo meteoric iron, the largest mass known of this meteoric iron. Dr. Kunz stated that Professor Henri Moissan of Paris had discovered, in dissolving 183 pounds of this material (Cafion Diablo meteorite), not only crystalline diamonds, but the crystalline substance carbon silicide, never before discovered as a natural product, but extensively manu- factured and used in the arts under the name of carborundum. In view of the many eminent discoveries of Professor Moissan in the field of chemistry and electro-metallurgy, as well as in the study of meteorites and of diamond formation, Dr. Kunz suggested that this mineral be named mozssanite in his honor. Dr. Cole in his paper said that the immediate discharge from an X-ray tube consists of two distinct classes of so-called rays—direct and indirect. The direct rays have their inception at the focal point of the anode and radiate in direct lines and are not reflected or deflected and do not set up secondary rays, but are absorbed by the tissue of the body in proportion to the amounts of solid contained therein. The indirect rays radiate from the walls of the tube and are projected at various angles, causing secondary rays in objects with which they come in contact, especially the soft tissue, and give great penetration. The effect attained depends on the amount of current, frequency of interruption, and molecular action of glass. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 587 Dr. Cole then described the life history of a tube, stating _ that definite changes occur in a tube when used, including a crisis, and explained the difference between the action of new and seasoned tubes and the difficulty of exciting very old tubes. He also gave his opinion of the cause of the purple color of the glass of a tube and suggested that there is a molecular rearrangement of glass similar to that occurring in steel when magnetized. In a new tube the direct rays amount to 30 to 40 per cent., while in some seasoned tubes as much as 75 to go per cent. Furthermore the indirect rays project them- selves behind the bones, causing a lack of definition of bones and obliteration of detail of soft parts, while direct rays give detail in soft parts, showing even the blood in the veins. C. C. TROWBRIDGE, Secretary. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. . MARCH 27, 1905. Section met in two sessions, at 2.30 and 8.15 pP.M., at the Psychological Laboratory of Yale University, New Haven, Conn., in conjunction with the New York Section of the Ameri- can Psychological Association, Vice-President F. J. E. Wood- bridge presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: At the afternoon session: Raymond Dodge, CENTRAL ANZSTHESIA DURING Eye Move- MENT. Charles H. Judd, Movements oF CONVERGENCE. E. H. Cameron, VARIATIONS IN SuNG TONES. F. Lyman Wells, PERCEPTION oF LINGUISTIC SOUNDS. Naomi Norsworthy, MentaL GRowTH IN DEFICIENT CHILDREN. At the evening session: Frank G. Bruner, RactaL DiFFERENCES IN THE UPPER LIMIT oF AUDIBILITY. G. Cutler Fracker, TRANSFERENCE OF PRACTICE. 588 J. McKeen Cattell, Practice anD TRAINING. STUDIES IN READING ALOUD. L. A. Weigle, W. L. Sheldon, W. P. Montague, CHANCE. No abstracts of these papers have been received. RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE Types oF Monism. R. S. WoopwortTH, Secretary. BUSINESS MEETING. APRIL 3, 1905. The Academy met at 8.15 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural History, President Kemp presiding. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The following names were then presented for election as Active Members, having been recommended by the Council: Francis J. Arend 8S. T. Armstrong, M.D. a be Awery, alae H. R. Bishop Zenas Crane (Life) H. L. Dougherty George E. Dunscombe (Life) Rev. M. E. Dwight Ad. Engler Charles S. Fairchild Ernest F. Greeff William Guggenheim E. H, Harriman Dr. Louis Haupt Selmar Hess George B. Hopkins (Life) Thomas H. Hubbard (Life) Archer M. Huntington (Life) Walter R. T. Jones John B. Lawrence Marshall C. Lefferts 32 West 73d Street 141 Broadway 4 East 38th St. 36 East 62d Street Dalton, Mass. Engineers’ Club, N.Y. City 392 Canal Street 31 Mt. Morris Park West 437 West 23d Street 10 West 8th Street 37 West 88th Street 833 Fifth Avenue 1 East 55th Street 232 Hast 19th Street 956 Madison Avenue 25 West 48th St. 16 West 53d Street ‘““Pleasance,’’ Baychester, N.Y. City 51 Wall Street 126 East 30th Street 34 East 65th Street 4 | Alfred LeRoy, _ James Loeb (Life) - Walter Littgen _ Robert F. Mager William Church Osborn Henry Parish _ H. F. Poggenburg Henry W. Poor M. Taylor Pyne (Life) Samuel Riker Miss Jane E. Schmelzel Mrs. Cynthia A. Wood NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 589 117 Wall Street Shrewsbury, N.J. Linden, N. J. 423 West 147th Street 71 Broadway 52 Wall Street 111 East 69th Street 1 Lexington Ave. Princeton, N.J. 27 East 69th Street 16 West 56th Street 117 West 58th Street It was voted that the Assistant Secretary cast a unanimous ballot for the above candidates. There being no further business the meeting adjourned. Hermon C. Bumpus, Recording Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. APRIL a L005. Section met at 8.30 p.m., Professor Stevenson presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: James F. Kemp, PuHysioGRAPHY OF THE ADIRONDACKS (with lantern illustrations and map). Charles P. Berkey, PatZzocGRAPHY oF NorTH AMERICA DURING Mip-Orpovicic Time (illustrated by maps, diagrams and lantern views). George F. Kunz, Exuisition oF PHotocGRapHus oF MOoIssAN- ITE CRYSTALS SENT BY PRoFESSOR MolIs- SAN. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Professor Kemp discussed the physiography of the Adiron- dacks as follows: 590 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE The Adirondacks cover some 10,000 square miles, and, ex- cept for the White Mountains of New Hampshire and the Blue Ridge of North Carolina, are the loftiest summits east of the Black Hills of South Dakota. They are metamorphosed — Precambrian sediments and eruptives with a surrounding fringe © of Paleozoics, beginning with the Potsdam and ending with the Utica, except for the Glacial drift. The eastern portion is mountainous, the western a high plateau which slopes to Lake Ontario. Three peaks exceed 5000 feet. The general profile of the mountains is serrate, but there is great variety of shape. - There are two contrasted types of valleys. One, doubtless an instance of great geological antiquity, presents gentle slopes and great maturity of form. Its members run east and west, and north and south, and are occupied in some cases by the larger lakes. The second type is more recent, and is due to faulting. The valleys have on one or both sides precipitous escarpments. The cliffs run northeast and southwest or northwest and south- east. A third series of breaks running nearly due north is also at times in evidence. The faults are most often the result of differential movements causing even a marked sheeting of the rocks. The faults run out into the Paleozoic areas, and are shown with diagrammatic distinctness, where they have been especially described by H. P. Cushing. The problem of the drainage is of especial interest. All the waters go ultimately either to the Hudson or the St. Law- rence. The courses of the large streams follow sometimes the older type of valleys, sometimes the later. Barriers of drift have often driven them from their old lines across low, preglacial divides into new ones. The courses of the Hudson and Sacondaga are particularly striking illustrations, each exhibiting one or more marked bends to the eastward. The courses of the two were described and discussed in some detail. : The different types of lakes were also described, including the ponded river valleys from barriers of drift; the fault_valleys; and the relations to the older type of depression. The nature of the ice invasion and its modifying effects were NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 591 passed in review, chiefly along the work of I. H. Ogilvie. With q a brief statement of the postglacial lake-fillings, etc., which have been especially set forth by C. H. Smyth, Jr., the paper closed. A brief discussion followed. Dr. Berkey said that both Cambric and Ordovicic strata contain prominent sandstone formations alternating with dolomites wherever exposed in Michigan, Minnesota, Wis- consin, Iowa, Illinois, Missouri, Arkansas, and Indian Territory. The northern margin, however, is prevailingly more arenaceous than the southern, where shales replace many sand beds. At still greater distance, in Ohio, Kentucky, and Tennessee, these are in turn represented by limestones largely. The uppermost one of the series is the St. Peter. This sand- stone, as well as each of the more important ones below, is believed to represent an extensive retreat and readvance of the sea. Few marks of the erosion interval are preserved. Only here and there has the mantle of sand permitted much attack upon the underlying dolomite, and the reworking of the sands themselves has obliterated most internal evidence of such history. Much of the sand, furthermore, is wind-blown. The rework- ing by the sea and the wind is believed to be the chief cause of the extreme purity of the St. Peter. The St. Peter stage of the Ordovicic, therefore, represents a retreat of the Mississippian Sea from the vicinity of Lake Supe- tior to probably as far as Ohio, southern Illinois, and Arkansas, followed by a readvance to nearly its original position. The northern part of the St. Peter contains within itself therefore a sedimentary break. In part it is both older and younger than the same formation in its southern extension, while, on account of the reworking accompanying the sea advance, there is greater conformity with overlying than with underlying beds. Dr. Berkey’s paper was followed by a brief discussion, after which the Section adjourned. A. W.-GRABAU, Secretary. 592 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE SECTION OF BIOLOGY. APRIL I0, 1905. Section met at 8.15 p.m., Vice-President Wheeler presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: H. F. Osborn, THE IDEAs AND TERMS OF MODERN PHILOSOPHICAL ANATOMY. O. P. Hay, THe TuRTLES oF THE BRIDGER BASIN. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. ~ The abstract of Professor Osborn’s paper will be published under its own title in Science. Dr. Hay gave a brief description of the extent of the Bridger beds and of the nature of the materials composing them. He expressed the conviction that these deposits had not been made in a lake, but. over the flood-grounds of rivers. The region was probably covered with forests, and teemed with animal life. In the streams were numerous turtles. Many species of these have been described by Dr. Leidy and Professor Cope. In the speaker’s hands are materials for the description of about a dozen more species. The American Museum party of 1903 collected many specimens of the genus and these have ~ furnished good skulls, neck, shoulder, and pelvic girdles, and the limbs. These materials confirm the validity of Lydekker’s group called Amphichelydia, and show that from it sprang the modern superfamilies Cryptodira and Pleurodira. M. A. BIGELow, Secretary. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY. . APRIL 17, 1905. Section met at 8.15 P.M., Vice-President von Nardrofi pre- siding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 593 ‘'S. A. Mitchell, PURPOSES AND PLANS OF THE SOLAR ECLIPSE | EXPEDITIONS OF AUGUST, 1905. C. C. Trowbridge, VARIATIONS IN THE DURATION OF THE AFTER- GLOW, PRODUCED By CHANGES OF POTEN- TIAL, AND FREQUENCY OF OSCILLATION OF THE DISCHARGE. No abstracts of these papers have been received. _ CHARLES C. TROWBRIDGE, Secretary. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. APRIL 26, 1905: Section met at 8.15 p.m., Vice-President Woodbridge presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: Berthold Laufer, THE RELATION oF CHINA TO THE PHILIPPINE IsLANDs. William Jones, THE RELIGIOUS CONCEPTION OF THE MANITOU OF THE CENTRAL ALGONKINS. George H. Pepper, SympBoric DESIGNS ON THE INDIAN TEXTILES OF THE SOUTHWEST. Harlan I. Smith, Stone ScuLPTURES AND IMPLEMENTS FROM THE LOWER COLUMBIA VALLEY. The Section met in conjunction with the American Ethno- logical Society. No abstracts of these papers have been received. R. S. WoopwortH, 7 Secretary. BUSINESS MEETING. May 1, 1905. The Academy met at 8.15 P.m., at the American Museum of Natural History, President Kemp presiding. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. 38 594 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE The following names were then presented for election as Active Members, having been approved by the Council: Edwin H. Brown Wantagh, L.I. H. A. DuPont Winterthur, Delaware Dr. Samuel M. Evans 115 East 39th Street Robert Hoe, Jr. 2t Mt. Morris Park Francis T. Maxwell Rockville, Conn. Herman A. Metz 253 Clinton Avenue, Brooklyn Lewis R. Morris 155 West 58th Street Associate AcTIVE MEMBERS Thomas C. Brown Columbia University Clarence E. Gordon Columbia University It was voted that the Assistant Secretary cast a unanimous ballot for the above candidates. The Academy then adjourned. Hermon C. Bumpus, Recording Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. * May 1, 1905. Section met at 8.30 p.m., Vice-President Hovey presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: J. Howard Wilson, THz PLeIsTocENE Beps oF SANKATY HEAD, NANTUCKET. C. E. Gordon, EARLY STAGES OF SOME PaLozoic CORALS. Thomas C. Brown, A NEw TERTIARY FAUNA FROM THE ATLAN- TIc CoAsT PROVINCE. i C. A. Hartnagel, STRUCTURAL RELATIONS AND ORIGIN OF THE LIMONITE BEDs AT CoRNWALL, N.Y. A. W. Grabau, | TYPES OF SEDIMENTARY OVERLAP. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. ; Mr. Wilson, in his paper, said that when Sankaty Head, Nantucket, was first visited by early explorers the section at that locality was kept freshly exposed by the cutting back of the bluff by the sea, but for quite a period of years this has NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 595 ' been prevented by the northward extension of the Siasconset apron beach, so that the face of the bluff is now covered with talus and overgrown with beach grass. The locality was visited during the summer of 1904, and considerable work done in exposing the section and making a collection of the fossils. . This work resulted in the collection of eighty-one species, twenty-one of which had never been reported from this point, including Pandora crassidens Conrad, not previously found in any horizon above the Miocene, and Serrepes laperousii Des- hayes and Macoma incongrua von Martens, belonging to the Arctic fauna of the Pacific coast and not heretofore reported east of Point Barrow. A number of facts differing somewhat from those reported by former observers were noticed, and have resulted in a some- what different interpretation for the phenomena presented by these deposits. The deposits are not of glacial origin, for—s. Numerous delicate and unworn shells occur. 2. Bivalves such as Solen, _ Venus, and Mya occur in the position in which they lived, with both valves together, and in the case of Venus with the ligament in place. 3. The faunas are not mixed as would be the case if of glacial origin, the lower beds containing shoal water species of a southern range, and the upper, deeper water species of a northern and even Arctic type. The lower beds were deposited in a shallow inlet or lagoon, as shown by such species as Mya, Ostrea, and Venus and especially by numerous mud crabs and the presence of our edible crab, Callinectes sapidus, while the upper beds were deposited during a subsidence of the area contemporaneous with the advance of the Wisconsin ice sheet, as shown by the deeper water and more northern species. After the destruction and washing into the lagoon of the protecting barrier beach, as shown by the overlying rounded and pure white sands, the ice reached and passed this point, eventually burying the beds under fifty feet or more of drift. Later, a re-elevation took place, bringing the land to about its present position. 596 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE Mr. Gordon stated that J. E. Duerden, in the Johns Hopkins University Circular for 1902, has endeavored to show by studies based on Lophophyllum prolijferum that the Rugosa exhibit a hexameral plan of growth of the primary septa, in so far as L. prolijerum may be taken as representative. Certain studies on Sireptelasma profundum show a primary tetrameral plan. — The fact that S. profundum is a middle Ordovicic type indicates that this is the primitive condition. Moreover, a careful exam- — ination of Duerden’s figures shows that they lend themselves — to an entirely different interpretation from that which Duerden gives. This interpretation is that two of the so-called primary septa are secondary septa precociously developed; that their sequence and ultimate position are the same as those for the secondary septa which appear in the corresponding positions in the corresponding quadrants of a Zaphrentoid coral; that the fossula and cardinal septum are on the concave side of the corallum; and that if Duerden’s figures be inverted they reveal. a perfect similarity to a Zaphrentoid coral, as far as the order of appearance and the arrangement of the septa are concerned. The fact that L. prolijerum is a Carbonic type indicates that it is a modified type of the Zaphrentoid coral, the first secondary septa appearing in nepionic stages and thus simulating the character of primary septa. Mr. Brown stated that a few years ago, while studying the Cretacic deposits of Long Island, Block Island, and Martha’s Vineyard. Dr. Hollick of the New York Botanical Garden made a collection of fossil molluscs and plants from Chappaquid- dick Island. The fossil molluscs were deposited in the Colum- bia University collection without being fully and carefully studied. These fossils occur in the island in ferruginous concretions. They seem to have been deposited somewhere to the north of where they are now found, then moved as glacial drift, re- assorted and deposited in their present position. From their lithological similarity to concretions containing undoubted Cretacic fossils found elsewhere on Martha’s Vineyard, Dr. Hollick thought that these concretions and their contained fos- sils must be of Cretacic age. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 597 Professor Shaler in his geological studies of Martha’s Vineyard noted the occurrence of these concretions and their similarities to the Cretacic drift, but being unable to find any distinctive organic remains hesitated to set them down as Cretacic. Dr. Hollick submitted these fossil molluscs to Professor R. P. Whitfield of the American Museum of Natural History for a hasty examination. Professor Whitfield, after placing several of the fossils generically, stated that from their evidence he should think the rocks could hardly prove to be Cretacic. A careful study of the fossils has shown that this material is not Cretacic but Eocene in age. This fauna from Chappa- quiddick represents a new and distinct Eocene province, differ- ing from all the other Eocene provinces of the Atlantic coast, but no more widely different from these than they are from one another. Although in this fauna there are several species somewhat resembling those of the provinces to the south, on the whole it would seem to be more closely allied to the Eocene of England. The genera most abundantly represented in these Chappaquiddick deposits, e.g., Modiola, Glycymeris, are also among the most abundant in the English deposits. These ‘same genera, although represented in the Atlantic and Gulf provinces, are there more sparsely distributed and occur with other more abundantly represented genera that appear to be altogether wanting in the Chappaquiddick deposits. A comparison of this Chappaquiddick fauna with other Eocene faunas indicates that it is of lower Eocene age, the species most closely resembling those found in this fauna being found in the lower beds of the Atlantic and Gulf provinces, the Tejon of California and the lower beds of England. These deposits may possibly be of the same age as the Shark River beds of New Jersey, but being deposited in a region separated from this have no forms in common with it. But such corre- lation could be only conjecture. As the correlation of the well-known Eocene deposits is even yet very uncertain it is unnecessary and impossible to place these beds any more defi- nitely than simply to say that they are Lower Eocene. Mr. Hartnagel’s paper stated that the limonite at the Town- send iron mine near Cornwall in Orange county, New York, is 598 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE found at the base of the New Scotland beds, where the latter © are in contact with the Longwood and shales. The source of the iron is evidently from the red shales, but whether the con- — tact was due to overlap or faulting has not been previously explained. Two thirds of a mile north of the mine the Decker Ferry, Cobleskill, Rondout, Manlius and Coeymans formations, having a total thickness of ninety-five feet, are found between the New Scotland and Longwood beds. In the region of the — mine the strata are nearly vertical, and in faulting a wedge- shaped block has been forced up, bringing the red shales in contact with the New Scotland beds. A cap of limestone has until recent geologic times protected from erosion the mass of soft Longwood shales, which now form a steep hill that is rapidly being worn away. In discussing types of sedimentary overlap, Dr. Grabau said that with a normal sea-shore a rising sea-level will pro- duce the phenomenon of progressive overlap, a falling sea-level that of regressive overlap. If the sea transgresses slowly, and the rate of supply of detritus is uniform, a basal rudyte or arenyte is formed which rises in the column as the sea advances, and whose depositional off-shore equivalents are successive beds: of lutytes or organic deposits (biogenics). Types of such basal beds which pass diagonally across the time scale are seen in the basal Cambric arenytes of eastern North America, which as the Vermont Quartzyte are Lower Cambric, and as the Potsdam are Upper Cambric. Again in the basal Cretacic arenyte of southwestern United States, this is shown, they being basal Trinity in Texas; Washita in Kansas, and Dakota or later on the Front Range. Examples of this type of pro- gressive overlap are numerous and familiar. On an ancient pemeplain surface the transgressing sea may spread a basal black shale, as in the case of the Eureka (Noel) Black shale, which is basal Choteau in southern Missouri and basal Burlington in northern Arkansas. Regressive movements of the shore succeeded by transgressive movements give us arenytes which are enclosed in off-shore sediments and which within them- selves comprise an hiatus the magnitude of which diminishes progressively away from the shore. An example of this has NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 599 recently been discussed by Berkey,! who finds that the St. Peter Sandstone in Minnesota marks the interval from lower Beekmantown to upper Stones River, which interval is repre- _ sented by several thousand feet of calcareous sediments in other regions distant from the shore of that time. In marine transgressive overlaps; later members overlap earlier ones toward the source of supply, i.e., towards the old- land. In non-marine progressive overlaps, later members overlap the earlier ones away from the source of supply. Thus in a growing alluvial cone, the later formed beds will extend farther out on to the plain away from the mountain. If several successive fans of this type are formed one above the other, owing to successive elevations of the source of supply, only the latest beds of each delta will be found on the outer edge of this compound delta, the hiatus between the beds being further emphasized by the erosion which the last bed of the first delta underwent during the time that the early beds of the sccond delta were deposited nearer the source of supply, i.e., before the last bed of the second delta covered up the remnant of the last bed of the first delta and thus protected it from further erosion. A good example of this type of overlap appears to be presented by the Pocono, Mauch Chunk, and Pottsville beds of the Appa- lachian region. These formations are, with exception of the negligible Greenbrier member, of non-marine origin, repre- senting the wash from the growing Appalachians. In western Pennsylvania only the latest beds of each (barring portions removed by erosion between the deposition of the successive fans) are found resting one upon the other, the interval between the beds becoming less and less toward the anthracite regions. A. W. GRABAU, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. May 8, 1905. Section met at 8.15 p.m., Vice-President Wheeler presiding. 1 See ante, p. 591, April meeting. 600 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: E. B. Wilson, OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHROMOSOMES IN HEMIPTERA. H. E. Crampton, CoRRELATION AND SELECTION. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Professor Wilson’s paper presented the results of an examina- tion of the mode of distribution of the chromosomes to the spermatozoa in Lygeus turcicus, Cenus delius, Podisus spinosus and two species of Euchistus. In none of these forms is an accessory chromosome (in the ordinary sense) present, all of the spermatozoa receiving the same number of chromosomes, which is one half the spermatogonial number (the latter number is in Podisus sixteen, in the other forms fourteen). In all these forms, however, an asymmetry of distribution occurs such that two classes of spermatozoa are formed in equal numbers, both receiving a ring of six chromosomes (in Podisus seven) that are duplicated in all the spermatozoa, and in addition a central one which in one half the spermatozoa is much smaller than in the other half. These corresponding but unequal chromo- somes (which evidently correspond to some of the forms described by Montgomery as “‘chromatin nucleoli” and agree in mode of distribution with that which this author has described in the case of Euchtstus tristigmus) may be called the ‘“‘idiochromo- somes.”’ They always remain separate in the first division, which accordingly shows one more than one half the sper- matogonial number of chromosomes, but at the close of this division conjugate to form an asymmetrical dyad, the number of separate chromatin-elements being thus reduced from eight to seven (in Podisus from nine to eight). A reduction of the number to seven in the first division, such as has been described by Montgomery as an occasional or usual process in Euchistus and Cenus, was never observed. In the second division the asymmetrical idiochromosome-dyad separates into its unequal constituents, while the other dyads divide symmetrically. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 601 One half the spermatozoa, therefore, receive the large idio- chromosome and one half the small, the other chromosomes being exactly duplicated in both. Correlated with this asymmetry of distribution is the fact that the spermatogonial chromosome-groups do not show two equal microchromosomes (as is the case in such forms as Anasa, Alydus or Protenor, where an accessory chromosome is present) ; but only one, which is obviously the small idiochromosome, the large one not being certainly distinguishable at this period from the other spermatagonial chromosomes. The final synap- sis of the idiochromosomes is deferred to the prophases of the second division, somewhat as that of the two equal micro- chromosomes is deferred until the prophase of the first divi- sion in Anasa, Alydus and some other forms. A remarkable result of the difference in this regard between the forms that possess and those that lack a true accessory chromosome is that in the former case (Anasa, Alydus, etc.) the first division of the small central chromosome is a reduction-division and the second an equation-division; while in the latter case (Lygeus, Cenus, etc.) the reverse order manifestly occurs. The relation of these observations to earlier ones by Paulmier, Montgomery, and others was pointed out, with a discussion of their bearing on the Mendelian phenomena of heredity and the problem of sex-determination. Professor Crampton presented briefly some of the conclusions drawn from the results of his work upon variation, correlation, and selection among saturnid lepidoptera. The earliest studies showed that eliminated individuals, when compared with similar members of the same group that survive, prove to be more variable and of somewhat different types, although this relation between variability and selection is not a constant one. The characters utilized for these preliminary studies, namely, certain pupal dimensions and proportions, were of such a nature that they could not serve the pupa directly in any functional manner; wherefore it was concluded that their con- dition of correlation formed the actual basis for the selective process, formative correlation being also distinguished from functional correlation. That the general condition of corre- 602 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE lation among the structural characters of pupe formed, indeed, the basis for selection was further indicated by the results of — a statistical study of the correlations between various charac- teristics of pupal groups from several different animal series; — although an advantage did not always appear in favor of the ~ surviving group. On the basis of the foregoing, a general theoretical conception was developed, according to which the whole series of internal elements and the whole series of external influences were regarded as involved in the determination of the general condition of correlation or co-ordination that formed the basis for selection, as adaptive or the reverse. M. A. BicELow, Secretary. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY. May 15, 1905. Section met at 8.15 p.m., Vice-President von Nardroff presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: I. L. Tufts, RELATION BETWEEN IONIZATION AND COMBUSTION IN FLAMES. L. L. Hendren, RATE oF RECOMBINATION OF GASEOUS IONS AT Low PRESSURES. No abstracts of the above papers have been received. CHARLES C. TROWBRIDGE, Secretary. BUSINESS MEETING. OCTOBER 9, 1905. . The Academy met at 8.15 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural History, President Kemp presiding. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The following names were then presented for election as Active Members, having been recommended by the Council: NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 603 Elizabeth Billings 279 Madison Avenue _ May Cline Harmony, N.J. Guy W. Culgin 133 West 129th Street -C. Temple Emmet Stony Brook, L.I. Alfred Taggart Millroy 53 Guilford Street, London, . W.C. Henry Clay Pierce Waldorf-Astoria A. M. Fernandez Ybarra, 314 Second Avenue AssociaTE AcTIVE MEMBERS Roland M. Harper College Point, N.Y. A. E. Stevenson 568 West End Avenue It was voted that the Assistant Secretary cast a unanimous ballot for the above candidates. There being no further business, the meeting adjourned. HERMON C. Bumpus, Recording Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. OCTOBER 9, 1905. Section met at 8.15 p.m., Vice-President Hovey presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. A public lecture was then delivered by Professor Robert T. Hill, on “THE RepusBLic oF Mexico; its PHYSICAL AND Eco- NOmIc ASPECTS.”’ The meeting was held in the large lecture hall of the Ameri- can Museum of Natural History. Three hundred and seventy- one members and visitors were present. The lecture was fully illustrated with stereopticon views. No abstract of this lecture has been received. A. W. GRABAU, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. OcTOBER 16, 1905. Section met at 8.15 P.M. at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice-President Wheeler presiding. 604 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE The minutes of the preceding meeting of the Section were read and approved. The evening was devoted to reports of summer work carried on by members of the Section. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Professor H. F. Osborn went to British Columbia to study the habits of mountain goats; he found large numbers of the animals and had many opportunities of studying and photo- graphing them at close range. Dr. Hay studied certain fossil turtles in the American Museum of Natural History. Dr. E. F. Byrnes continued her study of variations in the crus- tacean Cyclops. She also gave some attention to regeneration in sense organs in Nerezs. Dr. H. R. Linville worked at San Diego, Calif., studying the mechanics of circulation in Nerevs. Professor F. B. Sumner directed the summer session at the United States Fisheries Laboratory at Woods Holl. He also completed his studies of the effect of density and salinity of water on fishes. Professor Wheeler continued his studies of ants and made out many interesting points on the formation of ant colonies by solitary queens. M. A. BicELow, Secretary. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY. OCTOBER 23, 1905. section met at 8.15, at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice-President von Nardroff presiding. The minutes of the previous meeting of the Section were read and approved. The evening was devoted to reports on summer work by members. The meeting then adjourned. C. C. TROWBRIDGE, Secretary, NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 605 SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. OCTOBER 30, 1905. Section met at 8.15 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice-President Woodbridge presiding. The minutes of the preceding meeting of the Section were _ read and approved. The following program was then offered: Edgar L. Hewett, THe Lire AND CULTURE OF THE TEWA INDIANS IN PRE-SPANISH TIMES. The Section met in conjunction with the American Ethno- - logical Society. No abstract of the above paper has been received. R. S$. WoopwortH, Secretary. BUSINESS MEETING. NOVEMBER 6, 1905. The Academy met at 8.15 pP.m., at the American Museum of Natural History, President Kemp presiding. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The following name was then presented for election as Active Member, having been recommended by the Council: Reno B. Welbourn Union City, Ind. AssocriaTE AcTIVE MEMBERS Edward K. Judd 505 Pearl Street Matthew van Siclen Columbia University By vote of the Academy, the candidates were unanimously elected. Vice-President Hovey made the announcement of the recent death of Baron Ferdinand von Richthoven, Professor of Geo- graphy in the Imperial University of Berlin. The meeting then adjourned. Hermon C. Bumpus, Recording Secretary. 606 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. NOVEMBER 6, 1905. Section met at 8.30 P.m., Vice-President Hovey presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following sectional officers were nominated for the year 1906: Vice-President and Chairman of Section, E. O. Hovey. Secretary of Section, A. W. Grabau. The following program was then offered: J. F. Kemp, RECENT INTERESTING DISCOVERY OF HUMAN IMPLEMENTS IN AN ABANDONED RIVER CHAN- NEL IN SOUTHERN OREGON. J. J. Stevenson, A Bit oF QUATERNARY GEOLOGY. A. A. Julien, NoTEs oN THE GLACIATION OF MANHATTAN ISLAND. , The papers were briefly discussed. Dr. George F. Kunz announced the finding of pyrope and serpentine in the tunnel under New York Harbor. These indicated the presence of a peridotite dyke. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. During July and August, 1905, Professor Kemp was in the field in southern Oregon under the direction of Dr. David T. Day, chief of the Division of Mineral Statistics of the U. S. Geological Survey. The work assigned was the collection of black sands and crude gravels from the placer mines of this section for the experimental concentrating plant of the Survey at the Portland exposition. While visiting Waldo, Oregon, the following occurrence of human implements in the gravels of the Deep Gravel Mining Co. was met, and, with the permis- sion of the Director of the Survey, is herewith communicated. Waldo is situated on the stage line from Grant’s Pass on the Southern Pacific R. R., 100 miles south of west from Crescent City on the coast in California, and is forty miles from Grant’s Pass. It is in Josephine County, a few miles north of the Cali- fornia line. } 7 NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 607 Waldo was the scene of the earliest discovery in Oregon of stream placers in the country back from the ocean. Sailors penetrated to it in 1853 and found rich pay-streaks in the bed of a small stream which heads up in the ancient gravels of what must once have been a large river. The discovery received the name of the Sailor Diggings, and the name Waldo came later. The ancient gravels are now on top of a ridge and have remained in relief while the former banks have been removed by erosion. The course of the river was to the north, since its bed-rock declines in this direction. The bed-rock as exposed in the placer mines is chiefly serpentine, but in one place the tim-rock is fossiliferous sandstone, which has been studied and -determined by J. S. Diller. The boulders are chiefly eruptive rocks of various sorts and are much softened as a rule by decom- position. The exact relations of the old drainage would require more investigation for their elucidation than the writer could give in the brief. time at command, and it can only be stated that they cover a rather wide area east and west, having been mined at intervals for half a mile or more across the main course, but whether this is from forking of the old main channel or not was not determined. Some shallower gravels are prob- ably due to the washing down of the old high-channel deposit over the slopes and on to the flats on either side of its crest. Pestles appear to occur in the gravels as a not specially exceptional phenomenon. The operators of the mines speak of their occasional discovery as a matter which does not excite surprise. The following instance, however, of two mortars and of one or two pestles attracted the attention of Mr. W. J. Wimer, the manager and part owner of the Deep Gravel property, and, although the objects were brought to light in the hydrau- licking during the night shift, he carefully recorded the details early the next morning. I particularly inquired about the pos- sibility of the bank’s caving in so as to make implements from the surface appear as if buried in the deeper gravels, but this possibility seems to be guarded against both by the auriferous cement in the larger mortar and by its actual detection in the bank by the pipe man. The mortar was thought by him to be a boulder and he shut off the stream and extracted it with 608 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE a pick. The mortars and pestles are now in the possession of Col. T. Waln-Morgan Draper, a well-known mining engineer, at whose summer home, a few miles from Waldo, the implements now are. . The following extract from a letter of Mr.Wimer written at my request gives the facts. “The mortar is about 12 inches high by g inches across, and it is made of the hardest granite. ‘Two of our night men piped it out in 1902, when it was firmly embedded in a blue cement gravel (the pay channel), fifty-eight feet from the surface. They had to resort to picks to get it out and the bed or hole out of which they pulled it remained, showing its perfect mould. I went to the mine in the morning and the. two men formally presented it to me. It was still packed tightly to its very rim with blue cement gravel. With a sharp pick I carefully picked the gravel loose so that I could clean it. I was some time doing so. I then washed the detritus and got eight pretty large colors of gold. “H. M. Pfefferly and D. W. Yarbrough were the finders. The place was in the S.W. 1/4 of N.W. 1/4; Sec. 21; T. 408.: R. 8. W., W.M., Josephine County, Oregon, on the property of the Deep Gravel Mining Co. The other mortar is what Colonel Draper terms a quartz mortar, having a saucer-like cavity on its top. The gold from the ground where it was piped out was pronounced by the Selby Smelting Company in San Fran- cisco to be ‘quartz gold,’ their receipt to us being so marked. This mortar was probably about ten feet under the surface. It was 300 yards from the other one and on Sec. 20, being there- fore the S.E. 1/4 of N.E. It was found in 1901. The pestles were discovered with it; they were in the pay dirt.” Those occurrences add one more instance to the list of stone implements which have been found in the auriferous gravels of the Pacific coast. The writer fully realizes the criticism which has been brought to bear upon them and the skepticism with which their authenticity is regarded by many. The Waldo case may be stated upon the testimony of Mr. Wimer and Mr. Pfefferly, and may add its contribution to the general mass of evidence regardng the antiquity of man in the Far West. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 609 Professor Stevenson described a small area in northwestern Vermont. His conclusions were that, after withdrawal of the ice, clay was deposited along the streams to an altitude of about 750 feet above tide; that upon this sand, gravel, and boulders accumulated to a thickness of about 450 feet. He traced the steps in re-erosion of the channel ways as shown by the successive terraces. The area in question is the north- ward extension of Professor C. H. Hitchcock’s third basin of Winoiski River as defined in the Geology of Vermont. In the third paper of the evening Dr. Julien said the evidences of plucking action of the continental glacier upon the crystalline schists of the island consist partly of jagged broken surfaces beneath the till, with angular transported blocks in the moraine to the southwest; and partly of rounded but roughened hum- mocks, pitted apparently by a modification of semilunar cavi- ties, such as have been discovered in perfect condition on scored surfaces of our limestone. Channels and pipe-like troughs were also described and attrib- uted to the action of subglacial running waters, probably once connected with waterfalls through crevasses in the great glacier. The allied feature of pot-holes, found just beyond the limits of the island, was then discussed, and another hypothesis advanced to account for their formation. A sudden southward change in the direction of the glacial furrows over the island, their asymmetric form, and distinct southward curvature were described as evidences of a decided slope of the general surface toward the south-southwest, at the time of its subsidence during the glacial movement. A topographical modification was also referred to, through the undercutting of joint planes facing the northeast. Dr. Kunz stated that during the spring of 1905 there had been shown to him some precious garnet, pyrope, in rounded irregular transparent grains, measuring from two to five milli- meters in diameter. That these had been found in the tunnel extension of the New York subway, about 1200 feet south of Pier No. 1, North River, under New York Harbor, at a depth of 110 feet below the bed of the bay. That upon visiting the locality he found that the entire walls of the tunnel had been 39 610 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE covered with the iron arches, and it was impossible to see the rocks themselves, but that upon the dump heap he found a number of masses of serpentine weighing from two to one hundred pounds each. The serpentine was a rich yellow, a trifle darker than that found at Montville, N.J. Cleavages — of feldspar nearly a foot long, black tourmaline, almandite, garnet in grains and in crystals were noted, but no peridotite itself was seen. This was probably due to the fact that nearly all the material taken from the tunnel was removed by barges to the deep ocean and dumped. Dr. Kunz stated that it was most unfortunate that what was undoubtedly the evidence of a peridotite dike upon New York island should have been lost. A mass of stilbite gneissoid wall, measuring six feet by ten and nearly covered by rich stilbite, was noted. Mr. C. Woth- erspoon, the engineer in charge of the night work, was most courteous in giving information and in collecting specimens. A. W. GRABAU, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. NOVEMBER 13, 1905. Section met at 8.15 p.m., Vice-President Wheeler presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were omitted on account of the absence of the Secretary. The following program was then offered: H. F. Osborn THE RECLASSIFICATION OF THE MAMMALIA. Katherine Foote, THE PROPHASES OF THE First MATURATION SPINDLE OF ALLOLOBOPHORA. H. E. Crampton, Brirr REPORT OF STATISTICS RELATING TO SEX-INHERITANCE IN Morus. B. E. Dahlgren, DEMONSTRATION OF NEW INVERTEBRATE MoDELs IN THE AMERICAN MUSEUM. The nomination of officers for the ensuing year was then announced as the business part of the program. In the absence of the Secretary, R. W. Miner was appointed Secretary pro tem. Professor H. E. Crampton was nominated to the Council | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 61L as Vice-President and Chairman of the Section. M. A. Bige- low was re-elected Secretary of the Section. The meeting then adjourned. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Professor Osborn said in his paper that it is surprising to find how little attention is given in modern works to the au- thorship of the larger taxonomic divisions of the Mammalia, and what mistaken ideas are current as to past leadership in classification. In the present study of this subject historically Mr. W. K. Gregory has been devoting several weeks to reviewing and abstracting the literature, making a number of valuable sug- gestions, and Mr. T. S. Palmer of the Biological Survey of the U.S. Agricultural Department, has rendered invaluable aid and criticism from his stores of knowledge. As an expression of our knowledge of the phylogeny or rela- tionships and descent of the mammals, classification shifts and changes with research and discovery. Looking back we find that those authors, such as De Blainville, exerted the most permanent influence who had the keenest appreciation of genetic affinities, while others, like Gray, who have lacked all sense of such affinities, have made no impression. Finally, in schemes of classification we express clumsily in words our knowledge and more or less our theories also of the affinities, the divergences or continuous branchings and sub-branchings which have resulted in the great diversity of extinct and mod- ern forms. Discovery of these branchings from time to time necessitates an increase in the number of subdivisions. For example, in order to express the facts known at the present time it appears to be necessary: (1) To introduce the new branch tnjra-class ; (2) To employ more frequently the branch super-order ; (3) To revive for descriptive purposes at least the branch cohort of Storr. Thus in place of the three branches employed by Linnzus, 612 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE namely, class, order, genus, we require eleven kinds of branches, namely: Super-orders. The forty known orders of mammals shown in the following table, namely, twenty-one living and nineteen Class extinct, cannto as yet be united uniformly Shipeclace into super-orders, yet the tendency of discovery will be constantly in this direc- tion. Thus Roth’s union of the South American hoofed forms into Notungulata (1.e., Southern Ungulates) is a happy step Infra-class Cohort Super-order Order forward; the Hyracoidea of Africa may ~ Sub-order possibly be added to this branch. Simi- Super-family larly the tendency of discovery (Andrews) Parsee is to revive De Blainville’s idea and unite Saeche the Proboscidea and Sirenia into a new Sb aay super-order, to which possibly the Pyro- _ Genus theria of South America may some day be added. Our super-order column, how- ever, requires much additional study and discovery. Orders. Among the forms in our order column which are still most uncertain are the above-mentioned Pyrotheria, the Barypoda (an order proposed for the reception of Asimottherium and related forms of Eocene Africa), the Mesodonta (primitive North American monkeys which will possibly be included with the South American forms), the Tubulidentata (South ~ American aardvarks, latterly removed from the Edentata and showing some affinities in the brain to the Ungulata, Elliot), the Pholidota (Pangolins, also recently removed from the Eden-— tata although the brain presents a feeble claim to this relavion- ship—Elliot), the Proglires (an order of doubtful value and position), the Protodonta and Allotheria, also of doubtful relationship. A striking recent triumph of paleontology is the removal of the Zeuglodontia (ancient Eocene whale- like forms) to the vicinity of the Creodonta; it had long been suspected that the Cetacea should be nearer the Carnivora than other orders. Beddard suggests Edentate affinities. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 613 Cohorts. The branches in the cohort column represent the modified revival of a very ancient usage. The groupings are, however, very general and uncertain, especially as regards the branch Ungulata, because we still need to ascertain whether the hoofed animals sprang from a common “Protungulata”’ stock, as has been supposed, or whether they were more or less independently derived from the Unguiculata—if the latter supposition is the correct one, the term Ungulata (Storr) becomes purely descriptive. Injra-class. The chief object of the new Infra-class division is to express the fact that the Marsupials and Placentals, while widely separate, are also much more closely related to each other than either are to the Monotremes. CLASS SUB-CLASS INFRA-CLASS COHORT SUPER-ORDER ORDER Mammalia I. Protothe- I. Ornithodel- Monotremata.... 1 ria phia. 1Protodonta...... 2 1Allotheria....... II. Eutheria 1. Didelphia or Polyprotodonta.. 4 Marsupialia Diprotodontia... 5 1Triconodonta.... 6 2. Monodelphia 1. Unguicu- | Pantotheria..... 7 or Placenta- lata Pristini Insectivora...... UORS lia Dermoptera..... 9 Cheiroptera...... 10 {1Creodonta....... II “ Ferae ! 1Zeuglodontia.... 12 (Carnivora) \ Fissipedia....... 13 [ Fomine seu aens I4 « : WW Proelires termes Glires NeRodentiane ane 16 ee ne ae 17 “ \ 1Tzeniodonta...... 18 Edentata | Xenarthra...... 19 Pholidota....... 20 oe Tubulidentata... 21 1Mesodonta...... 22 2. Primates? Primates 1 IPTOSiNAi1 een yeree 23 Simizessiewere ed Perissodactyla.. 25 3. Ungulata Diplarthra? 1 1Ancylopoda..... 26 Artiodactyla.... 27 1Condylarthra.... 28 1Amblypoda..... 29 1Barypoda....... 30 Proboscidea..... 31 Sireniayy: seeeceee 2 Pyrotheria 33 laGiXc@Sa no ncode 34 (Typotheria...... 35 Notungulata ! Toxodontia..... 36 Roth Astropatheroidea 37 Litopterna...... 38 4. Cete Denticetex.--14 <1 39 WiyStiCete asia 40 1Extinct orders. Miss Foote and Mr. Strobell showed lantern slides of fourteen photo-micrographs illustrating a few stages in the prophases 614 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE and metaphase of the first maturation spindle of the egg of . Allolobophora fetida. These slides demonstrated the following phenomena: 1. In this form the chromosomes lose their individuality completely during the growth period, the chromatine being distributed throughout the germinal vesicle. It then segre- gates into a chromatic reticulum and later forms a spireme which divides transversely into eleven bivalent chromosomes. The spireme shows a longitudinal split. which persists until the metaphase and produces the typical tetrad. 2. The form of the chromosomes is not constant. The eleven bivalent chromosomes of the prophases and metaphase may be in the form of rings, crosses, figures eight, or rods, these forms being inconstant and variable. 3. The size relations are not constant. There is a marked difference in size, but it is not possible to accurately identify any one or more chromosomes on account of a definite indi- vidual or relative size. 4. The number of odécyte chromosomes is a constant feat- ure. Eleven bivalent chromosomes can be accurately and con- stantly demonstrated. No other abstracts have been received. Roy W. MINER, Secretary pro tem. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY. NOVEMBER 20, 1905. Section met at 8.15 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural History, Mr. C. C. Trowbridge presiding. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The following program was then offered: Charles C. Trowbridge, METEOR TRAINS. After the reading of the paper there was an informal discussion, followed by the presentation of the following business: The question of holding bi-monthly instead of monthly meet- ings was discussed, and it was voted that the matter be referred to the Council with recommendation that the change be made. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 615 It was voted that steps be taken by the Secretary to arrange _ for holding one or more meetings during the year in conjunction with the Physics Club of New York City. _ A letter from Vice-President von Nardroff was read regretting his inability to attend the meetings of the Section during the coming year. C. C. Trowbridge was elected Chairman of the Section for the ensuing year. It was voted to postpone the election of the Secretary until a later meeting. The Section then adjourned. Roy W. Miner, Secretary pro tem. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. NOVEMBER 27, 1905. Section met at 4.15 P.M., at Columbia University, and 8.30 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice- President Woodbridge presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: Afternoon Session: W. S. Monroe, SMELL DISCRIMINATION OF STUDENTS. F. Lyman Wells, LincuistTic STANDARDS. F. M. Hamilton, A Stupy or THE READING PAUSE, ’ R. S. Woodworth, Vision AND LOCALIZATION DURING RAPID Eve Movements. Evening Session: J. McKeen Cattell, MEASUREMENT OF SCIENTIFIC MERIT. Brother Chrysostom, TEMPERAMENT AS AFFECTING PHILOSOPHIC THOUGHT. W. P. Montague, ARE MENTAL PROCESSES IN SPACE? C. M. Bakewell, CoNCERNING EMPIRICISM. Election of sectional officers for 1906: Chairman, Robert MacDougall. Secretary, R. S. Woodworth. Adjourned at 10 P.M. 616 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Professor Monroe described an experiment in which students were provided with sets of small vials filled one third full of common odors—chiefly essential oils. Each set contained twenty odors. Nostrils were alternately used; five seconds were given for the stimulation, and one minute was allowed for recording the result and resting the nostrils. After every seven tests, the windows were opened and the room aired. In all, 255 students were tested. The average number of _ odors correctly named was 6.72. Four students named twelve correctly; two students, eleven; and five students, ten. Two of the students were able to identify but one odor each; fifteen students, but two odors each; and seventeen students, but three odors each. Wintergreen was correctly identified by 77 per cent. of the students; camphor, 75 per cent.; peppermint, 75 per cent.; vanilla, 74 per cent.; cloves, 65 per cent.; cinnamon, 56 sper cent.; spearmint, 38 per cent.; turpentine, 36 per cent.; tar, 36 per cent.; lemon; 20 per cent.) nutmes, 27) persccmium anise, 26 per cent.; pennyroyal, 21 per cent.; sassafras, 15 per cent.; bay rum, 9 per cent.; hemlock, 4 per cent.; bergamot, 3 per cent.; assafoetida, 2 per cent.; wormwood, 1 per cent.; and lavender, half of one per cent. A census of odor names showed that the students believed themselves familiar with certain odors, such as lavender, which they were unable to recognize. Dr. Wells’s paper stated that a historical standard is nec- essary for the regulation of linguistic usage, but the present literary interpretation of it is open to many objections, being reactionary in character and inconsistent in its admissions and exclusions. Models of linguistic excellence, as deter- minative of that body of elements to be considered good use, are to be sought among works whose criteria of value are more objective in character than is the case at present, as their value can be more rapidly and more accurately determined, and they are in closer touch with the actual needs of the language. The introspection of the author of the average ‘‘Principles of Rhetoric” should not be accepted as final in determining NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 617 the interrelationship of these elements of good use. It is possible to determine linguistic values of all sorts by statistical methods, which give not only the most valid determination possible, but also the measure of this validity. Determina- tions of so apparently subjective a character as linguistic force can be made with a validity that approximates practical cer- tainty. These experimental determinations do not coincide with any of the definitions of force which the introspective grammarians have laid down. Dr. Hamilton reported that previous investigators of the problem of reading have agreed upon the short exposure method as best for psychological analysis. Introspection is facilitated - most when the exposure is less than the shortest reading pause, z. @., When all eye movements are excluded. The apparatus most generally used is the tachistoscope of the fall screen va- riety. The word has been uniformly treated as the unit of perception in reading, the effort being to determine the factors or ‘‘cues”’ of word recognition—their character and order of occurrence. Previous tachistoscopic studies have confined themselves chiefly to the reading of isolated words; the present study has attempted to adapt the method to reading in context. A second adaptation is its use in analyzing processes at the threshold of word recognition by reducing the exposure time to a period approximating the time differences of the percep- tibility of their attributes, the presupposition being that various attributes of objects lie at varying distances from the threshold. And still a third untried possibility of this method consists in reports upon the marginal field of perceptual regard in addi- tion to the reports upon the field of distinct vision. The experiments have already proceeded far enough to give assurance that the completion of the study will shed addi- tional light upon the questions of literal reading, reading cues, value of context, etc. An attempt was made by Professor Woodworth to throw some additional light on the question, first raised by Cattell,’ as to what is seen during movements or jumps of the eye from 1 Psychological Review, 1900, VII., pp. 325-343, 507-508. 618 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE one fixation point to another. Two opposing views are those. of Holt,! who holds to a complete anesthesia or inhibition of the visual centre during the movement, and of Dodge,? who believes that vision there is possible but under ordinary con- ditions not actualized, because the faint blur produced by moving the eye across a variegated field is so brief and mean- ingless as to be ignored, just as entoptic phenomena are ignored. Proceeding on the supposition that if the latter view were correct it should be possible by attention and practice to become conscious of the stimuli that affect the eye during movement. the author has convinced himself of the following facts: 1. During head movements, an object held in the mouth may remain in clear vision. 2. During convergence, the two monocular fields may be seen to move across each other. 3. During eye-jumps proper, after-images may remain in consciousness if the lids.are closed (Exner), or if the background is dark or plain; it is also possible, in short jumps, or at the beginning and end of longer ones, to see entoptic spots move across the background. . 4. External objects moving in the same direction as the eye are distinctly seen when their angular velocity with respect to the eye coincides with that of the eye at any part of its jump (Cattell, Dodge). With reference to Holt’s objection that what is seen may be the positive after-image, appearing after the eye has come to rest, it should be noted that the objects so brought to clear vision are correctly localized in space, instead of being projected against the background at the new point of fixation, as would be the case with after-images. Thus not only vision, but correct localization of objects seen, is pos- sible during eye-jumps. 5. Stationary objects over which the eye passes can also be seen after practice. Fusion, flicker, and especially apparent motion of the objects, corresponding to the actual motion of 1 Psychological Review, Monograph Supplements, 1903, 1V., pp. 3-453 Psychological Bulletin, 1905, II. 2Ibid., 1900, VII., pp. 454-465; Psychological Bulletin 1905, II., pp. 193-199. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 619 _ their images across the retina, can all be seen. A peculiarity which calls for further discussion is that the apparent extent of the object’s motion is much less than the actual motion of the eye as measured against the background. The author’s conclusion is that vision with the moving eye is essentially the same as that with the fixed eye when the external field moves. Professor Cattell explained how he had selected a group of one thousand scientific men for the study of individual differences and the conditions on which success in scientific work depends. In each of the twelve principal sciences the students who had done original work were arranged in the order of merit of their work by ten competent judges. Thus was obtained the order of merit and also the proper error of each position, it being based on ten independent observations. This probable error is inversely as the differences in scientific method, it being small where the differences are marked and becoming larger as the differences are less. It is thus possible to construct a curve representing the distribution of scientific merit in these thousand scientific men, and this curve agrees rather closely with the positive half of the curve of error. The first hundred men differ among themselves about as much as the next two hundred or the last seven hundred. Data were also given in regard to the distribution of the thousand leading scientific men of the country. The birth- rate of these scientific men was 27 per million of the popula- tion, it being so in cities and 24 in the country. It was 109 in Massachusetts, 47 in New York, 23 in Pennsylvania, 12 in Missouri, and 1 in Mississippi andin Louisiana. Their present distribution is somewhat similar. Thus 134 scientific men were born in Massachusetts and 144 reside there; 183 were born in New York and 192 reside there. The central States, with the exception of Illinois, tend to lose their scientific men. Thus 75 were born in Ohio, and 34 now reside there. The distribution of these scientific men among different institutions is as follows: Harvard, 66; Columbia, 60; Chicago, 39; Cornell, 33; U. S. Geological Survey, 32; U. S. Department of Agri- culture, 32; Johns Hopkins, 30; California, 27; Yale, 26; Smith- 620 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE sonian Institution, 22; Michigan, 20; Massachusetts Institute | of Technology, 19; Wisconsin, 18; Pennsylvania, 17; Stanford, 16; Princeton, 14; Minnesota and Ohio State, ro each. In his paper, Brother Chrysostom stated that it is impossible either to understand the great philosophers or to appreciate their influence if we limit ourselves to a purely scientific stand- point. Temperament enters so largely as a factor, both im determining the principles on which they lay special stress and in gaining disciples for their respective schools, that we are forced to consider them also from a literary view-point if we would do them justice. The ingredients that form tem- perament may be arranged under the following heads: (1) Heredity, which is especially helpful in tracing tendencies favoring the pursuit of the concrete; (2) environment, which is closely interwoven with heredity and may be called a condi- tion of its development as a factor in mental life; (3) race and nationality—no Frenchman will treat a subject in the same manner as a German; (4) the attraction exercised by the first philosopher who interests a thinker; (5) the time or epoch in which the philosopher lived, for history is governed to a great extent by the law of reaction and adjustment, which results in the formation of cycles of thought; (6) the person- ality of the founder. This leads him to lay emphasis upon cer- tain phases of truth to the neglect of others. To estimate his influence we must attend to the elements of truth contained in his system of thought. Dr. Montague protested first against the current paradoxical view of mental processes as real occurrences that occur nowhere. They should be located in space for the following reasons: (1) They are naturally felt to be within the body; (2) they form no exception to the generally accepted rule that an invis- ible event, such as an electric current, is to be located in the visible object that directly conditions it; (3) their phenomenal existence in space (like their existence in time) is not in conflict with the transcendental view that space and time are appear- ances; (4) that they are neither punctiform nor figured is no argument against their location in space, for many things— notably, sounds and odors—are definitely located in space a without being regarded as either punctiform or figured; (s) the objection that there is no room in space for anything but matter and motion, and that thoughts and feelings if they were really in the brain would have to be regarded as visible substances between or alongside of the brain molecules, is invalid; for it disregards the fact that sensations are intensive and not extensive, and that they must, therefore, occupy space in the same way as other intensities, such as stresses, velocities, and accelerations, which exist in space along with their matter and not alongside of it. The last part of the paper explained and defended the hypoth- esis that mental states are the modes of potential energy (ex- pressible in terms of the higher derivatives of space with regard to time) into which the kinetic energy of the nerve currents must be transformed in order to be redirected. The theory, if true, would justify the belief in interaction without violating the parellelists’ contention that the spatial can only be causally related to what is in space. ; NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 621 R. S. WoopwortTH, Secretary. BUSINESS MEETING. DECEMBER 4, I905. The Academy met at 8.15 p.m., at the American Museum of Natural History, President Kemp presiding. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The Secretary reported from the Council as follows: At the meeting of the Council held Nov. 27, at 4 P.M., the following officers were nominated for the year 1906, according to the By-Laws: President, N. L. Britton. Vice-Presidents, Edmund Otis Hovey, H. E. Crampton, C. C. Trowbridge, Robert MacDougall. Corresponding Secretary, Richard E. Dodge. Recording Secretary, William M. Wheeler. 622 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE Treasurer, Emerson McMillin. Librarian, Ralph W. Tower. Editor, Charles Lane Poor. Councilors, John H. Finley, Hermon C. Bumpus. Finance Committee, John H. Hinton, C. A. Post, Henry F. Osborn. It was voted that the Annual Meeting should consist of a formal meeting for the presentation of the reports of officers and the election of officers for the ensuing year, to be followed by a subscription dinner, at which the address of the Presi- dent would be delivered. Due notice will be given members of the time and place of this meeting. It was voted that the report of the Council be approved. The death of John H. Hinton was then announced by D. S. Martin. It was voted that a committee be appointed by the Chairman to draw up resolutions, with regard to the matter. The President appointed Professor Martin and Professor Stevenson to serve on this committee. Mr. George F. Kunz then announced the death of Dr. Augus- tus Choate Hamlin, geologist, of Bangor, Me., and moved that a committee be appointed to draw up appropriate resolutions. It was so voted. The President appointed Dr. Kunz as a committee of one to draw up the resolutions. The following candidates were then presented for election to Active and Associate Active membership, having been recom- mended by the Council: M. Baxter, Jr. 32 West 6oth Street Martin Beckhard 102 West 87th Street T. W. Blake 1945 Park Avenue. Frank Briesen 87 Nassau Street André Champollion 150 West 47th Street William L. Condit 624 Bloomfield Street, Hoboken, N.J. Warren Delano, Jr. 1 Broadway Louis J. de Milhau 48 Mt. Auburn Street, Cambridge, Mass. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 623 James A. Garland L. V. Holzmaister John E. MacDonald Alfred E. Marling George B. Morewood R. J. Nunn mE. Oettmger Henry Phipps Carl Pickhardt William Procter F. James Reilly James H. Rogers Charles M. Schott, Jr. W. Wheeler Smith Samuel B. Snook Isidor Straus J. E. Hulshizer Henry E. Taylor Jeremiah R. van Brunt Robert A. van Wyck Wendell T. Bush Lincoln Cromwell J. M. Conn John S. Durand Walter Irving Adrian §. Lambert J. M. O’Brien Juliette A. Owen William H. Vredenburgh Box 500, Bristol, R.I. 150 West 72d Street 216 West 72d Street 47 West 47th Street 156 West 76th Street 5 York Street, E., Savannah, Ga. 416 Central Park West 6 East 87th Street - 1042 Madison Avenue rz East 52d Street 13 West 77th Street 60 Wall Street 25 Broad Street 17 East 77th Street 182 Hart Street, Brooklyn 2745 Broadway 16 Gifford Avenue, Jersey City 306 West 8cth Street 1841 84th Street, Brooklyn 149 Broadway 167 Joralemon Street, Brooklyn, N.Y. 3 East 84th Street, N.Y. City 544 West 114th Street 126 West 79th Street 121 East 37th Street 29 West 36th Street 252 West 72d Street 306 North Ninth Street, St. Louis, Mo. 868 West End Avenue, N.Y. City. AssociATE ACTIVE MEMBER G. W. Hunter 2238 Andrews Avenue, Univer- sity Heights 624 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE The candidates were unanimously elected by vote of the Academy. The meeting then adjourned. Hermon C. Bumpus, Recording Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. DECEMBER 4, eae Section met at 8.30 p.m., Vice-President Hovey presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: J. Howard Wilson, THE GiaciaL GEoLocY oF NANTUCKET AND CapE Cop. Thomas T. Read, Gotp MINING IN THE SOUTHERN APPALA- ‘CHIANS. George F. Kunz, Description oF THE Mopoc, Scott County, Kansas, METEORITE. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Dr. Wilson commenced his paper with a description of the region by means of a map showing the great morainal features of the late Wisconsin ice-sheet. It was shown that the glacial phenomena and accumulations were due to two very distinct lobes having a direction of motion approximately at right angles to each other. The eastern lobe was termed the Nan- tucket lobe and the other the Long Island lobe from the- more prominent region of its moraines. It was shown also that each lobe had two prominent associ- ated stages, one the time of maximum advance, and the other a period of halting in the final retreat. The glacial features of Nantucket and as far west as the central portion of Martha’s Vineyard were formed during the first or Nantucket stage of that lobe, while the morainal accumu- lations of the western portion of Martha’s Vineyard, Block Island, and the outer moraine of Long Island were formed i creas NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 625 during the corresponding stage of the Long Island lobe or in what was termed the Martha’s Vineyard-Block Island stage. ; The retreat of the Nantucket lobe to Cape Cod, where it _ halted for a time, formed the Cape Cod stage of this lobe, while a retreat of the front of the western lobe to a poison on the Elizabeth Island, Southern Rhode Island, Fisher’s and Plum Islands, and the northern part of Long Island resulted in what was termed the Elizabeth Island-Fisher’s Island stage. It is well known that the ice of the Long Island lobe had a general southeasterly motion, but it was shown that the Nantucket lobe came from the northeast, probably from a region as distant as Newfoundland, and no doubt extended seaward at least 150 miles. Between the two lobes was formed the interlobate moraine extending from Wood’s Holl on Cape Cod to and be- yond Manomet Hill in the neighborhood of Plymouth. It was shown that the Nantucket lobe had what might be called a third stage, when it began to melt back from the Cape Cod moraine in the vicinity of West Barnstable, its front still holding on to the east and west. Fresh water was thus held up by the moraina! ridge in a re-entrant angle of the retreating ice, bringing into existence Cape Cod Lake. It was during the existence of this lake that the sand plains of Eastern Well- fleet. Highlands, and Truro were formed. It was further shown that Cape Cod Lake had three distinct stages, the Wellfleet. Highlands, and Truro stages, marked by three different levels of its waters and the formation of a par- ticular series of plains. Numerous maps and views of the prominent glacial features tyhroughout the region were shown. Mr. Read first pointed out that the Southern Appalachian region was one of the earliest to which the search for gold was directed after the discovery of the New World. After tracing the early development up to the present, the geological structure of the region and the methods of occurrence of the ore were described. The paper then touched on the present state of the industry and the methods of working, and concluded with a forecast of the probable future worth of the deposits. 40 626 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE Dr. Kunz described the Modoc, Scott County, Kansas, meteor- ite, that detonated over Modoc at 9.30 P.m., Sept. 2, 1905. First a loud sharp report was heard; then followed a rumbling ~ for thirty seconds, when a shower of over a dozen stones fell which weighed from one ounce to twelve pounds each. The © stone is an almost white, pulverulent mass, with minute specks ; of native iron or troilite, with an occasional white, glassy. | cleavable feldspar inclusion. A. W. GRABAU, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. DECEMBER II, 1905. Section met at 8.15 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice-President Wheeler presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following program was then offered: Adele M. Fielde, THE PRoGREssivE Opor or ANTS AND ITS INFLUENCE IN THEIR COMMUNAL LIFE. A. F. Bandelier, Anima Lire In PERU AND BOLIVIA. May Cline, PRINCIPLES OF BirpD FLIGHT. F. M. Chapman, CERTAIN INSTINCTS IN BIRDs. No abstracts received. M. A. BicELow, Secretary. ANNUAL MEETING. DECEMBER 18, 1905. The Academy met for the Annual Meeting on Monday, Dec. 18, 1905, at 7.30 P.M.,.at the Hotel Endicott; Presi- dent Kemp in the chair. A formal session for the transaction of regular business was held, followed by a dinner, at which sixty-one were present, including forty-six members and their friends. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES O27 The accompanying reports of the Corresponding Secretary, Recording Secretary, Librarian, and Editor were read and placed on file. The Treasurer not being able to present his report, on account of absence from town, it was voted that it be referred to the Finance Committee for audit, when presented. The following members were elected Fellows by the Academy: Professor Charles Baskerville Dr. Maurice Fishberg Mr. C. William Beebe Mr. Gifford Pinchot Dr. John H. Finley Mr. George H. Sherwood The Academy then proceeded to elect officers for the year 1906. Professors Crampton and Trowbridge were appointed tel- lers, ballots prepared by the Council according to the By-Laws were distributed, and the votes were counted. The following officers were declared elected: President, Nathaniel L. Britton. Vice-Presidents, E. O. Hovey (Section of Geology and Miner- alogy), H. E. Crampton (Section of Biology), C. C. Trowbridge (Section of Astronomy, Physics, and Chemistry), Robert Mac- Dougall (Section of Anthropology and Psychology). Corresponding Secretary, Richard E. Dodge. Recording Secretary, William M. Wheeler. Treasurer, Emerson McMillin. Librarian, Ralph W. Tower. Editor, Charles Lane Poor. Councilors (to serve three years), Hermon C. Bumpus, John H. Finley. Finance Committee, John H. Caswell, C.'A. Post, Henry F. Osborn. The President of the Academy, Professor James F. Kemp, then delivered his address upon ‘‘The Problem of the Metal- liferous Veins,” after which a vote of thanks was tendered to him. The Academy then adjourned. Hermon C. Bumpus, Recording Secretary. 628 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY. During the year, the Assistant Secretary, Mr. Miner, has sent the customary biennial circulars to the Honorary and Corresponding members and has already received replies from more than three fourths of his inquiries. According to our corrected lists, there are now fifty Honorary Members and one hundred and seventy-one Corresponding Members. During the last year two Corresponding Members, Professor Alpheus 8. Packard and Professor Albert.A. Wright, have died. Ricuarp E. Dopce, Corresponding Secretary. REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY. During the year 1905 the Academy held eight business meetings, and twenty-eight sectional meetings, at which eighty- four stated papers and lectures were presented, on the following subjects: Astronomy 3 papers. Physiography i papers Physics Gagne ; lecture. Chemistry 3 i Anthropology and Paleontology 5 y Archeology 6 PADerS pee Biology DAN a 8 lecture. Geology II cy Psychology 24 papers. Mineralogy Bemis Philosophy Sn Physiology I my At the present time the membership of the Academy includes 424 Active Members, nineteen of whom are Associate Active Members, and 121 Fellows. The election of six Fellows is pending. There have been five deaths during the year, seven resignations, and one member has been dropped for non-payment of dues. The new members elected during the year number 159. A year ago only five new members were elected. During the past year there has been a net gain of 146 against a loss of nine in 1904. This remarkable showing, which amounts to an increase of 50 per cent., is due to the activity of the Mem- NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 629 bership Committee, of which Professor Stevenson is chairman, and is the result of the determination of the Council to devote especial attention to the matter of membership, as stated in the Recording Secretary’s Report of a year ago. While striving to increase the membership the Academy has had in view the securing of men interested in science, even though not active scientific contributors, and by the establishment of a new grade of membership, viz. that of Associate Active Member- ship, many young men have been brought in. Efforts have also been made to invite to the sectional meetings persons who are not members of the Academy but who are interested in the various branches of science to which these sections are devoted. The routine work of the Academy has now been concentrated in one office at the American Museum of Natural History, where an Academy Room has been provided so as to be adapted to our special needs. It is with sorrow that the Academy has to record the loss by death of the five following members: Dr. John H. Hinton, Fellow and Patron of the Academy (40 years). Dr. L. H. Laudy, Fellow (24 years). The Hon. Edward Cooper (38 years). Mr. John Murray Mitchell (19 years). Mr. Wheeler H. Peckham (7 years). Respectfully submitted, Hermon C. Bumpus, Recording Secretary. 630 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE REPORT OF THE TREASURER. New York, Dec. 18, 1905. To the New York Academy of Sciences. Gentlemen:—As required by the By-Laws, I herewith sub- — mit a statement of my receipts and disbursements since my last annual report, and a balance sheet from my ledger, as of this date. Respectfully yours, C2 Bi Gor Treasurer. RECEIPTS. Balance on hand, as per annual report Dec. 20, TQO4 wees cette eee teeta teen eee $2,266.24 One year’s interest at 4% on Lampe Mortgage (St. Ann’ SvAwve®)) TOn hr 2sOOOnr einer eee 540.00 One year’s interest at 5% on Brennan Mortgage (CQBAG We Siela, Sib) WOK WE ROO. aa oackasccsoe 260.00 Ieite Nemibershipeheesmmer re acerrieiie reir rier I,200.00 Mmibiation Nee Gy iamesas chart mete lain ache cles 5.00 Active Membership Dues, E Oi at nara tobe, Meera $20.00 TOON ioe te. ona eee 60.00 ue i fo WEL OMAN pact Se aEN aw oeaele 150.00 as i Sit EQ OB yes suet che tices eS iaectee ars 2,615.00 ss a Milt EEO O Oi uns eset one NN ana 40.00 <= 2,885.00 Associate Membership Dues, 1905............ 45.00 Imterest en) Deposit im banana san ere ee 61 72 Surplus from Annual Dinner, 1904........... 4.00 Sales) ote REpmMts eter rw awit re sieyemaaeee 104 09 $7,372.05 DISBURSEMENTS Pra liea tions: sever: tes east pearance eialiuedetereu tae $1,892.45 Expenses Recording Secretary and Assistant Secretary. not ayer eae opera vetedees aneceuate mueace 370.58 YAO WHE LUC Bastia) ps Sarai SOc In gaat uslnatrexers tol vate 90.00 Shinai JNSsie. SISCinsuahay,, im MaMa 5 6 oca bad 6 733.206 Expenses Of MUTCASUTEE i war ePNemcmerstare, ysis 25.00 Pies Callow rch alert nice a nak renee aE 95-95 ns ““ Corresponding Secretary......... 2.10 General Expenses, including expenses of Spe- cial Committee on Membership.......... 185.30 Expenses, Geological Sectionmerre evi. ie rp. 35 Section of Astronomy and Physics.. dus $3,411.44 Balanceronvinan de rheiirrsieteraiverstiete irre $3,959.61 r NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 631 BALANCE SHEET. Dr. LED WOSTHAOSTAS ig PEs Goh he eR $17,200.00 22S Cin ISN eek Ue Oe a 3,959.61 $21,159.61 Cr. PEPAMS cine 1 Dero ee rt $12,431.68 LPs SI G@inloa) 1B Gho\el ae ete ee 3,000.00 AVES {S190i8 TSEC | ep ete Cee ee 1,897.25 itacomevor Audubon Pund.............0.005. 250.99 ineomeror Publication Fund.............2.<+ BBR 95) iiecomeor Permanent Fund.........6........ 1,586.31 WeetlesteMMEMCOMICS 8 ello. ok a ee ee els hele e us 1,665.61 PRGUMAMBP TINCT S65 esas we hk doe eee ees 4.00 $21,159.61 REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN. The Library has received during the past year, by gift and exchange, 299 Volumes, 233 Pamphlets and 1613 Numbers, which have been duly acknowledged, accessioned, and placed on the shelves for reference. The Library is open to the public on each week-day from 9.30 A.M. to 5 P.M. The books have been frequently consulted and it is desired that their use shall be continued. R. W. Tower, Librarian. REPORT OF THE EDITOR. New York, Dec. 18, 1905. During the year 1905 the Academy printed and issued the following publications: ANNALS—Vol. XVI, Part 1, containing four papers as follows: Louis I. Dublin, ‘History of Germ Cells in Pedicellina ameri- cana Leidy;” D. S. Martin, ‘“H. Carrington Bolton;” J. J. Stevenson, ‘‘The Jurassic Coals of Spitzbergen;” J. Howard Wilson, ‘‘Recent Journeys among Localities Famous for Prehistoric Man.”’ This part was issued in March and con- sisted of ninety-seven pages, three plates and two text figures. Vol. XVI, Part 2, which contained papers by Waldemar ~~ 632 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE Jochelson, entitled, ‘‘Grammar of the Yukaghir Language;” by Maurice Fishberg, “‘Materials for the Physical Anthropology of the Eastern European Jews;”’ and the records of the meetings of the Academy for the year 1904. This part was issued in August and contained 290 pages, one plate, and thirteen text figures. Total number of pages of the Annals issued during the year was thus 387. Memoirs.—Vol. II, Part 4, consisting of an elaborate research paper by W. E. Kellicott entitled, ‘“‘The Development of the Vascular and Respiratory Systems of Ceratodus.” This con- sisted of 114 pages, five plates, two of which were printed in colors, and 106 text figures. A portion of the expense of print- ing this Memoir was borne by the Audubon Fund. AnnaLts.—Vol. XVI, Part 3, is now in press and should be issued soon after the beginning of the year. CHARLES LANE Poor, Editor. THE ANNUAL ADDRESS OF THE PRESIDENT. THe PROBLEM OF THE METALLIFEROUS VEINS. By James Furman Kemp. The rush of the gold-seekers to California in 1849 and the quickly following one to Australia in 1851 were notable migra- tions in search of the yellow metal, but they were not the first in the history of our race. There is, indeed, no reason to sup- pose that,in the past, mining excitements were limited even to the historical period; on the contrary the legends of the golden fleece and of the golden apples of the Hesperides prob- ably describe in poetic garb two of the early expeditions, and long before either, we can well imagine primitive man hurrying to new diggings in order to enlarge his scanty stock of metals. Among the influences which have led to the exploration and settlement of new lands, the desire to find and acquire gold and silver has been one of the most important, and as a means of introducing thousands of vigorous settlers, of their own volition, into uninhabited or uncivilized regions there is no agent which NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 633 compares with it. In this connection it may be also remarked that there is no more interesting chapter in the history of civil- ization than that which concerns itself with the use of the met- als and with the development of methods for their extraction from their ores. Primitive man was naturally limited to those which he found in the native state. T hey are but few, viz., gold in wide but sparse distribution in gravels; copper in occa- sional masses along the outcrops of veins, in which far the greater part of the metal is combined with oxygen or sulphur; copper again, in porous rocks, as in the altogether exceptional case of the Lake Superior mines; iron in an occasional meteorite; which, if its fall had been observed, was considered to be the image of a god, descended from the skies;! silver in occasional nuggets with the more common ones of gold; and possibly a rare bit of platinum. Besides these no other metal can have been known, because all the rest and all of those mentioned, when locked up in their ores, give in the physical properties of the latter but the slightest suggestion of their presence. Chance discoveries must have first revealed the possibilities of producing iron from its ore—really a very simple process when small quantities are involved; of making bronze from the ores of copper and tin; of making brass with the ores of copper and zinc; of reducing copper and lead from their natural compounds; and of freeing silver from its chief associate, lead. All of these processes were extensively practised under the Chinese, Phenicians, Greeks, Romans and other ancient peoples. As the need of weapons in war, the advantages of metallic currency, and the want of household utensils became felt, and as the minerals which yield the metals became recognized as such, the art of mining grew to be something more than the digging and washing of gravels; and in the long course of time developed into its present stage as one of the most difficult branches of engineering. Chemistry raised metallurgical pro- cesses from the art of obtaining some of a metal from its ore, to the art of obtaining almost all of it and of accounting for what escaped. It is, in fact, in this scientific accounting for every- 1As in the case of Diana of the Ephesians and the deity of the Carthaginians. 634 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE thing that modern processes chiefly differ from those of the ancients. Of all the metals the most important which minister to the needs of daily life are the following, ranged as nearly as possible _ in the order of their usefulness: Iron, copper, lead, zinc, silver, gold, tin, aluminum, nickel, platinum, manganese, chromium, quicksilver, antimony, arsenic, and cobalt. The others are of very minor importance, although often indispensable for cer- tain restricted uses. The manner of occurrence of these metals in the earth, and their amount in ores which admit of practicable working, are fundamental facts in all our industrial development, and some accurate knowledge of them ought to be a part of the intellectual equipment of every well-educated man. The matter may well appeal to Americans, since the United States have developed within a few years into the foremost producer of iron, copper lead, coal, and until recent years in gold and silver; but with regard to gold, they have of late alternated in the leadership with the Transvaal and Australia, and in silver are now second to Mexico. Despite the enormous product of food-stuffs, American mining developments are of the same order of magnitude; and the mineral resources of the country have proved to be one of the richest possessions of its people. We may best gain a proper conception of the problem of the metalliferous veins if we state at the outset the gross composi- tion of the outer portion of the globe, so far as geologists have been able to express it by grouping analyses of rocks. We may then note among the elements mentioned such of the metals as have just been cited and may remark the rarity of the others; we may next set forth the necessary percentages of each metal which make a deposit an ore, that is, make it rich enough for profitable working. By comparison we can grasp in a general way the amount of concentration which must be accomplished by the geological agents in order to collect from a naturally lean distribution in rocks enough of a given metal to produce a deposit of ore; and can then naturally pass to a brief discus- sion and description of those agents and their operations. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES . 635 If the general composition of the crust of the earth is cal- _ culated as closely as possible on the basis of known chemical analyses, the following table results, which has been compiled _ by Dr. F. W. Clarke, of Washington, chief chemist of the U. S. Geological Survey.! SERVES 4d 616.4.6.5 6 Cian a ea 47.13 SWNCOMle ooo RES ABAD ORE eae ae ea 27.89 A i GHSRUEARONESY 6 ihe GREE eee ee ean ee She IEG, « oe 2 0 Gate CI Le ete oa 4.71 SAIICTUNTE 2/56 ba: BAS. Benoa en a Bo Fe Mere SHUM Ne ele na shea wei s aoe hess 2.64 2 DUSTY 34 edie sia Samet nee ee 2 5 ‘SOGUIGHAM. 6, 5 6/2) ee SNe ECT FERS een 2.68 TALI 5 Goa phy ee a oe a aN 5 8A TEL SACIAOINOIRS & 6) cb cleat ch ata cae er de 3 9 SETIDOIM ow ded oid wren Ot ECE BAe ee nee a NE en 522 I HIOS/BIROWT CIS: Sake Senne ene nn rea .09 Mi EERBEAO SS oer age Cane ee RA ae ae a .07 1S CULDIGHUSE. <3 one) area one ae ee .06 JES sTIYOOM. 2 3 Godlee atc eae ie cee a eae .04 \SIOSPOATEUNTT > ch Sere ea a A te oO sO INNCIREI oo cb AWS gS EL ee a en sor SET ODI REIT YG ae glean ae rected re Pa eanene ieee ol J AKElGHKBETA, 5A 1 olde a lt ae arta eee ee a Ee ROW Witlogincmemyee ey marc ht Gh Ras Gea t w ar .or PINSOVENES & 2.094 za ROR Ceege NS nOe et eee eo a or “TSOUBBULS. 6 9 SP ey Cane ee 100.00 Elements less than .or per cent. are not considered abundant enough to affect the total, and equally exact data regarding them are not accessible. Among those given only the following appear which are metals of importance as such in everyday life: aluminum 8.13, iron 4.71, manganese .o7, chromium .or, and nickel .o1. They rank respectively, in the table, third, fourth, thirteenth, sixteenth and seventeenth. Of the five, iron is the only one of marked prominence. No one of the remaining four is comparable in usefulness with at least five other metals which are not mentioned, viz., copper, lead, zinc, silver, and gold. An endeavor has been made by at least one investigator, Professor J. H. L. Vogt, of Christiania, to establish some quan- titative expression for these other metals. His estimates are as follows: 1 Bulletin 148, p. 13. 2 Zeitschrift fur prak. Geologie, 1898, 324. 636 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE Copper, percentage beyond the fourth or fifth place of decimals, | that is in the hundred thousandths or millionths of one per cent. Lead and zinc, percentages in the fifth place of decimals, or in the hundred thousandths of one per cent. Silver, percentage two decimal places beyond copper—or in the ten millionths to the hundred millionths of one per cent., or the ten thousandth to the hundred thousandth of an ounce to the ton. Gold, percentage one tenth as much as silver. Tin, percentage in the fourth or fifth decimal place, that is, in the ten thousandths or hundred thousandths of one per cent. These figures, inconceivably small as they are, convey some idea of the rarity of these metals as constituents on the average of the outer six or eight miles of the earth’s crust. But they are locally more abundant in particular masses of eruptive rocks which are associated with ore deposits. In the following tabulation I have endeavored to bring together a number of determinations which have been made in connection with investigations of American mining districts. In a general way they give a fair idea of the metallic contents of certain eruptive rocks from which were taken samples as little as possible open to the suspicion that they had been enriched by the same processes which had produced the neigh- boring ore-bodies. Copper, .009 Missouri. 1 Lead, .OOII Colorado.2 Lead, .008 Eureka, Nev. Lead, 004 Missouri.! Zinc, .0048 Leadville, Colo.4 Zine, .009 Missouri.! Silver, .00007 Leadville, Colo.s Silver, 00016 Eureka, Nev.3 Silver, 00016 Rosita, Colo.¢ Gold, .00002 Eureka, Nev.3 Gold, .00004 Owyhee County, Id.7 1 Average of eight eruptives from Missouri, Anal. by J. D. Robertson. Report on Lead and Zinc, Mo. Geol. Surv., II., 479. 2 Average of six different rocks, embracing eighteen assays; S. F. Emmons, Monograph XII., U. S. Geol. Surv., 591. . 3 One rock, a quartz porphyry, not certain the rock was not enriched. J. D. Curtis, U. S. Geol. Surv., Mono. VII., 136. 4 Same reference as under 6. The zinc was determined in but two samples. 5 Same reference as under 6, but p. 594. 6S. F. Emmons, XVII. Ann. Rep. U.S. Geol. Survey, Part II., p. 472. 7 A. Simundi in Tenth Census, XIJII., 54. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 637 In order to come-within the possible limits of profitable and successful treatment the ores of the more important metals should have at least the following percentages, but that we may _ grasp the relations correctly, it must be appreciated that local conditions affect the limits. Thus in a remote situation and with high charges for transportation an ore may be outside profitable treatment although it may contain several times the percentages of those more favorably situated. Iron ores in particular which are distant from centres of population are valueless unless cheap transportation on a very large scale can be developed, while gold in an almost inacessible region, like the Klondike, may yield a rich reward, even when in quan- tities which, if expressed in percentages, are almost inappreciable. The nature of the ore is also a factor of prime importance. Some compounds yield the metals readily and cheaply, while others, which in the case of the precious metals are often called base ores, require complicated and it may be expensive metal- lurgical treatment. The association of metals is likewise of the highest importance. Copper or lead, for example, greatly facilitate the extraction of gold and silver, whereas zinc in large quantities is a hindrance. Conditions also change. An ore which may have been valueless in early days may prove a rich source of profit in later years and under improved condi- tions. For instance, from 1870 for over twenty-five years Bingham Canyon in Utah yielded lead-silver ores and minor deposits of gold. It was known that in some mines low-grade and base ores of copper and gold existed, but the fact was carefully concealed and in at least one instance the shaft into them was filled up, lest a general knowledge of the fact should unfavorably affect the value of the property. To-day, however, these ores are eagerly sought and their extraction and treatment in thousands of tons daily are paying good returns on very large capitalization. Another factor is the expense of extraction. If simple and inexpensive methods are possible, the area of profitable treatment is greatly widened. Thus gold may need little else than a stream of water or even a blast of air, whereas iron and copper require huge furnaces and vast supplies of coke and fluxes. 638 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE Iron ores are of little value in any part of the world un- less they contain a minimum of 35 per cent. iron when they enter the furnace, but if they are distributed in amounts of from ro to 20 per cent., in extensive masses of loose or easily — crushed rock in such condition that they can be cheaply con- centrated up to rich percentages, they may be profitably treated and a product with 50 per cent. iron or higher be sent to the furnaces. Nevertheless, speaking for the civilized world at large, it holds true that as an iron ore enters the furnace it cannot have less than 35 per cent., and in America with our _tich and pure deposits on Lake Superior two thirds of our sup- ply ranges from 60 to 65 per cent. As regards copper, a minimum working percentage, amid favorable conditions and with enormous quantities, is usually about three per cent., but in the altogether exceptional deposits of the native metal in the Lake Superior region, copper-rock as low as three fourths of one per cent. has been profitably treated. This or any similar result could only be accomplished with exceptionally efficient management and with a copper rock such as is practically only known on Lake Superior. With the usual type of ore, not enriched by gold or silver, two per cent. is the extreme, and in remote localities from 5 to Io per cent. may sometimes be too poor. In southeast Missouri, lead ores are profitably mined which have from 5 to 10 per cent., lead, but they are concentrated to 65 or 70 per cent. before going to the furnace. Zinc ores at the furnace ought not to yield less than 25 or 30 per cent., and when concentrated or selected they range up to 60 per cent. The precious metals are expressed in troy ounces to the ton avoirdupois. A troy ounce in a ton is one three-hundredth of one per cent., and the amount is, therefore, very small when stated in percentages. If it be appreciated that in round numbers silver is now worth fifty to sixty cents an ounce, and gold, twenty dollars, some grasp may be had of values. Silver rarely occurs by itself. On the contrary it is obtained in asso- ciation with lead and copper and the ores are, as a rule, treated primarily for these base metals and then from the latter the NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 639 precious metals are later separated. In the base ores there ought to be enough silver to yield a minimum of five dollars or ten ounces in the resulting ton of copper in order to afford enough to pay for separation. Now in a five per cent. ore of copper we have a concentration of twenty tons of ore to yield one ton of pig, or more correctly stated, so as to allow for losses, twenty- one tons to one. We must, therefore, have at least ten ounces of silver in the twenty-one tons, which implies a minimum of about one half ounce per ton. Smelters will only pay a miner for the silver if he has over one half ounce per ton in a copper ore. Ina pig of lead, usually called base bullion, it is necessary for profitable extraction to have fifteen ounces of silver. For smelting a lead ore we must possess at least ten per cent. lead and may have seventy. It is, therefore, obvious that from two to twenty ounces silver must be present in the ton of lead ore. The common ranges are ten to fifty ounces or one thirtieth to one sixth of one per cent. Gold is so cheaply extracted that it may be profitably obtained under favorable circumstances down to one tenth of an ounce in the ton, but the run of ores is from a fourth ounce, or five dollars, to an ounce, or twenty dollars. Ores of course sometimes reach a number of ounces. In copper or lead ores even a twentieth of an ounce may be an object, and in favorably situated gravels to which the hydraulic method may be applied, even as little as seven to ten cents in the cubic yard may be recovered, or some such value as a two-hundredth to a three-hundredth of an ounce per ton. The tin ores as smelted contain about 70 per cent., but they are all concentrated either by washing gravels in which the percentage is one or less, or else by mining, crushing, and dressing ore in which it ranges from 1.5 to 3 per cent. The tin-bearing gravels represent a concentration from much leaner dissemination in the parent veins and granite. Aluminum ores yield as sold about 30 per cent. of the metal. This is an enrichment as compared with the rocks, though not so striking a one as in the case of other metals. But the great change necessary in aluminum is in the method of combination. It is so tightly locked up in silicates in the rocks as to preclude direct extraction by any known method. alge! 640 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE Nickel needs to be present in amounts of several per cent., say two to five, and occurs either alone or with copper. Cobalt is always with it in small amounts. Platinum occurs in exceed- ingly small percentages. It is almost all obtained from gravels — in Russia, and the gravels yielded in 1899 according to C. W. — Purington about forty cents to the yard, platinum being quoted ~ in that year at $15 to $18 per ounce. There was, therefore, in the gravels about one fortieth ounce in the yard, or one sixtieth in a ton, or about 5.5 hundred thousandths of a per cent, Platinum in some rocks has been found in amounts of one twentieth to one half ounce, or from 16 hundred.thousandths to 16 ten thousandths of one per cent., but they are rare and peculiar types. In order to be salable manganese ores of themselves must yield about 50 per cent., but if iron is also present they may be as low as 4o. Chromium has but one ore, and it must contain about 40 per cent. Of antimony, arsenic, and cobalt it is hardly possible to speak, since, except perhaps in the case of the first, they are unimportant by-products in the metallurgy of other ores. In summary it may be stated that in the ores the metals must be present in the following amounts: Percentage in Ores. Ounces to Ton. Percentage in Earth’s Crust. Tron, 35-65 A sop Copper, 2-10 .0000X Lead, 7-50 .0000X Zinc, 25—60 .0000X Silver, 1/12-1/150 2-25 .000000.X, Gold, 1/300-1/6j000 1/20—-1 .0000000X Tin, 1-3 .000X—.0000.X Aluminum, 30 8.13 Nickel, 2-5 Ott Manganese, 50 .07 Chromium, 40 OM We now have before us some fundamental conceptions from which as a point of departure we may set out upon the real discussion of the subject. We understand the gross composition of the outer earth; we have some idea of the quantitative distri- bution of the metals in the rocks, especially in the richer in- stances; finally we have seen the extent to which they must NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 641 _ be concentrated in order that they may be objects of mining. _ The next step is to establish first the agent or solvent which ean effect the collection of the sparsely distributed metals, and second the places where the precipitation of them takes place. We may then inquire more particularly into the source of the agent and the methods of its operation. In order to do this in the time at command I must remorselessly focus attention on the larger and essential features, resolutely avoiding every side issue or minor point, however inviting. The one solvent which is sufficiently abundant is water, and practically all observers are agreed that for the vast majority of ore deposits it has been the vehicle of concentration. Of course it need not operate alone. On the contrary easily dissolved and ever-present materials, like alkalies, may and undoubtedly do increase its efficiency. It does not operate necessarily as cold water. On the contrary, we all know that the earth grows hotter as we go down, so that descending waters, could not go far without feeling this influence. Volcanoes, too, indicate to us that there are localities where heat is developed in enormous amounts and not far below the surface. There is, therefore, no lack of heat, and we need only be familiar with the Western country to know that there is no lack of hot springs when we take a comprehensive view. As solvents, hot waters are sO incomparably superior to cold waters that they appeal to us strongly. We may, therefore, take it as well established that water is the vehicle. The chemical compounds which constitute the ores naturally differ widely in solubility, and no sweeping statements can be made regarding them. Iron, for example, yields very soluble salts and is widely, one might almost say universally, distributed in ordinary waters. Its ores are compounds of the metal with oxygen and in this respect it differs from nearly all others, which are mostly combined with sulphur. Although almost all of them have oxidized compounds, the latter are on the whole very subordinate con- tributors to our furnaces. ; Iron is everywhere present in the rocks, and when exposed to the natural reagents it is one of their most vulnerable elements. It, therefore, presents few difficulties in the way of solution 41 642 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE and concentration by waters which circulate on or near the surface and which perform their reactions under our eyes. . The compounds of copper, lead, zinc, silver, nickel, cobalt, — quicksilver, antimony, and arsenic with sulphur present more ~ difficult problems and ones into whose chemistry it is impossible to enter here in any thorough way; but in general it may be said that the solutions were probably hot, that they were in some cases alkaline, in others acid, and that the pressure under which they took up the metals in the depths has been an impor- tant factor in the process. The loss of heat and pressure as they rose toward the surface no doubt aided in an important way in the result. The first condition for the production of an ore-deposit is a waterway. It may be a small crack, or a large fracture, or a porous stratum, but in some such formit must exist. Natur- ally porous rock affords the simplest case, and provides an easily understood place of precipitation. For example, in the decade of the seventies rather large mines at Silver Reef in southern Utah were based upon an open-textured sandstone into which, and along certain lines, silver-bearing solutions had entered. Wherever they met a fossil leaf or an old stick of wood which had been buried in the rock the dissolved silver was precipitated as sulphide or chloride. Sometimes for no apparent reason the solutions impregnated the rock with ore, but the ore seems to follow along certain lines of fracturing. Again at Silver Cliff, near Rosita in central Colorado, the silver solutions had evidently at one time soaked through a bed of porous volcanic ash, and had impregnated it with ore, which while it lasted was quarried out like so much rock. In the copper district of Keweenaw Point on Lake Superior, the copper-bearing solu- tions have penetrated in some places an old gravel bed and impregnated it with copper; in other places they have passed along certain courses in vesicular lava flows, and have yielded up to the cavities scales and shoots of native copper. It has happened at times that the ore-bearing solutions, rising through some crevice, have met a stratum charged with lime, and having spread sideways have apparently been robbed of their, metals: because the lime precipitated the valuable NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 643 minerals. In the Black Hills of South Dakota there are sand- stones with beds of calcareous mud rocks in them. Solutions bringing gold have come up through insignificant-looking crevices called “‘verticals’” and have impregnated these mud rocks with long shoots of valuable gold ores. In prospecting in a promising locality the miner, knowing the systematic arrange- ment of the verticals, and having found the lime-shales, drifts along in them, following a crevice in the hope of breaking into ore. The very extended and productive shoots of lead-silver ores at Leadville, Colo., which have been vigorously and con- tinuously mined since 1877, are found in limestone and usually just underneath sheets of a relatively impervious eruptive rock. They run for long distances and suggest uprising solutions which followed along beneath the eruptive, perhaps checked by it, so that they have replaced the limestone with ore. The limestone must have been a vigorous precipitant of the metallic minerals. The fracture itself up through which the waters rise may be of considerable size and thus furnish a resting-place for the ore and gangue, as the associated barren mineral is called. A deposit then results which affords a typical fissure vein. The commonest filling is quartz, but at times a large variety of minerals may be present and sometimes in beautifully sym- metrical arrangement. In the latter case the uprising waters have first coated each wall with a layer. They have then changed in composition and have deposited a later and different one, and so on until the crack has become filled. Often cavities are left at the centre or sides and are lined with beautiful and shining crystals, which flash and sparkle in the rays of a lamp, like so many gems. There are quartz veins in California which are mined for gold and which seem to have filled clean-cut crevices, wall to wall, for several feet across. More often there is evidence of decided chemical action upon the walls, which may be impregnated with the ore and gangue for some distance away from the fissure. As the source of supply is left, however, the impregnation becomes less and less rich, and finally fades out into barren wall-rock. The enrichment of the walls varies also from point to point, since where the rock is tight the solu- 644 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE tions can not spread laterally, but where it is open the impregna- tion may be extensive. The miner has, therefore, to allow for swells and pinches in his ore. Of even greater significance than the lateral enrichment is the peculiar arrangement of the valuable ore in a vein that may itself be continuous for long distances although in most places too barren for mining. Cases are, indeed, known in which profitable vein matter has been taken out continuously for perhaps a mile along the strike, but they are relatively rare. The usual experience reveals the ore running diagonally down in the vein filling, and more often than not following the polished grooves in the walls which are called slickensides, and which indi- cate the direction taken by one wall when it moved on the other during the formation of the fracture. The rich places may terminate in depth as well, and again may be repeated, but they must be anticipated, and for them allowance must be made in any mining operation. Ores, therefore, gather along subterranean water-ways. They may fill clean-cut fissures, wall to wall; they may impreg- nate porous wall-rocks on either side; they may even entirely re- place soluble rocks like limestones. We may now raise the question as to the source of the water which accomplishes these results and the further question as to the cause of its circulations. The nature of the underground waters which are instrumental in filling the veins presents one of the most interesting, if not the most interesting, phase of the problem and one upon which attention has been especially concentrated in later years. The crucial point of the discussion relates to the relative importance of the two kinds of ground-waters, the magmatic, or those from the molten igneous rocks, and the meteoric, or those derived from the rains. The magmatic waters are not phenomena of the daily life and observation of the great majority of civilized peoples, and for this reason they have not received the attention that otherwise would have fallen to their share. Relatively few geologists have the opportunity to view volcanoes in active eruption, and have but disproportionate conceptions of the clouds and clouds of watery vapor which they emit. The . ' 4 NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 645 enormous volume has, however, been brought home to us in recent years, with great force, by the outbreak of Mont Pelé, and we of this academy, thanks to the efforts of our fellow-member, Dr. E. O. Hovey of the American Museum of Natural History, have had them placed very vividly before us. It is on the whole not surprising that to the meteoric waters most observers in the past have turned for the chief, if not the only, agent. I will, therefore, first present, as fully as the time admits and as fairly as I may, this older view which still has perhaps the larger number of adherents. Except in the arid districts rain falls more or less copiously upon the surface of the earth. The largest portion of it runs off in the rivers; the smallest portion evaporates while on the surface, and the intermediate part sinks into the ground, urged on by gravity, and joins the ground-waters. Where crevices of considerable cross-section exist, they conduct the water below in relatively large quantity. Shattered or porous rock will do the same, and we know that open-textured sandstones dipping down from their outcrops and flattening in depth lead water to artesian reservoirs in vast quantity. As passages and crevices grow smaller, the friction on the walls increases and the water moves with greater and greater difficulty. When the passage grows very small, movement practically ceases. The flow of water through pipes is a very old matter of investi- gation, and all engineers who deal with problems of water supply for cities or with the circulation of water for any of its countless applications in daily life must be familiar with its laws. Friction is such an important factor that only by the larger natural crevices can the meteoric waters move downward in any important quantity or very appreciable velocity. They do sink, of course, and come to comparative rest at greater or less distance from the surface and yield the supplies of under- ground water upon which we draw. The section of the rocks which stands between the surface and the ground-water is the arena of active change and is that part of the earth’s crust in which the meteoric waters exercise their greatest effect. Rocks within this zone are in constant process of decay and disintegration. Oxidation, involving 646 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE the production of sulphuric acid from the natural metallic sulphides, is actively in progress. Carbonic acid enters also with the meteoric waters. The rocks are open in texture and favorably situated for maximum change. From this zone we can well imagine that all the finely divided metallic par- ticles which are widely and sparsely distributed in the rocks go into solution and tend to migrate downward into the quiet and relatively motionless ground-water. If the acid solutions escape the precipitating action of some alkaline reagent such as limestone they may even reach the ground-waters, and their dissolved burdens may be contributed to this reservoir, but the greater portion seems to be deposited at the level of the ground-water itself or at moderate distances below it. Impressed by these phenomena, which present a true cause of solution, and influenced by their familiar and everyday char- acter, we may build up on the basis of them a general concep- tion of the source of the metallic minerals dissolved in those aqueous solutions which are recognized by all to be the agents for the filling of the veins. Let us now focus attention on the ground-water. This saturates the rocks, fills the crevices, and forces the miner who sinks his shaft to pump, much against his natural inclination. The vast majority of mines are of no great depth, and the natural conclusion of our earlier observers, based on this expe- rience, has been that the ground-waters extend downward, saturating the strata of the earth to the limit of possible cavi- ties, distances which vary from 1,000 to more than 30,000 feet. To this must be added another familiar phenomenon. The interior temperature of the earth increases at a fairly definite ratio of about one degree Fahrenheit for each 60-100 feet of descent. In round numbers, if we start with a place of the climatic conditions of New York—that is, with a mean annual temperature of about 51°, we should on descending 10,000 feet below the surface find a temperature of about 212°, and if we go still deeper it would be still greater. Of course, under the burden of the overlying column of water, the actual boiling points for the several depths would be greater, and it is a question whether the increase of temperature would : | | : aha NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 647 Overcome the increase of pressure and the consequent rise of the boiling point, so as to convert this water into steam, cause great increase in its elasticity, decrease in its specific gravity, and thereby promote circulations. At all events, the rise in temperature would cause expansion of the liquid, would disturb equilibrium, and to this degree would promote circulations. There is one other possible motive power. The meteoric waters enter the rocky strata of the globe at elevated points, sink downward, meet the ground-water at altitudes above the neighboring valleys, and establish thereby what we call head. In consequence they often yield springs. If we imagine the head to be effective to considerable depths we have again the deep-seated waters under pressure, which after their long and devious journey through the rocks may cause them to rise elsewhere as springs. The head may in small degree be aided by the expansion of the uprising heated column whose specific gravity is thereby lowered as compared with the descending colder column. May we now draw all these facts and supposed or assumed phenomena into one whole? The descending meteoric waters become charged with dis- solved earthy and metallic minerals in their downward, their deep-seated lateral, and perhaps also at the beginning of their heated uprising journey. They are urged on by the head of the longer and colder descending column and by the interior heat. They gather together from many smaller channels. into larger issuing trunk channels. They rise from regions of heat and pressure which favor solution, into colder regions of precipitation and crystallization. They deposit in these upper zones their burden of dissolved metallic and earthy miner- als and yield thus the veins from which the miner draws his ore. This conception is based on phenomena of which the greater part are the results of everyday experience. It is attractive, reasonable, and is on the whole the one which has been most trusted in the past. Doubtless it has the widest circle of adher- ents to-day. It is, however, open to certain grave objections which are gaining slow but certain support. ; 648 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE The conception of the extent of the ground-water in depth, for example, is flatly opposed to our experience in those hith- — erto few but yearly increasing deep mines which go below 1,500 Or 2,000 feet. Wherever deep shafts are located in regions other than those of expiring but not dead volcanic action, they have passed through the ground-water, and if this is carefully impounded in the upper levels of the mines, and not allowed to follow the workings downward, it is found that there is not only less and less water but that the deep levels are often dry and dusty. Along this line of investigation, Mr. John W. Finch, recently the State Geologist of Colorado, has reached the con- clusion after wide experience with deep mines that the ground- waters are limited, in the usual experience, to about 1,000 feet. from the surface and that only the upper layer of this is in motion and available for springs. Artesian wells do extend in many cases to depths much greater than this and bring supplies of water to the surface, but their very existence implies waters impounded and in a state of rest. To this objection that the ground-waters are shallow it has been replied that when the veins were being formed the rocks were open-textured and admitted of circulation, but subsequently the cavities and waterways became plugged by the deposition of minerals by a process technically called cementation and, the supply being cut off, they now appear dry. There must, however, in order to make the “‘head”’ effective have once been a continuous column of water which introduced the mate- rials for cementation. It is at least difficult to understand how a process which could only progress by the introduction of material in very dilute solution should by the agency of crystallization drive out the only means of its production. Some residue of water must necessarily remain locked up in the partially cemented rock. This residue we, of course, do not find where rocks are dry and drifts are dusty. In many cases also, where deep cross-cuts have penetrated the fresh wall-rock of mines, cementation if present has been so slight as to escape detection. If we once admit that this conclusion is well based, it removes Pe Ae ae ee ee NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 649 the very foundation from beneath the conception of the meteoric waters and tumbles the whole structure in a heap of ruins. While I would not wish to positively make so sweeping a statement as this about a question involving so many uncer- tainties, there is nevertheless a growing conviction among a not inconsiderable group of geologists that the rocky crust of the earth is much tighter and less open to the passage of descend- ing waters than has been generally believed; and that the phenomena of springs, which have so much influenced conclu- sions in the past, affect only a comparatively shallow, overlying section. Such phenomena of cementation as we see are probably in large part due to the action of water stored up by the sedi- ments when originally deposited and carried down by them with burial. Under pressure a relatively small amount of water may be an important vehicle for recrystallization. It has been assumed in the above presentation of the case of the meteoric waters that they are able to leach out of the deep-seated wall-rocks the finely disseminated particles of the metallic minerals, but the conviction has been growing in my own mind that we have been inclined to overrate the prob- ability of this action in our discussions. In the first place our knowledge of the presence of the metals in the rocks them- selves is based upon the assay of samples almost always gathered from exposures in mining districts. The rock has been sought in as fresh and unaltered a condition as possible, and endeavors have been made to guard against the possible introduction of the metallic contents by those same waters which have filled the neighboring veins. But if we admit or assume that the assay values are original in the rock, and, in case the, latter is igneous, if we believe that the metallic minerals have crystal- lized out with the other bases from the molten magma, we are yet confronted with the fact that their very presence and detec- tion in the rock shows that they have escaped leaching even though they occur in a district where underground circulations have been especially active. From the results which we have in hand it is quite as justifiable to argue that the metals in the rocks are proof against the leaching action of underground circulations as that they fall victims to it. These considera- 650 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE tions tend to restrict the activities of the meteoric waters to the vadose region as Posepny calls it, i.e., that belt of the rocks which stands between the permanent water-level and the sur- face. Within it is an active area of solution, as we have all recognized for many years, but, as previously stated, experience shows that the metals which go into solution in it strongly tend to precipitate at or not far below the water-level itself. It is of interest, however, to seek some quantitative expression of the problem, and the assays given above furnish the necessary — data. I have taken the values of the several metals which have been found by the assays of what were in most cases believed to be normal wall-rocks, selecting those of igneous nature because experience shows them to be the richest. The percentages have been turned into pounds of the metal per ton of rock; this latter value has then been recast into pounds of the most probable natural compound or mineral.in each case. I have next calculated the volume of a cube corresponding to the last weight, and by extracting its cube root have found the length of the edge of such cube. If now we assume a rock of a specific gravity of 2.70, which is a fair average value, and allow it 11 to 12 cubic feet to the ton, or say 20,000 cubic imehesiecme edge of the cube-ton will be 27.14 inches. The ratio of the edge of the cube of metallic mineral to the edge of the cube-ton of enclosing rock will give us an idea of the chance that a crack large enough to form a solution-water-way will have of inter- secting that amount of contained metallic mineral. Of course in endeavoring to establish this quantitative conception I realize that the metallic mineral is not in one cube, and that through a cube-ton of rock more than one crack passes; but I assume that the fineness of division of the metallic mineral practically keeps pace with the lessening width and close spacing of the crevices. It is also realized that the shape of the minerals is not cubical. I am convinced from microscopic study of rocks and the small size of the metallic particles that their subdivision certainly keeps pace with any conceivable solution-cracks, and that no great error is involved in the first assumption made. The sides of a cube represent three planes which intersect at NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 651 right angles and which are mathematically equivalent to any series of planes intersecting at oblique angles. Hence if we consider as cubes the subdivisions formed in our rock mass by any series of intersecting cracks, there are three sets of planes, any one of which might intersect the cube of ore. We must, therefore, multiply the ratio of probability that any single set will intersect it by three in order to have the correct expres- sion. The chance that a crack, of the width of the cubic edge of the enclosed mineral, will strike that cube is given by the ratios in the last column, which ratios I assume hold good with increasing fineness of subdivision both of metallic minerals and of cracks. © a . a Ey . . 2 3 A 'g E ae aie | g d ee Bm Ha ss & 8 ° b og 3 ra a 5 0 9 He) u & iS S} oF = + a Ss) 6) 5 ae S n o Cal s) e alee 5 2 2 5 5 3 ake a 3 3 Au Ay Ay a a 64 m4 Copper. | .o09 .18 minal = ead) eS 1/18 1/6 Galena. Lead. .OOLI O22 .025 .092 oA | Oe) |) 0/AO .008 .16 . 186 .700 . 89 0/2 a r/To .004 .08 .002 -340 oI 1/39 1/13 Zincblende. Zinc. .0048 .096 .128 .go 97 1/35 1/12 .009 .180 2 OM ne OO ey 1/21 1/7 Argentite. Silver. | .00007 | .0014 | .co16~=—_.006 18 | 1/148 | 1/49 OOO 50) 50032) ||) 0027 .O14 24 m/e || Sh//eNs) (0) Gold. .00002 | .0004 | .0004 .00005 O35 | a/eng | R/itoA .00004 | .0008 | .0008 .00130 sHeQ) | m/adioy 1 17/38 From the table it is evident that the chances vary from a maximum in the case of copper of one in six through various intermediate values to a minimum for gold of one in over one hundred. This is equivalent to saying that, with cracks whose total width bears the same relation to the width of the rock mass as is borne by the diameter of the particle of ore, the chance of crossing a particle varies from one in six to one in one hundred. Or we may say that with cracks of this spacing 652 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE from one sixth to one hundredth of the contained metallic — mineral might be leached out.! When, therefore, as is often the case in monographs upon the geology of a mining district, inferences are drawn as to the possibility of deriving the ore of a vein by the leaching of wall-rocks whose metallic contents have been proved by assay, the total available contents ought to be divided by a number from six to one hundred if the above reasoning is correct. This diminution will tend to modify in an important manner our belief in the probability of such processes as have been hitherto advocated. We may justly raise the following questions: How closely set, as a matter of fact, are the cracks which are large enough to furnish solution water-ways in the above rocks, and can we reach any definite conception regarding their distribution? Some quantitative idea of the relations may be obtained from the tests of the recorded absorptive capacity of the igneous rocks which are employed as building stone. G. P. Merrill in his valuable work on Stones for Building and Decoration, pp. 459, has given these values for thirty-three granites and four diabases and gabbros. They vary for the granites from a maximum of one twentieth to a minimum of one seven hundred and fourth. I have averaged them all and have obtained one two hundred and thirty-seventh asthe result. That is, if we take a cubic inch of granite and thoroughly dry it, it will absorb water up to one two hundred and thirty-seventh of its weight. The volume of this water indicates the open spaces or voids in the stone. The average of the specific gravities of the thirty-three granites is 2.647. If, by the aid of this value, we turn our weight of water into volume we find that its volume is one ninetieth that of the rock. For the four diabases and gabbros, similarly treated, the ratio of absorption is one three hundred and tenth; the specific gravity is 2.776 and the ratio of volume one one hundred and tenth. We can express all this more intelligibly by saying — 1 With regard to the flow of waters through crevices and the relation of the flow to varying diameters or widths, a very lucid statement will be found in President C. R. Van Hise’s valuable paper in the Transactions of the American Institute of Mining Engineers, XXX, 41, and in his monograph on Metamorphism. = NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 653 that, if we assume a cube of granite and if we combine all its cavities into one crack passing through it, parallel to one of its sides, the width of the crack will be to the edge of the cube as 1 to go. In the diabases and gabbros, similarly treated, the ratio will be 1 to rr0. These values are very nearly the same as the average of the ratios of the edges of the cubes of rock and ore given in the table on p. 226, it being xz to 104. We may conclude, therefore, that in so far as we can check the previous conclusion by experimental data it is not far from the truth. It may be stated that the porphyritic igneous rocks which have furnished nearly all the samples for the above analyses are as a tule extremely dense, and that their absorptive capacity is more nearly that of the compact granites than the open- textured ones. It is highly improbable that underground water circulates through these rocks to any appreciable degree except along cracks which have been produced in the mechanical way either by contraction in cooling and crystallizing, or by faulting and earth movements. The cracks from faulting afte very limited in extent and in the greater number of our mining districts they affect but narrow belts, small fractions of the total. Of the cracks from cooling and crystallizing those of us who have seen rock faces in cross-cuts and drifts under- ground, where excavations have been driven away from the veins proper, can form some idea, if we eliminate the shattering due to blasting. My own impression is that in rocks a thousand feet or so below the surface such cracks are rather widely spaced, and that, when checked in a general way by the ratios just given, these rocks are decidedly unfavorable materials from which the slowly moving meteoric ground-waters (if such exist) may extract such limited and finely distributed contents of the metals. I have also endeavored to check the conclusions by the recorded experience in cyaniding gold ores in which fine crushing is so important, and I can not resist the conviction that we have been inclined to believe the leaching of compact and subterranean masses of rock a much easier and more probable process than the attainable data warrant. 654 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE As soon, however, as we deal with the open-textured frag- — mental sediments and volcanic tuffs and breccias the permea- — bility is so enhanced as to make their leaching a comparatively simple matter. Yet, so far as the available data go, they are poor in the metals or else are open to the suspicion of secondary impregnation. They certainly have been seldom, if ever, selected by students of mining regions as the probable source of the metals in the veins. Should the above objections to the efficiency of the meteoric waters seem to be well established, or at least to have weight, it follows that the arena where they are most, if not chiefly, effective is the vadose region, between the surface and the level of the ground-water. Undoubtedly from this section they take - the metals into solution and carry them down. But itis equally true that they lose a large part of this burden, especially in the case of copper, lead, and zinc, at or near the level of the ground- water and are particularly efficient in the secondary enrichment of already formed but comparatively lean ore-bodies. Let us now turn to the magmatic waters. That the floods of lava which reach the surface are heavily charged with them, there is no doubt. So heavily charged are they that Professor Edouard Suess, of Vienna, and our fellow-member Professor Robert T. Hill, of New York, have seen reason for the conclu- sion that even the oceanic waters have in the earlier stages of the earth’s history been derived from volcanoes rather than, in accordance with the old belief, volcanoes derive their steam from downward percolating sea-water. From vents like Mont Pelée, which in periods of explosive outbreaks yield no molten lava, the vapors rise in such volume that cubic miles become our standards of measurement. There is no reason to believe that many of the igneous rocks which do not reach the surface are any less rich, and when they rise so near to the upper world that their emissions may attain the surface, we must assign to the resulting waters a very important part in the underground economy. This general question has attracted more attention in Europe’ in recent years as regards hot springs than in America. So many health resorts and watering places are located upon them NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 655 that they are very important foundations of local institutions and profitable enterprises. Professor Suess, whom I have earlier cited, delivered an address a few years ago at an anni- versary celebration in Carlsbad, Bohemia, in which he stated that Rosiwal, who had studied the Carlsbad district, could not detect any agreement between the run of the rainfall and the outflow of the springs, and that both the unvarying composition and amount through wet seasons and dry were opposed to a meteoric source. Water, therefore, from subterranean igneous rocks, well known to exist in the locality, was believed to be the source of the springs. The same general line of investigation has led Dr. Rudolf Delkeskamp, of Giessen, and other observers to similar conclusions for additional springs, so that magmatic waters have assumed a prominence in this respect which leaves little doubt as to their actual development and importance. All familiar with Western and Southwestern mining regions know, as a matter of experience, that the metalliferous veins are almost always associated with intrusive rocks, and that in very many cases the period of ore formation can be shown to have followed hard upon the entrance of the eruptive. The conclu- sion has, therefore, been natural and inevitable that the mag- _ matic waters have been, if not the sole vehicle of introduction, yet the preponderating one. With regard to their emission from the cooling and crystal- lizing mass of molten material we are not, perhaps, entirely clear or well established in our thought. So long as the mass is at high temperatures the water is potentially present as dissociated hydrogen and oxygen. We are not well informed as to just what is the chemical behavior of these gases with regard to the elements of the metallic minerals. Hydrochloric acid gas is certainly a widely distributed associate. If, as seems probable, these gases can serve, alone or with other elements, as vehicles for the removal of the constituents of the ores and the gangue, the possibilities of ubiquitous egress are best while the igneous rock is entirely or largely molten. In part even the pheno- mena of crystallization of the rock-forming minerals themselves may be occasioned by the loss of the dissolved gases. Through molten and still fluid rock the gases might bubble outward if 656 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE the pressure were insufficient to restrain them and would, were their chemical powers sufficient, have opportunity to take up even sparsely distributed metals. On the other hand if their emission, as seems more provable, — is in largest part a function of the stage of solidification and takes place gradually while the mass is congealing, or soon ~ thereafter, then they must depart along crevices and openings © whose ratio to the entire mass would be similar to those given above. They might have, and probably do have, an enhanced ability to dissolve out in a searching and thorough manner the finely distributed metallic particles as compared with relatively cold meteoric waters which might later permeate the rock; but as regards the problem of leaching, the general relations of crevices to mass are much the same for both, and it holds also true that the discovery of the metals by assay of igneous rocks proves that all the original contents have not been taken, by either process. We may, however, consider an igneous mass of rock as the source of the water even if not of the ores’and gangue, and then we have a well-established reservoir for this solvent in a highly heated condition and at the necessary depths within the earth. Both from its parent mass and from the overlying rocks traversed by it, it may take the metals and gangue. In the upward and especially in the closing journey, meteoric waters may mingle with the magmatic, and as temperatures and pressures fall, the precipitation of dissolved burdens takes place and our ore-bodies are believed to result. Gradually the source of water and its store of energy become exhausted; circulations die out and the period of vein-formation, com- paratively brief, geologically speaking, closes. Secondary en- richment through the agency of the meteoric waters alone remains to influence the character of the deposit of ore. In brief, and so far as the process of formation of our veins in the Western mining districts is concerned, this is the conception which has been gaining adherents year by year and which, on the whole, most fully accords with our observed geologic rela- tions. It accords with them, I may add, in several other im- portant particulars upon which I have not time to dwell. — ee NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 657 In closing I may state that, speculative and uncertain as our solution of the problem of the metalliferous veins may seem, it yet is involved in a most important way with the practical opening of the veins and with our anticipations for the future production of the metals. Every intelligent manager, superin- tendent or engineer must plan the development work of his mine with some conception of the way in which his ore-body originated, and even if he alternates, or lets his mind play lightly from waters meteoric to waters magmatic, over this problem he must ponder. On its scientific side and to an active and reflective mind it is no drawback that the problem is yet in some respects elusive and that its solution is not yet a matter of mathematical demonstration. In science the solved problems lose their inter- est; it is the undecided ones that attract and call for all the resources which the investigator can bring to bear upon them. Among those problems which are of great practical importance, which enter in a far-reaching way into our national life and which irresistibly rivet the attention of the observer, there is none with which the problem of the metalliferous veins suffers by comparison. 42 SPECIAL INDEXES TO Part I, ArtTicLeE I. Per POGEROGRAPHICAL SKETCH OF THE ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF THE COASTAL PLAIN OF GEORGIA. PLANT NAMES. This index is intended to be complete as far as families, species, and varieties are concerned, but generic names are not indexed separately, except in cases where a statement is made which refers to several or all of the species of a genus and no particular species is mentioned, and in the case of generic synonyms in the catalogue of species. The names of families are printed in small capitals, and those of genera and species in ordinary lower-case, except where the generic name or all the specific names cited under it are synonyms, in which case italics are used. All specific names of synonyms are printed in italics (whether the generic name is or not), and those of accepted species in Roman. The names of genera and species not members of this flora (mentioned on page 330 and elsewhere) are enclosed in parentheses, and common names in quotations. No typographical distinction is made here between native and introduced species, but all but one or two of the latter may be recognized by the fact that they are first referred to on page 114 or II5. Figures in heavy type after the name of a family refer to the pages in the catalogue of species where its representatives in the region are listed, and after that of a species, to the page where its bibliography and distribution are given. Figures in parentheses refer to pages where the species in question is inadvertently mentioned under a different name, usually on account of recent changes in nomenclature. This index contains about 1550 subject entries and 4000 page-references. Of about 875 valid species (including weeds) listed, 82 are mentioned only once, and their status in the region may be regarded as doubtful; 318 are mentioned only twice, and more information about most of these is needed; 474 are mentioned more than twice; 283 more than 3 times; 156 more than 4 times; 91 more than 5 times; 61 more than 6 times, and so on, ending with two mentioned 22 times, one 23, and one 24 times, the last four being trees. The average species is mentioned 34 times. R. M. H. ACANTHACES, 160 Achillea millefolium, 114, 135 Acanthospermum australe, 114, | Actinospermum, 340 T16, 41, 392 angustifolium, 84, 98, 137 Acer, 330 Adelia acuminata, 72, 180, 332 rubrum, 63, 67, 69, 71, 74,110, | (Adiantum), 329 _ 206, 249, 314, 329, 331 Adopogon Carolinianus, 133 ACERACE, 206 4éschynomene Virginica, 221 659 660 ALSCULACE, 206 Aisculus Pavia, 103, 206, 332 Afzelia cassioides, 42, 51, 57, 162 pectinata, 48, 84, 162 Agave Virginica, 258 Agrimonia sp., 230 AIZOACEZ, 242 Aldenella, 340 tenuifolia, 86, 98, 235 “ Alder,’ 250 Aletris aurea, 56, 259 (farinosa?), 47, 250 lutea, 51, 58, 250 lutea X obovata (259) obovata, 51, 250 ALG, 322 ALISMACE2, 303-304 Allium Cuthbertii, 42, 262 striatum, 262 Alnus rugosa, 63, 94, 104, 113, 250, 333 Alternanthera achyrantha, 243 repens, 115, 243 AMARANTHACES, 243 AMARYLLIDACEA, 25'7—-258 Ambrosia artemisizfolia, 114, 152 AMBROSIACEA, 116, 152 Amelanchier Canadensis, 98, 100, 103, 230, 332 SP-, 230) 332 Amianthium angustifolium,. 263 letmanthoides, 262 Amorpha fruticosa, 70, 332 herbacea, 45, 222, 332 Ampelopsis arborea, 72, 205, 333 Amsonia ciliata, 48, I75 ciliata filafolaa, 175 tigida, 76, 80, 123, 175 (tabernemontana), 123 tenuifolia, 48, 84, 1'75 ANACARDIACEA, 210-211 Anantherix, 339 connivens, 57, 173 pumila, 175 Anastrophus compressus, 115, 290 paspaloides, 72, 299 Anchistea Virginica, 57, 64, 76, 82, 91, 96, 311 Andropogon, 327, 328 corymbosus, 58, 301 furcatus, 47, 300 Mohrii, 58, 301 nutans, 300 Nuttallit, 302 scoparius, 301 secundum, 300 Hn 22k — - SPECIAL INDEX. tener, 42, 160, 301, 306 Tracyi (?), 57, 301 Virginicus, 301 Angelica dentata, 46, 53, 85, 180 ANONACE, 239-240 Antheenantia rufa, 56, 299 villosa, 46, 86, 298 Anthemis cotula, 114, 135 Anthoceros Carolinianus, 318 Apios tuberosa, 64, 92, 218, 333 APOCYNACEZ, 175 (Apteria), 256 AQUIFOLIACE2, 207-209 ARACES, 271 Aralia spinosa, 103, III, IQI, 332 ARALIACE, IOI Archilejeunea clypeata, 68, 318 Arenaria brevifolia, 42, 43, 122, 241, a307 Caroliniana, 84, 98, 240 (lanuginosa), 330 SQUuarrosa, 240 Ariseema triphyllum 111, 271 Aristida Combsi, 295 condensata, 85, 295 Mohrii (?), (86), 205 palustris, 76, 79, 205 Spiciformis, 51, 90, 95, 204 stricta, 45, (48), 49, 84, 205, 329 virgata, (85), 205 Aristolochia serpentaria, 104, 245 ARISTOLOCHIACE, 245 Arnica acaulis, 135 Aronia arbutifolia, 55, 63, 65, 67, Q1, 230) 332 Arundinaria tecta, 58, 289 Sp., 72, 110, 289 (Asarum), 329 ASCLEPIADACE2, 173-175 Asclepias, 327, 328 amplexicaulis, 174 cinerea, 46, 51, 173 humistrata, 46, 82, 84, 87, 174, 396 lanceolata, 58, 64, 67, 174 Michauxii, 52, 173 perennis, 72, 173 tuberosa, 46, 86, 174 variegata, 104, 174 verticillata, 82, 86, 173 Ascyrum pumilum, 42, 46, 52, 204 stans, 55, 204, 332 “Ash,” 180 Prickly, 191 Asimina angustifolia, 45, 83, 240, 333 a ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA. Asimina—Continued Parvinora, O8, OO; 1O3, IIT, 239) 321, 333 Speciosa, 45, 51, 84, 230) 333 Asplenium Filix-foemina, 104, 311 platyneuron, 104, 311 Aster, 147, 330 adnatus, 46, 52, 144, (147) Collinst1, 144 eryngiifolius, 59, 144, (147) squarrosus, 42, 46, 51, 74, 144, (147) Astreus hygrometricus, 86, 320 Astragalus glaber, 222 villosus, 223 Azalea candida, 42-44, 187, 332 nudiflora, 51, 104, 186, 332 viscosa, 55, 186, 332, Baccharis halimifolia, 72, 73, 110, T43) 332 Baldwinia, 61, 339 atropurpurea, 56, 138, 329, 338 uniflora, 46, 52, 57, 138, 329 “*Bamboo Vine,”’ 260 Baptisia, 49, 222 alba, 47, 226 lanceolata, 45, 52, 86, 225, 329 leucantha, 72, 226 perfoliata, 46, 48, 82, 84, 87, 2259 329 Bartonia lanceolata, 53, 57, 1'76 tenella brachiata, 176 Batodendron arboreum, 82, 83, 98— TOO, 103, 105, 182, 332 Batrachospermum vagum kerato- phytum, 92, 322 Batschia Carolinensis, 86, 1'70 ““Bay,” 239; Red, 201; Sweet, 198; White, 239 “Bayberry,” 252 Bazzania trilobata, 94, 319 “‘Bear-grass,” 261 “‘Beggar-lice,”” 220 Benzoin melissefolium, 95, 197, 332 (odoriferum), 330 BERBERIDACEA, 236 Berchemia scandens, 67, 70, 206, 333 Berlandiera pumila, 46, 85, 141 tomentosa, I41 ““Bermuda Grass,” 292 Betula nigra, 69, 72, 251, 331 BETULACE, 250-251 Bidens bipinnata, 114, 138 Bignonia capreolata, 157 661 eiucigera, 67, 200, Tog; X57, 333 BIGNONIACEA, 157-158 ep bineh. aan “Bitter Weed,” 136 “Blackberry,” 231 “Black Gum,” 193 “Black Haw,” 154 “ Black-Jack” (oak), 248 “Black Pine,” 306 ‘““Black-Root,” 142 “Bloodroot,” 236 (Boehmeria), 329 (cylindrica), 330 Boerhavia erecta, 115, 242 Boletus Ananas, 321 Boltonia diffusa, 112, 145 BOMIESEE, Se “Bonnets,” 237 BoRRAGINACE, I70 Botrychium obliquum, 111, 312 ‘““Bottom White Pine,” 307 Brachelyma robustum, 70, 73, 315 Brachiaria digitarioides, 298 Bradburya Virginiana, 218, 333 Brasenia purpurea, 81, 238, 285 Breweria aquatica, 79, 80, 172, 292, 333 humistrata, 46, 84, 172, 333 “Brier-berry,” 231 BROMELIACEA, 265 ‘“‘Broom-sedge,’”’ 301 Brunnichia cirrhosa, 16, 72, 245, 333 ‘“‘Bryophytes, ” 126, 128, 313(—320), 323 Buchnera elongata, 47, 160 “Buckeye,” 206 ‘“Bullace,” 205 Bumelia lanuginosa, 84, 100, 181, Sa (lycioides), 330 lyctoides reclinata, 181 reclinata, 84, 181, 332 Burmannia (biflora), 256 capitata, 56, 256 BURMANNIACEA, 256 ‘*Button Bush, Button Willow,’’ 156 “Buttons, ” 267 Cacalia ovata, 134 CACTACES, 198 C4SALPINIACEZ, (226-227), 324, 335 Callicarpa Americana, 99, 103, III, 169, 332 662 Callirhoé Papaver, 204 Calophanes humistrata, 72, 160 oblongifolia, 46, 85, 160 (Calycothrix), 211 CAMPANULACEA, 153 Campulosus aromaticus, 52, 56, 292 ““Cane,’”’ Maiden, 298 CAPPARIDACE, 235 CAPRIFOLIACEA, 153-154 Capriola Dactylon, 115, 292 ‘“‘Cardinal Flower,”’ 152 Carduace@é, 133 Carduus Le Contei, 58, 134 revolutus, 134 spinosissimus, 134 Carex, 71, 74, 280, 327, 328, 334, 6 33 alata, 82, 273 bullata, 70, 72, 275 castanea, 275 Chapmani, 273 debilis, 70, 72, 273 Elliottii, 91, 94, 275 folliculata, 70,.2'75 australis, 275 fulva, 275 glaucescens, 64, 72, _ 274 intumescens, 72, 275 macrokolea, 274 reniformis, 70, 72, 2'73 squarrosa, 73, 274 striata, 274 tenax, 86, 273 triceps, 70, 73, 273 turgescens, 57, 64, 275 venusta, 82, 2'73 Walteriana, 274 sp., 76, 82, 274 Carphephorus (corymbosus), 147 Pseudo-Liatris, 58, 14'7 tomentosus, 52, 147 Carpinus Caroliniana, 71, 251, 332 ““Carrot,” 188 CARYOPHYLLACES, 89, 240-241 Cassia (Marilandica), 330 occidentalis, 115, 226 Tora, 115, 226 Cassine Caroliniana, 208 Castalia odorata, 82, 237, 238 Castanea alnifolia, 45, 51, 248, 250, 76, 80, SSohiale alnifolia pubescens, 250 nana, 250 pumila, 98, 100, 333 (Catalpa), 330 103, 250, SPECIAL INDEX. Ceanothus Americanus, 45, 84, 103, 206, 332 microphyllus, 45, 83, 206, 332 “Cedar, ” 308 CELASTRACEZ, 207 (Celtis), 329 Cenchrus tribuloides, 115, 295 Centella repanda, 56, 64, 76, 91, 96, IQI Cephalanthus occidentalis, 69, 72, 9, 81, 156, 332 Cephaloxys flabellata, 265 Cephalozia Virginiana, 68, 320 Ceranthera, 340 Ceratiola ericoides, 27, 98, 211, 332, 400 Ceratoschenus longirostris, 282 Cercis Canadensis, 103, 110, 226, 257, 331, 336 Chenolobus, ee undulatus, 142 Chamelirium luteum, 48, 263 Chamerops acaulis, 272 Chaptalia integrifolia, 133 tomentosa, (52), 56, 133 CHENOPODIACEA, 244 Chenopodium ambrosioides, 244 anthelminticum (?), 244 “Cherry,” Wild, 228 Chimaphila maculata, 112, 187 ‘“‘Chinquapin,” 250 Chionanthus Virginica, 179, 332 Chlenobolus, 142 Cholisma ferruginea, 51, 83, 90, 99, 184, 248, 332 ferruginea fruticosa, 184, 332 ligustrina, 67, 184, 332 sp., 55, 184 Chondrocarpus, 191 Chondrophora nudata, 51, 55, 79, 146, 329 virgata, 42, 43, 146 Chrosperma muscetoxicum, 48, 263 Chrysobalanus oblongifolius, 45, 83, 228, 332, 380 Chrysoma pauciflocculosa, 82, 84, 86, 87, 146, 332 Chrysopogon secundus, 300 Chrysopsis gossypina, 85, 87, 146 graminifolia, 46, 52, 84, 147 CICHORIACEZ, 133) 324, 335 (Cicuta), 329 (Curtissii), 330 Cissus stans, 205 CISTACEZ, 200-201 . its. TOBs LOR d . ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA. Clematis crispa, 65, 70, 240, 334 reticulata, 100, 240, 333 Cleome cuneifolia, 235 Clethra alnifolia, 55, 63, 67, 91, 188, 332 CLETHRACE, 188, 324 Cliftonia ligustrina, 209 monophylla, 55, 63, 67, 90, 91, 93,905) 122, 200, 210, 320, 332, 382 Clinopodium Carolinianum, 100, TOF, UAB, UO, Bee coccineum, 83, 86, 98, 168, 332 Georgianum, (100, 103, 123), iy 167, (332) Clitoria Mariana, 47, 85, 88, 218 “Clover,” Japan, 219; White, 224 “Cocklebur,” 152 “Coffee Weed,” 226 Coltricia parvula, 48, 321 COMMELINACE2, 2606-267 CoMPOSIT&, 39, 48, 49, 54, 61, 68, 78, 80, 81, 88, 89, 105, 112, 116, 133-151, 324-326, 334, 335 CONIFER, 68, 304-308 Conoclinium coelestinum, 72, 149 Conopholis Americana, 104, 158 Conradia, 162, 340 CONVOLVULACEA, 172 Coreopsis angustifolia, 56, (57), 13 delphinifolia, 47, 86, 138 lanceolata, 47, 86, 139 nudata, 64, 76, 77, 79, 138 Wrayt (?), 138 _SPp., 57, 138 Coriolus pargamenus, 321 versicolor, (94), 321 CoRNACE2, I9I—-193 Cornus, 329 florida, 99, 103, IOI, 331 Coronopus didymus, 115, 236 ““Cow-itch,” 157 “Crab Grass,” 299 Cracca hispidula, 52, 223 Virginiana, 42, 45, 52, 84, 223, 329 “Crap Grass, ” 290 Crategus, 330 eestivalis, 70, 229, 332 apiifolia, 70, 72, 229, 332 arborescens, 229 glandulosa (?), 229 lucida, 2209 Michauxii (?), 83, 220, 331 uniflora, 45, 84, 230, 332 viridis, 72, 220, 331 663 ? “Crop Grass,” 299 “‘Cross-vine,”” 157 Crotalaria Purshii, 46, 52, 225 rotundifolia, 47, 85, 224 Croton argyranthemus, 47, 84, 214 glandulosus, 115, 214 Crotonopsis linearis, 42, 43, 214 (spinosa?), 214 CRUCIFERA, 235-236 Crypheadelphus robustus, 315 CUPULIFERZ, 49, 89, 105, 247-250, 324-326 Cuscuta compacta, 64, 67, 92, 111, 172, 333) 334 indecora, 58, 59, 172, 333, 334 CUSCUTACE, 172 Cuthbertia graminea, 84, 98, 267 Cynoctonum Mitreola, 111, 178, 190 sessilifolium, 59, 179 CYPERACES, 60, 61, 66, 68, 71, 74, tay BO, Sie, SOy (OF), TOS, (WAa)), 2'73-280, 324-326, 334-336 Cyperus, 327, 328 compressus, 115, 288 cylindricus (?), 100, 287 echinatus, 98, 100, 287 (filiculmis), 47, 287 Haspan, 58, 64, 92, 287 Martindalei, (47), 86, 287 ovularis, 47, 287 pseudovegetus, 288 retrofractus, 82, 85, 287, 336 squarrosus, 115, 28 : (strigosus), 331 “Cypress,” 75, 79, 307, 308, 378 Cyrilla racemiflora, 63, 67, 69, 95, 200, 329, 332, 37° CYRILLACEZ, 97, 200 Danthonia sericea, 42, 292 (Darwinia), 211 Dasystoma pectinata, 48, 84, 162 Datura stramonium, 115, 171 tatula, 115, I71 Daucus pusillus, 115, 188 (Decodon), 330 Decumaria barbara, I10, III, 232, 3 ‘‘Deer-tongue,”’ 148 Dendropogon usneoides, 15, 36, 67, O25 G25 WB, 82, SS SG) uOO, 104-106, 265, 334, 370 Desmodium lineatum, 220 rotundtjolium, 220 ‘‘Devil’s shoestring,” 223 “*‘Devil-wood,”’ 179 664 “Dewberry,” 231 Dicerandra, 340 linearifolia, 85, 100, 123, 167 odoratissima, 84, 89, 100, 167, P 338, 394 | Dichondra Carolinensis, 1'72 Dichromena, 336 colorata, 112, 282 latifolia, 57, 60, 76, 79, 282 Dicranum Bonjeani, 86, 317 Diodia teres, 42, 114, 116, I55 (Virginiana i) ais sp., 80, 155 Dioscorea villosa, 104, III, 257 334 DIOSCOREACE, 257 Diospyros Virginiana, ANS AGI). (siete 182, 331, 332 Diplopappus obovatus, 143 (Dirca palustris), 330 Deellingeria reticulata, 52, 56, 90, 143 ““Dog-fennel,” 135, 149 “Dogwood,” 191 Dolicholus simplicifolius, 45, 84, 219 “ Dollar-leaf Oak,” 248 “Dollar Weed,” 21 Drosera brevifolia (?), 235 capillaris (?), 55, 235 filiformis (?), 57, 234 DROSERACEZ, 234-235 Dryopteris Floridana, 111, 310 (patens), 331 Dulichium arundinaceum, 67, 68, 82, 94-96, 288 Dupatya flavidula, 268 EBENACES, 182 Echinochloa colona, 115, 298 Echinodorus radicans, 70, 72, 304 “Eider,” 154 Eleocharis 327, 328 Baldwinii, 53, 284 bicolor, 58, 285 equisetoides, 285 interstincta, 82, 285, 286 melanocarpa, 58, 96, 284 (microcarpa), 123 (mutata), 331 ochreata, 285 prolifera, 76, 80, 284 Robbinsii, 96, 285 Torreyana, 123 tuberculosa, 57, 284 Elephantopus (Carolinianus), 330 (elatus) 330, SPECIAL INDEX. nudatus, 111, I51 Eleusina Indica, 115, 292 Elfvingia fasciata, 100, 321 Elionurus, 339 tripsacoides, III, 112, 302 Elliottia, 339, 345 racemosa, 45, 84, ae 2255 3325 Lane 345,346 396, 398 Elyanunis, Ei EMPETRACEA, 211. Epidendrum conopseum, 94, 100, 253) 334 (Epiphegus), 330 Eragrostis, 116 amabilis, 115, 290 Browne, 291 ciliaris, 115, 290 tefracta, 115, 291 simplex, 115, 116, 291. Erechthites hieracifolia, 114, 135 Erianthus brevibarbis, 91, 303 saccharoides, 303 strictus, 112, 303 ERICACE2, 68, 70, 80, 324-326 Erigeron ramosus, I14, 144 vernus, 53, 56, 64, 74, 76, 144 ERIOCAULACES, 267-268 Heecaules compressum, 76, 80, 82, 207 decangulare, 55, 60, 64, 68, 80, 267, 329, 364, 406 fiavidulum, 268 lineare, 55, 64, 267, 329, 338, _ 346, 404, 408 Eriogonum tomentosum, 45, 84, 86, 244, 329 ; Eryngium aquaticum, 189, 190 integrifolium (?), 190 Ludovicianum, 345 Ludovicianum, 56, (345) synchetum, 47, 51, 58, 190 virgatum, 56, 190 Virginianum, III, 112, 190 yuccifolium, 42, 59, 189 Erythrina herbacea, 100, 219 Euonymus Americanus, 100, 207) 332 Eupatorium, 327, 328 album, 46, 85, 150 compositifolium, 48, 149 lechezfolium, 150 “Mohrii (?), 53, 80, 150 perfoliatum, 64, 111, I50 rotundifolium, 51, 56, 150 184-187, 123, IQ0, 103, ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA. Eupatorium—Continued. semiserratum, 149 serotinum, 72, 149 tortifolium, 47, 150 verbenefolium, 52, 57, 150 Euphorbia, 88 cordifolia, 86, 100, 213 corollata, 46, 85, 104, 211 angustifolia, 124 (Curtisii), 124 eriogonoides, 52, 124, 212, 223 Floridana, 86, 211 gracilis, 46, 84, 212 rotundifolia, 212 (Ipecacuanhe), 212 maculata, 115, 116, 212 _ EUPHORBIACEZ, 61, 69, 88, 211— 214) 324-327 (Eustachys Floridana), 331 Euthamia Caroliniana, 80, 145 (Fagus), 330; (Americana), 106 “Ferns,” 50, (310-312) Festuca octoflora, 115, 289 tenella, 289 Fimbristylis autumnalis, 57, 68, 283 laxa, 115, 283 puberula, 47, 51, 57, 283 Fontinalis flaccida, 70, 315 Fraxinus Caroliniana, 67, 69, 71, 180, 332, 379, 374 “French Mulberry,” 169 Froelichia (campestris), 243 Floridana, 85, 100, 227, 243 Frullania Caroliniana, 94, 318 Kunzei, 42, 94, 318 Fuirena breviseta, 58, 80, 286 hispida, (56, 286), 346 squarrosa hispida, 56, (346) ; Funaria hygrometrica, 316 “Pungi,” 50, 61, 89, 313, 320-321 286, Gaillardia lanceolata, 47, 86, 136, 137, 146 Galactia erecta, 46, 219 mollis, 47, 218, 333 regularis, 85, 100, 218, 333, 334 Galium hispidulum, 82, 85, 100, 155 pilosum, 48, 155 uniflorum, 104, 155 “‘Gallberry,” 209 Gaura Michauxii, 46, 85, 194 Gaylussacia dumosa, 42, 45, 51, 55, 74, 83, 183, 332 frondosa, 51, 55,90, 91, 183, 332 665 nana, 183 tomentosa, 183 Gelsemium sempervirens, 42, 98- 100, 178, 333 GENTIANACE, 88, 176-178 Gerardia, 39, 61, 327, 328 aphylla, 53, 57, 161 divaricata (?), 123 filicaulis, 161 filifolia, 46, 84, 160 linifolia, 58, 64, 80, 161 paupercula, 57, 161 purpurea, 58, 161 setacea, 46, 160 Skinneriana, 52, 58, 161 Gibbesia, 340 Rugelii, 242 Gleditschia aquatica, (69), 226, 331 Glyceria, 191 Gnaphalium obtusifolium, 114, 142 purpureum, 114, 142 “‘Golden-rod,” 145 “Gooseberry,” 183 ‘““Gopher-berry,”’ 182 ‘“‘Gopher Weed,” 225 Gordonia Lasianthus, 25, 63, 91, 93, 201, 319, 331, 384 GRAMINEZ, (49), 61, 70, 80, 81, 88, 89, (93), 105, 116, 289-303, 324-326, 334-336 “Grape,” Wild, 205 ‘* Grass,’’ Bear, 261; Bermuda, 292; Crab, Crap or Crop, 299; Pep- per, 236; Water, 283; Wire, 48, T18, 295 ““Grasses,’’ 49, 93, 123, 336. (See also Graminee. Gratiola pilosa, 164 quadridentata, 164 ramosa, 64, 76, 79, 82, 164 spherocarpa, 164 subulata, 163 ““Graybeard,” 179 Grimmia leucophea, 42, 316 “Ground Oak,” 228 > Gum. Black ros Tupelo, 192 Gyrotheca tinctoria, 258 Sweet, 231; Habenaria, 93 blephariglottis, 52, 59, 91, 255 X ciliaris, 92, (255) ciliaris, 57, 91, 255 cristata, 59, 68, 91, 255 integra, 58, 255 nivea, 52, 58, 256, 408 666 H4MODORACEA, 258-250. Halimium Carolinianum, 200 rosmarintjolinm, 200 HALORAGIDACEA, 103 HAMAMELIDACE, 231-232 Hamamelis Virginiana, 98, 99, 101, I03, 10, 232, 333 “Hanging Moss,” 265 Harpalejeunea ovata, 94, 318 ‘““Haw,’” 229; Black, 154 Hedera arborea, 205 Hedwigia albicans viridis, 42, 314 Helenium autumnale, r10-112, 136 nudiflorum, 136 tenutfolium, 114, 116, 136, 141, 392 Helianthemum Carolinianum, 47, 200 rosmarinifolium, 115, 200 Helianthus angustifolius, 57, 139 australis, 139 Radula, 45; 51, 86, 139) 329 undulatus, 58, 139 HEPATIC, (313), 318-320, 323 Wllepatics,. a3) Herpestis amplexicaulis, 164 (Hexalectris), 330 Hibiscus aculeatus, 204 “Hickory,” 252 Hicoria (alba ?), 253 aquatica, 71, 252, 331 (glabra ?), 253 _ SP) 99, 253 a Hieracium (Gronovii?), 133 sp., 46, 133 Sp., 47, 133 “ High-ground Willow Oak,” 249 “Hog Plum,” 228 “ Holly,” 207 (Homalocenchrus), 329 “Honeysuckle,” 153, 186 Hordeum nodosum, 115, 289 “Hornbeam,”’ 246 Houstonia longifolia, 42, 104, 156 rotundifolia, 46, 85, 157 ““Huckleberry,’’ 183 (Hydrangea), 329 (Hydrocotyle), 329 Hydrocotyle rentformis, 191% (Hydrolea), 329 Hymenocallis sp., 67, 25'7, 406 Sp., 73, 258 é Hymenopappus Carolinensis, 137, 146 HYPERICACEZ, 202-204 Hypericum, 61, 327, 328 acutifolium, 76, 203 SPECIAL INDEX. aspalathoides, 203 . fasciculatum, 5/55 63,mG9,0 an ; SI, 95, 203, 329, 332 galioides pallidum, 70, 203, 332 gymnocarpum, 80, 203 maculatum, 202 _ (mutilum), 330 myrtifolium, 51, 55, 75, 79; 90, 95, 202, 332 opacum, 51, 55, 91, 203, 332 (pilosum), 147 Hypoxis filéjolsa, 258 juncea, 258 Ilex, 327, 328 ambigua, 98, 100, 208, 332 Caroliniana, 208 coriacea, 91, 93, 94, 208, 332 decidua, 72, 208, 247, 332 glabra, 42, 45, 51, 53, 55, 59- 60, 63, 65, 90-92, 95, 96, 200, 329, 332 lucida, 208 myrtifolia, 63, 329, 332 opaca, 67, 97, 99, 103, 207, 331 vomitoria, 100, 207, 332 ILLECEBRACE, 89, 242-243 Ilysanthes gratioloides, 115, 163 refracta, 42, 43, 64, 163 “Indian Turnip,’”’ 271 Indigofera Caroliniana, 84, 100, 223 Inonotus amplectens, 321, 346 Jonactis linaritfolius, 143, 147 [RIDACEA, 256-257 Iris versicolor, 59, 64, 67, 81, 111, I12, 256 ‘“‘Tronwood,” 251 Isnardia palustris, 79, 196 IsoETACEA, 308 Isoétes flaccida, 64, 308 Isopappus divaricatus, 189 Isopterygium micans, 94, 314 Itea Virginica, 55, 67, 68, 93, 94, TIT, 2325 3235304 Iva microcephala, 114, 152 75> 79, 207, 146, IIA, ‘‘Japan Clover,” 219 Jatropha stimulosa, 46, 85, 98, 213 ‘““Jessamine,’”’ Yellow, 178 ‘‘Jimson Weed,” 171 JUGLANDACEZ, 252-253 JUNCACES, 264-265 Juncus, 61, 327, 328 acuminatus, 264 aristulatus pinetorum, 265 biflorus, 52, 56, 80, 90, 265 bufonius, 115, 265 dichotomus, 265 diffusissimus, 264 (effusus), 330 Elliottii, 64, 264 marginatus biflorus, 265 (megacephalus), 330 polycephalus, 58, 64, 76, 264 Pondit, 264 repens, 80, 265 scirpoides, 59 compositus, 90, 95, 264, ; 338 trigonocarpus, 56, 91, 264 Juniperus Virginiana, 69, 308, 332 (Jussiza), 329 Kalmia hirsuta, 51, 55, 89, 95, 186, 332 (latifolia), 330 Kantia Trichomanis, 319 “Kentucky Magnolia,” 156 Kneiffia arenicola, 194 linearis, 46, 194 longipedicellata, 194 subglobosa, 194 Koellia hyssopifolia, 59, 64, 80, 167, 292 nuda, 52, 58, 167 Krameria secundiflora, 84, 227, 333 KRAMERIACE, 227 Krigia Virginica, 42, 133 Kuhnistera pinnata, 48, 84, 221, 329, 336 | Kyllinga pumila, 286 LABIATA, 68, 166-169, 324, 325 Lachnocaulon anceps, 51, 57, 80, 90, 268 Laciniaria, 327, 328 elegans, 85, 147 gracilis, 52, 148 graminifolia, 47, 148 spicata, 56, 80, 148, 364 squarrosa, 48, 147 tenuifolia, 46, 84, 148 Larnandra, 253 LAURACEAE, 97, 197-198 Lechea patula (?), 201 tenuifolia (?), 85, 201 Torreyi (?), 90, 200 ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA. 667 LEGUMINOS, 49, 61, 69, 80-81, 88, 105, 2147-226, 324-327, i 38A53300 1 Lejeunea Americana, 94, 319 Lemna sp., 271 LEMNACEA, 271 LENTIBULARIACES, 158-159 Lentinus sp., 321 Lepidium Virginicum, 115, 236 Leptilon Canadense, 114, 143 Leptogyne, 142 Leptopoda brachypoda, 136 decurrens, 136 Helenium, 56, 76, 79, 136 Leskea denticulata, 68, 315 Lespedeza hirta, 85, 219 repens, 86, 219, 333 striata, 115, 116, 219 Leucobryum glaucum, 42, 316 Leucodon julaceus minor, 314 Leucothoé axillaris, 67, 68, 91, 93, 94, 185, 332 (Catesbei), 186 elongata, 90, 95, 185, 332 platyphylla, 186 racemosa, 63, 67, 68, 185, 332 Liatris squamosa, 147 y Richens ier 2\7 S53 LILIACE2, 261-262 Lilium Catesbei, 59, 61, 261 spectabtile, 261 “ Lily.) spider, 2577 Water, 237 Limnanthemum aquaticum, $2, 176 trachyspermum, 176 Limodorum graminifolium, 58, 254 tuberosum, 57, 254 unifolium (?), 254 LINACEA, 217 Linaria Canadensis, 115, 165, 244 Floridana, 98, 165 Linum Floridanum, 52, 59, 61, 217 Lipocarpha maculata, 115, 288 Liquidambar Styraciflua, 42, 55,59, OY Gity WB5 HOB, UOGs Wu, Nuies 231, 329, 331, 333, 360 Liriodendron Tulipifera, 63, 91, 103, IIo, 238, 329; 331 Lithospermum Gmelint, 170 hirtum, 170 ““Live Oak,” 20, 247 Lobelia Boykinii, 76, 123, 153 cardinalis, 72, 152 flaccidifolia, 67, 70, 152 glandulosa, 56, 152 Nuttallii, 52, 153 LoBELIACE®, 152-153 ‘Loblolly,’ 238 668 LOGANIACEA, 178-179 ‘““Long-leaf Pine,’ 48, 120, 304 Lonicera sempervirens, 103, 153, 333 Lophiola, 339 aurea, 56, 96, 259 LORANTHACEA, 245 Lorinseria areolata, 64, 67, 94, 311 ““Love V,ine,”’ 172 Ludwigia, 61, 327, 328 alternifolia, 73, 194 capttata, 195 glandulosa, 72, 196 hirtella, 53, 56, 194 linearis, 58, 195 linifolia, 76, 79, 195 microcarpa, III, 112, 196 pilosa, 58, 64, 67, 74, 76, 77, 79, 92, 195, 329 spherocarpa, 82, 195 suffruticosa, 96, 195 virgata, 52, 195 Lupinus diffusus, 84, 224 gracilis (?), 224 perennis, 82, 84, 224 villosus, 47, 53, 224, 402 Lycogala epidendrum, 65, 68, 322 LYCOPODIACEZ, 309-310 Lycopodium, 36 alopecuroides, 56, 91, 96, 300 Carolinianum, 56, 300 (Chapmani), 331 pinnatum, 56, 310, 334 prostratum, (56), 310, (334) Lycopus pubens, 58, 76, 80, 166 tubellus, 72, 166 Lygodesmia, 340 aphylla, 47, 133 (Lythrum), 329 105, Macranthera, 340 fuchsioides, 64, 92, 162 ‘“‘Magnolia,’”’ 238, 316 Kentucky, 156 Magnolia glauca, 36, 55, 59, 63, 65, 67, 68, 81, Qi—-94, 2395 253, 318, 320, 321, 327, 331, 333, 382, 384 grandiflora, 16, 19, 69, 97, 99, 103, 106, I10, I11, 238, 253, 397, 321, 331, 382, 390 (pyramidata), 330 MAGNOLIACE, 238-239 ““Maiden Cane,” 298 ‘“Maiden’s Blushes,” 156 Malapoenna geniculata, 75, 79, 95, 198, 332 SPECIAL INDEX. MALVACES, 204 Manfreda Virginica, 42, 43, 48, 258 Manisuris Chapmani, 79, 303 cylindrica, 47, 303 rugosa, 57, 64, 112, 302 “‘Maple,”’ 206 Marchantia polymorpha, 115, 320 Marginaria polypodioides, (42, 72, 100), 312, (334) Marshallia graminifolia, 56, 92, 137, 329, 406 ramosa, 42-44, 124, 137, 338, 345 Mastigolejeunea auriculata, 68, 318 Mayaca Aubleti, 57, 91, 2'70, 334 fluviatilis, 115, 271 Michaux, 270 ““May Apple,’’ 236 ““May Haw,”’ 229 ““Maypop,”’ 199 (Medeola), 330 Meibomia arenicola, 46, 86, 220, 333 Michauxii, 104, 220, 333 nudiflora, 104, 220 tenuifolia, 47, 85, 220 MELANTHACE®, 262-264 Melanthium Virginicum, 58, 262 MELASTOMACES, 196-197 Melica mutica, 104, 290 MENYANTHACEA, 176 Mesadenia Elliottii, 111, 134 lanceolata virescens, 56, I35y 329, 338, 364 Mesopherum radiatum, 56, 61, 64, 80, 92, 111, 166 rugosum, 166 Mikania scandens, 70, 72, 149, 333 ‘*Mill-wheel,” 159 MIMOSACE, 227, 324, 335 ‘*Mistletoe,” 245 Mitchella repens, 36, 100, 104, 111, _ 156, 333 Mitreola petiolata, 178 Mohrodendron dipterum, 99, 181, 331 Mollugo verticillata, 115, 242 (Monarda), 329 Monniera (acuminata), 330 Caroliniana, 80, 164 MorRAcE&, 246 Morongia (angustata?), 227 uncinata, 46, 85, 227, 333 Morus rubra, 103, 110, 246, 331 “Moss,” Hanging, 265 ‘“Mosses,”’ 88, 313(—318) Muhlenbergia expansa, 47, 52, 53, 203 ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA. Muhlenbergia—Continued trichopodes, 293 Sp., 57, 203 ““Mulberry,” 246 French, 169 ““Mullein,’”’ 166 ““Muscadine,” 205 Musct, 313-318, 323 . Mussenda bracieolata, 156 Myrica Carolinensis, 55, 60, 90-92, 2525 333 cerifera, 15, 103, 105, 106, 110, Uti, Dy Bae pumila, 45, 51, 84, 252, 333 MyRICACEA, 252 Myriophyllum heterophyllum, 81, 193 (Myrtacez), 211 “Myrtle,” 252 MYXOMYCETES, 322 (Nama), 329 (Negundo), 330 “Nettle,” 213 Nolina Georgiana, 42, 86, 261 Nothoscordum bivalve, 262 NYCTAGINACE, 242 Nymphea fluviatilis, 68, 70, 72, 237) 338 orbiculata, 115, 237, 271, 330 NYMPHA4ACEZ, 75, 237-238 Nyssa aquatica, 192 biflora, 63, 66, 69, 75, 77; 79) pen oS 193, 246, 327, 3315 3 Ogeche, 63, 66, 69, 81, 82, 110, 192, 200, 329, 332, 400 (sylvatica), 193 uniflora, 69, 71, 192, 331 “Oak,” Black-Jack, 248; Dollar- leaf, 248; Ground, 228; High- ground Willow, 249; Live, 20, 247; Poison, 210; Post, 247; Red or Spanish, 248; Turkey, 248, 249; Water, 249; White, 247; Willow, 249 “Oak Runner,’’ 248 “Oaks,” 16, 50, 247-249, 362 **Oats,’”’ Wild, 300 Oceanoros leimanthoides, 91, 262 Odontoschisma prostratum, 65, 68, 94, 320 Cnothera laciniata, 115, (194) sinuata, 194 669 ““Ogeechee Lime,” 192 Oldenlandia uniflora, 15'7 OLEACE, 1'79-180 ONAGRACE®, 194-196, 324, 325 Onoclea sensibilis, 72, 310 Onosmodium Virginianum, 48, 86, I70 OPHIOGLOSSACE, 312 Oplismenus setarius, 208 Opuntia vulgaris, 36, 84, 98, 100, 198 ORCHIDACEA, 93, 324-326 OROBANCHACEA, 158 Orontium aquaticum, 67, 70, 271 Osmanthus Americanus, 93, 97, 99, 179, 183, 332, 384 Osmunda cinnamomea, 58, 64, 67, Qik, wim, Se) regalas, 110, III, 312 spectabilis, (110, 111), 312 OSMUNDACES, 312 Ostrya Virginiana, 99, 103, 251, 332 OXALIDACEA, 217 Oxalis recurva, 217 (Oxydendrum), 330 Oxypolis filiformis, 55, 59, 188, 329 rigidior, 64, 188 ternata, 57, 188 Oxytria crocea, 58, 65, 124, 261 105, 253-256, Pallavicinia Lyellii, 65, 68, 94, 320 PALMS, 272 / Palmetto,” 272 “Cleans,” BH Panicum, 327, 328 anceps strictum, 297 angustifolium, 47, 296 Ashei, 100, 296 barbulatum, 104, 206 cognatum, I15, 297 Combsii, 58, 80, 207 Currani, 111, 296 debtile, 297 digitarioides, (59, 298) erectifolium, 123 (gibbum), 331 (gymnocarpon), 331 hemitomon, 59, 297, 298 hians, (59, 80, 298) longiligulatum, 296 lucidum, 64, 296 melicarium, 59, 80, 298 Nutialianum, 298 scabriusculum, 64, 296 stenodes, 76, 80, 96, 207 670 Panicum—Continued (strictum), 297 Tennesseense, rrr, 296 verrucosum, 58, 91, 207 virgatum, 207 PAPAVERACE, 236 Paronychia herniarioides, 84, 98, 243, 388 Tiparia, 98, 100, 243, 334 Parthenocissus quinquefolia, 103, III, 205) 333 ‘* Partridge-berry,’’ 156 Paspalum Curtisianum, 57, 299 precox, 58, 290 Passiflora incarnata, 115, 199 lutea, 72, 199 PASSIFLORACEA, 199 ‘Pawpaw,’ 239 ‘‘Pear,’’ Prickly, 198 Peltandra sagittifolia, 94, 271 (Penthorum), 330 Pentstemon dissectus, 42-44, 122, 165, 338 hirsutus, 48, 86, 104, 165 multiflorus, 86, 165 pallidus, 165 “‘Pepper-grass,’’ 236 Pericaulon perfoliatum, 225 Perilla frutescens, 115, 166 Persea pubescens, 63, 91, 93-95, ., 98) 99, 198, 331, 332, 384 “Persimmon,” 182 Renuvianh 56 Petalostemon albidus, 47, 85, 221 corymbosus, 221 Phaseoluspolystachyus, 104,217,333 (Phegopteris), 329 (hexagonoptera), 331 Phlox amoena, 47, I'71 Hentzit, 171 Lighthipei, 171 subulata, 46, 85, 171 Waltert, 171 Phoradendron, 340 flavescens, 63, 67, 68, 79, 245, gsiey SL! (Phryma), 330 Physcomitrium turbinatum, 316 Physostegia denticulata, 58, 64, 168 Phyteumopsis, 137 Pieris Mariana, 45, 51, 55, 84, 90, 95, 184, 332 Mitida, WG wos OZ 75s ow, OL 04, 95, 98, 100, 111, 185, 329; 332, phillyreifolia, 55, 59, 75, 77; 185, 333 99; SPECIAL INDEX. Pinckneya pubens, 63, 65, 91, 156, 192, 209, 329, 332 . ‘“‘Pine,’”’ Black, 306, Bottom White, 307, Long-leaf, 48, 120, 304, Short-leaf, 306, Slash, 120, 305, spruce or White, 307 “Pines,” 16, 30, 44, 117-118, 120, © 304-307, 342, 364. (See also j Pinus. Pinguicula elatior, 56, 159 lutea, 53, 57, 159 pumila, 53, 58, 150 ‘“‘Pink-root,”’ 178 Pinus, 75, 395, 3270e2o australis, 304 Bahamensts (?), 305 Caribea (?), 305 echinata, 103, 306 j Elliottii, 51, 54, 55, 63, 67, 75, 74,79; Si; O 5s) Lk dpe osmeue On 305, 308, 327, 331, 362-368, 386, 392 glabra, 15, 69, 72, 99, 103, 106, 307, 331 heterophylla, 305 mitis, 306 paupera, 307 palustris, 16, 19, 20, 42, 455 48; 51, 82, S807 aor 120, 304, 305, 327, 331, 360, 362, 368, 370, 376, 380, 388, 410 rigida serotina, 306 serotina, 51, 55, 63, 67, 89, 91, 93, 112, 300, 320, 331, 382 Teda, 42, 67, 60, J2.00%..0or 99, 103, 306, 329, 331, 400 Te@da serotina, 306 ‘*Pipsissewa,”’ 187 Piriqueta Caroliniana, 53, 201 “Pitcher Plants;{7232 > Pitchers, 238 Plagiochila Ludoviciana, 94, 320 undata, 94, 320 Planera aquatica, 16, 69, 71, 246, 31 Dianciemmene” 157 Plantago aristata, 114, 157 (sparsiflora), 330 (Platanus), 330 Plectrurus, 254 Pluchea bifrons, 76, 77, 79, 143 imbricata, 64, 67, 76, 142 petiolata, 142 “Plum,” Hog, 228; Wild, 228 Poa ambigua, 291 80, oe Bee tem peltatum, 104, 105, 239) 245 Podostigma pedicellata, 53, 174 pubescens, 174 Pogonia divaricata, 57, 254 ophioglossoides, 56, 91, 254 “* Poison Oak,’’ 210, 211 “Poison Sumac,’”’ 210 Polanisia tenutfolia, (86, 98), 235 POLEMONIACE, I71 Polycodium cesium, 45, 83, 98, 100, 183, 332 revolutum, 183, 332 Polygala, 54, 327, 328 Chapmani (?), 42, 53, 80, 216 cruciata, 57, 215 cymosa, 59, 64, 76, 215, 329 grandiflora, 47, 217 Harperi, 52, 216, 338, 346 incarnata, 46, 52, 216 lutea, 52, 57, 90, 91, 215 nana, 46, 52, 90, 215 polygama, 47, 216 Tamosa, 52, 50, 80, 215 setacea, 52, 216 POLYGALACEA, 88, 89, 215-217 POLYGONACEA, 89, 244-245 Polygonella Croomii, 83, 86, 98, 244, 333) 338 j gracilis, 85, 87, 245 sp., 86, 245 (Polygonum), 329 (Polymnia Uvedalia), 330 POLYPODIACEA, 105, 310-312 Polypodium incanum, 312, (334) polypodioides, 42, 72, 100, - (312, 334) Polyporus versicolor, 94, (321) Polypremun procumbens, 115, 179 Polystichum acrostichoides, 104, 247, 310 “‘Pond Cypress,” 75, (79, 308) Pontederia cordata, 67, 76, 77, 81, 266, 329 PONDERIACEZ, 266 “Poplar,” 238 (Populus), 329 Porella pinnata, 68, 73, 319 Portulaca pilosa, 115, 241 PORTULACACE, 241 “Post Oak,” 247 (Potamogeton), 75, 329 “Prickly Ash,’’fr9z “Prickly Pear,” 198 (Prinos lucidus), 208 Proserpinaca palustris, 64, 76, 193 pectinata, 64, 76, 80, 193 ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA. 671 sp. (intermediate), 57, 64, 193 Prunus angustifolia, 115, 228 Caroliniana, 99, 228 Chicasa, 228 serotina, 99, 228 umbellata, 228, 331! Psoralea canescens, 46, 49, 85, 222, 402 gracilis, 47, 52, 222 Lupinellus, 46, 84, 222 Pteridium aquilinum pseudocau- datum, 42, 45, 52, 85, 90, 91, 104, III, 312, 320, 362 ‘* Pteridophytes,”’ 88, 308-312, 323 Pterocaulon pycnostachyum, 142 undulatum, 46, 51, 90, 142 Ptychomitrium incurvum, 42, 316 PYROLACEZ, 187, 324 ““Queen’s Delight,” 213 Quercus, 88, 327, 328 alba, 72, 103, 247, 331, 382 aquatica, 249 . brevifolia, 16, 45, 83, 249, 320, 331, 362 Catesbzei, 16, 27, 45, 83, 86, 87, 97, 248, 249, 327, 331, 380, 388 cinerea, 249 digitata, 16, 45, 248 geminata, 42, 83, 98, 99, 247, 331, 332 laurifolia, 15, 97, 99, 100, 249, 331, 390 lyrata, 69, 71, 208, 24'7, 331 Margaretta, 16, 45, 83, 247, 329, 331 Marylandica, 16, (27), 45, 248, 331 Michauxil, 69, 71, 103, 247, 331 (minima), 330 minor, 103, 247 nigra (i.e., Marylandica), 27 nigra, 67, 69, III, 240, 331 Phellos, 72, 240, 331 pumila, 45, 51, 248, 333 (Virginiana), (20), 248, 330 “Rabbit Tobacco,”’ 142 Radula sp., 94, 319 ‘‘Ragweed,” 152 Raimannia laciniata, (115), 194 RANUNCULACEZ, 240 (Ranunculus), 329 “Rattan Vine,”’ 206 672 “Red Bay,” 201 “Redbud,”’ 206, 226 “Red Oak,” 248 “Red-shank,’’ 206 “*Reed,”’ 289 RHAMNACEZ, 206 (Rhapidophyllum Hystrix), 330 Rhexia, 39, 61, 327, 328 Alifanus, 51, 56, 80, 196 ciliosa, 52, 57, 91, 197 filiformis, 52, 58, 90, 96, 197 (Floridana), 330 glabella, 196 lutea, 56, 80, 197 Mariana, 107 stricta, 57, 76, 196, 197 (Virginica?), 196 Rhizogonium spiniforme, 94, 315 Rhus aromatica, 104, 210, 332 copallina, 45, 99, 103, III, 210, 332 radicans, 63, 72, I12, 211, 333 toxicodendron, 84, 100, 210, 332 Vernix, 63, 91, 210, 332 Rhynchospora, 61, 78, 289, 327, 328, 330 alba macra, 57, 281 axillaris, 56, 64, 76, 79, 280 Baldwinii, 56, 279 brachycheta, 279 (caduca), 330 Chapmani, 58, 281 ciliaris, 51, 56, 90, 96, 280 ciliata, 280 compressa, 59, 277 corniculata, 68, 76, 282 cymosa, 42, 278 distans, 96, 279 dodecandra, 98, 100, 278, 388 fascicularis, 76, 2'79 jascicularts trichoides, 279 filifolia, 76, 280 glomerata paniculata, 64, 67, 280 gracilenta, 57, 280 Grayil, 46, 84, 278 inexpansa, 58, 65, 277 leptorhyncha (?), 76, 280 (miliacea), 330 mixta, 2'77 oligantha, 56, 281 perplexa, 80, 278 plumosa, 42, 47, 281 pusilla, 281 rariflora, 57, 278 semiplumosa, 56, 281 SPECIAL INDEX. solitaria, 56, 279, 338 Torreyana, 52, 58, 278 Rhynchostegium serrulatum, 314 Richardia scabra, 114, I55 (Rosa), 329 ROSACEA, 228-231 “‘Rosemary,’’ 97, 211 Rotibellia ciliata, 302 corrugata, 302 TULOSA, 303 RUBIACEA, 155-157 Rubus cuneifolius, 231 nigrobaccus, 111, 231, 332 trivialis, 45, 231, 333 Rudbeckia foliosa, 111, 112, 140 hirta, 46, 140 Mohri, 57, 64, 76, 79, 140 nitida, 52, 58, 140 Ruellia humistrata, 47, 86, 166 Rumex hastatulus, 115, 244 Rynchospora, 277. (See Rhyncho- spora.) Sabal Adansonit, 272 glabra, 16; 263) 70,172 eee minor, 272 (Palmetto), 20 pumila, 272 Sabbatia, 39, 61, 327, 328 campanulata, 57, 80, 177 corymbosa, 178 decandra, 76, 177 Blhottii, 52, 90, 177 foliosa, 63, 67, I77 gentianoides, 122, 176, 338, 343. gracilts, 177 Harperi, 77, 346 lanceolata, 56, 1'78 macrophylla, 56, 178 paniculata, 47, 177 Sagina decumbens, 115, 241 Sagittaria graminea (?), 304 (latifolia), 331 Mohrii, 57, 64, 303 SALICACE, 251 Salix nigra, 69, 71, 251, 332, 376 Salvia azurea, 47, 85, 168 lyrata, 46, 52, 104, 168 Sambucus Canadensis, 114, 154 ‘“‘Sand-spur,”’ 227 Sanguinaria Canadensis, 104, 236, 245 rotundtfolia (?), 236 Sanicula Marilandica, 104, 191 SAPOTACE, I81 ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA. Sarothra gentianoides, 42, 86, 202 Sarracenia, 93 calceolata, 122, 233, 343 flava, 55, 60, 64, 91, 233) 329; 364, 366, 404 flava X minor, 58, 234, 406, 408 minor, 51, 55, 64, 80, 91, 232, 233, 329 minor X psittacina, 59, 234 psittacina, 55, 233 pulchella, 233 purpurea, 91, 234, 382 rubra, 58, 91, (233 variolaris, 232 SARRACENIACES, 232-234 ““Sarsaparilla,’’ 260 (Sassafras), 330 SAURURACE, 253 Saururus cernuus, 72, 76, 77, 253 “Saw Palmetto,’ 272 SAXIFRAGACEA, 232 Scapania nemorosa, 42, 68, 319 Schizophyllum commune, 94, 321 Schlotheimia Sullivantii, 68, 100, III, 316 Scirpus, 289, 330 ; (Americanus), 331 cylindricus, 82, 286 Eriophorum, 286, (289) (fontinalis), 331 (validus), 331 Scleria, 327, 328 Baldwinti, 76, 277 glabra, 47, 53, 85, 2'76 gracilis, 58, 76, 79, 277 hartella (?), 58, 276 Michauxii, (58), 2'76 pauciflora, 2'76 reticularis pubescens, 276 trichopoda, 56, 65, 276 triglomerata, 100, 104, 277 verticillata, 58, 2'76 Scierolepis uniflora, 76, 80, 82, I51 Scoparia dulcis, 114, 163 SCROPHULARIACEZ, 68, 160-166, 324-326 Scutellaria integrifolia, 169 lateriflora, 73, 169 Mellichampii, 104, 106, 169 multiglandulosa, 46, 168 pilosa, 169 Sebastiana ligustrina, 16, 70, 72, 99, 214, 332 “Sedge,’’ Broom, 301 Sscdeces wigs.) t22,.0330., (see also Cyperacee. ) 43 673 Selaginella, 36 acanthonota, 42, 85, 300, 380, 414 apus, III, 309 arenicola, 42, 309 SELAGINELLACE, 309 Sematophyllum adnatum, 313 Senecio tomentosus, 42, 43, 134 Serenoa serrulata, 36, 45, 51, 67, 7°, 79, 83, 90, 95, 99, 248, 272 Sericocarpus bifoliatus, 47, 84, 87, 144 tortifolius, 144 Seymeria tenutfolia, 162 ‘“‘Short-leaf Pine,” 306 Sida rhombifolia, 115, 204 Sieglingia ambigua, 291 silphium angustum, 141 Asteriscus angustatum. 47, 141 compositum, 141 lanceolatum (?), 141 Siphonychia, 340 Americana, 85, 242, 334 pauciflora, 85, 100, 242, 338, ensac Sisyrinchium, 294 Atlanticum, 57, 61, 257 Floridanum (?), 257 fuscatum (?), 257 “Slash Pine,” 120, 305 SMILACACEZ, 260 Smilax auriculata, 260, 333 Beyrichi1, 260 laurifolia,63, 67, 91-94, 260, 333 pumila, 15, 36, 46, 85, 98, 100, 104, 106, 111, 260 Walteri, 70, 260, 333 SOLANACE, 116, 170-171 Solanum, 116 : Carolinense, 115, 171 nigrum, 115, 170 rostratum, 115, I71I Solidago, 330 Boottii, 86, 100, 145 brachyphylla, 145 odora, 46, 84, 145, 147 tenuifolia, 145 Sophronanthe, 340 hispida, 52, 90, 96, 163 pilosa, 57, 164 Sorghastrum (Linneanum), 300 nutans, 47, 300 secundum, 47, 85, 300 Sorghum avenaceum, 300 (nutans), 300 secundum, 300 674 ‘Spanish Needles,’”’ 138 ‘‘Spanish Oak,” 248 Sparganium androcladum, 68, 304 ‘“‘Sparkleberry,’’ 182 Specularia perfoliata, 114, 153 Spermacoce hyssoptfolia, 155 Spermolepis divaricatus, 115, 189 Sphagnum, 61, 315 acutifolium, 318 cuspidatum, 94, 317 angustilimbatum, 96, 317 cymbifolium, 94, 317 Fitzgeraldi immersum, 96, 317 Garberi, 96, 317 Harperi, 96, 317, 346 macrophyllum, 65, 68, 76, 82, 317 tenerum, 92, 317 ‘“‘Spider Lily,” 257 Spigelia Marilandica, 104, 178 Spiranthes Beckii, 346 Spirogyra sp., 322 Sporobolus Curtissii, 52, 258, 293 ejuncidus, 293 Floridanus, 42, 53, 64, 80, 292 gracilis, 46, 52, 85, 203 quncues, 293 teretifolius, 56, 293, 338 “Spruce Pine,”’ 307 Stanleya gracilis, 235 Steinchisma hians, 298 Stemonitis sp., 322 Stenophyllus ciliatifolius, 47, 84, 283 Floridanus, 115, 116, 283 Warei, 84, 282 Stillingia aquatica, 75, 77, 213, 332 sylvatica, 45, 84, 213, 329 Stipa avenacea, 104, 294 Stipulicida setacea, 84, 87, 98, 241 Stokesia levis, 59, I51 Stylandra pumila, 175 Stylosanthes biflora, 46, 84, 220 STYRACACE, 180 Styrax pulverulenta, 55, 180, 332 grandifolia, 180, 332 * ““Sumac,’” 210 (Svida), 329 “Sweet Bay,” 198 “Sweet Gum,” 231 SYMPLOCACEZ, 181 Symplocos tinctoria, 42, 99, 100, 181, 332 Syngonanthus flavidulus, 51, 55, 90, 95, 268, 329 Syntherisma sanguinalis, 115, 116, 200) 08 SPECIAL INDEX. Talinum teretifolium, 42, 43, 241 : Taxodium distichum, 16,67, 69, 71, _ 307, 331, 376, 412 imbricarium, 55, 63, 67, 75-70, 81, TLL, £85) 308,032 pecs 332, 368-374, (378), 412, Ar4 sp. (intermediate), 67, 69, 307— 308, 400 “Tea Weed,” 204 Tecoma radicans, 42, 72, 157, 333 Tephrosia, 223 Tetragonotheca helianthoides, 140 Tetraplodon australis, 315 (Teucrium Nashii), 330 Thalictrum macrostylum, 104, 240 ‘“Thallophytes,”’ 126, 128, 320-323 Thaspium trifoliatum aureum, 189 THEACE®, 201 Thelia asprella, 42, 100, 314 I ihistle uaz ' Thuidium sp., 94, 314 Thyrsanthema semtflosculare, 52, (56), 133 Thysanella, 340 fimbriata, 85, 245 (Tilia), 329 Tillandsia usneoides, 266 Tipularia, 339 discolor, 100, 254 Tium apilosum, 47, 85, 222 intonsum, 4:7, 223 “Tobacco,” Rabbit, 142 Tofieldia racemosa, 55, 80, 263, 406 Trachelospermum difforme, 70, 72, 175) 333 a oe Tracyanthus angustifolius, 57, 91, 263 Tradescantia reflexa, 86, 266 rosea, 267 Tragia linearifolia, 46, 214 urens linearis (?), 214 Triadenum petiolatum, 72, 202 Virginicum, 202 | Trichelostylis autumnalis, 283 Trichostema lineare, 42, 47, 85, 169 Tricuspis, 291 ambigua, 291 cornuta, 291 Tridens ambiguus, 59, 79, 201 Trifolium repens, 115, 224 Trilisa odoratissima, 47, 51, 90, 95, 148 paniculata, 52, 56, 147, 148 (Trillium), 329 ie ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA. Triodia ambigua, 291 Elliotiw, 291 Triplasis, 339 Americana, 85, 291 cornuta, 201 f (Tubiflora Carolinensis), 147, 330 ) Lulip Pree,’ 238 “Tupelo Gum,” 192 “Turkey Oak,” 248, 249 TURNERACES, 201 (Typha), 329, (latifolia), 331 TYPHACEZ, 304 ce Tyty,’ ? 2 (oY) ULMACE, 246 Ulmus alata, 246 sp., 72, 246 UMBELLIFERZ, 188-191, 324, 325 Uniola latifolia, 104, 290 laxa, 68, 290 Uralepis, 291 cornuta, 291 Utricularia, 75 cornuta, 57, 158 inflata, 81, 159 juncea, 56, 158 macrorhyncha, 57, 1590 subulata, 42, 57, 91, 158 (Uvularia), 329 ¢ (Floridana), 15 (perfoliata), 330 VACCINIACEZ, 182-184, 324 Vaccinium Myrsinites (?), 182 nitidum, 45, 51, 90, 182, 332 sp., 98, 182 Verbascum Blattaria, 115, 166 Thapsus, 115, 166 Verbena bracteosa, 115, 1'70 carnea, 46, 85, 169 Carolina, Carolinensis, liniana, 170 VERBENACE®, 169-170 Verbesina (aristata), 330 Virginica, 104, 139 Vernonia, 39 angustifolia, 45, 53, 85, I51 (Noveboracensis ?), 151 oligophylla, 53, 151 sp., I51 Veronica peregrina, 114, 163 Viburnum nitidum, 63, 93, 154, 332 nudum, 63, 67, 91, 93, 154, 230, 329, 332 obovatum, 69, 72, 153) 332 Caro- 675 rufidulum (?), 154 rufotomentosum, 100, 103, 154, 332 (semitomentosum), 330 Viola, 330° denticulosa, 200, 338 lanceolata, 200 pedata, 199 primulefolia, 111, 199 villosa, 199 sp., 68, 199 VIOLACE2, 199-200 PAVAOIeiS. a EEOO ‘Virginia Creeper,’’ 205 VITACEA, 205 Vitis zstivalis, 103, 205, 333 bipinnata, 205 rotundifolia, 93, 98, 99, 103,- III, 205, 333, 384 Sp., 205 Warea, 340 cuneifolia, 85, 235 “Water Elm,” 246 “Water Grass,” 283 “Water Lily,” 237 ““Water Oak,” 249 ‘“White Clover,”’ 224 ““White-heads,” 267 ‘“White Oak,” 247 SaNMinitep PD intet ano. 7 ““Wild Cherry,” 228 “Wild Grape,” 205 “Wild Oats,’’ 300 “Wild Plum,” 228 Willoughbeya, Willoughbya, 149 “Willow,’’ 251 “Willow Oak,” 249 Wiullughbea, 149 Willugbeya, 148 (Willughbeja), 148 Windsoria, 291, ambigua, 291 “Wire-grass,”’ 48, 118, 295 Wistaria frutescens, 63, 70, 223, 333 ““Witch Hazel,” 232 “Woodbine,” 153 Woodwardia angustifolia, 311 Virginica, 311 Xanthium strumarium, 114, 152 Xolisma, 184. (See Cholisma.) XYRIDACEA, 97, 268-270 Gan, Gi, O75 Bey S28 ambigua, 65, 270 Baldwiniana, 56, 96, 123, 268 Se Gained brevifolia, 52, 90, 96, 2'70 brevijolia, 269 bulbosa minor, 270 Elliottii, 90, 95, 269 : fimbriata, 57, 76, 82, 90, 91, 95, 260 flexuosa, 52, 59, 260 neglecta, 58, 96, 270 . platylepis, 58, 91, 2'70 Smalliana, 76, 269 toria, 269 sp., 76, 96, 269 SPECIAL INDEX. sp., Gal 80 | Sp., 67; oe 270° ; arrow,” “* Yellow Tessas! Yucca filamentosa, ge be Zizia arenicola, 189, 3: ae Bebbii, 104, 189 Zornia bracteata, 85, 221, Zygadenus angustijolius, 26 glaberrimus, 90, 92, 26250 lewmanthoides, 263 NAMES OF PERSONS, ETC. This index is intended to include references to all names of persons (and a few scientific organizations or bureaus) mentioned in the work, except where they are merely cited as authors of genera, species, and synonyms. Abbot, John, 25, 122, 155, 228, 399; 343 Adams, Chas. C., 348 Ames, Oakes, 346 Andrews, Miss E. F., 130 Arnold Arboretum, 129 Baker, E. G., 346 Baldwin, Wm., 122, 146 Balfour, I. B., 356 Barnhart, J. H., 259 Bartram, John, 121, 235(?) Bartram, Wm., 121, 122, 348 Beadle, C. D., 345, 346 Beal, W. J., 348 Beck von Mannagetta, 348 Berlin Botanical Garden, 129 Beyrich, Carl (or Karl), 122 Bicknell, E. P., 257 Billings, F. H., 266 Blankinship, J. W., 36, 349 Botanical Gardens, Berlin, Edin- burgh, Kew, Missouri, New York, Paris, Vienna, 129 Boynton, C. L., 124, 209, 345, 346 Boynton, F. E., 345 Bray, Wm. L., 13, 305, 349 Brendel, F., 349 British Museum, 129 Britton, E.G. (Mrs. N. L.), 313 Britton, N. L., 8, 132, 144, 147, 162, 96 Britton, W. H., 32, 143,173, 202, 224, 230, 301, 349 Brotherus, V. F., 315 Brown, Addison, 132 Burns, Frank, 21 Bush, B. F., 346 Canby, W. M., 123 Candolle, see De Candolle Catesby, Mark, 17, 121, 349 Chapman, A. W., 150, 212, 260, 300 Clarke, H. L., 349 677 Clements, F. E., 34, 61, 340, 355, nS OOF am Clifford, Julia B., 254 Clute, W. N., 346 ees we oe 20 Ollie, J], Wig TOS, S49, Bho, Coulter, S. M., 350 SHO Coville, F. V., 8, 346, 350 Cowles, H.C., 63, 106, 348-351, 354— 56 Croom; He 29122) .204,) ante one 239, 249, 350 Curtis's Bot. Mag., 26, 211, 253 Curtiss, A. H., 123, 212, 216, 261 Cuthbert, A., 89, 150, 180, 213, 222, 22. BAG, BR, DUR. Be, AC), 295, 298, 300 Dall, W. H., 9, 18, 21, 344 Darlington, Wm., 122 Davis, W. M., 9, 350, 351 De Candolle, A., 351 Dei CandolleyAS Ps 235) Deri eels De Soto, H., rar De Vries, H., 212 Dodge, R. E., 9 ID aS, Jia Blog BAC Drayton, John, 17, 351 Drude, Oscar, 351 Earle, F. S., 9, 266 Edinburgh Royal Bot. Gard., 129 Elliott, Stephen, 17, 26, 122, 167, 245, 271, 275, 300, 340, 343 IDI, Go Won B07) Engler, A., 126, 2509, 351 Iwas, Jal AN, & Fendler, A., 351 Fernald, M. L., 149, 286 Field Columbian Museum, 129 Fippin, E. O., 346 Fisher, W. R., 356 678 Flagg, Wilson, 8 Flahault, C., 351 Foerste, Aug. F., 17, 344 Gannett, H., 345 Ganong, W. F., 349, 351 Gaskill, A., 351 Gattinger, A., 8, 43, 198, 200, 206, 254-257, 200, 352 Georgia, Dept. of Agriculture, 344, 84534 7 Georgia, Geological Survey, 9, 17, 21, 345 Graebner, P., 357 Gray, Asa, 5, 123, 154, 225, 3390, Aen BED. Gray Herbarium, 129 Greene, E. L., 184, 236 Griffen, A. M., 347 Grisebach, A. H. R., 352 Groom, Percy, 356 Haddon, A. C., 352 Harris, G. D., 18, 344 Harris} J), C2 cox Harshberger, J. W., 10, 352, 353 Harvard University, 129 Haynes, Caroline C., 313 Hazen, T. E., 322 leleillgse, BL A 28S, BOR Henderson, J. T., 344, 345 Herty, CH, 118 Hildebrand, F., 353 Euleard’ ENE ise toes 220. 282, 344, 353 Iebills e Ish Bev, Bie ipehicocica Anos zZioge sin Infotel, J, 5 Ase ola, heo., 132) 202) 230, 205, 267, 288, 290 Hooker, W. J., 185, 351 Hopkins, M. H., 190 Howe, M. A., 322 Humboldt, A. von, 5, 156 Jackson, James, 122, 343 Jackson, Joseph, 353 Jiames ibe 355) Janes) 7B. 344, 3245 Kearney; ie whe cos iSO. na arm ao), WA LAS. LSS LSS mL ion LoOn Sit, UGS, USH, UO, LOB, WO, SPECIAL INDEX. 204, 207-200, 231, 23a .eaaF 246, 240, 250, 252, 260, 261, 293, 294, (311), 313, 354 Kerner von Marilaun, 354 Kew Botanic Garden, 129 Knoblauch, E., 357 Knowlton, F. H., 354 Kraemer, H., 354 Le Conte, J. E., 258 Lindley’s Bot. Reg., 185 Linneus, C., 5, 338-340, 342 Little, George, 344 Livingston, B. E., 354 Lioyd,. F. E., 20, £46, sneer Loesener, Th., 208 Loughridge, R. H., 21, 344 Macbride, T. H., 9 MacDougal, D. T., 354 Macfarlane, J. M., 234 MacMillan, C., 127, 349, 355 Maxon, W. R., 9, 123 McCallie, S. W., 17, 21, 345 McCarthy, G., 355 McGee, W J, 355 Meehan, T., 148, 151, 219, 241, 271 Merriam, C. Hart, 355 Merrill, E. D., 293, 208 Mettauer, H. A., 116 Michaux, A., 121, 122, 234, 339, 340 Michaux, F. A., x7, 25.9nem Mill, H. R., 9 Missouri Botanical Garden, 129 Mohr, C., 9, 14, 15, 2020, aeuiaeee 127, (130; E23. LeAnn use oer £64, 172, LOZ 20 54a seeeisie 260, 266, 278, 284, 303, 305, 319, 320, 355 ‘Morong, T., 255, 260 Muhlenberg, H., 275 Murrill, W. A.) 304) eames Nash, G. V., 48, 260, 355 Neisler, H. M., 243 Nesbitt, R. T., 345 New York Botanical Garden, 129 Northrop, A. R. (Mrso Joi) prem 143, 149, 16%, 277, 2545 025eR 260 ; Nuttall, Thomas, 122, 141, 235, 343 Oemler, A. G., 122 NAMES OF PERSONS, ETC. Oglethorpe, James, 121 Oliver, F. W., 354 Olsson-Seffer, P., 34, 355 Paris Botanical Garden, 129 Pinchot, G., 355 Pollard, C. L., 123, 261, 346, 356 Porcher, F. P., 8 Pound, Roscoe, 351, 356 Prantl, K., 126, 259 Pumpelly, R., 17, 345 Ravenel, H. W., 225 Raymond, R. W., 8 Reed, H. S., 356 Rennert, Rosina J., 188 Robertson, C., 356 Robinson, B. L., 131, 208, 356 ose wi Ne, 123, 258, 345, 347 Russell, C., 356 Ruth, A., 268 sargent, C.S., 132, 154, 187, 250, y 346 Schimper, A. F. W., 356 Shaler, N.S., 17, 356 Shaw, G. R., 305 Shimek, B., 356 Sita, O, 43, 123, 126, 130, 132, 153, (187), 197, 217, 233, 243, 247, 249, 250, 263, 266, 296, 340, 345, 346 Smith, E. A., 8, 14, 26, 357 Smith, J. E., 122, 343 Spalding, V. M., 357 Stevens, ©: By, 345, 347 679 Taylor, E. B. (Mrs. A. P.), 174, 180, 310 Tidestrom, Ivar, 312 Torrey, John, 339 Tracy, S. M., 20, 123, 313, 354 Tully, Wm., 171 University of Nebraska, 129 Upham, W., 355, 356 U.S. Census, Tenth, 21, 344 U.S. Dept. of Agriculture, 123, 346 Bureau (or Division) of Fores- WAY UB HAG BOO, BBity BOR Bureau of Soils, 83, 346, 347 Weather Bureau, 29, 346 U.S. Geological Survey, 21, 344- 346 U.S. National Herbarium, 123, 129 Vaughan, T. W., 17, 19 Vienna Botanical Garden, 129 Vries, see De Vries Walter, Thomas, 340 Warming, Eug., 357 Warnstorf, C., 346 Watson, Sereno, 127 Watson, T. L., 9 - White, C. A., 357 White, George, 122, 344 Wiegand, K. M., 265 Wood, Alphonso, 212 Woodworth, J. B., 357 Wright, R. F., 345, 347 Zon, Raphael, 357 < Tae LIST OF IMPORTANT CORRECTIONS Part I, Article No. 1 PAGE 1, line 2, for September read November. Biri PES) a ke) tead iz). 46, “ 38, insert the figure 2 before Asclepias humistrata. 62, last footnote, insert footnote index (2) and change 21 to 25. 68, line 5, for Fimbrystylis read Fimbristylis. 82, “ 32, for (21) read (26). 84, “ 23, “ cilliatifolius read ciliatifolius. 84, “ 32, “ Carolainina read Caroliniana. OS a 3S, 20 mead a7. to4, ‘“ 23, “ Uniolia read Uniola. 116, “ 2, “ spermm read spermum. Tags 8 Bey oe iaseyal, ut 52, o.- 15) 1 Grace ceaduGray. 192, 12, after OGEECHEE Lime, insert (Pl. X XI, fig. 1). 227, ‘“ 12, for MIMOSAEZ tead MIMOSACEZ. 227, ‘* 23, ‘“ KRAMERIAEZ read KRAMERIACEA. 234, 22, insert at end of line:—236. 1906. ** 3, for Charleston read Charlton. 271, 5, after THomaAs insert County. 271, lines 6 and 7, for Nympha eorbiculata read Nymphea orbiculata. 2472, punctuation marks at ends of lines 1 and 3 are interchanged. 287, line 9, insert C. before Martindalei. 2903, ‘ 21, for eyunicdus read ejuncidus. 299, ‘° 29, “‘ peecox read precox. 318, line 5, insert 2:280. 1803. after FI. 328, in explanation of table, for 18 read 19. 333, in table at top of page, second bracket has slipped down one sp 346, line 5, for 111:27 read 11:127. 354, 910,902 read is: 355, last line, for 83 read 1-83. 680 ace. SPECIAL INDEX to Part II, ArTicLE 3 THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES Acanthadei, 445 Acanthopteroidei, 444, 452, 4 Acanthopterygii, 452, 501 Acentrophorus, 464 Acipenseroidei, 444, 448, 462 Actinistia, 448, 459 Actinopteri, 444, 448, 460 4itheospondyli, 448, 465 Albulide, 449, 469 Alepocephalide, 471 Amblyopside, 488 Amioidei, 466 Amphipnoide, 482 Anacanthini, 452, 498 Anguillavus, 481 Apodes, 450, 478 Archencheli, 481 Arthrodira, 447 Arthrognathi, 447 Aspidorhynchi, 448, 465 Asterospondyli, 446 Atherinide, 497 Aulopoidea, 487 96 Batidoselachii, 446 Belonide, 492 Belonorhynchide, 463 Berycide, 501 Blennoidea, 455 Callionymoidea, 455 Carencheli, 481 Carps, 474, 477 Catfishes, 474, 475 Catopteride, 463 Catostomide, 478 Caudal Fin, Evolution of, 507, 508 Centrolophide, 502-504 Cestraciontide, 446 Characins, 473 Cheirolepis, 463 Chimeeroidei, 447 Chirocentridz, 470 Chirothricide, 488 Chondrostei, 448, 462 Cladistia, 448, 459 681 Cladoselachii, 445 Classification, natural, 440, 441 Clupeide, 471 Cobitide, 478 Cobitopside, agr Cods, 498 Coelacanthide, 448, 457, 459 Cohorts, 443, 444, 448, 4409 Colocephali, 481 Crossognathide, 498 Crossopterygii, 444, 448, 456 Cyclospondyli, 446 Cyprinide, 478 Cyprinodontide, 488 Dalliidz, 451, 490 Diplomysteide, 476 Diplospondyli, 445 Dipneusti, 447 Dorypterus, 463 Echeneis, aat Eel-like orders, 450, 478 Eel-like vertebrates, 506, 507 Eels, 478 Elasmobranchii, 445 Elopide, 449, 468 Enchelycephali, 481 Enchodontide, 488 Esocide, 488, 489 Eventognathi, 438, 474, 477 Evolution of: chondrostean ganoids, 463 crossopterygil, 457 eel-like vertebrates, 506 ganoids and teleosts, 460-461 hippocampsu, 495 “holostean” ganoids, 463 mesichthyous orders, 487-496 physostomous into physoclist- ous fishes, 484, 492 (see also swimbladder under struc- tures) spiny-rayed orders, 496-506 teleosts from ‘‘holostean”’ ganoids, 466 682 SPECIAL Evolution of structures: ims, jl, FES, AGO, AS, ARS, 460, 461, 464, 466, 471, 472, 484, 486, 496 pectoral and pelvic girdles, Die F3Ex, AGT, Oy. nA oS wai 484-486, 496 scales) pln xx SO Mas eloo: 463, 465, 466, 472, 496 skull and jaws, pl. xxx, 457, 460, 462, 464, 468, 472, 496 swimbladder, pl. xxx, 457, 467, 468, 484 vertebral column, pl. xxx, 457, 460, 461, 464, 466, 496 Exoccetide, 492 Fierasferide, 483 Flying fishes, 491 Gadide, 498 Galaxiidz, 489 Ganoidei, 444, 448, 462 Gasterosteus, 495 Ginglymodi, 448, 466 Gonorhynchide, 471 Gymnarchide, 470 Gymnonoti, 474 Halecomorphi, 448, 466 Halosaurus, 483 Haplistia, 448, 4509 Haplomi, 451, 484, 487 Hemibranchii, 493 Heterocerci, 448, 462 Heterognathi, 449, 473 Heteromi, 482-484 Holocephali, 447 Holoptychide, 448, 459 ““Holostean” Ganoids, 461, 464 Hyodontide, 449, 470 Hypostomides, 505 Ichthyology, in America, 438; in England, 438, 439, 440 Ichthyotomi, 445 Icosteidz, 503, 504 Infraclass, 443, 444 Iniomi, 451, 484, 485, 487 Isospondyli, 444, 449, 467 Lamnoidea, 446 Lamprididz, 500 Lepidosteoidei, 444, 448, 464 Leptolepidide, 449, 466 Lophobranchii, 493 Lyomeri, 482 INDEX. Macruride, 499 Malacopteroidei, 444, 449, 467 Mastacambelide, 505 : Masticura, 446 | Mesichthyes, 444, 451, 484 | Mesoganoidei, 448, 465 Morays, 479 Mormyridz, 449, 470 Mugilide, 497 Nematognathi, 438, 475 Nomeide, 502-504 Nomeiformes, 502 Notacanthus, 483 Notopteridez, 449, 470 Oligopleuride, 449, 466 Opahs, 500 Opisthomi, 505 ““Order,’’ content of term, 442 Ostariophysi, 440, 444, 449, 467, 473 Osteoglosside, 449, 469 Osteolepide, 448, 456, 458, 459 Paleoniscide, 462, 463 Pegaside, 505 Percesoces, 485, 494, 497 Percomorphi, 502 Percopside, 451, 485 (sand-rollers), 490 Pholidophoride, 448, 465, 466 Phractolemus, 470. Phylogeny and classification, 441 Phylogeny of the Actinopterous Fishes, pl. xxix Physoclistous fishes, 484, 492 Physostomous fishes, 467, 484, 492 Plagiostomi, 445 Plectospondyli, 477, 478 Pleuracanthides, 445 Pleuropterygii, 445 Peeciliide, 488 Polynemide, 498 Polyodontide, 448, 462 Polypteride, 448, 457-459 Prosarthri, 446 Protospondyli, 448, 465 Pycnodonti, 448, 465 Remoras, sucking disc of, 441 Rhine, 446 Rhinobati, 446 Rhizodontide, 448, 459 Salmonide, 471 Salmoperce, 451, 485, 490, 491 Stomiatide, 471 THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES. Scombresocide, 493 Synentognathi, 451, 491 Scopeloids, 487 Syngnathide, 493 Scylliorhinoidea, 446 Selenichthyes, 455, 500 Soft-rayed fishes, 467 Sphyrenide, 497 Spiny-finned fishes, 496, 501 Stephanoberycide, 490 Tarrasiide, 448, 459 Tectospondyli, 446 Teleostei, 444, 440, 466 Teleostomi, 444, 447 Thoracostraci, 444, 452, 493 Stromateide, 502, 504 Torpedines, 446 Sturgeons, 463 Superorder, 443, 444 Umbride, 488 Svmbranchii, 482 Urenchelys, 479 683 General Index to Volume XVII Names of Authors and other Persons in Heavy-Face Type. Titles of Papers in SMALL CAPS ABSENCE OF HELIUM FROM CARNO- TITE, ON THE, E. P. Adams (Abstract), 578 Acanthias, 421 Acanthodide, 422, 425, 430, 432 Actinolite schist, 533 Active Members, Election of, 563, 577, 588, 594, 603, 605, 623, 624 Adams, E. P., ON THE ABSENCE oF HELIUM FROM CARNOTITE (Abstract), 578 Adams, M. W., Analysis by, 517 ADIRONDACKS, PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE, James F. Kemp (Ab- stract), 589 AFTERGLOW, VARIATIONS IN THE DURATION OF THE, PRODUCED BY CHANGES OF POTENTIAL AND FREQUENCY OF OSCILLA- TION OF THE DISCHARGE, C. C. Trowbridge (Title), 593 ALLOLOBOPHORA, THE PROPHASES OF THE First MATURATION SPINDLE GF, Katherine Foote (Abstract), 610, 613 Alnoite dike, 511 ANZASTHESIA, CENTRAL, Eve Movement, Dodge (Title), 587 Analyses of Maine rocks, 526, 531, 534, 539, 542, 544, 547: 549, 559 554, 556 Analysis of peridotite, Penn., 517 ANATOMY, THE IDEAS AND TERMS or MopERN PHILOSOPHICAL, H. F. Osborn (Title), 592 ANIMAL LIFEIN PERU AND BOLivia, A. F. Bandelier, 627 Annual Address of. the President, 633 hae Meeting, 627 Anorthosite, 527, 531 Anthony, Wm. A., Active Member, SAH DuRING Raymond Anthropology and Psychology, Sec- tion of, Meetings, 569, 576, 587, 593, 605, 615 ANTHROPOLOGY OF THE JEWS OF New York, Maurice Fishberg, (Abstract), 576 ANTHROPOMETRIC WORK AT THE St. Louis Exposition, R. S. Woodworth and F. G. Bruner (Abstract), 576, 577 ANTs, THE PROGRESSIVE ODOR OF, AND ITS INFLUENCE IN THEIR ComMUNAL Lire, Adele M. Fielde (Title), 627 ANTS THAT RatsE MusHROOMS, W. M. Wheeler (Abstract), 567 ARE MENTAL PROCESSES IN SPACE? W. P. Montague (Abstract), 615, 620 Arend, Francis J., Active Member, 88 Armstrong, S. T., M.D., Active Member, 588 ASBESTOS OF BELVIDERE Moun- TAIN, VERMONT, SERPENTINES AND ASSOCIATED, V. F. Mar- sters (Abstract), 573 Associate Members, Dues and priv- ileges of, 564 Associate Membership, Constitu- tional amendment providing for, 563 Astronomy, Physics, and Chemistry, Section of, Meetings, 568, 584, Oz OO2F 604, 614 ATLANTIC Coast Province, A NEw TERTIARY FAUNA FROM THE, Thomas C. Brown (Abstract), 594, 596 AUDIBILITY, RaciAL DIFFERENCES IN THE UPPER LimiT oF (Ti- tle), F. G. Bruner, 587 Augen-gneiss, 536 Aurora, N. Y., boulders, 512 Auvergnose, 543) 550 685 686 Avery, S. P., Jr., Active Member, 588 Bakewell, C. M., ConcerRNING Em- PIRICISM (Title), 615 Bandelier, A. F., ANtmAL LIFE IN Perv AND Botivia (Title), 627 Barnett, V. H., cited, 511, 512 Baskerville, Charles, Active Mem- ber, 563; Fellow, 628 Baxter, M., Jr., Active Member, 623 Beckhard, Martin, Active Member, 623 Beebe, C. William, Fellow, 628 Beerbachite, 554 BELVIDERE MOUNTAIN, VERMONT, THE SERPENTINES AND ASSO- CIATED ASBESTOS oF, V. F. Marsters (Abstract), 573 Bergstresser, Charles M., Active Member, 577 Berkey, Charles P., INTERPRETATION oF CERTAIN INTERGLACIAL CLAYS AND THEIR BEARINGS UPON MEASUREMENT OF GEOLO- Gic Time (Abstract), 573, 574 PaL#oGrRApHy oF NortH AMER- 1cA DuriInGc Mrp-Orpovicic Time (Abstract), 589, 591 Billings, Elizabeth, Active Member, 603 Biology, Section of, Meetings, 567, 376, 583, 592, 599, 003, 610, 2 Birp FLicut, PRINCIPLES or, May Cline (Title), 627 Birps, CERTAIN INSTINCTS IN, F. M. Chapman.(Title), 627 Bishop, H. R., Active Member, 588 BiT OF QUATERNARY GEOLOGY, A, J. J. Stevenson (Abstract), 606, 60 Blake, T. W., Active Member, 623 Bouivia, ANIMAL Lire In, A. F Bandelier (Title), 627 Boothbay, 519 Branner, J. C., cited, 513 BripGErR Basin, THE TURTLES OF THE, O. P. Hay (Abstract), 592 BriEF REPORT OF STATISTICS RE- LATING TO SEX-INHERITANCE IN Motus, H. E. Crampton (Title), 610 Brieson, Frank, Active Member, 623 Britton, N. L., President, 628 Brown, E. H., Active Member, 594 GENERAL INDEX. Brown, Thomas C., A New TErR- TIARY FAUNA FROM THE AT- LANTIC COAST PROVINCE (Ab- stract), 594, 596 BrucITE, DETERMINATION OF, AS A RocK-CoNSTITUENT, A. A. Julien (Abstract), 578, 581 Bruner, F. G., and Woodworth, R. S., CoLOR PREFERENCES (Ab- stract), 569, 570 ANTHROPOMETRIC WORK AT THE St. Louis Exposition (Ab- stract), 576, 577 Bruner, Frank G., RaciaL DIFFER- ENCES IN THE UPPER LIMIT OF AuDIBILITY (Title), 587 Bumpus, Hermon C., Councilor, 628 Bush, Wendell E., Active Member, 624 Business Meeting of the Academy, 577, 599, 593, 602, 605, 622 Byrnes, Esther F., TRANSITIONAL STAGES AND VARIATIONS IN CERTAIN SPECIES OF CYCLOPS (Abstract), 567 Cameron, E. H., VARIATIONS IN Sunc Tones (Title), 587 Canandaigua, N. Y., boulder, 512 Canfield, R. A., Active Member, 577 CaNon DrtasBLo METEORITE, Mots- SANITE, A CARBON SILICIDE FROM THE, George F. Kunz (Abstract), 572, 586 Cape Cop, THE GLACIAL GEOLOGY or NANTUCKET AND, J. Howard Wilson (Abstract), 625 CARNOTITE, ON THE ABSENCE OF HeLium From, E. P. Adams (Abstract), 578 Cattell, J. McKeen, MEASUREMENT oF ScIENTIFIC Merit (Ab- stract), 615, 619 PRACTICE AND TRAINING (Title), . 88 Cand: ANSTHESIA DURING EYE MovemMENT, Raymond Dodge (Title), 537 Centrophorus, 421 CERTAIN INSTINCTS IN Birps, F. M. Chapman (Title), 627 Cestracion (Heterodontus japoni- cus), 416, 418, 419, 421, 422, 423, 424, 426, 428, 431 Champollion, André, Active Mem- ber, 623 Cuance, W.L. Sheldon (Title), 588 GENERAL INDEX. Chapman, F.M., CerTAIN INSTINCTS IN Birps (Title), 627 CuHtIna, RELATION OF, TO THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS, Berthold Laufer (Title), 5093 Chlamydoselachus anguineus, 416, 420, 424 CHROMOSOMES IN HEMIPTERA, OB- SERVATIONS ON THE, E. B. Wilson (Abstract), 600 Chrysostom, Brother, TEmMPERA- MENT AS AFFECTING PHILOSO- PHICAL THOUGHT (Abstract), 615, 620 Cladoselache, 424, 432 Clarkson, Banyer, Active Member, SUa Cline, May, Active Member, 603 PRINCIPLES OF BirD FLIGHT (Title), 627 COALS OF SPITZBERGEN, THE, John J. Stevenson (Abstract), 565 Coelacanthus, 425 Cole, L. G., RECTILINEAR RONTGEN Rays (Abstract), 584, 586 CoLor PREFERENCES, Woodworth, R. S., and Bruner, F. G. (Ab- stract), 569, 570 COMBUSTION IN FLAMES, RELATION BETWEEN IONIZATION AND, L. L. Hendren (Title), 602 CONCERNING Empiricism, C. M. Bakewell (Title), 615 Condit, William L., Active Member, 623 Conn, J. M., Active Member, 624 CONSCIOUSNESS, RELATIONAL THE- ORIES oF, W. P. Montague (Abstract), 569, 571 CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SouTHERN Maine, A, I. H. Ogilvie, 519 CONVERGENCE, MOVEMENTS OF, Charles H. Judd (Title), 587 Corats, EARLY STAGES OF SOME Patz#zozoic, C. E. Gordon (Abstract), 594, 596 CORNWALL INE Ye. | STRUCTURAL RELATIONS AND ORIGIN OF THE Limonite Beps at, C. A. Hartnagel (Abstract), 594, 507 CORRELATION AND SELECTION, H. E. Crampton (Abstract), 600, 601 Corresponding Secretary, of the, 629 Crampton, H. E., BR1EF REPORT OF Report 687 STATISTICS RELATING TO SEx- INHERITANCE IN Morus (Title), 610 CORRELATION AND SELECTION (Abstract), 600, 601 Vice-President, 628 Crane, Zenas, Life Member, 588 Crittenden Co., Ky., dike, 513 Cromwell, Lincoln, Active Member, 624 Culgin, Guy W., Active Member, 603 Cyclops, 567 C. brevispinosus, 568 C. parcus, 567, 568 C. signatus, 567 C. viridus, 567 C. viridus (var. americanus), 567 CycLops, TRANSITIONAL STAGES AND VARIATIONS IN CERTAIN SPECIES OF, Esther F. Byrnes (Abstract), 567 Dahlgren, B. E., DEMONSTRATION or New INVERTEBRATE Mop- ELS IN THE AMERICAN MusEUM (Title), 610 Darton, N. H., cited, 510 DEFICIENT CHILDREN, MENTAL GrowTH IN, Naomi Norsworthy Giitle) sas, Delano, Warren, Jr., Active Mem- ber, 623 de Milhau, Louis J., Active Member, 624 DEMONSTRATION OF New INVERTE- BRATE MODELS IN THE AMERI- can Museum, B. E. Dahlgren (Title), 610 DESCRIPTION OF THE Mopoc, Scorr County, Kansas, METEORITE, George F. Kunz (Abstract), 625, 627 DETERMINATION OF BRUCITE AS A RocK-CONSTITUENT, A. Julien (Abstract), 578, 581 Diaibaseyas2io. 527605474 Oso, 554 DiaMonD, THE JAGERSFONTEIN, George F. Kunz (Abstract), 565 Dikes (Maine), 520, 527, 547, 553, 4 Diller, J. Shy GUC, Gra, S02 Diorite, 527, 533 Diplacanthide, 422, 425, 430, 432 Dipnoi, 424 688 Dodge, Raymond, CENTRAL AN&S- THESIA Durinc Eye Move- MENT (Title), 587 Dodge, R. E., Corresponding Secre- tary, 628 Dosalane, 533 Dougherty, H. L., Active Member, 88 Dublin, L. I., THe History oF THE GERM CELLS IN Pedicellina americana (Abstract), 582, 583 Dunite, 546 Dunose, 546 Dunscombe, George E., Life Mem- ber, 588 DuPont, H. A., Active Member, 594 Durand, John S., Active Member, 624 Dwight, Rev. M. E., Active Member, 588 East Canada Creek, N. Y., dikes, 5Ir Edenborn, Penn., dike near, 514 Editor, Report of the, 632 Elliott Co., Ky., dike, 512 Emerson, B. K., cited, 512 Emmet, C. Temple, Active Member, 603 EMPIRICISM, CONCERNING, C. M. Bakewell (Title), 615 Engler, A., Active Member, 588 Evans, Dr. Samuel M., Active Mem- ber, 594 EvoLuTION OF SOME DEVONIC SPIRIFERS, A. W. Grabau (Ab- stract), 573, 575 Exhibition of Photographs of Mois- sanite Crystals Sent by Pro- fessor Moissan, George F. Kunz, 58 Anion of the U. S. Geological Survey Radium Exhibit, which was shown at the St. Louis Exposition, George F. Kunz, 584, 586 EXPERIMENTS RELATING TO THE CONDUCTIVITY OF POWDERS AT HicH TEMPERATURES, H. C. Parker (Abstract), 568 Eve Movement, CEntTRAL AN@&S- THESIA Durinc, Raymond Dodge (Title), 587 Eye Movements, VISION AND Lo- CALIZATION DurING RaApPIp, R. S. Woodworth (Title), 615, 617 GENERAL INDEX. Fairchild, Charles S., Active Mem- ber, 588 Fayette Co., Penn., dike, 515 Ferguson, Mrs. Farquhar, Active Member, 577 Fielde, Adele M., THE PROGRESSIVE Opor oF ANTS AND 1Ts IN- FLUENCE IN THEIR COMMUNAL Lire (Title), 627 Finley, John H., Councilor, 628; Fellow, 628 Fishberg, Maurice, Active Member, 563; ANTHROPOLOGY OF THE JEWS OF New York (Abstract), 576 Fellow, 628 FLAMES, RELATION BETWEEN [oNn- IZATION AND COMBUSTION IN, I. L. Tuffs (Title), 602 Foote, Miss Katherine, THE Pro- PHASES OF THE First MATURA- TION SPINDLE OF ALLOLO- BOPHORA (Abstract), 610, 613 Fracker, G. Cutler, TRANSFERENCE oF PRactTIceE (Title), 587 Gabbro, 527, 536 Gabbro-diorite, 554 Gambusia, 430 Ganoids, 425 Garland, James A., Active Member, 624 Gaseous Ions at Low PRESSURES, RATE OF RECOMBINATION OF, L. L. Hendren (Title), 602 Gates, Penn., dike near,. 514 Geology and Mineralogy, Section of, Meetings, 564, 572, 578, 580, 594, 603, 606, 625 GEORGIA, A PHYTOGEOGRAPHICAL SKETCH OF THE ALTAMAHA Grit REGION OF THE COAST- AL Puain oF, Roland M. Harper, 1 Germanares, 536 Gibbs, Mrs. Theo. Kane, Active Member, 577 GLACIAL GEOLOGY OF NANTUCKET AND CAPE Cop, THE, J. Howard Wilson (Abstract). 625 Glaciation (Maine), 524 GLACIATION OF MANHATTAN Is- LAND, Notes ON THE, A. A. Julien (Abstract), 606, 609 GOLD MINING IN THE SOUTHERN AP- PALACHIANS, Thomas T. Read (Abstract), 625, 626 GENERAL INDEX. Grabau, A. W., EVOLUTION oF SoME DEVONIC SPIRIFERS (Ab- stract), 573, 575 TYPES OF SEDIMENTARY OVERLAP (Abstract), 594, 508 Granite, 531 Granite-gneiss, 527 Greeff, Ernest F., Active Member, 588 Gregory, W.K., THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES, 437 Index, 681 Grubenmann,U., cited, 557 Guggenheim, Wm., Active Member, 5388 Gyracanthus, 432 Hamilton, F. M., A StupDy oF THE READING Pause (Abstract), 615, 617 Hammond, James B., Active Mem- ber, 577 Haplacanthus, 432 Harper, Roland M., Associate Ac- tive Member, 603 A PHYTOGEOGRAPHICAL SKETCH OF THE ALTAMAHA Grit REGION OF THE COASTAL PLAIN OF GEORGIA, 1 Corrections, 680 Index to Plant Names, 659 Index to Persons, etc., 677 Harriman, E. H., Active Member, 588 Hartnagel, C. A., STRUCTURAL RELATIONS AND ORIGIN OF THE LIMONITE BEDS AT CORNWALL, N. Y. (Abstract), 594, 597 Haupt, Dr. Louis, Active Member, 588 Hay, O. P., THE TURTLES OF THE BRIDGER Basin (Abstract), 592 Heinze, Arthur B., Active Member, Sai HeLiIum, ON THE ABSENCE OF, FROM CARNOTITE, E. P. Adams (Abstract), 578 HEMIPTERA, OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHROMOSOMES IN, E. B. Wilson (Abstract), 600 Hendren, L. L., Rate or RECOM- BINATION OF GASEOUS IONS AT Low PRESSURES (Title), 602 Heptanchus, 421, 425 Hess, Selmar, Active Member, 588 Heteracanthus, 432 44 689 Heterodontus japonicus (see Ces- tracion) Hewett, Edgar L., THz Lire anp CULTURE OF THE TEWA IN- DIANS IN PRE-SPANISH TIMES (Title), 605 Hill, Robert T., Active Member, 563 THE REPUBLIC oF Mexico; Its PHYSICAL AND Economic As- PECTS (Title), 603 Hilyard, George B., Active Member, Si Hinchman, Mrs. C. S., Active Mem- ber, 577 Hinton, John H., death of, 623 History oF THE GERM CELLS IN Pedicellina Americana, THE, L. I. Dublin (Abstract), 582, 583 Hoe, Robert, Jr., Active Member, 594. Holzmaister, L. V., Active Member, 624 Hopkins, George B., Life Member, 88 Hornblende-gabbro, 554 Hornblende schist, 527. 543, 554 Hovey, Edmund Otis, Vice-Presi- dent, 628 Hubbard, Thomas H., Life Member, 588 Hulshizer, J. E.,§Active Member, 624 HumaN IMPLEMENTS, RECENT Dis- COVERY OF, IN AN ABANDONED RIVER CHANNEL IN SOUTHERN OrEGoN, J. F. Kemp (Ab- stract), 606 Hunter, G. W., Associate Active Member, 624 Huntington, Archer M., Life Mem- ber, 588 IpaHo, ON MONAZITE SAND FROM, George F. Kunz (Title), 573 IpEAS AND TEMPERAMENTS, Dick- inson S. Miller (Abstract), 560, (e) eee TERMS OF MODERN PHIL- OSOPHICAL ANATOMY, THE, Henry F. Osborn (Title), 592 Index, special, to plant names, 659 special, to mames of persons, etc., in Part I, 677 to article on Teleostomous Fishes, 681 690 INDIAN TEXTILES OF THE SOUTH- WEST, SYMBOLIC DESIGNS OF THE, George H. Pepper (Title), 593 Initiation fee, Change of By-Laws eliminating, 563 INTERGLACIAL CLAYS AND THEIR BEARINGS UPON MEASURE- MENTS OF GEOLOGIC TIME, IN- TERPRETATION OF CERTAIN, Charles P. Berkey (Abstract), 573, 574 INTERPRETATION OF CERTAIN IN- TERGLACIAL CLAYS AND THEIR BEARINGS UPON MEASURE- MENT OF GEOLOGIC TIME, Charles P. Berkey (Abstract), 573, 574 i ? Invertebrate Models in the Ameri- can Museum, Demonstration of new, B. E. Dahlgren, 610 IONIZATION AND COMBUSTION IN FLAMES, RELATION BETWEEN, I. L. Tufts (Title), 602 Tron Ore, New Sources oF SUPPLY OF, James F. Kemp (Abstract), 565, 566 Irving, Walter, Active Member, 624 Ithaca, N. Y., dikes, 511 JAGERSFONTEIN DIAMOND, THE, George F. Kunz (Abstract), 565 James, F. Wilton, Associate Active Member, 578 NoTEs ON THE MINNEWASKA RE- GION OF ULSTER County, N. Y. (Abstract), 578, 580 Jews or New York, ANTHROPOL- OGY OF THE, Maurice Fishberg (Abstract), 576 Jones, Walter R. T., Active Mem- ber, 588 Jones, William, THE ReE.Licious CONCEPTION OF THE MANITOU OF THE CENTRAL ALGONKINS, (Abstract), 593 Judd, Charles H., Movements oF CONVERGENCE (Abstract), 587 RADICAL EMPIRICISM AND Wunpt’s PuHiLosopHy (Ab- stract), 569, 572 Judd, Edward K., Associate Active Member, 605 Julien, A. A., DETERMINATION OF Brucite As A RocK-ConstTIiT- UENT (Abstract), 578, 581 GENERAL INDEX. NOTES ON THE GLACIATION OF ManuaTTan' Istanp (Ab- stract), 606, 609 Jupiter, The Sixth Satellite of, 584, 585 Kelyphite, in peridotite, 517 Kemp, James F., cited, 510, 512, 513 New Sources oF SUPPLY OF Iron Ore (Abstract), 565, 566 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE ADIRON- DACKS (Abstract), 589 PROBLEM OF THE METALLIFEROUS VEINS, THE (Presidential Ad- dress), 633 Kemp, J. F., and Ross, J. G., A PERIDOTITE DIKE IN THE COAL MEASURES OF SOUTHWESTERN PENNSYLVANIA, 509-518 RECENT INTERESTING Dis- COVERY OF Human IMPLE- MENTS IN AN ABANDONED RIVER CHANNEL IN SOUTHERN OREGON, 606 Kiernan, Patrick, Active Member, Sil Kraus, E. H., cited, 510 Kunz, George F., DESCRIPTION OF THE Mopoc, Scotr County, Kansas, METEORITE (Ab- stract), 625, 627 Exhibition of the U. S. Geo- logical Survey Radium Exhibit which was shown at the St. Louis Exposition, 584, 586 Exhibition of Photographs of Moissanite Crystals Sent by Professor Moissan, 589 THE JAGERSFONTEIN DIAMOND, ° THELARGESTEVER FOUND: THE History or Its CuTtTine AND ULTIMATE DISPOSITION, 565 Moissanite, A CARBON SILICIDE FROM THE CANON DIABLO METEORITE (Title), 572 On MONAZITE SAND FROM IDAHO (Title), 573 On ZIRCON FROM NEAR LAWTON, OKLAHOMA (Title), 573 Lambert, Adrian S., Active Member, 624 Lassenose, 531 Laufer, Berthold, THE RELATION OF CHINA TO THE PHILIPPINE IsLanps (Title), 593 SS GENERAL INDEX. Lawrence, John B., Active Member, LAWTON, OKLAHOMA, ON ZIRCON FROM NEAR, George F. Kunz (Title), 573 Lee, F. S., TEMPERATURE AND Muscie Faticue (Abstract), 582, 584 Lefferts, Marshall C., Active Mem- ber, 588 Lepidosiren, 430 LeRoy, Alfred, Active Member, 589 Librarian, Report of the, 632 LIFE AND CULTURE OF THE TEWA INDIANS IN PRE-SPANISH TIMES THE, Edgar L. Hewett (Title), 605 Limsps, VERTEBRATE, ORIGIN OF, Raymond C. Osburn, 415-436 LimMonitEe Beps AT CoRNWALL, N. Y., STRUCTURAL RELATIONS AND ORIGIN OF THE, C. A. Hartnagel (Abstract), 594, 597 Lincolnose, 540 LINGUISTIC STANDARDS, F. Lyman Wells (Abstract), 615, 616 Loeb, James, Life Member, 589 LowER COLUMBIA VALLEY, STONE SCULPTURES AND IMPLEMENTS FROM THE, Harlan I. Smith (Title), 593 Lucas, F. A.. WHALES AND WHALING ON THE COAST OF NEWFOUND- LAND (Abstract), 582, 583 Ludlowville, N. Y., dikes, 511 Littgen, Walter, Active Member, 589 Mac Donald, John E., Active Mem- ber, 624 Mac Dougall, Robert, ORGANIC LEVELS IN THE EVOLUTION OF THE Nervous System (Ab- stract), 569, 571 Note on NumpBer Hasit (Ab- stract), 569, 571 Vice-President, 628 Maine, A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY or SouTHERN, I. H. Ogilvie, 519 Malchite, 554 MamMatia, THE RECLASSIFICATION or THE, H. F. Osborn (Ab- stract), 610, 611 MANHATTAN IsLAND, NOTES ON THE GuaciATION or, A. A. Julien (Abstract), 606, 609 691 Manheim Bridge, N. Y., dikes, 511 MANITOU OF THE CENTRAL ALGON- KINS, THE RELIGIOUS CONCEP- TION OF THE, William Jones (Title), 593 Marling, Alfred E., Active Member, 624 Marsters, V. F., THE SERPENTINES AND ASSOCIATED ASBESTOS OF BELVIDERE MouNTAIN, VER- MONT (Abstract), 573 Martin, Bradley, Life Member, 578 Masontown quadrangle, Penn., 514 Matson, G. C., cited, 511, 512 Mexwell Francis T., Active Mem- er, McMillin, Emerson, Treasurer, 628 MEASUREMENT OF SCIENTIFIC Merit, J. McKeen Cattell (Ab- stract), 615, 619 Melitite in peridotite, 518 MENTAL PROCESSES IN SPACE, ARE? W.P. Montague(Title), 615, 620 METALLIFEROUS VEINS, THE PROB- LEM OF THE, James Furman Kemp, 633 METEOR TRAINS, Charles C. Trow- bridge (Title), 614 METEORITE, DESCRIPTION OF THE Mopoc, Scott County, Kan- sas, George F.Kunz (Abstract), 625, 627 Metz, H. A., Active Member, 594 Mexico, THe ReEpusLic or: Its PHYSICAL AND Economic As- PECTS, Robert T. Hill (Title), 603 Middle Run, Penn., dike, 514 Mip-Orpovicic Time, PaLzo- GRAPHY OF NortTH AMERICA Durine, Charles P. Berkey (Abstract), 589, 591 Miller, Dickinson $S., IDEAS AND TEMPERAMENTS (Abstract), _ 569, 570 ; Millroy, Alfred Taggart, Active Member, 603 Miner, Roy W., Active Member, 563 MINNEWASKA REGION OF ULSTER County, N. Y., NoTEes on THE, F. Wilton James (Ab- stract), 578, 580 Mitchell, S. A.. THE SIxTH SATEL- LITE OF JUPITER, 584, 585 PURPOSES AND PLANS OF THE SoLtar EcLips—E EXPEDITIONS or AUGUST, 1905, 593 692 Mopoc, Scotr County, Kansas, METEORITE, DESCRIPTION OF THE, George F. Kunz (Ab- stract), 625, 627 Moissanite, A CARBON SILICIDE FROM THE CANON DIABLO METEORITE, George F. Kunz (Title), 572 Moissanite Crystals, Exhibition of Photographs of, Sent by Pro- fessor Moissan, George F. Kunz, 589 MoONAZITE SAND FROM IDAHO, ON, George F. Kunz (Title), 573 Monism, Types or, W. P. Mon- tague (Title), 588 Monroe, W. S., SMELL DiscRIMI- NATION OF STUDENTS (Ab- stract), 615, 616 Montague, P., ARE MENTAL PROCESSES IN SPACE? (Ab- stract), 615, 620 RELATIONAL THEORIES OF CON- SCIOUSNESS (Abstract), 569, 571 Types or Monism (Title), 588 Monzonite, 536 Monzonose, 540 Morewood, George B., Active Mem- ber, 624 Morris, Lewis R., Active Member, 594 Motus, BriEF REPORT OF STA- TISTICS RELATING TO SEX- INHERITANCE IN, H. E. Cramp- ton (Title), 610 MovEMENTS OF CONVERGENCE, Charles H. Judd (Title), 587 MuscLte FATIGUE, TEMPERATURE AND, F. S. Lee (Abstract), 582, 584 Mustelus, 416, 421, 424 NANTUCKET AND CAPE Cop, THE GLACIAL GEOLOGY OF, é Howard Wilson (Abstract), 625 NERVOUS SYSTEM, ORGANIC LEVELS IN THE EVOLUTION OF THE, Robert Mac Dougall (Abstract), 569, 571 NEWFOUNDLAND, WHALES AND WHALING ON THE COAST OF, Frederic A. Lucas (Abstract), 582, 583 New SourRcES OF SUPPLY OF IRON OrE, James F. Kemp (Ab- stract), 565, 566 GENERAL INDEX. New TERTIARY FAUNA FROM THE ATLANTIC Coast PROVINCE, A, Thomas C. Brown (Ab- stract), 594, 596 Norsworthy, Naomi, MENTAL GROWTH IN DEFICIENT CHIL- DREN (Title), 587 NortH AMERICA, PALZOGRAPHY oF, Durinc M1p-Orpovicic Time, Charles P. Berkey (Ab- stract), 589, 591 Note on NuMBER Hasit, Robert Mac Dougall (Abstract), 560, 571 NoTES ON THE GLACIATION OF MANHATTAN IsLAND, A. A. Julien (Abstract), 606, 609 NOTES ON THE MINNEWASKA RE- GION OF ULSTER County, N. Y., F. Wilton James (Abstract), 578, 580 Notidanide, 420, 424 NuMBER Hapit, Note on, Robert Mac Dougall (Abstract), 560, 571 Nunn, R. J., Election as Active Member, 624 O’Brien, J. M., Election as Active Member, 624 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHROMO- SOMES IN HEmIPTERA, E. B. Wilson (Abstract), 600 Cttinger, J. P. J.» Election as Active Member, 624 Ogilvie, I. H., A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE, 519 ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES, THE, W.K. Gregory, 437 ORGANIC LEVELS IN THE EVOLU- TION OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM, Robert MacDougall (Abstract), 569, 571 Organization, Charter, and List of Members, i—xxxvi ORIGIN OF VERTEBRATE LimBs, THE Raymond C. Osburn, 415-436 Osann, A., cited, 558 Osborn, Henry Fo Member of Fin- ance Committee, 623. 628 IDEAS AND TERMS oF MopDERN PHILOSOPHICAL ANATOMY, THE (Title), 592 RECLASSIFICATION OF THE MAM- MALIA, THE (Abstract), 610, 611 Png GENERAL INDEX. Osborn, Wm. Church, Active Mem- ber, 589 Osburn, Raymond C., THE ORIGIN OF VERTEBRATE LimBs, RE- CENT EVIDENCE UPON THIS PROBLEM FROM STUDIES ON PRIMITIVE SHARKS, 415-436 Owen, Juliette A., Life Member, 624 PALZOGRAPHY OF NorRTH AMERICA DURING Mrp-Orpovicic TIME, Charles P. Berkey (Abstract), 589, 591 PaL#ozoic CoRALS, EARLY STAGES oF Some, C. E. Gordon (Ab- stract), 594, 596 Parish, Henry, Active Member, 589 Parker, H. C., EXPERIMENTS RE- LATING TO THE CONDUCTIVITY oF Powers sat HicH TeEm- PERATURES (Abstract), 568 Parsell, Henry V. A., Active Mem- ber, 578 Parsons, Mrs. Edwin, Active Mem- ber, 578 Peary Arctic Club, Resolutions re- garding, 564 Pedicellina Americana, THE HIs- TORY OF THE GERM CELLS IN, L. I. Dublin (Abstract), 82, 583 Pell, Miss Frances, Active Member, 578 Pennsylvania, peridotite dike in, 509 Pepper, George H., SymBoric De- SIGNS OF THE INDIAN TEXTILES OF THE SOUTHWEST (Title), 593 PERCEPTION OF LINGUISTIC SOUNDS, F. Lyman Wells (Title), 587 Perfemane, 546 Peridotite (Maine), 527 PERIDOTITE DIKE IN THE COAL MEASURES OF SOUTHWESTERN PENNSYLVANIA, A, J. F. Kemp and J. G. Ross, 509-518 Perkins, William H., Life Member, 578 Perofskite in peridotite, 517 Persalane, 531 Peru AND Bo.LiyiA, ANIMAL LIFE IN, A: F. Bandelier (Title), 627 Petrology (Maine), 526 PHILOSOPHICAL THOUGHT, TEM- PERAMENT AS AFFECTING, 693 Brother Chrysostom (Abstract), 615, 620 Phipps, Henry, Active Member, 624 Physiography (Maine), 522 PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE ADIRON- DACKS, James F. Kemp (Ab- stract), 589 PHYTOGEOGRAPHICAL SKETCH OF THE ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF THE COASTAL PLAIN OF Grorcia, A, Roland M. Earper, 1 Pickhardt, Carl, Active Member, 624 Pierce, Henry Clay, Active Mem- ber, 603 Pigrzic BAROMETER, A POCKET ForRM OF THE, Ernest R. von Nardroff (Abstract), 584, 585 Pike Co., Ark., dike in, 513 Pinchot, Gifford, Active Member, 578 Fellow, 628 Pittsburg coal, cut by dike, 516 Placerose, 545 Pleuracanthus, 425 Pleuropterygidae, 420, 422, 425, 430 Boece ForM OF THE PiEzic Ba- ROMETER, A, E. R. von Nard- roff (Abstract), 584, 585 Poggenburg, H. F., Active Member, 8 5°9 Poor, Charles Lane, Editor, 623, 628 Poor, Henry W., Active Member, 8 Pose IC: C., Member of Finance Committee, 623, 628 PowpbErRs, EXPERIMENTS RELATING TO THE CONDUCTIVITY OF, AT HicH TEMPERATURES, H. C. Parker (Abstract), 568 PRACTICE AND TRAINING, J. Keen Cattell (Title), 588 PRACTICE, TRANSFERENCE OF, G. Cutler Fracker (Title), 587 President, Annual Address of the, 633 PRINCIPLES OF Birp Fiicut, May Cline (Title), 627 Pristiurus, 422 PROBLEM OF THE METALLIFEROUS VEINS, THE, James Furman Kemp (Annual address of the president), 633 Mc- 694 Procter, William, Active Member, 624 PROGRESSIVE OpoR oF ANTS AND ITs INFLUENCE IN THEIR Com- MUNAL Lire, THe, Adele M. Fielde (Title), 627 PROPHASES OF THE First MatTurRsA- TION SPINDLE OF ALLOLO- BOPHORA, Miss Katherine Foote (Abstract), 610, 613 Psephurus gladius, 425 PURPOSES AND PLANS OF THE SOLAR EcLipse EXPEDITIONS oF AU- GUST, 1905, S. A. Mitchell (Title), 593 Pyne, M. Taylor, Life Member, 589 QUATERNARY GeEoLoGy, A Bit of, J. J. Stevenson (Abstract), 606, 609 RactAL DIFFERENCES IN THE UPPER Limit oF AUDIBILITY, Frank G. Bruner (Title), 587 RADICAL EMPIRICISM AND WUNDT’S Puitosopuy, Charles H. Judd (Abstract), 560, 572 Radium Exhibit, Exhibition of the United States Geological Sur- vey, George Frederic Kunz, 584, 586 Raja, 425 RATE OF RECOMBINATION OF GASE- ous lons at Low PRESSURES, L. L. Hendren (Title), 602 Read, Thomas T., Gotp MINING IN THE SOUTHERN APPALACHIANS (Abstract), 625, 626 READING ALOouD, STUDiEs IN, L. A. Weigle (Title), 588 RECENT INTERESTING DISCOVERY or HumMAN IMPLEMENTS IN AN ABANDONED RiveR CHANNEL IN SOUTHERN OREGON, James F. Kemp (Abstract), 606 RECLASSIFICATION OF THE Mawm- MALIA, THE, Henry F. Osborn (Abstract), 610, 611 Recording Secretary, Report of the, 629 RECTILINEAR RONTGEN Rays, L. G. Cole (Abstract), 584, 586 Reilly, F. James, Active Member, 624 RELATION BETWEEN JONIZATION AND COMBUSTION IN FLAMES, I. L. Tufts (Title), 602 GENERAL INDEX. RELATION OF CHINA TO THE PHILIP- PINE ISLANDS, THE, Berthold Laufer (Title), 593 RELATION OF INTENSITY OF SEN- SATION TO ATTENTION, M. Tsukahara (Abstract), 560, 57° RELATIONAL THEORIES OF CoN- SCIOUSNESS, W. P. Montague (Abstract), 569, 571 RELIGIOUS CONCEPTION OF THE MANITOU OF THE CENTRAL ALGONKINS, THE, William Jones (Title), 593 Report of the Corresponding Secre- tary, 629 Editor, 632 Librarian, 632 Recording Secretary, 629 Treasurer, 631 REPUBLIC OF Mexico; Its PuHysi- CAL AND Economic ASPECTS, THE, Robert T. Hill (Title), 603 Riker, Samuel, Active Member, 589 Robert, Samuel, Active Member, 578 Roberts, W. T., Active Member, 563 Rogers, James H., Active Member, 624 RONTGEN Rays, RECTILINEAR, L. G. Cole (Abstract), 584, 586 Ross, J. G., J. F. Kemp and, A PERIDOTITE DIKE IN THE COAL MEASURES OF SOUTHWESTERN PENNSYLVANIA, 509-518 St. Louis EXPOSITION, ANTHROPO- METRIC WORK AT THE, R. §&. Woodworth and F. G. Bruner (Abstract), 576, 577 St. Louis Exposition, Exhibition of the U. 5. Geological Survey Radium Exhibit which was showniat the, George F. Kunz, 584, 586 Salfemane, 543 Schist, 526 Schmelzel, Miss Jane E., Active Member, 589 Schneider, P. F., cited, 510, 511 Schott, Charles M., Active Member, 624 Screntiric Merit, MEASUREMENT or, J. McKeen Cattell (Ab- stract), 615, 619 GENERAL INDEX. Scyllium, 422 Seabury, George J., Active Member, 578 SEDIMENTARY OVERLAP, TYPES OF, A. W. Grabau (Abstract), 594, 598 SELECTION, CORRELATION AND, H. E. Crampton (Abstract), 600, 601 SENSATION, RELATION OF INTEN- SITY OF, TO ATTENTION, M. Tsukahara (Abstract), 569, 570 Serpentine, Syracuse, N. Y., 509 SERPENTINES AND ASSOCIATED As- BESTOS OF BELVIDERE Moun- TAIN, VERMONT, THE, V. F. Marsters (Abstract), 573 SEX-INHERITANCE IN Motus, BRIEF REPORT OF STATISTICS RELAT- ING TO, H. E. Crampton (Title), 610 Sheldon, W. L., Cuance (Title), 588 Sherwood, George H., Active Mem- ber, 563; Fellow, 628 Sitkose, 533 SIXTH SATELLITE OF JUPITER, THE, S. A. Mitchell (Abstract), 584, 585 SMELL DISCRIMINATION OF STU- DENTS, W. S. Monroe (Ab- stract), 615, 616 Smith, Harlan I., StonE ScuLp- TURES AND IMPLEMENTS FROM THE LOWER COLUMBIA VALLEY (Title), 593 Smith, W. Wheeler, Active Mem- ber, 624 smyth, C. H., Jr., cited, 509, 511 Snook, Samuel B., Active Member, 624 SOLAR EcLipsE EXPEDITIONS OF AUGUST, 1905, PURPOSES AND PLANS OF THE, S. A. Mitchell, 593 SRUNGE, PERCEPTION OF LINGUIS- Tic, F. Lyman Wells (Title), 587 SOUTHERN APPALACHIANS, GOLD MINING IN THE, Thomas T. Read (Abstract), 625, 626 Spinax, 416, 418, 410, 420, 421, 422, 424, 428 SPIRIFERS, EVOLUTION OF SOME Devonic, A. W. Grabau (Ab- stract), 573, 575 SPITZBERGEN, THE COALS oF, John J. Stevenson (Abstract), 565 695 STANDARDS, Lineutstic, F. Lyman Wells (Abstract), 615, 616 Stevenson, A. E., Associate Active Member, 603 Stevenson, J. J.. A Bir or Qua- TERNARY GEOLOGY (Abstract), 606, 609 THE COALS OF SPITZBERGEN (Abstract), 565 STONE SCULPTURES AND IMPLE- MENTS FROM THE LOWER Co- LUMBIA VALLEY, Harlan I. Smith (Title), 593 Straus, Isador, Active Member, 624 Striz, 524 STRUCTURAL RELATIONS AND ORI- GIN OF THE LIMONITE BEDS AT CoRNWALL, N. Y., C. A. Hart- nagel (Abstract), 594, 597 STUDENTS, SMELL DiscRIMINATION or, W. S. Monroe (Abstract), 615, 616 STUDIES IN READING ALOUD, L. A. Weigle (Title) 588 STUDY OF THE READING PAUSE, A, F. M. Hamilton (Abstract), 615, 617 SYMBOLIC DESIGNS OF THE INDIAN TEXTILES OF THE SOUTHWEST, George H. Pepper (Title), 593 Syracuse, N. Y., Serpentine of, 509 Taylor, Henry E., Active Member, 624 TELEOSTOMOUS FisHES, THE OR- DERS OF, W.K.Gregory, 437 TEMPERAMENT AS AFFECTING PHIL- OSOPHICAL THOUGHT, Brother Chrysostom (Abstract), 615, 620 TEMPERAMENTS, IDEAS AND, Dick- inson S. Miller (Abstract), 569, (e) Teneo cueen AND MuscLtEe Fa- TIGUE, F. S. Lee (Abstract), 582, 584 Tewa INDIANS IN PRE-SPANISH Times, THE LIFE AND CULTURE OF THE, Edgar L. Hewett (Title), 605 Time, INTERPRETATION OF CERTAIN INTERGLACIAL CLAYS AND THEIR BEARINGS UPON MEAS- UREMENTS OF GEOLOGIC, Charles P. Berkey (Abstract), 573) 574 Tonalose, 535 696 TONES, VARIATIONS IN SUNG, E. H. Cameron (Title), 587 Torpedo, 416 Tower, Ralph W., Librarian, 628 Nomination as Librarian, 623 TRAINING, PRACTICE AND, J. Mc- Keen Cattell (Title), 588 TRANSFERENCE OF PRACTICE, G. Cutler Fracker (Title), 587 TRANSITIONAL STAGES AND VARI- ATIONS IN CERTAIN SPECIES OF CycLtops, Esther F. Byrnes (Abstract), 567 Treasurer, Report of the, 631 Trowbridge, Charles C., ‘Vice-Pres- ident, 628 METEOR TRAINS (Title), 614 Nomination as Vice-President, 622 VARIATIONS IN THE DURATION OF THE AFTERGLOW, PRODUCED BY CHANGES OF PoTENTIAL AND FREQUENCY OF OSCILLATION OF THE DiscHARGE (Title), 593 Tsukahara, M., THE RELATION OF INTENSITY OF SENSATION TO ATTENTION (Abstract), 560, 57° Tufts, I. L., RELATION BETWEEN IONIZATION AND COMBUSTION IN FLameEs (Title), 602 TURTLES OF THE BRIDGER BASIN, THE, O. P. Hay (Abstract), 592 Types or Monism, W. P. Montague (Title), 588 TYPES OF SEDIMENTARY OVERLAP, A. W. Grabau (Abstract), 594, 598 Umptekose, 541 van Brunt, Jeremiah R., Active Member, 624 van Hise, C. R., cited, 558 van Siclen, Matthew, Associate Active Member, 605 Vanuxem, L., cited, 509, 511 van Wyck, Robert A.,, Member, 624 VARIATIONS IN SUNG TONES, E. H. Cameron (Title), 587 VARIATIONS IN THE DURATION OF THE AFTERGLOW, PRODUCED BY CHANGES OF POTENTIAL AND FREQUENCY OF OSCILLATION OF THE DiscHarGE, C. C. Trowbridge (Title), 593 Active GENERAL INDEX. VERMONT, THE SERPENTINES AND ~ ASSOCIATED ASBESTOS OF © BELVIDERE MounNrTAIN, V. F. Marsters (Abstract), 573 7 VISION AND LOCALIZATION DURING Rapip Eyre Movements, R. S. Woodworth (Abstract), 615, 617 von Nardroff, E. R., A Pocket Form OF THE PiEzIC BAROMETER (Abstract), 584, 585 Vredenburgh, William H., Active Member, 624 Warburg, Paul M., Active Member, 57 WaTER, THE MAGNETIC SUSCEP- TIBILITY OF, A. P. Wills (Ab- stract), 568 ! Weigle, L. A.. STUDIES IN READING ~ ALoup (Title), 588 ; Welbourn, Reno B., Active Mem- ber, 605 Wells, F. Lyman, LiIncuistTic STANDARDS (Abstract), 615, 616 PERCEPTION OF LINGUISTIC Sounps (Title),587 WHALES AND WHALING ON THE Coast oF NEWFOUNDLAND, F. A. Lucas (Abstract), 582, 583 Wheeler, W. M., ANTS THAT RAISE MusHrooms (Abstract), 567, 568 Recording Secretary, 628 White, Horace, Active Member, 578 Williams, G. A., cited, 509 Wills, A. P., THE Macnetic SuscEP- TIBILITY OF WATER Gxeetnce | 568 Wilson, E. B., OBSERVATIONS ON | THE CHROMOSOMES IN HpMIP- THERA (Abstract), 606 Wilson, J. H., Active Member, 563 Tur PLEISTOCENE BEDS OF SAN- KATY Heap, NANTUCKET (Ab- stract), 594 THE GLACIAL GEOLOGY oF Nan- TUCKET AND CaPE Cop (Ab- stract), 625 Wood, Mrs. Cynthia A., Memiber, 589 Woodworth, R. S., and Bruner, F. G., Cotor PREFERENCES (Ab- stract), 569, 570 Active GENERAL INDEX. 697 ANTHROPOMETRIC WORK AT THE St. Louis Exposition (Ab- stract), 576, 577 Woodworth, R. S., Vision anp Lo- CALIZATION DURING RAPID EYE Movements (Abstract), 615, 617 Wunpt’s PHILOSOPHY, RADICAL EMPIRICISM AND, Charles H. Judd (Abstract), 569, 572 de Ybarra, A. M. Fernandez, Ac- tive Member, 603 ZIRCON FROM NEAR LAWTON, OKLA- HOMA, ON, George F. Kunz (Title), 573 PUBLICATIONS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Lyceum of Natural History 1818-1876] The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz:— (1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain the scientific contributions and reports of researches, together with the records of meetings, annual exhibitions, etc. © A volume of the Annals will in general coincide with the calendar year and will be distributed in parts. The price of cur- rent issues is one dollar per part or three dollars per volume. Author’s reprints are issued as soon as the separate papers are printed, the dates appearing above the title of each paper. . (2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to monographs relating to some particular department of science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II, to Zodlogical Memoirs, etc. The price is one dollar per part, as issued. All publications will be sent free to Fellows and Active Mem- bers. The Annals will be sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them. Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discon- tinued with the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the Annals. Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back num- bers of any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to THE LIBRARIAN New York Academy of Sciences American Museum of Natural History New York I ) Xv - _ CONTENTS OF VOL. XVII, PA ART. Charter, Constitution, By-Laws, and Members 6. Bumpus, HermonC. Record of Meetings, 1905 Special Indexes to Part I, Article No.1. | Corrections to Part I, Article: . ea Cae Special Index to Part II, Article No.3 . General Index to Volume... ae aus a ie) r peel 5) Vv Ne % Hel ned “@ aes e, “7 i op SpE ae sultce fi o & Me arage Sere Sree laa ae as Zs. ae i 2 oi Wb ce a g i e Rs i lt wie ‘alg me aa I - $ 5 Se ane se? Eee aM os %. et, yet i — Hae fF etee ok PAS, 1.28 He, Beet h eet Bonk pssets fe He S i) Nears p ciiemotse f EE incrons Why | wai sae 7A cre # erie Alta f foo Or ah a 4ESEN %, EGRESS : =)” 3 2) Sy < SATE Vaies ip ae Fae vs & — Bg, Me: INC iu is sey te || i il Se ON ail 2! A me ae ene a HEE ME Gey A, exes An o hy ee sg e. oats a eke q oA; leat eee yd waa i a Pesce e, ce Lees LY 3 9088 01309 1118